Changeset 302 for CUA/book.xhtml
- Timestamp:
- Jul 31, 2007, 1:39:58 PM (18 years ago)
- File:
-
- 1 edited
-
CUA/book.xhtml (modified) (74 diffs)
Legend:
- Unmodified
- Added
- Removed
-
CUA/book.xhtml
r157 r302 1 1 <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> 2 2 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> 3 4 5 6 7 3 8 <head> 4 <meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> 5 <title /> 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 <meta content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" http-equiv="content-type" /> 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 <title></title> 28 29 30 31 32 33 6 34 </head> 35 36 37 38 39 7 40 <body> 8 <h1>NOTICES<</h1> 41 42 43 44 45 46 <h1>NOTICES</h1> 47 48 49 50 51 52 Library of Congress Catalog Number: 92-85439<br /> 53 54 55 56 57 58 <br /> 59 60 61 62 63 64 ISBN: 1-56529-170-0<br /> 65 66 67 68 69 70 <br /> 71 72 73 74 75 76 Published by Que Corporation<br /> 77 78 79 80 81 82 11711 N. College Avenue<br /> 83 84 85 86 87 88 Carmel, IN 46032<br /> 89 90 91 92 93 94 <br /> 95 96 97 98 99 9 100 <h2>Edition Notice</h2> 10 First Edition (December 1992)<br /> 11 SC34-4289-00 and This edition replaces and makes obsolete the previous 101 102 103 104 105 106 <span style="font-weight: bold;">First Edition (December 107 1992)</span><br /> 108 109 110 111 112 113 <br /> 114 115 116 117 118 119 This edition replaces and makes obsolete the previous 12 120 editions, <span style="font-style: italic;">Systems 13 121 Application … … 20 128 User 21 129 Interface 22 Design,Systems 130 Design, </span> 131 SC34-4289-00 and<span style="font-style: italic;"> Systems 23 132 Application 24 133 Architecture … … 31 140 Reference</span>, 32 141 SC34-4290-00.<br /> 142 143 144 145 146 33 147 <br /> 148 149 150 151 152 34 153 Order publications through your IBM representative 35 154 or the IBM branch … … 37 156 address below. 38 157 <br /> 158 159 160 161 162 163 <br /> 164 165 166 167 168 39 169 A form for comments appears at the back of this publication. If the 40 170 form has been removed, address your comments to: 41 171 <br /> 42 IBM Corporation Department T45 P.O. Box 60000 Cary, North Carolina 43 27512-9968 U.S.A. 172 173 174 175 176 44 177 <br /> 178 179 180 181 182 183 IBM Corporation<br /> 184 185 186 187 188 189 Department T45 <br /> 190 191 192 193 194 195 P.O. Box 60000 <br /> 196 197 198 199 200 201 Cary, North Carolina 202 27512-9968 <br /> 203 204 205 206 207 208 U.S.A. 209 <br /> 210 211 212 213 214 215 <br /> 216 217 218 219 220 45 221 You can fax comments to (919) 469-7718. Comments can also be sent 46 222 electronically to IBM by using the following methods: 47 223 **DELETED**<br /> 224 225 226 227 228 48 229 <br /> 230 231 232 233 234 49 235 When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a non-exclusive right 50 236 to use and distribute the information in any way it believes 51 237 appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. 52 238 <br /> 239 240 241 242 243 244 <br /> 245 246 247 248 249 53 250 <span style="font-weight: bold;">© 54 251 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1989, 1992. All 55 rights reserved.</span> Note to U.S. 252 rights reserved.</span> <br /> 253 254 255 256 257 258 Note to U.S. 56 259 Government Users -- Documentation related to restricted rights -- Use, 57 260 duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA 58 261 ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.<br /> 59 <h2 style="font-weight: normal;">CHANGES 60 </h2> 61 <h3 style="font-weight: normal;">Summary 62 of Changes</h3> 262 263 264 265 266 267 <h1>CHANGES 268 </h1> 269 270 271 272 273 274 <h2>Summary 275 of Changes</h2> 276 277 278 279 280 63 281 This manual contains the following changes: 64 282 <br /> 283 284 285 286 287 288 <br /> 289 290 291 292 293 65 294 <span style="font-weight: bold;">Part 66 295 1. CUA Guide: </span>minor 67 296 editorial changes were made.<br /> 297 298 299 300 301 68 302 <br /> 303 304 305 306 307 69 308 <span style="font-weight: bold;">Part 70 309 2. CUA Reference: </span>the 71 310 following additions and changes were made.<br /> 311 312 313 314 315 72 316 <ul> 317 318 319 320 321 73 322 <li>Chapter 8, "Common User 74 323 Access Interface Components":</li> 324 325 326 327 328 75 329 </ul> 76 <span style="font-weight: bold;">Action 77 Window</span> The first guideline 330 331 332 333 334 335 <div style="text-align: left; width: 640px;"> 336 <dl> 337 338 339 340 341 342 </dl> 343 344 345 346 347 <dl style="margin-left: 40px;"> 348 349 350 351 352 <dt><span style="font-weight: bold;">Action 353 Window</span> </dt> 354 355 356 357 358 <dd>The first guideline 78 359 was moved to the <b>When</b> 79 <b>to</b>80 <b>Use</b>360 <b>to</b> 361 <b>Use</b> 81 362 section. 82 <br /> 83 <b>Help</b> 84 <b>Menu</b> 85 The fifth guideline was changed from recommended<br /> 86 to fundamental.<br /> 87 <br /> 88 <b>Keyboard</b> 89 The functions and descriptions of the Shift+F8 and<br /> 90 F8 keys were modified.<br /> 91 <br /> 92 <b>Notebook</b> 93 <b>(Control)</b> 94 The graphic was modified.<br /> 95 <br /> 96 <b>Pointer</b> 97 The first <b>When</b> 98 <b>to</b> 99 <b>Use</b> 100 was changed from fundamental<br /> 101 to recommended.<br /> 102 <br /> 103 <b>View</b> 104 <b>Menu</b> 105 The graphic was modified.<br /> 106 <br /> 107 <b>Windows</b> 108 <b>Menu</b> 109 A fundamental guideline was added.<br /> 110 <br /> 111 <b>Workplace</b> 112 The second guideline recommended.<br /> 113 <br /> 114 <ul> 115 <li>Value set control was added 363 </dd> 364 365 366 367 368 <dt><b>Help</b> 369 <b>Menu</b> 370 </dt> 371 372 373 374 375 <dd>The fifth guideline was changed from recommended 376 to fundamental.</dd> 377 378 379 380 381 <dt><b>Keyboard</b> 382 </dt> 383 384 385 386 387 <dd>The functions and descriptions of the Shift+F8 and 388 F8 keys were modified.</dd> 389 390 391 392 393 <dt><b>Notebook</b> 394 <b>(Control)</b> 395 </dt> 396 397 398 399 400 <dd>The graphic was modified.</dd> 401 402 403 404 405 <dt><b>Pointer</b> 406 </dt> 407 408 409 410 411 <dd>The first <b>When</b> 412 <b>to</b> 413 <b>Use</b> 414 was changed from fundamental 415 to recommended.</dd> 416 417 418 419 420 <dt><b>View</b> 421 <b>Menu</b> 422 </dt> 423 424 425 426 427 <dd>The graphic was modified.</dd> 428 429 430 431 432 <dt><b>Windows</b> 433 <b>Menu</b> 434 </dt> 435 436 437 438 439 <dd>A fundamental guideline was added.</dd> 440 441 442 443 444 <dt><b>Workplace</b> 445 </dt> 446 447 448 449 450 <dd>The second guideline recommended.</dd> 451 452 453 454 455 </dl> 456 457 458 459 460 <ul style="list-style-type: disc;"> 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 <br /> 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 <ul> 487 488 489 490 491 492 <li>Value set control was added 116 493 to Appendix C, 117 494 "Comparison of 1989 and 1991 Rules and 118 Recommendations" in topic XX</li> 119 <li>Information was moved and 495 Recommendations" in topic C.0.</li> 496 497 498 499 500 501 <li>Information was moved and 120 502 headings were changed in several of 121 503 the bidirectional language usage sections of Appendix D, 122 504 "Common User Access and 123 National Language Support" in topic XX</li> 124 </ul> 125 <h2 style="font-weight: normal;">Notices</h2> 505 National Language Support" in topic D.0.</li> 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 </ul> 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 <h2>Notices</h2> 526 527 528 529 530 126 531 The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any 127 532 country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:<br /> 533 534 535 536 537 128 538 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THE PUBLICATION 129 539 "AS IS" WITHOUT IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR … … 132 542 allow disclaimers of express or implied warranties in certain 133 543 transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.<br /> 134 <br /> 544 545 546 547 548 549 <br /> 550 551 552 553 554 135 555 This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical 136 556 errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these<br /> 557 558 559 560 561 137 562 changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM 138 563 may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the 139 564 program(s)<br /> 565 566 567 568 569 140 570 described in the publication at any time.<br /> 141 <br /> 571 572 573 574 575 576 <br /> 577 578 579 580 581 142 582 It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or 143 583 information about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or<br /> 584 585 586 587 588 144 589 services that are not announced in your country. Such reference or 145 590 information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce<br /> 591 592 593 594 595 146 596 such IBM products, programming, or services in your country. <br /> 147 <br /> 597 598 599 600 601 602 <br /> 603 604 605 606 607 148 608 Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to 149 609 your IBM Authorized Dealer or your IBM Marketing Representative.<br /> 150 <br /> 610 611 612 613 614 615 <br /> 616 617 618 619 620 151 621 IBM and others may have patents or pending patent applications or other 152 622 intellectual property rights covering subject matter described herein.<br /> 623 624 625 626 627 153 628 This document neither grants nor implies any license or immunity under 154 629 any IBM or third party patents, patent applications or other 155 630 intellectual<br /> 631 632 633 634 635 156 636 property rights other than the Copyright License described herein.<br /> 157 <br /> 637 638 639 640 641 642 <br /> 643 644 645 646 647 158 648 IBM assumes no responsibility for any infringement of third-party 159 649 rights that may result from the use of the Specifications disclosed in 160 650 this<br /> 651 652 653 654 655 161 656 publication or from the manufacture, use, lease, or sale of the 162 657 programs created using or containing the Specifications.<br /> 163 <br /> 658 659 660 661 662 663 <br /> 664 665 666 667 668 164 669 With respect to any IBM patents, you can send license inquiries, in 165 670 writing, to the IBM Director of Commercial Relations, IBM Corporation,<br /> 671 672 673 674 675 166 676 Purchase, NY 10577.<br /> 167 <br /> 677 678 679 680 681 682 <br /> 683 684 685 686 687 168 688 COPYRIGHT LICENSE: Program developers may use and copy these Common 169 689 User Access Specifications in any form without payment to IBM, for the 170 690 purpose<br /> 691 692 693 694 695 171 696 of developing their own original programs conforming to these 172 697 Specifications and for the purpose of using, reproducing, marketing or … … 175 700 IBM or any third party with respect to the Common User Access 176 701 Specifications, and any additions or modifications thereto.<br /> 177 <br /> 702 703 704 705 706 707 <br /> 708 709 710 711 712 178 713 Each copy of any portion of these Specifications or any derivative 179 714 work, which is distributed to others, must include a copyright notice as<br /> 715 716 717 718 719 180 720 follows: "(C) Copyright (your company name), (year). All Rights 181 721 Reserved."<br /> 182 <br /> 722 723 724 725 726 727 <br /> 728 729 730 731 732 183 733 For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:<br /> 184 <ul> 185 <li>Copy, modify, and print the 734 735 736 737 738 <br /> 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 <ul> 749 750 751 752 753 754 <li>Copy, modify, and print the 186 755 documentation contained on the media, for use within your enterprise, 187 756 provided you reproduce the copyright notice, all warning statements, 188 757 and other required statements on each copy or partial copy.</li> 189 <li>Transfer the original 758 759 760 761 762 763 <li>Transfer the original 190 764 unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related IBM 191 765 product (which may be either machines you own, or programs, if the 192 program's license terms permit a transfer). </li> 193 </ul> 194 You must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the 766 program's license terms permit a transfer). You must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the 195 767 documentation.<br /> 196 <br /> 768 769 770 771 772 </li> 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 </ul> 783 784 785 786 787 788 <br /> 789 790 791 792 793 197 794 You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal 198 795 property taxes, resulting from this authorization. <br /> 199 <br /> 796 797 798 799 800 801 <br /> 802 803 804 805 806 200 807 THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES 201 808 OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.<br /> 202 <br /> 809 810 811 812 813 814 <br /> 815 816 817 818 819 203 820 Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so 204 821 the above exclusion may not apply to you.<br /> 205 <br /> 822 823 824 825 826 827 <br /> 828 829 830 831 832 206 833 Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this 207 834 authorization. Upon termination, you must destroy your machine readable 208 835 documentation.<br /> 209 <h2 style="font-weight: normal;">Trademarks</h2> 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 <h2 style="font-weight: bold;">Trademarks</h2> 846 847 848 849 850 210 851 The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) on their first 211 852 occurrences in this publication, are trademarks of the IBM Corporation 212 in the United<br /> 213 States or other countries: <br /> 214 <br /> 215 <ul> 216 <li>Common User Access</li> 217 <li>CUA</li> 218 <li>IBM</li> 219 <li>Operating System/2</li> 220 <li>OS/2</li> 221 </ul> 222 <h2 style="font-weight: normal;">Acknowledgments</h2> 853 in the United States or other countries: <br /> 854 855 856 857 858 859 <br /> 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 <ul> 870 871 872 873 874 875 <li>Common User Access</li> 876 877 878 879 880 881 <li>CUA</li> 882 883 884 885 886 887 <li>IBM</li> 888 889 890 891 892 893 <li>Operating System/2</li> 894 895 896 897 898 899 <li>OS/2</li> 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 </ul> 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 <h2 style="font-weight: bold;">Acknowledgments</h2> 920 921 922 923 924 223 925 We wish to thank all the people at IBM who helped make the Common User 224 926 Access* (CUA*) guidelines for object-oriented user interfaces possible.<br /> 927 928 929 930 931 225 932 In addition, we include all those at IBM who made the publishing of 226 933 this book possible.<br /> 227 <br /> 934 935 936 937 938 939 <br /> 940 941 942 943 944 228 945 John Bennett<br /> 946 947 948 949 950 229 951 Jenny Kotora-Lynch<br /> 952 953 954 955 956 230 957 Karen Bernard<br /> 958 959 960 961 962 231 963 Marcos Lam<br /> 964 965 966 967 968 232 969 Richard (Dick)<br /> 970 971 972 973 974 233 975 Berry Lee Laske<br /> 976 977 978 979 980 234 981 Greg Bonadies<br /> 982 983 984 985 986 235 987 Theo Mandel<br /> 988 989 990 991 992 236 993 Fred Brown<br /> 994 995 996 997 998 237 999 Dean Marsh<br /> 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 238 1005 Juanita Couch<br /> 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 239 1011 Shirley Martin<br /> 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 240 1017 Joe Coulombe<br /> 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 241 1023 Skip McGaughey<br /> 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 242 1029 Wendy Geene<br /> 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 243 1035 Coulombe Dick Oakley<br /> 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 244 1041 Dean Duff<br /> 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 245 1047 Rebecca Oliver<br /> 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 246 1053 Lorraine Elder<br /> 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 247 1059 Rosalind Radcliffe<br /> 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 248 1065 Jim Farver<br /> 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 249 1071 Sarah Redpath<br /> 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 250 1077 Katie Frye<br /> 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 251 1083 Cliff Reeves<br /> 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 252 1089 Dana Gillihan<br /> 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 253 1095 Justin Richards<br /> 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 254 1101 Al Groelle<br /> 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 255 1107 Tom Richards<br /> 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 256 1113 William Gunn<br /> 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 257 1119 Dave Roberts<br /> 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 258 1125 Anthony Hall<br /> 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 259 1131 Cindy Roosken<br /> 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 260 1137 Tom Hanson<br /> 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 261 1143 Chuck Schafer<br /> 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 262 1149 Lee Harold<br /> 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 263 1155 David Schwartz<br /> 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 264 1161 Haydon Harrison<br /> 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 265 1167 Bob Shi<br /> 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 266 1173 Sue Henshaw<br /> 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 267 1179 Rodney Smith<br /> 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 268 1185 Greg Hill<br /> 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 269 1191 Don Spencer<br /> 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 270 1197 Dave Hock<br /> 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 271 1203 Deborah Swain<br /> 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 272 1209 Tommy Horne<br /> 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 273 1215 Karl von Gunten<br /> 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 274 1221 Kay Jolly<br /> 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 275 1227 Rick Zevin<br /> 276 <br /> 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 <br /> 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 277 1239 Not included in the list, but also important contributors are all the 278 1240 Architecture Review Board participants. Thank you all. 279 <h2>Foreword</h2> 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 <h2>Foreword</h2> 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 280 1251 The IBM Common User Access* guidelines are intended to help product 281 1252 designers and developers create an interface that the user will find 282 easy<br /> 283 to learn and use. They are based on sound principles of interface 1253 easy to learn and use. They are based on sound principles of interface 284 1254 design and on object-oriented relationships. Moreover, the guidelines 285 reflect<br /> 286 recent advances in personal computing technology and the growing demand 1255 reflect recent advances in personal computing technology and the growing demand 287 1256 by users that computers match their way of thinking.<br /> 288 <br /> 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 <br /> 1263 1264 1265 1266 289 1267 The object-oriented workplace shell of IBM's new OS/2* 2.0 operating 290 system is based on these guidelines. OS/2 2.0 users can interact <br />1268 system is based on these guidelines. OS/2 2.0 users can interact 291 1269 intuitively and easily with objects because each object clearly 292 represents a real workplace task. Thus a user can transfer knowledge 293 about an object<br /> 294 from the real world to the computer environment. The user can also 295 transfer knowledge from one product to another, as well as predict how<br /> 1270 represents a real workplace task. Thus a user can transfer 1271 knowledge 1272 about an object from the real world to the computer environment. The 1273 user can also 1274 transfer knowledge from one product to another, as well as predict how 296 1275 something new will work, thanks to consistent interface design. <br /> 297 <br /> 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 <br /> 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 298 1287 As a result, end users of CUA products should experience higher 299 1288 productivity and satisfaction, while producing fewer errors.<br /> 300 <br /> 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 <br /> 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 301 1300 This official guide, which combines two books originally published in 302 1301 the fall of 1991, is divided into two sections. The first--the "CUA 303 Design<br /> 304 Guide"--describes principles, components and techniques of user 1302 Design Guide"--describes principles, components and techniques of user 305 1303 interface design and describes the process of designing a product with 306 a CUA<br /> 307 interface. The "CUA Reference" section identifies the CUA interface 1304 a CUA interface. The "CUA Reference" section identifies the CUA interface 308 1305 features, or components, and provides guidelines for using them.<br /> 309 <br /> 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 <br /> 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 310 1317 We in IBM are especially proud of the <cite>Object-Oriented</cite> 311 <cite>Interface</cite>312 <cite>Design. </cite>It313 is the work of a team of talented people at IBM. Their effort was <br />1318 <cite>Interface</cite> 1319 <cite>Design. </cite>It 1320 is the work of a team of talented people at IBM. Their effort was 314 1321 recognized recently when they received the Thomas J. Watson, Jr., 315 1322 Design Excellence Award. As the award noted, "The CUA Design is 316 revolutionary,<br /> 317 in that it places a user's data first and foremost."<br /> 318 <br /> 1323 revolutionary, in that it places a user's data first and foremost."<br /> 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 <br /> 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 319 1335 I hope these guidelines contribute to your excellence by helping you 320 make the users of your applications more productive in their personal<br /> 321 computing.<br /> 322 <br /> 1336 make the users of your applications more productive in their personal computing.<br /> 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 <br /> 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 323 1348 Earl F. Wheeler<br /> 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 324 1354 IBM Senior Vice President<br /> 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 325 1360 and General Manager<br /> 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 326 1366 Programming Systems<br /> 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 327 1372 Somers, NY<br /> 328 <h1 style="font-weight: normal;">About 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 <h1 style="font-weight: bold;">About 329 1383 This Book</h1> 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 330 1389 This book describes the guidelines that define the Common User 331 1390 Access*(CUA*) user interface. The Common User Access (CUA) user 332 interface is an object-oriented graphical user interface that provides a333 consistent look and feel for products that adopt the CUA interface as1391 interface is an object-oriented graphical user interface that provides a 1392 consistent look and feel for products that adopt the CUA interface as 334 1393 their standard.<br /> 335 <h2 style="font-weight: normal;">How 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 <h2 style="font-weight: bold;">How 336 1404 This Book is 337 1405 Organized</h2> 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 338 1411 This book has two parts plus appendixes and a glossary.<br /> 339 <ul> 340 <li> Part 1, "CUA 341 Design Guide" in XX describes principles, components, and techniques of 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 <ul> 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 <li> <a href="1.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART1"><b>Part</b> <b>1,</b> <b>"CUA</b> <b>Design</b> <b>Guide"</b></a> describes principles, components, and techniques of 342 1428 user interface design in general, as applied to a variety of software 343 1429 products for a variety of operating environments. Although it describes … … 347 1433 expose designers to the concepts that they should consider when 348 1434 designing any kind of user interface.</li> 349 <li>Part 2, "CUA Reference" in XX 350 identifies the CUA interface components and lists all of the 351 fundamental and recommended guidelinesfor designing and developing a 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 <li><a href="2.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART2"><b>Part</b> <b>2,</b> <b>"CUA</b> <b>Reference"</b></a> identifies the CUA interface components and lists all of the 1441 fundamental and recommended guidelines for designing and developing a 352 1442 product with a CUA interface for a programmable workstation. It 353 1443 provides an alphabetically arranged list of the interface components … … 355 1445 shown are examples only and are not intended to define how a component 356 1446 should appear in the interface for a particular product.<br /> 357 </li> 358 </ul> 359 Note that neither Part 1 nor Part 2 tells a designer how to create a 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 </li> 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 </ul> 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 <br /> 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 Note that neither <span style="font-weight: bold;">Part 1</span> nor <span style="font-weight: bold;">Part 2</span> tells a designer how to create a 360 1473 specific product or part of a product. That is, the CUA guidelines do 361 1474 not tell a designer how to design an accounting product or a balance 362 1475 sheet, for example.<br /> 363 <br /> 364 <ul> 365 <li>The Appendixes contain the 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 <br /> 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 <ul> 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 <li>The Appendixes contain the 366 1498 following information:<br /> 367 <ul> 368 <li>Design considerations 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 <ul> 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 <li>Design considerations 369 1515 for multimedia and touch input</li> 370 <li>Design considerations 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 <li>Design considerations 371 1522 for the use of color</li> 372 <li>CUA interface National 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 <li>CUA interface National 373 1529 Language Support</li> 374 <li>Help for documenting the 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 <li>Help for documenting the 375 1536 CUA interface in product publications and online information. </li> 376 </ul> 377 </li> 378 </ul> 379 <h2 style="font-weight: normal;">Who 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 </ul> 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 </li> 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 </ul> 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 <h2 style="font-weight: bold;">Who 380 1573 Should Read This 381 1574 Book</h2> 382 <pre width="80"><br /><br />° <a 383 href="1.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART1"><b>Part</b> <b>1,</b> <b>"CUA</b> <b>Design</b> <b>Guide"</b></a> is primarily intended for software<br /> designers and user-interface designers, although programmers will want<br /> to read it to gain a general knowledge of the Common User Access user<br /> interface and the design process. You should be familiar with icons,<br /> windows, menus, and other components of graphical user interfaces, as<br /> well as with interaction techniques involving a pointing device, such<br /> as a mouse.<br /><br /><br />° <a 384 href="2.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART2"><b>Part</b> <b>2,</b> <b>"CUA</b> <b>Reference"</b></a> is primarily intended for application<br /> programmers planning to incorporate CUA interface design into new or<br /> existing applications. Use this book together with interface-building<br /> tools to produce applications that follow the CUA guidelines. You<br /> should have a thorough understanding of one or more programming<br /> languages, concepts, and techniques.<br /></pre> 385 <hr /> 386 <h2>PREFACE.3 Conventions Used in 387 This Book</h2> 388 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following conventions are used in this book.<br /><br /><br />° If a term is defined in the glossary (see <a 389 href="BACK_1?DT=19921204095534#HDRGLOSS">"Glossary" in topic BACK_1</a>),<br /> the term appears in <i>italic</i> type the first time or the most prominent<br /> time it is mentioned in the text.<br /><br /><br />° If a term represents a term that is found in a user interface--for<br />example, in a window, in a menu, as a label for an icon, and so<br />on--the term appears in <b>bold</b> type each time it is mentioned in the<br /> text.<br /></pre> 390 <hr /> 391 <h2><a name="HDRPREVPUB" id="HDRPREVPUB">PREFACE.4 392 Related 393 Publications</a></h2> 394 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following manuals can be ordered through your IBM representative or<br />your local IBM branch office.<br /><br /><br />° <cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Application</cite> <cite>Architecture</cite> <cite>Common</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Access</cite> <cite>Basic</cite> <cite>Interface</cite><br /><cite>Design</cite> <cite>Guide</cite> (SC26-4583)<br /><br /><br />Published in December 1989 by the IBM Corporation, this book addresses<br />the design of software products for nonprogrammable terminals.<br /><br /><br />° <cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Application</cite> <cite>Architecture</cite> <cite>Common</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Access</cite> <cite>Basic</cite> <cite>Interface</cite><br /><cite>Design</cite> <cite>Guide</cite> <cite>1991</cite> <cite>Addenda</cite> (GG22-9508)<br /><br /><br />Published in September 1992 by the IBM Corporation, this book<br />supplements SC26-4583.<br /><br /><br />° <cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Application</cite> <cite>Architecture</cite> <cite>Common</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Access</cite> <cite>Guide</cite> <cite>to</cite> <cite>User</cite><br /><cite>Interface</cite> <cite>Design</cite>, (SC34-4289) and the <cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Application</cite> <cite>Architecture</cite><br /><cite>Common</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Access</cite> <cite>Advanced</cite> <cite>Interface</cite> <cite>Design</cite> <cite>Reference</cite>, (SC34-4290)<br /><br /><br />Published by the IBM Corporation in October 1991, these books were<br />combined into this book in an effort to make the current CUA<br />information available in a more accessible form for a broader<br />audience.<br /><br /><br />° <cite>The</cite> <cite>CUA</cite> <cite>Vision:</cite> <cite>Bringing</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>Future</cite> <cite>into</cite> <cite>Focus</cite> (G242-0215)<br /><br /><br />Published by the IBM Corporation in October 1991, this package<br />contains a DOS-compatible demonstration program and brochure of a CUA<br />interface.<br /><br /><br />° <cite>The</cite> <cite>CUA</cite> <cite>Vision:</cite> <cite>Bringing</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>Future</cite> <cite>into</cite> <cite>Focus</cite> (GV26-1003)<br /><br /><br />Published by the IBM Corporation in October 1991, this VHS videotape<br />(GV26-1004 is in PAL format and GV26-1005 is in SECAM format)<br />illustrates IBM's vision of how its customers will use computers in<br />the future.<br /><br /><br />° <cite>CUA</cite> <cite>Guide</cite> <cite>to</cite> <cite>Multimedia</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Interface</cite> <cite>Design</cite>, (S41G-2922).<br /><br /><br />Published by the IBM Corporation in June 1992, this book addresses the<br />design of multimedia products for the programmable workstation<br />environment.<br /></pre> 395 <hr /> 396 <h2>PREFACE.5 Please Tell Us What 397 You Think!</h2> 398 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />We hope you find this book useful and informative. If you like what we<br />have done, please let us know; if not, please tell us why. We will use<br />your comments to make the book better.<br /><br /><br />Please use one of the methods listed below to send your comments to IBM.<br />Whichever method you choose, make sure you send your name, address, and<br />telephone number if you would like a reply.<br /><br /><br />When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use<br />or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without<br />incurring any obligation to you.<br /><br /><br />To send comments by mail or FAX, use the form titled "What Do You Think?"<br />at the back of this book.<br /><br /><br />If you are mailing from a country other than the United States, you can<br />give the form to the local IBM branch office or IBM representative for<br />postage-paid handling.<br /><br /><br />To FAX the form, use this number: (919) 469-7718.<br /><br /><br />To send comments electronically, use one of the following network IDs:<br /><br /><br />° IBM Mail Exchange: <b>usib4hf5</b> <b>at</b> <b>ibmmail</b><br />° IBM Bitnet: <b>cua_rdrc</b> <b>at</b> <b>vnet</b><br />° Internet: <b>cua_reader_comments@vnet.ibm.com</b> 399 <br /><br />Thank you! Your comments help us make our information more useful for<br />you.<br /></pre> 400 <hr /> 401 <h1><a name="HDRPART1" id="HDRPART1">1.0 Part 1. CUA 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 <pre width="80"><br /><br /></pre> 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 <ul> 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 <li><a href="1.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART1"><b>Part</b> <b>1,</b> <b>"CUA</b> <b>Design</b> <b>Guide"</b></a> 1599 is primarily intended for software designers and user-interface 1600 designers, although programmers will want to read it to gain a general 1601 knowledge of the Common User Access user interface and the design 1602 process. You should be familiar with icons, windows, menus, and other 1603 components of graphical user interfaces, as well as with interaction 1604 techniques involving a pointing device, such as a mouse.<br /> 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 </li> 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 </ul> 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 <pre width="80"><br /><br /></pre> 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 <ul> 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 <li><a href="2.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART2"><b>Part</b> <b>2,</b> <b>"CUA</b> <b>Reference"</b></a> 1642 is primarily intended for application programmers planning to 1643 incorporate CUA interface design into new or existing applications. Use 1644 this book together with interface-building tools to produce 1645 applications that follow the CUA guidelines. You should have a thorough 1646 understanding of one or more programming languages, concepts, and 1647 techniques.<br /> 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 </li> 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 </ul> 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 <hr /> 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 <h2>Conventions Used in 1677 This Book<br /> 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 </h2> 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 The following conventions are used in this book.<br /> 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 <br /> 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 <ul> 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 <li>If a term is defined in the glossary (see <a href="BACK_1?DT=19921204095534#HDRGLOSS">"Glossary" in topic BACK_1</a>), the term appears in <i>italic</i> type the first time or the most prominent time it is mentioned in the text.</li> 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 </ul> 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 <ul> 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 <li>If a term represents a term that is found in a user 1732 interface--for example, in a window, in a menu, as a label for an 1733 icon, and so on--the term appears in <b>bold</b> type each time it is mentioned in the text.<br /> 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 </li> 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 </ul> 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 <hr /> 1758 </ul> 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 <h2> Related Publications</h2> 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 <ul style="list-style-type: disc;"> 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 The following manuals can be ordered through your IBM representative or<br /> 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 your local IBM branch office.<br /> 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 <br /> 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 <ul> 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 <li><cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Application</cite> <cite>Architecture</cite> <cite>Common</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Access</cite> <cite>Basic</cite> <cite>Interface</cite></li> 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 </ul> 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 <cite>Design</cite> <cite>Guide</cite> (SC26-4583)<br /> 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 Published in December 1989 by the IBM Corporation, this book addresses 1818 the design of software products for nonprogrammable terminals.<br /> 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 <br /> 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 <ul> 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 <li><cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Application</cite> <cite>Architecture</cite> <cite>Common</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Access</cite> <cite>Basic</cite> <cite>Interface </cite></li> 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 </ul> 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 <cite>Design</cite> <cite>Guide</cite> <cite>1991</cite> <cite>Addenda</cite> (GG22-9508)<br /> 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 Published in September 1992 by the IBM Corporation, this book supplements SC26-4583.<br /> 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 <br /> 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 <ul> 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 <li><cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Application</cite> <cite>Architecture</cite> <cite>Common</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Access</cite> <cite>Guide</cite> <cite>to</cite> <cite>User </cite><cite>Interface</cite> <cite>Design</cite>, (SC34-4289) and the <cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Application</cite> <cite>Architecture</cite> <cite>Common</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Access</cite> <cite>Advanced</cite> <cite>Interface</cite> <cite>Design</cite> <cite>Reference</cite>, (SC34-4290)<br /> 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 </li> 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 </ul> 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 Published by the IBM Corporation in October 1991, these books were 1895 combined into this book in an effort to make the current CUA 1896 information available in a more accessible form for a broader audience.<br /> 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 <br /> 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 <ul> 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 <li><cite>The</cite> <cite>CUA</cite> <cite>Vision:</cite> <cite>Bringing</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>Future</cite> <cite>into</cite> <cite>Focus</cite> (G242-0215)</li> 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 </ul> 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 Published by the IBM Corporation in October 1991, this package contains 1930 a DOS-compatible demonstration program and brochure of a CUA interface.<br /> 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 <br /> 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 <ul> 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 <li><cite>The</cite> <cite>CUA</cite> <cite>Vision:</cite> <cite>Bringing</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>Future</cite> <cite>into</cite> <cite>Focus</cite> (GV26-1003)</li> 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 </ul> 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 Published by the IBM Corporation in October 1991, this VHS videotape 1964 (GV26-1004 is in PAL format and GV26-1005 is in SECAM format) 1965 illustrates IBM's vision of how its customers will use computers in<br /> 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 the future.<br /> 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 <br /> 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 <ul> 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 <li><cite>CUA</cite> <cite>Guide</cite> <cite>to</cite> <cite>Multimedia</cite> <cite>User</cite> <cite>Interface</cite> <cite>Design</cite>, (S41G-2922).</li> 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 </ul> 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 Published by the IBM Corporation in June 1992, this book addresses the 2004 design of multimedia products for the programmable workstation 2005 environment.<br /> 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 <hr /> 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 <h2>Please Tell Us What 2021 You Think!<br /> 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 </h2> 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 We hope you find this book useful and informative. If you like what we 2033 have done, please let us know; if not, please tell us why. We will use 2034 your comments to make the book better.<br /> 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 <br /> 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 Please use one of the methods listed below to send your comments to 2045 IBM. Whichever method you choose, make sure you send your name, 2046 address, and telephone number if you would like a reply.<br /> 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 <br /> 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to 2057 use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate 2058 without incurring any obligation to you.<br /> 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 <br /> 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 To send comments by mail or FAX, use the form titled "What Do You Think?" at the back of this book.<br /> 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 <br /> 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 If you are mailing from a country other than the United States, you can 2079 give the form to the local IBM branch office or IBM representative for 2080 postage-paid handling.<br /> 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 <br /> 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 To FAX the form, use this number: (919) 469-7718.<br /> 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 <br /> 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 To send comments electronically, use one of the following network IDs:<br /> 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 <br /> 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 ° IBM Mail Exchange: <b>usib4hf5</b> <b>at</b> <b>ibmmail</b><br /> 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 ° IBM Bitnet: <b>cua_rdrc</b> <b>at</b> <b>vnet</b><br /> 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 ° Internet: <b>cua_reader_comments@vnet.ibm.com</b> 2121 <br /> 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 <br /> 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 Thank you! Your comments help us make our information more useful for you.<br /> 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 <hr /> 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 <h1><a id="HDRPART1" name="HDRPART1">1.0 Part 2147 1. CUA 402 2148 Design 403 2149 Guide</a></h1> 404 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 405 <ul> 406 <li><a href="1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1 407 Chapter 1. User Interfaces and Object 408 Orientation</a></li> 409 <li><a href="1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2 410 Chapter 2. Models of a User Interface</a></li> 411 <li><a href="1.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3 412 Chapter 3. Goals and Design Principles of the CUA User 413 Interface</a></li> 414 <li><a href="1.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4 415 Chapter 4. Key Components of the CUA User 416 Interface</a></li> 417 <li><a href="1.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.5 418 Chapter 5. The CUA Designer's Model--A Summary</a></li> 419 <li><a href="1.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6 420 Chapter 6. Designing a Product with a CUA User 421 Interface</a></li> 422 </ul> 423 <pre></pre> 424 <hr /> 425 <h1><a name="HDROORIENT" id="HDROORIENT">1.1 Chapter 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 <hr /> 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 <h1><a id="HDROORIENT" name="HDROORIENT">1.1 Chapter 426 2165 1. User 427 2166 Interfaces and Object Orientation</a></h1> 428 <pre></pre> 429 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />A <i>user</i> <i>interface</i> is the set of techniques and mechanisms that a person<br /> uses to interact with an object. Any kind of object has a user interface,<br /> and an object's interface is developed according to a user's needs and<br /> reasons for using the object. A user interface can be a set of buttons,<br /> like those on a telephone or video recorder. In the case of a computer, a<br /> user interface can include a keyboard, a pointing device, and the items<br /> that appear on a display screen. The user interface is the means by which<br /> a user communicates with a computer and vice versa. Many types of user<br /> interfaces are available for computers, including:<br /><br /><br />° Command-line user interfaces, in which a user remembers commands and<br />types them<br /><br /><br />° Menu-driven user interfaces, in which a user is provided with a<br />hierarchically organized set of choices<br /><br /><br />° Graphical user interfaces, in which a user points to and interacts<br />with visible elements of the interface by using a pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 430 <pre></pre> 431 <hr /> 432 <h2><a name="HDRWHOFOR" id="HDRWHOFOR">1.1.2 Who Will 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 <pre width="80"><br />A <i>user</i> <i>interface</i> is the set of techniques and mechanisms that a person uses to interact with an object. Any kind of object has a user interface, and an object's interface is developed according to a user's needs and reasons for using the object. A user interface can be a set of buttons, like those on a telephone or video recorder. In the case of a computer, a user interface can include a keyboard, a pointing device, and the items that appear on a display screen. The user interface is the means by which a user communicates with a computer and vice versa. Many types of user interfaces are available for computers, including:<br /><br />° Command-line user interfaces, in which a user remembers commands and types them<br /><br />° Menu-driven user interfaces, in which a user is provided with a hierarchically organized set of choices<br /><br />° Graphical user interfaces, in which a user points to and interacts with visible elements of the interface by using a pointing device.<br /></pre> 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 <hr /> 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 <h2>1.1.1 What Is the Common User 2190 Access User Interface?<br /> 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 </h2> 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 <pre width="80"><br />The Common User Access user interface is a graphical user interface that incorporates elements of <i>object</i> <i>orientation,</i> an orientation in which a user's focus is on objects and in which the concept of applications is hidden. Objects and object orientation are discussed in more detail in <a href="1.1.3?DT=19921204095534#HDROOINCUA">"Object Orientation in the CUA User Interface" in topic 1.1.3</a>. The CUA user interface is based on principles of user-interface design, on object-oriented relationships, and on field experience and user testing.<br /><br />The CUA guidelines provide information about how the model on which a product is based should be conveyed to a user. The CUA guidelines also include specific details about designing and developing computer software and user interfaces. Products that adhere to the CUA guidelines and undergo usability testing should be comparatively easy to learn and use. As a result, users of products with a CUA user interface should find the products satisfying to use, efficient, and appropriate for the tasks that the users want to accomplish.<br /></pre> 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 <pre></pre> 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 <hr /> 2227 </ul> 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 <h2><a id="HDRWHOFOR" name="HDRWHOFOR"> 1.1.2 Who Will 433 2233 Use the CUA 434 2234 User Interface?</a></h2> 435 <pre></pre> 436 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Although this book is intended for product designers, the CUA user<br />interface itself is intended for a group of end users known as "knowledge<br />workers." This group includes the many people around the world who make<br />their living by working with information, which provides the basis for the<br />decisions they make. These people might work in offices or in airplanes<br />or anywhere they can have access to a computer.<br /><br /><br />However, the CUA user interface is not necessarily appropriate for every<br />possible user of computers. For example, the CUA user interface might not<br />be the most efficient interface for someone who performs a single, highly<br />specialized task, such as the tasks in manufacturing process control or in<br />retail sales. The CUA interface is most appropriate for users who perform<br />a variety of information-related tasks.<br /></pre> 437 <pre></pre> 438 <ul> 439 <li><a href="1.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.1 440 What Is the Common User Access User 441 Interface?</a></li> 442 <li><a href="1.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.2 443 Who Will Use the CUA User Interface?</a></li> 444 <li><a href="1.1.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.3 445 Object Orientation in the CUA User Interface</a></li> 446 <li><a href="1.1.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.4 447 Objects</a></li> 448 <li><a href="1.1.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.5 449 The Distinctions between Object-Oriented User 450 Interfaces and Object-Oriented Programming</a></li> 451 <li><a href="1.1.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.6 452 Benefits of an Object-Oriented User Interface</a></li> 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 <pre width="80"><br /></pre> 2240 2241 2242 2243 <div style="margin-left: 40px; font-family: monospace; width: 640px;">Although 2244 this book is intended for product designers, the CUA user interface 2245 itself is intended for a group of end users known as "knowledge 2246 workers." This group includes the many people around the world who make 2247 their living by working with information, which provides the basis for 2248 the decisions they make. These people might work in offices or in 2249 airplanes or anywhere they can have access to a computer.<br /> 2250 2251 2252 2253 </div> 2254 2255 2256 2257 <div style="margin-left: 40px; width: 640px;"><span style="font-family: monospace;"><br /> 2258 2259 2260 2261 However, the CUA user interface is not necessarily appropriate for 2262 every possible user of computers. For example, the CUA user interface 2263 might not be the most efficient interface for someone who performs a 2264 single, highly specialized task, such as the tasks in manufacturing 2265 process control or in retail sales. The CUA interface is most 2266 appropriate for users who perform a variety of information-related 2267 tasks.</span><br /> 2268 2269 2270 2271 </div> 2272 2273 2274 2275 <pre width="80"></pre> 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 <hr /> 2281 <ul style="list-style-type: disc;"> 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 <h2><a id="HDROOINCUA" name="HDROOINCUA">1.1.3 Object 2291 Orientation 2292 in the CUA User Interface</a><br /> 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 </h2> 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 <pre width="80"><br />Graphical user interfaces, including the CUA interface, are becoming more object-oriented. Object-oriented user interfaces allow for the development of a cohesive working environment in which each element, called an <i>object,</i> can interact with every other element. The objects that users require to perform their tasks and the objects used by the operating environment can work cooperatively in one seamless interface. That is, the boundaries that distinguish applications from operating systems are no longer apparent to users.<br /><br />The most readily apparent feature of an object-oriented user interface is the pervasive focus on objects, as well as the principles applied to those objects, such as <i>object</i> <i>classes,</i> <i>object</i> <i>hierarchies,</i> and <i>inheritance.</i> These are discussed in the following sections.<br /></pre> 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 <hr /> 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 <h2><a id="HDROBJS" name="HDROBJS">1.1.4 Objects</a></h2> 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 <pre width="80"><br />In the real world, an object is an item that a person requires to perform work. For example, an accountant's objects might include a ledger and a calculator. An architect's objects might include blueprints, a T square, and a sharp pencil. In the CUA environment, an object is any visual component of a user interface that a user can work with as a unit, independent of other items, to perform a task. A spreadsheet, one cell in a spreadsheet, a bar chart, one bar in a bar chart, a report, a paragraph in a report, a database, one record in a database, and a printer are all objects. Each object can be represented by one or more graphic images, called icons, that a user can interact with, much as a user can interact<br />with objects in the real world.<br /><br />However, an object need not always be represented by an <i>icon,</i> and not all interaction is accomplished by way of icons. A user can interact with an object by opening a <i>window</i> that displays more information about the object and contains a variety of mechanisms for interacting with the object. A user can also manipulate an object within a window. Icons, windows, and interaction with objects are discussed in more detail in<a href="1.4.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRAICONS"> "Icons" in</a> <a href="1.4.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRAICONS">topic 1.4.3</a>, <a href="1.4.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWS">"Windows" in topic 1.4.5</a>, and <a href="1.4.6?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJINT">"Interaction with Objects" in</a><br /><a href="1.4.6?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJINT">topic 1.4.6</a>.<br /></pre> 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 <hr /> 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 <h3><a id="HDROBJTYPE" name="HDROBJTYPE">1.1.4.1 Object 2345 Classes</a></h3> 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 <pre width="80"><br />The CUA environment includes three types, or classes, of objects:<br /><br />° Container objects<br />° Data objects<br />° Device objects.<br /><br />Each class of objects has a primary purpose that distinguishes it from the other classes, and all three types of objects can contain other objects.<br /></pre> 2357 2358 2359 453 2360 </ul> 454 <pre></pre> 455 <hr /> 456 <h2>1.1.1 What Is the Common User 457 Access User Interface?</h2> 458 <pre></pre> 459 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The Common User Access user interface is a graphical user interface that<br />incorporates elements of <i>object</i> <i>orientation,</i> an orientation in which a<br /> user's focus is on objects and in which the concept of applications is<br /> hidden. Objects and object orientation are discussed in more detail in<br /> <a 460 href="1.1.3?DT=19921204095534#HDROOINCUA">"Object Orientation in the CUA User Interface" in topic 1.1.3</a>. The CUA<br /> user interface is based on principles of user-interface design, on<br /> object-oriented relationships, and on field experience and user testing.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines provide information about how the model on which a<br />product is based should be conveyed to a user. The CUA guidelines also<br />include specific details about designing and developing computer software<br />and user interfaces. Products that adhere to the CUA guidelines and<br />undergo usability testing should be comparatively easy to learn and use.<br />As a result, users of products with a CUA user interface should find the<br />products satisfying to use, efficient, and appropriate for the tasks that<br />the users want to accomplish.<br /></pre> 461 <pre></pre> 462 <hr /> 463 <h2><a name="HDROOINCUA" id="HDROOINCUA">1.1.3 Object 464 Orientation 465 in the CUA User Interface</a></h2> 466 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Graphical user interfaces, including the CUA interface, are becoming more<br />object-oriented. Object-oriented user interfaces allow for the<br />development of a cohesive working environment in which each element,<br />called an <i>object,</i> can interact with every other element. The objects that<br /> users require to perform their tasks and the objects used by the operating<br /> environment can work cooperatively in one seamless interface. That is,<br /> the boundaries that distinguish applications from operating systems are no<br /> longer apparent to users.<br /><br /><br />The most readily apparent feature of an object-oriented user interface is<br />the pervasive focus on objects, as well as the principles applied to those<br />objects, such as <i>object</i> <i>classes,</i> <i>object</i> <i>hierarchies,</i> and <i>inheritance.</i><br />These are discussed in the following sections.<br /></pre> 467 <hr /> 468 <h2><a name="HDROBJS" id="HDROBJS">1.1.4 Objects</a></h2> 469 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In the real world, an object is an item that a person requires to perform<br />work. For example, an accountant's objects might include a ledger and a<br />calculator. An architect's objects might include blueprints, a T square,<br />and a sharp pencil. In the CUA environment, an object is any visual<br />component of a user interface that a user can work with as a unit,<br />independent of other items, to perform a task. A spreadsheet, one cell in<br />a spreadsheet, a bar chart, one bar in a bar chart, a report, a paragraph<br />in a report, a database, one record in a database, and a printer are all<br />objects. Each object can be represented by one or more graphic images,<br />called icons, that a user can interact with, much as a user can interact<br />with objects in the real world.<br /><br /><br />However, an object need not always be represented by an <i>icon,</i> and not all<br /> interaction is accomplished by way of icons. A user can interact with an<br /> object by opening a <i>window</i> that displays more information about the object<br /> and contains a variety of mechanisms for interacting with the object. A<br /> user can also manipulate an object within a window. Icons, windows, and<br /> interaction with objects are discussed in more detail in<a 470 href="1.4.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRAICONS"> "Icons" in</a><br /><a 471 href="1.4.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRAICONS">topic 1.4.3</a>, <a 472 href="1.4.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWS">"Windows" in topic 1.4.5</a>, and <a 473 href="1.4.6?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJINT">"Interaction with Objects" in</a><br /><a 474 href="1.4.6?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJINT">topic 1.4.6</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 475 <ul> 476 <li><a href="1.1.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.4.1 477 Object Classes</a></li> 478 <li><a href="1.1.4.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.4.2 479 Object Hierarchies and Inheritance</a></li> 480 </ul> 481 <pre></pre> 482 <hr /> 483 <h3><a name="HDROBJTYPE" id="HDROBJTYPE">1.1.4.1 484 Object 485 Classes</a></h3> 486 <pre></pre> 487 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The CUA environment includes three types, or classes, of objects:<br /><br /><br />° Container objects<br />° Data objects<br />° Device objects.<br /><br /><br />Each class of objects has a primary purpose that distinguishes it from the<br />other classes, and all three types of objects can contain other objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 488 <pre></pre> 489 <hr /> 490 <h4>1.1.4.1.2 Data Objects</h4> 491 <pre></pre> 492 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The primary purpose of a <i>data</i> <i>object</i> is to convey information, such as<br /> text or graphics, or audio or video information. An example of a data<br /> object might be a newsletter object, which could contain text objects and<br /> graphic objects. Because the primary purpose of each object (text,<br /> illustration, and newsletter as a whole) is to convey information of<br /> interest to readers, each is considered a data object.<a 493 href="1.1.4.1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGDATAFIG"> Figure 2</a> shows an<br /> example of a data object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 494 name="FIGDATAFIG" id="FIGDATAFIG"> </a><a href="picture-2?mode=zoom"><img 495 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P2.GIF" alt="PICTURE 2" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 2. Data Object. A newsletter object is an example of a data<br />object. It conveys information to a reader. It can also<br />contain text objects and graphic objects, which are data objects<br />as well.<br /></pre> 496 <pre></pre> 497 <ul> 498 <li><a href="1.1.4.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.4.1.1 499 Container Objects</a></li> 500 <li><a href="1.1.4.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.4.1.2 501 Data Objects</a></li> 502 <li><a href="1.1.4.1.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.1.4.1.3 503 Device Objects</a></li> 504 </ul> 505 <pre></pre> 506 <hr /> 507 <h4>1.1.4.1.1 Container Objects</h4> 508 <pre></pre> 509 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>container</i> <i>object</i> holds other objects. Its primary purpose is to provide<br /> a way for a user to group related objects for easy access and retrieval.<br /> An operating system typically provides a general-purpose container--for<br /> example, a <i>folder</i>--that can hold any type of object, including other<br /> containers.<br /><br /><br />Products often provide product-specific containers that have special<br />features to serve the needs of the product's users. For example, a<br />graphics product might provide a portfolio container in which a user could<br />store and sort artwork according to subject matter or technique.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 510 name="FIG001" id="FIG001"> </a><a href="picture-1?mode=zoom"><img 511 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P1.GIF" alt="PICTURE 1" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 1. Container Objects. A folder object and a portfolio object are<br />examples of container objects. Each provides a way for a user<br />to group related objects for easy access and retrieval. The<br />window to the right of the folder object labeled <b>My</b> <b>Folder</b><br />displays the folder's contents, including a portfolio object.<br />The window below the folder's window displays the contents of<br />the portfolio object labeled <b>My</b> <b>Portfolio.</b> In this example,<br /> folder objects can contain portfolio objects, and portfolio<br /> objects can contain folder objects.<br /></pre> 512 <pre></pre> 513 <hr /> 514 <h4>1.1.4.1.3 Device Objects</h4> 515 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>device</i> <i>object</i> often represents a physical object in the real world. For<br /> example, a mouse object can represent a user's pointing device, and a<br /> modem object can represent a user's modem. Some device objects represent<br /> a logical object in a user's computer system rather than a physical<br /> object. For example, a wastebasket object can represent a logical object<br /> that disposes of a user's other objects, and an electronic mail out-basket<br /> can represent a logical object that delivers electronic mail to an<br /> intended recipient. The primary purpose of a device object is to provide<br /> a means of communication between a computer and another physical or<br /> logical object.<br /><br /><br />Some device objects can contain other objects. For example, a printer<br />object can contain a queue of objects to be printed, and an electronic<br />mail out-basket object can contain objects to be sent to the user of<br />another computer system. Other device objects simply have settings that a<br />user can configure. Device objects that contain other objects typically<br />act on the contained objects. For example, a printer object will print<br />the objects it contains, and an out-basket object will deliver objects to<br />the intended recipient.<a 516 href="1.1.4.1.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGDEVFIG"> Figure 3</a> shows two device objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 517 name="FIGDEVFIG" id="FIGDEVFIG"> </a><a href="picture-3?mode=zoom"><img 518 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P3.GIF" alt="PICTURE 3" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 3. Device Objects. A printer object represents a physical device,<br />and an electronic mail out-basket represents a logical device.<br /></pre> 519 <hr /> 520 <h3>1.1.4.2 Object Hierarchies and 521 Inheritance</h3> 522 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Objects can be grouped according to similarities in appearance and<br />behavior. These groups can then be arranged into <i>object</i> <i>hierarchies.</i> One<br /> relationship that can be illustrated in a hierarchy is <i>inheritance.</i> An<br /> object that appears below another object in the hierarchy has all of the<br /> characteristics of the object or objects above it. The object is said to<br /> "inherit" those characteristics.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 523 name="FIGINHIER" id="FIGINHIER"> </a><a href="picture-4?mode=zoom"><img 524 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P4.GIF" alt="PICTURE 4" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 4. An Object Hierarchy Illustrating Inheritance. Each object that<br />appears below another object in the hierarchy inherits all of<br />the characteristics of the object or objects above it and can<br />add new characteristics of its own.<br /><br /><br />In the hierarchy shown in <a 525 href="1.1.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGINHIER">Figure 4</a>, a bar chart inherits all of the<br /> characteristics of a chart object, but none of the characteristics unique<br /> to a memo. However, a bar chart object and a memo object will have in<br /> common those characteristics that each inherited from a data object.<br /><br /><br />Other types of hierarchies are possible. For example, objects can be<br />arranged in a <i>containment</i> hierarchy that illustrates which objects can<br /> contain which other objects.<a 526 href="1.1.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONHIER"> Figure 5</a> illustrates a possible containment<br /> hierarchy.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 527 name="FIGCONHIER" id="FIGCONHIER"> </a><a href="picture-5?mode=zoom"><img 528 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P5.GIF" alt="PICTURE 5" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 5. An Object Hierarchy Illustrating Containment. Each object that<br />appears below another object in the hierarchy can be contained<br />by the object or objects above it.<br /></pre> 529 <hr /> 530 <h2>1.1.5 The Distinctions between 531 Object-Oriented User Interfaces 532 and Object-Oriented Programming</h2> 533 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Object-oriented user interfaces share some concepts with object-oriented<br />programming. However, the concepts are manifested differently. In an<br />object-oriented user interface, the objects that a user works with do not<br />necessarily correspond to the objects, or modules of code, that a<br />programmer used to create the product. Inheritance and hierarchy in an<br />object-oriented user interface are more subtle than in object-oriented<br />programming. They are based on similarity in appearance and behavior,<br />rather than on superclasses and subclasses of objects. Finally, an<br />object-oriented interface incorporates the concept of containment, which<br />has no parallel concept in object-oriented programming.<br /><br /><br />An important point for a designer to remember is that while<br />object-oriented programming can facilitate the development of an<br />object-oriented user interface, it is not a prerequisite. An<br />object-oriented user interface can be developed with more traditional<br />programming languages and tools.<br /></pre> 534 <hr /> 535 <h2>1.1.6 Benefits of an 536 Object-Oriented User Interface</h2> 537 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Users sometimes are intimidated by the technical aspects of an operating<br />system. An object-oriented user interface shields users by allowing them<br />to interact with objects rather than with a distinct operating system and<br />with separate applications that are often incompatible with one another.<br />A user can focus more closely on the task at hand without having to be so<br />conscious of the tools involved. Object orientation reflects the way a<br />person works in the real world. For example, someone writing a memo can<br />concentrate on the message without paying much attention to the tools<br />being used to accomplish the task--pencil and paper in the real world, a<br />memo object in an object-oriented user interface. When working in an<br />object-oriented environment, users can be completely unaware that they are<br />using an editor application to do their writing.<br /><br /><br />Furthermore, a fully object-oriented user interface provides a seamless<br />environment in which a user's interaction with objects is the same across<br />tasks. For example, a user can copy, move, delete, and open all objects<br />the same way, no matter what the user's current task is or which objects<br />are involved. A user could copy a graphic and move it into a cell in a<br />spreadsheet, then place the spreadsheet into a document. Then the user<br />could send the entire resulting object to someone else by placing it into<br />an electronic mail out-basket. Each object is completely compatible with<br />every other object, and objects can be combined and separated freely.<br /><br /><br />Most commercially available graphical user interfaces do not provide fully<br />object-oriented user environments. They still rely on applications--that<br />is, separate programs--many of which are not compatible and thus pose<br />barriers to certain types of user interaction. The CUA user interface<br />encourages full object orientation in user interfaces.<br /></pre> 538 <hr /> 539 <h1>1.2 Chapter 2. Models of a 540 User Interface</h1> 541 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />The term <i>model</i> is used in this book to refer to a descriptive<br /> representation of a person's conceptual and operational understanding of<br /> something. Some models are explicit and are consciously designed. These<br /> models typically can be represented by a diagram or a textual description.<br /> Other models, called mental models, are developed unconsciously. People<br /> create a mental model by putting together sets of perceived rules and<br /> patterns in a way that explains a situation. A typical person cannot draw<br /> or describe his or her mental model. In many situations, a person is not<br /> aware that the mental model exists.<br /><br /><br />A mental model does not necessarily reflect a situation and its components<br />accurately. Still, a mental model helps people predict what will happen<br />next in a given situation, and it serves as a framework for analysis,<br />understanding, and decision-making.<br /><br /><br />With respect to user interfaces, three models come into play:<br /><br /><br />° A user's conceptual model<br />° A programmer's model<br />° A designer's model.<br /><br /><br />A user's conceptual model is a mental model. A programmer's model and a<br />designer's model are explicit, consciously designed models. Each model<br />represents a different audience's perspective of a user interface.<br /><a 542 href="1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGMODFIGS">Figure 6</a> illustrates the three audiences and the factors that influence<br /> their perspectives.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 543 name="FIGMODFIGS" id="FIGMODFIGS"> </a><a href="picture-6?mode=zoom"><img 544 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P6.GIF" alt="PICTURE 6" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 6. Factors That Influence the Three Models of a User Interface. A<br />user's conceptual model, a programmer's model, and a designer's<br />model represent the perspectives of three different audiences<br />for a software product. A user's conceptual model is influenced<br />by the user's experiences in the real world, including<br />experience with other computer systems. A programmer's model is<br />influenced by the operating platform, the operating system, the<br />shell, the tools, and the guidelines that are used to develop a<br />product. A designer's model is influenced by the user's<br />conceptual model, the programmer's model, and user interface<br />design principles and guidelines.<br /><br /><br />The models for each audience are discussed in the following sections.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 545 <ul> 546 <li><a href="1.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2.1 547 A User's Conceptual Model</a></li> 548 <li><a href="1.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2.2 549 A Programmer's Model</a></li> 550 <li><a href="1.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2.3 551 A Designer's Model</a></li> 552 <li><a href="1.2.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2.4 553 Accommodating the Differences between a User's 554 Conceptual Model and a Designer's Model</a></li> 555 <li><a href="1.2.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2.5 556 Accommodating the Programmer's Model in the Designer's 557 Model</a></li> 558 </ul> 559 <pre></pre> 560 <hr /> 561 <h2>1.2.1 A User's Conceptual Model</h2> 562 <pre></pre> 563 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>user's</i> <i>conceptual</i> <i>model</i> is a mental model consisting of the set of<br /> relationships that a person perceives to exist among elements of any<br /> situation. A person develops a conceptual model through experience and<br /> then develops expectations based on the relationships in the model.<br /><br /><br />When confronted with a new situation, a person tries to interpret it by<br />comparing it, often unconsciously, to some existing model. For example,<br />if a computer user sees an object on a computer screen, and the object<br />resembles a familiar object, say a telephone, the user transfers concepts<br />from his or her existing model of telephones and makes guesses about how<br />the computer's telephone object might work. Although this might seem to<br />be a hit-or-miss approach to new situations, it is more efficient than<br />building a new model from scratch, and people are satisfied when a new<br />situation fits into their existing models.<br /><br /><br />However, if an existing model does not explain a new situation, and if<br />people are unable to develop a new model, they become uncertain; they<br />proceed hesitantly, and they can become frustrated, perhaps abandoning the<br />new situation entirely because it is too unfamiliar. A user's conceptual<br />model is somewhat resistant to change, but it can change over time as a<br />user collects new evidence that helps a user refine or redefine the model.<br /><br /><br />To understand a user's conceptual model, a designer must understand a<br />user's experiences (such as educational background and job training, as<br />well as previous interaction with machines) and working environment (such<br />as the type of hardware and system software in use). Also, a designer<br />must understand what kinds of information a user needs and what functions<br />a computer system should offer to help a user perform a task.<br /><br /><br />Unfortunately, a designer cannot simply ask all potential users of a<br />product to describe or draw pictures of their conceptual models; most<br />users are unaware that they have a conceptual model. Even users who are<br />aware that they have expectations about a situation typically cannot<br />provide the analytical insight that a designer needs. So a designer must<br />gather information through techniques such as:<br /><br /><br />° Analysis of a users' tasks<br />° Surveys and interviews of actual or potential users<br />° Visits to users' work sites<br />° Feedback from users<br />° Usability testing.<br /><br /><br />Because each user's conceptual model is influenced by different<br />experiences, no two users' conceptual models are exactly alike. Still,<br />these techniques can help a designer compile a fairly complete picture of<br />the conceptual models of a cross-section of users. A designer can then<br />use this information, along with good design judgment and the CUA design<br />principles and guidelines, to make decisions about how to design a<br />product's user interface.<br /></pre> 564 <pre></pre> 565 <hr /> 566 <h2><a name="HDRPROGMOD" id="HDRPROGMOD">1.2.2 A 2361 2362 2363 2364 <h4> 1.1.4.1.1 Container Objects</h4> 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 <div style="margin-left: 40px;"><span style="font-family: monospace;">A </span><i style="font-family: monospace;">container</i><span style="font-family: monospace;"> </span><i style="font-family: monospace;">object</i><span style="font-family: monospace;"> 2370 holds other objects. Its primary purpose is to provide a way for a user 2371 to group related objects for easy access and retrieval. An operating 2372 system typically provides a general-purpose container--for example, a </span><i style="font-family: monospace;">folder</i><span style="font-family: monospace;">--that can hold any type of object, including other containers.</span><br /> 2373 2374 2375 2376 <span style="font-family: monospace;"><br /> 2377 2378 2379 2380 </span></div> 2381 2382 2383 2384 <div style="margin-left: 40px; font-family: monospace;">Products often 2385 provide product-specific containers that have special features to serve 2386 the needs of the product's users. For example, a graphics product might 2387 provide a portfolio container in which a user could store and sort 2388 artwork according to subject matter or technique.<br /> 2389 2390 2391 2392 </div> 2393 2394 2395 2396 <pre width="80"><br /><br /><a id="FIG001" name="FIG001"> </a><a href="picture-1?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 1" src="../../../bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P1.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2397 2398 2399 2400 <div style="margin-left: 40px; width: 640px;"><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 2401 1. Container Objects. A folder object and a portfolio object are 2402 examples of container objects. Each provides a way for a user to group 2403 related objects for easy access and retrieval. The window to the right 2404 of the folder object labeled </span><b style="font-weight: bold;">My</b><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span><b style="font-weight: bold;">Folder</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> displays the folder's contents, including a portfolio object.</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /> 2405 2406 2407 2408 <span style="font-style: italic;">The window below the folder's window displays the contents of the portfolio object labeled </span><b>My</b> <b>Portfolio</b><b style="font-style: italic;">.</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> In this example, folder objects can contain portfolio objects, and portfolio objects can contain folder objects.</span><br /> 2409 2410 2411 2412 </div> 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 <ul style="list-style-type: disc;"> 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 <h4>1.1.4.1.2 Data Objects</h4> 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 <pre width="80">The primary purpose of a <i>data</i> <i>object</i> is to convey information, such as text or graphics, or audio or video information. An example of a data object might be a newsletter object, which could contain text objects and graphic objects. Because the primary purpose of each object (text, illustration, and newsletter as a whole) is to convey information of interest to readers, each is considered a data object.<a href="1.1.4.1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGDATAFIG"> Figure 2</a> shows an example of a data object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGDATAFIG" name="FIGDATAFIG"></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 2. Data Object. A newsletter object is an example of a data object. It conveys information to a reader. It can also contain text objects and graphic objects, which are data objects as well.</span></pre> 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 <hr /> 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 <h4>1.1.4.1.3 Device Objects</h4> 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 <pre width="80">A <i>device</i> <i>object</i> often represents a physical object in the real world. For example, a mouse object can represent a user's pointing device, and a modem object can represent a user's modem. Some device objects represent a logical object in a user's computer system rather than a physicalobject. For example, a wastebasket object can represent a logical object that disposes of a user's other objects, and an electronic mail out-basket can represent a logical object that delivers electronic mail to an intended recipient. The primary purpose of a device object is to provide a means of communication between a computer and another physical or logical object.<br /><br />Some device objects can contain other objects. For example, a printer object can contain a queue of objects to be printed, and an electronic mail out-basket object can contain objects to be sent to the user of another computer system. Other device objects simply have settings that a user can configure. Device objects that contain other objects typically act on the contained objects. For example, a printer object will print the objects it contains, and an out-basket object will deliver objects to the intended recipient.<a href="1.1.4.1.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGDEVFIG"> Figure 3</a> shows two device objects.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGDEVFIG" name="FIGDEVFIG"> </a><a href="picture-3?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 3" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P3.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 3. Device Objects. A printer object represents a physical device, and an electronic mail out-basket represents a logical device.</span><br /></pre> 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 <hr /> 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 <h4>1.1.4.2 Object Hierarchies and 2478 Inheritance</h4> 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 <pre width="80">Objects can be grouped according to similarities in appearance and behavior. These groups can then be arranged into <i>object</i> <i>hierarchies.</i> One relationship that can be illustrated in a hierarchy is <i>inheritance.</i> An object that appears below another object in the hierarchy has all of the characteristics of the object or objects above it. The object is said to "inherit" those characteristics.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGINHIER" name="FIGINHIER"> </a><a href="picture-4?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 4" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P4.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 4. An Object Hierarchy Illustrating Inheritance. Each object that appears below another object in the hierarchy inherits all of the characteristics of the object or objects above it and can add new characteristics of its own.</span><br /><br />In the hierarchy shown in <a href="1.1.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGINHIER">Figure 4</a>, a bar chart inherits all of the characteristics of a chart object, but none of the characteristics unique to a memo. However, a bar chart object and a memo object will have in common those characteristics that each inherited from a data object.<br /><br />Other types of hierarchies are possible. For example, objects can be arranged in a <i>containment</i> hierarchy that illustrates which objects can contain which other objects.<a href="1.1.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONHIER"> Figure 5</a> illustrates a possible containment hierarchy.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGCONHIER" name="FIGCONHIER"> </a><a href="picture-5?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 5" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P5.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 5. An Object Hierarchy Illustrating Containment. Each object that appears below another object in the hierarchy can be contained by the object or objects above it.</span><br /></pre> 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 <hr /> 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 <h3>1.1.5 The Distinctions between 2504 Object-Oriented User Interfaces and Object-Oriented Programming<br /> 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 </h3> 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 <pre width="80">Object-oriented user interfaces share some concepts with object-oriented programming. However, the concepts are manifested differently. In an object-oriented user interface, the objects that a user works with do not necessarily correspond to the objects, or modules of code, that a programmer used to create the product. Inheritance and hierarchy in an object-oriented user interface are more subtle than in object-oriented programming. They are based on similarity in appearance and behavior, rather than on superclasses and subclasses of objects. Finally, an object-oriented interface incorporates the concept of containment, which has no parallel concept in object-oriented programming.<br /><br />An important point for a designer to remember is that while object-oriented programming can facilitate the development of an object-oriented user interface, it is not a prerequisite. An object-oriented user interface can be developed with more traditional programming languages and tools.<br /></pre> 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 <hr /> 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 <h3>1.1.6 Benefits of an 2535 Object-Oriented User Interface</h3> 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 <pre width="80">Users sometimes are intimidated by the technical aspects of an operating system. An object-oriented user interface shields users by allowing them to interact with objects rather than with a distinct operating system and with separate applications that are often incompatible with one another. <br />A user can focus more closely on the task at hand without having to be so conscious of the tools involved. Object orientation reflects the way a person works in the real world. For example, someone writing a memo can concentrate on the message without paying much attention to the tools being used to accomplish the task--pencil and paper in the real world, a memo object in an object-oriented user interface. When working in an object-oriented environment, users can be completely unaware that they are using an editor application to do their writing.<br /><br />Furthermore, a fully object-oriented user interface provides a seamless environment in which a user's interaction with objects is the same across tasks. For example, a user can copy, move, delete, and open all objects the same way, no matter what the user's current task is or which objects are involved. A user could copy a graphic and move it into a cell in a spreadsheet, then place the spreadsheet into a document. Then the user could send the entire resulting object to someone else by placing it into an electronic mail out-basket. Each object is completely compatible with every other object, and objects can be combined and separated freely.<br /><br />Most commercially available graphical user interfaces do not provide fully object-oriented user environments. They still rely on applications--that is, separate programs--many of which are not compatible and thus pose barriers to certain types of user interaction. The CUA user interface encourages full object orientation in user interfaces.<br /></pre> 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 <hr /> 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 <h1>1.2 Chapter 2. Models of a 2561 User Interface<br /> 2562 2563 2564 2565 </h1> 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 <pre width="80"><br />The term <i>model</i> is used in this book to refer to a descriptive representation of a person's conceptual and operational understanding of something. Some models are explicit and are consciously designed. These models typically can be represented by a diagram or a textual description. Other models, called mental models, are developed unconsciously. People create a mental model by putting together sets of perceived rules and patterns in a way that explains a situation. A typical person cannot draw or describe his or her mental model. In many situations, a person is not aware that the mental model exists.<br /><br />A mental model does not necessarily reflect a situation and its components accurately. Still, a mental model helps people predict what will happen next in a given situation, and it serves as a framework for analysis, understanding, and decision-making.<br /><br />With respect to user interfaces, three models come into play:<br /><br />° A user's conceptual model<br />° A programmer's model<br />° A designer's model.<br /><br />A user's conceptual model is a mental model. A programmer's model and a designer's model are explicit, consciously designed models. Each model represents a different audience's perspective of a user interface. <a href="1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGMODFIGS">Figure 6</a> illustrates the three audiences and the factors that influence their perspectives.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMODFIGS" name="FIGMODFIGS"> </a><a href="picture-6?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 6" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P6.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 6. Factors That Influence the Three Models of a User Interface. A </span><span style="font-style: italic;">user's conceptual model, a programmer's model, and a designer's</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">model represent the perspectives of three different audiences</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">for a software product. A user's conceptual model is influenced</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">by the user's experiences in the real world, including</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">experience with other computer systems. A programmer's model is</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">influenced by the operating platform, the operating system, the</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">shell, the tools, and the guidelines that are used to develop a</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">product. A designer's model is influenced by the user's</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">conceptual model, the programmer's model, and user interface</span> <span style="font-style: italic;">design principles and guidelines.</span><br /><br /><br />The models for each audience are discussed in the following sections.<br /></pre> 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 <hr /> 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 <h2>1.2.1 A User's Conceptual Model</h2> 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 <pre width="80"><br /><br />A <i>user's</i> <i>conceptual</i> <i>model</i> is a mental model consisting of the set of relationships that a person perceives to exist among elements of any situation. A person develops a conceptual model through experience and then develops expectations based on the relationships in the model.<br /><br />When confronted with a new situation, a person tries to interpret it by comparing it, often unconsciously, to some existing model. For example, if a computer user sees an object on a computer screen, and the object resembles a familiar object, say a telephone, the user transfers concepts from his or her existing model of telephones and makes guesses about how the computer's telephone object might work. Although this might seem to be a hit-or-miss approach to new situations, it is more efficient than building a new model from scratch, and people are satisfied when a new situation fits into their existing models.<br /><br />However, if an existing model does not explain a new situation, and if people are unable to develop a new model, they become uncertain; they proceed hesitantly, and they can become frustrated, perhaps abandoning the new situation entirely because it is too unfamiliar. A user's conceptual model is somewhat resistant to change, but it can change over time as a user collects new evidence that helps a user refine or redefine the model.<br /><br />To understand a user's conceptual model, a designer must understand a user's experiences (such as educational background and job training, as well as previous interaction with machines) and working environment (such as the type of hardware and system software in use). Also, a designer must understand what kinds of information a user needs and what functions a computer system should offer to help a user perform a task.<br /><br />Unfortunately, a designer cannot simply ask all potential users of a product to describe or draw pictures of their conceptual models; most users are unaware that they have a conceptual model. Even users who are aware that they have expectations about a situation typically cannot provide the analytical insight that a designer needs. So a designer must gather information through techniques such as:<br /><br />° Analysis of a users' tasks<br />° Surveys and interviews of actual or potential users<br />° Visits to users' work sites<br />° Feedback from users<br />° Usability testing.<br /><br />Because each user's conceptual model is influenced by different experiences, no two users' conceptual models are exactly alike. Still, these techniques can help a designer compile a fairly complete picture of the conceptual models of a cross-section of users. A designer can then use this information, along with good design judgment and the CUA design principles and guidelines, to make decisions about how to design a product's user interface.<br /><br /></pre> 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 <hr /> 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 <h2><a id="HDRPROGMOD" name="HDRPROGMOD">1.2.2 2617 A 567 2618 Programmer's 568 2619 Model</a></h2> 569 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>programmer's</i> <i>model</i> represents a product or a computer system from the<br /> perspective of the person who writes the code that makes the product or<br /> system work. A programmer's model is often very different from both a<br /> user's model and a designer's model (described in the next section)<br /> because it necessarily includes a more thorough understanding of the<br /> computer hardware and supporting software that make a product or system<br /> run.<br /><br /><br />A programmer typically could draw a picture of a programmer's model<br />because a programmer's model is more explicit than a user's conceptual<br />model and is consciously created. The programmer's model concentrates<br />primarily on the objects and relationships that the programmer uses to<br />implement a product. For example, a programmer's model might include an<br />object consisting of typed data fields in records in an indexed file. In<br />a user's conceptual model, the same object would simply be an address<br />book. In a designer's model, the concepts would be represented as a group<br />of logically related objects (people's names, addresses, and telephone<br />numbers) that make up an address book object. A programmer requires a<br />level of understanding different from the level required by users.<br />Therefore, although the elements of a programmer's model are vital to the<br />development of a product, a designer should take care to mask the<br />technical details, hiding them from a user without impairing a product's<br />function.<br /></pre> 570 <hr /> 571 <h2><a name="HDRDESMOD" id="HDRDESMOD">1.2.3 A 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 <pre width="80"><br />A <i>programmer's</i> <i>model</i> represents a product or a computer system from the perspective of the person who writes the code that makes the product or system work. A programmer's model is often very different from both a user's model and a designer's model (described in the next section) because it necessarily includes a more thorough understanding of the computer hardware and supporting software that make a product or system run.<br /><br />A programmer typically could draw a picture of a programmer's model because a programmer's model is more explicit than a user's conceptual model and is consciously created. The programmer's model concentrates primarily on the objects and relationships that the programmer uses to implement a product. For example, a programmer's model might include an object consisting of typed data fields in records in an indexed file. In a user's conceptual model, the same object would simply be an address book. In a designer's model, the concepts would be represented as a group of logically related objects (people's names, addresses, and telephone numbers) that make up an address book object. A programmer requires a level of understanding different from the level required by users.<br />Therefore, although the elements of a programmer's model are vital to the development of a product, a designer should take care to mask the technical details, hiding them from a user without impairing a product's function.<br /></pre> 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 <hr /> 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 <h2><a id="HDRDESMOD" name="HDRDESMOD">1.2.3 2645 A 572 2646 Designer's 573 2647 Model</a></h2> 574 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A user-interface designer is like an architect. Just as an architect must<br />understand the perspective of the person who is going to live in a house,<br />as well as the perspective of the person who is going to build the house,<br />a user-interface designer must understand the perspectives of the end user<br />and the programmer.<br /><br /><br />A designer's model influences and is influenced by both the user's<br />conceptual model and the programmer's model. There is no direct<br />relationship between the user's conceptual model and the programmer's<br />model.<a 575 href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGMODREL"> Figure 7</a> shows how the three models are related.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 576 name="FIGMODREL" id="FIGMODREL"> </a><a href="picture-7?mode=zoom"><img 577 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P7.GIF" alt="PICTURE 7" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 7. The Relationship among the Models of User Interfaces. A<br />designer's model influences and is influenced by both the user's<br />conceptual model and the programmer's model. No direct<br />relationship exists between the user's conceptual model and the<br />programmer's model.<br /><br /><br />The three primary elements of a designer's model are:<br /><br /><br />° Object relationships (the objects in the interface and their<br />behaviors)<br />° Visual representations (the "look" of the interface)<br />° Interaction techniques and mechanisms (the "feel" of the interface).<br /><br /><br /><a 578 href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGICEBERG">Figure 8</a> illustrates the parts of a designer's model and shows the<br /> relationships among the parts.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 579 name="FIGICEBERG" id="FIGICEBERG"> </a><a href="picture-8?mode=zoom"><img 580 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P8.GIF" alt="PICTURE 8" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 8. The Designer's Model Represented as an Iceberg. A designer's<br />model includes object relationships, visual representations, and<br />interaction techniques and mechanisms. Although the visual<br />representations and interaction techniques are the most visible<br />part of a user interface, the object relationships, which are<br />based on a user's conceptual model, form the bulk of the<br />interface.<br /><br /><br />Although the visual representations and interaction techniques and<br />mechanisms are the most obvious elements of a user interface, the object<br />representations make the most significant contribution to a product's<br />usability.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 581 <ul> 582 <li><a href="1.2.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2.3.1 583 Object Relationships</a></li> 584 <li><a href="1.2.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2.3.2 585 Visual Representations</a></li> 586 <li><a href="1.2.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.2.3.3 587 Interaction Techniques and 588 Mechanisms</a></li> 589 </ul> 590 <pre></pre> 591 <hr /> 592 <h3>1.2.3.1 Object Relationships</h3> 593 <pre></pre> 594 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Object relationships are the most important part of a designer's model,<br />and a designer should spend a considerable amount of effort defining them.<br />At this stage of product development, a designer determines what objects a<br />user requires, what the relationships are among the objects, and what<br />properties and behaviors the objects should have. For example, if a<br />designer is developing a model of a product for a car dealership, the<br />designer might determine that a user--in this case a car<br />salesperson--needs a car object and a customer object. The user might<br />also need a worksheet object, in which information from both the car<br />object and customer object can be combined. Finally, the user might need<br />one or more container objects to contain the other objects.<br /><br /><br />When a designer chooses the objects and their properties, behaviors, and<br />relationships carefully, and accurately matches them to the relationships<br />in a user's existing conceptual model, the visual representations and<br />interaction techniques follow naturally.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 595 name="FIGFIGUNIQ2" id="FIGFIGUNIQ2"> </a><a href="picture-9?mode=zoom"><img 596 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P9.GIF" alt="PICTURE 9" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 9. Object Relationships. A designer must decide what objects a<br />user requires, what the relationships are among the objects, and<br />what properties and behaviors the objects should possess.<br /></pre> 597 <pre></pre> 598 <hr /> 599 <h3>1.2.3.2 Visual Representations</h3> 600 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A designer's model also addresses the appearance of objects so that a<br />product's objects are visually consistent with one another as well as with<br />other objects in the operating environment. The two aspects to each<br />visual representation in a user interface are the functional aspect and<br />the aesthetic aspect. In designing the functional aspect of a visual<br />representation, a designer is concerned with usability and with how well<br />the visual representation conveys the purpose of the object being<br />represented. In designing the aesthetic aspect of a visual<br />representation, a designer is concerned with whether the representation is<br />visually pleasing. A designer considers factors such as the shape, size,<br />and color of the visual representation.<br /><br /><br />Typically, a designer's model provides a framework for both aspects of the<br />visual representations. The framework includes ways to visually indicate<br />to a user what the purpose or state of an object is, as well as ways to<br />indicate similarity among objects. For a car dealership product, a<br />designer might decide that all cars with prospective buyers should be<br />identified by a similar symbol.<br /><br /><br />Visual specifications assist a designer in maintaining visual consistency,<br />and they provide a foundation on which the designer can build. They also<br />allow a designer leeway in determining which representations are most<br />appropriate for a particular product.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 601 name="FIGVISUFG" id="FIGVISUFG"> </a><a href="picture-10?mode=zoom"><img 602 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P10.GIF" 603 alt="PICTURE 10" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 10. Visual Representations. A designer must develop specifications<br />for the visual elements of an interface to ensure consistency.<br />The specifications should address the functional aspects of<br />visual representations, such as usability and purpose, as well<br />as the aesthetic aspects, such as shape, size, and color.<br /></pre> 604 <hr /> 605 <h3>1.2.3.3 Interaction Techniques 606 and Mechanisms</h3> 607 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Finally, a designer's model addresses a user's techniques for interaction<br />with objects. A typical model includes more than one technique and more<br />than one mechanism for interaction so that users can choose the technique<br />and mechanism that best suits their tasks, their level of skill, and their<br />preferred style of interaction.<br /><br /><br />A designer's model specifies a pattern of interaction in which users<br />interact with similar objects in similar ways and in ways that seem<br />natural to users. Again, consistency should be a designer's goal when<br />developing this part of the designer's model. Toward that end, the CUA<br />interface provides substantial guidance for interaction techniques and<br />mechanisms. When developing a product with a CUA user interface, a<br />designer does not need to develop a complete model of interaction.<br />Instead, a designer's task is to choose from the CUA designer's model (see<br /><a 608 href="1.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUADESM">Chapter 5, "The CUA Designer's Model--A Summary" in topic 1.5</a>) those<br /> interaction techniques that are most appropriate for a particular product.<br /><br /><br />In a car dealership product, for example, a designer might determine that<br />a salesperson should be able to place information into a worksheet object<br />in any of several ways. The salesperson could place a car object on top<br />of the worksheet object, thereby transferring information about the car to<br />the worksheet. Or the salesperson could type information directly into<br />the worksheet object. Finally, the salesperson could select portions of<br />information from the car object and copy it to the worksheet object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 609 name="FIGINACTFG" id="FIGINACTFG"> </a><a href="picture-11?mode=zoom"><img 610 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P11.GIF" 611 alt="PICTURE 11" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 11. Interaction Techniques and Mechanisms. A designer must specify<br />which techniques yield which results and must ensure that<br />similar interactions yield similar results.<br /></pre> 612 <hr /> 613 <h2><a name="HDRSHAPE" id="HDRSHAPE">1.2.4 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 <pre width="80"><br />A user-interface designer is like an architect. Just as an architect must understand the perspective of the person who is going to live in a house, as well as the perspective of the person who is going to build the house, a user-interface designer must understand the perspectives of the end user and the programmer.<br /><br />A designer's model influences and is influenced by both the user's conceptual model and the programmer's model. There is no direct relationship between the user's conceptual model and the programmer's model.<a href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGMODREL"> Figure 7</a> shows how the three models are related.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMODREL" name="FIGMODREL"> </a><a href="picture-7?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 7" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P7.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 7. The Relationship among the Models of User Interfaces. A designer's model influences and is influenced by both the user's conceptual model and the programmer's model. No direct relationship exists between the user's conceptual model and the programmer's model.</span><br /><br />The three primary elements of a designer's model are:<br /><br />° Object relationships (the objects in the interface and their behaviors)<br />° Visual representations (the "look" of the interface)<br />° Interaction techniques and mechanisms (the "feel" of the interface).<br /><br /><a href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGICEBERG">Figure 8</a> illustrates the parts of a designer's model and shows the relationships among the parts.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGICEBERG" name="FIGICEBERG"> </a><a href="picture-8?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 8" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P8.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 8. The Designer's Model Represented as an Iceberg. A designer's model includes object relationships, visual representations, and interaction techniques and mechanisms. Although the visual representations and interaction techniques are the most visible part of a user interface, the object relationships, which are</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">based on a user's conceptual model, form the bulk of the interface.</span><br /><br />Although the visual representations and interaction techniques and mechanisms are the most obvious elements of a user interface, the object representations make the most significant contribution to a product's usability.<br /></pre> 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 <hr /> 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 <h3>1.2.3.1 Object Relationships</h3> 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 <pre width="80">Object relationships are the most important part of a designer's model, and a designer should spend a considerable amount of effort defining them. At this stage of product development, a designer determines what objects a user requires, what the relationships are among the objects, and what properties and behaviors the objects should have. For example, if a designer is developing a model of a product for a car dealership, the designer might determine that a user--in this case a car salesperson--needs a car object and a customer object. The user might<br />also need a worksheet object, in which information from both the car object and customer object can be combined. Finally, the user might need one or more container objects to contain the other objects.<br /><br />When a designer chooses the objects and their properties, behaviors, and relationships carefully, and accurately matches them to the relationships in a user's existing conceptual model, the visual representations and interaction techniques follow naturally.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ2" name="FIGFIGUNIQ2"> </a><a href="picture-9?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 9" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P9.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 9. Object Relationships. A designer must decide what objects a user requires, what the relationships are among the objects, and what properties and behaviors the objects should possess.</span><br /></pre> 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 <hr /> 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 <h3>1.2.3.2 Visual Representations</h3> 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 <pre width="80">A designer's model also addresses the appearance of objects so that a product's objects are visually consistent with one another as well as with other objects in the operating environment. The two aspects to each visual representation in a user interface are the functional aspect and the aesthetic aspect. In designing the functional aspect of a visual representation, a designer is concerned with usability and with how well the visual representation conveys the purpose of the object being represented. In designing the aesthetic aspect of a visual<br />representation, a designer is concerned with whether the representation is visually pleasing. A designer considers factors such as the shape, size, and color of the visual representation.<br /><br />Typically, a designer's model provides a framework for both aspects of the visual representations. The framework includes ways to visually indicate to a user what the purpose or state of an object is, as well as ways to indicate similarity among objects. For a car dealership product, a designer might decide that all cars with prospective buyers should be identified by a similar symbol.<br /><br />Visual specifications assist a designer in maintaining visual consistency, and they provide a foundation on which the designer can build. They also allow a designer leeway in determining which representations are most appropriate for a particular product.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGVISUFG" name="FIGVISUFG"> </a><a href="picture-10?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 10" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P10.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 10. Visual Representations. A designer must develop specifications for the visual elements of an interface to ensure consistency. The specifications should address the functional aspects of visual representations, such as usability and purpose, as well as the aesthetic aspects, such as shape, size, and color.</span><br /></pre> 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 <hr /> 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 <h3>1.2.3.3 Interaction Techniques 2724 and Mechanisms<br /> 2725 2726 2727 2728 </h3> 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 <pre width="80">Finally, a designer's model addresses a user's techniques for interaction with objects. A typical model includes more than one technique and more than one mechanism for interaction so that users can choose the technique and mechanism that best suits their tasks, their level of skill, and their preferred style of interaction.<br /><br />A designer's model specifies a pattern of interaction in which users interact with similar objects in similar ways and in ways that seem natural to users. Again, consistency should be a designer's goal when developing this part of the designer's model. Toward that end, the CUA interface provides substantial guidance for interaction techniques and mechanisms. When developing a product with a CUA user interface, a designer does not need to develop a complete model of interaction. Instead, a designer's task is to choose from the CUA designer's model (see <a href="1.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUADESM">Chapter 5, "The CUA Designer's Model--A Summary" in topic 1.5</a>) those interaction techniques that are most appropriate for a particular product.<br /><br />In a car dealership product, for example, a designer might determine that a salesperson should be able to place information into a worksheet object in any of several ways. The salesperson could place a car object on top of the worksheet object, thereby transferring information about the car to the worksheet. Or the salesperson could type information directly into the worksheet object. Finally, the salesperson could select portions of information from the car object and copy it to the worksheet object.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGINACTFG" name="FIGINACTFG"> </a><a href="picture-11?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 11" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P11.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 11. Interaction Techniques and Mechanisms. A designer must specify which techniques yield which results and must ensure that similar interactions yield similar results.</span><br /></pre> 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 <hr /> 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 <h2><a id="HDRSHAPE" name="HDRSHAPE">1.2.4 614 2754 Accommodating the 615 Differences between a User's Conceptual Model and a Designer's 616 Model</a></h2> 617 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Ideally, a designer's model is equivalent to a user's conceptual model,<br />and a product works the way each user expects it to work. However,<br />various factors can lead to a disparity between a user's conceptual model<br />and a designer's model. For example:<br /><br /><br />° Not all users have the same conceptual models.<br /><br /><br />° Implementation constraints can restrict the function of a product to<br />something less than a user expects.<br /><br /><br />° A computer product can provide useful features that do not have<br />corresponding components in the real world or in a user's area of<br />expertise, and therefore do not already exist in a user's conceptual<br />model.<br /><br /><br />When a designer's model does not exactly match a user's conceptual model,<br />the user often feels as if he or she is viewing a product through a haze,<br />not quite seeing or understanding the product. Some components of the<br />product look and behave as the user expects, while others seem somewhat<br />different or even foreign. To dispel the haze, a designer should expose a<br />user to the features of a product in a way that helps shape the user's<br />conceptual model to incorporate the actual designer's model. Then the two<br />become equivalent.<br /><br /><br />Consistency and the use of metaphors are helpful techniques for shaping a<br />user's conceptual model. When a new feature is consistent with a<br />product's other features, a user can predict at least some of the results<br />of using the new feature and can accept the new feature more readily.<br />Likewise, when a new feature is developed around a metaphor for something<br />that exists in a user's conceptual model, a user can make guesses about<br />the new feature by drawing analogies from the familiar concept. The user<br />can then extend the existing conceptual model to incorporate the new<br />feature. Electronic mail provides an example.<br /><br /><br />Although most people understand how to mail a letter by using a postal or<br />courier service, few immediately understand how to send information by<br />pressing a key on a keyboard or by placing a computer object on top of<br />another computer object (for example, placing a document object on top of<br />an out-basket object). By designing this type of information transfer<br />around a mail metaphor, a designer encourages a user to draw on an<br />existing conceptual model that describes and explains methods for getting<br />information from one place to another.<br />Furthermore, if a designer has specified an interaction technique that is<br />consistent with other interaction techniques that a user is familiar with,<br />a user will be able to extend a conceptual model of mail to include<br />electronic mail. For example, if a user knows how to mail a real-world<br />document by placing it into the office out-basket, the user can easily<br />learn to mail a document object by placing it into an out-basket object on<br />a computer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 618 name="FIGMAILMET" id="FIGMAILMET"> </a><a href="picture-12?mode=zoom"><img 619 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P12.GIF" 620 alt="PICTURE 12" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 12. Metaphor. Electronic mail relies on a mail metaphor to help<br />users understand the underlying concept of electronic transfer<br />of information. To mail document objects, users place them<br />into an out-basket object, just as users place real-world<br />documents into real-world out-baskets.<br /><br /><br />A designer's model must also be flexible enough to accommodate growing<br />sophistication in users. As users become more proficient in using a<br />product, they might find that they do not like certain aspects of the<br />interface, or they might realize that they want or need functions that<br />they had not thought of before. A successful designer anticipates a<br />user's progress and provides mechanisms that are robust enough to stretch<br />as novice users become expert users. For example, when working with a<br />printer object, a typical user wants information about which objects are<br />in the printer's queue, as well as the orientation and number of copies<br />the printer will produce. This information should be readily available.<br />However, a more sophisticated user might want information about the<br />printer's connections, baud rate, and communication protocol. This<br />information should also be available, but it should not get in the way of<br />the information needed by a typical user.<br /><br /><br />By layering information, a designer can keep a product's interface free of<br />clutter and can avoid intimidating novice users while still meeting the<br />needs of expert users. Chapters 3 and 4 provide information about the<br />design principles and interface components that enable designers to create<br />products that serve users' needs.<br /></pre> 621 <hr /> 622 <h2>1.2.5 Accommodating the 2755 Differences between a User's Conceptual Model and a Designer's 2756 Model</a><br /> 2757 2758 2759 2760 </h2> 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 <pre width="80"><br />Ideally, a designer's model is equivalent to a user's conceptual model, and a product works the way each user expects it to work. However, various factors can lead to a disparity between a user's conceptual model and a designer's model. For example:<br /><br />° Not all users have the same conceptual models.<br /><br />° Implementation constraints can restrict the function of a product to something less than a user expects.<br /><br />° A computer product can provide useful features that do not have corresponding components in the real world or in a user's area of expertise, and therefore do not already exist in a user's conceptual model.<br /><br />When a designer's model does not exactly match a user's conceptual model, the user often feels as if he or she is viewing a product through a haze, not quite seeing or understanding the product. Some components of the product look and behave as the user expects, while others seem somewhat different or even foreign. To dispel the haze, a designer should expose a user to the features of a product in a way that helps shape the user's conceptual model to incorporate the actual designer's model. Then the two become equivalent.<br /><br />Consistency and the use of metaphors are helpful techniques for shaping a user's conceptual model. When a new feature is consistent with a product's other features, a user can predict at least some of the results of using the new feature and can accept the new feature more readily. Likewise, when a new feature is developed around a metaphor for something that exists in a user's conceptual model, a user can make guesses about the new feature by drawing analogies from the familiar concept. The user can then extend the existing conceptual model to incorporate the new feature. Electronic mail provides an example.<br /><br />Although most people understand how to mail a letter by using a postal or courier service, few immediately understand how to send information by pressing a key on a keyboard or by placing a computer object on top of another computer object (for example, placing a document object on top of an out-basket object). By designing this type of information transfer around a mail metaphor, a designer encourages a user to draw on an existing conceptual model that describes and explains methods for getting information from one place to another. Furthermore, if a designer has specified an interaction technique that is consistent with other interaction techniques that a user is familiar with, a user will be able to extend a conceptual model of mail to include electronic mail. For example, if a user knows how to mail a real-world document by placing it into the office out-basket, the user can easily learn to mail a document object by placing it into an out-basket object on a computer.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMAILMET" name="FIGMAILMET"> </a><a href="picture-12?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 12" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P12.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 12. Metaphor. Electronic mail relies on a mail metaphor to help users understand the underlying concept of electronic transfer of information. To mail document objects, users place them into an out-basket object, just as users place real-world documents into real-world out-baskets.</span><br /><br />A designer's model must also be flexible enough to accommodate growing sophistication in users. As users become more proficient in using a product, they might find that they do not like certain aspects of the interface, or they might realize that they want or need functions that they had not thought of before. A successful designer anticipates a user's progress and provides mechanisms that are robust enough to stretch as novice users become expert users. For example, when working with a printer object, a typical user wants information about which objects are in the printer's queue, as well as the orientation and number of copies the printer will produce. This information should be readily available.<br />However, a more sophisticated user might want information about the printer's connections, baud rate, and communication protocol. This information should also be available, but it should not get in the way of the information needed by a typical user.<br /><br />By layering information, a designer can keep a product's interface free of clutter and can avoid intimidating novice users while still meeting the needs of expert users. Chapters 3 and 4 provide information about the design principles and interface components that enable designers to create products that serve users' needs.<br /></pre> 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 <hr /> 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 <h2>1.2.5 Accommodating the 623 2786 Programmer's Model in the Designer's 624 Model</h2> 625 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Ideally, a designer should create a model appropriate for users, and a<br />programmer should write programming code that supports the designer's<br />entire model. However, a designer must sometimes make concessions to the<br />restrictions of a programming environment. For example, in a product that<br />offers an electronic mail feature, a designer might specify that a user<br />should receive some kind of immediate notification when mail reaches its<br />intended recipient. But if the network that the mail travels on is<br />subject to unpredictable delays, the designer might have to settle for a<br />notification that arrives as soon as the network allows, rather than an<br />immediate notification. The designer might also have to add a feature<br />that lets a user know where a piece of mail is while in route.<br /><br /><br />When accommodating a programmer's model in a designer's model, a designer<br />should be certain to shield users from complex details of a product's<br />implementation. As shown in <a 626 href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGMODREL">Figure 7 in topic 1.2.3</a>, there should be no<br /> direct relationship between a programmer's model and a user's conceptual<br /> model. Any aspect of a programmer's model that must be exposed to a user<br /> must first be filtered through the designer's model. For example, a<br /> typical user expects that the information displayed in a window is up to<br /> date. The user's expectation should be reflected in the designer's model.<br /> However, a programmer cannot always ensure that displayed information is<br /> up to date; perhaps a network delay interferes. To bridge the gap between<br /> a user's expectations and what a programmer can deliver, a designer's<br /> model can include a way for a user to manually refresh the display of<br /> information.<br /><br /><br />Just as an architect must know the strengths and weaknesses of building<br />materials and the skills of the builders contracted to construct a house,<br />a designer must be aware of the capabilities and limitations of the<br />programming environment, and the skills of the programmers who will<br />implement the design.<br /></pre> 627 <hr /> 628 <h1><a name="HDRUIDESP" id="HDRUIDESP">1.3 Chapter 3. 2787 Model<br /> 2788 2789 2790 2791 </h2> 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 <pre width="80"><br />Ideally, a designer should create a model appropriate for users, and a programmer should write programming code that supports the designer's entire model. However, a designer must sometimes make concessions to the restrictions of a programming environment. For example, in a product that offers an electronic mail feature, a designer might specify that a user should receive some kind of immediate notification when mail reaches its intended recipient. But if the network that the mail travels on is subject to unpredictable delays, the designer might have to settle for a notification that arrives as soon as the network allows, rather than an immediate notification. The designer might also have to add a feature<br />that lets a user know where a piece of mail is while in route.<br /><br />When accommodating a programmer's model in a designer's model, a designer should be certain to shield users from complex details of a product's implementation. As shown in <a href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGMODREL">Figure 7 in topic 1.2.3</a>, there should be no direct relationship between a programmer's model and a user's conceptual model. Any aspect of a programmer's model that must be exposed to a user must first be filtered through the designer's model. For example, a typical user expects that the information displayed in a window is up to date. The user's expectation should be reflected in the designer's model. However, a programmer cannot always ensure that displayed information is up to date; perhaps a network delay interferes. To bridge the gap between a user's expectations and what a programmer can deliver, a designer's model can include a way for a user to manually refresh the display of information.<br /><br />Just as an architect must know the strengths and weaknesses of building materials and the skills of the builders contracted to construct a house, a designer must be aware of the capabilities and limitations of the programming environment, and the skills of the programmers who will implement the design.<br /></pre> 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 <hr /> 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 <h1 style="width: 640px;"><a id="HDRUIDESP" name="HDRUIDESP">1.3 2817 Chapter 3. 629 2818 Goals and 630 Design Principles of the CUA User Interface</a></h1> 631 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />The primary goal of the CUA user interface is to help a user to transfer<br />knowledge across products. If a user learns to use one product that has a<br />CUA interface, the user can quickly learn to use any other product that<br />has a CUA interface. Additional goals of the CUA user interface are to:<br /><br /><br />° Increase a user's productivity<br />° Increase a user's satisfaction with a product<br />° Reduce a user's error rate.<br /><br /><br />The CUA user interface achieves these goals by adhering to the design<br />principles discussed in this chapter. The design principles are based on<br />principles of human behavior, field experience, and results of usability<br />testing.<br /><br /><br />Occasionally a designer must choose between two design principles if both<br />pertain to a particular aspect of the user interface. Sometimes factors<br />outside a designer's control can lead a designer to favor one principle at<br />the expense of another. For example, cost, performance, and usability<br />concerns sometimes conflict. A designer must balance them according to<br />their effect on a user and a user's tasks. Above all, a designer must<br />keep a user in mind when creating a user interface.<br /><br /><br />The design principles are grouped according to these categories:<br /><br /><br />° Placing a user in control of the user interface<br />° Reducing a user's memory load<br />° Making the user interface consistent.<br /><br /><br />If a designer conscientiously combines these design principles with<br />knowledge of a product's intended users and with usability testing, the<br />resulting product should be easy to learn and easy to use.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 632 <ul> 633 <li><a href="1.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.1 634 Design Principles That Place a User in 635 Control</a></li> 636 <li><a href="1.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.2 637 Design Principles That Reduce a User's Memory 638 Load</a></li> 639 <li><a href="1.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.3 640 Design Principles That Contribute to 641 Consistency</a></li> 642 </ul> 643 <pre></pre> 644 <hr /> 645 <h2>1.3.1 Design Principles That 2819 Design Principles of the CUA User Interface</a></h1> 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 <pre width="80">The primary goal of the CUA user interface is to help a user to transfer knowledge across products. If a user learns to use one product that has a CUA interface, the user can quickly learn to use any other product that has a CUA interface. Additional goals of the CUA user interface are to:<br /><br />° Increase a user's productivity<br />° Increase a user's satisfaction with a product<br />° Reduce a user's error rate.<br /><br />The CUA user interface achieves these goals by adhering to the design principles discussed in this chapter. The design principles are based on principles of human behavior, field experience, and results of usability testing.<br /><br />Occasionally a designer must choose between two design principles if both pertain to a particular aspect of the user interface. Sometimes factors outside a designer's control can lead a designer to favor one principle at the expense of another. For example, cost, performance, and usability concerns sometimes conflict. A designer must balance them according to their effect on a user and a user's tasks. Above all, a designer must keep a user in mind when creating a user interface.<br /><br />The design principles are grouped according to these categories:<br /><br />° Placing a user in control of the user interface<br />° Reducing a user's memory load<br />° Making the user interface consistent.<br /><br />If a designer conscientiously combines these design principles with knowledge of a product's intended users and with usability testing, the resulting product should be easy to learn and easy to use.</pre> 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 <hr /> 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 <h2>1.3.1 Design Principles That 646 2842 Place a User in Control</h2> 647 <pre></pre> 648 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A user should always be able to communicate with a computer and should<br />never feel that the computer is in control. Whenever possible, a designer<br />should avoid program-driven sequences that prompt a user through fixed<br />steps and directive messages. Program-driven interaction is like riding a<br />train: a user must go where the program goes, according to its schedule.<br />A designer should aim for user-driven interaction, which is like driving a<br />car: a user goes where the user wants, according to the user's schedule.<br />A product should allow a user alternative courses of action and should not<br />limit a user's capabilities by imposing a designer's or programmer's<br />preconceived notions of the "correct" sequence for accomplishing a task.<br /><br /><br />In general, a designer should approach product design with a "no user<br />errors" philosophy. That is, a product should never make users feel that<br />they are in the wrong--rather, users should feel that any shortcomings are<br />in the product, not in themselves.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 649 <pre></pre> 650 <hr /> 651 <h3>1.3.1.2 Displaying Descriptive 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 <pre width="80"><br />A user should always be able to communicate with a computer and should never feel that the computer is in control. Whenever possible, a designer should avoid program-driven sequences that prompt a user through fixed steps and directive messages. Program-driven interaction is like riding a train: a user must go where the program goes, according to its schedule. A designer should aim for user-driven interaction, which is like driving a car: a user goes where the user wants, according to the user's schedule. A product should allow a user alternative courses of action and should not limit a user's capabilities by imposing a designer's or programmer's preconceived notions of the "correct" sequence for accomplishing a task.<br /><br />In general, a designer should approach product design with a "no user errors" philosophy. That is, a product should never make users feel that they are in the wrong--rather, users should feel that any shortcomings are in the product, not in themselves.<br /><br /></pre> 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 <hr /> 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 <h3>1.3.1.2 Displaying Descriptive 652 2872 and Helpful Messages</h3> 653 <pre></pre> 654 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Chances are that at some point a user will interact with a product in a<br />way that the product's designer did not anticipate. When that happens,<br />the product should indicate to the user that it cannot interpret the<br />user's action. Typically a product would display some kind of message,<br />although in some situations an audible cue or a graphical cue would<br />suffice.<br /><br /><br />Because a situation in which a message is displayed is often a situation<br />in which a user needs the most support, messages should be clear and<br />concise and should provide mechanisms for user interaction. A message<br />should describe the situation objectively, without placing blame, and<br />should help a user correct the situation. For example, if a user inserts<br />a diskette that has not been formatted, and the user tries to save an<br />object to that diskette, the product should display a message that tells<br />the user that the diskette has not been formatted. The message should<br />include mechanisms that allow the user to format the diskette and save the<br />object without having to leave the message window. The message should<br />also include mechanisms that allow the user to take other courses of<br />action.<a 655 href="1.3.1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGMESSFIG"> Figure 14</a> shows an example of an appropriate message.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 656 name="FIGMESSFIG" id="FIGMESSFIG"> </a><a href="picture-14?mode=zoom"><img 657 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P14.GIF" 658 alt="PICTURE 14" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 14. Descriptive Message. The message describes the situation<br />without placing blame on the user, and the message provides a<br />way for the user to change the situation without leaving the<br />message window.<br /><br /><br />For additional information about messages, see <a 659 href="1.4.7.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMSG">"Messages" in</a><br /><a 660 href="1.4.7.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMSG">topic 1.4.7.1</a>.<br /></pre> 661 <pre></pre> 662 <ul> 663 <li><a href="1.3.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.1.1 664 Using Modes Judiciously</a></li> 665 <li><a href="1.3.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.1.2 666 Displaying Descriptive and Helpful 667 Messages</a></li> 668 <li><a href="1.3.1.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.1.3 669 Providing Immediate Actions, Feedback, and 670 Reversible Actions</a></li> 671 <li><a href="1.3.1.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.1.4 672 Accommodating Users with Different Levels of 673 Skill</a></li> 674 <li><a href="1.3.1.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.1.5 675 Making the User Interface 676 Transparent</a></li> 677 <li><a href="1.3.1.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.1.6 678 Allowing a User to Customize the User 679 Interface</a></li> 680 </ul> 681 <pre></pre> 682 <hr /> 683 <h3><a name="HDRMODES" id="HDRMODES">1.3.1.1 Using 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 <pre width="80">Chances are that at some point a user will interact with a product in a way that the product's designer did not anticipate. When that happens, the product should indicate to the user that it cannot interpret the user's action. Typically a product would display some kind of message, although in some situations an audible cue or a graphical cue would suffice.<br /><br />Because a situation in which a message is displayed is often a situation in which a user needs the most support, messages should be clear and concise and should provide mechanisms for user interaction. A message should describe the situation objectively, without placing blame, and should help a user correct the situation. For example, if a user inserts a diskette that has not been formatted, and the user tries to save an object to that diskette, the product should display a message that tells the user that the diskette has not been formatted. The message should include mechanisms that allow the user to format the diskette and save the<br />object without having to leave the message window. The message should also include mechanisms that allow the user to take other courses of action.<a href="1.3.1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGMESSFIG"> Figure 14</a> shows an example of an appropriate message.<br /><br /><a id="FIGMESSFIG" name="FIGMESSFIG"> </a><a href="picture-14?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 14" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P14.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 14. Descriptive Message. The message describes the situation without placing blame on the user, and the message provides a way for the user to change the situation without leaving the message window.</span><br /><br />For additional information about messages, see <a href="1.4.7.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMSG">"Messages" in</a><a href="1.4.7.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMSG"> </a><a href="1.4.7.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMSG">topic 1.4.7.1</a>.<br /><br /></pre> 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 <ul> 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 </ul> 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 <hr /> 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 <h3><a id="HDRMODES" name="HDRMODES">1.3.1.1 2921 Using 684 2922 Modes 685 2923 Judiciously</a></h3> 686 <pre></pre> 687 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>mode</i> is a state of a product in which only certain actions are available<br /> to a user. That is, modes restrict a user's options. However, modes can<br /> be useful in some situations. For example, they can extend the<br /> capabilities of input devices by allowing several actions to be<br /> accomplished with the same technique, key, button, and so forth. Modes<br /> can also help an expert user perform a series of actions very quickly.<br /><br /><br />A mode limits a product's response to a user's actions. For example, if a<br />user were typing a report using a product that has a typing mode and a<br />line-drawing mode, the user would have to leave the typing mode to draw<br />lines around a paragraph. Because typing would be an action unavailable<br />in the line-drawing mode, the user would have to switch modes again to<br />continue typing the report.<br /><br /><br />Modes can be useful in directing a user's interaction with a product.<br />However, designers have historically overused modes without regard for how<br />modes affect users. Users can feel powerless when a mode restricts their<br />actions.<br /><br /><br />One drawback of modes is that the same action can produce a different<br />result, or no result, in a different mode. For example, in a typical<br />typing mode, a letter appears when a user presses a character key. In a<br />line-drawing mode, perhaps only the cursor-movement keys have any effect;<br />pressing a character key might produce no result.<br /><br /><br />Another drawback to modes is that users tend to forget which mode they are<br />in unless a product clearly indicates the current mode. A user can be<br />puzzled when an action leads to an unintended result. For example,<br />pressing the right arrow key in a typing mode typically moves the cursor<br />to the right. In a line-drawing mode, perhaps the right arrow key extends<br />a horizontal line by some increment. If a user presses the right arrow<br />key intending to edit some text, and instead draws a longer line, the user<br />can be surprised, confused, or even exasperated.<br /><br /><br />To alleviate some of the problems associated with modes, a designer should<br />try to use only those modes that require an ongoing user action, such as<br />pressing a mouse button or a keyboard key, to maintain the mode. Also, a<br />designer should specify some kind of mode indicator. For example, a<br />pointer or cursor could have one visual representation when the user is in<br />a text-editing mode and another when the user is in a line-drawing mode.<br /><a 688 href="1.3.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGMODEIND">Figure 13</a> shows examples of pointers used as mode indicators.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 689 name="FIGMODEIND" id="FIGMODEIND"> </a><a href="picture-13?mode=zoom"><img 690 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P13.GIF" 691 alt="PICTURE 13" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 13. Mode Indicators. When a user is in text editing mode, for<br />example, the pointer can change to an I-beam pointer to<br />indicate the mode. When the user changes to line-drawing mode,<br />the pointer can change to a cross-hair pointer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />If a designer finds it necessary to use a mode for a particular part of a<br />product, the designer should keep the scope of the mode narrow and should<br />allow a user to continue to interact with other parts of the product while<br />the mode is in effect. For example, if a product requires more<br />information from a user and displays a message window to elicit the<br />information, the user should still be able to scroll the underlying window<br />and interact with other parts of the window not affected by the lack of<br />information. The user should also be able to interact with other objects.<br /><br /><br />In general, a designer should use modes with caution and should make them<br />obvious and easy to get out of.<br /></pre> 692 <pre></pre> 693 <hr /> 694 <h3>1.3.1.3 Providing Immediate 695 Actions, Feedback, and Reversible 696 Actions</h3> 697 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The results of a user's actions should be obvious immediately. Immediate<br />feedback allows a user to assess whether the results were as expected. If<br />the results are not as expected, the user can choose an alternative action<br />right away. For example, when a user selects a choice to change the font<br />of some selected text, the appearance of the selected text should change<br />immediately. The user can then decide if the resulting effect is<br />desirable and can select another choice if it is not.<br /><br /><br />If the results of a user's actions cannot be made obvious immediately--for<br />example, if a network delay interferes--a product should still provide<br />some kind of feedback. For example, the product should indicate to the<br />user that the action is being processed. However, a designer should make<br />sure that a product's feedback does not interrupt a user's work.<br /><br /><br />The results of a user's actions should also be reversible. By providing<br />reversible actions, a designer allows a user to learn by exploring, to try<br />an action to see the result, and to undo the action if the result is not<br />what was expected or desired. For example, if a user types a word and<br />then decides a different word would be better, the user can press the<br />Backspace key to undo the original typing. Likewise, a user should be<br />able to redo any action that has been undone. A user feels more<br />comfortable with an interface in which an action does not cause<br />irreversible consequences.<br /><br /><br />If an action cannot be made reversible, a product should inform a user and<br />should give the user an opportunity to select some other action. A<br />product might display a message that tells what the outcome of a user's<br />action will be and that indicates alternative actions for the user to<br />select from. For example, if a user attempts to erase a diskette, the<br />product should display a message that tells the user that if the action<br />continues, the user will no longer be able to retrieve the information on<br />the diskette. The message should also indicate alternative actions that<br />the user can take, such as stopping the action or replacing the diskette<br />in question with another diskette.<br /><br /><br />A designer is responsible for determining which actions can be undone and<br />which cannot, but the designer should always keep users' needs in mind and<br />should err on the side of more reversible actions rather than fewer<br />reversible actions. A designer also determines how many actions in a<br />series of actions can be undone.<br /></pre> 698 <hr /> 699 <h3>1.3.1.4 Accommodating Users 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 <pre width="80">A <i>mode</i> is a state of a product in which only certain actions are available to a user. That is, modes restrict a user's options. However, modes can be useful in some situations. For example, they can extend the capabilities of input devices by allowing several actions to be accomplished with the same technique, key, button, and so forth. Modes can also help an expert user perform a series of actions very quickly.<br /><br />A mode limits a product's response to a user's actions. For example, if a user were typing a report using a product that has a typing mode and a line-drawing mode, the user would have to leave the typing mode to draw lines around a paragraph. Because typing would be an action unavailable in the line-drawing mode, the user would have to switch modes again to continue typing the report.<br /><br />Modes can be useful in directing a user's interaction with a product. However, designers have historically overused modes without regard for how modes affect users. Users can feel powerless when a mode restricts their actions.<br /><br />One drawback of modes is that the same action can produce a different result, or no result, in a different mode. For example, in a typical typing mode, a letter appears when a user presses a character key. In a line-drawing mode, perhaps only the cursor-movement keys have any effect; pressing a character key might produce no result.<br /><br />Another drawback to modes is that users tend to forget which mode they are in unless a product clearly indicates the current mode. A user can be puzzled when an action leads to an unintended result. For example, pressing the right arrow key in a typing mode typically moves the cursor to the right. In a line-drawing mode, perhaps the right arrow key extends a horizontal line by some increment. If a user presses the right arrow key intending to edit some text, and instead draws a longer line, the user can be surprised, confused, or even exasperated.<br /><br />To alleviate some of the problems associated with modes, a designer should try to use only those modes that require an ongoing user action, such as pressing a mouse button or a keyboard key, to maintain the mode. Also, a designer should specify some kind of mode indicator. For example, a pointer or cursor could have one visual representation when the user is in a text-editing mode and another when the user is in a line-drawing mode. <a href="1.3.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGMODEIND">Figure 13</a> shows examples of pointers used as mode indicators.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMODEIND" name="FIGMODEIND"> </a><a href="picture-13?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 13" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P13.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 13. Mode Indicators. When a user is in text editing mode, for example, the pointer can change to an I-beam pointer to indicate the mode. When the user changes to line-drawing mode, the pointer can change to a cross-hair pointer.</span><br /><br />If a designer finds it necessary to use a mode for a particular part of a product, the designer should keep the scope of the mode narrow and should allow a user to continue to interact with other parts of the product while the mode is in effect. For example, if a product requires more information from a user and displays a message window to elicit the information, the user should still be able to scroll the underlying window and interact with other parts of the window not affected by the lack of information. The user should also be able to interact with other objects.<br /><br />In general, a designer should use modes with caution and should make them obvious and easy to get out of.<br /></pre> 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 <hr /> 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 <h3 style="width: 640px;">1.3.1.3 Providing Immediate 2953 Actions, Feedback, and Reversible Actions<br /> 2954 2955 2956 2957 </h3> 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 <pre width="80">The results of a user's actions should be obvious immediately. Immediate feedback allows a user to assess whether the results were as expected. If the results are not as expected, the user can choose an alternative action right away. For example, when a user selects a choice to change the font of some selected text, the appearance of the selected text should change immediately. The user can then decide if the resulting effect is desirable and can select another choice if it is not.<br /><br />If the results of a user's actions cannot be made obvious immediately--for example, if a network delay interferes--a product should still provide some kind of feedback. For example, the product should indicate to the user that the action is being processed. However, a designer should make sure that a product's feedback does not interrupt a user's work.<br /><br />The results of a user's actions should also be reversible. By providing reversible actions, a designer allows a user to learn by exploring, to try an action to see the result, and to undo the action if the result is not what was expected or desired. For example, if a user types a word and then decides a different word would be better, the user can press the Backspace key to undo the original typing. Likewise, a user should be able to redo any action that has been undone. A user feels more comfortable with an interface in which an action does not cause irreversible consequences.<br /><br />If an action cannot be made reversible, a product should inform a user and should give the user an opportunity to select some other action. A product might display a message that tells what the outcome of a user's action will be and that indicates alternative actions for the user to select from. For example, if a user attempts to erase a diskette, the product should display a message that tells the user that if the action continues, the user will no longer be able to retrieve the information on the diskette. The message should also indicate alternative actions that the user can take, such as stopping the action or replacing the diskette in question with another diskette.<br /><br />A designer is responsible for determining which actions can be undone and which cannot, but the designer should always keep users' needs in mind and should err on the side of more reversible actions rather than fewer reversible actions. A designer also determines how many actions in a series of actions can be undone.<br /></pre> 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 <hr /> 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 <h3>1.3.1.4 Accommodating Users 700 2983 with Different Levels of Skill</h3> 701 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Much of user interface design is focused on novice or casual users.<br />However, many products offer features for more expert users as well. When<br />designing a user interface, a designer should provide a way for a user to<br />proceed at a comfortable pace, learning as much as necessary to accomplish<br />the task at hand. A designer should also provide a way for a user to go<br />beyond the basic level of knowledge required for frequently used features.<br />A product should encourage exploration so that, as a user's expertise<br />increases, the user is able to discover and use the product's more<br />advanced features.<br /><br /><br />For example, a product might initially display simplified menus containing<br />only those choices that a novice or casual user would use. However, the<br />product could also contain a mechanism that allows experienced or expert<br />users to display complete menus of all of the product's choices.<br /><br /><br />A novice or casual user requires different kinds of support than those<br />required by a frequent or expert user. To accommodate a novice or casual<br />user, a designer should rely heavily on visual cues and should avoid<br />making a user type extensively or remember details. Another technique is<br />to provide abbreviated menus and simplified windows. To accommodate a<br />frequent or expert user, a designer can provide hidden mechanisms, such as<br />shortcut keys, and condensed sequences of steps. A designer can also<br />provide a way to remove some visual cues. For example, an expert user<br />should be able to turn off the display of certain kinds of information<br />that he or she does not require.<br /><br /><br />Users at any level of knowledge and experience can benefit from help<br />information that describes a product's objects, choices, and interaction<br />techniques, and offers a user assistance in completing a task. A novice<br />or casual user might require extensive help information about each<br />component of a product's interface, while a frequent or expert user might<br />require only a brief description.<br /><br /><br />In general, an interface should be flexible enough to accommodate a full<br />range of users, but a designer should make sure that the interface serves<br />the needs of the primary users.<br /></pre> 702 <hr /> 703 <h3>1.3.1.5 Making the User 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 <pre width="80">Much of user interface design is focused on novice or casual users. However, many products offer features for more expert users as well. When designing a user interface, a designer should provide a way for a user to proceed at a comfortable pace, learning as much as necessary to accomplish the task at hand. A designer should also provide a way for a user to go beyond the basic level of knowledge required for frequently used features. A product should encourage exploration so that, as a user's expertise increases, the user is able to discover and use the product's more advanced features.<br /><br />For example, a product might initially display simplified menus containing only those choices that a novice or casual user would use. However, the product could also contain a mechanism that allows experienced or expert users to display complete menus of all of the product's choices.<br /><br />A novice or casual user requires different kinds of support than those required by a frequent or expert user. To accommodate a novice or casual user, a designer should rely heavily on visual cues and should avoid making a user type extensively or remember details. Another technique is to provide abbreviated menus and simplified windows. To accommodate a frequent or expert user, a designer can provide hidden mechanisms, such as shortcut keys, and condensed sequences of steps. A designer can also provide a way to remove some visual cues. For example, an expert user should be able to turn off the display of certain kinds of information that he or she does not require.<br /><br />Users at any level of knowledge and experience can benefit from help information that describes a product's objects, choices, and interaction techniques, and offers a user assistance in completing a task. A novice or casual user might require extensive help information about each component of a product's interface, while a frequent or expert user might require only a brief description.<br /><br />In general, an interface should be flexible enough to accommodate a full range of users, but a designer should make sure that the interface serves the needs of the primary users.<br /></pre> 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 <hr /> 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 <h3>1.3.1.5 Making the User 704 3009 Interface Transparent</h3> 705 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />A user interface provides tools that help a user accomplish a task;<br />therefore, an interface should focus a user's attention on the task or end<br />product. Just as a chef is only incidentally interested in the tools of<br />the cooking trade--pots, pans, and ovens--and prefers to concentrate on<br />the finished meal, a user is only incidentally interested in the tools<br />provided by a user interface--menus, pointers, keyboards, icons, and<br />windows. A user prefers to concentrate on conveying ideas, calculating a<br />return on investment, or replenishing an inventory, for example, and a<br />designer should make sure that the tools provided by a user interface do<br />not get in the user's way. A good user interface requires little<br />conscious thought on a user's part.<br /></pre> 706 <hr /> 707 <h3>1.3.1.6 Allowing a User to 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 <pre width="80">A user interface provides tools that help a user accomplish a task; therefore, an interface should focus a user's attention on the task or end product. Just as a chef is only incidentally interested in the tools of the cooking trade--pots, pans, and ovens--and prefers to concentrate on the finished meal, a user is only incidentally interested in the tools provided by a user interface--menus, pointers, keyboards, icons, and windows. A user prefers to concentrate on conveying ideas, calculating a return on investment, or replenishing an inventory, for example, and a designer should make sure that the tools provided by a user interface do not get in the user's way. A good user interface requires little conscious thought on a user's part.<br /></pre> 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 <hr /> 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 <h3>1.3.1.6 Allowing a User to 708 3035 Customize the User Interface</h3> 709 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Because they have varying backgrounds, interests, motivations, and<br />experiences, no two users are exactly alike. To accommodate individual<br />differences, a designer should create a flexible interface that each user<br />can customize according to personal preference. A user should be able to<br />customize the volume and duration of sounds, the intensity and hue of<br />colors, the arrangement of choices in menus, the sequence of steps in a<br />process, and any other aspect of the user interface. A designer should<br />never underestimate a user's creativity or desire for imprinting personal<br />style on a computer.<br /><br /><br />A designer should also recognize that different users have different<br />physical characteristics and work in diverse environments. One user might<br />want to increase the volume of audible cues on a system to compensate for<br />hearing loss or for a noisy work environment. Another user might want to<br />enlarge the visual representations of the interface's components to<br />compensate for impaired vision or inadequate lighting. Allowing a user to<br />completely customize a user interface can lead to higher productivity and<br />higher user satisfaction. However, a designer should provide defaults<br />that are satisfactory to most users and that a user can revert to.<br /></pre> 710 <hr /> 711 <h2>1.3.2 Design Principles That 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 <pre width="80">Because they have varying backgrounds, interests, motivations, and experiences, no two users are exactly alike. To accommodate individual differences, a designer should create a flexible interface that each user can customize according to personal preference. A user should be able to customize the volume and duration of sounds, the intensity and hue of colors, the arrangement of choices in menus, the sequence of steps in a process, and any other aspect of the user interface. A designer should never underestimate a user's creativity or desire for imprinting personal style on a computer.<br /><br />A designer should also recognize that different users have different physical characteristics and work in diverse environments. One user might want to increase the volume of audible cues on a system to compensate for hearing loss or for a noisy work environment. Another user might want to enlarge the visual representations of the interface's components to compensate for impaired vision or inadequate lighting. Allowing a user to completely customize a user interface can lead to higher productivity and higher user satisfaction. However, a designer should provide defaults that are satisfactory to most users and that a user can revert to.<br /></pre> 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 <hr /> 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 <h2 style="width: 640px;">1.3.2 Design Principles That 712 3061 Reduce a User's Memory Load</h2> 713 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A user should never have to rely on memory for something a product can<br />"remember." Because people are better at recognition than at recall, a<br />product should present alternatives and let a user choose from among them.<br />For example, a product could provide lists of items, such as choices in a<br />menu. A user can recognize choices in a menu without having to recall<br />commands or their syntax.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 714 name="FIGFIGUNIQ3" id="FIGFIGUNIQ3"> </a><a href="picture-15?mode=zoom"><img 715 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P15.GIF" 716 alt="PICTURE 15" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 15. Recall versus Recognition. The window on the left offers few<br />cues to a user, who must remember a set of commands and syntax.<br />The window on the right presents a user with a menu, a list of<br />items that a user can recognize and point to.<br /><br /><br />A product should also provide reminders to help a user keep track of the<br />task at hand. For example, a product could provide visual cues, such as<br />highlighting or progress indicators, or textual cues, such as status<br />messages. Highlighting can remind a user that an object is selected, and<br />a progress indicator can remind a user that a process is under way.<br /><br /><br />Another way to avoid overloading a user's memory is to provide default<br />settings and to save previously selected settings. The window in which<br />the settings are saved can also remind a user about which settings are in<br />effect. For example, a user might want to change the colors that appear<br />on a screen. After experimenting with various colors, the user might<br />settle on a particular combination and save those settings. At a later<br />date, however, the user might decide to revert to the original colors. By<br />providing a default setting for screen colors, the product relieves the<br />user of the responsibility for remembering the original colors.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 717 <ul> 718 <li><a href="1.3.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.2.1 719 Defining Meaningful and Concise Object 720 Classes</a></li> 721 <li><a href="1.3.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.2.2 722 Making Objects Concrete and 723 Recognizable</a></li> 724 </ul> 725 <pre></pre> 726 <hr /> 727 <h3>1.3.2.1 Defining Meaningful 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 <pre width="80">A user should never have to rely on memory for something a product can "remember." Because people are better at recognition than at recall, a product should present alternatives and let a user choose from among them. For example, a product could provide lists of items, such as choices in a menu. A user can recognize choices in a menu without having to recall commands or their syntax.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ3" name="FIGFIGUNIQ3"> </a><a href="picture-15?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 15" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P15.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 15. Recall versus Recognition. The window on the left offers few cues to a user, who must remember a set of commands and syntax. The window on the right presents a user with a menu, a list of items that a user can recognize and point to.</span><br /><br />A product should also provide reminders to help a user keep track of the task at hand. For example, a product could provide visual cues, such as highlighting or progress indicators, or textual cues, such as status messages. Highlighting can remind a user that an object is selected, and a progress indicator can remind a user that a process is under way.<br /><br />Another way to avoid overloading a user's memory is to provide default settings and to save previously selected settings. The window in which the settings are saved can also remind a user about which settings are in effect. For example, a user might want to change the colors that appear on a screen. After experimenting with various colors, the user might settle on a particular combination and save those settings. At a later date, however, the user might decide to revert to the original colors. By providing a default setting for screen colors, the product relieves the user of the responsibility for remembering the original colors.<br /><br /></pre> 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 <hr /> 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 <h3>1.3.2.1 Defining Meaningful 728 3084 and Concise Object Classes</h3> 729 <pre></pre> 730 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In both the real world and in an object-oriented user interface, certain<br />objects are better suited to certain tasks. For example, a telephone<br />serves a person's needs for oral communication better than a typewriter<br />does, while a person would be hard pressed to write a report with a<br />telephone. When designing objects for an object-oriented user interface,<br />a designer should consider the tasks a user will want to accomplish and<br />then should ensure that the characteristics of the objects support the<br />user's tasks.<br /><br /><br />A designer should clearly define the properties of each object and should<br />establish a hierarchy of object classes based on these properties. The<br />objects should be designed so that a user can easily recognize members of<br />a class and can understand what distinguishes one class of objects from<br />another. The distinctions among classes should be meaningful to a user<br />and should not be based on underlying programming distinctions or<br />requirements. For example, a product might contain a chart object and a<br />parts catalog object. When a user works with a chart object, the user<br />develops a body of knowledge about that object and comes to expect that<br />other chart objects share certain characteristics and behave similarly.<br />Likewise, a user develops a different set of expectations about a parts<br />catalog object because it behaves differently from a chart object. From a<br />user's perspective, these two objects have different purposes--that is,<br />they belong to different object classes--even though they share some<br />behaviors, such as opening and closing. A user does not care, and does<br />not need to know, that to a programmer or a designer both objects are<br />members of the data object class.<br /><br /><br />An object hierarchy should be concise. So should the visual<br />representations of the objects in the hierarchy. Typically, each object<br />in a class of objects is represented by the same type of icon. The<br />individual objects are distinguished by different icon labels, which<br />indicate the name of each object. If a user interface is cluttered with<br />too many types of objects or too many types of icons, a user can become<br />overwhelmed. To keep a user focused on the right objects, a designer<br />should keep the number of object classes to a minimum while still allowing<br />a user to accomplish a task without undue effort. If a product seems to<br />require a new object class, a designer should first consider modifying an<br />existing class. Likewise, a designer should consider modifying existing<br />icons to represent new object classes. However, a designer should be sure<br />that the visual distinctions among icons are obvious enough for a user to<br />discern them readily. Reuse of an existing class allows a user to draw on<br />previous knowledge of the class and decreases learning time.<br /></pre> 731 <pre></pre> 732 <hr /> 733 <h3>1.3.2.2 Making Objects 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 <pre width="80">In both the real world and in an object-oriented user interface, certain objects are better suited to certain tasks. For example, a telephone serves a person's needs for oral communication better than a typewriter does, while a person would be hard pressed to write a report with a telephone. When designing objects for an object-oriented user interface, a designer should consider the tasks a user will want to accomplish and then should ensure that the characteristics of the objects support the user's tasks.<br /><br />A designer should clearly define the properties of each object and should establish a hierarchy of object classes based on these properties. The objects should be designed so that a user can easily recognize members of a class and can understand what distinguishes one class of objects from another. The distinctions among classes should be meaningful to a user and should not be based on underlying programming distinctions or requirements. For example, a product might contain a chart object and a parts catalog object. When a user works with a chart object, the user develops a body of knowledge about that object and comes to expect that other chart objects share certain characteristics and behave similarly. Likewise, a user develops a different set of expectations about a parts catalog object because it behaves differently from a chart object. From a<br />user's perspective, these two objects have different purposes--that is, they belong to different object classes--even though they share some behaviors, such as opening and closing. A user does not care, and does not need to know, that to a programmer or a designer both objects are members of the data object class.<br /><br />An object hierarchy should be concise. So should the visual representations of the objects in the hierarchy. Typically, each object in a class of objects is represented by the same type of icon. The individual objects are distinguished by different icon labels, which indicate the name of each object. If a user interface is cluttered with too many types of objects or too many types of icons, a user can become overwhelmed. To keep a user focused on the right objects, a designer should keep the number of object classes to a minimum while still allowing a user to accomplish a task without undue effort. If a product seems to<br />require a new object class, a designer should first consider modifying an existing class. Likewise, a designer should consider modifying existing icons to represent new object classes. However, a designer should be sure that the visual distinctions among icons are obvious enough for a user to discern them readily. Reuse of an existing class allows a user to draw on previous knowledge of the class and decreases learning time. <br /></pre> 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 <hr /> 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 <h3>1.3.2.2 Making Objects 734 3114 Concrete and Recognizable</h3> 735 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />When a computer object resembles a real-world object in appearance or<br />behavior, or both, a user can transfer knowledge about the real-world<br />object to the computer environment. By including familiar objects in a<br />product, a designer can help users learn to use the product more quickly.<br /><br /><br />The visible representation of computer objects should be easily<br />recognizable, and a computer object should resemble its real-world<br />counterpart when possible. For example, in a car dealership product, an<br />object that represents the general information about a car should resemble<br />the general information found on the car's window sticker.<a 736 href="1.3.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGSTIKFIG"> Figure 16</a><br />shows an example of a recognizable object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 737 name="FIGSTIKFIG" id="FIGSTIKFIG"> </a><a href="picture-16?mode=zoom"><img 738 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P16.GIF" 739 alt="PICTURE 16" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 16. Concrete, Recognizable Objects. The car object's icon<br />resembles a real car, and the information in the window<br />resembles the information found on the sticker on a car window.<br /><br /><br />When an object represents a more abstract notion that does not have a<br />real-world counterpart, the representation of the object should still help<br />a user visualize and remember relationships.<br /></pre> 740 <hr /> 741 <h2>1.3.3 Design Principles That 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 <pre width="80">When a computer object resembles a real-world object in appearance or behavior, or both, a user can transfer knowledge about the real-world object to the computer environment. By including familiar objects in a product, a designer can help users learn to use the product more quickly.<br /><br />The visible representation of computer objects should be easily recognizable, and a computer object should resemble its real-world counterpart when possible. For example, in a car dealership product, an object that represents the general information about a car should resemble the general information found on the car's window sticker.<a href="1.3.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGSTIKFIG"> Figure 16</a> shows an example of a recognizable object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSTIKFIG" name="FIGSTIKFIG"> </a><a href="picture-16?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 16" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P16.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 16. Concrete, Recognizable Objects. The car object's icon resembles a real car, and the information in the window resembles the information found on the sticker on a car window.</span><br /><br />When an object represents a more abstract notion that does not have a real-world counterpart, the representation of the object should still help a user visualize and remember relationships.<br /></pre> 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 <hr /> 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 <h2>1.3.3 Design Principles That 742 3140 Contribute to Consistency</h2> 743 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Consistency helps a user transfer knowledge from one product to another<br />and helps a user predict how something new will work. To create a<br />consistent user interface, a designer should develop paradigms that<br />provide for identical implementation of common functions throughout a<br />product. For example, the CUA guidelines specify that a user should be<br />able to use the same technique for editing text, regardless of where the<br />text appears.<br /><br /><br />For any single design decision, a designer must consider whether being<br />consistent with respect to one component of an interface can affect the<br />consistency of other components. Some components of a user interface<br />might be consistent in shape, location, or color. Others might be<br />consistent in interaction techniques. A designer should make sure that<br />components are consistent in the ways that a user would expect.<br /><br /><br />A designer must also remember that consistency is a means to an end--ease<br />of learning and reduction of errors--rather than an end itself. Sometimes<br />it is impractical or impossible to be completely consistent. In that<br />case, a designer must make consistency compromises based on knowledge of a<br />user's conceptual model and should be consistent in whichever way seems<br />more natural to a user.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 744 <ul> 745 <li><a href="1.3.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.3.1 746 Sustaining the Context of a User's 747 Task</a></li> 748 <li><a href="1.3.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.3.2 749 Maintaining Continuity within and among 750 Products</a></li> 751 <li><a href="1.3.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.3.3 752 Creating Aesthetic Appeal</a></li> 753 <li><a href="1.3.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.3.3.4 754 Using Visual Metaphors</a></li> 755 </ul> 756 <pre></pre> 757 <hr /> 758 <h3>1.3.3.1 Sustaining the Context 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 <pre width="80">Consistency helps a user transfer knowledge from one product to another and helps a user predict how something new will work. To create a consistent user interface, a designer should develop paradigms that provide for identical implementation of common functions throughout a product. For example, the CUA guidelines specify that a user should be able to use the same technique for editing text, regardless of where the text appears.<br /><br />For any single design decision, a designer must consider whether being consistent with respect to one component of an interface can affect the consistency of other components. Some components of a user interface might be consistent in shape, location, or color. Others might be consistent in interaction techniques. A designer should make sure that components are consistent in the ways that a user would expect.<br /><br />A designer must also remember that consistency is a means to an end--ease of learning and reduction of errors--rather than an end itself. Sometimes it is impractical or impossible to be completely consistent. In that case, a designer must make consistency compromises based on knowledge of a user's conceptual model and should be consistent in whichever way seems more natural to a user.<br /><br /></pre> 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 <hr /> 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 <h3>1.3.3.1 Sustaining the Context 759 3163 of a User's Task</h3> 760 <pre></pre> 761 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Users can become confused if everything in front of them changes<br />continuously, without apparent cause, while they work. To reassure a user<br />and give a user a sense of continuity, a product should provide cues that<br />help a user relate an effect to its cause.<br /><br /><br />A product should also maintain useful points of reference while a user<br />works on a task. For example, when a user adds objects to a folder, the<br />appearance of the folder's window should remain the same while the<br />appearance of the window's contents changes.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 762 name="FIGFIGUNIQ4" id="FIGFIGUNIQ4"> </a><a href="picture-17?mode=zoom"><img 763 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P17.GIF" 764 alt="PICTURE 17" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 17. Sustaining the Context of a User's Task. The window on the<br />left shows that the container contains two objects. When a<br />user adds more objects to the container, the appearance of the<br />window remains the same while the appearance of the window's<br />contents changes.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Additionally, a user should be able to complete a step or a series of<br />related steps without having to alternate between input devices. For<br />example, a user should not have to use a pointing device to scroll text<br />while editing that text from the keyboard. The text should scroll<br />automatically when the cursor reaches the boundary of the area the user is<br />working in, and the keyboard should have its own scrolling mechanisms,<br />such as keys that move text up or down in the window, either a line at a<br />time or a screenful at a time.<br /><br /><br />Finally, a user should be able to predict the result of an action. Two<br />ways in which a designer can help a user predict a result are to provide<br />consistent responses to actions and to provide actions appropriate to a<br />user's tasks. A designer determines appropriate actions and responses by<br />using task analysis and by relying on metaphors when suitable metaphors<br />can be found. Also, by labeling actions with appropriate terms, a<br />designer helps a user develop expectations about the outcome of those<br />actions.<br /></pre> 765 <pre></pre> 766 <hr /> 767 <h3>1.3.3.2 Maintaining Continuity 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 <pre width="80">Users can become confused if everything in front of them changes continuously, without apparent cause, while they work. To reassure a user and give a user a sense of continuity, a product should provide cues that help a user relate an effect to its cause.<br /><br />A product should also maintain useful points of reference while a user works on a task. For example, when a user adds objects to a folder, the appearance of the folder's window should remain the same while the appearance of the window's contents changes.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ4" name="FIGFIGUNIQ4"> </a><a href="picture-17?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 17" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P17.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 17. Sustaining the Context of a User's Task. The window on the left shows that the container contains two objects. When a user adds more objects to the container, the appearance of the window remains the same while the appearance of the window's contents changes.</span><br /><br />Additionally, a user should be able to complete a step or a series of related steps without having to alternate between input devices. For example, a user should not have to use a pointing device to scroll text while editing that text from the keyboard. The text should scroll automatically when the cursor reaches the boundary of the area the user is working in, and the keyboard should have its own scrolling mechanisms, such as keys that move text up or down in the window, either a line at a time or a screenful at a time.<br /><br />Finally, a user should be able to predict the result of an action. Two ways in which a designer can help a user predict a result are to provide consistent responses to actions and to provide actions appropriate to a user's tasks. A designer determines appropriate actions and responses by using task analysis and by relying on metaphors when suitable metaphors can be found. Also, by labeling actions with appropriate terms, a designer helps a user develop expectations about the outcome of those actions.<br /></pre> 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 <hr /> 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 <h3>1.3.3.2 Maintaining Continuity 768 3193 within and among Products</h3> 769 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A designer should not discount a user's experiences with other user<br />interfaces, such as those provided in prior versions of a product, or<br />those generally accepted as industry standards. Instead, a new product or<br />a new version of an existing product should build on a user's knowledge.<br />Therefore, a designer should be cautious in changing the behavior of an<br />object from one version of a product to the next. A designer must test a<br />new behavior to make sure that its benefits outweigh the drawbacks of<br />forcing a user to relearn the object's behavior. One way to accommodate<br />both new users and experienced users is to provide both the old and the<br />new behavior for an object and let the users choose which to use.<br /></pre> 770 <hr /> 771 <h3>1.3.3.3 Creating Aesthetic 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 <pre width="80">A designer should not discount a user's experiences with other user interfaces, such as those provided in prior versions of a product, or those generally accepted as industry standards. Instead, a new product or a new version of an existing product should build on a user's knowledge. Therefore, a designer should be cautious in changing the behavior of an object from one version of a product to the next. A designer must test a new behavior to make sure that its benefits outweigh the drawbacks of forcing a user to relearn the object's behavior. One way to accommodate both new users and experienced users is to provide both the old and the new behavior for an object and let the users choose which to use.<br /></pre> 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 <hr /> 3214 3215 3216 3217 3218 <h3>1.3.3.3 Creating Aesthetic 772 3219 Appeal</h3> 773 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The appearance of a product's interface can significantly affect a user's<br />attitude toward the interface. Inconsistent design and haphazard<br />placement of objects can confuse a user and can contribute to a user's<br />dissatisfaction with a product.<br /><br /><br />When designing the appearance of a user interface, a designer should<br />adhere to generally accepted practices for information presentation. By<br />skillfully using white space, color, proximity, overlap, size and shape<br />differences, and other components of visual communication, a designer can<br />make an interface more efficient and effective and can increase a user's<br />satisfaction with a product.<br /></pre> 774 <hr /> 775 <h3>1.3.3.4 Using Visual Metaphors</h3> 776 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />To draw on a user's existing conceptual model, a designer should include<br />elements that are familiar to a user. One way a designer can make an<br />interface seem familiar is to use metaphors. For example, a designer<br />could use a folder icon, which is a visual metaphor for a manila folder,<br />an object familiar to a user. The folder is also a metaphor for the<br />familiar concept of storage. In a computer environment, storage might be<br />accomplished differently from what a user is accustomed to, but the<br />metaphoric representations help a user draw on existing knowledge.<br />Metaphors also help set the stage for expanding a user's conceptual model<br />to accommodate the additional capabilities provided by the computer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 777 name="FIGINIT" id="FIGINIT"> </a><a href="picture-18?mode=zoom"><img 778 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P18.GIF" 779 alt="PICTURE 18" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 18. A Visual Metaphor for Storage. Because users have conceptual<br />knowledge of folders, when they see a folder icon, they can<br />understand that it represents storage.<br /></pre> 780 <hr /> 781 <h1>1.4 Chapter 4. Key Components 782 of the CUA User Interface</h1> 783 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This chapter describes many of the key components of the CUA user<br />interface. A designer can use these components when developing a product<br />for a CUA environment. While many of these components appear in other<br />kinds of user interfaces, the following descriptions refer specifically to<br />the CUA implementation of these components.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 784 <ul> 785 <li><a href="1.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.1 786 Workplace</a></li> 787 <li><a href="1.4.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.2 788 Folders and Work Areas</a></li> 789 <li><a href="1.4.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.3 790 Icons</a></li> 791 <li><a href="1.4.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.4 792 Pointers and Cursors</a></li> 793 <li><a href="1.4.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.5 794 Windows</a></li> 795 <li><a href="1.4.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6 796 Interaction with Objects</a></li> 797 <li><a href="1.4.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.7 798 Keeping a User Informed</a></li> 799 <li><a href="1.4.8?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.8 800 Exception Handling</a></li> 801 <li><a href="1.4.9?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.9 802 Help</a></li> 803 </ul> 804 <pre></pre> 805 <hr /> 806 <h2>1.4.1 Workplace</h2> 807 <pre></pre> 808 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The <i>workplace</i> is the container that holds all objects in the CUA<br /> interface. It fills the entire screen and serves as a background for a<br /> user's work. Any object that appears directly on the background of the<br /> workplace is represented by an icon.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 809 name="FIGFIGUNIQ5" id="FIGFIGUNIQ5"> </a><a href="picture-19?mode=zoom"><img 810 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P19.GIF" 811 alt="PICTURE 19" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 19. Workplace. The workplace is the container that holds all other<br />objects. It fills the entire screen.<br /></pre> 812 <pre></pre> 813 <hr /> 814 <h2><a name="HDRWORKAR" id="HDRWORKAR">1.4.2 Folders 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 <pre width="80">The appearance of a product's interface can significantly affect a user's attitude toward the interface. Inconsistent design and haphazard placement of objects can confuse a user and can contribute to a user's dissatisfaction with a product.<br /><br />When designing the appearance of a user interface, a designer should adhere to generally accepted practices for information presentation. By skillfully using white space, color, proximity, overlap, size and shape differences, and other components of visual communication, a designer can make an interface more efficient and effective and can increase a user's satisfaction with a product.<br /></pre> 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 <hr /> 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 <h3>1.3.3.4 Using Visual Metaphors</h3> 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 <pre width="80">To draw on a user's existing conceptual model, a designer should include elements that are familiar to a user. One way a designer can make an interface seem familiar is to use metaphors. For example, a designer could use a folder icon, which is a visual metaphor for a manila folder, an object familiar to a user. The folder is also a metaphor for the familiar concept of storage. In a computer environment, storage might be accomplished differently from what a user is accustomed to, but the metaphoric representations help a user draw on existing knowledge. Metaphors also help set the stage for expanding a user's conceptual model to accommodate the additional capabilities provided by the computer.<br /><br /><a id="FIGINIT" name="FIGINIT"> </a><a href="picture-18?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 18" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P18.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 18. A Visual Metaphor for Storage. Because users have conceptual knowledge of folders, when they see a folder icon, they can understand that it represents storage.</span><br /></pre> 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 <hr /> 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 <h1 style="width: 640px;">1.4 Chapter 4. Key Components 3270 of the CUA User Interface<br /> 3271 3272 3273 3274 </h1> 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 <pre width="80"><br />This chapter describes many of the key components of the CUA user interface. A designer can use these components when developing a product for a CUA environment. While many of these components appear in other kinds of user interfaces, the following descriptions refer specifically to the CUA implementation of these components.<br /><br /></pre> 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 <hr /> 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 <h2>1.4.1 Workplace</h2> 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 <pre width="80"><br />The <i>workplace</i> is the container that holds all objects in the CUA interface. It fills the entire screen and serves as a background for a user's work. Any object that appears directly on the background of the workplace is represented by an icon.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ5" name="FIGFIGUNIQ5"> </a><a href="picture-19?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 19" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P19.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 19. Workplace. The workplace is the container that holds all other objects. It fills the entire screen.</span><br /></pre> 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 <hr /> 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 <h2><a id="HDRWORKAR" name="HDRWORKAR">1.4.2 3329 Folders 815 3330 and Work 816 3331 Areas</a></h2> 817 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>folder</i> is a general-purpose container in which a user can organize<br /> objects in whatever way the user sees fit. A <i>work</i> <i>area</i> is a more<br /> specialized type of container in which a user can organize objects<br /> according to the task or tasks the user wants to perform. Both types of<br /> containers can be provided by an operating system, and a product can<br /> provide product-specific containers based on these two types of<br /> containers. The visual representations of these containers can be<br /> tailored to fit the tasks for which a product will be used.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 818 name="FIGFIGUNIQ6" id="FIGFIGUNIQ6"> </a><a href="picture-20?mode=zoom"><img 819 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P20.GIF" 820 alt="PICTURE 20" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 20. Folder and Work Area. A folder is a general-purpose container,<br />and a work area is a container specialized for a user's tasks.<br /></pre> 821 <hr /> 822 <h2><a name="HDRAICONS" id="HDRAICONS">1.4.3 Icons</a></h2> 823 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In the CUA interface, an <i>icon</i> is a small graphic image that represents an<br /> object. Strictly speaking, an icon is simply one view of an object (see<br /> <a 824 href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">"Views" in topic 1.4.5.1</a>); however, to be consistent with a user's<br /> conceptual model, a designer should design a product in a way that<br /> encourages a user to think of an icon as the object itself.<br /><br /><br />An icon should convey information about its corresponding object, and its<br />appearance can change when something about its object changes. For<br />example, the icon for a printer can change to indicate that the printer<br />has run out of paper.<br /><br /><br />An icon doesn't have to be a static image. It can be an animated image or<br />even a video image. <a 825 href="1.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGFIGICON">Figure 21 </a>shows examples of icons.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 826 name="FIGFIGICON" id="FIGFIGICON"> </a><a href="picture-21?mode=zoom"><img 827 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P21.GIF" 828 alt="PICTURE 21" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 21. Icons. Icons are graphic images that represent objects. They<br />can change to indicate a change in the objects they represent.<br />The icon on the left represents a printer. The icon on the<br />right indicates that the printer has run out of paper.<br /></pre> 829 <hr /> 830 <h2>1.4.4 Pointers and Cursors</h2> 831 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><i>Pointers</i> and <i>cursors</i> are visual cues that indicate where a user's next<br /> interaction with the user interface will take place. They provide a way<br /> for a user to select and interact with things that appear on the<br /> workplace.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 832 <ul> 833 <li><a href="1.4.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.4.1 834 The Pointer</a></li> 835 <li><a href="1.4.4.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.4.2 836 The Cursor</a></li> 837 </ul> 838 <pre></pre> 839 <hr /> 840 <h3><a name="HDRAPOINTR" id="HDRAPOINTR">1.4.4.1 The 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 <pre width="80"><br />A <i>folder</i> is a general-purpose container in which a user can organize objects in whatever way the user sees fit. A <i>work</i> <i>area</i> is a more specialized type of container in which a user can organize objects according to the task or tasks the user wants to perform. Both types of containers can be provided by an operating system, and a product can provide product-specific containers based on these two types of containers. The visual representations of these containers can be tailored to fit the tasks for which a product will be used.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ6" name="FIGFIGUNIQ6"> </a><a href="picture-20?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 20" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P20.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 20. Folder and Work Area. A folder is a general-purpose container, and a work area is a container specialized for a user's tasks.</span><br /></pre> 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 <hr /> 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 <h2><a id="HDRAICONS" name="HDRAICONS">1.4.3 3357 Icons</a></h2> 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 <pre width="80"><br />In the CUA interface, an <i>icon</i> is a small graphic image that represents an object. Strictly speaking, an icon is simply one view of an object (see <a href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">"Views" in topic 1.4.5.1</a>); however, to be consistent with a user's conceptual model, a designer should design a product in a way that encourages a user to think of an icon as the object itself.<br /><br />An icon should convey information about its corresponding object, and its appearance can change when something about its object changes. For example, the icon for a printer can change to indicate that the printer has run out of paper.<br /><br />An icon doesn't have to be a static image. It can be an animated image or even a video image. <a href="1.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGFIGICON">Figure 21 </a>shows examples of icons.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGICON" name="FIGFIGICON"> </a><a href="picture-21?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 21" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P21.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 21. Icons. Icons are graphic images that represent objects. They can change to indicate a change in the objects they represent. The icon on the left represents a printer. The icon on the right indicates that the printer has run out of paper.</span><br /></pre> 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 <hr /> 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 <h2>1.4.4 Pointers and Cursors</h2> 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 <pre width="80"><i>Pointers</i> and <i>cursors</i> are visual cues that indicate where a user's next interaction with the user interface will take place. They provide a way for a user to select and interact with things that appear on the workplace.<br /><br /></pre> 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 <hr /> 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 <h3><a id="HDRAPOINTR" name="HDRAPOINTR">1.4.4.1 3405 The 841 3406 Pointer</a></h3> 842 <pre></pre> 843 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Typically only one pointer appears on the workplace at a time, and it is<br />associated with a user's pointing device, such as a mouse, trackball, or<br />joystick. When a user moves the pointing device, the pointer moves<br />correspondingly, and when a user presses a button on the pointing device,<br />the object that the pointer is on is affected.<br /><br /><br />The pointing device used most often in a CUA environment is a two-button<br />mouse. One of the two mouse buttons is called the <i>selection</i> <i>button</i> (see<br /> <a 844 href="1.4.6.4?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELECTN">"Selection" in topic 1.4.6.4</a>). The other mouse button is called the<br /> <i>manipulation</i> <i>button,</i> and it is used for direct manipulation (see<br /> <a 845 href="1.4.6?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJINT">"Interaction with Objects" in topic 1.4.6</a>). A user can choose either the<br /> left or right mouse button for either function, selection or manipulation.<br /> If a three-button mouse is used, the third button is called the menu<br /> button.<br /><br /><br />The CUA pointer is usually shaped like an arrow. However, the shape of<br />the pointer can change to indicate what kinds of actions are possible.<br />For example, the pointer is shaped like an I-beam when it is over text<br />that can be edited or over an area into which text can be placed.<br />Products can provide product-specific pointers that serve the special<br />needs of their audiences. For example, a graphics product might provide a<br />special pointer to help a user draw lines accurately. However, before<br />providing a new pointer, a designer should first consider modifying an<br />existing pointer so that a user can transfer knowledge about the existing<br />pointer rather than having to learn about a new one.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 846 name="FIGFIGUNIQ7" id="FIGFIGUNIQ7"> </a><a href="picture-22?mode=zoom"><img 847 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P22.GIF" 848 alt="PICTURE 22" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 22. Pointers. The pointer is usually shaped like an arrow, but it<br />changes to an I-beam when it is on text that can be edited or<br />on an area into which text can be placed. The pointer can<br />change to other shapes as well, depending on the mode the user<br />is in.<br /></pre> 849 <pre></pre> 850 <hr /> 851 <h3>1.4.4.2 The Cursor</h3> 852 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Typically only one cursor appears on the workplace at a time, and it is<br />associated with a user's keyboard. When a user presses a key, information<br />is transmitted to the operating system, and if appropriate, something<br />appears or occurs at the cursor's position.<br /><br /><br />The CUA cursors are the <i>selection</i> <i>cursor</i> and the <i>text</i> <i>cursor.</i> The<br /> selection cursor is used to indicate which items a user can interact with<br /> from the keyboard. For example, a selection cursor can indicate which<br /> items can be selected or which items can display a pop-up menu (see<br /> <a 853 href="1.4.6.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONMENU">"Pop-up Menus" in topic 1.4.6.2</a>). In some scopes of selection (see <a 854 href="1.4.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCOPSEL">"Scope</a><br /><a 855 href="1.4.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCOPSEL">of Selection" in topic 1.4.6.4.1</a>) the selection cursor just indicates the<br /> cursor's position. In other scopes of selection, the selection cursor<br /> also automatically selects the item it is on.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 856 name="FIGFIGUNIQ8" id="FIGFIGUNIQ8"> </a><a href="picture-23?mode=zoom"><img 857 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P23.GIF" 858 alt="PICTURE 23" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 23. Selection Cursor. The selection cursor is typically a bar of<br />color, a box with a dotted outline, or an area that appears to<br />be pressed in relation to the surrounding window area.<br /><br /><br />The text cursor is used to type text. When a user is in insert mode--that<br />is, when characters a user types are added to the existing characters--the<br />text cursor appears as a vertical line. When a user is in replace<br />mode--that is, when characters a user types replace existing<br />characters--the text cursor can change in appearance. For example, the<br />cursor can become a vertical bar of color surrounding the character that<br />will be replaced.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 859 name="FIGFIGUNIQ9" id="FIGFIGUNIQ9"> </a><a href="picture-24?mode=zoom"><img 860 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P24.GIF" 861 alt="PICTURE 24" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 24. Text Cursors. The text cursor is a vertical line when a<br />product is in insert mode. It is a vertical bar of color when<br />a product is in replace mode.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 862 <ul> 863 <li><a href="1.4.4.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.4.2.1 864 Cursor Movement</a></li> 865 <li><a href="1.4.4.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.4.2.2 866 Mnemonics</a></li> 867 <li><a href="1.4.4.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.4.2.3 868 Shortcut Keys</a></li> 869 </ul> 870 <pre></pre> 871 <hr /> 872 <h4>1.4.4.2.1 Cursor Movement</h4> 873 <pre></pre> 874 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A user can move the cursor by pressing a <i>cursor</i> <i>movement</i> <i>key.</i> Cursor<br /> movement keys include the arrow keys (labeled _, _ÿ, ", and ) and the<br /> Home, End, Page Up, and Page Down keys. A user can also move the cursor<br /> by pressing and releasing a button on a mouse or other pointing device.<br /> When a user presses the selection button on a mouse, the cursor moves to<br /> the position that the pointer was on.<br /></pre> 875 <pre></pre> 876 <hr /> 877 <h4>1.4.4.2.2 Mnemonics</h4> 878 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>mnemonic</i> is a readily recognized character that a user can type to move<br /> the cursor quickly from one place in a window to another. For example, if<br /> the cursor is on the first choice in a menu, a user can move the cursor<br /> directly to the last choice in the menu by typing the mnemonic for that<br /> choice. A mnemonic is typically indicated with an underline.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 879 name="FIGFIGUNIQ10" id="FIGFIGUNIQ10"> </a><a 880 href="picture-25?mode=zoom"><img 881 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P25.GIF" 882 alt="PICTURE 25" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 25. Mnemonic. A mnemonic is a character that a user can type to<br />quickly move the cursor to the choice containing the mnemonic.<br />Each underlined character in the figure is a mnemonic.<br /></pre> 883 <hr /> 884 <h4>1.4.4.2.3 Shortcut Keys</h4> 885 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>shortcut</i> <i>key</i> is a key or a combination of keys that a user can press to<br /> select a choice from a menu. The menu need not be displayed. Shortcut<br /> keys are provided for choices that a user will use frequently. Shortcut<br /> keys provide a quicker method of interaction, particularly for experienced<br /> users who are likely to prefer remembering the combinations to displaying<br /> and navigating through a menu for each desired choice.<br /><br /><br />A shortcut key is typically displayed next to the choice it pertains to so<br />that a user can learn to associate the shortcut key with that choice. A<br />designer might want to provide a mechanism that allows users to turn off<br />the display of the shortcut keys.<a 886 href="1.4.4.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSKEYFIG"> Figure 26</a> illustrates some of the<br /> standard CUA shortcut keys.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 887 name="FIGSKEYFIG" id="FIGSKEYFIG"> </a><a href="picture-26?mode=zoom"><img 888 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P26.GIF" 889 alt="PICTURE 26" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 26. Shortcut Keys. A shortcut key is a key or combination of keys<br />that a user can press to select a choice from a menu. A user<br />can use a shortcut key even when the menu containing the<br />corresponding choice is not displayed.<br /></pre> 890 <hr /> 891 <h2><a name="HDRWINDOWS" id="HDRWINDOWS">1.4.5 Windows</a></h2> 892 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>window</i> is a part of the CUA interface through which a user can view an<br /> object. A window is bounded by a window <i>border,</i> which separates the<br /> window from other windows on the workplace. Within the border are<br /> mechanisms that allow a user to manipulate the window and its contents.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 893 name="FIGWINFIG" id="FIGWINFIG"> </a><a href="picture-27?mode=zoom"><img 894 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P27.GIF" 895 alt="PICTURE 27" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 27. A Typical Window and Its Components<br /><br /><br /><a 896 href="1.4.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGWINFIG">Figure 27</a> shows a typical window and its components. The system menu<br /> symbol, the window border, and the window sizing buttons allow a user to<br /> change the size and position of a window. The menu bar and scroll bars<br /> allow a user to work with the window's contents. The window title<br /> indicates the name of the object seen in the window, and it also indicates<br /> which kind of view (see <a 897 href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">"Views" in topic 1.4.5.1</a>) is displayed. The<br /> information area displays brief messages to a user about the object or<br /> choice that the cursor is on. Information about the normal completion of<br /> a process can also appear in the information area. For example, if a user<br /> copies several objects from one container to another, the information area<br /> in a container's window could display a brief message to tell the user<br /> when the copying has been completed.<br /><br /><br />A window and its content--that is, the information below the menu bar and<br />above the horizontal scroll bar--are not permanently tied together. A<br />user can completely change the content of a window without opening a new<br />window. For example, a user can change the view (see <a 898 href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">"Views" in</a><br /><a 899 href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">topic 1.4.5.1</a>) of the object displayed in the window. A user can also<br /> control how much of a window's content is visible by changing the size of<br /> the window or by splitting a window into separate portions called <i>panes.</i><br />Each pane can display different parts of the same object and can be<br />scrolled independently.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 900 name="FIGPANES" id="FIGPANES"> </a><a href="picture-28?mode=zoom"><img 901 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P28.GIF" 902 alt="PICTURE 28" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 28. A Window Divided into Two Panes<br /><br /><br />The CUA interface provides two types of windows: <i>primary</i> <i>windows</i> and<br /> <i>secondary</i> <i>windows.</i> A primary window appears when a user opens an object,<br /> and it is where the main interaction between a user and an object takes<br /> place. A secondary window appears when a user needs, or needs to provide,<br /> information related to an object in a primary window. For example, a<br /> secondary window might contain a message (see <a 903 href="1.4.7.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMSG">"Messages" in topic 1.4.7.1</a>)<br /> or help information (see<a 904 href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP"> "Help" in topic 1.4.9</a>), or it might contain<br /> controls (see <a 905 href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTRL">"Controls" in topic 1.4.6.3.2</a>) that help a user provide<br /> additional information.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 906 <ul> 907 <li><a href="1.4.5.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.5.1 908 Views</a></li> 909 </ul> 910 <pre></pre> 911 <hr /> 912 <h3><a name="HDRVIEWS" id="HDRVIEWS">1.4.5.1 Views</a></h3> 913 <pre></pre> 914 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The content of a window is a <i>view.</i> A view is a way of looking at an<br /> object's information. Different views display information in different<br /> forms, which mimics the way information about an object is presented in<br /> the real world. Consider, for example, a user's manual for a personal<br /> computer system. A user's manual typically describes a computer system in<br /> several different ways. It provides:<br /><br /><br />° A picture of the entire system with each piece correctly set up<br /><br /><br />° A picture of each piece of the system<br /><br /><br />° A list of the pieces of the system, such as the display screen,<br />keyboard, pointing device, and printer<br /><br /><br />° A list of the features of the system, such as the processing speed and<br />memory capacity<br /><br /><br />° Step-by-step directions for setting up the system and for using each<br />piece of the system.<br /><br /><br />Each of these ways of looking at or describing the computer system is a<br />view of the system.<br /><br /><br />The CUA interface also provides different kinds of views for objects in<br />the CUA environment. The appearance of a window's contents and the kinds<br />of interaction possible in a window are determined, in part, by the type<br />of view presented in the window. The four basic types of views are:<br /><br /><br />° Composed view<br />° Contents view<br />° Settings view<br />° Help view.<br /><br /><br />An object can have more than one view. In fact, most objects have several<br />types of views.<br /><br /><br />To determine which types of views an object should have, a designer needs<br />to consider which kinds of data an object contains. Some kinds of data<br />have linear (or string-like) characteristics. For example, text can be<br />thought of as a linear sequence of characters. An audio waveform is also<br />linear, and so is a musical score. Other kinds of data have tabular (or<br />array-like) characteristics. For example, a spreadsheet or text arranged<br />in columns and rows is tabular. Still other kinds of data have neither<br />linear nor tabular characteristics. Graphics and graphical components of<br />an interface can be placed in various relative positions and still have<br />meaning. They are said to have free-form characteristics.<br /><br /><br />A particular object can contain data that has one or more of these types<br />of characteristics, but each characteristic might be displayed best in a<br />different type of view. For each object, a designer should provide views<br />that allow a user to display and work easily with each type of data<br />contained in the object. When a user makes a change to the data displayed<br />in one view of an object, the change should be reflected immediately in<br />all other views of the same object (if the user has chosen to have the<br />other views refreshed automatically).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 915 name="FIGVWFIG" id="FIGVWFIG"> </a><a href="picture-29?mode=zoom"><img 916 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P29.GIF" 917 alt="PICTURE 29" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 29. Views Available for Representing Objects in the CUA User<br />Interface. The CUA interface provides four basic types of<br />views plus two particular kinds of contents views. A product<br />can have a composed view or contents view tailored for that<br />product's users.<br /><br /><br />The four basic types of views are described in the following sections.<br />Designers should keep in mind that these four types of views represent<br />idealized views along a continuum of possible views. A designer can<br />create product-specific views that fall somewhere between these<br />categories. A designer should provide an appropriate name, based on the<br />users' conceptual model, for each view in a product.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 918 <pre></pre> 919 <hr /> 920 <h4>1.4.5.1.2 Contents Views</h4> 921 <pre></pre> 922 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>contents</i> <i>view</i> lists the components of an object. The components can be<br /> ordered or unordered in the view; the order of the information displayed<br /> in a contents view does not affect the meaning of the object containing<br /> the information. For example, the data on which a graph object or chart<br /> object is based could be displayed as an alphabetic, numeric, or random<br /> list in a contents view. The data is still the same, no matter the order<br /> in which it is listed. Container objects in particular are likely to be<br /> displayed in a contents view, although data objects and device objects can<br /> also be displayed in a contents view.<a 923 href="1.4.5.1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTVW"> Figure 31</a> illustrates a contents<br /> view.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 924 name="FIGCONTVW" id="FIGCONTVW"> </a><a href="picture-31?mode=zoom"><img 925 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P31.GIF" 926 alt="PICTURE 31" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 31. A Contents View. A contents view of a data object lists the<br />data contained in the object. The order of the data does not<br />affect the meaning of the object in a contents view.<br /><br /><br />The CUA interface provides for two standard kinds of contents views:<br /><br /><br />° Icons view<br />° Details view.<br /><br /><br />A designer can provide other product-specific kinds of contents views,<br />depending on a user's needs. However, if a product includes objects that<br />contain other objects, the product should provide at least the two<br />standard kinds of contents views.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Icons</i> <i>View</i>: An <i>icons</i> <i>view</i> displays each object as an icon and is<br /> appropriate when a designer wants to give a user an easy way to change the<br /> position of objects or to otherwise directly manipulate them (see<br /> <a 927 href="1.4.6?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJINT">"Interaction with Objects" in topic 1.4.6</a>). From a user's perspective, an<br /> icon is the object itself. From a designer's perspective, an icon is a<br /> composed view of an object. Note, however, that an icons view is a<br /> contents view. <a 928 href="1.4.5.1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTFIG">Figure 32</a> shows an icons view of a folder object that<br /> contains several documents.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 929 name="FIGCONTFIG" id="FIGCONTFIG"> </a><a href="picture-32?mode=zoom"><img 930 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P32.GIF" 931 alt="PICTURE 32" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 32. An Icons View of an Opened Folder. This view of the contents<br />of a folder displays an icon for each contained object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Reflections</b>: An object usually is represented by only one icon. However,<br /> for some tasks, a user might find it convenient to represent an object<br /> with more than one icon. For example, a user might want a representation<br /> of a printer object in more than one place so that the user could have<br /> easy access to the printer from whichever folder or work area the user is<br /> working in. A user can create an additional icon, known as a <i>reflection</i>,<br /> to represent the same printer object.<br /><br /><br />Each reflection of a single object is related to the other reflections in<br />such a way that when a user changes an object by way of one reflection,<br />the change is reflected in all other reflections of the same object.<br />However, if a user deletes a reflection, other reflections of the same<br />object are not necessarily deleted. A user can choose to delete<br />individual reflections or can delete all reflections of an object at once,<br />at the user's discretion.<br /><br /><br />For related information, see <a 932 href="1.4.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRAICONS">"Icons" in topic 1.4.3</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Details</i> <i>View</i>: A <i>details</i> <i>view</i> combines small icons with text that provides<br /> additional information about objects. The type of information displayed<br /> depends on the type of object and the type of tasks a user wants to<br /> perform. The benefit of a details view is that the user doesn't have to<br /> open an object to gain quick access to some of the object's more<br /> frequently used information. Small icons are included in a details view<br /> to provide a way for a user to directly manipulate each object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 933 name="FIGCONDFIG" id="FIGCONDFIG"> </a><a href="picture-33?mode=zoom"><img 934 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P33.GIF" 935 alt="PICTURE 33" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 33. A Details View. This view of the contents of a folder displays<br />detailed information about each object in the folder. The<br />details include the date the contained objects were created and<br />the date they were last modified.<br /></pre> 936 <pre></pre> 937 <ul> 938 <li><a href="1.4.5.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.5.1.1 939 Composed Views</a></li> 940 <li><a href="1.4.5.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.5.1.2 941 Contents Views</a></li> 942 <li><a href="1.4.5.1.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.5.1.3 943 Settings Views</a></li> 944 <li><a href="1.4.5.1.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.5.1.4 945 Help Views</a></li> 946 <li><a href="1.4.5.1.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.5.1.5 947 Distinguishing a Composed View from a 948 Contents View</a></li> 949 </ul> 950 <pre></pre> 951 <hr /> 952 <h4>1.4.5.1.1 Composed Views</h4> 953 <pre></pre> 954 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>composed</i> <i>view</i> presents the components of an object in relative order and<br /> is appropriate when the relationships among the components contribute to<br /> the overall meaning of the object. Data objects in particular are likely<br /> to be displayed in a composed view. For example, a graph object or chart<br /> object would typically be displayed in a composed view because the<br /> arrangement of the components determines the meaning of the object as a<br /> whole. If the arrangement of the components changes, the meaning of the<br /> object changes.<a 955 href="1.4.5.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCOMPFIG"> Figure 30</a> shows an example of a composed view.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 956 name="FIGCOMPFIG" id="FIGCOMPFIG"> </a><a href="picture-30?mode=zoom"><img 957 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P30.GIF" 958 alt="PICTURE 30" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 30. A Composed View. A composed view of a data object arranges the<br />object's data in an order that conveys the data's meaning. If<br />the data were arranged differently in a composed view, the<br />object would have a different meaning.<br /></pre> 959 <pre></pre> 960 <hr /> 961 <h4>1.4.5.1.3 Settings Views</h4> 962 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>settings</i> <i>view</i> displays information about the characteristics,<br /> attributes, or properties of an object, and it provides a way for a user<br /> to change the settings of some characteristics or properties. Not all<br /> settings can be changed, however. For example, a user cannot change an<br /> object's creation date even though the date might be displayed in a<br /> settings view of the object.<br /><br /><br />A settings view typically is provided for each type of object. In a<br />settings view for a data object such as a document, a user could change<br />the font, type size, color, or whatever other settings are appropriate for<br />the document. In a settings view for a device object such as a printer, a<br />user could change the number of copies, the page orientation, the output<br />destination, or whatever other settings are appropriate for the printer.<br /><br /><br />Settings views can be applied more broadly as well. For example, certain<br />kinds of information about an object can be thought of as settings. An<br />address book object might contain objects representing the people that a<br />user writes to, and the settings for each of these objects might consist<br />of the person's name and address. <a 963 href="1.4.5.1.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSETFIG">Figure 34</a> shows an example of a<br /> settings view.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 964 name="FIGSETFIG" id="FIGSETFIG"> </a><a href="picture-34?mode=zoom"><img 965 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P34.GIF" 966 alt="PICTURE 34" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 34. A Settings View. This settings view of a folder object<br />displays the object's current settings and provides mechanisms<br />that allow a user to change the settings.<br /></pre> 967 <hr /> 968 <h4>1.4.5.1.4 Help Views</h4> 969 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>help</i> <i>view</i> provides information that can assist a user in working with an<br /> object. The type of information displayed in a help view depends on the<br /> type of help a user requests. For example, a user can request help for an<br /> entire window or for just part of one.<a 970 href="1.4.5.1.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGHLPFIG1"> Figure 35</a> shows an example of help<br /> for the <b>Work</b> <b>area</b> choice in the My Folder - Settings window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 971 name="FIGHLPFIG1" id="FIGHLPFIG1"> </a><a href="picture-35?mode=zoom"><img 972 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P35.GIF" 973 alt="PICTURE 35" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 35. A Help View<br /><br /><br />For more details about the kind of help information that appears in a help<br />view, see <a 974 href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP">"Help" in topic 1.4.9</a>.<br /></pre> 975 <hr /> 976 <h4>1.4.5.1.5 Distinguishing a 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 3416 3417 3418 <pre width="80">Typically only one pointer appears on the workplace at a time, and it is associated with a user's pointing device, such as a mouse, trackball, or joystick. When a user moves the pointing device, the pointer moves correspondingly, and when a user presses a button on the pointing device, the object that the pointer is on is affected.<br /><br />The pointing device used most often in a CUA environment is a two-button mouse. One of the two mouse buttons is called the <i>selection</i> <i>button</i> (see <a href="1.4.6.4?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELECTN">"Selection" in topic 1.4.6.4</a>). The other mouse button is called the <i>manipulation</i> <i>button,</i> and it is used for direct manipulation (see <a href="1.4.6?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJINT">"Interaction with Objects" in topic 1.4.6</a>). A user can choose either the left or right mouse button for either function, selection or manipulation. If a three-button mouse is used, the third button is called the menu button.<br /><br />The CUA pointer is usually shaped like an arrow. However, the shape of the pointer can change to indicate what kinds of actions are possible. For example, the pointer is shaped like an I-beam when it is over text that can be edited or over an area into which text can be placed. Products can provide product-specific pointers that serve the special needs of their audiences. For example, a graphics product might provide a special pointer to help a user draw lines accurately. However, before providing a new pointer, a designer should first consider modifying an existing pointer so that a user can transfer knowledge about the existing pointer rather than having to learn about a new one.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ7" name="FIGFIGUNIQ7"> </a><a href="picture-22?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 22" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P22.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 22. Pointers. The pointer is usually shaped like an arrow, but it changes to an I-beam when it is on text that can be edited or on an area into which text can be placed. The pointer can change to other shapes as well, depending on the mode the user is in.</span><br /></pre> 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 <hr /> 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 <h3>1.4.4.2 The Cursor</h3> 3436 3437 3438 3439 3440 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 <pre width="80">Typically only one cursor appears on the workplace at a time, and it is associated with a user's keyboard. When a user presses a key, information is transmitted to the operating system, and if appropriate, something appears or occurs at the cursor's position.<br /><br />The CUA cursors are the <i>selection</i> <i>cursor</i> and the <i>text</i> <i>cursor.</i> The selection cursor is used to indicate which items a user can interact with from the keyboard. For example, a selection cursor can indicate which items can be selected or which items can display a pop-up menu (see <a href="1.4.6.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONMENU">"Pop-up Menus" in topic 1.4.6.2</a>). In some scopes of selection (see <a href="1.4.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCOPSEL">"Scope</a><a href="1.4.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCOPSEL">of Selection" in topic 1.4.6.4.1</a>) the selection cursor just indicates the cursor's position. In other scopes of selection, the selection cursor also automatically selects the item it is on.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ8" name="FIGFIGUNIQ8"> </a><a href="picture-23?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 23" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P23.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 23. Selection Cursor. The selection cursor is typically a bar of color, a box with a dotted outline, or an area that appears to be pressed in relation to the surrounding window area.</span><br /><br />The text cursor is used to type text. When a user is in insert mode--that is, when characters a user types are added to the existing characters--the text cursor appears as a vertical line. When a user is in replace mode--that is, when characters a user types replace existing characters--the text cursor can change in appearance. For example, the cursor can become a vertical bar of color surrounding the character that will be replaced.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ9" name="FIGFIGUNIQ9"> </a><a href="picture-24?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 24" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P24.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 24. Text Cursors. The text cursor is a vertical line when a product is in insert mode. It is a vertical bar of color when a product is in replace mode.</span><br /><br /></pre> 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 <hr /> 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 <h4>1.4.4.2.1 Cursor Movement</h4> 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 <pre width="80">A user can move the cursor by pressing a <i>cursor</i> <i>movement</i> <i>key.</i> Cursor movement keys include the arrow keys (labeled _, _ÿ, ", and ) and the Home, End, Page Up, and Page Down keys. A user can also move the cursor by pressing and releasing a button on a mouse or other pointing device. When a user presses the selection button on a mouse, the cursor moves to the position that the pointer was on.<br /></pre> 3470 3471 3472 3473 3474 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 <hr /> 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 <h4>1.4.4.2.2 Mnemonics</h4> 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 <pre width="80">A <i>mnemonic</i> is a readily recognized character that a user can type to move the cursor quickly from one place in a window to another. For example, if the cursor is on the first choice in a menu, a user can move the cursor directly to the last choice in the menu by typing the mnemonic for that choice. A mnemonic is typically indicated with an underline.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ10" name="FIGFIGUNIQ10"> </a><a href="picture-25?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 25" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P25.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 25. Mnemonic. A mnemonic is a character that a user can type to quickly move the cursor to the choice containing the mnemonic. Each underlined character in the figure is a mnemonic.</span><br /></pre> 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 <hr /> 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 <h4>1.4.4.2.3 Shortcut Keys</h4> 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 <pre width="80">A <i>shortcut</i> <i>key</i> is a key or a combination of keys that a user can press to select a choice from a menu. The menu need not be displayed. Shortcut keys are provided for choices that a user will use frequently. Shortcut keys provide a quicker method of interaction, particularly for experienced users who are likely to prefer remembering the combinations to displaying and navigating through a menu for each desired choice.<br /><br />A shortcut key is typically displayed next to the choice it pertains to so that a user can learn to associate the shortcut key with that choice. A designer might want to provide a mechanism that allows users to turn off the display of the shortcut keys.<a href="1.4.4.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSKEYFIG"> Figure 26</a> illustrates some of the standard CUA shortcut keys.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSKEYFIG" name="FIGSKEYFIG"> </a><a href="picture-26?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 26" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P26.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 26. Shortcut Keys. A shortcut key is a key or combination of keys that a user can press to select a choice from a menu. A user can use a shortcut key even when the menu containing the corresponding choice is not displayed.</span><br /></pre> 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 <hr /> 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 <h2><a id="HDRWINDOWS" name="HDRWINDOWS">1.4.5 3537 Windows</a><br /> 3538 3539 3540 3541 </h2> 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 <pre width="80">A <i>window</i> is a part of the CUA interface through which a user can view an object. A window is bounded by a window <i>border,</i> which separates the window from other windows on the workplace. Within the border are mechanisms that allow a user to manipulate the window and its contents.<br /><br /><a id="FIGWINFIG" name="FIGWINFIG"> </a><a href="picture-27?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 27" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P27.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 27. A Typical Window and Its Components</span><br /><br /><a href="1.4.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGWINFIG">Figure 27</a> shows a typical window and its components. The system menu symbol, the window border, and the window sizing buttons allow a user to change the size and position of a window. The menu bar and scroll bars allow a user to work with the window's contents. The window title indicates the name of the object seen in the window, and it also indicates which kind of view (see <a href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">"Views" in topic 1.4.5.1</a>) is displayed. The information area displays brief messages to a user about the object or choice that the cursor is on. Information about the normal completion of a process can also appear in the information area. For example, if a user copies several objects from one container to another, the information area in a container's window could display a brief message to tell the user when the copying has been completed.<br /><br />A window and its content--that is, the information below the menu bar and above the horizontal scroll bar--are not permanently tied together. A user can completely change the content of a window without opening a new window. For example, a user can change the view (see <a href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">"Views" in</a><a href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS"> </a><a href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">topic 1.4.5.1</a>) of the object displayed in the window. A user can also control how much of a window's content is visible by changing the size of the window or by splitting a window into separate portions called <i>panes. </i>Each pane can display different parts of the same object and can be scrolled independently.<br /><br /><a id="FIGPANES" name="FIGPANES"> </a><a href="picture-28?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 28" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P28.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 28. A Window Divided into Two Panes</span><br /><br />The CUA interface provides two types of windows: <i>primary</i> <i>windows</i> and <i>secondary</i> <i>windows.</i> A primary window appears when a user opens an object, and it is where the main interaction between a user and an object takes place. A secondary window appears when a user needs, or needs to provide, information related to an object in a primary window. For example, a secondary window might contain a message (see <a href="1.4.7.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMSG">"Messages" in topic 1.4.7.1</a>) or help information (see<a href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP"> "Help" in topic 1.4.9</a>), or it might contain controls (see <a href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTRL">"Controls" in topic 1.4.6.3.2</a>) that help a user provide additional information.<br /><br /></pre> 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 <hr /> 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 <h3><a id="HDRVIEWS" name="HDRVIEWS">1.4.5.1 3567 Views</a></h3> 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 <pre width="80">The content of a window is a <i>view.</i> A view is a way of looking at an object's information. Different views display information in different forms, which mimics the way information about an object is presented in the real world. Consider, for example, a user's manual for a personal computer system. A user's manual typically describes a computer system in several different ways. It provides:<br /><br />° A picture of the entire system with each piece correctly set up<br />° A picture of each piece of the system<br />° A list of the pieces of the system, such as the display screen, keyboard, pointing device, and printer<br />° A list of the features of the system, such as the processing speed and memory capacity<br />° Step-by-step directions for setting up the system and for using each piece of the system.<br /><br />Each of these ways of looking at or describing the computer system is a view of the system.<br /><br />The CUA interface also provides different kinds of views for objects in the CUA environment. The appearance of a window's contents and the kinds of interaction possible in a window are determined, in part, by the type of view presented in the window. The four basic types of views are:<br /><br />° Composed view<br />° Contents view<br />° Settings view<br />° Help view.<br /><br />An object can have more than one view. In fact, most objects have several types of views.<br /><br />To determine which types of views an object should have, a designer needs to consider which kinds of data an object contains. Some kinds of data have linear (or string-like) characteristics. For example, text can be thought of as a linear sequence of characters. An audio waveform is also linear, and so is a musical score. Other kinds of data have tabular (or array-like) characteristics. For example, a spreadsheet or text arranged in columns and rows is tabular. Still other kinds of data have neither linear nor tabular characteristics. Graphics and graphical components of an interface can be placed in various relative positions and still have meaning. They are said to have free-form characteristics.<br /><br />A particular object can contain data that has one or more of these types of characteristics, but each characteristic might be displayed best in a different type of view. For each object, a designer should provide views that allow a user to display and work easily with each type of data contained in the object. When a user makes a change to the data displayed in one view of an object, the change should be reflected immediately in all other views of the same object (if the user has chosen to have the other views refreshed automatically).<br /><br /><a id="FIGVWFIG" name="FIGVWFIG"> </a><a href="picture-29?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 29" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P29.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 29. Views Available for Representing Objects in the CUA User Interface. The CUA interface provides four basic types of views plus two particular kinds of contents views. A product can have a composed view or contents view tailored for that product's users.</span><br /><br />The four basic types of views are described in the following sections. Designers should keep in mind that these four types of views represent idealized views along a continuum of possible views. A designer can create product-specific views that fall somewhere between these categories. A designer should provide an appropriate name, based on the users' conceptual model, for each view in a product.<br /></pre> 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 <hr /> 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 <h4>1.4.5.1.2 Contents Views</h4> 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 <pre width="80">A <i>contents</i> <i>view</i> lists the components of an object. The components can be ordered or unordered in the view; the order of the information displayed in a contents view does not affect the meaning of the object containing the information. For example, the data on which a graph object or chart object is based could be displayed as an alphabetic, numeric, or random list in a contents view. The data is still the same, no matter the order in which it is listed. Container objects in particular are likely to be displayed in a contents view, although data objects and device objects can also be displayed in a contents view.<a href="1.4.5.1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTVW"> Figure 31</a> illustrates a contents view.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCONTVW" name="FIGCONTVW"> </a><a href="picture-31?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 31" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P31.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 31. A Contents View. A contents view of a data object lists the data contained in the object. The order of the data does not affect the meaning of the object in a contents view.</span><br /><br />The CUA interface provides for two standard kinds of contents views:<br /><br />° Icons view<br />° Details view.<br /><br />A designer can provide other product-specific kinds of contents views, depending on a user's needs. However, if a product includes objects that contain other objects, the product should provide at least the two standard kinds of contents views.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Icons</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">View</i>: An <i>icons</i> <i>view</i> displays each object as an icon and is appropriate when a designer wants to give a user an easy way to change the position of objects or to otherwise directly manipulate them (see <a href="1.4.6?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJINT">"Interaction with Objects" in topic 1.4.6</a>). From a user's perspective, an icon is the object itself. From a designer's perspective, an icon is a composed view of an object. Note, however, that an icons view is a contents view. <a href="1.4.5.1.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTFIG">Figure 32</a> shows an icons view of a folder object that contains several documents.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCONTFIG" name="FIGCONTFIG"> </a><a href="picture-32?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 32" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P32.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 32. An Icons View of an Opened Folder. This view of the contents of a folder displays an icon for each contained object.</span><br /><br /><b>Reflections</b>: An object usually is represented by only one icon. However, for some tasks, a user might find it convenient to represent an object with more than one icon. For example, a user might want a representation of a printer object in more than one place so that the user could have easy access to the printer from whichever folder or work area the user is working in. A user can create an additional icon, known as a <i>reflection</i>, to represent the same printer object.<br /><br />Each reflection of a single object is related to the other reflections in such a way that when a user changes an object by way of one reflection, the change is reflected in all other reflections of the same object. However, if a user deletes a reflection, other reflections of the same object are not necessarily deleted. A user can choose to delete individual reflections or can delete all reflections of an object at once, at the user's discretion.<br /><br />For related information, see <a href="1.4.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRAICONS">"Icons" in topic 1.4.3</a>.<br /><br /><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Details View</span>: A <i>details</i> <i>view</i> combines small icons with text that provides additional information about objects. The type of information displayed depends on the type of object and the type of tasks a user wants to perform. The benefit of a details view is that the user doesn't have to open an object to gain quick access to some of the object's more frequently used information. Small icons are included in a details view to provide a way for a user to directly manipulate each object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCONDFIG" name="FIGCONDFIG"> </a><a href="picture-33?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 33" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P33.GIF" /></a><br /><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 33. A Details View. This view of the contents of a folder displays detailed information about each object in the folder. The details include the date the contained objects were created and the date they were last modified.</span><br /><br /></pre> 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 <ul> 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 </ul> 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 <hr /> 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 <h4>1.4.5.1.1 Composed Views</h4> 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 <pre width="80">A <i>composed</i> <i>view</i> presents the components of an object in relative order and is appropriate when the relationships among the components contribute to the overall meaning of the object. Data objects in particular are likely to be displayed in a composed view. For example, a graph object or chart object would typically be displayed in a composed view because the arrangement of the components determines the meaning of the object as a whole. If the arrangement of the components changes, the meaning of the object changes.<a href="1.4.5.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCOMPFIG"> Figure 30</a> shows an example of a composed view.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCOMPFIG" name="FIGCOMPFIG"> </a><a href="picture-30?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 30" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P30.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 30. A Composed View. A composed view of a data object arranges the object's data in an order that conveys the data's meaning. If the data were arranged differently in a composed view, the object would have a different meaning.</span><br /></pre> 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 <hr /> 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 <h4>1.4.5.1.3 Settings Views</h4> 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 <pre width="80">A <i>settings</i> <i>view</i> displays information about the characteristics, attributes, or properties of an object, and it provides a way for a user to change the settings of some characteristics or properties. Not all settings can be changed, however. For example, a user cannot change an object's creation date even though the date might be displayed in a settings view of the object.<br /><br />A settings view typically is provided for each type of object. In a settings view for a data object such as a document, a user could change the font, type size, color, or whatever other settings are appropriate for the document. In a settings view for a device object such as a printer, a user could change the number of copies, the page orientation, the output destination, or whatever other settings are appropriate for the printer.<br /><br />Settings views can be applied more broadly as well. For example, certain kinds of information about an object can be thought of as settings. An address book object might contain objects representing the people that a user writes to, and the settings for each of these objects might consist of the person's name and address. <a href="1.4.5.1.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSETFIG">Figure 34</a> shows an example of a settings view.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSETFIG" name="FIGSETFIG"> </a><a href="picture-34?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 34" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P34.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 34. A Settings View. This settings view of a folder object displays the object's current settings and provides mechanisms that allow a user to change the settings.</span><br /></pre> 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 <hr /> 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 <h4>1.4.5.1.4 Help Views</h4> 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 <pre width="80">A <i>help</i> <i>view</i> provides information that can assist a user in working with an object. The type of information displayed in a help view depends on the type of help a user requests. For example, a user can request help for an entire window or for just part of one.<a href="1.4.5.1.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGHLPFIG1"> Figure 35</a> shows an example of help for the <b>Work</b> <b>area</b> choice in the My Folder - Settings window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGHLPFIG1" name="FIGHLPFIG1"> </a><a href="picture-35?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 35" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P35.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 35. A Help View</span><br /><br />For more details about the kind of help information that appears in a help view, see <a href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP">"Help" in topic 1.4.9</a>.<br /></pre> 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 <hr /> 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 <h4>1.4.5.1.5 Distinguishing a 977 3719 Composed View from a Contents 978 3720 View</h4> 979 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />From a designer's perspective, the distinction between a composed view and<br />a contents view can be somewhat blurred, depending on the object being<br />viewed. For example, a product might provide a kind of view that lists<br />the sections of a document, much as an outline does. Lists of an object's<br />components are characteristic of a contents view. However, the product's<br />view might list the sections of the document in a meaningful order, which<br />is characteristic of a composed view.<br /><br /><br />Designers should not be overly concerned about which category a particular<br />view falls into. Instead, designers should create views that convey<br />information in a form that is meaningful to users, regardless of where the<br />views fall in the continuum of view types. The names that designers<br />choose for the views should describe the information displayed and should<br />be easily understood by users. For example, a product could provide a<br />"Formatted Text" view or a "Page Layout" view as the composed view of a<br />document. The product could also provide an "Outline" view as either a<br />composed view or a contents view of a document.<br /></pre> 980 <hr /> 981 <h2><a name="HDROBJINT" id="HDROBJINT">1.4.6 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 <pre width="80">From a designer's perspective, the distinction between a composed view and a contents view can be somewhat blurred, depending on the object being viewed. For example, a product might provide a kind of view that lists the sections of a document, much as an outline does. Lists of an object's components are characteristic of a contents view. However, the product's view might list the sections of the document in a meaningful order, which is characteristic of a composed view.<br /><br />Designers should not be overly concerned about which category a particular view falls into. Instead, designers should create views that convey information in a form that is meaningful to users, regardless of where the views fall in the continuum of view types. The names that designers choose for the views should describe the information displayed and should be easily understood by users. For example, a product could provide a "Formatted Text" view or a "Page Layout" view as the composed view of a document. The product could also provide an "Outline" view as either a composed view or a contents view of a document.<br /></pre> 3731 3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3738 3739 3740 <hr /> 3741 3742 3743 3744 3745 <h2><a id="HDROBJINT" name="HDROBJINT">1.4.6 982 3746 Interaction with 983 3747 Objects</a></h2> 984 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Natural languages typically have many more nouns than verbs, and a<br />graphical user interface typically contains more objects than actions.<br />Just as the same verb can be applied to many nouns, the same action can be<br />applied to many objects. The <i>object-action</i> <i>paradigm</i> is a pattern for<br /> interaction in which a user first selects an object, then selects an<br /> action. When a user selects an object first, the system can then present<br /> a list of actions that can be applied to that object; the user does not<br /> have to remember which actions are available. The object-action paradigm<br /> is really a continuum, with <i>direct</i> <i>manipulation</i> at one end and <i>indirect</i><br /><i>manipulation</i> at the other.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 985 name="FIGFIGUNIQ11" id="FIGFIGUNIQ11"> </a><a 986 href="picture-36?mode=zoom"><img 987 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P36.GIF" 988 alt="PICTURE 36" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 36. The Object-Action Continuum. At one end of the continuum is<br />direct manipulation, in which an object and an action are<br />closely bound. At the other end is indirect manipulation, in<br />which a user selects an object, then selects an action.<br />Between the two extremes are other manipulation techniques,<br />such as drag and drop, pop-up menus, and menu bars.<br /><br /><br />Direct manipulation is interaction with an object by way of a pointing<br />device. This interaction technique closely resembles the way a user<br />interacts with objects in the real world. For example, using direct<br />manipulation a user can "pick up" an object and put it into a folder.<br />During direct manipulation, an object and an action are bound together<br />closely.<br /><br /><br />Indirect manipulation is interaction with an object through choices and<br />controls (see <a 989 href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTRL">"Controls" in topic 1.4.6.3.2</a>). Indirect manipulation can<br /> be accomplished with either a pointing device or a keyboard. During<br /> indirect manipulation, an object and an action are separated. A user<br /> selects an object first, then the interface immediately tailors and<br /> presents a list of appropriate actions, which are displayed as choices<br /> that the user can apply to that object. The product, rather than the<br /> user, stores the information that tells a user which actions can be<br /> applied to the selected object. Users who interact with a computer by<br /> using a keyboard exclusively can use indirect manipulation to obtain<br /> results equivalent to those available through the use of direct<br /> manipulation.<br /><br /><br />Other manipulation techniques can fall between the two extremes. For<br />example, using a <i>pop-up</i> <i>menu</i> (see <a 990 href="1.4.6.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONMENU">"Pop-up Menus" in topic 1.4.6.2</a>) is more<br /> direct than using other kinds of menus, but it is less direct than<br /> dragging an object.<br /><br /><br />The following sections provide details about techniques and components<br />used for interaction with objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 991 <ul> 992 <li><a href="1.4.6.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.1 993 Drag and Drop</a></li> 994 <li><a href="1.4.6.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.2 995 Pop-up Menus</a></li> 996 <li><a href="1.4.6.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.3 997 Choices and Controls</a></li> 998 <li><a href="1.4.6.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.4 999 Selection</a></li> 1000 <li><a href="1.4.6.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.5 1001 Copying and Creating Objects</a></li> 1002 </ul> 1003 <pre></pre> 1004 <hr /> 1005 <h3><a name="HDRDRAGDRP" id="HDRDRAGDRP">1.4.6.1 Drag 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 3757 <pre width="80">Natural languages typically have many more nouns than verbs, and a graphical user interface typically contains more objects than actions. Just as the same verb can be applied to many nouns, the same action can be applied to many objects. The <i>object-action</i> <i>paradigm</i> is a pattern for interaction in which a user first selects an object, then selects an action. When a user selects an object first, the system can then present a list of actions that can be applied to that object; the user does not have to remember which actions are available. The object-action paradigm is really a continuum, with <i>direct</i> <i>manipulation</i> at one end and <i>indirect</i><br /><i>manipulation</i> at the other.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ11" name="FIGFIGUNIQ11"> </a><a href="picture-36?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 36" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P36.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 36. The Object-Action Continuum. At one end of the continuum is direct manipulation, in which an object and an action are closely bound. At the other end is indirect manipulation, in which a user selects an object, then selects an action. Between the two extremes are other manipulation techniques, such as drag and drop, pop-up menus, and menu bars.</span><br /><br />Direct manipulation is interaction with an object by way of a pointing device. This interaction technique closely resembles the way a user interacts with objects in the real world. For example, using direct manipulation a user can "pick up" an object and put it into a folder. During direct manipulation, an object and an action are bound together closely.<br /><br />Indirect manipulation is interaction with an object through choices and controls (see <a href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTRL">"Controls" in topic 1.4.6.3.2</a>). Indirect manipulation can be accomplished with either a pointing device or a keyboard. During indirect manipulation, an object and an action are separated. A user selects an object first, then the interface immediately tailors and presents a list of appropriate actions, which are displayed as choices that the user can apply to that object. The product, rather than the user, stores the information that tells a user which actions can be applied to the selected object. Users who interact with a computer by using a keyboard exclusively can use indirect manipulation to obtain results equivalent to those available through the use of direct manipulation.<br /><br />Other manipulation techniques can fall between the two extremes. For example, using a <i>pop-up</i> <i>menu</i> (see <a href="1.4.6.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONMENU">"Pop-up Menus" in topic 1.4.6.2</a>) is more direct than using other kinds of menus, but it is less direct than dragging an object.<br /><br />The following sections provide details about techniques and components used for interaction with objects.<br /><br /></pre> 3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 3765 3766 3767 <hr /> 3768 3769 3770 3771 3772 <h3><a id="HDRDRAGDRP" name="HDRDRAGDRP">1.4.6.1 3773 Drag 1006 3774 and 1007 3775 Drop</a></h3> 1008 <pre></pre> 1009 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><i>Drag</i> <i>and</i> <i>drop</i> is an interaction technique that falls at the direct<br /> manipulation end of the object-action continuum. It is called <i>drag</i> <i>and</i><br /><i>drop</i> because it involves moving an object from one place (dragging) and<br /> leaving it at another (dropping). For example, to change a value<br /> represented by a bar on a bar chart, a user could drag the end of a bar<br /> until the bar represented an appropriate new value. The user would then<br /> drop the end of the bar in the new location to complete the direct<br /> manipulation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1010 name="FIGFIGUNIQ12" id="FIGFIGUNIQ12"> </a><a 1011 href="picture-37?mode=zoom"><img 1012 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P37.GIF" 1013 alt="PICTURE 37" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 37. Direct Manipulation in a Bar Chart View of a Document Object.<br />By dragging a bar, a user can change the value the bar<br />represents.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Drag and drop often involves a <i>source</i> <i>object</i> and a <i>target</i> <i>object.</i> A<br /> source object is usually the object a user is working with, and a target<br /> object is usually an object that a user is transferring information to.<br /> For example, if a user drags a spreadsheet object to a printer object so<br /> that the spreadsheet will be printed, the spreadsheet is the source object<br /> and the printer is the target object.<br /><br /><br />The result of drag and drop can change depending on what the source object<br />is and what the target object is. For example, if a user drags a<br />spreadsheet object from one folder object and drops it onto another, the<br />spreadsheet is moved to the target folder. However, if a user drops the<br />same spreadsheet onto a printer object instead of a folder, the operating<br />environment makes a copy of the spreadsheet and puts the copy into the<br />printer's queue to be printed. The original spreadsheet is returned to<br />its original location.<a 1014 href="1.4.6.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGDRAGPRT"> Figure 38</a> illustrates printing a document by<br /> direct manipulation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1015 name="FIGDRAGPRT" id="FIGDRAGPRT"> </a><a href="picture-38?mode=zoom"><img 1016 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P38.GIF" 1017 alt="PICTURE 38" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 38. Printing by Direct Manipulation. A user can drag a document<br />object to a printer object to print the document.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines specify default results for drag and drop actions. The<br />defaults are based on the types of objects (container, data, or device)<br />being manipulated and on the following principles:<br /><br /><br />° When possible, the result of dragging and dropping an object should be<br />the result that a user would expect, given the source object and<br />target object being manipulated.<br /><br /><br />° The result of direct manipulation should be comparatively "safe"--that<br />is, a user should not lose information unexpectedly.<br /><br /><br />° A user should be able to override a default result to obtain a<br />different result.<br /></pre> 1018 <pre></pre> 1019 <hr /> 1020 <h3><a name="HDRCONMENU" id="HDRCONMENU">1.4.6.2 3776 3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 <pre width="80"><i>Drag</i> <i>and</i> <i>drop</i> is an interaction technique that falls at the direct manipulation end of the object-action continuum. It is called <i>drag</i> <i>and</i> <i>drop</i> because it involves moving an object from one place (dragging) and leaving it at another (dropping). For example, to change a value represented by a bar on a bar chart, a user could drag the end of a bar until the bar represented an appropriate new value. The user would then drop the end of the bar in the new location to complete the direct manipulation.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ12" name="FIGFIGUNIQ12"> </a><a href="picture-37?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 37" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P37.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 37. Direct Manipulation in a Bar Chart View of a Document Object. By dragging a bar, a user can change the value the bar represents.</span><br /><br />Drag and drop often involves a <i>source</i> <i>object</i> and a <i>target</i> <i>object.</i> A source object is usually the object a user is working with, and a target object is usually an object that a user is transferring information to. For example, if a user drags a spreadsheet object to a printer object so that the spreadsheet will be printed, the spreadsheet is the source object and the printer is the target object.<br /><br />The result of drag and drop can change depending on what the source object is and what the target object is. For example, if a user drags a spreadsheet object from one folder object and drops it onto another, the spreadsheet is moved to the target folder. However, if a user drops the same spreadsheet onto a printer object instead of a folder, the operating environment makes a copy of the spreadsheet and puts the copy into the printer's queue to be printed. The original spreadsheet is returned to its original location.<a href="1.4.6.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGDRAGPRT"> Figure 38</a> illustrates printing a document by direct manipulation.<br /><br /><a id="FIGDRAGPRT" name="FIGDRAGPRT"> </a><a href="picture-38?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 38" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P38.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 38. Printing by Direct Manipulation. A user can drag a document object to a printer object to print the document.</span><br /><br />The CUA guidelines specify default results for drag and drop actions. The defaults are based on the types of objects (container, data, or device) being manipulated and on the following principles:<br /><br />° When possible, the result of dragging and dropping an object should be the result that a user would expect, given the source object and target object being manipulated.<br />° The result of direct manipulation should be comparatively "safe"--that is, a user should not lose information unexpectedly.<br />° A user should be able to override a default result to obtain a different result.<br /></pre> 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 <hr /> 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 <h3><a id="HDRCONMENU" name="HDRCONMENU">1.4.6.2 1021 3805 Pop-up 1022 3806 Menus</a></h3> 1023 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A second technique for interacting with objects involves the use of <i>pop-up</i><br /><i>menus,</i> which contain only those choices that pertain to an object at the<br /> time the menu is displayed. The menus are called pop-up menus because<br /> they appear to "pop up" next to an object when a user presses the<br /> appropriate key or mouse button. A pop-up menu is available for each<br /> object in an interface. Pop-up menus fall between drag and drop and menu<br /> bars in the object-action continuum. Access to an object's actions by way<br /> of a pop-up menu is more direct than access by way of other types of menus<br /> (see<a 1024 href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMENUS"> "Menus:" in topic 1.4.6.3.2</a>) because a user does not have to select a<br /> choice from a menu bar first. However, pop-up menus are less direct than<br /> drag and drop.<br /><br /><br />The content of a pop-up menu is based on an object's context, which<br />includes the object's container, the object's contents, and the object's<br />state. Variations in an object's context lead to variations in an<br />object's pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br />When a user displays a pop-up menu for a group of objects, the menu<br />contains only those choices that can be applied to all objects in the<br />group.<br /><br /><br />Pop-up menus are particularly useful for objects that incorporate other<br />objects of different types, each requiring a different set of menu<br />choices. For example, in a page layout product that contains text<br />objects, scanned-image objects, and chart objects, a user could see a<br />different pop-up menu for each type of object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1025 name="FIGFIGUNIQ13" id="FIGFIGUNIQ13"> </a><a 1026 href="picture-39?mode=zoom"><img 1027 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P39.GIF" 1028 alt="PICTURE 39" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 39. Pop-up Menu. A pop-up menu contains choices that can be<br />applied to an object at the time that the menu is displayed.<br />Different objects have different pop-up menus.<br /></pre> 1029 <hr /> 1030 <h3>1.4.6.3 Choices and Controls</h3> 1031 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />During indirect manipulation, a user interacts with an object by first<br />selecting the object, then selecting a choice that performs the actual<br />manipulation. The primary interface mechanisms for indirect manipulation<br />are:<br /><br /><br />° Choices<br />° Controls.<br /><br /><br />Each of these interface components is discussed in more detail in the<br />following sections.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1032 <ul> 1033 <li><a href="1.4.6.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.3.1 1034 Choices</a></li> 1035 <li><a href="1.4.6.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.3.2 1036 Controls</a></li> 1037 </ul> 1038 <pre></pre> 1039 <hr /> 1040 <h4>1.4.6.3.1 Choices</h4> 1041 <pre></pre> 1042 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>choice</i> is text or a graphic that a user can select to modify or<br /> manipulate an object. Graphical user interfaces, including the CUA<br /> interface, are full of choices.<br /><br /><br />In the CUA environment there are three types of choices:<br /><br /><br />° Action choices<br />° Routing choices<br />° Settings choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Action</i> <i>Choices</i>: An <i>action</i> <i>choice</i> immediately performs some task. For<br /> example, a choice labeled <b>Print</b> prints an object as soon as the user<br /> selects the choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1043 name="FIGFIGUNIQ14" id="FIGFIGUNIQ14"> </a><a 1044 href="picture-40?mode=zoom"><img 1045 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P40.GIF" 1046 alt="PICTURE 40" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 40. Action Choice. The <b>Print</b> choice is an action choice. When a<br /> user selects the choice, an object is immediately printed on a<br /> user's printer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Routing</i> <i>Choices</i>: A <i>routing</i> <i>choice</i> displays a menu or a window from which<br /> a user can select additional choices or specify additional information<br /> about the task the user is performing. Except when a routing choice<br /> appears on a menu bar (see <a 1047 href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMENUBA">"Menu Bars" in topic 1.4.6.3.2</a>), the name of a<br /> routing choice is followed by a rightward-pointing arrow or an ellipsis<br /> (...). The arrow indicates that the choice displays a menu, and the<br /> ellipsis indicates that the choice displays a window. For example, a<br /> choice labeled <b>Refresh</b> <b>ÿ</b> displays a menu containing choices such as <b>On</b> and<br /> <b>Off</b>, which modify the <b>Refresh</b> <b>ÿ</b> choice. A choice labeled <b>Sort...</b><br />displays a window from which a user can specify the order in which items<br />should be sorted. <a 1048 href="1.4.6.3.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGRTCHOIC">Figure 41 </a>shows examples of routing choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1049 name="FIGRTCHOIC" id="FIGRTCHOIC"> </a><a href="picture-41?mode=zoom"><img 1050 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P41.GIF" 1051 alt="PICTURE 41" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 41. Routing Choices. When a user selects a routing choice, a<br />window or another menu appears. The <b>View</b> choice on the menu<br /> bar is a routing choice. When a user selects it, a pull-down<br /> menu appears. The <b>Sort...</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu is also a<br /> routing choice. When a user selects it, the pull-down menu<br /> disappears and a secondary window appears.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Settings</i> <i>Choices</i>: A <i>settings</i> <i>choice</i> allows a user to display or change<br /> the characteristics or properties of an object. A settings choice can<br /> also be an action choice if the change in a setting occurs as soon as a<br /> user selects the settings choice. For example, a choice labeled <b>Blue</b><br />would allow a user to display or change the color of an object to blue.<br />If the object's color changes as soon as a user selects the choice, the<br /><b>Blue</b> choice is both a settings choice and an action choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1052 name="FIGFIGUNIQ15" id="FIGFIGUNIQ15"> </a><a 1053 href="picture-42?mode=zoom"><img 1054 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P42.GIF" 1055 alt="PICTURE 42" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 42. Settings Choice. A user selects a settings choice to display<br />or change the characteristics of an object.<br /></pre> 1056 <pre></pre> 1057 <hr /> 1058 <h4><a name="HDRACTRL" id="HDRACTRL">1.4.6.3.2 3807 3808 3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 3816 <pre width="80">A second technique for interacting with objects involves the use of <i>pop-up</i> <i>menus,</i> which contain only those choices that pertain to an object at the time the menu is displayed. The menus are called pop-up menus because they appear to "pop up" next to an object when a user presses the appropriate key or mouse button. A pop-up menu is available for each object in an interface. Pop-up menus fall between drag and drop and menu bars in the object-action continuum. Access to an object's actions by way of a pop-up menu is more direct than access by way of other types of menus (see<a href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMENUS"> "Menus:" in topic 1.4.6.3.2</a>) because a user does not have to select a choice from a menu bar first. However, pop-up menus are less direct than drag and drop.<br /><br />The content of a pop-up menu is based on an object's context, which includes the object's container, the object's contents, and the object's state. Variations in an object's context lead to variations in an object's pop-up menu.<br /><br />When a user displays a pop-up menu for a group of objects, the menu contains only those choices that can be applied to all objects in the group.<br /><br />Pop-up menus are particularly useful for objects that incorporate other objects of different types, each requiring a different set of menu choices. For example, in a page layout product that contains text objects, scanned-image objects, and chart objects, a user could see a different pop-up menu for each type of object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ13" name="FIGFIGUNIQ13"> </a><a href="picture-39?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 39" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P39.GIF" /></a><br /> <br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 39. Pop-up Menu. A pop-up menu contains choices that can be applied to an object at the time that the menu is displayed. Different objects have different pop-up menus.</span><br /></pre> 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 <hr /> 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 <h3>1.4.6.3 Choices and Controls</h3> 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 <pre width="80">During indirect manipulation, a user interacts with an object by first selecting the object, then selecting a choice that performs the actual manipulation. The primary interface mechanisms for indirect manipulation are:<br /><br />° Choices<br />° Controls.<br /><br />Each of these interface components is discussed in more detail in the following sections.<br /></pre> 3842 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 <pre></pre> 3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 <hr /> 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 <h4>1.4.6.3.1 Choices</h4> 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 <pre width="80">A <i>choice</i> is text or a graphic that a user can select to modify or manipulate an object. Graphical user interfaces, including the CUA interface, are full of choices.<br /><br />In the CUA environment there are three types of choices:<br /><br />° Action choices<br />° Routing choices<br />° Settings choices.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Action</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Choices</i>: An <i>action</i> <i>choice</i> immediately performs some task. For example, a choice labeled <b>Print</b> prints an object as soon as the user selects the choice.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ14" name="FIGFIGUNIQ14"> </a><a href="picture-40?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 40" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P40.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 40. Action Choice. The </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Print</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> choice is an action choice. When a user selects the choice, an object is immediately printed on a user's printer.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Routing</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Choices</i>: A <i>routing</i> <i>choice</i> displays a menu or a window from which a user can select additional choices or specify additional information about the task the user is performing. Except when a routing choice appears on a menu bar (see <a href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRAMENUBA">"Menu Bars" in topic 1.4.6.3.2</a>), the name of a routing choice is followed by a rightward-pointing arrow or an ellipsis (...). The arrow indicates that the choice displays a menu, and the ellipsis indicates that the choice displays a window. For example, a choice labeled <b>Refresh</b> <b>ÿ</b> displays a menu containing choices such as <b>On</b> and <b>Off</b>, which modify the <b>Refresh</b> <b>ÿ</b> choice. A choice labeled <b>Sort...</b>displays a window from which a user can specify the order in which items<br />should be sorted. <a href="1.4.6.3.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGRTCHOIC">Figure 41 </a>shows examples of routing choices.<br /><br /><a id="FIGRTCHOIC" name="FIGRTCHOIC"> </a><a href="picture-41?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 41" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P41.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 41. Routing Choices. When a user selects a routing choice, a window or another menu appears. The </span><b style="font-style: italic;">View</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> choice on the menu bar is a routing choice. When a user selects it, a pull-down menu appears. The </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Sort...</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> choice in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">View</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> menu is also a routing choice. When a user selects it, the pull-down menu disappears and a secondary window appears.</span><br /><br style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;" /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Settings</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Choices</i>: A <i>settings</i> <i>choice</i> allows a user to display or change the characteristics or properties of an object. A settings choice can also be an action choice if the change in a setting occurs as soon as a user selects the settings choice. For example, a choice labeled <b>Blue</b> would allow a user to display or change the color of an object to blue. If the object's color changes as soon as a user selects the choice, the <b>Blue</b> choice is both a settings choice and an action choice.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ15" name="FIGFIGUNIQ15"> </a><a href="picture-42?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 42" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P42.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 42. Settings Choice. A user selects a settings choice to display or change the characteristics of an object.</span><br /><br /></pre> 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 <hr /> 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 <h4><a id="HDRACTRL" name="HDRACTRL">1.4.6.3.2 1059 3893 Controls</a></h4> 1060 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The CUA interface provides standard mechanisms for indirect manipulation.<br />These mechanisms are called <i>controls,</i> and they are used to display or<br /> obtain certain kinds of information. Various controls can be combined in<br /> a view to provide a user a way to modify an object.<br /><a 1061 name="HDRAMENUS" id="HDRAMENUS"><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Menus:</i> A <i>menu</i> is a mechanism for presenting lists of choices to a user.</a><br />Menus are a staple of most commercially available graphical user<br />interfaces today. The CUA interface includes four types of menus:<br /><br /><br />° Menu bars<br />° Pull-down menus<br />° Cascaded menus<br />° Pop-up menus.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1062 name="FIGFIGUNIQ16" id="FIGFIGUNIQ16"> </a><a 1063 href="picture-43?mode=zoom"><img 1064 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P43.GIF" 1065 alt="PICTURE 43" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 43. Menus. The CUA interface includes menu bars, pull-down menus,<br />cascaded menus, and pop-up menus.<br /><br /><br />Each type of menu is used for a certain purpose or in a certain kind of<br />situation. Menu bars, pull-down menus, and cascaded menus are described<br />in the following sections. However, because pop-up menus are used for<br />direct manipulation rather than indirect manipulation, they are described<br />at<a 1066 href="1.4.6.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONMENU"> "Pop-up Menus" in topic 1.4.6.2</a>.<br /><a 1067 name="HDRAMENUBA" id="HDRAMENUBA"><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Menu</b> <b>Bars</b>: A <i>menu</i> <i>bar</i> appears across the top of most windows, just below</a><br />the window title. It is a horizontal list of routing choices. When a<br />user selects a choice from a menu bar, an associated pull-down menu is<br />displayed.<br /><br /><br />The name of each routing choice on a menu bar indicates what kinds of<br />choices appear in the associated pull-down menu. By naming the routing<br />choices descriptively, a designer encourages a user to learn by exploring.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Pull-Down</b> <b>Menus</b>: A <i>pull-down</i> <i>menu</i> is displayed when a user selects a<br /> choice from a menu bar. Pull-down menus contain choices that are related<br /> to one another in some manner. For example, all choices in a pull-down<br /> menu could apply to:<br /><br /><br />° An entire object (the object displayed in a window)<br />° A selected object (within a window)<br />° Help information<br />° A view of an object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Cascaded</b> <b>Menus</b>: A <i>cascaded</i> <i>menu</i> is displayed beside a pull-down menu or a<br /> pop-up menu when a user selects a routing choice labeled with the ÿ<br /> symbol. A cascaded menu contains choices that modify or are related to<br /> the routing choice. Cascaded menus provide a way for a designer to layer<br /> choices so that a user can have access to a wide range of function without<br /> being confused by lengthy lists of choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Entry</i> <i>Fields</i>: An <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> is an area into which a user can type or<br /> place text. Its boundaries are usually indicated. An entry field is<br /> appropriate for situations in which the entire possible set of values<br /> cannot be predicted. For example, if a product required a user's<br /> identification number, a designer typically would specify an entry field<br /> as the mechanism for eliciting that information, because the designer has<br /> no way to predict the numbers of all possible users.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1068 name="FIGFIGUNIQ17" id="FIGFIGUNIQ17"> </a><a 1069 href="picture-44?mode=zoom"><img 1070 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P44.GIF" 1071 alt="PICTURE 44" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 44. Entry Field. An entry field is an area into which a user can<br />type information.<br /><br /><br />A variation of an entry field is a <i>read-only</i> <i>field.</i> A read-only field<br /> contains information that cannot be directly altered by a user. For<br /> example, a user cannot alter a read-only field by typing new information<br /> over the existing information in the field. However, if the value in a<br /> read-only field is calculated automatically according to the values in<br /> entry fields, a user could change the value in the read-only field by<br /> changing the values in the associated entry fields. For example, an <b>Age</b><br />field might be a read-only field containing a value calculated from an<br />entry field that contains a birthdate. Although a user cannot change the<br />value in the <b>Age</b> field by directly typing into the field, the user can<br /> change the value by changing the value in the <b>Date</b> <b>of</b> <b>Birth</b> entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>List</i> <i>Box</i>: A <i>list</i> <i>box</i> usually consists of a read-only field and a scroll<br /> bar. It is used to display a fixed or variable list of objects or a fixed<br /> or variable list of settings choices. Because the display area can be<br /> scrolled, the list can contain more items than can be displayed at one<br /> time in the display area. The items in the list can be text or graphics,<br /> and a user typically can select an item from a list box.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1072 name="FIGLISTFIG" id="FIGLISTFIG"> </a><a href="picture-45?mode=zoom"><img 1073 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P45.GIF" 1074 alt="PICTURE 45" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 45. List Box. A list box displays text or graphics.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Combination</i> <i>Box</i>: A <i>combination</i> <i>box</i> combines an entry field with a list<br /> box. A user can type information into the entry field or can fill the<br /> entry field by selecting one of the items from the list. A combination<br /> box is appropriate when a designer can predict possible values for the<br /> entry field and wants to serve the needs of both novice and experienced<br /> users. The list box portion of the control prompts novice users to select<br /> an appropriate value, while the entry field portion provides a quicker<br /> means of interaction for experienced users and allows users to type values<br /> not contained in the list.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1075 name="FIGFIGUNIQ18" id="FIGFIGUNIQ18"> </a><a 1076 href="picture-46?mode=zoom"><img 1077 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P46.GIF" 1078 alt="PICTURE 46" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 46. Combination Box. A combination box combines an entry field<br />with a list box.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Drop-Down</i> <i>List</i>: If a situation calls for a list box, but a list box would<br /> crowd the window in which it is displayed, a designer can specify a<br /> <i>drop-down</i> <i>list</i> instead. A drop-down list is a variation of a list box in<br /> which only one item in the list is displayed until a user takes an action<br /> to display the rest of the list.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1079 name="FIGFIGUNIQ19" id="FIGFIGUNIQ19"> </a><a 1080 href="picture-47?mode=zoom"><img 1081 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P47.GIF" 1082 alt="PICTURE 47" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 47. Drop-Down List. A drop-down list displays only one item in the<br />list until a user takes an action to display the rest of the<br />list.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Drop-Down</i> <i>Combination</i> <i>Box</i>: If a situation calls for a combination box,<br /> but a combination box would crowd the window in which it is displayed, a<br /> designer can specify a <i>drop-down</i> <i>combination</i> <i>box</i> instead. A drop-down<br /> combination box is a variation of a combination box in which only the<br /> entry field portion is displayed until a user takes an action to display<br /> the list box portion of the control. When a user selects an item from the<br /> list, that item appears in the entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1083 name="FIGFIGUNIQ20" id="FIGFIGUNIQ20"> </a><a 1084 href="picture-48?mode=zoom"><img 1085 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P48.GIF" 1086 alt="PICTURE 48" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 48. Drop-Down Combination Box. A drop-down combination box<br />displays only an entry field until a user takes an action to<br />display the list box portion of the control.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Spin</i> <i>Button</i>: A <i>spin</i> <i>button</i> allows a user to choose a value from a finite<br /> set of related but mutually exclusive values that have a natural sequence.<br /> For example, a spin button would be appropriate for displaying the days of<br /> the week or the months of the year. A spin button is also appropriate for<br /> displaying choices that increase or decrease in constant units.<br /><br /><br />The values in a spin button are displayed as if they were arranged in a<br />ring. When a user presses the up arrow ("), the value displayed<br />increases. When a user presses the down arrow (), the value displayed<br />decreases.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1087 name="FIGFIGUNIQ21" id="FIGFIGUNIQ21"> </a><a 1088 href="picture-49?mode=zoom"><img 1089 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P49.GIF" 1090 alt="PICTURE 49" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 49. Spin Button. A spin button displays related but mutually<br />exclusive choices that have a natural sequence or that increase<br />or decrease in constant units. When a user presses the up<br />arrow ("), the value displayed increases. When a user presses<br />the down arrow (), the value displayed decreases.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Push</i> <i>Button</i>: A <i>push</i> <i>button</i> can be used to display an action choice or a<br /> routing choice. When a user selects a push button, the action or routing<br /> represented is carried out immediately. A push button is appropriate when<br /> a designer wants to give a user convenient access to a frequently used<br /> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1091 name="FIGPUSHBFG" id="FIGPUSHBFG"> </a><a href="picture-50?mode=zoom"><img 1092 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P50.GIF" 1093 alt="PICTURE 50" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 50. Push Button<br /><br /><br />A designer can replace the standard push button visual (shown in<br /><a 1094 href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGPUSHBFG">Figure 50</a>) with a product-specific visual if it clearly conveys the action<br /> that the push button represents. For example, push buttons for a video<br /> recorder object might resemble the buttons on a real video recorder.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1095 name="FIGFIGUNIQ22" id="FIGFIGUNIQ22"> </a><a 1096 href="picture-51?mode=zoom"><img 1097 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P51.GIF" 1098 alt="PICTURE 51" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 51. Modified Push Button Visuals. The appearance of the push<br />buttons in this multimedia control panel has been modified so<br />that the push buttons resemble the buttons on a real control<br />panel.<br /><br /><br />The window sizing buttons that are part of a typical window are also<br />examples of push buttons with a modified appearance.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Radio</i> <i>Button</i>: A <i>radio</i> <i>button</i> is so named because it operates like the<br /> buttons that used to be found on car radios: only one radio button can be<br /> selected at a time, and when a user selects a radio button, any previously<br /> selected radio button is inactivated.<br /><br /><br />Radio buttons are used to display mutually exclusive choices in situations<br />in which a user must select a choice. Thus, a field of radio buttons<br />always contains at least two radio buttons. Radio buttons prevent a user<br />from selecting incompatible choices. For example, a product might contain<br />the choices <b>On</b> and <b>Off</b> in a single context. Because it would not make<br /> sense for an object to be both on and off at the same time, a designer<br /> should specify radio buttons to display the mutually exclusive <b>On</b> and <b>Off</b><br />choices. Likewise, if a field of radio buttons pertained to a car's<br />transmission, it would not make sense for a user to be able to select both<br />an automatic transmission and a manual transmission for the same car. The<br />radio buttons help prevent a user from making an error.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1099 name="FIGFIGUNIQ23" id="FIGFIGUNIQ23"> </a><a 1100 href="picture-52?mode=zoom"><img 1101 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P52.GIF" 1102 alt="PICTURE 52" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 52. Radio Buttons. Radio buttons can be used to display mutually<br />exclusive textual choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Value</i> <i>Set</i>: Like radio buttons, a <i>value</i> <i>set</i> is used to present mutually<br /> exclusive choices. However, a value set is used primarily for graphical<br /> choices, and the choices are arranged in a matrix. Value sets are useful<br /> for creating palettes of tools.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1103 name="FIGFIGUNIQ24" id="FIGFIGUNIQ24"> </a><a 1104 href="picture-53?mode=zoom"><img 1105 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P53.GIF" 1106 alt="PICTURE 53" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 53. Value Set. A value set is a matrix of mutually exclusive<br />choices. It is used primarily to display graphical choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Check</i> <i>Box</i>: A <i>check</i> <i>box</i> is used to display a settings choice in a group<br /> of settings choices that are not mutually exclusive. Check boxes are<br /> appropriate for choices that have two clearly discernible states. For<br /> example, a check box would be appropriate for a choice that locked an<br /> object, because a user would easily understand that selecting the check<br /> box locks the object, and not selecting the check box leaves the object<br /> unlocked.<br /><br /><br />A field of check boxes can contain one or more choices, and a user can<br />select one or more check boxes, or not select any.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1107 name="FIGFIGUNIQ25" id="FIGFIGUNIQ25"> </a><a 1108 href="picture-54?mode=zoom"><img 1109 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P54.GIF" 1110 alt="PICTURE 54" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 54. Check Boxes. Check boxes provide a way to display choices that<br />are not mutually exclusive. For example, a car could have both<br />air conditioning and power brakes. Each check box choice has<br />two states, such as on or off. Users can easily understand<br />that checking the air conditioning choice means that air<br />conditioning is desired (on), while not checking automatic<br />power antenna means that the antenna is not desired (off).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Slider</i>: A <i>slider</i> is an analog representation of a value. When a slider<br /> is used to display a particular value amid a range of possible values, the<br /> slider typically shows a scale marked with equal units of value. For<br /> example, a designer might use a slider to indicate the volume level of an<br /> audio signal. The slider could indicate decibels.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1111 name="FIGFIGUNIQ26" id="FIGFIGUNIQ26"> </a><a 1112 href="picture-55?mode=zoom"><img 1113 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P55.GIF" 1114 alt="PICTURE 55" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 55. Slider. A slider can be used to display or manipulate specific<br />values.<br /><br /><br />When a slider is used to display relative values with no corresponding<br />quantitative value, the slider doesn't necessarily show a scale, but it<br />does indicate what the relative extremes of the scale are. For example, a<br />designer might use a slider to indicate an approximate temperature amid a<br />range of acceptable temperatures. One end of the range could be labeled<br /><b>Low</b> and the other end labeled <b>High.</b> 1115 <br /><br /><br /><br /><a name="FIGFIGUNIQ27" id="FIGFIGUNIQ27"> </a><a 1116 href="picture-56?mode=zoom"><img 1117 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P56.GIF" 1118 alt="PICTURE 56" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 56. Slider. A slider can also be used to display or manipulate<br />relative values.<br /><br /><br />Some sliders cannot be manipulated. For example, a read-only slider can<br />be used as a progress indicator, but a user cannot alter the value<br />represented by the slider.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1119 name="FIGFIGUNIQ28" id="FIGFIGUNIQ28"> </a><a 1120 href="picture-57?mode=zoom"><img 1121 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P57.GIF" 1122 alt="PICTURE 57" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 57. Read-Only Slider. A read-only slider can be used to display a<br />value that a user cannot change directly. For example, a<br />read-only slider can be used as a progress indicator.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Notebook</i>: A <i>notebook</i> is used to display any kind of data that can be<br /> arranged in distinct groups that a user would find useful. Settings<br /> choices are typically displayed in a notebook because a notebook provides<br /> a convenient way for a user to change many settings at once. For example,<br /> a designer might place all of the settings for a document object into a<br /> notebook. Likewise, all of the settings for a printer object could be<br /> displayed in a notebook.<br /><br /><br />Objects and other kinds of choices can also be displayed in a notebook.<br />For example, a product could provide a notebook to display a collection of<br />graphic objects, such as clip art.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1123 name="FIGNOTEBKF" id="FIGNOTEBKF"> </a><a href="picture-58?mode=zoom"><img 1124 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P58.GIF" 1125 alt="PICTURE 58" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 58. Notebook. A notebook is used to display objects or choices<br />that can be arranged in logical groups that a user would find<br />useful.<br /></pre> 1126 <hr /> 1127 <h3><a name="HDRSELECTN" id="HDRSELECTN">1.4.6.4 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 <pre width="80">The CUA interface provides standard mechanisms for indirect manipulation. These mechanisms are called <i>controls,</i> and they are used to display or obtain certain kinds of information. Various controls can be combined in a view to provide a user a way to modify an object.<br /><a id="HDRAMENUS" name="HDRAMENUS"><br /><br /><i>Menus:</i> A <i>menu</i> is a mechanism for presenting lists of choices to a user.</a> Menus are a staple of most commercially available graphical user interfaces today. The CUA interface includes four types of menus:<br /><br />° Menu bars<br />° Pull-down menus<br />° Cascaded menus<br />° Pop-up menus.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ16" name="FIGFIGUNIQ16"> </a><a href="picture-43?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 43" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P43.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 43. Menus. The CUA interface includes menu bars, pull-down menus, cascaded menus, and pop-up menus.</span><br /><br />Each type of menu is used for a certain purpose or in a certain kind of situation. Menu bars, pull-down menus, and cascaded menus are described in the following sections. However, because pop-up menus are used for direct manipulation rather than indirect manipulation, they are described at<a href="1.4.6.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONMENU"> "Pop-up Menus" in topic 1.4.6.2</a>.<br /><a id="HDRAMENUBA" name="HDRAMENUBA"><br /><br /><b style="font-style: italic;">Menu</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Bars</b>: A <i>menu</i> <i>bar</i> appears across the top of most windows, just below</a> the window title. It is a horizontal list of routing choices. When a user selects a choice from a menu bar, an associated pull-down menu is displayed.<br /><br />The name of each routing choice on a menu bar indicates what kinds of choices appear in the associated pull-down menu. By naming the routing choices descriptively, a designer encourages a user to learn by exploring.<br /><br /><b style="font-style: italic;">Pull-Down</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Menus</b>: A <i>pull-down</i> <i>menu</i> is displayed when a user selects a choice from a menu bar. Pull-down menus contain choices that are related to one another in some manner. For example, all choices in a pull-down menu could apply to:<br /><br />° An entire object (the object displayed in a window)<br />° A selected object (within a window)<br />° Help information<br />° A view of an object.<br /><br /><b style="font-style: italic;">Cascaded</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Menus</b>: A <i>cascaded</i> <i>menu</i> is displayed beside a pull-down menu or a pop-up menu when a user selects a routing choice labeled with the ÿ symbol. A cascaded menu contains choices that modify or are related to the routing choice. Cascaded menus provide a way for a designer to layer choices so that a user can have access to a wide range of function without being confused by lengthy lists of choices.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Entry</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Fields</i>: An <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> is an area into which a user can type or place text. Its boundaries are usually indicated. An entry field is appropriate for situations in which the entire possible set of values cannot be predicted. For example, if a product required a user's identification number, a designer typically would specify an entry field as the mechanism for eliciting that information, because the designer has no way to predict the numbers of all possible users.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ17" name="FIGFIGUNIQ17"> </a><a href="picture-44?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 44" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P44.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 44. Entry Field. An entry field is an area into which a user can type information.</span><br /><br />A variation of an entry field is a <i>read-only</i> <i>field.</i> A read-only field contains information that cannot be directly altered by a user. For example, a user cannot alter a read-only field by typing new information over the existing information in the field. However, if the value in a read-only field is calculated automatically according to the values in entry fields, a user could change the value in the read-only field by changing the values in the associated entry fields. For example, an <span style="font-weight: bold;">Age</span> field might be a read-only field containing a value calculated from an entry field that contains a birthdate. Although a user cannot change the value in the <b>Age</b> field by directly typing into the field, the user can change the value by changing the value in the <b style="font-weight: bold;">Date</b><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span><b style="font-weight: bold;">of</b><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span><b style="font-weight: bold;">Birth</b> entry field.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">List</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Box</i>: A <i>list</i> <i>box</i> usually consists of a read-only field and a scroll bar. It is used to display a fixed or variable list of objects or a fixed or variable list of settings choices. Because the display area can be scrolled, the list can contain more items than can be displayed at one time in the display area. The items in the list can be text or graphics, and a user typically can select an item from a list box.<br /><br /><a id="FIGLISTFIG" name="FIGLISTFIG"> </a><a href="picture-45?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 45" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P45.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 45. List Box. A list box displays text or graphics.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Combination</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Box</i>: A <i>combination</i> <i>box</i> combines an entry field with a list box. A user can type information into the entry field or can fill the entry field by selecting one of the items from the list. A combination box is appropriate when a designer can predict possible values for the entry field and wants to serve the needs of both novice and experienced users. The list box portion of the control prompts novice users to select an appropriate value, while the entry field portion provides a quicker means of interaction for experienced users and allows users to type values not contained in the list.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ18" name="FIGFIGUNIQ18"> </a><a href="picture-46?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 46" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P46.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 46. Combination Box. A combination box combines an entry field with a list box.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Drop-Down</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">List</i>: If a situation calls for a list box, but a list box would crowd the window in which it is displayed, a designer can specify a <i>drop-down</i> <i>list</i> instead. A drop-down list is a variation of a list box in which only one item in the list is displayed until a user takes an action to display the rest of the list.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ19" name="FIGFIGUNIQ19"> </a><a href="picture-47?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 47" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P47.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 47. Drop-Down List. A drop-down list displays only one item in the list until a user takes an action to display the rest of the list.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Drop-Down</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Combination</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Box</i>: If a situation calls for a combination box, but a combination box would crowd the window in which it is displayed, a designer can specify a <i>drop-down</i> <i>combination</i> <i>box</i> instead. A drop-down combination box is a variation of a combination box in which only the entry field portion is displayed until a user takes an action to display the list box portion of the control. When a user selects an item from the list, that item appears in the entry field.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ20" name="FIGFIGUNIQ20"> </a><a href="picture-48?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 48" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P48.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 48. Drop-Down Combination Box. A drop-down combination box displays only an entry field until a user takes an action to display the list box portion of the control.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Spin</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Button</i>: A <i>spin</i> <i>button</i> allows a user to choose a value from a finite set of related but mutually exclusive values that have a natural sequence. For example, a spin button would be appropriate for displaying the days of the week or the months of the year. A spin button is also appropriate for displaying choices that increase or decrease in constant units.<br /><br />The values in a spin button are displayed as if they were arranged in a ring. When a user presses the up arrow ("), the value displayed increases. When a user presses the down arrow (), the value displayed decreases.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ21" name="FIGFIGUNIQ21"> </a><a href="picture-49?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 49" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P49.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 49. Spin Button. A spin button displays related but mutually exclusive choices that have a natural sequence or that increase or decrease in constant units. When a user presses the up arrow ("), the value displayed increases. When a user presses the down arrow (), the value displayed decreases.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Push</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Button</i>: A <i>push</i> <i>button</i> can be used to display an action choice or a routing choice. When a user selects a push button, the action or routing represented is carried out immediately. A push button is appropriate when a designer wants to give a user convenient access to a frequently used choice.<br /><br /><a id="FIGPUSHBFG" name="FIGPUSHBFG"> </a><a href="picture-50?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 50" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P50.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 50. Push Button</span><br /><br />A designer can replace the standard push button visual (shown in <a href="1.4.6.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGPUSHBFG">Figure 50</a>) with a product-specific visual if it clearly conveys the action that the push button represents. For example, push buttons for a video recorder object might resemble the buttons on a real video recorder.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ22" name="FIGFIGUNIQ22"> </a><a href="picture-51?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 51" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P51.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 51. Modified Push Button Visuals. The appearance of the push buttons in this multimedia control panel has been modified so that the push buttons resemble the buttons on a real control panel.</span><br /><br />The window sizing buttons that are part of a typical window are also examples of push buttons with a modified appearance.<br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Radio</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Button</i>: A <i>radio</i> <i>button</i> is so named because it operates like the buttons that used to be found on car radios: only one radio button can be selected at a time, and when a user selects a radio button, any previously selected radio button is inactivated.<br /><br />Radio buttons are used to display mutually exclusive choices in situations in which a user must select a choice. Thus, a field of radio buttons always contains at least two radio buttons. Radio buttons prevent a user from selecting incompatible choices. For example, a product might contain the choices <b>On</b> and <b>Off</b> in a single context. Because it would not make sense for an object to be both on and off at the same time, a designer should specify radio buttons to display the mutually exclusive <b>On</b> and <b>Off</b> choices. Likewise, if a field of radio buttons pertained to a car's transmission, it would not make sense for a user to be able to select both an automatic transmission and a manual transmission for the same car. The radio buttons help prevent a user from making an error.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ23" name="FIGFIGUNIQ23"> </a><a href="picture-52?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 52" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P52.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 52. Radio Buttons. Radio buttons can be used to display mutually exclusive textual choices.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Value</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Set</i>: Like radio buttons, a <i>value</i> <i>set</i> is used to present mutually exclusive choices. However, a value set is used primarily for graphical choices, and the choices are arranged in a matrix. Value sets are useful for creating palettes of tools.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ24" name="FIGFIGUNIQ24"> </a><a href="picture-53?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 53" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P53.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 53. Value Set. A value set is a matrix of mutually exclusive choices. It is used primarily to display graphical choices.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Check</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Box</i>: A <i>check</i> <i>box</i> is used to display a settings choice in a group of settings choices that are not mutually exclusive. Check boxes are appropriate for choices that have two clearly discernible states. For example, a check box would be appropriate for a choice that locked an object, because a user would easily understand that selecting the check box locks the object, and not selecting the check box leaves the object unlocked.<br /><br />A field of check boxes can contain one or more choices, and a user can select one or more check boxes, or not select any.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ25" name="FIGFIGUNIQ25"> </a><a href="picture-54?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 54" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P54.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 54. Check Boxes. Check boxes provide a way to display choices that are not mutually exclusive. For example, a car could have both air conditioning and power brakes. Each check box choice has two states, such as on or off. Users can easily understand that checking the air conditioning choice means that air conditioning is desired (on), while not checking automatic power antenna means that the antenna is not desired (off).</span><br /><br /><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Slider</span>: A <i>slider</i> is an analog representation of a value. When a slider is used to display a particular value amid a range of possible values, the slider typically shows a scale marked with equal units of value. For example, a designer might use a slider to indicate the volume level of an audio signal. The slider could indicate decibels.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ26" name="FIGFIGUNIQ26"> </a><a href="picture-55?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 55" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P55.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 55. Slider. A slider can be used to display or manipulate specific values.</span><br /><br />When a slider is used to display relative values with no corresponding quantitative value, the slider doesn't necessarily show a scale, but it does indicate what the relative extremes of the scale are. For example, a designer might use a slider to indicate an approximate temperature amid a range of acceptable temperatures. One end of the range could be labeled <b>Low</b> and the other end labeled <b>High.</b> 3904 <br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ27" name="FIGFIGUNIQ27"> </a><a href="picture-56?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 56" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P56.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 56. Slider. A slider can also be used to display or manipulate relative values.</span><br /><br />Some sliders cannot be manipulated. For example, a read-only slider can be used as a progress indicator, but a user cannot alter the value represented by the slider.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ28" name="FIGFIGUNIQ28"> </a><a href="picture-57?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 57" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P57.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 57. Read-Only Slider. A read-only slider can be used to display a value that a user cannot change directly. For example, a read-only slider can be used as a progress indicator.</span><br /><br /><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Notebook</span>: A <i>notebook</i> is used to display any kind of data that can be arranged in distinct groups that a user would find useful. Settings choices are typically displayed in a notebook because a notebook provides a convenient way for a user to change many settings at once. For example, a designer might place all of the settings for a document object into a notebook. Likewise, all of the settings for a printer object could be displayed in a notebook.<br /><br />Objects and other kinds of choices can also be displayed in a notebook. For example, a product could provide a notebook to display a collection of graphic objects, such as clip art.<br /><br /><a id="FIGNOTEBKF" name="FIGNOTEBKF"> </a><a href="picture-58?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 58" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P58.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 58. Notebook. A notebook is used to display objects or choices that can be arranged in logical groups that a user would find useful.</span><br /><br /></pre> 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 <hr /> 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 <h3><a id="HDRSELECTN" name="HDRSELECTN">1.4.6.4 1128 3920 Selection</a></h3> 1129 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Through the process of <i>selection,</i> users indicate which items they want to<br /> work with. Users can select items by using a pointing device (typically a<br /> mouse) or keyboard. To select an item, a user moves the pointer or cursor<br /> to the item to be selected and then presses the appropriate mouse button<br /> or keyboard key. Most selection techniques that make use of a keyboard<br /> parallel those that make use of a mouse, although there are some<br /> exceptions.<br /><br /><br />During <i>explicit</i> <i>selection</i> users specifically indicate each item they want<br /> to work with. For example, users can move the pointer or selection cursor<br /> to each item. When a user explicitly selects an item, the item is<br /> highlighted with some kind of visible cue. When a user removes selection<br /> from an item, the visible cue is removed as well. The process of removing<br /> selection is called <i>deselection.</i> Because an item remains selected until a<br /> user deselects it, a user can apply more than one action to a selected<br /> item without having to select the item again before each action. A user<br /> can explicitly select more than one object at a time.<br /><br /><br />During <i>implicit</i> <i>selection</i> a user can gain access to an item's actions<br /> without explicitly selecting the item. For example, a user can display an<br /> object's pop-up menu by placing the pointer on the object and pressing the<br /> appropriate mouse button. The object is not selected, but its actions are<br /> available. Likewise, a user can move the cursor to an item and can get<br /> help information (see <a 1130 href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP">"Help" in topic 1.4.9</a>) about the item without<br /> explicitly selecting the item.<br /><br /><br />An implicitly selected item is not highlighted with a visible cue, and a<br />user can implicitly select only one item at a time.<br /><br /><br />When a user selects an object, the object is not altered in any way,<br />except that the object can become visibly highlighted to indicate that it<br />is selected. A user can select and deselect an object any number of times<br />without otherwise affecting the object. However, when a user selects an<br />action, the action immediately affects whatever object or objects the user<br />has selected. For example, if a user selects an action that updates an<br />object's information, the information is changed immediately.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1131 <ul> 1132 <li><a href="1.4.6.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.4.1 1133 Scope of Selection</a></li> 1134 <li><a href="1.4.6.4.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.4.2 1135 One-Based Selection and Zero-Based 1136 Selection</a></li> 1137 <li><a href="1.4.6.4.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.4.3 1138 Types of Selection</a></li> 1139 <li><a href="1.4.6.4.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.4.4 1140 Selection Techniques</a></li> 1141 <li><a href="1.4.6.4.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.4.5 1142 Design Considerations for 1143 Selection</a></li> 1144 </ul> 1145 <pre></pre> 1146 <hr /> 1147 <h4><a name="HDRSCOPSEL" id="HDRSCOPSEL">1.4.6.4.1 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930 <pre width="80">Through the process of <i>selection,</i> users indicate which items they want to work with. Users can select items by using a pointing device (typically a mouse) or keyboard. To select an item, a user moves the pointer or cursor to the item to be selected and then presses the appropriate mouse button or keyboard key. Most selection techniques that make use of a keyboard parallel those that make use of a mouse, although there are some exceptions.<br /><br />During <i>explicit</i> <i>selection</i> users specifically indicate each item they want to work with. For example, users can move the pointer or selection cursor to each item. When a user explicitly selects an item, the item is highlighted with some kind of visible cue. When a user removes selection from an item, the visible cue is removed as well. The process of removing selection is called <i>deselection.</i> Because an item remains selected until a user deselects it, a user can apply more than one action to a selected item without having to select the item again before each action. A user can explicitly select more than one object at a time.<br /><br />During <i>implicit</i> <i>selection</i> a user can gain access to an item's actions without explicitly selecting the item. For example, a user can display an object's pop-up menu by placing the pointer on the object and pressing the appropriate mouse button. The object is not selected, but its actions are available. Likewise, a user can move the cursor to an item and can get help information (see <a href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP">"Help" in topic 1.4.9</a>) about the item without explicitly selecting the item.<br /><br />An implicitly selected item is not highlighted with a visible cue, and a user can implicitly select only one item at a time.<br /><br />When a user selects an object, the object is not altered in any way, except that the object can become visibly highlighted to indicate that it is selected. A user can select and deselect an object any number of times without otherwise affecting the object. However, when a user selects an action, the action immediately affects whatever object or objects the user has selected. For example, if a user selects an action that updates an object's information, the information is changed immediately.<br /><br /></pre> 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 <hr /> 3941 3942 3943 3944 3945 <h4><a id="HDRSCOPSEL" name="HDRSCOPSEL">1.4.6.4.1 1148 3946 Scope of 1149 3947 Selection</a></h4> 1150 <pre></pre> 1151 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>scope</i> <i>of</i> <i>selection</i> is an area within which a user can select items. For<br /> example, one scope of selection might consist of an individual control,<br /> such as a list box, while another might consist of a field of controls.<br /> Each window is also a separate scope of selection.<br /><br /><br />If a user selects something in a particular scope of selection, a<br />previously selected item in that same scope can be affected, while items<br />selected in other scopes of selection remain unaffected. For example, if<br />a user selects an item in a secondary window, a previously selected item<br />in that window can become deselected, while an item selected in a related<br />primary window remains selected.<br /></pre> 1152 <pre></pre> 1153 <hr /> 1154 <h4>1.4.6.4.2 One-Based Selection 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 <pre width="80">A <i>scope</i> <i>of</i> <i>selection</i> is an area within which a user can select items. For example, one scope of selection might consist of an individual control, such as a list box, while another might consist of a field of controls. Each window is also a separate scope of selection.<br /><br />If a user selects something in a particular scope of selection, a previously selected item in that same scope can be affected, while items selected in other scopes of selection remain unaffected. For example, if a user selects an item in a secondary window, a previously selected item in that window can become deselected, while an item selected in a related primary window remains selected.<br /><br /></pre> 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 <hr /> 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 <h4>1.4.6.4.2 One-Based Selection 1155 3977 and Zero-Based Selection</h4> 1156 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />When a scope of selection requires that at least one item within the scope<br />always be selected, that scope is said to have <i>one-based</i> <i>selection.</i> For<br /> example, if a list box contains the names of colors that can be applied to<br /> an interface component, a designer can make the list box a one-based scope<br /> of selection to ensure that a user selects a color.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1157 name="FIGONEBASE" id="FIGONEBASE"> </a><a href="picture-59?mode=zoom"><img 1158 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P59.GIF" 1159 alt="PICTURE 59" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 59. An Example of One-Based Selection. One-based selection means<br />that at least one item must be selected. For example, in a<br />list box containing colors that can be applied to an interface<br />component, one color must be selected at all times.<br /><br /><br />When a scope of selection does not require that an item within the scope<br />be selected, that scope is said to have <i>zero-based</i> <i>selection.</i> For<br /> example, a container object, such as a folder, can be zero-based if a<br /> user's task does not require that a contained object be selected at all<br /> times.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1160 name="FIGZERBASE" id="FIGZERBASE"> </a><a href="picture-60?mode=zoom"><img 1161 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P60.GIF" 1162 alt="PICTURE 60" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 60. An Example of Zero-Based Selection. Zero-based selection means<br />that an item does not necessarily have to be selected. For<br />example, in this contents view of a container, no object is<br />selected.<br /></pre> 1163 <hr /> 1164 <h4><a name="HDRSELTYPE" id="HDRSELTYPE">1.4.6.4.3 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 <pre width="80">When a scope of selection requires that at least one item within the scope always be selected, that scope is said to have <i>one-based</i> <i>selection.</i> For example, if a list box contains the names of colors that can be applied to an interface component, a designer can make the list box a one-based scope of selection to ensure that a user selects a color.<br /><br /><a id="FIGONEBASE" name="FIGONEBASE"> </a><a href="picture-59?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 59" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P59.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 59. An Example of One-Based Selection. One-based selection means that at least one item must be selected. For example, in a list box containing colors that can be applied to an interface component, one color must be selected at all times.</span><br /><br />When a scope of selection does not require that an item within the scope be selected, that scope is said to have <i>zero-based</i> <i>selection.</i> For example, a container object, such as a folder, can be zero-based if a user's task does not require that a contained object be selected at all times.<br /><br /><a id="FIGZERBASE" name="FIGZERBASE"> </a><a href="picture-60?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 60" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P60.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 60. An Example of Zero-Based Selection. Zero-based selection means that an item does not necessarily have to be selected. For example, in this contents view of a container, no object is selected.</span><br /><br /></pre> 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 <hr /> 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 <h4><a id="HDRSELTYPE" name="HDRSELTYPE">1.4.6.4.3 1165 4003 Types of 1166 4004 Selection</a></h4> 1167 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />CUA guidelines specify three types of selection:<br /><br /><br />° Single selection, which allows a user to select only one item at a<br />time in a given scope of selection<br /><br /><br />° Multiple selection, which allows a user to select one or more items at<br />a time in a given scope of selection<br /><br /><br />° Extended selection, which allows a user to select one item and then<br />easily extend the selection to other items in the same scope of<br />selection.<br /><br /><br />Each scope of selection uses one of the three types of selection. A<br />designer decides which type to use by considering which result--only one<br />item selected, more than one item selected, or usually one item but<br />sometimes more than one item selected--a typical user will want during<br />selection. The type of selection used is not affected by whether the<br />scope of selection is zero-based or one-based.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Single</i> <i>Selection</i>: <i>Single</i> <i>selection</i> is the process of selecting only one<br /> item at a time. When a user selects an item during single selection, any<br /> previously selected item in the same scope of selection becomes<br /> deselected. Single selection is appropriate for scopes of selection in<br /> which the items displayed are mutually exclusive or in which a user<br /> typically wants to select only one item.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1168 name="FIGSINGFIG" id="FIGSINGFIG"> </a><a href="picture-61?mode=zoom"><img 1169 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P61.GIF" 1170 alt="PICTURE 61" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 61. An Example of Single Selection. This list box has been defined<br />as a single-selection scope of selection. When a user selects<br />an item in the list box, any item that was previously selected<br />becomes deselected.<br /><a 1171 name="HDRAMULTSL" id="HDRAMULTSL"><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Multiple</i> <i>Selection</i>: <i>Multiple</i> <i>selection</i> is the process of selecting more</a><br />than one item in a scope of selection. When a user selects an item during<br />multiple selection, any previously selected items in the same scope of<br />selection remain selected. Multiple selection is appropriate for scopes<br />of selection in which items are not mutually exclusive in the context of a<br />user's task.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1172 name="FIGMULTFIG" id="FIGMULTFIG"> </a><a href="picture-62?mode=zoom"><img 1173 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P62.GIF" 1174 alt="PICTURE 62" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 62. An Example of Multiple Selection. This list box has been<br />defined as a multiple-selection scope of selection. When a<br />user selects an item or items in the list box, any previously<br />selected item or items remain selected.<br /><a 1175 name="HDREXTSEL" id="HDREXTSEL"><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Extended</i> <i>Selection</i>: <i>Extended</i> <i>selection</i> is the process of selecting one</a><br />item and then extending the selection to additional items. Extended<br />selection is appropriate for scopes of selection in which a user typically<br />wants to select only one item but occasionally wants to select more than<br />one item.<br /><br /><br />To use extended selection in a scope in which single selection is the<br />default, a user first selects one item. Then, to select additional items,<br />the user explicitly indicates that the selection of the first item is to<br />be extended to include the additional items. For example, a user might<br />select an item then press a designated key on the keyboard, alone or in<br />combination with a mouse button. When the user selects another item, the<br />first item remains selected because the user has explicitly indicated (by<br />pressing the designated key or button) that the initial selection is to be<br />extended.<br /><br /><br />Extended selection accommodates the needs of inexperienced users, who tend<br />to select only one item at a time, and it also accommodates the needs of<br />experienced users, who tend to recognize that in some situations selecting<br />more than one item is a more efficient way to work. Containers typically<br />make use of extended selection.<a 1176 href="1.4.6.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGEXTFIG"> Figure 63</a> illustrates extended selection.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1177 name="FIGEXTFIG" id="FIGEXTFIG"> </a><a href="picture-63?mode=zoom"><img 1178 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P63.GIF" 1179 alt="PICTURE 63" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 63. Extended Selection. In the top window, a user has selected one<br />object. In the bottom window, the user has extended the<br />selection of the first object to include additional objects.<br /><br /><br />Various scopes of selection use various types of selection.<a 1180 href="1.4.6.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSELTABL"> Figure 64</a><br />shows which types of selection can be used with windows and controls.<br /><br /><br /></pre> 1181 <pre><a name="FIGSELTABL" id="FIGSELTABL" /><a name="TBLSELTABL" 1182 id="TBLSELTABL"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 64. Types of Selection Used in Various Scopes of Selection |<br />|_______________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Type</b> <b>of</b> <b>Selection</b> |<br /> | |_______________________ _______________________ ______________________|<br /> | <b>Scope</b> <b>of</b> <b>Selection</b> | <b>Single</b> <b>Selection</b> | <b>Multiple</b> <b>Selection</b> | <b>Extended</b> <b>Selection</b> |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Window | ° | ° | ° |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Menu | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | List Box | ° | ° | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Combination Box | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Drop-Down List | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Drop-Down Combination Box | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Spin Button | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Push Button | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Field of Radio Buttons | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Value Set | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Individual Check Box | ° | | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /> | Field of Check Boxes | | ° | |<br /> |_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /></pre> 1183 <pre></pre> 1184 <hr /> 1185 <h4><a name="HDRASELTEC" id="HDRASELTEC">1.4.6.4.4 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 <pre width="80">CUA guidelines specify three types of selection:<br /><br />° Single selection, which allows a user to select only one item at a time in a given scope of selection<br />° Multiple selection, which allows a user to select one or more items at a time in a given scope of selection<br />° Extended selection, which allows a user to select one item and then easily extend the selection to other items in the same scope of selection.<br /><br />Each scope of selection uses one of the three types of selection. A designer decides which type to use by considering which result--only one item selected, more than one item selected, or usually one item but sometimes more than one item selected--a typical user will want during selection. The type of selection used is not affected by whether the scope of selection is zero-based or one-based.<br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Single</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Selection</i>: <i>Single</i> <i>selection</i> is the process of selecting only one item at a time. When a user selects an item during single selection, any previously selected item in the same scope of selection becomes deselected. Single selection is appropriate for scopes of selection in which the items displayed are mutually exclusive or in which a user typically wants to select only one item.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSINGFIG" name="FIGSINGFIG"> </a><a href="picture-61?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 61" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P61.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 61. An Example of Single Selection. This list box has been defined as a single-selection scope of selection. When a user selects an item in the list box, any item that was previously selected becomes deselected.</span><br /><br /><a id="HDRAMULTSL" name="HDRAMULTSL"><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Multiple</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Selection</i>: <i>Multiple</i> <i>selection</i> is the process of selecting more</a> than one item in a scope of selection. When a user selects an item during multiple selection, any previously selected items in the same scope of selection remain selected. Multiple selection is appropriate for scopes of selection in which items are not mutually exclusive in the context of a user's task.<br /><br /><a id="FIGMULTFIG" name="FIGMULTFIG"> </a><a href="picture-62?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 62" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P62.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 62. An Example of Multiple Selection. This list box has been defined as a multiple-selection scope of selection. When a user selects an item or items in the list box, any previously selected item or items remain selected.</span><br /><br /><a id="HDREXTSEL" name="HDREXTSEL"><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Extended</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Selection</i>: <i>Extended</i> <i>selection</i> is the process of selecting one</a> item and then extending the selection to additional items. Extended selection is appropriate for scopes of selection in which a user typically wants to select only one item but occasionally wants to select more than one item.<br /><br />To use extended selection in a scope in which single selection is the default, a user first selects one item. Then, to select additional items, the user explicitly indicates that the selection of the first item is to be extended to include the additional items. For example, a user might select an item then press a designated key on the keyboard, alone or in combination with a mouse button. When the user selects another item, the first item remains selected because the user has explicitly indicated (by pressing the designated key or button) that the initial selection is to be extended.<br /><br />Extended selection accommodates the needs of inexperienced users, who tend to select only one item at a time, and it also accommodates the needs of experienced users, who tend to recognize that in some situations selecting more than one item is a more efficient way to work. Containers typically make use of extended selection.<a href="1.4.6.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGEXTFIG"> Figure 63</a> illustrates extended selection.<br /><br /><a id="FIGEXTFIG" name="FIGEXTFIG"> </a><a href="picture-63?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 63" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P63.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 63. Extended Selection. In the top window, a user has selected one object. In the bottom window, the user has extended the selection of the first object to include additional objects.</span><br /><br />Various scopes of selection use various types of selection.<a href="1.4.6.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSELTABL"> Figure 64</a> shows which types of selection can be used with windows and controls.<br /><br /></pre> 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 <pre><a id="FIGSELTABL" name="FIGSELTABL"></a><a id="TBLSELTABL" name="TBLSELTABL"> _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 64. Types of Selection Used in Various Scopes of Selection</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Type</b> <b>of</b> <b>Selection</b> |<br />| |_______________________ _______________________ ______________________|<br />| <b>Scope</b> <b>of</b> <b>Selection</b> |<b>Single</b> <b>Selection</b> | <b>Multiple</b> <b>Selection</b> | <b>Extended</b> <b>Selection</b> |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Window | ° | ° | ° |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Menu | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| List Box | ° | ° | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Combination Box | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Drop-Down List | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Drop-Down Combination Box | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Spin Button | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Push Button | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Field of Radio Buttons | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Value Set | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Individual Check Box | ° | | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br />| Field of Check Boxes | | ° | |<br />|_______________________________________________|_______________________|_______________________|______________________|<br /></pre> 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 <pre></pre> 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 <hr /> 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 <h4><a id="HDRASELTEC" name="HDRASELTEC">1.4.6.4.4 1186 4050 Selection 1187 4051 Techniques</a></h4> 1188 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In a CUA environment a user can select items in two ways. A user can:<br /><br /><br />° Select an individual item<br />° Select a beginning point and an endpoint, between which all items are<br />selected.<br /><br /><br />The selection techniques for selecting an individual item are:<br /><br /><br />° Point selection<br />° Random-point selection.<br /><br /><br />The selection technique for selecting items between two points is called<br />point-to-endpoint selection.<br /><br /><br />To determine which selection techniques are most useful to a user for a<br />particular task, a designer should consider the type of data being<br />selected and the form in which it is displayed.<br /><a 1189 name="HDRPSEL" id="HDRPSEL"><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Point</i> <i>Selection</i>: During point selection, a user places the pointer or</a><br />cursor on an individual item and selects it. Point selection can be used<br />for single selection, multiple selection, or extended selection.<br /><br /><br /><i>Automatic</i> <i>selection</i> is a variation of point selection in which the steps<br /> of indicating an item and selecting the item are combined for keyboard<br /> users.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1190 name="FIGFIGUNIQ29" id="FIGFIGUNIQ29"> </a><a 1191 href="picture-64?mode=zoom"><img 1192 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P64.GIF" 1193 alt="PICTURE 64" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 65. Automatic Selection. Automatic selection is a variation of<br />point selection in which a keyboard user indicates and selects<br />an item in one step.<br /><a 1194 name="HDRRPSEL" id="HDRRPSEL"><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Random-Point</i> <i>Selection</i>: During random-point selection, a user places the</a><br />pointer or cursor on an item and selects it. The user then moves the<br />pointer or cursor to another item and selects it. The items do not have<br />to be next to one another, and the user can select the items in any order.<br />Each item becomes selected in succession. Random-point selection can be<br />used for multiple or extended selection.<br /><a 1195 name="HDRPESEL" id="HDRPESEL"><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Point-to-Endpoint</i> <i>Selection</i>: During point-to-endpoint selection, a user</a><br />places the pointer or cursor at a beginning point, then moves the pointer<br />or cursor to an endpoint. Each item between the beginning point and<br />endpoint becomes selected. Point-to-endpoint selection can be used for<br />multiple or extended selection.<br /></pre> 1196 <hr /> 1197 <h4>1.4.6.4.5 Design 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 <pre width="80">In a CUA environment a user can select items in two ways. A user can:<br /><br />° Select an individual item<br />° Select a beginning point and an endpoint, between which all items are selected.<br /><br />The selection techniques for selecting an individual item are:<br /><br />° Point selection<br />° Random-point selection.<br /><br />The selection technique for selecting items between two points is called point-to-endpoint selection.<br /><br />To determine which selection techniques are most useful to a user for a particular task, a designer should consider the type of data being selected and the form in which it is displayed.<br /><a id="HDRPSEL" name="HDRPSEL"><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Point</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Selection</i>: During point selection, a user places the pointer or</a> cursor on an individual item and selects it. Point selection can be used for single selection, multiple selection, or extended selection.<br /><br /><i>Automatic</i> <i>selection</i> is a variation of point selection in which the steps of indicating an item and selecting the item are combined for keyboard users.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ29" name="FIGFIGUNIQ29"> </a><a href="picture-64?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 64" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P64.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 65. Automatic Selection. Automatic selection is a variation of point selection in which a keyboard user indicates and selects an item in one step.</span><br /><br /><a id="HDRRPSEL" name="HDRRPSEL"><br /><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Random-Point</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Selection</i>: During random-point selection, a user places the</a> pointer or cursor on an item and selects it. The user then moves the pointer or cursor to another item and selects it. The items do not have to be next to one another, and the user can select the items in any order. Each item becomes selected in succession. Random-point selection can be used for multiple or extended selection.<br /><br /><a id="HDRPESEL" name="HDRPESEL"><br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Point-to-Endpoint</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Selection</i>: During point-to-endpoint selection, a user</a> places the pointer or cursor at a beginning point, then moves the pointer or cursor to an endpoint. Each item between the beginning point and endpoint becomes selected. Point-to-endpoint selection can be used for multiple or extended selection.<br /></pre> 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 <hr /> 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 <h4>1.4.6.4.5 Design 1198 4077 Considerations for Selection</h4> 1199 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />When deciding how selection should work in a product, a designer must make<br />a series of decisions. The decisions are shown in <a 1200 href="1.4.6.4.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGDECTREE">Figure 66</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1201 name="FIGDECTREE" id="FIGDECTREE"> </a><a href="picture-65?mode=zoom"><img 1202 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P65.GIF" 1203 alt="PICTURE 65" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 66. Decisions for Selection. A designer must first consider a<br />user's objects and tasks to determine how many objects the user<br />should be allowed to select at one time within a scope of<br />selection. Next a designer must consider the minimum number of<br />items that must be selected. Then, by evaluating the type of<br />data being presented, the form in which it is presented, and<br />the types of tasks the user will be trying to accomplish, the<br />designer can determine which selection techniques to provide.<br /><br /><br />For each scope of selection, a designer must consider a user's objects and<br />tasks to determine how many objects a user will want to select in that<br />scope of selection. The designer also must consider whether a user <i>must</i><br />select at least one object in that scope. If so, the scope of selection<br />is one-based. If not, the scope of selection is zero-based. If a user<br />will want to select only one object at a time, then the designer provides<br />single selection for that scope. If the user will want to select more<br />than one object at a time, then the designer provides multiple selection<br />for that scope. If the user will typically want to select only one object<br />but might occasionally want to select more than one object, then the<br />designer provides extended selection for that scope.<br /><br /><br />For single selection, a designer must provide point selection and should<br />consider whether to provide automatic selection in addition to point<br />selection. For multiple selection, a designer must provide point<br />selection and either point-to-endpoint selection or random-point selection<br />(or both).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1204 name="FIGFIGUNIQ30" id="FIGFIGUNIQ30"> </a><a 1205 href="picture-66?mode=zoom"><img 1206 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P66.GIF" 1207 alt="PICTURE 66" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 67. Random-point Selection. During random-point selection a user<br />selects several items in any order. The items do not have to<br />be contiguous.<br /><br /><br />For extended selection, a designer must provide point selection and can<br />provide point-to-endpoint selection or random-point selection or both.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Areas</i> <i>and</i> <i>Ranges</i>: When a user selects an item or items by using<br /> point-to-endpoint selection, the result is either a selected area or a<br /> selected range. An area is determined by the spatial arrangement of the<br /> selected items, while a range is determined by the meaning or sequence of<br /> the objects. For example, in a text document, an area of selection could<br /> be delimited by a rectangle defined by a user. A range of selection could<br /> be an irregular shape with a beginning point and an endpoint defined by a<br /> user, but with the intermediate points determined by the product.<br /> <a 1208 href="1.4.6.4.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGAREARNG">Figure 68</a> shows the difference between an area of selection and a range of<br /> selection in text.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1209 name="FIGAREARNG" id="FIGAREARNG"> </a><a href="picture-67?mode=zoom"><img 1210 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P67.GIF" 1211 alt="PICTURE 67" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 68. Area Selection and Range Selection in Text. In an area of<br />selection, the boundary of the selected text is regular and is<br />based on the spatial area indicated by a user. All items<br />within the area (in this case, a rectangle defined by a<br />beginning point and an endpoint) are selected. In a range of<br />selection, the boundary of the selected text can be irregular.<br />A user defines the beginning point and the endpoint, and the<br />product determines which intermediate points are selected. For<br />some kinds of tasks, a designer might want to provide both area<br />selection and range selection.<br /><br /><br />To determine whether the result of point-to-endpoint selection should be<br />an area or a range, a designer must consider the characteristics of the<br />data displayed in the view of the object. A designer must also consider a<br />user's tasks. If the data has linear or tabular characteristics (for<br />example, text, audio waveforms, musical scores, forms, spreadsheets), a<br />user will typically want a range of selection, but for some tasks a user<br />might want an area of selection. For some kinds of data and tasks, a<br />designer might want to provide both area selection and range selection.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1212 name="FIGFIGUNIQ31" id="FIGFIGUNIQ31"> </a><a 1213 href="picture-68?mode=zoom"><img 1214 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P68.GIF" 1215 alt="PICTURE 68" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 69. Range Selection in Tabular Data. For tabular data, a designer<br />typically provides range selection. For example, in a<br />spreadsheet, a user can define a beginning point anywhere in a<br />cell, then can define an endpoint anywhere in another cell.<br />The two cells, in their entirety, form opposite corners of the<br />range of selection, and all other cells in the columns and rows<br />between the corners are also selected.<br /></pre> 1216 <hr /> 1217 <h3>1.4.6.5 Copying and Creating 4078 4079 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 <pre width="80">When deciding how selection should work in a product, a designer must make a series of decisions. The decisions are shown in <a href="1.4.6.4.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGDECTREE">Figure 66</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGDECTREE" name="FIGDECTREE"> </a><a href="picture-65?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 65" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P65.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 66. Decisions for Selection. A designer must first consider a user's objects and tasks to determine how many objects the user should be allowed to select at one time within a scope of selection. Next a designer must consider the minimum number of items that must be selected. Then, by evaluating the type of</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">data being presented, the form in which it is presented, and the types of tasks the user will be trying to accomplish, the designer can determine which selection techniques to provide.</span><br /><br />For each scope of selection, a designer must consider a user's objects and tasks to determine how many objects a user will want to select in that scope of selection. The designer also must consider whether a user <i>must</i> select at least one object in that scope. If so, the scope of selection is one-based. If not, the scope of selection is zero-based. If a user will want to select only one object at a time, then the designer provides single selection for that scope. If the user will want to select more than one object at a time, then the designer provides multiple selection for that scope. If the user will typically want to select only one object but might occasionally want to select more than one object, then the designer provides extended selection for that scope.<br /><br />For single selection, a designer must provide point selection and should consider whether to provide automatic selection in addition to point selection. For multiple selection, a designer must provide point selection and either point-to-endpoint selection or random-point selection (or both).<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ30" name="FIGFIGUNIQ30"> </a><a href="picture-66?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 66" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P66.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 67. Random-point Selection. During random-point selection a user selects several items in any order. The items do not have to be contiguous.</span><br /><br />For extended selection, a designer must provide point selection and can provide point-to-endpoint selection or random-point selection or both.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Areas</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">and</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Ranges</i>: When a user selects an item or items by using point-to-endpoint selection, the result is either a selected area or a selected range. An area is determined by the spatial arrangement of the selected items, while a range is determined by the meaning or sequence of the objects. For example, in a text document, an area of selection could be delimited by a rectangle defined by a user. A range of selection could be an irregular shape with a beginning point and an endpoint defined by a user, but with the intermediate points determined by the product. <a href="1.4.6.4.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGAREARNG">Figure 68</a> shows the difference between an area of selection and a range of selection in text.<br /><br /><a id="FIGAREARNG" name="FIGAREARNG"> </a><a href="picture-67?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 67" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P67.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 68. Area Selection and Range Selection in Text. In an area of selection, the boundary of the selected text is regular and is based on the spatial area indicated by a user. All items within the area (in this case, a rectangle defined by a beginning point and an endpoint) are selected. In a range of selection, the boundary of the selected text can be irregular. A user defines the beginning point and the endpoint, and the product determines which intermediate points are selected. For some kinds of tasks, a designer might want to provide both area</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">selection and range selection.</span><br /><br />To determine whether the result of point-to-endpoint selection should be an area or a range, a designer must consider the characteristics of the data displayed in the view of the object. A designer must also consider a user's tasks. If the data has linear or tabular characteristics (for example, text, audio waveforms, musical scores, forms, spreadsheets), a user will typically want a range of selection, but for some tasks a user might want an area of selection. For some kinds of data and tasks, a designer might want to provide both area selection and range selection.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ31" name="FIGFIGUNIQ31"> </a><a href="picture-68?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 68" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P68.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 69. Range Selection in Tabular Data. For tabular data, a designer typically provides range selection. For example, in a spreadsheet, a user can define a beginning point anywhere in a cell, then can define an endpoint anywhere in another cell. The two cells, in their entirety, form opposite corners of the</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">range of selection, and all other cells in the columns and rows between the corners are also selected.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 <hr /> 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 <h3>1.4.6.5 Copying and Creating 1218 4103 Objects</h3> 1219 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A user can copy or create objects from existing objects. When a user<br />copies an object, the resulting new object is an exact duplicate of the<br />original object. The new object can even have the same name as the<br />original object, or the user can change the object's name. When a user<br />creates an object, the resulting new object is similar but not identical<br />to the original object, and it has a new name. The original object is, in<br />effect, a template for the new object. A designer can provide designated<br />objects that act as templates for creating new objects. The designated<br />objects have special visual representations.<a 1220 href="1.4.6.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGTEMPFG"> Figure 70</a> shows a template<br /> of a folder.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1221 name="FIGTEMPFG" id="FIGTEMPFG"> </a><a href="picture-69?mode=zoom"><img 1222 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P69.GIF" 1223 alt="PICTURE 69" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 70. A Folder Template. A user can create a new folder by using<br />direct or indirect manipulation on an existing object.<br /><br /><br />For example, if a user copies a text document, say an invoice, the new<br />invoice will contain all of the text, settings, and other elements of the<br />original invoice and will have the same invoice number. However, if a<br />user creates a new invoice from an existing invoice, the new invoice will<br />contain some--but not all--of the information in the original invoice.<br />The newly created invoice might contain the same company name, mailing<br />address, and entry fields as in the original invoice, but the invoice date<br />and invoice number would be different, and the customer name and other<br />entry fields would not contain the same information as the original.<br /><br /><br />A designer decides how much information is transferred from one object to<br />another during object creation and bases the decision on the objects and<br />tasks involved. In the invoice example above, a relatively small amount<br />of information is transferred to the newly created invoice. For some<br />objects and tasks, however, nearly all of the information might be<br />transferred. For example, an attorney might work with a set of document<br />objects containing boilerplate text. When the attorney creates a new<br />object, all of the text, except for a client's name, date, and other<br />particulars, is transferred to the new object.<br /><br /><br />A user can copy and create objects by both direct and indirect<br />manipulation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1224 <ul> 1225 <li><a href="1.4.6.5.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.6.5.1 1226 The Clipboard</a></li> 1227 </ul> 1228 <pre></pre> 1229 <hr /> 1230 <h4>1.4.6.5.1 The Clipboard</h4> 1231 <pre></pre> 1232 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />When using indirect manipulation to copy or create objects, a user uses<br />the <i>clipboard.</i> The clipboard is an area of storage provided by the<br /> operating system to hold data temporarily. A user can copy, create, and<br /> move objects to and from the clipboard. The objects are held on the<br /> clipboard until the user replaces them with other objects or until the<br /> user turns off the system.<br /><br /><br />The clipboard can hold entire objects or parts of objects, and it can hold<br />any kind of object. For example, the clipboard can hold a single line of<br />text or an entire document object, a single data record or an entire<br />database, a single line segment or an entire graphic. Except when<br />necessary to prevent the corruption of data, a designer should not<br />restrict a user from placing any objects or parts of objects onto the<br />clipboard.<br /></pre> 1233 <pre></pre> 1234 <hr /> 1235 <h2>1.4.7 Keeping a User Informed</h2> 1236 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />For a user to be in control of his or her interaction with a product, the<br />user must be aware of the state of objects, processes, or other elements<br />of the interaction. The CUA user interface provides several ways for a<br />product to communicate this kind of information to a user.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1237 <ul> 1238 <li><a href="1.4.7.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.7.1 1239 Messages</a></li> 1240 <li><a href="1.4.7.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.7.2 1241 Progress Indicators</a></li> 1242 <li><a href="1.4.7.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.7.3 1243 Information Areas</a></li> 1244 <li><a href="1.4.7.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.7.4 1245 Status Areas</a></li> 1246 <li><a href="1.4.7.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.7.5 1247 Emphasis</a></li> 1248 </ul> 1249 <pre></pre> 1250 <hr /> 1251 <h3><a name="HDRAMSG" id="HDRAMSG">1.4.7.1 Messages</a></h3> 1252 <pre></pre> 1253 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>message</i> provides the most detailed kind of information to a user and is<br /> appropriate when the information is particularly important or urgent.<br /> Message windows often contain not only a description of a problem but also<br /> an explanation of how to correct the situation. They also contain push<br /> buttons that help a user decide how to continue working. Some message<br /> windows contain more elaborate groups of controls that allow a user to<br /> make more extensive corrections right in the message window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1254 name="FIGFIGUNIQ32" id="FIGFIGUNIQ32"> </a><a 1255 href="picture-70?mode=zoom"><img 1256 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P70.GIF" 1257 alt="PICTURE 70" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 71. Message. A message describes a situation and can contain<br />controls that help a user decide which action to take.<br /></pre> 1258 <pre></pre> 1259 <hr /> 1260 <h3>1.4.7.2 Progress Indicators</h3> 1261 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />To provide feedback to a user during longer (typically five seconds or<br />more) processes, a designer can use a <i>progress</i> <i>indicator.</i> A progress<br /> indicator is a visible cue that indicates progress toward the completion<br /> of a process, for example copying or sorting a group of objects. A<br /> progress indicator can indicate a specific amount of time. For example, a<br /> progress indicator could consist of a digital clock that displays the time<br /> remaining in a process. A progress indicator can also indicate a relative<br /> amount of time. For example, a progress indicator could consist of a<br /> slider that fills gradually as the process continues. When the process is<br /> complete, the slider is completely filled. A progress indicator can<br /> appear in its own window or in the window of the object that is undergoing<br /> the process.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1262 name="FIGFIGUNIQ33" id="FIGFIGUNIQ33"> </a><a 1263 href="picture-71?mode=zoom"><img 1264 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P71.GIF" 1265 alt="PICTURE 71" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 72. Progress Indicators. Progress indicators can take several<br />forms. The top progress indicator indicates the time remaining<br />in a process. The one in the center indicates both the total<br />time a process will take and the time elapsed so far. The one<br />on the bottom indicates the amount of the task completed in<br />relation to the amount of the task yet to be completed.<br /></pre> 1266 <hr /> 1267 <h3>1.4.7.3 Information Areas</h3> 1268 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />An <i>information</i> <i>area</i> is a small area, usually at the bottom of a window,<br /> used to display a brief explanation or description of the state of an<br /> object. It can also be used to display brief help information or<br /> information about the completion of a process. Information areas are less<br /> disruptive than messages and are appropriate for information that is not<br /> urgent.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1269 name="FIGFIGUNIQ34" id="FIGFIGUNIQ34"> </a><a 1270 href="picture-72?mode=zoom"><img 1271 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P72.GIF" 1272 alt="PICTURE 72" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 73. Information Area. An information area can be used to display a<br />brief explanation or description of the state of an object.<br /></pre> 1273 <hr /> 1274 <h3>1.4.7.4 Status Areas</h3> 1275 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>status</i> <i>area</i> differs from an information area in that it displays<br /> information about the view of an object rather than about the object<br /> itself. For example, a status area could display a count of the number of<br /> objects in a container displayed in a view, or it could indicate whether<br /> the information displayed in the view has been sorted or filtered. A<br /> status area typically appears at the top of a window, below the menu bar.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1276 name="FIGSTATAR" id="FIGSTATAR"> </a><a href="picture-73?mode=zoom"><img 1277 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P73.GIF" 1278 alt="PICTURE 73" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 74. Status Area. A status area displays information about the view<br />of an object. This status area indicates that this details<br />view of a container object has been filtered according to some<br />criteria specified by a user. Ten cars match the criteria.<br /></pre> 1279 <hr /> 1280 <h3>1.4.7.5 Emphasis</h3> 1281 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><i>Emphasis</i> is a visible cue that distinguishes one object or group of<br /> objects from another and conveys information to a user. Emphasis is<br /> typically used to indicate that an object or group of objects is:<br /><br /><br />° Selected<br />° The source of a direct manipulation operation<br />° The target of a direct manipulation operation<br />° In use<br />° Unavailable.<br /><br /><br />Emphasis can be used to display other kinds of information appropriate for<br />a specific product.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1282 name="FIGFIGUNIQ35" id="FIGFIGUNIQ35"> </a><a 1283 href="picture-74?mode=zoom"><img 1284 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P74.GIF" 1285 alt="PICTURE 74" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 75. Emphasis. Emphasis is visible highlighting that conveys<br />information to a user. The icon on the left has emphasis<br />indicating that it has been selected. The emphasis on the<br />first choice in the pull-down menu indicates that the choice is<br />unavailable.<br /></pre> 1286 <hr /> 1287 <h2>1.4.8 Exception Handling</h2> 1288 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An <i>exception</i> is any event or situation that prevents or has the potential<br /> to prevent a user's action from being completed in the manner the user<br /> expects. Exceptions occur when a product is unable to interpret a user's<br /> action.<br /><br /><br />Thoughtful application design can often prevent exceptions. For example,<br />if a designer specifies a way to indicate to a user that a choice is<br />unavailable, the user is less likely to try to select that choice.<br />However, because a designer cannot predict every possible action a user<br />might attempt, a product should include provisions for notifying users<br />about exceptions and should provide ways to help users recover from them.<br /><br /><br />Users typically do not expect an exception to occur, although experienced<br />users can learn to recognize situations that lead to an exception. For<br />example, a user might habitually attempt to close an object without first<br />saving any changes made to the object. Each time the user attempts to<br />close an object, a typical product would notify the user that the object<br />has been changed and that the changes are about to be discarded.<br />Eventually the user would come to expect the exception.<br /><br /><br />When an exception occurs, a product needs to tell a user at least three<br />things:<br /><br /><br />° How severe the situation is<br />° How soon the user must respond<br />° What actions the user can take to correct the situation.<br /><br /><br />Because most users do not expect most exceptions, a designer should take<br />care to choose a notification method that will inform a user without<br />alarming the user. There are many methods for conveying this information<br />to a user. A designer should choose methods appropriate for the users'<br />tasks and work environment, and a designer should apply the methods<br />consistently throughout a product. In addition, the designer should make<br />sure that the notification methods complement the help (see<a 1289 href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP"> "Help" in</a><br /><a 1290 href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP">topic 1.4.9</a>) provided by the product so that a user can completely<br /> understand the exception and how to respond to it.<br /><br /><br />Typical methods for notifying a user about an exception include:<br /><br /><br />° Audible cues<br />° Visible cues<br />° Textual cues.<br /><br /><br />Each is discussed in the following sections.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1291 <ul> 1292 <li><a href="1.4.8.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.8.1 1293 Audible Cues</a></li> 1294 <li><a href="1.4.8.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.8.2 1295 Visible Cues</a></li> 1296 <li><a href="1.4.8.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.8.3 1297 Textual Cues</a></li> 1298 <li><a href="1.4.8.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.4.8.4 1299 Examples of Exceptions and Their 1300 Corresponding Notifications</a></li> 1301 </ul> 1302 <pre></pre> 1303 <hr /> 1304 <h4>1.4.8.1 Audible Cues</h4> 1305 <pre></pre> 1306 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An <i>audible</i> <i>cue</i> is a sound generated by a user's computer to draw a user's<br /> attention. A beep is an example of a simple audible cue. If a product<br /> will be used with computer hardware that has advanced audio capabilities,<br /> a designer can be imaginative in specifying more elaborate audible cues,<br /> such as speech synthesis, for example.<br /></pre> 1307 <pre></pre> 1308 <hr /> 1309 <h4>1.4.8.2 Visible Cues</h4> 1310 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A <i>visible</i> <i>cue</i> is a change in the appearance of a product's components.<br /> For example, if a user places an inappropriate type of information in an<br /> entry field, the color of the entry field could change to alert the user<br /> that the information falls outside the range of acceptable values for that<br /> entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1311 name="FIGFIGUNIQ36" id="FIGFIGUNIQ36"> </a><a 1312 href="picture-75?mode=zoom"><img 1313 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P75.GIF" 1314 alt="PICTURE 75" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 76. Visible Cue. A visible cue can be used to indicate to a user<br />that different information is required.<br /><br /><br />If an object other than the object a user is working with requires some<br />attention from the user before an exception can be resolved, the<br />appearance of the object's icon could change. For example, if a printer<br />has run out of paper, the icon that represents the printer could change.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1315 name="FIGFIGUNIQ37" id="FIGFIGUNIQ37"> </a><a 1316 href="picture-76?mode=zoom"><img 1317 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P76.GIF" 1318 alt="PICTURE 76" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 77. Visible Cue. A visible cue can be used to indicate to a user<br />that an item in an interface needs attention from the user.<br /></pre> 1319 <hr /> 1320 <h4>1.4.8.3 Textual Cues</h4> 1321 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />When a user needs more information than can be conveyed with an audible<br />cue or visual cue, a designer can use a textual cue. A textual cue<br />consists of a word or words describing the exception. A textual cue can<br />be displayed in a message window.<br /></pre> 1322 <hr /> 1323 <h4>1.4.8.4 Examples of Exceptions 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 <pre width="80">A user can copy or create objects from existing objects. When a user copies an object, the resulting new object is an exact duplicate of the original object. The new object can even have the same name as the original object, or the user can change the object's name. When a user creates an object, the resulting new object is similar but not identical to the original object, and it has a new name. The original object is, in effect, a template for the new object. A designer can provide designated objects that act as templates for creating new objects. The designated objects have special visual representations.<a href="1.4.6.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGTEMPFG"> Figure 70</a> shows a template of a folder.<br /><br /><a id="FIGTEMPFG" name="FIGTEMPFG"> </a><a href="picture-69?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 69" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P69.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 70. A Folder Template. A user can create a new folder by using direct or indirect manipulation on an existing object.</span><br /><br />For example, if a user copies a text document, say an invoice, the new invoice will contain all of the text, settings, and other elements of the original invoice and will have the same invoice number. However, if a user creates a new invoice from an existing invoice, the new invoice will contain some--but not all--of the information in the original invoice. The newly created invoice might contain the same company name, mailing address, and entry fields as in the original invoice, but the invoice date and invoice number would be different, and the customer name and other entry fields would not contain the same information as the original.<br /><br />A designer decides how much information is transferred from one object to another during object creation and bases the decision on the objects and tasks involved. In the invoice example above, a relatively small amount of information is transferred to the newly created invoice. For some objects and tasks, however, nearly all of the information might be transferred. For example, an attorney might work with a set of document objects containing boilerplate text. When the attorney creates a new object, all of the text, except for a client's name, date, and other particulars, is transferred to the new object.<br /><br />A user can copy and create objects by both direct and indirect manipulation.<br /><br /></pre> 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 <hr /> 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 <h4>1.4.6.5.1 The Clipboard</h4> 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 <pre width="80">When using indirect manipulation to copy or create objects, a user uses the <i>clipboard.</i> The clipboard is an area of storage provided by the operating system to hold data temporarily. A user can copy, create, and move objects to and from the clipboard. The objects are held on the clipboard until the user replaces them with other objects or until the user turns off the system.<br /><br />The clipboard can hold entire objects or parts of objects, and it can hold any kind of object. For example, the clipboard can hold a single line of text or an entire document object, a single data record or an entire database, a single line segment or an entire graphic. Except when necessary to prevent the corruption of data, a designer should not restrict a user from placing any objects or parts of objects onto the clipboard.<br /></pre> 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 4152 <hr /> 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 <h2>1.4.7 Keeping a User Informed</h2> 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 <pre width="80"><br />For a user to be in control of his or her interaction with a product, the user must be aware of the state of objects, processes, or other elements of the interaction. The CUA user interface provides several ways for a product to communicate this kind of information to a user.<br /></pre> 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 <hr /> 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 <h3><a id="HDRAMSG" name="HDRAMSG">1.4.7.1 4180 Messages</a></h3> 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 <pre width="80">A <i>message</i> provides the most detailed kind of information to a user and is appropriate when the information is particularly important or urgent. Message windows often contain not only a description of a problem but also an explanation of how to correct the situation. They also contain push buttons that help a user decide how to continue working. Some message windows contain more elaborate groups of controls that allow a user to make more extensive corrections right in the message window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ32" name="FIGFIGUNIQ32"> </a><a href="picture-70?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 70" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P70.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 71. Message. A message describes a situation and can contain controls that help a user decide which action to take.</span><br /></pre> 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 <hr /> 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 <h3>1.4.7.2 Progress Indicators</h3> 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 <pre width="80">To provide feedback to a user during longer (typically five seconds or more) processes, a designer can use a <i>progress</i> <i>indicator.</i> A progress indicator is a visible cue that indicates progress toward the completion of a process, for example copying or sorting a group of objects. A progress indicator can indicate a specific amount of time. For example, a progress indicator could consist of a digital clock that displays the time remaining in a process. A progress indicator can also indicate a relative amount of time. For example, a progress indicator could consist of a slider that fills gradually as the process continues. When the process is complete, the slider is completely filled. A progress indicator can appear in its own window or in the window of the object that is undergoing the process.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ33" name="FIGFIGUNIQ33"> </a><a href="picture-71?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 71" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P71.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 72. Progress Indicators. Progress indicators can take several forms. The top progress indicator indicates the time remaining in a process. The one in the center indicates both the total time a process will take and the time elapsed so far. The one on the bottom indicates the amount of the task completed in</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">relation to the amount of the task yet to be completed.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 <hr /> 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 <h3>1.4.7.3 Information Areas</h3> 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 <pre width="80">An <i>information</i> <i>area</i> is a small area, usually at the bottom of a window, used to display a brief explanation or description of the state of an object. It can also be used to display brief help information or information about the completion of a process. Information areas are less disruptive than messages and are appropriate for information that is not urgent.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ34" name="FIGFIGUNIQ34"> </a><a href="picture-72?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 72" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P72.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 73. Information Area. An information area can be used to display a brief explanation or description of the state of an object.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 <hr /> 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 <h3>1.4.7.4 Status Areas</h3> 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269 <pre width="80">A <i>status</i> <i>area</i> differs from an information area in that it displays information about the view of an object rather than about the object itself. For example, a status area could display a count of the number of objects in a container displayed in a view, or it could indicate whether the information displayed in the view has been sorted or filtered. A status area typically appears at the top of a window, below the menu bar.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSTATAR" name="FIGSTATAR"> </a><a href="picture-73?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 73" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P73.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 74. Status Area. A status area displays information about the view of an object. This status area indicates that this details view of a container object has been filtered according to some criteria specified by a user. Ten cars match the criteria.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 <hr /> 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 <h3>1.4.7.5 Emphasis</h3> 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 <pre width="80"><i>Emphasis</i> is a visible cue that distinguishes one object or group of objects from another and conveys information to a user. Emphasis is typically used to indicate that an object or group of objects is:<br /><br />° Selected<br />° The source of a direct manipulation operation<br />° The target of a direct manipulation operation<br />° In use<br />° Unavailable.<br /><br />Emphasis can be used to display other kinds of information appropriate for a specific product.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ35" name="FIGFIGUNIQ35"> </a><a href="picture-74?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 74" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P74.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 75. Emphasis. Emphasis is visible highlighting that conveys information to a user. The icon on the left has emphasis indicating that it has been selected. The emphasis on the first choice in the pull-down menu indicates that the choice is unavailable.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 <hr /> 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 <h2>1.4.8 Exception Handling</h2> 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 <pre width="80">An <i>exception</i> is any event or situation that prevents or has the potential to prevent a user's action from being completed in the manner the user expects. Exceptions occur when a product is unable to interpret a user's action.<br /><br />Thoughtful application design can often prevent exceptions. For example, if a designer specifies a way to indicate to a user that a choice is unavailable, the user is less likely to try to select that choice. However, because a designer cannot predict every possible action a user might attempt, a product should include provisions for notifying users about exceptions and should provide ways to help users recover from them.<br /><br />Users typically do not expect an exception to occur, although experienced users can learn to recognize situations that lead to an exception. For example, a user might habitually attempt to close an object without first saving any changes made to the object. Each time the user attempts to close an object, a typical product would notify the user that the object has been changed and that the changes are about to be discarded. Eventually the user would come to expect the exception.<br /><br />When an exception occurs, a product needs to tell a user at least three things:<br /><br />° How severe the situation is<br />° How soon the user must respond<br />° What actions the user can take to correct the situation.<br /><br />Because most users do not expect most exceptions, a designer should take care to choose a notification method that will inform a user without alarming the user. There are many methods for conveying this information to a user. A designer should choose methods appropriate for the users' tasks and work environment, and a designer should apply the methods consistently throughout a product. In addition, the designer should make sure that the notification methods complement the help (see<a href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP"> "Help" in</a><a href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP"> </a><a href="1.4.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRAHELP">topic 1.4.9</a>) provided by the product so that a user can completely understand the exception and how to respond to it.<br /><br />Typical methods for notifying a user about an exception include:<br /><br />° Audible cues<br />° Visible cues<br />° Textual cues.<br /><br />Each is discussed in the following sections.<br /><br /></pre> 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 <hr /> 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 <h4>1.4.8.1 Audible Cues</h4> 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 <pre width="80">An <i>audible</i> <i>cue</i> is a sound generated by a user's computer to draw a user's attention. A beep is an example of a simple audible cue. If a product will be used with computer hardware that has advanced audio capabilities, a designer can be imaginative in specifying more elaborate audible cues, such as speech synthesis, for example.<br /></pre> 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 <hr /> 4359 4360 4361 4362 4363 <h4>1.4.8.2 Visible Cues</h4> 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 <pre width="80">A <i>visible</i> <i>cue</i> is a change in the appearance of a product's components. For example, if a user places an inappropriate type of information in an entry field, the color of the entry field could change to alert the user that the information falls outside the range of acceptable values for that entry field.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ36" name="FIGFIGUNIQ36"> </a><a href="picture-75?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 75" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P75.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 76. Visible Cue. A visible cue can be used to indicate to a user that different information is required.</span><br /><br />If an object other than the object a user is working with requires some attention from the user before an exception can be resolved, the appearance of the object's icon could change. For example, if a printer has run out of paper, the icon that represents the printer could change.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ37" name="FIGFIGUNIQ37"> </a><a href="picture-76?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 76" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P76.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 77. Visible Cue. A visible cue can be used to indicate to a user that an item in an interface needs attention from the user.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 <hr /> 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 <h4>1.4.8.3 Textual Cues</h4> 4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 <pre width="80">When a user needs more information than can be conveyed with an audible cue or visual cue, a designer can use a textual cue. A textual cue consists of a word or words describing the exception. A textual cue can be displayed in a message window.<br /><br /></pre> 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 <hr /> 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 <h4>1.4.8.4 Examples of Exceptions 1324 4414 and Their Corresponding 1325 4415 Notifications</h4> 1326 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following examples illustrate notification methods for alerting a user<br />to a problem.<br /><br /><br />1. A user types an inappropriate value into an entry field.<br /><br /><br />A product could do one or more of the following:<br /><br /><br />° Generate an audible cue.<br /><br /><br />° Change the color of the background of the entry field containing<br />the error.<br /><br /><br />° Display a message window that describes the error, explains how to<br />correct the error, and provides controls that allow the user to<br />correct the error from within the message window (for example, the<br />message window could contain an entry field into which the user<br />could type an appropriate value).<br /><br /><br />After the user supplies an appropriate value, the background color of<br />the entry field would change back to its usual color, and the message<br />window would close.<br /><br /><br />2. A printer runs out of paper, and the user has not opened a window for<br />the printer object.<br /><br /><br />A product could do one or more of the following:<br /><br /><br />° Change the appearance of the printer's icon to indicate that the<br />printer needs attention.<br /><br /><br />° Generate an audible cue.<br /><br /><br />° Display a message window as soon as the user opens a window for<br />the printer object. The message window would describe the<br />situation and would contain a push button that allows the user to<br />close the message window.<br /><br /><br />After the user supplies the printer with paper, the printer's icon<br />would change back to its normal appearance.<br /></pre> 1327 <hr /> 1328 <h2><a name="HDRAHELP" id="HDRAHELP">1.4.9 Help</a></h2> 1329 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A product should provide information to a user about how to use the<br />product and how to recover from exceptions. Information about how to use<br />a product is known as help information. Ideally, a product's help<br />facilities should work together with its methods and mechanisms for<br />exception handling to provide a user with all of the information needed to<br />solve any problem the user might encounter.<br /><br /><br />Help information describes a product's choices, objects, and interaction<br />techniques. Help information can help a user learn to use a product and<br />can serve as a refresher when a user has not used a product regularly or<br />recently.<br /><br /><br />Products designed for a CUA environment should provide several kinds of<br />help:<br /><br /><br />° Information about the contents of a window and the tasks a user can<br />perform in the window<br /><br /><br />° Information about any selected item, including the item's purpose and<br />ways to interact with the item<br /><br /><br />° Information about the key assignments on the keyboard<br /><br /><br />° An index of all of the topics for which help is available<br /><br /><br />° Information about using the help facility.<br /></pre> 1330 <hr /> 1331 <h1><a name="HDRCUADESM" id="HDRCUADESM">1.5 Chapter 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422 4423 4424 4425 <pre width="80">The following examples illustrate notification methods for alerting a user to a problem.<br /><br />1. A user types an inappropriate value into an entry field.<br /><br />A product could do one or more of the following:<br /><br />° Generate an audible cue.<br />° Change the color of the background of the entry field containing the error.<br />° Display a message window that describes the error, explains how to correct the error, and provides controls that allow the user to correct the error from within the message window (for example, the message window could contain an entry field into which the user could type an appropriate value).<br /><br />After the user supplies an appropriate value, the background color of the entry field would change back to its usual color, and the message window would close.<br /><br /><br />2. A printer runs out of paper, and the user has not opened a window for the printer object.<br /><br />A product could do one or more of the following:<br /><br />° Change the appearance of the printer's icon to indicate that the printer needs attention.<br />° Generate an audible cue.<br />° Display a message window as soon as the user opens a window for the printer object. The message window would describe the situation and would contain a push button that allows the user to close the message window.<br /><br />After the user supplies the printer with paper, the printer's icon would change back to its normal appearance.<br /><br /></pre> 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 <hr /> 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 <h2><a id="HDRAHELP" name="HDRAHELP">1.4.9 4441 Help</a></h2> 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 4451 <pre width="80"><br />A product should provide information to a user about how to use the product and how to recover from exceptions. Information about how to use a product is known as help information. Ideally, a product's help facilities should work together with its methods and mechanisms for exception handling to provide a user with all of the information needed to solve any problem the user might encounter.<br /><br />Help information describes a product's choices, objects, and interaction techniques. Help information can help a user learn to use a product and can serve as a refresher when a user has not used a product regularly or recently.<br /><br />Products designed for a CUA environment should provide several kinds of help:<br /><br />° Information about the contents of a window and the tasks a user can perform in the window<br />° Information about any selected item, including the item's purpose and ways to interact with the item<br />° Information about the key assignments on the keyboard<br />° An index of all of the topics for which help is available<br />° Information about using the help facility.<br /><br /></pre> 4452 4453 4454 4455 4456 4457 4458 4459 4460 4461 <hr /> 4462 4463 4464 4465 4466 <h1 style="width: 640px;"><a id="HDRCUADESM" name="HDRCUADESM">1.5 4467 Chapter 1332 4468 5. The CUA 1333 4469 Designer's Model--A Summary</a></h1> 1334 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />When combined, the classes of objects described in Chapter 1 (see <a 1335 href="1.1.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJTYPE">"Object</a><br /><a 1336 href="1.1.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJTYPE">Classes" in topic 1.1.4.1</a>), the design principles described in Chapter 3,<br /> and the components of the CUA interface described in Chapter 4 form a<br /> designer's model of the CUA user interface. The following sections<br /> present a summary of how these parts are related in the CUA user<br /> interface.<br /><br /><br />The CUA designer's model contains all of the fundamental concepts,<br />components, and relationships in a CUA environment. A designer can use<br />the CUA designer's model as a foundation for developing products that are<br />user-oriented. Elements of the CUA designer's model can be reused and<br />extended to create a user interface appropriate for the intended users'<br />tasks.<a 1337 href="1.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUADESM"> Figure 78</a> illustrates the CUA designer's model, including the<br /> interrelatedness of the components of the CUA user interface.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1338 name="FIGCUADESM" id="FIGCUADESM"> </a><a href="picture-77?mode=zoom"><img 1339 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P77.GIF" 1340 alt="PICTURE 77" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 78. Designer's Model of the CUA Interface. Each arrow represents a<br />relationship between two of the boxed items on the chart.<br />Characteristics of the relationship are indicated by the<br />direction of the arrow and by the text beside each arrow. For<br />example, the arrow that points from Container to Object means<br />that a container is an object. Double bars indicate a<br />one-to-many relationship. For example, one container object<br />can contain many other objects.<br /><br /><br />The three sections of the figure--object relationships, visual<br />representations, and interaction mechanisms--correspond to the three<br />layers of the iceberg model of interface design (see<a 1341 href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGICEBERG"> Figure 8 in</a><br /><a 1342 href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGICEBERG">topic 1.2.3</a>).<br /><br /><br />The figures in the following sections highlight and elaborate on some of<br />the relationships in the CUA user interface.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1343 <ul> 1344 <li><a href="1.5.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.5.1 1345 CUA Class Hierarchy</a></li> 1346 <li><a href="1.5.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.5.2 1347 CUA Containment</a></li> 1348 <li><a href="1.5.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.5.3 1349 CUA Visual Representations</a></li> 1350 <li><a href="1.5.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.5.4 1351 CUA Views</a></li> 1352 <li><a href="1.5.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.5.5 1353 CUA Interaction Mechanisms</a></li> 1354 </ul> 1355 <pre></pre> 1356 <hr /> 1357 <h2><a name="HDRCUAINH" id="HDRCUAINH">1.5.1 CUA 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 <pre width="80"><br />When combined, the classes of objects described in Chapter 1 (see <a href="1.1.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJTYPE">"Object</a><a href="1.1.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJTYPE"> </a><a href="1.1.4.1?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJTYPE">Classes" in topic 1.1.4.1</a>), the design principles described in Chapter 3, and the components of the CUA interface described in Chapter 4 form a designer's model of the CUA user interface. The following sections present a summary of how these parts are related in the CUA user interface.<br /><br />The CUA designer's model contains all of the fundamental concepts, components, and relationships in a CUA environment. A designer can use the CUA designer's model as a foundation for developing products that are user-oriented. Elements of the CUA designer's model can be reused and extended to create a user interface appropriate for the intended users' tasks.<a href="1.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUADESM"> Figure 78</a> illustrates the CUA designer's model, including the interrelatedness of the components of the CUA user interface.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCUADESM" name="FIGCUADESM"> </a><a href="picture-77?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 77" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P77.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 78. Designer's Model of the CUA Interface. Each arrow represents a relationship between two of the boxed items on the chart. Characteristics of the relationship are indicated by the direction of the arrow and by the text beside each arrow. For example, the arrow that points from Container to Object means</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">that a container is an object. Double bars indicate a one-to-many relationship. For example, one container object can contain many other objects.</span><br /><br />The three sections of the figure--object relationships, visual representations, and interaction mechanisms--correspond to the three layers of the iceberg model of interface design (see<a href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGICEBERG"> Figure 8 in</a><a href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGICEBERG"> </a><a href="1.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGICEBERG">topic 1.2.3</a>).<br /><br />The figures in the following sections highlight and elaborate on some of the relationships in the CUA user interface.<br /><br /></pre> 4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 <hr /> 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 <h2><a id="HDRCUAINH" name="HDRCUAINH">1.5.1 4492 CUA 1358 4493 Class 1359 4494 Hierarchy</a></h2> 1360 <pre></pre> 1361 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In the CUA environment, container objects, data objects, and device<br />objects inherit the attributes common to all objects. The workplace,<br />folders, and product-specific containers inherit the attributes common to<br />all containers.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1362 name="FIGCUAINH" id="FIGCUAINH"> </a><a href="picture-78?mode=zoom"><img 1363 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P78.GIF" 1364 alt="PICTURE 78" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 79. Class Hierarchy in the CUA User Interface. Each object that<br />appears below another object in this hierarchy inherits<br />characteristics of the objects above it.<br /></pre> 1365 <pre></pre> 1366 <hr /> 1367 <h2>1.5.2 CUA Containment</h2> 1368 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Most objects in the CUA user interface contain other objects. The<br />workplace fills a user's display screen and contains all of the objects a<br />user works with, including components of the CUA interface.<a 1369 href="1.5.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUACONT"> Figure 80</a><br />shows the basic containment relationships of components of the CUA<br />interface.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1370 name="FIGCUACONT" id="FIGCUACONT"> </a><a href="picture-79?mode=zoom"><img 1371 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P79.GIF" 1372 alt="PICTURE 79" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 80. A Containment Hierarchy for the CUA User Interface. A user's<br />screen contains the workplace, which contains windows, icons,<br />and the pointer. Windows contain views and the cursor. Views<br />contain other views, controls, and product-specific visual<br />representations of objects.<br /></pre> 1373 <hr /> 1374 <h2>1.5.3 CUA Visual 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 <pre width="80"><br />In the CUA environment, container objects, data objects, and device objects inherit the attributes common to all objects. The workplace, folders, and product-specific containers inherit the attributes common to all containers.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCUAINH" name="FIGCUAINH"> </a><a href="picture-78?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 78" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P78.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 79. Class Hierarchy in the CUA User Interface. Each object that appears below another object in this hierarchy inherits characteristics of the objects above it.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 <hr /> 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 <h2>1.5.2 CUA Containment</h2> 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 <pre width="80"><br />Most objects in the CUA user interface contain other objects. The workplace fills a user's display screen and contains all of the objects a user works with, including components of the CUA interface.<a href="1.5.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUACONT"> Figure 80</a> shows the basic containment relationships of components of the CUA interface.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCUACONT" name="FIGCUACONT"> </a><a href="picture-79?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 79" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P79.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 80. A Containment Hierarchy for the CUA User Interface. A user's screen contains the workplace, which contains windows, icons, and the pointer. Windows contain views and the cursor. Views contain other views, controls, and product-specific visual representations of objects.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 <hr /> 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 <h2>1.5.3 CUA Visual 1375 4549 Representations</h2> 1376 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The elements of a user's computer system are represented visually in the<br />CUA interface.<a 1377 href="1.5.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGVISREP"> Figure 81</a> shows how the elements are represented.<br /><br /><br /><a 1378 name="FIGVISREP" id="FIGVISREP" /><a name="TBLVISREP" id="TBLVISREP"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 81. Visual Representations in the CUA User Interface |<br />|___________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>This</b> <b>element...</b> | <b>Has</b> <b>this</b> <b>visual</b> <b>representation.</b> |<br /> |___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /> | Screen | Workplace |<br /> |___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /> | Object | Icon and views |<br /> |___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /> | Mouse | Pointer |<br /> |___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /> | Keyboard | Cursor |<br /> |___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1379 <hr /> 1380 <h2>1.5.4 CUA Views</h2> 1381 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The views available for representing objects are shown in <a 1382 href="1.5.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGVIEWFIG">Figure 82</a>. For<br /> a more detailed discussion of views, see <a 1383 href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">"Views" in topic 1.4.5.1</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1384 name="FIGVIEWFIG" id="FIGVIEWFIG"> </a><a href="picture-80?mode=zoom"><img 1385 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P80.GIF" 1386 alt="PICTURE 80" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 82. Views Available for Representing Objects in the CUA User<br />Interface. The CUA interface provides four basic types of<br />views.<br /></pre> 1387 <hr /> 1388 <h2>1.5.5 CUA Interaction 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 <pre width="80"><br />The elements of a user's computer system are represented visually in the CUA interface.<a href="1.5.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGVISREP"> Figure 81</a> shows how the elements are represented.<br /><br /><a id="FIGVISREP" name="FIGVISREP"></a><a id="TBLVISREP" name="TBLVISREP"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 81. Visual Representations in the CUA User Interface</span><br />_________________________________________________________________<br />| <b>This</b> <b>element...</b> | <b>Has</b> <b>this</b> <b>visual</b> <b>representation.</b> |<br />|_______________________|_______________________________________|<br />| Screen | Workplace |<br />|_______________________|_______________________________________|<br />| Object | Icon and views |<br />|_______________________|_______________________________________|<br />| Mouse | Pointer |<br />|_______________________|_______________________________________|<br />| Keyboard | Cursor |<br />|_______________________|_______________________________________|<br /><br /></pre> 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 <hr /> 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 <h2>1.5.4 CUA Views</h2> 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 <pre width="80"><br />The views available for representing objects are shown in <a href="1.5.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGVIEWFIG">Figure 82</a>. For a more detailed discussion of views, see <a href="1.4.5.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEWS">"Views" in topic 1.4.5.1</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGVIEWFIG" name="FIGVIEWFIG"> </a><a href="picture-80?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 80" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P80.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 82. Views Available for Representing Objects in the CUA User Interface. The CUA interface provides four basic types of views.</span><br /></pre> 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 <hr /> 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 <h2>1.5.5 CUA Interaction 1389 4600 Mechanisms</h2> 1390 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Interaction in the CUA user interface consists of input and feedback.<br /><a 1391 href="1.5.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUAINTM">Figure 83</a> shows the elements of interaction in the CUA user interface.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1392 name="FIGCUAINTM" id="FIGCUAINTM"> </a><a href="picture-81?mode=zoom"><img 1393 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P81.GIF" 1394 alt="PICTURE 81" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 83. Interaction Mechanisms in the CUA User Interface. Interaction<br />consists of input and feedback. Input can be by way of a<br />mouse, keyboard, or touch. Feedback consists of audible cues<br />and visible cues. Visible cues can be textual or graphical.<br /><br /><br />A user's input modifies a view, which can modify the object represented in<br />the view.<br /></pre> 1395 <hr /> 1396 <h1><a name="HDRDSGNCUA" id="HDRDSGNCUA">1.6 Chapter 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 <pre width="80"><br />Interaction in the CUA user interface consists of input and feedback. <a href="1.5.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUAINTM">Figure 83</a> shows the elements of interaction in the CUA user interface.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCUAINTM" name="FIGCUAINTM"> </a><a href="picture-81?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 81" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P81.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 83. Interaction Mechanisms in the CUA User Interface. Interaction consists of input and feedback. Input can be by way of a mouse, keyboard, or touch. Feedback consists of audible cues and visible cues. Visible cues can be textual or graphical.</span><br /><br />A user's input modifies a view, which can modify the object represented in the view.<br /></pre> 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 <hr /> 4621 4622 4623 4624 4625 <h1 style="width: 640px;"><a id="HDRDSGNCUA" name="HDRDSGNCUA">1.6 4626 Chapter 1397 4627 6. Designing a 1398 Product with a CUA User Interface</a></h1> 1399 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />To illustrate one approach to the process of designing a product with a<br />CUA user interface, we designed a sample product, and we documented our<br />steps. This chapter describes those steps. Designers can follow these<br />steps or can adapt this process to suit their needs.<br /><br /><br />We designed a product that could be used for selling new cars at a car<br />dealership. Our design is a partial design only, intended to highlight<br />the main design considerations and the processes a designer can follow<br />when developing a user interface. A full-fledged product design would<br />contain much more detail.<br /><br /><br />The product is an example only, and it is not intended to represent the<br />practices of a particular car dealership, nor is it intended to represent<br />the ideal product for all car dealerships. Likewise, our process is an<br />example only. This process worked for us, but a different process might<br />work equally well for a different group of designers.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1400 <ul> 1401 <li><a href="1.6.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.1 1402 Overview of the Development Process</a></li> 1403 <li><a href="1.6.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.2 1404 Researching and Planning the Product</a></li> 1405 <li><a href="1.6.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3 1406 Designing the Product</a></li> 1407 <li><a href="1.6.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.4 1408 Using the Product</a></li> 1409 </ul> 1410 <pre></pre> 1411 <hr /> 1412 <h2>1.6.1 Overview of the 4628 Product with a CUA User Interface</a></h1> 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 <pre width="80"><br />To illustrate one approach to the process of designing a product with a CUA user interface, we designed a sample product, and we documented our steps. This chapter describes those steps. Designers can follow these steps or can adapt this process to suit their needs.<br /><br />We designed a product that could be used for selling new cars at a car dealership. Our design is a partial design only, intended to highlight the main design considerations and the processes a designer can follow when developing a user interface. A full-fledged product design would contain much more detail.<br /><br />The product is an example only, and it is not intended to represent the practices of a particular car dealership, nor is it intended to represent the ideal product for all car dealerships. Likewise, our process is an example only. This process worked for us, but a different process might work equally well for a different group of designers.<br /><br /></pre> 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646 4647 4648 <hr /> 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653 <h2>1.6.1 Overview of the 1413 4654 Development Process</h2> 1414 <pre></pre> 1415 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The basic steps in our development process were:<br /><br /><br />° Researching and planning<br />° Designing<br />° Prototyping<br />° Testing.<br /><br /><br />Each of these steps entails one or more subprocesses of its own, and we<br />went through each step for each part our product's interface. When we<br />tested each part of our product, we compared the results with the<br />objectives we set during the planning stage. If the results met our<br />customer's requirements and our requirements, we proceeded to design the<br />next part of the interface. If not, we changed the design and tested the<br />product again. This process is known as an iterative development process.<br /><a 1416 href="1.6.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGITERDES">Figure 84</a> illustrates the iterative development process.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1417 name="FIGITERDES" id="FIGITERDES"> </a><a href="picture-82?mode=zoom"><img 1418 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P82.GIF" 1419 alt="PICTURE 82" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 84. Iterative Development Process. For each part of our product's<br />interface, we developed a prototype and tested the prototype.<br />When the test results satisfied us, we moved on to the next<br />part of the interface.<br /><br /><br />During each iteration of the development process, we kept in mind the<br />design principles discussed in <a 1420 href="1.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRUIDESP">Chapter 3, "Goals and Design Principles of</a><br /><a 1421 href="1.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRUIDESP">the CUA User Interface" in topic 1.3</a>. That is, we looked for ways to:<br /><br /><br />° Provide immediate feedback for each action<br />° Reduce the number of steps required to accomplish a task<br />° Provide full function with a small number of objects<br />° Increase a user's control over the product<br />° Reduce the potential for exceptions<br />° Reduce the effect of exceptions<br />° Allow a user to use either the keyboard or the mouse to accomplish a<br />task<br />° Provide interaction techniques suited to the needs of novice users and<br />expert users.<br /><br /><br />Finally we arrived at a satisfactory design.<br /><br /><br />The rest of this chapter describes the processes we used in researching,<br />planning, and designing our product. Although prototyping and testing<br />also have their own processes, a detailed discussion of prototyping and<br />testing is beyond the scope of this book. However, we will say that we<br />tested our product for consistent behavior and for compatibility with a<br />user's expectations. We also sought feedback from test subjects about<br />whether the product was pleasing to use.<br /></pre> 1422 <pre></pre> 1423 <hr /> 1424 <h2>1.6.2 Researching and Planning 4655 4656 4657 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 <pre></pre> 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 <pre width="80">The basic steps in our development process were:<br /><br />° Researching and planning<br />° Designing<br />° Prototyping<br />° Testing.<br /><br />Each of these steps entails one or more subprocesses of its own, and we went through each step for each part our product's interface. When we tested each part of our product, we compared the results with the objectives we set during the planning stage. If the results met our customer's requirements and our requirements, we proceeded to design the next part of the interface. If not, we changed the design and tested the product again. This process is known as an iterative development process. <a href="1.6.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGITERDES">Figure 84</a> illustrates the iterative development process.<br /><br /><a id="FIGITERDES" name="FIGITERDES"> </a><a href="picture-82?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 82" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P82.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 84. Iterative Development Process. For each part of our product's interface, we developed a prototype and tested the prototype. When the test results satisfied us, we moved on to the next part of the interface.</span><br /><br />During each iteration of the development process, we kept in mind the design principles discussed in <a href="1.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRUIDESP">Chapter 3, "Goals and Design Principles of</a><a href="1.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRUIDESP"> </a><a href="1.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRUIDESP">the CUA User Interface" in topic 1.3</a>. That is, we looked for ways to:<br /><br />° Provide immediate feedback for each action<br />° Reduce the number of steps required to accomplish a task<br />° Provide full function with a small number of objects<br />° Increase a user's control over the product<br />° Reduce the potential for exceptions<br />° Reduce the effect of exceptions<br />° Allow a user to use either the keyboard or the mouse to accomplish a task<br />° Provide interaction techniques suited to the needs of novice users and expert users.<br /><br />Finally we arrived at a satisfactory design.<br /><br />The rest of this chapter describes the processes we used in researching, planning, and designing our product. Although prototyping and testing also have their own processes, a detailed discussion of prototyping and testing is beyond the scope of this book. However, we will say that we tested our product for consistent behavior and for compatibility with a user's expectations. We also sought feedback from test subjects about whether the product was pleasing to use.<br /><br /></pre> 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 <hr /> 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 <h2>1.6.2 Researching and Planning 1425 4692 the Product</h2> 1426 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />First we recognized that we were serving two distinct audiences: the<br />people who buy a product (our customers) and the people who use a product<br />(our users). Sometimes the two audiences overlap, but in this case, our<br />customers were the upper management staff of a car dealership, while the<br />users were primarily the sales staff and lower management staff.<br /><br /><br />To begin our iterative development process we had to:<br /><br /><br />° Gather requirements from upper management<br />° Learn about the users and their tasks<br />° Match management's requirements to the users' tasks.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1427 <ul> 1428 <li><a href="1.6.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.2.1 1429 Step 1. Gathering Requirements from 1430 Management</a></li> 1431 <li><a href="1.6.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.2.2 1432 Step 2. Learning about Users and Their 1433 Tasks</a></li> 1434 <li><a href="1.6.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.2.3 1435 Step 3. Matching Management's Requirements to 1436 the Users' Tasks</a></li> 1437 </ul> 1438 <pre></pre> 1439 <hr /> 1440 <h3>1.6.2.1 Step 1. Gathering 4693 4694 4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 <pre width="80"><br />First we recognized that we were serving two distinct audiences: the people who buy a product (our customers) and the people who use a product (our users). Sometimes the two audiences overlap, but in this case, our customers were the upper management staff of a car dealership, while the users were primarily the sales staff and lower management staff.<br /><br />To begin our iterative development process we had to:<br /><br />° Gather requirements from upper management<br />° Learn about the users and their tasks<br />° Match management's requirements to the users' tasks.<br /><br /></pre> 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 <hr /> 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 <h3>1.6.2.1 Step 1. Gathering 1441 4718 Requirements from Management</h3> 1442 <pre></pre> 1443 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />By interviewing the owner and general manager, we learned that they wanted<br />to:<br /><br /><br />° Eliminate paperwork<br />° Reduce errors in locating cars and information about cars<br />° Increase the amount of time salespeople spend talking with customers<br />by reducing the amount of time the salespeople spend tracking down<br />information and getting approval of sales<br />° Sell more cars.<br /><br /><br />The information from management was result-oriented--that is, the managers<br />did not tell us the details about how they sell cars, nor did they tell us<br />how they expected us to design a product. Instead, they gave us<br />high-level information about what they hoped to gain by using our product.<br /></pre> 1444 <pre></pre> 1445 <hr /> 1446 <h3>1.6.2.2 Step 2. Learning about 4719 4720 4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729 4730 <pre width="80">By interviewing the owner and general manager, we learned that they wanted to:<br /><br />° Eliminate paperwork<br />° Reduce errors in locating cars and information about cars<br />° Increase the amount of time salespeople spend talking with customers by reducing the amount of time the salespeople spend tracking down information and getting approval of sales<br />° Sell more cars.<br /><br />The information from management was result-oriented--that is, the managers did not tell us the details about how they sell cars, nor did they tell us how they expected us to design a product. Instead, they gave us high-level information about what they hoped to gain by using our product.<br /><br /></pre> 4731 4732 4733 4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 4739 4740 4741 4742 <hr /> 4743 4744 4745 4746 4747 <h3>1.6.2.2 Step 2. Learning about 1447 4748 Users and Their Tasks</h3> 1448 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />To serve the needs of the users of our product, we had to gather<br />information about the users. We interviewed a salesperson with extensive<br />experience at car dealerships. He helped us compile a profile of car<br />salespeople, the primary users of our product.<br /><br /><br />In particular, we were interested in salespeople's:<br /><br /><br />° Experience<br />- How much experience do they have doing their job?<br />- How much experience do they have using computers?<br />- How much experience do they have using similar user interfaces?<br />° Capabilities<br />- With what styles do they approach their work?<br />- How do they learn new systems?<br />° Motivations<br />- How will the new product affect their work routine?<br />- How will the new product affect their productivity?<br />° Desires<br />- How would they like to use the product?<br />- What kinds of features would they like to see in the product?<br /><br /><br />We found out that salespeople:<br /><br /><br />° Are not experienced in using computers<br />° Are not interested in programming computers<br />° Vary in their ability and interest in learning new procedures<br />° Use varied techniques to sell cars<br />° Are competitive<br />° Are knowledgeable about the products they sell<br />° Want to be able to communicate with their customers while they use the<br />product.<br /><br /><br />After analyzing the characteristics of our product's intended users, we<br />realized that our product's interface must:<br /><br /><br />° Be easy to learn<br /><br /><br />° Be flexible enough to serve users with different approaches to both<br />learning and sales<br /><br /><br />° Contain elements resembling those already used in a salesperson's job<br /><br /><br />° Contain terms that are familiar to a salesperson<br /><br /><br />° Be sophisticated enough to withstand scrutiny of people who are<br />knowledgeable about their field<br /><br /><br />° Be appropriate to be seen by a customer.<br /><br /><br />We also needed to learn about the tasks the users perform in their jobs.<br />With the help of our expert salesperson, we drew an organization chart for<br />a typical car dealership. The organization is shown in <a 1449 href="1.6.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGAUTODEA">Figure 85</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1450 name="FIGAUTODEA" id="FIGAUTODEA"> </a><a href="picture-83?mode=zoom"><img 1451 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P83.GIF" 1452 alt="PICTURE 83" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 85. Typical Automobile Dealership Organization<br /><br /><br />We compiled a list of the dealership's personnel and of the main tasks<br />that each person performs.<a 1453 href="1.6.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGUTASKS"> Figure 86</a> shows the list of tasks.<br /><br /><br /><a 1454 name="FIGUTASKS" id="FIGUTASKS" /><a name="TBLUTASKS" id="TBLUTASKS"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 86. Users and Tasks in a Car Dealership |<br />|___________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Users</b> <b>and</b> <b>Tasks</b> | <b>Users</b> <b>and</b> <b>Tasks</b> |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| Owner, President | General Manager |<br />| | |<br />| ° Meets with manufacturer's representatives | ° Hires dealership personnel |<br />| | |<br />| ° Manages dealership personnel | ° Sets guidelines for profit margins |<br />| | |<br />| ° Studies market trends and forecasts | ° Determines pack fees (fees added to dealer invoice) |<br />| | |<br />| ° Examines accounting reports. | ° Sets labor costs for service. |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| New Car Sales Manager | Used Car Sales Manager |<br />| | |<br />| ° Orders new cars and trucks | ° Reviews the National Automobile Dealers Association |<br />| | (NADA) values for comparable cars |<br />| ° Reviews statistics of vehicles sold | |<br />| | ° Sets prices for used cars |<br />| ° Hires and manages salespeople | |<br />| | ° Determines condition and value of trade-ins. |<br />| ° Approves sales. | |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| Salesperson | Finance Manager |<br />| | |<br />| ° Sells cars and trucks | ° Prints sales contracts |<br />| | |<br />| ° Maintains preferred customer lists | ° Finds financing for customers |<br />| | |<br />| ° Reads used car sheets ("cards") | ° Manages manufacturer's financing programs |<br />| | |<br />| ° Writes follow-up letters. | ° Sells extended warranties, debt insurance, and |<br />| | roadside services. |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| Office Manager | Fleet Manager |<br />| | |<br />| ° Manages office personnel | ° Orders fleets of cars and trucks for customers |<br />| | |<br />| ° Handles titles and transfers, registration, loan | ° Negotiates with purchasing agents at customers' |<br />| payoffs with banks | businesses |<br />| | |<br />| ° Submits paperwork required by law | ° Keeps track of customers' business inventories |<br />| | (quantity, age) |<br />| ° Works with the dealership's lawyer. | |<br />| | ° Estimates life span of customers' fleets. |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| Parts Manager | Parts Personnel |<br />| | |<br />| ° Orders parts and sets prices for parts | ° Selects parts from shelves |<br />| | |<br />| ° Manages parts counter | ° Unpacks boxes of new parts and stocks shelves |<br />| | |<br />| ° Updates parts inventory | ° Updates parts inventory |<br />| | |<br />| ° Compares parts to service order. | ° Compares parts to service order. |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| Service Manager | Service Writer |<br />| | |<br />| ° Sells service | ° Sells service |<br />| | |<br />| ° Runs service specials | ° Writes a service order |<br />| | |<br />| ° Trains mechanics | ° Determines warranty work. |<br />| | |<br />| ° Handles service orders | |<br />| | |<br />| ° Gives cost estimates for parts and labor. | |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| Mechanic | Lot Attendant |<br />| | |<br />| ° Fixes cars | ° Matches manufacturer's invoice to dealer's invoice |<br />| | and adds dealer's invoice to window |<br />| ° Records time and parts used | |<br />| | ° Installs after-market options (stereos, pinstriping) |<br />| ° Reads service bulletins and service manuals. | |<br />| | ° Prepares new and used cars (washes cars, removes |<br />| | plastic, installs hubcaps, checks tire pressure). |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br />Because our sample product will be used during the process of selling<br />cars, we looked at a salesperson's tasks in more detail.<br /><br /><br />In a typical sales transaction, a customer enters a showroom and inquires<br />about a car or several cars. The salesperson in turn asks the customer<br />what features and price range the customer is looking for. Using the<br />information the customer provides, the salesperson gathers information<br />about the dealership's cars that match the customer's requirements. The<br />salesperson then presents the information to the customer.<br /><br /><br />If a car appeals to the customer, the customer takes the car for a test<br />drive. If the customer still is interested in the car after the test<br />drive, the salesperson and customer negotiate about the financial<br />arrangements. They use a worksheet to record the details of the proposed<br />purchase. Once they come to an agreement, the salesperson takes the<br />worksheet with the agreed-to figures to the sales manager for approval.<br />If the sales manager approves the sale, the salesperson passes the<br />worksheet along to the finance manager.<a 1455 href="1.6.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGUSERS"> Figure 87</a> lists the tasks of the<br /> salesperson, the sales manager, and the finance manager.<br /><br /><br /><a 1456 name="FIGUSERS" id="FIGUSERS" /><a name="TBLUSERS" id="TBLUSERS"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 87. Tasks Involved in Selling a Car |<br />|___________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Users</b> | <b>Tasks</b> |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /><a 1457 name="SPTUSECASE" id="SPTUSECASE"> | Salesperson | |</a><br />| | |<br />| | ° Finds out what the customer wants, needs, and can |<br />| | afford |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Finds out what products the car dealership can |<br />| | provide that most closely match the customer's |<br />| | wants, needs, and budget. |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Fills out a worksheet that lists the: |<br />| | |<br />| | - Make and model of car |<br />| | - Price of the car |<br />| | - Trade-in value of the customer's old car (if |<br />| | applicable) |<br />| | - Down payment amount (if applicable). |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Gets the sales manager's approval. |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Gives the worksheet information to the finance |<br />| | manager. |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| Sales Manager | ° Reviews worksheet and authorizes sales after |<br />| | considering: |<br />| | |<br />| | - Agreed-to price |<br />| | - Trade-in value |<br />| | - Options. |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| Finance Manager | ° Arranges financing for customer |<br />| | ° Completes the sale. |<br />|___________________________________________________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1458 <hr /> 1459 <h3>1.6.2.3 Step 3. Matching 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 4756 4757 4758 <pre width="80">To serve the needs of the users of our product, we had to gather information about the users. We interviewed a salesperson with extensive experience at car dealerships. He helped us compile a profile of car salespeople, the primary users of our product.<br /><br />In particular, we were interested in salespeople's:<br /><br />° Experience<br />- How much experience do they have doing their job?<br />- How much experience do they have using computers?<br />- How much experience do they have using similar user interfaces?<br />° Capabilities<br />- With what styles do they approach their work?<br />- How do they learn new systems?<br />° Motivations<br />- How will the new product affect their work routine?<br />- How will the new product affect their productivity?<br />° Desires<br />- How would they like to use the product?<br />- What kinds of features would they like to see in the product?<br /><br />We found out that salespeople:<br /><br />° Are not experienced in using computers<br />° Are not interested in programming computers<br />° Vary in their ability and interest in learning new procedures<br />° Use varied techniques to sell cars<br />° Are competitive<br />° Are knowledgeable about the products they sell<br />° Want to be able to communicate with their customers while they use the product.<br /><br />After analyzing the characteristics of our product's intended users, we realized that our product's interface must:<br /><br />° Be easy to learn<br />° Be flexible enough to serve users with different approaches to both learning and sales<br />° Contain elements resembling those already used in a salesperson's job<br />° Contain terms that are familiar to a salesperson<br />° Be sophisticated enough to withstand scrutiny of people who are knowledgeable about their field<br />° Be appropriate to be seen by a customer.<br /><br />We also needed to learn about the tasks the users perform in their jobs. With the help of our expert salesperson, we drew an organization chart for a typical car dealership. The organization is shown in <a href="1.6.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGAUTODEA">Figure 85</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGAUTODEA" name="FIGAUTODEA"> </a><a href="picture-83?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 83" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P83.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 85. Typical Automobile Dealership Organization</span><br /><br />We compiled a list of the dealership's personnel and of the main tasks that each person performs.<a href="1.6.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGUTASKS"> Figure 86</a> shows the list of tasks.<br /><br /><a id="FIGUTASKS" name="FIGUTASKS"></a><a id="TBLUTASKS" name="TBLUTASKS"> ________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 86. Users and Tasks in a Car Dealership</span> |<br />|______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Users</b> <b>and</b> <b>Tasks</b> | <b>Users</b> <b>and</b> <b>Tasks</b> |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________|<br />| Owner, President | General Manager |<br />| | |<br />| ° Meets with manufacturer's | ° Hires dealership personnel |<br />| representatives | |<br />| | |<br />| ° Manages dealership personnel | ° Sets guidelines for profit margins |<br />| | |<br />| ° Studies market trends and forecasts | ° Determines pack fees (fees added to| <br />| | dealer invoice) |<br />| | |<br />| ° Examines accounting reports. | ° Sets labor costs for service. |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________|<br />| New Car Sales Manager | Used Car Sales Manager |<br />| | |<br />| ° Orders new cars and trucks | ° Reviews the National Automobile |<br />| | Dealers Association (NADA) values |<br />| | for comparable cars |<br />| ° Reviews statistics of vehicles sold | |<br />| | ° Sets prices for used cars |<br />| ° Hires and manages salespeople | |<br />| | ° Determines condition and value of |<br />| ° Approves sales. | trade-ins. |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________|<br />| Salesperson | Finance Manager |<br />| | |<br />| ° Sells cars and trucks | ° Prints sales contracts |<br />| | |<br />| ° Maintains preferred customer lists | ° Finds financing for customers |<br />| | |<br />| ° Reads used car sheets ("cards") | ° Manages manufacturer's financing |<br />| | programs |<br />| | |<br />| ° Writes follow-up letters. | ° Sells extended warranties, debt |<br />| | insurance, and roadside services. |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________|<br />| Office Manager | Fleet Manager |<br />| | |<br />| ° Manages office personnel | ° Orders fleets of cars and trucks |<br />| | for customers |<br />| | |<br />| ° Handles titles and transfers, | ° Negotiates with purchasing agents |<br />| registration, loan payoffs with | at customers' businesses | <br />| banks | |<br />| | |<br />| ° Submits paperwork required by law | ° Keeps track of customers' business |<br />| | inventories (quantity, age) |<br />| ° Works with the dealership's lawyer. | |<br />| | ° Estimates life span of customers' |<br />| | fleets. |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________|<br />| Parts Manager | Parts Personnel |<br />| | |<br />| ° Orders parts and sets prices for | ° Selects parts from shelves |<br />| parts | |<br />| | |<br />| ° Manages parts counter | ° Unpacks boxes of new parts and |<br />| | stocks shelves |<br />| | |<br />| ° Updates parts inventory | ° Updates parts inventory |<br />| | |<br />| ° Compares parts to service order. | ° Compares parts to service order. |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________|<br />| Service Manager | Service Writer |<br />| | |<br />| ° Sells service | ° Sells service |<br />| | |<br />| ° Runs service specials | ° Writes a service order |<br />| | |<br />| ° Trains mechanics | ° Determines warranty work. |<br />| | |<br />| ° Handles service orders | |<br />| | |<br />| ° Gives cost estimates for parts and | |<br />| labor. | |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________|<br />| Mechanic | Lot Attendant |<br />| | |<br />| ° Fixes cars | ° Matches manufacturer's invoice to |<br />| | dealer's invoice and adds dealer's |<br />| ° Records time and parts used | invoice to window |<br />| | |<br />| ° Reads service bulletins and service | ° Installs after-market options |<br />| manuals. | (stereos, pinstriping) |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Prepares new and used cars (washes |<br />| | cars, removes plastic, installs | <br />| | hubcaps, checks tire pressure). |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________|<br /><br />Because our sample product will be used during the process of selling cars, we looked at a salesperson's tasks in more detail.<br /><br />In a typical sales transaction, a customer enters a showroom and inquires about a car or several cars. The salesperson in turn asks the customer what features and price range the customer is looking for. Using the information the customer provides, the salesperson gathers information about the dealership's cars that match the customer's requirements. The salesperson then presents the information to the customer.<br /><br />If a car appeals to the customer, the customer takes the car for a test drive. If the customer still is interested in the car after the test drive, the salesperson and customer negotiate about the financial arrangements. They use a worksheet to record the details of the proposed purchase. Once they come to an agreement, the salesperson takes the worksheet with the agreed-to figures to the sales manager for approval. If the sales manager approves the sale, the salesperson passes the<br />worksheet along to the finance manager.<a href="1.6.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGUSERS"> Figure 87</a> lists the tasks of the salesperson, the sales manager, and the finance manager.<br /><br /><a id="FIGUSERS" name="FIGUSERS"></a><a id="TBLUSERS" name="TBLUSERS"> ________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 87. Tasks Involved in Selling a Car</span> |<br />|______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Users</b> | <b>Tasks</b> |<br />|_______________________|______________________________________________________|<br /><a id="SPTUSECASE" name="SPTUSECASE"> | Salesperson | |</a><br />| | |<br />| | ° Finds out what the customer wants, needs, and can |<br />| | afford |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Finds out what products the car dealership can |<br />| | provide that most closely match the customer's |<br />| | wants, needs, and budget. |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Fills out a worksheet that lists the: |<br />| | |<br />| | - Make and model of car |<br />| | - Price of the car |<br />| | - Trade-in value of the customer's old car (if |<br />| | applicable) |<br />| | - Down payment amount (if applicable). |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Gets the sales manager's approval. |<br />| | |<br />| | ° Gives the worksheet information to the finance |<br />| | manager. |<br />|______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| Sales Manager | ° Reviews worksheet and authorizes sales after |<br />| | considering: |<br />| | |<br />| | - Agreed-to price |<br />| | - Trade-in value |<br />| | - Options. |<br />|_______________________|______________________________________________________|<br />| Finance Manager | ° Arranges financing for customer |<br />| | ° Completes the sale. |<br />|_______________________|______________________________________________________|<br /><br /></pre> 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 <hr /> 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 <h3>1.6.2.3 Step 3. Matching 1460 4774 Management's Requirements to the 1461 4775 Users' Tasks</h3> 1462 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />After gathering requirements from management and analyzing the users'<br />tasks, we had to match the requirements and the tasks. We realized that<br />our product's interface had to provide:<br /><br /><br />° A way to record information about a customer (thus meeting the<br />requirement to eliminate paperwork)<br /><br /><br />° Quick access to information about the dealership's stock of cars (thus<br />meeting the requirements to reduce errors and to reduce time spent<br />tracking down information)<br /><br /><br />° A way to combine customer information with dealership information<br />(thus meeting the requirement to eliminate paperwork)<br /><br /><br />° A way to quickly transfer information among users--salespeople, sales<br />manager, finance manager--without leaving the customer unattended<br />(thus meeting the requirements to reduce paperwork and increase<br />contact time).<br /></pre> 1463 <hr /> 1464 <h2>1.6.3 Designing the Product</h2> 1465 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />After we completed our research and planning, we began designing the<br />product. First we designed our intended users' model; that is, we took<br />the information we had learned about salespeople and used it to create a<br />model that describes the way the salespeople would understand how the<br />product works. Then we defined the objects, their relationships, and<br />their behaviors, and we decided what kinds of views were needed to allow<br />the salespeople to work with the objects. Then we designed the menus and<br />choices for the objects, and finally, we designed the windows that<br />contained the views and controls through which the salespeople could work<br />with the objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1466 <ul> 1467 <li><a href="1.6.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.1 1468 Step 1. Defining the Objects</a></li> 1469 <li><a href="1.6.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.2 1470 Step 2. Determining the Necessary 1471 Views</a></li> 1472 <li><a href="1.6.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.3 1473 Step 3. Designing the Menus</a></li> 1474 <li><a href="1.6.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.4 1475 Step 4. Designing the Windows</a></li> 1476 </ul> 1477 <pre></pre> 1478 <hr /> 1479 <h3>1.6.3.1 Step 1. Defining the 4776 4777 4778 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 4784 4785 <pre width="80">After gathering requirements from management and analyzing the users' tasks, we had to match the requirements and the tasks. We realized that our product's interface had to provide:<br /><br />° A way to record information about a customer (thus meeting the requirement to eliminate paperwork)<br />° Quick access to information about the dealership's stock of cars (thus meeting the requirements to reduce errors and to reduce time spent tracking down information)<br />° A way to combine customer information with dealership information (thus meeting the requirement to eliminate paperwork)<br />° A way to quickly transfer information among users--salespeople, sales manager, finance manager--without leaving the customer unattended (thus meeting the requirements to reduce paperwork and increase contact time).<br /></pre> 4786 4787 4788 4789 4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 4795 <hr /> 4796 4797 4798 4799 4800 <h2>1.6.3 Designing the Product</h2> 4801 4802 4803 4804 4805 4806 4807 4808 4809 4810 <pre width="80"><br />After we completed our research and planning, we began designing the product. First we designed our intended users' model; that is, we took the information we had learned about salespeople and used it to create a model that describes the way the salespeople would understand how the product works. Then we defined the objects, their relationships, and their behaviors, and we decided what kinds of views were needed to allow the salespeople to work with the objects. Then we designed the menus and choices for the objects, and finally, we designed the windows that contained the views and controls through which the salespeople could work with the objects.<br /><br /></pre> 4811 4812 4813 4814 4815 4816 4817 4818 4819 4820 <hr /> 4821 4822 4823 4824 4825 <h3>1.6.3.1 Step 1. Defining the 1480 4826 Objects</h3> 1481 <pre></pre> 1482 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Our analysis of a salesperson's tasks gave us the base of information we<br />needed to start defining objects for our product. At this stage of<br />design, we were interested in what objects a user needs, how the objects<br />are related, and how the objects behave.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1483 <pre></pre> 1484 <hr /> 1485 <h4>1.6.3.1.2 Determining the 4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835 4836 4837 4838 <pre width="80">Our analysis of a salesperson's tasks gave us the base of information we needed to start defining objects for our product. At this stage of design, we were interested in what objects a user needs, how the objects are related, and how the objects behave.<br /></pre> 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 4845 <hr /> 4846 4847 4848 4849 4850 <h4>1.6.3.1.2 Determining the 1486 4851 Relationships and Behaviors of the 1487 4852 Objects</h4> 1488 <pre></pre> 1489 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Once we had determined which objects we needed, we had to determine how<br />each object interacted with the other objects.<br /><br /><br />We drew a diagram to show the relationships among the objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1490 name="FIGMAINACT" id="FIGMAINACT"> </a><a href="picture-85?mode=zoom"><img 1491 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P85.GIF" 1492 alt="PICTURE 85" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 89. Relationships among the Car Dealership Objects<br /><br /><br />Then we considered the flow of information among the objects. To complete<br />a worksheet, a salesperson combines information from a car object and a<br />customer object. While we did not want to prevent a salesperson from<br />typing or re-typing all of the information contained in those objects, we<br />knew that typing is slow and can lead to errors. We knew we could provide<br />a quicker and more accurate way to transfer the information by allowing a<br />salesperson to manipulate the information directly--that is, by dragging<br />the customer and car objects to the worksheet objects--or indirectly, by<br />using action choices that allow the salesperson to copy information from<br />one object and place it into another.<br /><br /><br />Once a worksheet is complete, a salesperson must get approval from the<br />sales manager and then must send the worksheet to the finance manager to<br />close the sale. One solution might have been to allow the salesperson to<br />print a copy of the worksheet and carry it in person to the managers.<br />However, one of the requirements we received from the dealership's upper<br />management was to eliminate paperwork, so we decided that electronic mail<br />offered the most efficient paperless solution. Also, by sending the<br />worksheet electronically, the salesperson can stay in contact with the<br />customer instead of leaving the customer alone while the salesperson<br />locates the appropriate manager.<br /><br /><br />We had to decide what the results of direct manipulation would be for<br />various combinations of source objects and target objects. In particular,<br />we were interested in whether data should transfer from one object to<br />another when a salesperson drags a source object to a target object.<br />Based on the relationships we defined, we created the following table to<br />illustrate the default results of direct manipulation of pairs of objects.<br /><br /><br /><a 1493 name="FIGADIRMAN" id="FIGADIRMAN" /><a name="TBLADIRMAN" 1494 id="TBLADIRMAN"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 90. Default Results for Direct Manipulation. For certain pairs of objects, data is transferred from one |<br />| object to the other when a salesperson drags it and drops it on the other. |<br />|____________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Target</b> <b>Object</b> |<br />| |____________ _____________ ____________ ____________ _____________ ____________ ____________ ____________|<br />| <b>Source</b> | | <b>Customer</b> | | | | <b>Worksheet</b> | <b>Finance</b> | <b>Sales</b> |<br /> | <b>Object</b> | <b>Customer</b> | <b>List</b> | <b>Car</b> | <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> | <b>Worksheet</b> | <b>List</b> | <b>Manager</b> | <b>Manager</b> |<br /> | | | | | | | | <b>Out-Basket</b> | <b>Out-Basket</b> |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Customer | No data | Customer is | No data | No data | Customer | No data | Customer | Customer |<br /> | | transfer | moved into | transfer | transfer | data is | transfer | data is | data is |<br /> | | | customer | | | copied into | | copied and | copied and |<br /> | | | list | | | worksheet | | sent to | sent to |<br /> | | | | | | | | finance | sales |<br /> | | | | | | | | manager | manager |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Customer | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data |<br /> | List | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Car | No data | No data | No data | Car is | Car data is | No data | No data | No data |<br /> | | transfer | transfer | transfer | moved into | copied into | transfer | transfer | transfer |<br /> | | | | | car lot | worksheet | | | |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Car Lot | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data |<br /> | | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Worksheet | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | Worksheet | Worksheet | Worksheet |<br /> | | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | is moved | data is | data is |<br /> | | | | | | | into | copied and | copied and |<br /> | | | | | | | worksheet | sent to | sent to |<br /> | | | | | | | list | finance | sales |<br /> | | | | | | | | manager | manager |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Worksheet | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data |<br /> | List | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /></pre> 1495 <pre></pre> 1496 <ul> 1497 <li><a href="1.6.3.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.1.1 1498 Determining What Kinds of Objects Are 1499 Needed</a></li> 1500 <li><a href="1.6.3.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.1.2 1501 Determining the Relationships and Behaviors 1502 of the Objects</a></li> 1503 </ul> 1504 <pre></pre> 1505 <hr /> 1506 <h4>1.6.3.1.1 Determining What 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 4858 4859 4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 <pre width="80">Once we had determined which objects we needed, we had to determine how each object interacted with the other objects.<br /><br />We drew a diagram to show the relationships among the objects.<br /><br /><a id="FIGMAINACT" name="FIGMAINACT"> </a><a href="picture-85?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 85" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P85.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 89. Relationships among the Car Dealership Objects</span><br /><br />Then we considered the flow of information among the objects. To complete a worksheet, a salesperson combines information from a car object and a customer object. While we did not want to prevent a salesperson from typing or re-typing all of the information contained in those objects, we knew that typing is slow and can lead to errors. We knew we could provide a quicker and more accurate way to transfer the information by allowing a salesperson to manipulate the information directly--that is, by dragging the customer and car objects to the worksheet objects--or indirectly, by using action choices that allow the salesperson to copy information from one object and place it into another.<br /><br />Once a worksheet is complete, a salesperson must get approval from the sales manager and then must send the worksheet to the finance manager to close the sale. One solution might have been to allow the salesperson to print a copy of the worksheet and carry it in person to the managers. However, one of the requirements we received from the dealership's upper management was to eliminate paperwork, so we decided that electronic mail offered the most efficient paperless solution. Also, by sending the worksheet electronically, the salesperson can stay in contact with the customer instead of leaving the customer alone while the salesperson locates the appropriate manager.<br /><br />We had to decide what the results of direct manipulation would be for various combinations of source objects and target objects. In particular, we were interested in whether data should transfer from one object to another when a salesperson drags a source object to a target object. Based on the relationships we defined, we created the following table to illustrate the default results of direct manipulation of pairs of objects.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGADIRMAN" name="FIGADIRMAN"></a><a id="TBLADIRMAN" name="TBLADIRMAN"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 90. Default Results for Direct Manipulation. For certain pairs of objects, data is transferred from one |<br />| object to the other when a salesperson drags it and drops it on the other. |<br />|____________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Target</b> <b>Object</b> |<br />| |____________ _____________ ____________ ____________ _____________ ____________ ____________ ____________|<br />| <b>Source</b> | | <b>Customer</b> | | | |<b>Worksheet</b> | <b>Finance</b> | <b><span style="font-family: monospace;">S</span>ales</b> |<br />| <b>Object</b> | <b>Customer</b> | <b>List</b> | <b>Car</b> | <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> | <b>Worksheet</b> | <b>List</b> | <b>Manager</b> | <b>Manager</b> |<br />| | | | | | | | <b>Out-Basket</b> | <b>Out-Basket</b> |<br /> |__________|____________|_______|_______|_________|____________|__________|____________|____________|<br />| Customer | No data | Customer is | No data | No data | Customer | No data | Customer | Customer |<br /> | | transfer | moved into | transfer | transfer | data is | transfer | data is | data is |<br /> | | | customer | | | copied into | | copied and | copied and |<br /> | | | list | | | worksheet | | sent to | sent to |<br /> | | | | | | | | finance | sales |<br /> | | | | | | | | manager | manager |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Customer | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data |<br /> | List | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Car | No data | No data | No data | Car is | Car data is | No data | No data | No data |<br /> | | transfer | transfer | transfer | moved into | copied into | transfer | transfer | transfer |<br /> | | | | | car lot | worksheet | | | |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Car Lot | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data |<br /> | | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Worksheet | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | Worksheet | Worksheet | Worksheet |<br /> | | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | is moved | data is | data is |<br /> | | | | | | | into | copied and | copied and |<br /> | | | | | | | worksheet | sent to | sent to |<br /> | | | | | | | list | finance | sales |<br /> | | | | | | | | manager | manager |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /> | Worksheet | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data | No data |<br /> | List | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer | transfer |<br /> |____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|_____________|____________|____________|____________|<br /></pre> 4865 4866 4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 <pre></pre> 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 <hr /> 4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 <h4>1.6.3.1.1 Determining What 1507 4887 Kinds of Objects Are Needed</h4> 1508 <pre></pre> 1509 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />To decide what objects a salesperson needed, we looked at the real-world<br />objects a salesperson used to sell a car. We wrote a description of a<br />salesperson's tasks and underlined all the nouns:<br /><br /><br />° Find out the <u>customer's</u> <u>wants,</u> <u>needs,</u> and <u>budget.</u> 1510 <br /><br />° Find out what the <u>car</u> <u>dealership</u> has in <u>stock</u> that most closely<br /> matches the <u>customer's</u> <u>wants,</u> <u>needs,</u> and <u>budget.</u> 1511 <br /><br />° Arrive at an <u>agreement</u> using a <u>worksheet</u>.<br /><br /><br />° Get <u>approval</u> from the <u>sales</u> <u>manager.</u> 1512 <br /><br />° Give the <u>worksheet</u> <u>information</u> to the <u>finance</u> <u>manager.</u> 1513 <br /><br /><br /><br />After underlining the nouns, we made a list of them:<br /><br /><br />° Salesperson<br />° Customer<br />° Wants<br />° Needs<br />° Budget<br />° Agreement<br />° Worksheet<br />° Car<br />° Dealership<br />° Stock<br />° Sales manager<br />° Finance manager.<br /><br /><br />To create our final list of objects, we edited the list of nouns to<br />eliminate duplication and to combine those concepts that seemed to fit<br />together. We ended up with this list of objects:<br /><br /><br />° Car<br />° Car lot (the entire collection of individual cars available for sale)<br />° Customer (including the customer's wants, needs, and budget)<br />° Customer list (the entire collection of individual customers)<br />° Worksheet (the commonly used term for the agreement)<br />° Worksheet list (the entire collection of individual worksheets)<br />° Salesperson<br />° Sales manager<br />° Finance manager.<br /><br /><br />These objects are described in the following sections.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Car</i> <i>Object</i>: Each car object represents a real car for sale in the car<br /> lot. A car object contains descriptive information about the<br /> corresponding real car, such as its year, make, model, price,<br /> factory-installed options, color, and vehicle identification number (VIN).<br /> Because the primary purpose of a car object is to convey information, the<br /> car object is a data object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Car</i> <i>Lot</i> <i>Object</i>: The car lot object represents the physical lot where the<br /> dealership's cars are parked. Because the primary purpose of a car lot<br /> object is to hold car objects, the car lot object is a container object.<br /> A typical dealership sells new cars and used cars. The two kinds of cars<br /> are often parked in different lots. To make our product seem more<br /> familiar to users, we provided two car lot objects: a new car lot and a<br /> used car lot. Our sample product uses only the new car lot, but a fully<br /> developed product for a dealership would use both car lot objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Customer</i> <i>Object</i>: Each customer object represents a real customer who has<br /> inquired about a car. A customer object contains descriptive information<br /> about the corresponding real customer, such as the customer's name,<br /> address, telephone number, and identification number. Because the primary<br /> purpose of a customer object is to convey information, the customer object<br /> is a data object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Customer</i> <i>List</i> <i>Object</i>: The customer list object contains all of the<br /> customer objects, much as the car lot object contains all of the car<br /> objects. It is a container object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Worksheet</i> <i>Object</i>: A worksheet object contains information about the<br /> customer and the car to be purchased, along with other information, such<br /> as the financial arrangements of the purchase. A worksheet object is a<br /> data object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Worksheet</i> <i>List</i> <i>Object</i>: A worksheet list object contains all of the<br /> worksheet objects, just as the customer list object contains all of the<br /> customer objects. It is a container object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Salesperson</i> <i>Object</i>: Each salesperson object represents one of the<br /> dealership's salespeople. A salesperson object contains descriptive<br /> information about the corresponding real salesperson, such as the<br /> salesperson's name, address, sales record, commissions, and bonuses. It<br /> is a data object. Because our sample transactions take place from the<br /> salesperson's perspective, we did not need to use the salesperson object.<br /> However, in a fully designed product for a real car dealership, a<br /> salesperson object might be used for payroll or personnel tasks.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Sales</i> <i>Manager</i> <i>Object</i> <i>and</i> <i>Finance</i> <i>Manager</i> <i>Object</i>: At first we considered<br /> creating the sales manager and the finance manager objects so that they<br /> were like the customer and salesperson objects--that is, they would<br /> contain descriptive information about each person. However, to sell a<br /> car, a salesperson does not require descriptive information about either<br /> manager. From a salesperson's perspective, a sales manager and a finance<br /> manager receive and distribute information. Because the users of our<br /> sample product are salespeople, we decided to emphasize the passing of<br /> information by representing the finance manager and the sales manager as<br /> specially tailored out-baskets for electronic mail. They are device<br /> objects that automatically send their contents to the corresponding<br /> individual.<br /><br /><br /><a 1514 href="1.6.3.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGHANDMO">Figure 88</a> shows our preliminary drawing of these objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1515 name="FIGHANDMO" id="FIGHANDMO"> </a><a href="picture-84?mode=zoom"><img 1516 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P84.GIF" 1517 alt="PICTURE 84" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 88. Hand Drawing of Users' Objects. The drawing indicates how the<br />objects might appear on a salesperson's screen. We later<br />realized that the sales manager object and the finance manager<br />object could be represented differently, in a way that more<br />accurately conveyed the nature of a salesperson's transactions<br />with the real managers.<br /></pre> 1518 <pre></pre> 1519 <hr /> 1520 <h3>1.6.3.2 Step 2. Determining 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 <pre width="80">To decide what objects a salesperson needed, we looked at the real-world objects a salesperson used to sell a car. We wrote a description of a salesperson's tasks and underlined all the nouns:<br /><br />° Find out the <u>customer's</u> <u>wants,</u> <u>needs,</u> and <u>budget.</u> 4900 ° Find out what the <u>car</u> <u>dealership</u> has in <u>stock</u> that most closely matches the <u>customer's</u> <u>wants,</u> <u>needs,</u> and <u>budget.</u> 4901 ° Arrive at an <u>agreement</u> using a <u>worksheet</u>.<br />° Get <u>approval</u> from the <u>sales</u> <u>manager.</u> 4902 ° Give the <u>worksheet</u> <u>information</u> to the <u>finance</u> <u>manager.</u> 4903 <br />After underlining the nouns, we made a list of them:<br /><br />° Salesperson<br />° Customer<br />° Wants<br />° Needs<br />° Budget<br />° Agreement<br />° Worksheet<br />° Car<br />° Dealership<br />° Stock<br />° Sales manager<br />° Finance manager.<br /><br />To create our final list of objects, we edited the list of nouns to eliminate duplication and to combine those concepts that seemed to fit together. We ended up with this list of objects:<br /><br />° Car<br />° Car lot (the entire collection of individual cars available for sale)<br />° Customer (including the customer's wants, needs, and budget)<br />° Customer list (the entire collection of individual customers)<br />° Worksheet (the commonly used term for the agreement)<br />° Worksheet list (the entire collection of individual worksheets)<br />° Salesperson<br />° Sales manager<br />° Finance manager.<br /><br />These objects are described in the following sections.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Car</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i>: Each car object represents a real car for sale in the car lot. A car object contains descriptive information about the corresponding real car, such as its year, make, model, price, factory-installed options, color, and vehicle identification number (VIN). Because the primary purpose of a car object is to convey information, the car object is a data object.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Car</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Lot</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i>: The car lot object represents the physical lot where the dealership's cars are parked. Because the primary purpose of a car lot object is to hold car objects, the car lot object is a container object. A typical dealership sells new cars and used cars. The two kinds of cars are often parked in different lots. To make our product seem more familiar to users, we provided two car lot objects: a new car lot and a used car lot. Our sample product uses only the new car lot, but a fully developed product for a dealership would use both car lot objects.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Customer</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i>: Each customer object represents a real customer who has inquired about a car. A customer object contains descriptive information about the corresponding real customer, such as the customer's name, address, telephone number, and identification number. Because the primary purpose of a customer object is to convey information, the customer object is a data object.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Customer</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">List</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i>: The customer list object contains all of the customer objects, much as the car lot object contains all of the car objects. It is a container object.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Worksheet</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i>: A worksheet object contains information about the customer and the car to be purchased, along with other information, such as the financial arrangements of the purchase. A worksheet object is a data object.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Worksheet</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">List</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i>: A worksheet list object contains all of the worksheet objects, just as the customer list object contains all of the customer objects. It is a container object.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Salesperson</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i>: Each salesperson object represents one of the dealership's salespeople. A salesperson object contains descriptive information about the corresponding real salesperson, such as the salesperson's name, address, sales record, commissions, and bonuses. It is a data object. Because our sample transactions take place from the salesperson's perspective, we did not need to use the salesperson object. However, in a fully designed product for a real car dealership, a salesperson object might be used for payroll or personnel tasks.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Sales</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Manager</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">and</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Finance</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Manager</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Object</i>: At first we considered creating the sales manager and the finance manager objects so that they were like the customer and salesperson objects--that is, they would contain descriptive information about each person. However, to sell a car, a salesperson does not require descriptive information about either manager. From a salesperson's perspective, a sales manager and a finance manager receive and distribute information. Because the users of our sample product are salespeople, we decided to emphasize the passing of information by representing the finance manager and the sales manager as specially tailored out-baskets for electronic mail. They are device objects that automatically send their contents to the corresponding individual.<br /><br /><a href="1.6.3.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGHANDMO">Figure 88</a> shows our preliminary drawing of these objects.<br /><br /><a id="FIGHANDMO" name="FIGHANDMO"> </a><a href="picture-84?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 84" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P84.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 88. Hand Drawing of Users' Objects. The drawing indicates how the objects might appear on a salesperson's screen. We later realized that the sales manager object and the finance manager object could be represented differently, in a way that more accurately conveyed the nature of a salesperson's transactions with the real managers.</span><br /><br /></pre> 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 <hr /> 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 <h3>1.6.3.2 Step 2. Determining 1521 4921 the Necessary Views</h3> 1522 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Once we had identified and defined the objects, we had to determine which<br />kinds of views would give the salespeople the best access to the objects<br />and the information they contain. In determining the views needed, we<br />considered the ways in which a salesperson would interact with each object<br />and its information. We also provided a help view for each object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1523 <ul> 1524 <li><a href="1.6.3.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.2.1 1525 Views of the Car Object</a></li> 1526 <li><a href="1.6.3.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.2.2 1527 Views of the Car Lot Object</a></li> 1528 <li><a href="1.6.3.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.2.3 1529 Views of the Customer Object</a></li> 1530 <li><a href="1.6.3.2.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.2.4 1531 Views of the Customer List Object</a></li> 1532 <li><a href="1.6.3.2.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.2.5 1533 Views of the Worksheet Object</a></li> 1534 <li><a href="1.6.3.2.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.2.6 1535 Views of the Worksheet List Object</a></li> 1536 </ul> 1537 <pre></pre> 1538 <hr /> 1539 <h4>1.6.3.2.1 Views of the Car 4922 4923 4924 4925 4926 4927 4928 4929 4930 4931 <pre width="80">Once we had identified and defined the objects, we had to determine which kinds of views would give the salespeople the best access to the objectsand the information they contain. In determining the views needed, weconsidered the ways in which a salesperson would interact with each objectand its information. We also provided a help view for each object.<br /></pre> 4932 4933 4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 4941 <hr /> 4942 4943 4944 4945 4946 <h4>1.6.3.2.1 Views of the Car 1540 4947 Object</h4> 1541 <pre></pre> 1542 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Both a salesperson and a customer need to know general information about a<br />car, and a salesperson needs a way to work with the information. We<br />decided that the best way to present the information would be a<br />combination of textual information and graphical information. The text<br />would describe the make, model, and year of the car. The graphic would be<br />a picture of the car. We drew a sketch of a proposed General Information<br />view of a car.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1543 name="FIGHANDST" id="FIGHANDST"> </a><a href="picture-86?mode=zoom"><img 1544 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P86.GIF" 1545 alt="PICTURE 86" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 91. Hand-Drawn Version of General Information View of a Car Object<br /></pre> 1546 <pre></pre> 1547 <hr /> 1548 <h4>1.6.3.2.2 Views of the Car Lot 4948 4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 4958 4959 <pre width="80">Both a salesperson and a customer need to know general information about a car, and a salesperson needs a way to work with the information. We decided that the best way to present the information would be a combination of textual information and graphical information. The text would describe the make, model, and year of the car. The graphic would be a picture of the car. We drew a sketch of a proposed General Information view of a car.<br /><br /><a id="FIGHANDST" name="FIGHANDST"> </a><a href="picture-86?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 86" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P86.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 91. Hand-Drawn Version of General Information View of a Car Object</span><br /><br /></pre> 4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971 <hr /> 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 <h4>1.6.3.2.2 Views of the Car Lot 1549 4977 Object</h4> 1550 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Because the car lot is a container, we knew we had to provide at least the<br />two standard contents views: an icons view and a details view. For the<br />icons view, we decided to group vehicles according to type, and we decided<br />to represent each type of vehicle with a different icon.<a 1551 href="1.6.3.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGHANDNCS"> Figure 92</a> shows<br /> our initial sketch of an icons view of the car lot.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1552 name="FIGHANDNCS" id="FIGHANDNCS"> </a><a href="picture-87?mode=zoom"><img 1553 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P87.GIF" 1554 alt="PICTURE 87" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 92. Hand-Drawn Version of an Icons View of the Car Lot<br /><br /><br />In a dealership that does not use computers in the process of selling<br />cars, a salesperson typically searches manually through a file or listing<br />of the cars available on the car lot. When a customer is ready for a test<br />drive, a salesperson has to walk through the real car lot to locate the<br />car. We decided that a more efficient approach would be to offer a<br />salesperson several ways to look for particular cars available for sale,<br />and we wanted to let the computer, rather than the salesperson, do the<br />actual searching for available cars.<br /><br /><br />Because a customer is typically interested in only certain cars in the car<br />lot, we decided to provide a way for a salesperson to specify criteria for<br />which cars to include in either contents view of the car lot. We added a<br />feature to the contents views to allow a salesperson to filter the view so<br />that it displays only the cars that have the features the customer wants.<br />(See <a 1555 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRINCLCAR">"The Window for the Filtering Feature" in topic 1.6.3.4.2</a> for more<br /> details.) By using this feature, a salesperson can filter the view of the<br /> cars according to:<br /><br /><br />° Year<br />° Make and model<br />° Color<br />° Price range<br />° Installed features.<br /><br /><br />We decided that once a salesperson has filtered the view so that only<br />certain kinds of cars are displayed, the salesperson might also want to<br />sort the displayed cars according to the same kinds of criteria. (See<br /><a 1556 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRSORTCAR">"The Window for the Sorting Feature" in topic 1.6.3.4.2</a> for more details.)<br /><br /><br />Finally, we decided to provide a <b>Map</b> view that showed the positions of the<br /> real cars on the real car lot. The <b>Map</b> view is a composed view of the car<br /> lot. It saves the salesperson and customer time by pinpointing the<br /> location of the car that the customer wants to test drive.<br /><br /><br />The settings view for the car lot object provides a way for a user to<br />change the appearance of some aspects of the car lot object. For example,<br />a user can change the size of the icons that represent the car objects.<br /></pre> 1557 <hr /> 1558 <h4>1.6.3.2.3 Views of the 4978 4979 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 <pre width="80">Because the car lot is a container, we knew we had to provide at least the two standard contents views: an icons view and a details view. For the icons view, we decided to group vehicles according to type, and we decided to represent each type of vehicle with a different icon.<a href="1.6.3.2.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGHANDNCS"> Figure 92</a> shows our initial sketch of an icons view of the car lot.<br /><br /><a id="FIGHANDNCS" name="FIGHANDNCS"> </a><a href="picture-87?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 87" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P87.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 92. Hand-Drawn Version of an Icons View of the Car Lot</span><br /><br />In a dealership that does not use computers in the process of selling cars, a salesperson typically searches manually through a file or listing of the cars available on the car lot. When a customer is ready for a test drive, a salesperson has to walk through the real car lot to locate the car. We decided that a more efficient approach would be to offer a salesperson several ways to look for particular cars available for sale, and we wanted to let the computer, rather than the salesperson, do the actual searching for available cars.<br /><br />Because a customer is typically interested in only certain cars in the car lot, we decided to provide a way for a salesperson to specify criteria for which cars to include in either contents view of the car lot. We added a feature to the contents views to allow a salesperson to filter the view so that it displays only the cars that have the features the customer wants. (See <a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRINCLCAR">"The Window for the Filtering Feature" in topic 1.6.3.4.2</a> for more details.) By using this feature, a salesperson can filter the view of the cars according to:<br /><br />° Year<br />° Make and model<br />° Color<br />° Price range<br />° Installed features.<br /><br />We decided that once a salesperson has filtered the view so that only certain kinds of cars are displayed, the salesperson might also want to sort the displayed cars according to the same kinds of criteria. (See <a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRSORTCAR">"The Window for the Sorting Feature" in topic 1.6.3.4.2</a> for more details.)<br /><br />Finally, we decided to provide a <b>Map</b> view that showed the positions of the real cars on the real car lot. The <b>Map</b> view is a composed view of the car lot. It saves the salesperson and customer time by pinpointing the location of the car that the customer wants to test drive.<br /><br />The settings view for the car lot object provides a way for a user to change the appearance of some aspects of the car lot object. For example, a user can change the size of the icons that represent the car objects.<br /></pre> 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 <hr /> 4998 4999 5000 5001 5002 <h4>1.6.3.2.3 Views of the 1559 5003 Customer Object</h4> 1560 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The general information associated with each customer includes the<br />customer's<br /><br /><br />° Name<br />° Address (street, city, state, ZIP code)<br />° Phone numbers<br />° Identification number<br />° Driver's license number<br />° Date of birth.<br /><br /><br />Additional information associated with a customer might include detailed<br />financial information, such as the customer's<br /><br /><br />° Assets<br />- House<br />- Car<br />- Stocks<br />- Savings<br />- Income<br />° Debts<br />- Rent or mortgage payments<br />- Consumer loans<br />- Credit card balance and credit limit.<br /><br /><br />This kind of information can be thought of as a customer's attributes or<br />"settings," so we decided to provide a settings view. Settings views can<br />be displayed well in a notebook.<a 1561 href="1.6.3.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGHANDPI"> Figure 93</a> shows our initial sketch of<br /> the notebook for the customer object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1562 name="FIGHANDPI" id="FIGHANDPI"> </a><a href="picture-88?mode=zoom"><img 1563 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P88.GIF" 1564 alt="PICTURE 88" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 93. Hand-Drawn Version of the Customer Window<br /></pre> 1565 <hr /> 1566 <h4>1.6.3.2.4 Views of the 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 <pre width="80">The general information associated with each customer includes the customer's<br /><br />° Name<br />° Address (street, city, state, ZIP code)<br />° Phone numbers<br />° Identification number<br />° Driver's license number<br />° Date of birth.<br /><br />Additional information associated with a customer might include detailed financial information, such as the customer's<br /><br />° Assets<br />- House<br />- Car<br />- Stocks<br />- Savings<br />- Income<br />° Debts<br />- Rent or mortgage payments<br />- Consumer loans<br />- Credit card balance and credit limit.<br /><br />This kind of information can be thought of as a customer's attributes or "settings," so we decided to provide a settings view. Settings views can be displayed well in a notebook.<a href="1.6.3.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGHANDPI"> Figure 93</a> shows our initial sketch of the notebook for the customer object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGHANDPI" name="FIGHANDPI"> </a><a href="picture-88?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 88" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P88.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 93. Hand-Drawn Version of the Customer Window</span><br /></pre> 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 <hr /> 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 <h4>1.6.3.2.4 Views of the 1567 5029 Customer List Object</h4> 1568 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The customer list is a container object; therefore it needed at least an<br />icons view and a details view. We also decided to provide a mechanism<br />called the <b>Include</b> <b>Customers</b> window that allows a salesperson to filter<br /> and sort the customer objects. Because the views of the customer list are<br /> similar to the contents and settings views of the car lot, we do not<br /> describe them further here.<br /></pre> 1569 <hr /> 1570 <h4>1.6.3.2.5 Views of the 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 <pre width="80">The customer list is a container object; therefore it needed at least an icons view and a details view. We also decided to provide a mechanism called the <b>Include</b> <b>Customers</b> window that allows a salesperson to filter and sort the customer objects. Because the views of the customer list are similar to the contents and settings views of the car lot, we do not describe them further here.<br /></pre> 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 <hr /> 5050 5051 5052 5053 5054 <h4>1.6.3.2.5 Views of the 1571 5055 Worksheet Object</h4> 1572 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Because the worksheet object is where customer information and car<br />information is combined, we knew we had to design a view that displays the<br />same kind of information that the car and customer objects contain.<br /><a 1573 href="1.6.3.2.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGHANDWK">Figure 94</a> shows our initial sketch of the worksheet object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1574 name="FIGHANDWK" id="FIGHANDWK"> </a><a href="picture-89?mode=zoom"><img 1575 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P89.GIF" 1576 alt="PICTURE 89" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 94. Hand-Drawn Version of Worksheet<br /></pre> 1577 <hr /> 1578 <h4>1.6.3.2.6 Views of the 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 <pre width="80">Because the worksheet object is where customer information and car information is combined, we knew we had to design a view that displays the same kind of information that the car and customer objects contain. <a href="1.6.3.2.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGHANDWK">Figure 94</a> shows our initial sketch of the worksheet object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGHANDWK" name="FIGHANDWK"> </a><a href="picture-89?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 89" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P89.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 94. Hand-Drawn Version of Worksheet</span><br /></pre> 5066 5067 5068 5069 5070 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 <hr /> 5076 5077 5078 5079 5080 <h4>1.6.3.2.6 Views of the 1579 5081 Worksheet List Object</h4> 1580 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The worksheet list, like the customer list and the car lot, is a container<br />object. We provided the usual contents views: an icons view and a details<br />view. We also decided to provide a mechanism called the <b>Include</b><br /><b>Worksheets</b> window that allows a salesperson, finance manager, or sales<br /> manager to filter and sort the worksheet objects. Because the views of<br /> the worksheet list are similar to the contents and settings views of the<br /> car lot and the customer list, we do not describe them further here.<br /></pre> 1581 <hr /> 1582 <h3>1.6.3.3 Step 3. Designing the 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090 5091 <pre width="80">The worksheet list, like the customer list and the car lot, is a container object. We provided the usual contents views: an icons view and a details view. We also decided to provide a mechanism called the <b>Include</b> <b>Worksheets</b> window that allows a salesperson, finance manager, or sales manager to filter and sort the worksheet objects. Because the views of the worksheet list are similar to the contents and settings views of the car lot and the customer list, we do not describe them further here.<br /></pre> 5092 5093 5094 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 <hr /> 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 <h3>1.6.3.3 Step 3. Designing the 1583 5107 Menus</h3> 1584 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />We consulted <a 1585 href="2.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART2">Part 2, "CUA Reference"</a> for information about the standard<br /> CUA menus. To determine the product-specific choices we needed for our<br /> product, we considered how the object behaviors we had defined<br /> corresponded to the views we had decided upon. We also considered the<br /> relationships between various users and the objects. For example, a<br /> salesperson is not responsible for placing real cars into or removing real<br /> cars from the real car lot. To make our sample product seem more like the<br /> real world that the users are familiar with, we restricted the<br /> salesperson's access to the car lot object by providing a limited set of<br /> choices in the menus for the car lot object. A salesperson is allowed to<br /> view information about a car object in the car lot object but cannot add<br /> or remove car objects. In a fully designed product, some other person,<br /> perhaps a lot attendant or a sales manager, would have access to the car<br /> lot object to add or remove cars. However, because a salesperson is in<br /> the best position to know whether a customer is seriously interested in a<br /> car, the salesperson is allowed to create a new worksheet object and add<br /> it to or remove it from the worksheet list object.<br /><br /><br />The following sections discuss the menus for the objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1586 <ul> 1587 <li><a href="1.6.3.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.3.1 1588 The System Menu</a></li> 1589 <li><a href="1.6.3.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.3.2 1590 Menus for the Car Object</a></li> 1591 <li><a href="1.6.3.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.3.3 1592 Menus for the Car Lot Object</a></li> 1593 <li><a href="1.6.3.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.3.4 1594 Menus for the Customer Object</a></li> 1595 <li><a href="1.6.3.3.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.3.5 1596 Menus for the Customer List Object</a></li> 1597 <li><a href="1.6.3.3.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.3.6 1598 Menus for the Worksheet Object</a></li> 1599 <li><a href="1.6.3.3.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.3.7 1600 Menus for the Worksheet List 1601 Object</a></li> 1602 </ul> 1603 <pre></pre> 1604 <hr /> 1605 <h4>1.6.3.3.1 The System Menu</h4> 1606 <pre></pre> 1607 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />When it is provided, the system menu is displayed from the system menu<br />symbol at the upper left corner of a window. It contains choices that<br />allow a user to work with a window itself. The following table describes<br />the system menu choices.<br /><br /><br /><a 1608 name="FIGSYMNTBL" id="FIGSYMNTBL" /><a name="TBLSYMNTBL" 1609 id="TBLSYMNTBL"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 95. Choices in the System Menu |<br />|_______________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Restore</b> | Returns a window to its previous size |<br /> |_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Move</b> | Allows a user to move a window to a different location on the workplace |<br /> |_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Size</b> | Allows a user to change the size of a window |<br /> |_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Minimize</b> or <b>Hide</b> | Removes a window from the workplace. <b>Minimize</b> displays a graphic of a |<br /> | | minimized window. <b>Hide</b> does not. |<br /> |_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Maximize</b> | Increases a window to its largest possible size |<br /> |_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Close</b> | Closes a window and all secondary windows associated with it |<br /> |_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of all windows open on the workplace |<br /> |_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Split</b> | Allows a user to split a window into two or more panes or to resize existing |<br /> | | panes |<br /> |_______________________________________|______________________________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1610 <pre></pre> 1611 <hr /> 1612 <h4>1.6.3.3.2 Menus for the Car 5108 5109 5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 5116 5117 <pre width="80">We consulted <a href="2.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART2">Part 2, "CUA Reference"</a> for information about the standard CUA menus. To determine the product-specific choices we needed for our product, we considered how the object behaviors we had defined corresponded to the views we had decided upon. We also considered the relationships between various users and the objects. For example, a salesperson is not responsible for placing real cars into or removing real cars from the real car lot. To make our sample product seem more like the real world that the users are familiar with, we restricted the salesperson's access to the car lot object by providing a limited set of choices in the menus for the car lot object. A salesperson is allowed to view information about a car object in the car lot object but cannot add or remove car objects. In a fully designed product, some other person, perhaps a lot attendant or a sales manager, would have access to the car lot object to add or remove cars. However, because a salesperson is in the best position to know whether a customer is seriously interested in a car, the salesperson is allowed to create a new worksheet object and add it to or remove it from the worksheet list object.<br /><br />The following sections discuss the menus for the objects.<br /><br /></pre> 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 <hr /> 5128 5129 5130 5131 5132 <h4>1.6.3.3.1 The System Menu</h4> 5133 5134 5135 5136 5137 5138 5139 5140 5141 5142 5143 5144 <pre width="80">When it is provided, the system menu is displayed from the system menu symbol at the upper left corner of a window. It contains choices that allow a user to work with a window itself. The following table describes the system menu choices.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSYMNTBL" name="FIGSYMNTBL"></a><a id="TBLSYMNTBL" name="TBLSYMNTBL"> _______________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 95. Choices in the System Menu</span> |<br />|_____________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Restore</b> | Returns a window to its previous size |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Move</b> | Allows a user to move a window to a different location on|<br />| | the workplace |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Size</b> | Allows a user to change the size of a window |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Minimize</b> or <b>Hide</b> | Removes a window from the workplace. <b>Minimize</b> displays a |<br />| | graphic of a minimized window. <b>Hide</b> does not. |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Maximize</b> | Increases a window to its largest possible size |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Close</b> | Closes a window and all secondary windows associated | <br />| | with it |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of all windows open |<br />| | on the workplace |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Split</b> | Allows a user to split a window into two or more panes |<br />| | or to resize existing panes |<br />|__________________|__________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 <pre></pre> 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 5163 5164 <hr /> 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 <h4>1.6.3.3.2 Menus for the Car 1613 5170 Object</h4> 1614 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />From a salesperson's perspective, most of the information about a car<br />object is fixed--that is, the information is based on a real-world object<br />and cannot be changed unless something changes about the real-world<br />object. For example, it would not make sense to allow a salesperson to<br />change the color of a car object, because its color corresponds to the<br />color of the real car that the car object represents. Because a<br />salesperson can change little about a car object, the car object has only<br />a few menus, and the menus contain relatively few choices.<a 1615 href="1.6.3.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCAROBJM"> Figure 96</a><br />shows the menus for the <b>General</b> <b>Information</b> view of the car object. For<br /> an illustration of the complete window, see<a 1616 href="1.6.3.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCAROBFG"> Figure 108 in topic 1.6.3.4.1</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1617 name="FIGCAROBJM" id="FIGCAROBJM"> </a><a href="picture-90?mode=zoom"><img 1618 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P90.GIF" 1619 alt="PICTURE 90" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 96. Menus for the General Information View of the Car Object<br /><br /><br />The table below describes the menu choices for the car object.<br /><br /><br /><a 1620 name="FIGCARTABL" id="FIGCARTABL" /><a name="TBLCARTABL" 1621 id="TBLCARTABL"> .</a><br />______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />| Figure 97. Menus for the Car Object |<br />|_______________________ _______________________ ______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Car</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>General</b> | Allows a salesperson to open another window for the same car object. |<br /> | | <b>Information</b> | Because there is only one view for the car object, the name of the |<br /> | | | view (<b>General</b> <b>Information)</b> is part of the name of this choice. |<br />| |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the information about the car |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected car object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow a salesperson to |<br /> | | | search for specific car information |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other windows that have been |<br /> | | | opened from this car object, from other objects associated with this |<br /> | | | car object, and from other windows associated with the car |<br /> | | | dealership product |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the help information |<br /> | | | available for the car object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing help information about the tasks a |<br /> | | | salesperson can accomplish in the window for the car object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how to retrieve and |<br /> | | | use help information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about how to use the |<br /> | | | product |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> | Displays a window containing information such as the product's |<br /> | | | version number and copyright notice. |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1622 <hr /> 1623 <h4>1.6.3.3.3 Menus for the Car 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 <pre width="80">From a salesperson's perspective, most of the information about a car object is fixed--that is, the information is based on a real-world object and cannot be changed unless something changes about the real-world object. For example, it would not make sense to allow a salesperson to change the color of a car object, because its color corresponds to the color of the real car that the car object represents. Because a salesperson can change little about a car object, the car object has only a few menus, and the menus contain relatively few choices.<a href="1.6.3.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGCAROBJM"> Figure 96</a> shows the menus for the <b>General</b> <b>Information</b> view of the car object. For an illustration of the complete window, see<a href="1.6.3.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCAROBFG"> Figure 108 in topic 1.6.3.4.1</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCAROBJM" name="FIGCAROBJM"> </a><a href="picture-90?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 90" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P90.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 96. Menus for the General Information View of the Car Object</span><br /><br />The table below describes the menu choices for the car object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCARTABL" name="FIGCARTABL"></a><a id="TBLCARTABL" name="TBLCARTABL"> .</a><br />_______________________________________________________________________________<br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 97. Menus for the Car Object</span> |<br />|_____________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choic<span style="font-family: monospace;">e </span></b>| <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|_________|_____________|_____________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Car</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | Allows a salesperson to open another window for the | <br />| | <b>General</b> | same car object. Because there is only one view for |<br />| | <b>Information</b> | the car object, the name of the view (<b>General</b> |<br />| | | <b>Information)</b> is part of the name of this choice. |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the information |<br />| | | about the car |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected car object on the |<br />| | | clipboard |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow |<br />| | | a salesperson to search for specific car information |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other windows | <br />| | | that have been opened from this car object, from |<br />| | | other objects associated with this car object, and |<br />| | | from other windows associated with the car |<br />| | | dealership product |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the |<br />| | | help information available for the car object |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>General</b> <b>help</b>| Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | | the tasks a salesperson can accomplish in the |<br />| | | window for the car object |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how | <br />| | | to retrieve and use help information |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | | how to use the product |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Product</b> | Displays a window containing information such as the|<br />| | information | product's version number and copyright notice. |<br />|_________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br /><br /></pre> 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 <hr /> 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 <h4>1.6.3.3.3 Menus for the Car 1624 5196 Lot Object</h4> 1625 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a 1626 href="1.6.3.3.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPDVIEW2">Figure 98</a> illustrates the menus and choices we decided upon for the <b>Icons</b><br />view of the car lot object. The menu bar choices are the same for the<br /><b>Details,</b> <b>Settings,</b> and <b>Map</b> views, so those views are not shown here.<br /> These menus and choices allow a salesperson to interact with the<br /> information displayed in the views. Because a salesperson cannot change<br /> the contents of the car lot except by selling a car, the menus contain no<br /> choices that allow a salesperson to add cars to or remove cars from the<br /> car lot. For an illustration of the complete window, see <a 1627 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGIVIEW">Figure 109 in</a><br /><a 1628 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGIVIEW">topic 1.6.3.4.2</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1629 name="FIGPDVIEW2" id="FIGPDVIEW2"> </a><a href="picture-91?mode=zoom"><img 1630 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P91.GIF" 1631 alt="PICTURE 91" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 98. Menus for the Icons View of the Car Lot Object<br /><br /><br />The following table describes the menu choices for the car lot object.<br /><br /><br /><a 1632 name="FIG123" id="FIG123" /><a name="TBL123" id="TBL123"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 99. Menus for the Car Lot Object |<br />|_______________________ _______________________ ______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> | Allows a salesperson to open a new window containing a different |<br /> | | | view of the same object. The <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> choice leads to a cascaded |<br /> | | | menu that contains the names of the views available. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Print</b> | Allows a salesperson to print a list of cars in the car lot |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Selected</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>General</b> | Opens a new window containing the general information view of the |<br /> | | <b>Information</b> | selected car. Because this is the only view available, it does not |<br /> | | | appear in a cascaded menu. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the general information for the |<br /> | | | selected car |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow a salesperson to |<br /> | | | search for a specific type of car |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the car objects in the car lot at once |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | Deselects all of the car objects that were previously selected in |<br /> | | | the car lot |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>View</b> | <b>Icons</b> | Displays the contents of the car lot object as icons |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Details</b> | Displays the contents of the car lot object as rows and columns of |<br /> | | | related information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Settings</b> | Displays the settings for the car lot object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Map</b> | Displays the contents of the car lot object as a map of the car lot, |<br /> | | | with each car icon in a location that corresponds to the place where |<br /> | | | the real car is parked |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Sort...</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to specify the criteria |<br /> | | | that determine the order in which the cars are displayed |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Include...</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to specify the criteria |<br /> | | | that determine which cars are displayed |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Refreshÿ</b> | Displays a cascaded menu containing the choices <b>On</b> and <b>Off,</b> which |<br /> | | | allow the salesperson to choose whether to continually update the |<br /> | | | view of the car lot |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> | Causes the view of the car lot to be updated immediately to reflect |<br /> | | | any changes in the car inventory since the last time the view was |<br /> | | | refreshed |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other windows that have been |<br /> | | | opened from this car lot object, from other objects associated with |<br /> | | | this car lot object, and from other windows associated with the car |<br /> | | | dealership product |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the help information |<br /> | | | available for the car lot object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing help information about the tasks a |<br /> | | | salesperson can accomplish in the window for the car lot object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how to retrieve and |<br /> | | | use help information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about how to use the |<br /> | | | product |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> | Displays a window containing information such as the product's |<br /> | | | version number and copyright notice. |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1633 <hr /> 1634 <h4>1.6.3.3.4 Menus for the 5197 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 <pre width="80"><a href="1.6.3.3.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPDVIEW2">Figure 98</a> illustrates the menus and choices we decided upon for the <b>Icons</b> view of the car lot object. The menu bar choices are the same for the <b>Details,</b> <b>Settings,</b> and <b>Map</b> views, so those views are not shown here. These menus and choices allow a salesperson to interact with the information displayed in the views. Because a salesperson cannot change the contents of the car lot except by selling a car, the menus contain no choices that allow a salesperson to add cars to or remove cars from the car lot. For an illustration of the complete window, see <a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGIVIEW">Figure 109 in</a><a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGIVIEW"> </a><a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGIVIEW">topic 1.6.3.4.2</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGPDVIEW2" name="FIGPDVIEW2"> </a><a href="picture-91?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 91" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P91.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 98. Menus for the Icons View of the Car Lot Object</span><br /><br />The following table describes the menu choices for the car lot object.<br /><br /><a id="FIG123" name="FIG123"></a><a id="TBL123" name="TBL123"> _________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 99. Menus for the Car Lot Object</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> |<b> Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> | |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> | Allows a salesperson to open a new window containing |<br />| | | a different view of the same object. The <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> |<br />| | | choice leads to a cascaded menu that contains the |<br />| | | names of the views available. | |__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b><span style="font-family: mon;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span></span><span style="font-family: mon,mon;"><span style="font-weight: bold;">|</span></span> Allows a salesperson to print a list of cars in the |<br />| | | car lot |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Selected</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | Opens a new window containing the general information | <br />| | <b>General</b><span style="font-family: mon;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span></span>| view of the selected car. Because this is the only |<br />| | <b>Information</b>| view available, it does not appear in a cascaded menu.| |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the general |<br />| | |information for the selected car |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action | |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid | |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard | |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow a |<br />| | | salesperson to search for a specific type of car | |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the car objects in the car lot at once | |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b>| Deselects all of the car objects that were |<br />| | | previously selected in the car lot |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>View</b> | <b>Icons</b> | Displays the contents of the car lot object as icons | |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Details</b> | Displays the contents of the car lot object as rows |<br />| | | and columns of related information |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Settings</b> | Displays the settings for the car lot object |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Map</b> | Displays the contents of the car lot object as a map |<br />| | | of the car lot, with each car icon in a location that |<br />| | | corresponds to the place where the real car is parked | |__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Sort...</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to |<br />| | | specify the criteria that determine the order in |<br />| | | which the cars are displayed |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Include...</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to |<br />| | | specify the criteria that determine which cars are |<br />| | | displayed |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Refreshÿ</b> | Displays a cascaded menu containing the choices <b>On</b> |<br />| | | and <b>Off,</b> which allow the salesperson to choose |<br />| | | whether to continually update the view of the car lot |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b>| Causes the view of the car lot to be updated |<br />| | | immediately to reflect any changes in the ca |<br />| | | inventory since the last time the view was refreshed |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b>| Displays a window containing a list of other windows |<br />| | | that have been opened from this car lot object, from |<br />| | | other objects associated with this car lot object, |<br />| | | and from other windows associated with the car |<br />| | | dealership product |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the |<br />| | | help information available for the car lot object |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>General</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | help | the tasks a salesperson can accomplish in the window | | | | for the car lot object |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how to |<br />| | | retrieve and use help information |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | | how to use the product |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Product</b> | Displays a window containing information such as |<br />| | <b>information</b>| the product's version number and copyright notice. |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br /><br /></pre> 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 <hr /> 5217 5218 5219 5220 5221 <h4>1.6.3.3.4 Menus for the 1635 5222 Customer Object</h4> 1636 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a 1637 href="1.6.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUSTOFG">Figure 100</a> illustrates the menus and choices for the <b>Personal</b> <b>Information</b><br />view of the customer object. The choices are described in the following<br />table. For an illustration of the complete window, see<a 1638 href="1.6.3.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPIWIN1"> Figure 117 in</a><br /><a 1639 href="1.6.3.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPIWIN1">topic 1.6.3.4.3</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1640 name="FIGCUSTOFG" id="FIGCUSTOFG"> </a><a href="picture-92?mode=zoom"><img 1641 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P92.GIF" 1642 alt="PICTURE 92" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 100. Menus for the Personal Information View of the Customer Object<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1643 name="FIGCOTABL" id="FIGCOTABL" /><a name="TBLCOTABL" id="TBLCOTABL"> .</a><br />______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />| Figure 101. Menus for the Customer Object |<br />|_______________________ _______________________ ______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Customer</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>Personal</b> | Allows a salesperson to open another window for the same customer |<br /> | | <b>Information</b> | object. Because there is only one view for the customer object, the |<br /> | | | name of the view (<b>Personal</b> <b>Information)</b> is part of the name of this |<br /> | | | choice. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the information about the customer |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Send...</b> | Allows the salesperson to send customer information to another user |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Cut</b> | Removes the selected object from the window and stores it on the |<br /> | | | clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Create</b> | Makes a new object from the selected object and stores the new |<br /> | | | object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Paste</b> | Places a copy of the contents of the clipboard into the customer |<br /> | | | object at a user-specified location |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Clear</b> | Removes the selected object from the customer object without |<br /> | | | compressing the space the object occupied |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow a salesperson to |<br /> | | | search for specific customer information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the information in the window |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | Deselects all of the information in the window |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other windows that have been |<br /> | | | opened from this customer object, from other objects associated with |<br /> | | | this customer object, and from other windows associated with the car |<br /> | | | dealership product |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the help information |<br /> | | | available for the customer object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing help information about the tasks a |<br /> | | | salesperson can accomplish in the window for the customer object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how to retrieve and |<br /> | | | use help information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about how to use the |<br /> | | | product |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> | Displays a window containing information such as the product's |<br /> | | | version number and copyright notice. |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1644 <hr /> 1645 <h4>1.6.3.3.5 Menus for the 5223 5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 <pre width="80"><a href="1.6.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUSTOFG">Figure 100</a> illustrates the menus and choices for the <b>Personal</b> <b>Information</b> view of the customer object. The choices are described in the following table. For an illustration of the complete window, see<a href="1.6.3.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPIWIN1"> Figure 117 in</a><a href="1.6.3.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPIWIN1"> </a><a href="1.6.3.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPIWIN1">topic 1.6.3.4.3</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCUSTOFG" name="FIGCUSTOFG"> </a><a href="picture-92?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 92" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P92.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 100. Menus for the Personal Information View of the Customer Object</span><br /><br /><a id="FIGCOTABL" name="FIGCOTABL"></a><a id="TBLCOTABL" name="TBLCOTABL"> .</a><br />_________________________________________________________________________________<br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 101. Menus for the Customer Object</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Customer</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | Allows a salesperson to open another window for the |<br />| | <b>Personal |</b> same customer object. Because there is only one view |<br />| | <b>Information</b>| for the customer object, the name of the view |<br />| | | (<b>Personal</b> <b>Information)</b> is part of the name of this |<br />| | | choice. |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the information |<br />| | | about the customer |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Send...</b> | Allows the salesperson to send customer information |<br />| | | to another user |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Cut</b> | Removes the selected object from the window and | <br />| | | stores it on the clipboard |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard|<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Create</b> | Makes a new object from the selected object and |<br />| | | stores the new object on the clipboard |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Paste</b> | Places a copy of the contents of the clipboard into |<br />| | | the customer object at a user-specified location |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Clear</b> | Removes the selected object from the customer object |<br />| | | without compressing the space the object occupied |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow |<br />| | | a salesperson to search for specific customer |<br />| | | information |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the information in the window |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b>| Deselects all of the information in the window |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b>| Displays a window containing a list of other windows |<br />| | | that have been opened from this customer object, |<br />| | | from other objects associated with this customer |<br />| | | object, and from other windows associated with the |<br />| | | car dealership product |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the |<br />| | | help information available for the customer object |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>General</b><b></b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | <b>help</b> | the tasks a salesperson can accomplish in the | <br />| | | window for the customer object |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how |<br />| | | to retrieve and use help information | |__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | | how to use the product |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Product</b> | Displays a window containing information such as the |<br />| | <b>information</b>| product's version number and copyright notice. |<br />|__________|____________|______________________________________________________|<br /><br /></pre> 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 <hr /> 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 <h4>1.6.3.3.5 Menus for the 1646 5248 Customer List Object</h4> 1647 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a 1648 href="1.6.3.3.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUSTLFG">Figure 102</a> illustrates the menus and choices for the <b>Icons</b> view of the<br /> customer list object. The menu bar choices are the same for the <b>Details</b><br />and <b>Settings</b> views, so those views are not shown here. The menu choices<br /> are described in the following table. For an illustration of the complete<br /> window, see<a 1649 href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUSTFG2"> Figure 128 in topic 1.6.4.1</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1650 name="FIGCUSTLFG" id="FIGCUSTLFG"> </a><a href="picture-93?mode=zoom"><img 1651 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P93.GIF" 1652 alt="PICTURE 93" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 102. Menus for the Icons View of the Customer List Object<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1653 name="FIGCLTABL" id="FIGCLTABL" /><a name="TBLCLTABL" id="TBLCLTABL"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 103. Menus for the Customer List Object |<br />|_______________________ _______________________ ______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Folder</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> | Allows a salesperson to open a new window containing a different |<br /> | | | view of the customer list object. The <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> choice leads to a |<br /> | | | cascaded menu that contains the names of the views available. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Print</b> | Allows a salesperson to print a list of customers in the customer |<br /> | | | list |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Selected</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>Personal</b> | Opens a new window containing the personal information view of the |<br /> | | <b>Information</b> | selected customer. Because this is the only view available for the |<br /> | | | customer object, the choice does not appear in a cascaded menu. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the general information for the |<br /> | | | selected customer |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Send...</b> | Allows the salesperson to send customer information to another user |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Cut</b> | Removes the selected object from the window and stores it on the |<br /> | | | clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Create</b> | Makes a new object from the selected object and stores the new |<br /> | | | object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Paste</b> | Places a copy of the contents of the clipboard into the customer |<br /> | | | list at a user-specified location |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Clear</b> | Removes the selected object from the customer list without |<br /> | | | compressing the space the object occupied |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow a salesperson to |<br /> | | | search for specific information in the customer list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the information in the window |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | Deselects all of the information in the window |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>View</b> | <b>Icons</b> | Displays the contents of the customer list as icons |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Details</b> | Displays the contents of the customer list as rows and columns of |<br /> | | | related information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Settings</b> | Displays the settings for the customer list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Sort</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to specify the criteria |<br /> | | | that determine the order in which the customers are displayed |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Include...</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to specify the criteria |<br /> | | | that determine which customers are displayed |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Refreshÿ</b> | Displays a cascaded menu containing the choices <b>On</b> and <b>Off,</b> which |<br /> | | | allow the salesperson to choose whether to continually update the |<br /> | | | view of the customer list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> | Causes the view of the customer list to be updated immediately to |<br /> | | | reflect any changes in the customers since the last time the view |<br /> | | | was refreshed |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other windows that have been |<br /> | | | opened from this customer list, from other objects associated with |<br /> | | | this customer list, and from other windows associated with the car |<br /> | | | dealership product |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the help information |<br /> | | | available for the customer list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing help information about the tasks a |<br /> | | | salesperson can accomplish in the window for the customer list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how to retrieve and |<br /> | | | use help information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about how to use the |<br /> | | | product |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> | Displays a window containing information such as the product's |<br /> | | | version number and copyright notice. |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1654 <hr /> 1655 <h4>1.6.3.3.6 Menus for the 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 <pre width="80"><a href="1.6.3.3.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUSTLFG">Figure 102</a> illustrates the menus and choices for the <b>Icons</b> view of the customer list object. The menu bar choices are the same for the <b>Details</b> and <b>Settings</b> views, so those views are not shown here. The menu choices are described in the following table. For an illustration of the complete window, see<a href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCUSTFG2"> Figure 128 in topic 1.6.4.1</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCUSTLFG" name="FIGCUSTLFG"> </a><a href="picture-93?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 93" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P93.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 102. Menus for the Icons View of the Customer List Object</span><br /><br /><a id="FIGCLTABL" name="FIGCLTABL"></a><a id="TBLCLTABL" name="TBLCLTABL"> _________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 103. Menus for the Customer List Object</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b><span style="font-family: mon;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span></span>|<br />|__________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Folder</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> | Allows a salesperson to open a new window containing |<br />| | | a different view of the customer list object. The<span style="font-family: mon;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span></span><b></b> |<br />| | | <b>Open </b><b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> choice leads to a cascaded menu that |<br />| | | contains the names of the views available. |<br />|__________|_____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows a salesperson to print a list of customers in |<br />| | | the customer list |<br />|__________|_____________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Selected</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | Opens a new window containing the personal |<br />| | <b>Personal</b> | information view of the selected customer. Because |<br />| | <b>Information</b> | this is the only view available for the customer |<br />| | | object, the choice does not appear in a cascaded |<br />| | | menu. |<br />|__________|______________|_____________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the general |<br />| | | information for the selected customer |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Send...</b> | Allows the salesperson to send customer information |<br />| | | to another user |<br />|__________|______________|_____________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Cut</b> | Removes the selected object from the window and |<br />| | | stores it on the clipboard |<br />|__________|___________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the |<br />| | | clipboard |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Create</b> | Makes a new object from the selected object and |<br />| | | stores the new object on the clipboard |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Paste</b> | Places a copy of the contents of the clipboard into |<br />| | | the customer list at a user-specified location |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Clear</b> | Removes the selected object from the customer list |<br />| | | without compressing the space the object occupied |<br />|__________|_____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow |<br />| | | a salesperson to search for specific information in |<br />| | | the customer list |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the information in the window |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | Deselects all of the information in the window |<br />|__________|_______________________|____________________________________________|<br />| <b>View</b> | <b>Icons</b> | Displays the contents of the customer list as icons |<br />|__________|___________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Details</b> | Displays the contents of the customer list as rows |<br />| | | and columns of related information |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Settings</b> | Displays the settings for the customer list |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Sort</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to |<br />| | | specify the criteria that determine the order in |<br />| | | which the customers are displayed |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Include...</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to |<br />| | | specify the criteria that determine which customers |<br />| | | are displayed |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Refreshÿ</b> | Displays a cascaded menu containing the choices <b>On</b> |<br />| | | and <b>Off,</b> which allow the salesperson to choose |<br />| | | whether to continually update the view of the |<br />| | | customer list |<br />|__________|____________________________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> | Causes the view of the customer list to be updated |<br />| | | immediately to reflect any changes in the customers |<br />| | | since the last time the view was refreshed |<br />|__________|______________|_____________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other |<br />| | | windows that have been opened from this customer |<br />| | | list, from other objects associated with this |<br />| | | customer list, and from other windows associated |<br />| | | with the car dealership product |<br />|__________|______________|_____________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the |<br />| | | help information available for the customer list |<br />|__________|______________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | | the tasks a salesperson can accomplish in the |<br />| | | window for the customer list |<br />|__________|______________|_____________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how |<br />| | | to retrieve and use help information |<br />|__________|______________|_____________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | | how to use the product |<br />|__________|______________|_____________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Product</b> | Displays a window containing information such as |<br />| |<span style="font-family: mon;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span></span><b>information</b> | the product's version number and copyright notice. |<br />|__________|______________|_____________________________________________________|<br /><br /></pre> 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 <hr /> 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 <h4>1.6.3.3.6 Menus for the 1656 5274 Worksheet Object</h4> 1657 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a 1658 href="1.6.3.3.6?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKOFG">Figure 104</a> illustrates the menus and choices for the <b>Worksheet</b> view of the<br /> worksheet object. The menu choices are described in the following table.<br /> For an illustration of the complete window, see<a 1659 href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKSUM"> Figure 133 in</a><br /><a 1660 href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKSUM">topic 1.6.4.1</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1661 name="FIGWORKOFG" id="FIGWORKOFG"> </a><a href="picture-94?mode=zoom"><img 1662 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P94.GIF" 1663 alt="PICTURE 94" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 104. Menus for the Summary View of the Worksheet Object<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1664 name="FIGWOTABL" id="FIGWOTABL" /><a name="TBLWOTABL" id="TBLWOTABL"> .</a><br />______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />| Figure 105. Menus for the Worksheet Object |<br />|_______________________ _______________________ ______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Worksheet</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>Worksheet</b> | Allows a salesperson to open another window for the same worksheet |<br /> | | | object. The window opens to a worksheet view. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>Settings</b> | Allows a salesperson to open another window for the same worksheet |<br /> | | | object. The window opens to a settings view. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the worksheet information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Send...</b> | Allows the salesperson to send worksheet information to another user |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Cut</b> | Removes the selected object from the window and stores it on the |<br /> | | | clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Create</b> | Makes a new object from the selected object and stores the new |<br /> | | | object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Paste</b> | Places a copy of the contents of the clipboard into the worksheet |<br /> | | | object at a user-specified location |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Clear</b> | Removes the selected object from the worksheet object without |<br /> | | | compressing the space the object occupied |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow a salesperson to |<br /> | | | search for specific worksheet information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the information in the window |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | Deselects all of the information in the window |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>View</b> | <b>Worksheet</b> | Displays the worksheet object opened to the worksheet section of the |<br /> | | | notebook |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Settings</b> | Displays the settings for the worksheet object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Refreshÿ</b> | Displays a cascaded menu containing the choices <b>On</b> and <b>Off,</b> which |<br /> | | | allow the salesperson to choose whether to continually update the |<br /> | | | view of the worksheet object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> | Causes the view of the worksheet object to be updated immediately to |<br /> | | | reflect any changes in the worksheet since the last time the view |<br /> | | | was refreshed |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other windows that have been |<br /> | | | opened from this worksheet object, from other objects associated |<br /> | | | with this worksheet object, and from other windows associated with |<br /> | | | the car dealership product |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the help information |<br /> | | | available for the worksheet object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing help information about the tasks a |<br /> | | | salesperson can accomplish in the window for the worksheet object |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how to retrieve and |<br /> | | | use help information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about how to use the |<br /> | | | product |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> | Displays a window containing information such as the product's |<br /> | | | version number and copyright notice. |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1665 <hr /> 1666 <h4>1.6.3.3.7 Menus for the 1667 Worksheet List Object</h4> 1668 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a 1669 href="1.6.3.3.7?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKLFG">Figure 106</a> illustrates the menus and choices for the <b>Icons</b> view of the<br /> worksheet list object. The menu bar choices are the same for the <b>Details</b><br />and <b>Settings</b> views, so those views are not shown here. The menu choices<br /> are described in the following table. For an illustration of the complete<br /> window, see<a 1670 href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGDATATRF"> Figure 132 in topic 1.6.4.1</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1671 name="FIGWORKLFG" id="FIGWORKLFG"> </a><a href="picture-95?mode=zoom"><img 1672 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P95.GIF" 1673 alt="PICTURE 95" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 106. Menus for the Icons View of the Worksheet List Object<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1674 name="FIGWLTABL" id="FIGWLTABL" /><a name="TBLWLTABL" id="TBLWLTABL"> ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 107. Menus for the Worksheet List Object |<br />|_______________________ _______________________ ______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Folder</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> | Allows a salesperson to open a new window containing a different |<br /> | | | view of the worksheet list. The <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> choice leads to a |<br /> | | | cascaded menu that contains the names of the views available. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Print</b> | Allows a salesperson to print a list of worksheets in the worksheet |<br /> | | | list |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Selected</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>Worksheet</b> | Allows a salesperson to open a window or windows for the selected |<br /> | | | worksheet object or objects.. The window or windows open to a |<br /> | | | worksheet view. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>Settings</b> | Allows a salesperson to open a window or windows for the selected |<br /> | | | worksheet object or objects. The window or windows open to a |<br /> | | | settings view. |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the selected worksheet |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Send...</b> | Allows the salesperson to send a copy of a worksheet to another user |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Cut</b> | Removes the selected object from the window and stores it on the |<br /> | | | clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Create</b> | Makes a new object from the selected object and stores the new |<br /> | | | object on the clipboard |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Paste</b> | Places a copy of the contents of the clipboard into the worksheet |<br /> | | | list at a user-specified location |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Clear</b> | Removes the selected object from the worksheet list without |<br /> | | | compressing the space the object occupied |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow a salesperson to |<br /> | | | search for specific information in the worksheet list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the information in the window |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | Deselects all of the information in the window |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>View</b> | <b>Icons</b> | Displays the contents of the worksheet list as icons |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Details</b> | Displays the contents of the worksheet list as rows and columns of |<br /> | | | related information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Settings</b> | Displays the settings for the worksheet list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Sort</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to specify the criteria |<br /> | | | that determine the order in which the worksheets are displayed |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Include...</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to specify the criteria |<br /> | | | that determine which worksheets are displayed |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Refreshÿ</b> | Displays a cascaded menu containing the choices <b>On</b> and <b>Off,</b> which |<br /> | | | allow the salesperson to choose whether to continually update the |<br /> | | | view of the worksheet list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> | Causes the view of the worksheet list to be updated immediately to |<br /> | | | reflect any changes in the worksheets since the last time the view |<br /> | | | was refreshed |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other windows that have been |<br /> | | | opened from this worksheet list, from other objects associated with |<br /> | | | this worksheet list, and from other windows associated with the car |<br /> | | | dealership product |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the help information |<br /> | | | available for the worksheet list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing help information about the tasks a |<br /> | | | salesperson can accomplish in the window for the worksheet list |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how to retrieve and |<br /> | | | use help information |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about how to use the |<br /> | | | product |<br /> | |_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /> | | <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> | Displays a window containing information such as the product's |<br /> | | | version number and copyright notice. |<br /> |_______________________|_______________________|______________________________________________________________________|<br /></pre> 1675 <hr /> 1676 <h3>1.6.3.4 Step 4. Designing the 5275 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 <pre width="80"><a href="1.6.3.3.6?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKOFG">Figure 104</a> illustrates the menus and choices for the <b>Worksheet</b> view of the worksheet object. The menu choices are described in the following table. For an illustration of the complete window, see<a href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKSUM"> Figure 133 in</a><a href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKSUM"> </a><a href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKSUM">topic 1.6.4.1</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGWORKOFG" name="FIGWORKOFG"> </a><a href="picture-94?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 94" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P94.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 104. Menus for the Summary View of the Worksheet Object</span><br /><br /><a id="FIGWOTABL" name="FIGWOTABL"></a><a id="TBLWOTABL" name="TBLWOTABL"> .</a><br />_________________________________________________________________________________<br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 105. Menus for the Worksheet Object</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Worksheet</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b></b> | Allows a salesperson to open another window for the |<br />| | <b>Worksheet</b> | same worksheet object. The window opens to a |<br />| | | worksheet view. |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | Allows a salesperson to open another window for the |<br />| | <b>Settings</b> | same worksheet object. The window opens to a settings |<br />| | | view. |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the worksheet |<br />| | | information |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Send...</b> | Allows the salesperson to send worksheet information |<br />| | | to another user |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Cut</b> | Removes the selected object from the window and |<br />| | | stores it on the clipboard |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Create</b> | Makes a new object from the selected object |<br />| | | and stores the new object on the clipboard |<br />|___________|___________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Paste</b> | Places a copy of the contents of the clipboard into | <br />| | | the worksheet object at a user-specified location |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Clear</b> | Removes the selected object from the worksheet |<br />| | | object without compressing the space the objec |<br />| | | occupied |<br />|___________|___________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow |<br />| | | a salesperson to search for specific worksheet |<br />| | | information |<br />|___________|___________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the information in the window |<br />|_______________________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | Deselects all of the information in the window |<br />|___________|___________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>View</b> | <b>Worksheet</b> | Displays the worksheet object opened to the |<br />| | | worksheet section of the notebook |<br />|___________|___________|______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Settings</b> | Displays the settings for the worksheet object |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Refreshÿ</b> | Displays a cascaded menu containing the choices <b>On</b> |<br />| | | and <b>Off,</b> which allow the salesperson to choose |<br />| | | whether to continually update the view of the |<br />| | |worksheet object |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Refresh</b> | Causes the view of the worksheet object to be |<br />| | <b>now </b>| updated immediately to reflect any changes in |<br />| | | the worksheet since the last time the view was |<br />| | | refreshed |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> | Displays a window containing a list of other windows |<br />| | <b>list </b>| that have been opened from this worksheet object, |<br />| | | from other objects associated with this worksheet |<br />| | | object, and from other windows associated with the car|<br />| | | dealership product |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b>| Displays a window containing an index of all of the |<br />| | | help information available for the worksheet object |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>General</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | <b>help</b> | the tasks a salesperson can accomplish in the window |<br />| | | for the worksheet object |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b>| Displays a window containing an explanation of how to |<br />| | | retrieve and use help information |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | | how to use the product |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Product</b><b></b> | Displays a window containing information such as |<br />| |<b>information</b>| the product's version number and copyright notice. |<br />|___________|___________|_______________________________________________________|<br /><br /></pre> 5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 5290 5291 5292 5293 5294 <hr /> 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 <h4>1.6.3.3.7 Menus for the 5300 Worksheet List Object<br /> 5301 5302 5303 5304 </h4> 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 <pre width="80"><a href="1.6.3.3.7?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKLFG">Figure 106</a> illustrates the menus and choices for the <b>Icons</b> view of the worksheet list object. The menu bar choices are the same for the <b>Details</b> and <b>Settings</b> views, so those views are not shown here. The menu choices are described in the following table. For an illustration of the complete window, see<a href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGDATATRF"> Figure 132 in topic 1.6.4.1</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGWORKLFG" name="FIGWORKLFG"> </a><a href="picture-95?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 95" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P95.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 106. Menus for the Icons View of the Worksheet List Object</span><br /><br /><a id="FIGWLTABL" name="FIGWLTABL"></a><a id="TBLWLTABL" name="TBLWLTABL"> _________________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 107. Menus for the Worksheet List Object</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> | <b>Choice</b> | <b>Purpose</b> |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Folder</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> | Allows a salesperson to open a new window containing |<br />| | | a different view of the worksheet list. The <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>ÿ</b> |<br />| | | choice leads to a cascaded menu that contains the |<br />| | | names of the views available. |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows a salesperson to print a list of worksheets in |<br />| | | the worksheet list |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Selected</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b><b></b> | Allows a salesperson to open a window or windows for |<br />| | <b>Worksheet</b> | the selected worksheet object or objects.. The window |<br />| | | or windows open to a worksheet view. |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b><b></b> | Allows a salesperson to open a window or windows for |<br />| | <b>Settings</b> | the selected worksheet object or objects. The window |<br />| | | or windows open to a settings view. |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Print</b> | Allows the salesperson to print the selected worksheet|<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Send...</b> | Allows the salesperson to send a copy of a worksheet |<br />| | | to another user |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Edit</b> | <b>Undo</b> | Undoes the salesperson's last action |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Redo</b> | Redoes the last action that the salesperson undid |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Cut</b> | Removes the selected object from the window and |<br />| | | stores it on the clipboard |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Copy</b> | Stores a copy of the selected object on the clipboard |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Create</b> | Makes a new object from the selected object and |<br />| | | stores the new object on the clipboard |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Paste</b> | Places a copy of the contents of the clipboard into |<br />| | | the worksheet list at a user-specified location |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Clear</b> | Removes the selected object from the worksheet list |<br />| | | without compressing the space the object occupied |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Find...</b> | Displays a window that contains controls that allow a |<br />| | | salesperson to search for specific information in the |<br />| | | worksheet list |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | Selects all of the information in the window |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b>| Deselects all of the information in the window |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>View</b> | <b>Icons</b> | Displays the contents of the worksheet list as icons |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Details</b> | Displays the contents of the worksheet list as rows |<br />| | | and columns of related information |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Settings</b> | Displays the settings for the worksheet list |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Sort</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to |<br />| | | specify the criteria that determine the order in |<br />| | | which the worksheets are displayed |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Include...</b> | Displays a window that allows a salesperson to |<br />| | | specify the criteria that determine which worksheets |<br />| | | are displayed |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Refreshÿ</b> | Displays a cascaded menu containing the choices <b>On</b> |<br />| | | and <b>Off,</b> which allow the salesperson to choose |<br />| | | whether to continually update the view of the |<br />| | | worksheet list |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b>| Causes the view of the worksheet list to be updated |<br />| | | immediately to reflect any changes in the worksheets |<br />| | | since the last time the view was refreshed |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Windows</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b>| Displays a window containing a list of other windows |<br />| | | that have been opened from this worksheet list, from |<br />| | | other objects associated with this worksheet list, |<br />| | | and from other windows associated with the car |<br />| | | dealership product |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | Displays a window containing an index of all of the |<br />| | | help information available for the worksheet list |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>General</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| |<b> help</b> | the tasks a salesperson can accomplish in the window |<br />| | | for the worksheet list |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | Displays a window containing an explanation of how to |<br />| | | retrieve and |use help information |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Tutorial</b> | Displays a window containing help information about |<br />| | | how to use the product |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br />| | <b>Product</b><b></b> | Displays a window containing information such as the |<br />| | <b>information</b>| product's version number and copyright notice. |<br />|__________|____________|_______________________________________________________|<br /><br /></pre> 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 <hr /> 5325 5326 5327 5328 5329 <h3>1.6.3.4 Step 4. Designing the 1677 5330 Windows</h3> 1678 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />We consulted <a 1679 href="2.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART2">Part 2, "CUA Reference" </a>to design the actual contents of the<br /> windows for our sample product.<br /><br /><br />The descriptions below do not contain all of the components possible in<br />windows of products with a CUA interface; our product did not need all of<br />them. Nor are the window designs definitive. A different group of<br />designers might have designed windows with different components.<br /><br /><br />We considered three principle aspects of each window:<br /><br /><br />° The window frame (includes the window border, window title, the scroll<br />bars, the system menu symbol, and the window sizing buttons)<br /><br /><br />° The menus (includes the menu bar, the pull-down menus, and any<br />cascaded menus needed for choices in the pull-down menus)<br /><br /><br />° The contents of the window (the view).<br /><br /><br />Because our product is an example only, we did not design all of the<br />windows for all of the objects. The designs described in the following<br />sections are representative only; they are not comprehensive.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1680 <ul> 1681 <li><a href="1.6.3.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.4.1 1682 Window for the Car Object</a></li> 1683 <li><a href="1.6.3.4.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.4.2 1684 Windows for the Car Lot Object</a></li> 1685 <li><a href="1.6.3.4.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.4.3 1686 Windows for the Customer Object</a></li> 1687 <li><a href="1.6.3.4.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.3.4.4 1688 Windows for the Worksheet Object</a></li> 1689 </ul> 1690 <pre></pre> 1691 <hr /> 1692 <h4>1.6.3.4.1 Window for the Car 1693 Object</h4> 1694 <pre></pre> 1695 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />We designed only one window for the car object, a window to display the<br />general information view. A salesperson displays the window by opening a<br />car object.<br /><br /><br />We used read-only fields to display the textual information, and we<br />combined the textual information with a drawing of the car. We could have<br />used some other kind of graphic representation, such as a video image or<br />computer animation.<a 1696 href="1.6.3.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCAROBFG"> Figure 108</a> shows the car object window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1697 name="FIGCAROBFG" id="FIGCAROBFG"> </a><a href="picture-96?mode=zoom"><img 1698 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P96.GIF" 1699 alt="PICTURE 96" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 108. Car Object. A general information view of a car object<br />displays textual and graphical information that both the<br />salesperson and the customer want to see.<br /></pre> 1700 <pre></pre> 1701 <hr /> 1702 <h4>1.6.3.4.2 Windows for the Car 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 <pre width="80">We consulted <a href="2.0?DT=19921204095534#HDRPART2">Part 2, "CUA Reference" </a>to design the actual contents of the windows for our sample product.<br /><br />The descriptions below do not contain all of the components possible in windows of products with a CUA interface; our product did not need all of them. Nor are the window designs definitive. A different group of designers might have designed windows with different components.<br /><br />We considered three principle aspects of each window:<br /><br />° The window frame (includes the window border, window title, the scroll bars, the system menu symbol, and the window sizing buttons)<br />° The menus (includes the menu bar, the pull-down menus, and any cascaded menus needed for choices in the pull-down menus)<br />° The contents of the window (the view).<br /><br />Because our product is an example only, we did not design all of the windows for all of the objects. The designs described in the following sections are representative only; they are not comprehensive.<br /></pre> 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 <pre></pre> 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 <hr /> 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362 <h4>1.6.3.4.1 Window for the Car 5363 Object<br /> 5364 5365 5366 5367 </h4> 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 <pre width="80">We designed only one window for the car object, a window to display the general information view. A salesperson displays the window by opening a car object.<br /><br />We used read-only fields to display the textual information, and we combined the textual information with a drawing of the car. We could have used some other kind of graphic representation, such as a video image or computer animation.<a href="1.6.3.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCAROBFG"> Figure 108</a> shows the car object window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCAROBFG" name="FIGCAROBFG"> </a><a href="picture-96?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 96" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P96.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 108. Car Object. A general information view of a car object displays textual and graphical information that both the salesperson and the customer want to see.</span><br /><br /></pre> 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390 5391 <hr /> 5392 5393 5394 5395 5396 <h4>1.6.3.4.2 Windows for the Car 1703 5397 Lot Object</h4> 1704 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />We designed several windows for the car lot object, including windows for<br />displaying the contents views (icons view and details view), windows from<br />routing choices, and a window for the composed view (the map view).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>The</i> <i>Window</i> <i>for</i> <i>the</i> <i>Icons</i> <i>View</i>: A salesperson displays this window by<br /> opening the car lot object. The window contains icons representing car<br /> objects. The car icon is a generic representation of a car. We<br /> considered creating a separate icon for each car model, one that closely<br /> resembled the model it represented, but we knew that many of the<br /> distinguishing features would not be easy to see even on icons of a normal<br /> size and would be indiscernible in views, such as the details view, that<br /> display small icons.<br /><br /><br />Because salespeople are competitive, we knew that we should provide a way<br />to indicate when a car has a potential buyer. We designed a small graphic<br />of a human figure to augment the car icon when a salesperson has an<br />interested customer. When a car icon is augmented with the buyer figure,<br />a salesperson can decide to speed the close of a sale so that his or her<br />customer can make the purchase before another customer does, or the<br />salesperson can decide to steer a customer to a different car that is not<br />being considered by another customer. The car icon is augmented<br />automatically by the system when a salesperson transfers car information<br />to a worksheet or when a customer takes a car for a test drive.<br /><a 1705 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGIVIEW">Figure 109</a> shows the window for the icons view of the car lot object. The<br /> icons of the Hutton Sapphire, the Hutton GT, and the Watson Faser are<br /> augmented.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1706 name="FIGIVIEW" id="FIGIVIEW"> </a><a href="picture-97?mode=zoom"><img 1707 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P97.GIF" 1708 alt="PICTURE 97" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 109. Window Displaying the Icons View of the Car Lot Object. Each<br />icon represents one car in the car lot. Three of the six<br />icons are augmented.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>The</i> <i>Window</i> <i>for</i> <i>the</i> <i>Details</i> <i>View</i>: This window can be displayed by opening<br /> the car lot object to a details view or by selecting the <b>Details</b> choice<br /> from the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br /><br />In the details view we wanted to display the most frequently used<br />information about each car, so we arranged the year, make, model, price,<br />number of buyers, and vehicle identification number (VIN) in columns.<br />Then we placed a column heading over each column of data to identify the<br />items in that column. We designed the window so that the column headings<br />are in a different part of the window than the list of cars. This design<br />allows a salesperson to scroll the list of cars vertically without losing<br />sight of the headings. However, when the salesperson scrolls the list<br />horizontally, the headings scroll with the columns. Otherwise the<br />headings would be displayed over the wrong columns.<br /><br /><br />We designed the window to scroll in both directions. The horizontal<br />scrolling is helpful when the salesperson makes the window small enough<br />that not all of the columns are displayed. The vertical scrolling is<br />helpful when the salesperson makes the window small enough that not all of<br />the lines are displayed.<br /><br /><br />We included a status area at the top of the window to tell the salesperson<br />when the window had last been refreshed and whether the view had been<br />filtered.<a 1709 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGDVIEW"> Figure 110</a> shows the window for the details view of the car lot<br /> object. Each line represents one car in the car lot.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1710 name="FIGDVIEW" id="FIGDVIEW"> </a><a href="picture-98?mode=zoom"><img 1711 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P98.GIF" 1712 alt="PICTURE 98" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 110. Window Displaying the Details View of the Car Lot Object.<br />Each line of information in the window represents one car in<br />the car lot.<br /><a 1713 name="HDRINCLCAR" id="HDRINCLCAR"><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>The</i> <i>Window</i> <i>for</i> <i>the</i> <i>Filtering</i> <i>Feature</i>: We named the filtering feature</a><br /><b>Include...</b> because it allows a salesperson to specify which cars are to<br /> be included in the view of the car lot. The <b>Include...</b> choice is a<br /> routing choice that appears in the pull-down menu from the <b>View</b> choice on<br /> the menu bar of the icons and details views of the car lot object. The<br /> Include Cars window appears when a salesperson selects the <b>Include...</b><br />choice. It is a secondary window.<br /><br /><br />Our first design of the <b>Include</b> <b>Cars</b> window for appears in <a 1714 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGICARS">Figure 111</a>.<br /> Although we subsequently changed the design of the window, we have<br /> included our original design here to illustrate how we used the iterative<br /> design process to improve our product.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1715 name="FIGICARS" id="FIGICARS"> </a><a href="picture-99?mode=zoom"><img 1716 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P99.GIF" 1717 alt="PICTURE 99" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 111. First Design of the Include Cars Window<br /><br /><br />To allow a salesperson to specify the filter criteria, we provided several<br />types of controls. For the <b>Model,</b> <b>Make,</b> and <b>Color</b> fields, we used<br /> drop-down combination boxes. The drop-down characteristic saves space in<br /> the window, the entry field portion of the control allows a salesperson to<br /> type the appropriate information, and the list box portion of the control<br /> allows a salesperson to select the desired information without having to<br /> type it.<br /><br /><br />We used two spin buttons for the <b>Price</b> field, and we provided a ring of<br /> values in $1,000 increments. The spin buttons allow the salesperson to<br /> specify a minimum and maximum price for the cars to be displayed in the<br /> contents views (icons and details).<br /><br /><br />To allow a salesperson to specify the features of the cars to be displayed<br />in the contents views, we used a pair of list boxes with three associated<br />push buttons. The list box on the left contains the features that are<br />available for a particular make, model, and year of car. The list box on<br />the right is where the salesperson creates a list of the features that the<br />customer does and does not want. To create the list in the list box on<br />the right, the salesperson selects a feature from the list box on the<br />left, then selects the <b>With</b> <b>>></b> push button if the customer wants that<br /> feature. The salesperson selects the <b>Without</b> <b>>></b> push button if the<br /> customer does not want that feature.<br /><br /><br />Features added to the list box on the right appear with a check mark if<br />they were added with the <b>With</b> push button.<br /><br /><br />When a salesperson wants to remove a feature from the list, the<br />salesperson selects the feature in the list box on the right, then selects<br />the <b>Delete</b> push button.<br /><br /><br />At the bottom of the window we placed some standard CUA-defined push<br />buttons: <b>Include,</b> <b>Close,</b> and <b>Help.</b> When a salesperson selects the <b>Include</b><br />push button, the window containing the contents view of the car lot<br />displays all of the cars that match the criteria specified in the Include<br />Cars window, and the Include Cars window remains open.<br /><br /><br />The <b>Close</b> push button closes the Include Cars window without changing the<br /> display in the Icons or Details window of the car lot.<br /><br /><br />A salesperson can select the <b>Help</b> push button to display contextual help<br /> for the control or choice that the cursor is on.<br /><br /><br />To assist salespeople in learning to use our product, we provided an<br />information area at the bottom of the Include Cars window. When a<br />salesperson moves the cursor to a control, the information area displays<br />information about how to use that control. For example, when the cursor<br />is on the <b>Available</b> list box, the information area displays a message that<br /> says something like this:<br /><br /><br /><samp>Select</samp> <samp>a</samp> <samp>feature</samp> <samp>from</samp> <samp>this</samp> <samp>list.</samp><br /><samp>Then</samp> <samp>use</samp> <b>With</b> <b>>></b> <samp>or</samp> <b>Without</b> <b>>></b> <samp>to</samp> <samp>add</samp> <samp>the</samp> <samp>feature</samp> <samp>to</samp> <samp>the</samp> <b>Desired</b> <samp>list.</samp> 1718 <br /><br />During a usability test, we discovered that the <b>Available</b> and <b>Desired</b> list<br /> boxes and the <b>With</b> <b>>></b> and <b>Without</b> <b>>></b> push buttons didn't make sense to our<br /> users. Consequently we redesigned the Include Cars window to make it<br /> easier to understand and to reduce the number of decisions that<br /> salespeople had to make. In particular, we added two fields that contain<br /> the features customers ask for most often.<a 1719 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGICARS2"> Figure 112</a> shows the<br /> redesigned Include Cars window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1720 name="FIGICARS2" id="FIGICARS2"> </a><a href="picture-100?mode=zoom"><img 1721 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P100.GIF" 1722 alt="PICTURE 100" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 112. New Version of the Include Cars Window<br /><br /><br />To alleviate the confusion that resulted when salespeople had to transfer<br />a feature from one control to another, we used check boxes and radio<br />buttons instead of the list boxes. The check boxes are appropriate for<br />most of the options because the salespeople can easily understand the<br />implications of checking an option or not--that is, a salesperson realizes<br />that checking the <b>Air</b> <b>conditioning</b> choice means that the customer wants<br /> air conditioning, and not checking it means that the customer does not<br /> want air conditioning. For the <b>Transmission</b> choices, however, check boxes<br /> were not appropriate because a car must have some kind of transmission.<br /> Therefore, we used radio buttons so that a salesperson has to select which<br /> kind of transmission the car should have. To accommodate customers who<br /> will accept either kind of transmission, we provided a <b>No</b> <b>preference</b><br />choice.<br /><a 1723 name="HDRSORTCAR" id="HDRSORTCAR"><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>The</i> <i>Window</i> <i>for</i> <i>the</i> <i>Sorting</i> <i>Feature</i>: We named the sorting feature <b>Sort...,</b></a><br />aptly enough. The <b>Sort...</b> choice is a routing choice that appears in the<br /> pull-down menu from the <b>View</b> choice on the menu bar of the car lot object.<br /> The Sort Cars window appears when a salesperson selects the <b>Sort...</b><br />choice. It is a secondary window.<br /><br /><br />A salesperson can select the <b>Sort...</b> choice to specify the order in which<br /> the cars should appear in the details view of the car lot object. We used<br /> drop-down lists to display the names of the sorting categories so that a<br /> salesperson would not have to remember the names of the appropriate<br /> sorting values. The values correspond to the column headings shown in the<br /> details view.<br /><br /><br />We designed two alternatives for the Sort Cars window. In the first<br />version, we used radio buttons and text as the mechanism for specifying<br />the sort order.<a 1724 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGOSD"> Figure 113</a> shows this version.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1725 name="FIGOSD" id="FIGOSD"> </a><a href="picture-101?mode=zoom"><img 1726 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P101.GIF" 1727 alt="PICTURE 101" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 113. Version 1 of the Sort Cars Window. In this version of the<br />window design, we used radio buttons as the mechanism for<br />specifying the sort order.<br /><br /><br />In the second version, we used value sets containing graphics that depict<br />the sort order.<a 1728 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGSDIALOG"> Figure 114</a> shows this version.<br /><br /><br />The push buttons in both versions operate much like the push buttons in<br />the Include Cars window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1729 name="FIGSDIALOG" id="FIGSDIALOG"> </a><a href="picture-102?mode=zoom"><img 1730 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P102.GIF" 1731 alt="PICTURE 102" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 114. Version 2 of the Sort Cars Window. In this version of the<br />window design, we used value sets as the mechanism for<br />specifying the sort order.<br /><br /><br />It is not uncommon for designers to produce more than one proposed<br />solution to a design problem. Usability testing is the only way to<br />determine which design is superior.<br /><br /><br />When the salesperson selects the <b>Sort</b> push button the details view of the<br /> car lot object is sorted as shown in <a 1732 href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGSORTV">Figure 115</a>. The sort order is<br /> indicated in the status area.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1733 name="FIGSORTV" id="FIGSORTV"> </a><a href="picture-103?mode=zoom"><img 1734 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P103.GIF" 1735 alt="PICTURE 103" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 115. Sorted Details View of the Car Lot Object. The sort order is<br />indicated in the status area.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>The</i> <i>Window</i> <i>for</i> <i>the</i> <i>Map</i> <i>View</i>: The map view is a pictorial display of the<br /> dealership's physical car lot. The view contains drawings of the showroom<br /> and the parking places in the car lot. Car icons in the parking places<br /> indicate where the corresponding cars are parked.<br /><br /><br />Car lot attendants are the primary users of this view of the car lot. As<br />the lot attendants move cars into and out of the lot, they update the<br />information displayed in this view. However, salespeople use the map view<br />to find out the location of cars that customers want to test drive.<br />Furthermore, a salesperson can drag a car icon to the showroom. By doing<br />so, the salesperson signals a lot attendant to bring the car to the<br />showroom so that a customer can take it for a test drive. When a sale is<br />closed, the salesperson drags the car icon to the service building so that<br />the service manager can schedule the pre-delivery prep work for the car.<br /><br /><br />Other dealership workers can also use the map view. Sales managers can<br />analyze sales patterns by using the map view. If the map view were tied<br />to the sales database, the sales managers might be able to learn, for<br />example, that cars parked in the first two rows of the lot sell more<br />quickly than cars parked at the back of the lot. The map view can also be<br />used to take a physical inventory of the cars in stock.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1736 name="FIGMAPVW" id="FIGMAPVW"> </a><a href="picture-104?mode=zoom"><img 1737 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P104.GIF" 1738 alt="PICTURE 104" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 116. Window for the Map View of the Car Lot Object. The map view<br />represents the dealership's physical car lot.<br /></pre> 1739 <hr /> 1740 <h4>1.6.3.4.3 Windows for the 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 <pre width="80">We designed several windows for the car lot object, including windows for displaying the contents views (icons view and details view), windows from routing choices, and a window for the composed view (the map view).<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">The</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Window</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">for</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">the</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Icons</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">View</i>: A salesperson displays this window by opening the car lot object. The window contains icons representing car objects. The car icon is a generic representation of a car. We considered creating a separate icon for each car model, one that closely resembled the model it represented, but we knew that many of the distinguishing features would not be easy to see even on icons of a normal size and would be indiscernible in views, such as the details view, that display small icons.<br /><br />Because salespeople are competitive, we knew that we should provide a way to indicate when a car has a potential buyer. We designed a small graphic of a human figure to augment the car icon when a salesperson has an interested customer. When a car icon is augmented with the buyer figure, a salesperson can decide to speed the close of a sale so that his or her customer can make the purchase before another customer does, or the salesperson can decide to steer a customer to a different car that is not being considered by another customer. The car icon is augmented automatically by the system when a salesperson transfers car information to a worksheet or when a customer takes a car for a test drive.<br /><a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGIVIEW">Figure 109</a> shows the window for the icons view of the car lot object. The icons of the Hutton Sapphire, the Hutton GT, and the Watson Faser are augmented.<br /><br /><a id="FIGIVIEW" name="FIGIVIEW"> </a><a href="picture-97?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 97" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P97.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 109. Window Displaying the Icons View of the Car Lot Object. Each icon represents one car in the car lot. Three of the six icons are augmented.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">The</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Window</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">for</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">the</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Details</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">View</i>: This window can be displayed by opening the car lot object to a details view or by selecting the <b>Details</b> choice from the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br />In the details view we wanted to display the most frequently used information about each car, so we arranged the year, make, model, price, number of buyers, and vehicle identification number (VIN) in columns. Then we placed a column heading over each column of data to identify the items in that column. We designed the window so that the column headings are in a different part of the window than the list of cars. This design allows a salesperson to scroll the list of cars vertically without losing sight of the headings. However, when the salesperson scrolls the list horizontally, the headings scroll with the columns. Otherwise the headings would be displayed over the wrong columns.<br /><br />We designed the window to scroll in both directions. The horizontal scrolling is helpful when the salesperson makes the window small enough that not all of the columns are displayed. The vertical scrolling is helpful when the salesperson makes the window small enough that not all of the lines are displayed.<br /><br />We included a status area at the top of the window to tell the salesperson when the window had last been refreshed and whether the view had been filtered.<a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGDVIEW"> Figure 110</a> shows the window for the details view of the car lot object. Each line represents one car in the car lot.<br /><br /><a id="FIGDVIEW" name="FIGDVIEW"> </a><a href="picture-98?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 98" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P98.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 110. Window Displaying the Details View of the Car Lot Object. Each line of information in the window represents one car in the car lot.</span><br /><a id="HDRINCLCAR" name="HDRINCLCAR"><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">The</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Window</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">for</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">the</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Filtering</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Feature</i>: We named the filtering feature</a> <b>Include...</b> because it allows a salesperson to specify which cars are to be included in the view of the car lot. The <b>Include...</b> choice is a routing choice that appears in the pull-down menu from the <b>View</b> choice on the menu bar of the icons and details views of the car lot object. The Include Cars window appears when a salesperson selects the <b>Include...</b> choice. It is a secondary window.<br /><br />Our first design of the <b>Include</b> <b>Cars</b> window for appears in <a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGICARS">Figure 111</a>. Although we subsequently changed the design of the window, we have included our original design here to illustrate how we used the iterative design process to improve our product.<br /><br /><a id="FIGICARS" name="FIGICARS"> </a><a href="picture-99?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 99" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P99.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 111. First Design of the Include Cars Window</span><br /><br />To allow a salesperson to specify the filter criteria, we provided several types of controls. For the <b>Model,</b> <b>Make,</b> and <b>Color</b> fields, we used drop-down combination boxes. The drop-down characteristic saves space in the window, the entry field portion of the control allows a salesperson to type the appropriate information, and the list box portion of the control allows a salesperson to select the desired information without having to type it.<br /><br />We used two spin buttons for the <b>Price</b> field, and we provided a ring of values in $1,000 increments. The spin buttons allow the salesperson to specify a minimum and maximum price for the cars to be displayed in the contents views (icons and details).<br /><br />To allow a salesperson to specify the features of the cars to be displayed in the contents views, we used a pair of list boxes with three associated push buttons. The list box on the left contains the features that are available for a particular make, model, and year of car. The list box on the right is where the salesperson creates a list of the features that the customer does and does not want. To create the list in the list box on the right, the salesperson selects a feature from the list box on the left, then selects the <b>With</b> <b>>></b> push button if the customer wants that feature. The salesperson selects the <b>Without</b> <b>>></b> push button if the customer does not want that feature.<br /><br />Features added to the list box on the right appear with a check mark if they were added with the <b>With</b> push button.<br /><br />When a salesperson wants to remove a feature from the list, the salesperson selects the feature in the list box on the right, then selects the <b>Delete</b> push button.<br /><br />At the bottom of the window we placed some standard CUA-defined push buttons: <b>Include,</b> <b>Close,</b> and <b>Help.</b> When a salesperson selects the <b>Include</b> push button, the window containing the contents view of the car lot displays all of the cars that match the criteria specified in the Include Cars window, and the Include Cars window remains open.<br /><br />The <b>Close</b> push button closes the Include Cars window without changing the display in the Icons or Details window of the car lot.<br /><br />A salesperson can select the <b>Help</b> push button to display contextual help for the control or choice that the cursor is on.<br /><br />To assist salespeople in learning to use our product, we provided an information area at the bottom of the Include Cars window. When a salesperson moves the cursor to a control, the information area displays information about how to use that control. For example, when the cursor is on the <b>Available</b> list box, the information area displays a message that says something like this:<br /><br /><samp>Select</samp> <samp>a</samp> <samp>feature</samp> <samp>from</samp> <samp>this</samp> <samp>list.</samp><br /><samp>Then</samp> <samp>use</samp> <b>With</b> <b>>></b> <samp>or</samp> <b>Without</b> <b>>></b> <samp>to</samp> <samp>add</samp> <samp>the</samp> <samp>feature</samp> <samp>to</samp> <samp>the</samp> <b>Desired</b> <samp>list.</samp> 5408 <br />During a usability test, we discovered that the <b>Available</b> and <b>Desired</b> list boxes and the <b>With</b> <b>>></b> and <b>Without</b> <b>>></b> push buttons didn't make sense to our users. Consequently we redesigned the Include Cars window to make it easier to understand and to reduce the number of decisions that salespeople had to make. In particular, we added two fields that contain the features customers ask for most often.<a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGICARS2"> Figure 112</a> shows the redesigned Include Cars window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGICARS2" name="FIGICARS2"> </a><a href="picture-100?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 100" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P100.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 112. New Version of the Include Cars Window</span><br /><br />To alleviate the confusion that resulted when salespeople had to transfer a feature from one control to another, we used check boxes and radio buttons instead of the list boxes. The check boxes are appropriate for most of the options because the salespeople can easily understand the implications of checking an option or not--that is, a salesperson realizes that checking the <b>Air</b> <b>conditioning</b> choice means that the customer wants air conditioning, and not checking it means that the customer does not want air conditioning. For the <b>Transmission</b> choices, however, check boxes were not appropriate because a car must have some kind of transmission. Therefore, we used radio buttons so that a salesperson has to select which kind of transmission the car should have. To accommodate customers who will accept either kind of transmission, we provided a <b>No</b> <b>preference</b> choice.<br /><a id="HDRSORTCAR" name="HDRSORTCAR"><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">The</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Window</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">for</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">the</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Sorting</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Feature</i>: We named the sorting feature <b>Sort...,</b></a> aptly enough. The <b>Sort...</b> choice is a routing choice that appears in the pull-down menu from the <b>View</b> choice on the menu bar of the car lot object. The Sort Cars window appears when a salesperson selects the <b>Sort...</b> choice. It is a secondary window.<br /><br />A salesperson can select the <b>Sort...</b> choice to specify the order in which the cars should appear in the details view of the car lot object. We used drop-down lists to display the names of the sorting categories so that a salesperson would not have to remember the names of the appropriate sorting values. The values correspond to the column headings shown in the details view.<br /><br />We designed two alternatives for the Sort Cars window. In the first version, we used radio buttons and text as the mechanism for specifying the sort order. <a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGOSD">Figure 113</a> shows this version.<br /><br /><a id="FIGOSD" name="FIGOSD"> </a><a href="picture-101?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 101" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P101.GIF" /></a><br /><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 113. Version 1 of the Sort Cars Window. In this version of the window design, we used radio buttons as the mechanism for specifying the sort order.</span><br /><br />In the second version, we used value sets containing graphics that depict the sort order.<a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGSDIALOG"> Figure 114</a> shows this version.<br /><br />The push buttons in both versions operate much like the push buttons in the Include Cars window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSDIALOG" name="FIGSDIALOG"> </a><a href="picture-102?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 102" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P102.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 114. Version 2 of the Sort Cars Window. In this version of the window design, we used value sets as the mechanism for specifying the sort order.</span><br /><br />It is not uncommon for designers to produce more than one proposed solution to a design problem. Usability testing is the only way to determine which design is superior.<br /><br />When the salesperson selects the <b>Sort</b> push button the details view of the car lot object is sorted as shown in <a href="1.6.3.4.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGSORTV">Figure 115</a>. The sort order is indicated in the status area.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSORTV" name="FIGSORTV"> </a><a href="picture-103?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 103" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P103.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 115. Sorted Details View of the Car Lot Object. The sort order is indicated in the status area.</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">The</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Window</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">for</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">the</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Map</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">View</i>: The map view is a pictorial display of the dealership's physical car lot. The view contains drawings of the showroom and the parking places in the car lot. Car icons in the parking places indicate where the corresponding cars are parked.<br /><br />Car lot attendants are the primary users of this view of the car lot. As the lot attendants move cars into and out of the lot, they update the information displayed in this view. However, salespeople use the map view to find out the location of cars that customers want to test drive. Furthermore, a salesperson can drag a car icon to the showroom. By doing so, the salesperson signals a lot attendant to bring the car to the showroom so that a customer can take it for a test drive. When a sale is closed, the salesperson drags the car icon to the service building so that the service manager can schedule the pre-delivery prep work for the car.<br /><br />Other dealership workers can also use the map view. Sales managers can analyze sales patterns by using the map view. If the map view were tied to the sales database, the sales managers might be able to learn, for example, that cars parked in the first two rows of the lot sell more quickly than cars parked at the back of the lot. The map view can also be used to take a physical inventory of the cars in stock.<br /><br /><a id="FIGMAPVW" name="FIGMAPVW"> </a><a href="picture-104?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 104" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P104.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 116. Window for the Map View of the Car Lot Object. The map view represents the dealership's physical car lot.</span><br /><br /></pre> 5409 5410 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 5416 5417 5418 <hr /> 5419 5420 5421 5422 5423 <h4>1.6.3.4.3 Windows for the 1741 5424 Customer Object</h4> 1742 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A salesperson needs to be able to enter, view, and work with the customer<br />information, so we decided to display these groups of information in two<br />sections of a notebook control, one for general information and one for<br />financial information. The notebook control was the obvious choice<br />because the information can be grouped easily and because the design of<br />the notebook control can be helpful in controlling access to certain<br />information. For example, if we wanted to restrict access to a customer's<br />financial information, we could include security measures that allow only<br />the salesperson and the finance manager to have access to that section of<br />the notebook.<a 1743 href="1.6.3.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPIWIN1"> Figure 117</a> shows the first page of the general information<br /> section of the customer object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1744 name="FIGPIWIN1" id="FIGPIWIN1"> </a><a href="picture-105?mode=zoom"><img 1745 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P105.GIF" 1746 alt="PICTURE 105" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 117. Window for the Customer Object. A notebook control with<br />divider tabs displays information about a customer. The<br />divider tabs, labeled <b>General</b> and <b>Financial,</b> indicate the<br /> major groups of information.<br /><br /><br />The general information section of the notebook has four pages. On the<br />first page we provided entry fields for most of the information because<br />entering the information is the only way to acquire the information. For<br />the <b>Name,</b> <b>City,</b> <b>Zip,</b> <b>Home,</b> and <b>Work</b> fields, we used single-line entry<br /> fields. For the <b>Street</b> field we used a multiple-line entry field. We<br /> made the entry fields large enough to display a typical customer's<br /> information, so we did not provide scroll bars.<br /><br /><br />We provided a drop-down combination box for the <b>State</b> field. The<br /> drop-down combination box allows a salesperson either to type in the<br /> two-letter abbreviation for the state or to scroll through and select from<br /> a list of all of the abbreviations.<br /><br /><br />Because most of a car dealership's customers live in the vicinity of the<br />dealership, we pre-filled some of the entry fields with the values most<br />likely to appear in them. For example, because our dealership is in North<br />Carolina, we pre-filled the <b>State</b> field with NC, and we pre-filled the<br /> <b>Home</b> and <b>Work</b> fields with the area code for the area where the dealership<br /> is located. Of course the salesperson can changes these values.<br /><br /><br />Each field has a field prompt, and some fields are grouped with a group<br />heading. For example, the <b>Street,</b> <b>City,</b> <b>State,</b> and <b>Zip</b> fields are grouped<br /> under the <b>Address</b> group heading, and the <b>Home</b> and <b>Work</b> fields are grouped<br /> under the <b>Telephone</b> group heading.<br /><br /><br />A salesperson can move the cursor from one entry field to the next by<br />pressing the Tab key or by moving the pointer and clicking the mouse<br />button.<br /><br /><br />The second page of the general information section of the notebook looks<br />like this:<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1747 name="FIGPIWIN2" id="FIGPIWIN2"> </a><a href="picture-106?mode=zoom"><img 1748 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P106.GIF" 1749 alt="PICTURE 106" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 118. Customer Window, Page 2<br /><br /><br />Our product automatically calculates the value for the <b>Age</b> field, which is<br /> a read-only field, by reading the values the salesperson enters into the<br /> <b>Date</b> <b>of</b> <b>birth</b> field. Descriptive text appears to the right of the <b>Date</b> <b>of</b><br /><b>birth</b> field to let the salesperson know the correct format for the date of<br /> birth information.<br /><br /><br />Some of the customer information has inherent characteristics that we<br />could use to help verify whether the salesperson has entered appropriate<br />values. For example, state information must be two alphabetic characters,<br />and the identification number must be nine numeric characters. When a<br />salesperson enters a value for one of these pieces of information, our<br />product checks the entered information to ensure that it has the correct<br />characteristics. If it does not, the product alerts the salesperson.<br /><br /><br />We considered two methods for alerting a salesperson. First we considered<br />changing the background color or contrast of the entry field as soon as<br />the salesperson enters an inappropriate value. Then we considered<br />displaying a message window that describes the problem and provides<br />controls that allow the salesperson to correct the problem from within the<br />message window. For example, if a salesperson enters fewer than nine<br />digits for the identification number or enters alphabetic characters<br />instead of numbers, our product would display a message like this:<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1750 name="FIGAMESS" id="FIGAMESS"> </a><a href="picture-107?mode=zoom"><img 1751 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P107.GIF" 1752 alt="PICTURE 107" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 119. Message Window<br /><br /><br />We decided the first method might be too subtle for our intended users, so<br />we settled on the message window.<br /><br /><br />The third and fourth pages of the general information section contain<br />settings choices that pertain to the customer object itself rather than to<br />the customer that the object represents. The pages are similar to the<br />page shown in <a 1753 href="1.4.5.1.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSETFIG">Figure 34 in topic 1.4.5.1.3</a>. We placed these pages behind<br /> the other pages in the section because a salesperson will use the customer<br /> object information less often than the customer information found on the<br /> first two pages.<br /></pre> 1754 <hr /> 1755 <h4>1.6.3.4.4 Windows for the 5425 5426 5427 5428 5429 5430 5431 5432 5433 5434 <pre width="80">A salesperson needs to be able to enter, view, and work with the customer information, so we decided to display these groups of information in two sections of a notebook control, one for general information and one for financial information. The notebook control was the obvious choice because the information can be grouped easily and because the design of the notebook control can be helpful in controlling access to certain information. For example, if we wanted to restrict access to a customer's financial information, we could include security measures that allow only the salesperson and the finance manager to have access to that section of the notebook.<a href="1.6.3.4.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGPIWIN1"> Figure 117</a> shows the first page of the general information section of the customer object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGPIWIN1" name="FIGPIWIN1"> </a><a href="picture-105?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 105" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P105.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 117. Window for the Customer Object. A notebook control with divider tabs displays information about a customer. The divider tabs, labeled </span><b style="font-style: italic;">General</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> and </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Financial,</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> indicate the major groups of information.</span><br /><br />The general information section of the notebook has four pages. On the first page we provided entry fields for most of the information because entering the information is the only way to acquire the information. For the <b>Name,</b> <b>City,</b> <b>Zip,</b> <b>Home,</b> and <b>Work</b> fields, we used single-line entry fields. For the <b>Street</b> field we used a multiple-line entry field. We made the entry fields large enough to display a typical customer's information, so we did not provide scroll bars.<br /><br />We provided a drop-down combination box for the <b>State</b> field. The drop-down combination box allows a salesperson either to type in the two-letter abbreviation for the state or to scroll through and select from a list of all of the abbreviations.<br /><br />Because most of a car dealership's customers live in the vicinity of the dealership, we pre-filled some of the entry fields with the values most likely to appear in them. For example, because our dealership is in North Carolina, we pre-filled the <b>State</b> field with NC, and we pre-filled the <b>Home</b> and <b>Work</b> fields with the area code for the area where the dealership is located. Of course the salesperson can changes these values.<br /><br />Each field has a field prompt, and some fields are grouped with a group heading. For example, the <b>Street,</b> <b>City,</b> <b>State,</b> and <b>Zip</b> fields are grouped under the <b>Address</b> group heading, and the <b>Home</b> and <b>Work</b> fields are grouped under the <b>Telephone</b> group heading.<br /><br />A salesperson can move the cursor from one entry field to the next by pressing the Tab key or by moving the pointer and clicking the mouse button.<br /><br />The second page of the general information section of the notebook looks like this:<br /><br /><a id="FIGPIWIN2" name="FIGPIWIN2"> </a><a href="picture-106?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 106" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P106.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 118. Customer Window, Page 2</span><br /><br />Our product automatically calculates the value for the <b>Age</b> field, which is a read-only field, by reading the values the salesperson enters into the <b>Date</b> <b>of</b> <b>birth</b> field. Descriptive text appears to the right of the <b>Date</b> <b>of</b> <b>birth</b> field to let the salesperson know the correct format for the date of birth information.<br /><br />Some of the customer information has inherent characteristics that we could use to help verify whether the salesperson has entered appropriate values. For example, state information must be two alphabetic characters, and the identification number must be nine numeric characters. When a salesperson enters a value for one of these pieces of information, our product checks the entered information to ensure that it has the correct characteristics. If it does not, the product alerts the salesperson.<br /><br />We considered two methods for alerting a salesperson. First we considered changing the background color or contrast of the entry field as soon as the salesperson enters an inappropriate value. Then we considered displaying a message window that describes the problem and provides controls that allow the salesperson to correct the problem from within the message window. For example, if a salesperson enters fewer than nine digits for the identification number or enters alphabetic characters instead of numbers, our product would display a message like this:<br /><br /><a id="FIGAMESS" name="FIGAMESS"> </a><a href="picture-107?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 107" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P107.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 119. Message Window</span><br /><br />We decided the first method might be too subtle for our intended users, so we settled on the message window.<br /><br />The third and fourth pages of the general information section contain settings choices that pertain to the customer object itself rather than to the customer that the object represents. The pages are similar to the page shown in <a href="1.4.5.1.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSETFIG">Figure 34 in topic 1.4.5.1.3</a>. We placed these pages behind the other pages in the section because a salesperson will use the customer object information less often than the customer information found on the first two pages.<br /><br /></pre> 5435 5436 5437 5438 5439 5440 5441 5442 5443 5444 <hr /> 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 <h4>1.6.3.4.4 Windows for the 1756 5450 Worksheet Object</h4> 1757 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The worksheet object is the most important because it is where all of the<br />elements of the sale come together: the customer, the car, and the money.<br />However, if we had tried to display all of the information about the car,<br />customer, and money at once, a salesperson would have had difficulty<br />reading and working with the information. We used a notebook control to<br />organize the information into sections that are meaningful to a<br />salesperson and that reflect the tasks the salesperson wants to<br />accomplish. A salesperson can get to any section of the notebook by<br />selecting the tab for that section.<br /><br /><br /><a 1758 href="1.6.3.4.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKMBS">Figure 120</a> shows the worksheet window. The page displayed is the actual<br /> worksheet that the salesperson uses when negotiating the sale. Several of<br /> the entry fields are filled in automatically when the salesperson<br /> transfers the customer and car information to the worksheet. For example,<br /> the <b>Vehicle,</b> <b>VIN,</b> and <b>Retail</b> fields are filled according to information<br /> from the car object. The values for some of the other fields are based on<br /> defaults suggested by the dealership. For example, the <b>License</b> <b>fee</b> field<br /> automatically displays the standard licensing fee for the state in which<br /> the dealership is located. If a customer plans to license the vehicle in<br /> a different state, the salesperson can type a different value into the<br /> field or can change the amount to $0. The <b>Net</b> <b>price</b> and <b>Balance</b> fields<br /> are read-only fields. The values they contain are calculated according to<br /> the values contained in other fields.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1759 name="FIGWORKMBS" id="FIGWORKMBS"> </a><a href="picture-108?mode=zoom"><img 1760 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P108.GIF" 1761 alt="PICTURE 108" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 120. Worksheet Window<br /></pre> 1762 <hr /> 1763 <h2>1.6.4 Using the Product</h2> 1764 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />After completing the research and planning and the design of the product,<br />we built a prototype and tested the product. As stated earlier, a<br />discussion of prototyping and usability testing is beyond the scope of<br />this book. However, we can provide a brief description of how the<br />completed product is used.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1765 <ul> 1766 <li><a href="1.6.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">1.6.4.1 1767 Scenario of Use</a></li> 1768 </ul> 1769 <pre></pre> 1770 <hr /> 1771 <h3>1.6.4.1 Scenario of Use</h3> 1772 <pre></pre> 1773 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Sean O'Toole walks into an automobile dealership looking for a particular<br />kind of car. Mary Walsh, the dealership's top salesperson greets Sean and<br />asks him what kind of car he is interested in.<br /><br /><br />"Do you have any Hutton ProSport cars?" Sean asks.<br /><br /><br />"Just a minute. Let me check," Mary responds.<br /><br /><br />Mary leads Sean to her desk, where she has a workstation. She moves her<br />pointing device, a mouse, until the pointer is on an icon that represents<br />the dealership's new car lot. She double-clicks on the icon and a window<br />appears on her display screen. The window contains many icons that<br />resemble cars. The color of each icon is the same as the color of the car<br />it represents.<br /><br /><br />"This window shows me all the new cars we have in stock," she explains.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1774 name="FIGFIGUNIQ38" id="FIGFIGUNIQ38"> </a><a 1775 href="picture-109?mode=zoom"><img 1776 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P109.GIF" 1777 alt="PICTURE 109" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 121. Icons View of the New Car Lot Object. By double-clicking on<br />an icon labeled New Car Lot, Mary opens this window.<br /><br /><br />She moves the pointer to the <b>View</b> choice on the menu bar and clicks on the<br /> choice. A pull-down menu appears. Then she moves the pointer to the<br /> <b>Details</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu and clicks on the choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1778 name="FIGFIGUNIQ39" id="FIGFIGUNIQ39"> </a><a 1779 href="picture-110?mode=zoom"><img 1780 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P110.GIF" 1781 alt="PICTURE 110" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 122. Changing from One View to Another. Mary changes from an icons<br />view to a details view by clicking on the <b>Details</b> choice in<br /> the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br /><br />The appearance of the contents of the window changes immediately.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1782 name="FIGFIGUNIQ40" id="FIGFIGUNIQ40"> </a><a 1783 href="picture-111?mode=zoom"><img 1784 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P111.GIF" 1785 alt="PICTURE 111" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 123. Details View of the New Car Lot Object. Mary changes to this<br />view by clicking on the <b>Details</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br /><br />The title of the window is now <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Details</b>, and the window<br /> contains smaller icons along with columns of text that indicate each car's<br /> year, make, model, price, prospective buyers, and vehicle identification<br /> number (VIN).<br /><br /><br />"Let's see if we have the model you're looking for."<br /><br /><br />Mary moves the pointer to the <b>View</b> choice on the menu bar again. When the<br /> pull-down menu appears, she clicks on the <b>Include...</b> choice. Another<br /> window appears on the screen.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1786 name="FIGFIGUNIQ41" id="FIGFIGUNIQ41"> </a><a 1787 href="picture-112?mode=zoom"><img 1788 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P112.GIF" 1789 alt="PICTURE 112" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 124. Include Cars Window for the New Car Lot. Mary opens this<br />window by clicking on the <b>Include...</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu.<br /> By using the controls in this window, Mary can indicate which<br /> cars she wants to see in the New Car Lot window.<br /><br /><br />Its title is <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Include</b> <b>Cars,</b> and it contains controls that<br /> allow Mary to specify which kinds of cars are to be included in the view<br /> of the new car lot.<br /><br /><br />"Let's see. You wanted a Hutton ProSport, right? This year's model?" Mary<br />asks.<br /><br /><br />"Yes."<br /><br /><br />"What color and what kinds of options do you want?"<br /><br /><br />"Red, and I want air conditioning and cruise control. I don't care<br />whether the transmission is automatic or manual."<br /><br /><br />"How much do you want to spend?"<br /><br /><br />"Well, I don't want a plain car, but I don't need the top-of-the-line<br />option package either."<br /><br /><br />After filling in the entry fields of the drop-down combination boxes and<br />checking the appropriate options, Mary adjusts the price field based on<br />her knowledge of the range of prices for the ProSport model. Then she<br />clicks on the <b>Include</b> push button. The <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Include</b> <b>Cars</b> window<br /> closes, and the contents of the <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Details</b> window change.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1790 name="FIGFIGUNIQ42" id="FIGFIGUNIQ42"> </a><a 1791 href="picture-113?mode=zoom"><img 1792 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P113.GIF" 1793 alt="PICTURE 113" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 125. Filtered Details View of the Car Lot. The details view of the<br />car lot now displays only the cars that matched the criteria<br />that Mary specified in the <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Include</b> <b>Cars</b> window.<br /><br /><br />"Does that ProSport have a four-cylinder engine?" Sean asks.<br /><br /><br />"Let's see," Mary replies.<br /><br /><br />Mary moves the pointer to the icon for the car Sean indicated and<br />double-clicks. A window displaying general information about the car<br />appears. Mary reads the information and says, "No, it has a six-cylinder<br />engine. Let's try another one." She double-clicks on the system-menu<br />symbol and the window closes.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1794 name="FIGFIGUNIQ43" id="FIGFIGUNIQ43"> </a><a 1795 href="picture-114?mode=zoom"><img 1796 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P114.GIF" 1797 alt="PICTURE 114" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 126. General Information View of a Car Object. Mary opens this<br />window by double-clicking on a car icon.<br /><br /><br />"Here's another red one. Let's see if it has a more economical engine."<br /><br /><br />She double-clicks on the icon of a different car. When the window<br />appears, she sees that the car does have a four-cylinder engine.<br /><br /><br />"Would you like to see the car? Maybe take it for a test drive?" Mary<br />asks.<br /><br /><br />"Yes," Sean replies, "but where is it? I didn't see any ProSports on the<br />lot when I came in."<br /><br /><br />"No problem," Mary says. "I'll find it on the map."<br /><br /><br />Mary moves the pointer to the title bar of the new car lot window and<br />clicks on it to make the window active. Then she moves the pointer to the<br />icon of the car Sean is interested in. She clicks on it to select it.<br />Then she selects the <b>Map</b> choice from the <b>View</b> menu. The content of the<br /> window changes to show a map of the car dealership. The car Sean is<br /> interested in is highlighted.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1798 name="FIGFIGUNIQ44" id="FIGFIGUNIQ44"> </a><a 1799 href="picture-115?mode=zoom"><img 1800 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P115.GIF" 1801 alt="PICTURE 115" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 127. Map View of the New Car Lot. Mary displays this view by<br />clicking on the <b>Map</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br /><br />"There it is," Mary says. She drags the icon to the showroom. "The lot<br />attendant will bring the car around front. You can take it for a test<br />drive."<br /><br /><br />After driving the car, Sean returns and tells Mary he would like to buy<br />it.<br /><br /><br />"Have you purchased a car here before?" Mary asks.<br /><br /><br />"No, I haven't."<br /><br /><br />"Then I need to get some information from you."<br /><br /><br />They return to Mary's workstation, where Mary double-clicks on an icon<br />labeled <b>Customer</b> <b>List.</b> A window appears. It contains icons representing<br /> the dealership's customers. Mary moves the pointer to an existing<br /> customer icon and clicks to select the icon. Then she moves the pointer<br /> to the <b>Edit</b> menu and clicks. A pull-down menu appears. Mary moves the<br /> pointer to the <b>Create</b> choice and clicks on it. A newly created customer<br /> object is stored on the clipboard.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1802 name="FIGCUSTFG2" id="FIGCUSTFG2"> </a><a href="picture-116?mode=zoom"><img 1803 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P116.GIF" 1804 alt="PICTURE 116" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 128. The Customer List Window. To create a new customer object<br />from the Customer List window, Mary clicks on the <b>Create</b><br />choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br />Then Mary clicks on the <b>Paste</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu. The newly created<br /> customer object on the clipboard is placed in the customer list. Mary<br /> moves the pointer to the icon of the new customer object and<br /> double-clicks. A window opens containing a notebook. The <b>Name</b> field is<br /> highlighted and it contains the words "New customer."<br /><br /><br />"How do you spell your last name?" Mary asks.<br /><br /><br />"O-T-O-O-L-E." Mary types as Sean speaks, and Sean's name replaces the<br />words "New customer." Mary presses the Tab key to move the cursor to the<br /><b>Street</b> field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1805 name="FIGFIGUNIQ45" id="FIGFIGUNIQ45"> </a><a 1806 href="picture-117?mode=zoom"><img 1807 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P117.GIF" 1808 alt="PICTURE 117" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 129. Window for the Customer Object<br /><br /><br />Sean tells her his address and telephone number and Mary fills in the rest<br />of the entry fields.<br /><br /><br />"I think you forgot to change the state. I live in Virginia, not North<br />Carolina," Sean says.<br /><br /><br />"Okay, I'll change it."<br /><br /><br />While pressing and holding the Alt key, Mary presses the T key, which is<br />the mnemonic for the <b>State</b> field. The cursor moves to the <b>State</b> field.<br /> She types in the abbreviation for Virginia. Once the customer information<br /> is entered correctly, Mary moves the pointer to an icon labeled <b>Worksheet</b><br /><b>List.</b> She double-clicks on the icon and a window opens. The worksheet<br /> list contains all of the worksheets in progress for various customers, and<br /> the window opens to an icons view.<br /><br /><br />To create a new worksheet object, Mary could follow the same procedure she<br />used to create a new customer object--that is, by indirect manipulation.<br />However, she chooses to create a new worksheet by direct manipulation.<br />She double-clicks on a folder icon labeled <b>New</b> <b>Things.</b> The folder opens.<br /> It contains templates of standard objects in the car dealership product.<br /> <a 1809 href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGNEWFG">Figure 130</a> shows an icons view of the <b>New</b> <b>Things</b> folder.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1810 name="FIGNEWFG" id="FIGNEWFG"> </a><a href="picture-118?mode=zoom"><img 1811 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P118.GIF" 1812 alt="PICTURE 118" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 130. Templates of Standard Objects. The <b>New</b> <b>Things</b> folder contains<br /> templates of standard objects in the car dealership product.<br /> Mary can use these templates to create new customer objects,<br /> worksheet objects, and folder objects. A lot attendant can<br /> use the <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> template to create car objects when new<br /> inventory arrives at the dealership.<br /><br /><br />Mary moves the pointer to the icon labeled <b>New</b> <b>Worksheet</b> and drags a new<br /> worksheet from the template to the <b>Worksheet</b> <b>List</b> window. When she<br /> releases the mouse button, the newly created worksheet remains in the<br /> <b>Worksheet</b> <b>List</b> window, and the worksheet template remains in the <b>New</b><br /><b>Things</b> window.<a 1813 href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCRDRAG"> Figure 131</a> illustrates creating by direct manipulation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1814 name="FIGCRDRAG" id="FIGCRDRAG"> </a><a href="picture-119?mode=zoom"><img 1815 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P119.GIF" 1816 alt="PICTURE 119" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 131. Creating a New Object by Direct Manipulation. Mary opens a<br />folder containing templates of objects. She places the<br />pointer on the <b>New</b> <b>Worksheet</b> object and creates a new<br /> worksheet by dragging a copy of the worksheet from the<br /> template to the <b>Worksheet</b> <b>List</b> window.<br /><br /><br />Mary drags Sean's customer icon to the new worksheet icon. A copy of<br />Sean's customer information is transferred to the worksheet object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1817 name="FIGDATATRF" id="FIGDATATRF"> </a><a href="picture-120?mode=zoom"><img 1818 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P120.GIF" 1819 alt="PICTURE 120" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 132. Transferring Data by Direct Manipulation. Mary copies<br />information from Sean's customer object to Sean's worksheet<br />object by dragging the customer icon to the worksheet icon.<br /><br /><br />Mary does the same with the icon of the car Sean is interested in. The<br />car information is copied and transferred to the worksheet object.<br /><br /><br />Mary opens Sean's worksheet object by double-clicking on its icon. A<br />window appears containing a notebook with several tabbed divider pages.<br />The top page is a worksheet form that has some fields already filled in<br />according to the information that Mary transferred to the worksheet<br />object. The entire set of Sean's customer information is in a section of<br />the notebook called <b>Customer</b> <b>information.</b> Likewise, the information that<br /> Mary transferred from the car object appears together in a section called<br /> <b>Car</b> <b>information.</b> 1820 <br /><br /><br /><br /><a name="FIGWORKSUM" id="FIGWORKSUM"> </a><a 1821 href="picture-121?mode=zoom"><img 1822 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P121.GIF" 1823 alt="PICTURE 121" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 133. Sean's Worksheet. Mary opens Sean's worksheet by<br />double-clicking on the worksheet's icon. Some of the entry<br />fields are already filled in when Mary opens the worksheet.<br />For example, the fields for the customer's name and the<br />salesperson's name, and the fields for the vehicle<br />information, are already filled in because Mary transferred<br />that information to the worksheet by dragging the customer and<br />car icons to the worksheet icon. Other fields are read-only<br />fields that the product calculates automatically. For<br />example, the <b>Net</b> <b>price</b> field is calculated according to the<br /> figure automatically displayed in the <b>Retail</b> field and the<br /> figures Mary enters in the <b>Rebate,</b> <b>Trade-in,</b> <b>Allowance,</b> and<br /> <b>License</b> <b>fee</b> fields.<br /><br /><br />"Do you want to trade in a car?" Mary asks.<br /><br /><br />"I'm not sure. I'd like to see the difference in financing if I do," Sean<br />replies.<br /><br /><br />"Okay, I'll make two worksheets, one with a trade-in and one without.<br />Then you can decide which is better for you."<br /><br /><br />Mary selects Sean's worksheet, then copies it and pastes the copy into the<br />worksheet list.<br /><br /><br />Mary and Sean then discuss the prices and conditions of the sale. As they<br />agree on prices, Mary enters them into the appropriate fields on the<br />worksheets. Sean decides he will trade in his old car. The worksheets<br />automatically calculate the net price and balance due. Finally, Mary<br />says, "You're a tough bargainer. I need to ask my sales manager, Peter<br />Liczinski, if he will agree to these figures."<br /><br /><br />Mary drags the icon for the worksheet containing the trade-in information<br />to an icon that represents an electronic mail out-basket. The icon is<br />labeled <b>To</b> <b>Liczinski.</b> 1824 <br /><br /><br /><br /><a name="FIGFIGUNIQ46" id="FIGFIGUNIQ46"> </a><a 1825 href="picture-122?mode=zoom"><img 1826 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P122.GIF" 1827 alt="PICTURE 122" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 134. Using Electronic Mail to Send Information. Mary sends a<br />worksheet to the sales manager by dragging the worksheet's<br />icon to an icon that represents an electronic mail out-basket.<br /><br /><br />"He'll look over the figures we've proposed and let us know if we've got a<br />deal. Would you like some coffee while we wait?"<br /><br /><br />After a few minutes, Mary's terminal makes a sound and her electronic mail<br />in-basket flashes to indicate that a message has arrived. Mary<br />double-clicks on the in-basket and a window opens showing the contents of<br />the in-basket. Mary double-clicks on the icon of the single message in<br />the in-basket, and another window opens. It contains a message from Peter<br />Liczinski saying that he accepts the figures she proposed.<br /><br /><br />"It seems that you've got yourself a car, Sean," Mary says. "I'll send<br />this information to the finance manager, Rachel Green. She'll help you<br />finish the transaction. In the meantime, I'll get your car ready for<br />you."<br /><br /><br />Mary drags the icon for the completed worksheet to another out-basket icon<br />labeled <b>To</b> <b>Green.</b> Then she takes Sean to Rachel's office. After<br /> introducing them, she returns to her terminal to tidy up the windows.<br /><br /><br />She wants to get rid of the unused worksheet, so she drags the icon to an<br />icon labeled <b>Delete</b> <b>Folder.</b> The delete folder will delete the worksheet<br /> for her.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 1828 name="FIGFIGUNIQ47" id="FIGFIGUNIQ47"> </a><a 1829 href="picture-123?mode=zoom"><img 1830 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P123.GIF" 1831 alt="PICTURE 123" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 135. Deleting Unwanted Information. Mary deletes the unused<br />worksheet by dragging its icon to the delete folder icon.<br /><br /><br />Then she double-clicks on the system menu symbol on Sean's worksheet<br />window, on Sean's customer window, on the worksheet list window, on the<br />customer list window, and on the car window. Each window closes in turn<br />because closing is the default action for double-clicking on the system<br />menu symbol. Then, with her workplace in order, Mary goes to prepare<br />Sean's new car.<br /></pre> 1832 <pre></pre> 1833 <hr /> 1834 <h1><a name="HDRPART2" id="HDRPART2">2.0 Part 2. CUA 5451 5452 5453 5454 5455 5456 5457 5458 5459 5460 <pre width="80">The worksheet object is the most important because it is where all of the elements of the sale come together: the customer, the car, and the money. However, if we had tried to display all of the information about the car, customer, and money at once, a salesperson would have had difficulty reading and working with the information. We used a notebook control to organize the information into sections that are meaningful to a salesperson and that reflect the tasks the salesperson wants to accomplish. A salesperson can get to any section of the notebook by selecting the tab for that section.<br /><br /><a href="1.6.3.4.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGWORKMBS">Figure 120</a> shows the worksheet window. The page displayed is the actual worksheet that the salesperson uses when negotiating the sale. Several of the entry fields are filled in automatically when the salesperson transfers the customer and car information to the worksheet. For example, the <b>Vehicle,</b> <b>VIN,</b> and <b>Retail</b> fields are filled according to information from the car object. The values for some of the other fields are based on defaults suggested by the dealership. For example, the <b>License</b> <b>fee</b> field automatically displays the standard licensing fee for the state in which the dealership is located. If a customer plans to license the vehicle in a different state, the salesperson can type a different value into the field or can change the amount to $0. The <b>Net</b> <b>price</b> and <b>Balance</b> fields are read-only fields. The values they contain are calculated according to the values contained in other fields.<br /><br /><a id="FIGWORKMBS" name="FIGWORKMBS"> </a><a href="picture-108?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 108" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P108.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 120. Worksheet Window</span><br /><br /></pre> 5461 5462 5463 5464 5465 5466 5467 5468 5469 5470 <hr /> 5471 5472 5473 5474 5475 <h2>1.6.4 Using the Product</h2> 5476 5477 5478 5479 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 5485 <pre width="80"><br /><br />After completing the research and planning and the design of the product, we built a prototype and tested the product. As stated earlier, a discussion of prototyping and usability testing is beyond the scope of this book. However, we can provide a brief description of how the completed product is used.<br /></pre> 5486 5487 5488 5489 5490 5491 5492 <pre></pre> 5493 5494 5495 5496 5497 5498 5499 5500 5501 5502 <hr /> 5503 5504 5505 5506 5507 <h3>1.6.4.1 Scenario of Use</h3> 5508 5509 5510 5511 5512 5513 5514 5515 5516 5517 5518 5519 <pre width="80">Sean O'Toole walks into an automobile dealership looking for a particular kind of car. Mary Walsh, the dealership's top salesperson greets Sean and asks him what kind of car he is interested in.<br /><br />"Do you have any Hutton ProSport cars?" Sean asks.<br /><br />"Just a minute. Let me check," Mary responds.<br /><br />Mary leads Sean to her desk, where she has a workstation. She moves her pointing device, a mouse, until the pointer is on an icon that represents the dealership's new car lot. She double-clicks on the icon and a window appears on her display screen. The window contains many icons that resemble cars. The color of each icon is the same as the color of the car it represents.<br /><br />"This window shows me all the new cars we have in stock," she explains.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ38" name="FIGFIGUNIQ38"> </a><a href="picture-109?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 109" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P109.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 121. Icons View of the New Car Lot Object. By double-clicking on an icon labeled New Car Lot, Mary opens this window.</span><br /><br />She moves the pointer to the <b>View</b> choice on the menu bar and clicks on the choice. A pull-down menu appears. Then she moves the pointer to the <b>Details</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu and clicks on the choice.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ39" name="FIGFIGUNIQ39"> </a><a href="picture-110?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 110" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P110.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 122. Changing from One View to Another. Mary changes from an icons view to a details view by clicking on the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Details</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> choice in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">View</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> menu.</span><br /><br />The appearance of the contents of the window changes immediately.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ40" name="FIGFIGUNIQ40"> </a><a href="picture-111?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 111" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P111.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 123. Details View of the New Car Lot Object. Mary changes to this view by clicking on the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Details</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> choice in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">View</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> menu.</span><br /><br />The title of the window is now <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Details</b>, and the window contains smaller icons along with columns of text that indicate each car's year, make, model, price, prospective buyers, and vehicle identification number (VIN).<br /><br />"Let's see if we have the model you're looking for."<br /><br />Mary moves the pointer to the <b>View</b> choice on the menu bar again. When the pull-down menu appears, she clicks on the <b>Include...</b> choice. Another window appears on the screen.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ41" name="FIGFIGUNIQ41"> </a><a href="picture-112?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 112" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P112.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 124. Include Cars Window for the New Car Lot. Mary opens this window by clicking on the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Include...</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> choice in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">View</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> menu. By using the controls in this window, Mary can indicate which cars she wants to see in the New Car Lot window.</span><br /><br />Its title is <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Include</b> <b>Cars,</b> and it contains controls that allow Mary to specify which kinds of cars are to be included in the view of the new car lot.<br /><br />"Let's see. You wanted a Hutton ProSport, right? This year's model?" Mary<br />asks.<br /><br />"Yes."<br /><br />"What color and what kinds of options do you want?"<br /><br />"Red, and I want air conditioning and cruise control. I don't care whether the transmission is automatic or manual."<br /><br />"How much do you want to spend?"<br /><br />"Well, I don't want a plain car, but I don't need the top-of-the-line option package either."<br /><br />After filling in the entry fields of the drop-down combination boxes and checking the appropriate options, Mary adjusts the price field based on her knowledge of the range of prices for the ProSport model. Then she clicks on the <b>Include</b> push button. The <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Include</b> <b>Cars</b> window closes, and the contents of the <b>New</b> <b>Car</b> <b>Lot</b> <b>-</b> <b>Details</b> window change.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ42" name="FIGFIGUNIQ42"> </a><a href="picture-113?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 113" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P113.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 125. Filtered Details View of the Car Lot. The details view of the car lot now displays only the cars that matched the criteria that Mary specified in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">New</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Car</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Lot</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">-</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Include</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Cars</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> window.</span><br /><br />"Does that ProSport have a four-cylinder engine?" Sean asks.<br /><br />"Let's see," Mary replies.<br /><br />Mary moves the pointer to the icon for the car Sean indicated and double-clicks. A window displaying general information about the car appears. Mary reads the information and says, "No, it has a six-cylinder engine. Let's try another one." She double-clicks on the system-menu symbol and the window closes.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ43" name="FIGFIGUNIQ43"> </a><a href="picture-114?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 114" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P114.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 126. General Information View of a Car Object. Mary opens this window by double-clicking on a car icon.</span><br /><br />"Here's another red one. Let's see if it has a more economical engine."<br /><br />She double-clicks on the icon of a different car. When the window appears, she sees that the car does have a four-cylinder engine.<br /><br />"Would you like to see the car? Maybe take it for a test drive?" Mary asks.<br /><br />"Yes," Sean replies, "but where is it? I didn't see any ProSports on the lot when I came in."<br /><br />"No problem," Mary says. "I'll find it on the map."<br /><br />Mary moves the pointer to the title bar of the new car lot window and clicks on it to make the window active. Then she moves the pointer to the icon of the car Sean is interested in. She clicks on it to select it. Then she selects the <b>Map</b> choice from the <b>View</b> menu. The content of the window changes to show a map of the car dealership. The car Sean is interested in is highlighted.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ44" name="FIGFIGUNIQ44"> </a><a href="picture-115?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 115" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P115.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 127. Map View of the New Car Lot. Mary displays this view by clicking on the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Map</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> choice in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">View</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> menu.</span><br /><br />"There it is," Mary says. She drags the icon to the showroom. "The lot attendant will bring the car around front. You can take it for a test drive."<br /><br />After driving the car, Sean returns and tells Mary he would like to buy it.<br /><br />"Have you purchased a car here before?" Mary asks.<br /><br />"No, I haven't."<br /><br />"Then I need to get some information from you."<br /><br />They return to Mary's workstation, where Mary double-clicks on an icon labeled <b>Customer</b> <b>List.</b> A window appears. It contains icons representing the dealership's customers. Mary moves the pointer to an existing customer icon and clicks to select the icon. Then she moves the pointer to the <b>Edit</b> menu and clicks. A pull-down menu appears. Mary moves the pointer to the <b>Create</b> choice and clicks on it. A newly created customer object is stored on the clipboard.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCUSTFG2" name="FIGCUSTFG2"> </a><a href="picture-116?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 116" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P116.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 128. The Customer List Window. To create a new customer object from the Customer List window, Mary clicks on the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Create</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> choice in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Edit</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> menu.</span><br /><br />Then Mary clicks on the <b>Paste</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu. The newly created customer object on the clipboard is placed in the customer list. Mary moves the pointer to the icon of the new customer object and double-clicks. A window opens containing a notebook. The <b>Name</b> field is highlighted and it contains the words "New customer."<br /><br />"How do you spell your last name?" Mary asks.<br /><br />"O-T-O-O-L-E." Mary types as Sean speaks, and Sean's name replaces the words "New customer." Mary presses the Tab key to move the cursor to the <b>Street</b> field.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ45" name="FIGFIGUNIQ45"> </a><a href="picture-117?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 117" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P117.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 129. Window for the Customer Object</span><br /><br />Sean tells her his address and telephone number and Mary fills in the rest of the entry fields.<br /><br />"I think you forgot to change the state. I live in Virginia, not North Carolina," Sean says.<br /><br />"Okay, I'll change it."<br /><br />While pressing and holding the Alt key, Mary presses the T key, which is the mnemonic for the <b>State</b> field. The cursor moves to the <b>State</b> field. She types in the abbreviation for Virginia. Once the customer information is entered correctly, Mary moves the pointer to an icon labeled <b>Worksheet</b> <b>List.</b> She double-clicks on the icon and a window opens. The worksheet list contains all of the worksheets in progress for various customers, and the window opens to an icons view.<br /><br />To create a new worksheet object, Mary could follow the same procedure she used to create a new customer object--that is, by indirect manipulation. However, she chooses to create a new worksheet by direct manipulation. She double-clicks on a folder icon labeled <b>New</b> <b>Things.</b> The folder opens. It contains templates of standard objects in the car dealership product. <a href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGNEWFG">Figure 130</a> shows an icons view of the <b>New</b> <b>Things</b> folder.<br /><br /><a id="FIGNEWFG" name="FIGNEWFG"> </a><a href="picture-118?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 118" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P118.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 130. Templates of Standard Objects. The </span><b style="font-style: italic;">New</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Things</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> folder contains templates of standard objects in the car dealership product. Mary can use these templates to create new customer objects, worksheet objects, and folder objects. A lot attendant can use the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">New</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Car</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> template to create car objects when new inventory arrives at the dealership.</span><br /><br />Mary moves the pointer to the icon labeled <b>New</b> <b>Worksheet</b> and drags a new worksheet from the template to the <b>Worksheet</b> <b>List</b> window. When she releases the mouse button, the newly created worksheet remains in the <b>Worksheet</b> <b>List</b> window, and the worksheet template remains in the <b>New</b> <b>Things</b> window.<a href="1.6.4.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCRDRAG"> Figure 131</a> illustrates creating by direct manipulation.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCRDRAG" name="FIGCRDRAG"> </a><a href="picture-119?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 119" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P119.GIF" /></a><br /><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 131. Creating a New Object by Direct Manipulation. Mary opens a folder containing templates of objects. She places the pointer on the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">New</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Worksheet</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> object and creates a new worksheet by dragging a copy of the worksheet from the template to the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Worksheet</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">List</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> window.</span><br /><br />Mary drags Sean's customer icon to the new worksheet icon. A copy of Sean's customer information is transferred to the worksheet object.<br /><br /><a id="FIGDATATRF" name="FIGDATATRF"> </a><a href="picture-120?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 120" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P120.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 132. Transferring Data by Direct Manipulation. Mary copies information from Sean's customer object to Sean's worksheet object by dragging the customer icon to the worksheet icon.</span><br /><br />Mary does the same with the icon of the car Sean is interested in. The car information is copied and transferred to the worksheet object.<br /><br />Mary opens Sean's worksheet object by double-clicking on its icon. A window appears containing a notebook with several tabbed divider pages. The top page is a worksheet form that has some fields already filled in according to the information that Mary transferred to the worksheet object. The entire set of Sean's customer information is in a section of the notebook called <b>Customer</b> <b>information.</b> Likewise, the information that Mary transferred from the car object appears together in a section called <b>Car</b> <b>information.</b> 5520 <br /><a id="FIGWORKSUM" name="FIGWORKSUM"> </a><a href="picture-121?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 121" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P121.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 133. Sean's Worksheet. Mary opens Sean's worksheet by double-clicking on the worksheet's icon. Some of the entry fields are already filled in when Mary opens the worksheet. For example, the fields for the customer's name and the</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">salesperson's name, and the fields for the vehicle information, are already filled in because Mary transferred that information to the worksheet by dragging the customer and car icons to the worksheet icon. Other fields are read-only</span><br style="font-style: italic;" /><span style="font-style: italic;">fields that the product calculates automatically. For example, the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Net</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">price</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> field is calculated according to the figure automatically displayed in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Retail</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> field and the figures Mary enters in the </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Rebate,</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Trade-in,</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Allowance,</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> and </span><b style="font-style: italic;">License</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">fee</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> fields.</span><br /><br />"Do you want to trade in a car?" Mary asks.<br /><br />"I'm not sure. I'd like to see the difference in financing if I do," Sean replies.<br /><br />"Okay, I'll make two worksheets, one with a trade-in and one without. Then you can decide which is better for you."<br /><br />Mary selects Sean's worksheet, then copies it and pastes the copy into the worksheet list.<br /><br />Mary and Sean then discuss the prices and conditions of the sale. As they agree on prices, Mary enters them into the appropriate fields on the worksheets. Sean decides he will trade in his old car. The worksheets automatically calculate the net price and balance due. Finally, Mary says, "You're a tough bargainer. I need to ask my sales manager, Peter Liczinski, if he will agree to these figures."<br /><br />Mary drags the icon for the worksheet containing the trade-in information to an icon that represents an electronic mail out-basket. The icon is labeled <b>To</b> <b>Liczinski.</b> 5521 <br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ46" name="FIGFIGUNIQ46"> </a><a href="picture-122?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 122" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P122.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 134. Using Electronic Mail to Send Information. Mary sends a worksheet to the sales manager by dragging the worksheet's icon to an icon that represents an electronic mail out-basket.</span><br /><br />"He'll look over the figures we've proposed and let us know if we've got a deal. Would you like some coffee while we wait?"<br /><br />After a few minutes, Mary's terminal makes a sound and her electronic mail in-basket flashes to indicate that a message has arrived. Mary double-clicks on the in-basket and a window opens showing the contents of the in-basket. Mary double-clicks on the icon of the single message in the in-basket, and another window opens. It contains a message from Peter Liczinski saying that he accepts the figures she proposed.<br /><br />"It seems that you've got yourself a car, Sean," Mary says. "I'll send this information to the finance manager, Rachel Green. She'll help you finish the transaction. In the meantime, I'll get your car ready for you."<br /><br />Mary drags the icon for the completed worksheet to another out-basket icon labeled <b>To</b> <b>Green.</b> Then she takes Sean to Rachel's office. After introducing them, she returns to her terminal to tidy up the windows.<br /><br />She wants to get rid of the unused worksheet, so she drags the icon to an icon labeled <b>Delete</b> <b>Folder.</b> The delete folder will delete the worksheet for her.<br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ47" name="FIGFIGUNIQ47"> </a><a href="picture-123?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 123" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P123.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 135. Deleting Unwanted Information. Mary deletes the unused worksheet by dragging its icon to the delete folder icon.</span><br /><br />Then she double-clicks on the system menu symbol on Sean's worksheet window, on Sean's customer window, on the worksheet list window, on the customer list window, and on the car window. Each window closes in turn because closing is the default action for double-clicking on the system menu symbol. Then, with her workplace in order, Mary goes to prepare Sean's new car.<br /></pre> 5522 5523 5524 5525 5526 5527 5528 5529 5530 5531 <pre></pre> 5532 5533 5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 5539 5540 5541 <hr /> 5542 5543 5544 5545 5546 <h1><a id="HDRPART2" name="HDRPART2">2.0 Part 5547 2. CUA 1835 5548 Reference</a></h1> 1836 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1837 <ul> 1838 <li><a href="2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1 1839 Chapter 7. Overview</a></li> 1840 <li><a href="2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2 1841 Chapter 8. Common User Access Interface 1842 Components</a></li> 1843 </ul> 1844 <pre></pre> 1845 <hr /> 1846 <h1>2.1 Chapter 7. Overview</h1> 1847 <pre></pre> 1848 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This overview provides a brief description of the major components covered<br />by the CUA guidelines. It summarizes many of the topics covered in<br />"Common User Access Interface Components" beginning on page <a 1849 href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS">2.2</a> and<br /> provides comparative information about when and how components are used.<br /> If you are unfamiliar with the CUA guidelines and terminology, specific<br /> related topics are identified to help you determine which topics should be<br /> referred to for more detailed product-development information.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1850 <pre></pre> 1851 <hr /> 1852 <h2>2.1.2 Types of Objects</h2> 1853 <pre></pre> 1854 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Objects are the focus of a user's attention. The CUA guidelines define<br />three types of objects: device, data, and container.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines do not define particular types of data objects.<br />However, guidelines are provided for interacting with data objects, such<br />as text objects.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines define four types of container objects that other<br />objects can be placed into: folders, delete folders, work areas, and<br />workplaces.<br /><br /><br />Each product defines the objects and properties necessary for that<br />product, and the object-specific actions that can be applied only to those<br />objects. The CUA guidelines define how the objects are displayed on the<br />desktop or workplace, such as in windows, and how the actions are<br />presented to a user, such as in menus.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 1855 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.40?DT=19921204095534#HDRFOLDER">"Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.40</a><br />° <a 1856 href="2.2.28?DT=19921204095534#HDROUTPUT">"Device (Object)" in topic 2.2.28</a><br />° <a 1857 href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a><br />° <a 1858 href="2.2.26?DT=19921204095534#HDRWBASKET">"Delete Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.26</a><br />° <a 1859 href="2.2.136?DT=19921204095534#HDRWRKAREA">"Work Area (Object)" in topic 2.2.136</a><br />° <a 1860 href="2.2.137?DT=19921204095534#HDRWORKPLA">"Workplace" in topic 2.2.137</a> 1861 <br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1862 <pre></pre> 1863 <hr /> 1864 <h2>2.1.3 Elements of the User 5549 5550 5551 5552 5553 5554 5555 <pre></pre> 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 5565 <hr /> 5566 5567 5568 5569 5570 <h1>2.1 Chapter 7. Overview</h1> 5571 5572 5573 5574 5575 5576 5577 5578 5579 5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 <pre width="80"><br />This overview provides a brief description of the major components covered by the CUA guidelines. It summarizes many of the topics covered in "Common User Access Interface Components" beginning on page <a href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS">2.2</a> and provides comparative information about when and how components are used. If you are unfamiliar with the CUA guidelines and terminology, specific related topics are identified to help you determine which topics should be referred to for more detailed product-development information.<br /></pre> 5585 5586 5587 5588 5589 5590 5591 <pre></pre> 5592 5593 5594 5595 5596 5597 5598 5599 5600 5601 <hr /> 5602 5603 5604 5605 5606 <h2>2.1.2 Types of Objects</h2> 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 <pre width="80"><br />Objects are the focus of a user's attention. The CUA guidelines define three types of objects: device, data, and container.<br /><br />The CUA guidelines do not define particular types of data objects. However, guidelines are provided for interacting with data objects, such as text objects.<br /><br />The CUA guidelines define four types of container objects that other objects can be placed into: folders, delete folders, work areas, and workplaces.<br /><br />Each product defines the objects and properties necessary for that product, and the object-specific actions that can be applied only to those objects. The CUA guidelines define how the objects are displayed on the desktop or workplace, such as in windows, and how the actions are presented to a user, such as in menus.<br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 5619 <br />° <a href="2.2.40?DT=19921204095534#HDRFOLDER">"Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.40</a><br />° <a href="2.2.28?DT=19921204095534#HDROUTPUT">"Device (Object)" in topic 2.2.28</a><br />° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a><br />° <a href="2.2.26?DT=19921204095534#HDRWBASKET">"Delete Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.26</a><br />° <a href="2.2.136?DT=19921204095534#HDRWRKAREA">"Work Area (Object)" in topic 2.2.136</a><br />° <a href="2.2.137?DT=19921204095534#HDRWORKPLA">"Workplace" in topic 2.2.137</a> 5620 <br /></pre> 5621 5622 5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 5630 5631 5632 <hr /> 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 <h2>2.1.3 Elements of the User 1865 5638 Interface</h2> 1866 <pre></pre> 1867 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Elements of the user interface, as opposed to objects, are unique to the<br />computer environment. User-interface elements provide the means of<br />representing and interacting with user objects on the desktop or<br />workplace. Windows, icons, choices, and controls are examples of<br />user-interface elements that are commonly found in products using the CUA<br />guidelines.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1868 <pre></pre> 1869 <hr /> 1870 <h3>2.1.3.3 Windows</h3> 1871 <pre></pre> 1872 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Windows are used to present views of objects. In an application-oriented<br />operating environment, users typically open a window and then specify the<br />object they wish to interact with. In an object-oriented operating<br />environment, a view of an object is displayed in the window when the<br />window is opened. This is one difference between an application-oriented<br />operating environment and an object-oriented operating environment: users<br />can display views of objects directly without first specifying the<br />application used to display that view. Another key difference is that in<br />an application-oriented operating environment, the same window could be<br />used to display other objects. In an object-oriented operating<br />environment there is a one-to-one relationship between objects and<br />windows. When a window is open on an object, in order to view another<br />object, the object is displayed in a separate window.<br /><br /><br />Windows are also used to present messages, progress indicators, help<br />information, and choices that further clarify actions.<br /><br /><br />In both application-oriented and object-oriented operating environments,<br />multiple windows can be shown on the screen at the same time. If windows<br />overlap, the active window (the window the user is interacting with) is<br />usually placed on top of any overlapping windows. The two basic types of<br />windows are: primary windows and secondary windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1873 <pre></pre> 1874 <hr /> 1875 <h4>2.1.3.3.2 Secondary window</h4> 1876 <pre></pre> 1877 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Secondary windows look very much like primary windows. For example, both<br />have window borders and title bars. The important distinction between<br />primary and secondary windows is based on how they are used. Secondary<br />windows are always associated with a primary window and contain<br />information that is dependent on an object in the primary window.<br />Secondary windows are used, for example, to allow a user to further<br />clarify action requests. Secondary windows are removed when the primary<br />window is closed or minimized, and redisplayed when the primary window is<br />opened or restored. <a 1878 href="2.1.3.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGSECONID">Figure 143</a> shows a typical secondary window.<br /><br /><br /><a 1879 name="FIGSECONID" id="FIGSECONID"><br /></a></pre> 1880 <pre></pre> 1881 <hr /> 1882 <pre><a name="FIGSECONID" id="FIGSECONID"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 1883 href="picture-131?mode=zoom"><img 1884 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P131.GIF" 1885 alt="PICTURE 131" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 1886 <hr /> 1887 <pre>Figure 143. Secondary Window<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 1888 <br /><br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Windows</b><br />° <a 1889 href="2.2.4?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTIONW">"Action Window" in topic 2.2.4</a><br />° <a 1890 href="2.2.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTWIND">"Active Window" in topic 2.2.5</a><br />° <a 1891 href="2.2.48?DT=19921204095534#HDRINACTWI">"Inactive Window" in topic 2.2.48</a><br />° <a 1892 href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a><br />° <a 1893 href="2.2.81?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRIMWIN">"Primary Window" in topic 2.2.81</a><br />° <a 1894 href="2.2.99?DT=19921204095534#HDRSECWIND">"Secondary Window" in topic 2.2.99</a><br />° <a 1895 href="2.2.115?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPLTWIN">"Split Window" in topic 2.2.115</a><br />° <a 1896 href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a><br />° <a 1897 href="2.2.134?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINMENU">"Windows Menu" in topic 2.2.134</a><br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Window</b> <b>Layout</b><br />° <a 1898 href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a><br />° <a 1899 href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#HDRDESCTXT">"Descriptive Text" in topic 2.2.27</a><br />° <a 1900 href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a><br />° <a 1901 href="2.2.42?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPBX">"Group Box" in topic 2.2.42</a><br />° <a 1902 href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a><br />° <a 1903 href="2.2.46?DT=19921204095534#HDRHIDE">"Hide (Choice)" in topic 2.2.46</a><br />° <a 1904 href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a><br />° <a 1905 href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a><br />° <a 1906 href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a><br />° <a 1907 href="2.2.104?DT=19921204095534#HDRSEPARAT">"Separator" in topic 2.2.104</a><br />° <a 1908 href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a><br />° <a 1909 href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a><br />° <a 1910 href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a><br />° <a 1911 href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWT">"Window Title" in topic 2.2.135</a> 1912 </pre> 1913 <ul> 1914 <li><a href="2.1.3.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.3.1 1915 Primary window</a></li> 1916 <li><a href="2.1.3.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.3.2 1917 Secondary window</a></li> 1918 <li><a href="2.1.3.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.3.3 1919 Action Windows</a></li> 1920 <li><a href="2.1.3.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.3.4 1921 Messages</a></li> 1922 <li><a href="2.1.3.3.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.3.5 1923 Progress Indicators</a></li> 1924 </ul> 1925 <pre></pre> 1926 <hr /> 1927 <h4>2.1.3.3.1 Primary window</h4> 1928 <pre></pre> 1929 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A primary window is used to present a view of an object or group of<br />objects when the information displayed about the object or group of<br />objects is not dependent on any other object. A view of an object is<br />typically displayed in a primary window.<br /><br /><br />Object information is presented in the area of the window below the menu<br />bar (<a 1930 href="2.1.3.3.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGPRIMID">Figure 142</a> shows the components of a primary window). A user can<br /> control the size and position of primary windows on the screen.<br /><br /><br /><a 1931 name="FIGPRIMID" id="FIGPRIMID"><br /></a></pre> 1932 <pre></pre> 1933 <hr /> 1934 <pre><a name="FIGPRIMID" id="FIGPRIMID"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 1935 href="picture-130?mode=zoom"><img 1936 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P130.GIF" 1937 alt="PICTURE 130" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 1938 <hr /> 1939 <pre>Figure 142. Primary Window<br /></pre> 1940 <ul> 1941 <li><a href="2.1.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.1 1942 Views of Objects</a></li> 1943 <li><a href="2.1.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.2 1944 Icons</a></li> 1945 <li><a href="2.1.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.3 1946 Windows</a></li> 1947 <li><a href="2.1.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.4 1948 Choices</a></li> 1949 <li><a href="2.1.3.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.5 1950 Controls</a></li> 1951 </ul> 1952 <pre></pre> 1953 <hr /> 1954 <h3>2.1.3.1 Views of Objects</h3> 1955 <pre></pre> 1956 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Opening a window on an object displays a view of the object. An object<br />may have more than one view to allow a user to see other aspects of the<br />same object. The CUA guidelines define four common types of views:<br />composed, contents, settings, and help. The appearance of composed and<br />contents views are object-specific. A user can change the view of an<br />object by selecting another view from a menu. The CUA guidelines<br />recommend that the settings view for an object be displayed using a<br />notebook control and help views be displayed by opening another window.<br /><br /><br />A user can display multiple, simultaneous views of an object in multiple<br />windows by opening the same object multiple times. To see different parts<br />of a view in the same window, a <b>Split</b> choice could be provided to allow a<br /> user to split the window into different sections. In <a 1957 href="2.1.3.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGVIEWID">Figure 138</a> a<br /> contents view and a settings view of the same object are displayed.<br /><br /><br /><a 1958 name="FIGVIEWID" id="FIGVIEWID"><br /></a></pre> 1959 <pre></pre> 1960 <hr /> 1961 <h3><a name="FIGVIEWID" id="FIGVIEWID">2.1.3.2 Icons</a></h3> 1962 <pre></pre> 1963 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><a name="FIGVIEWID" id="FIGVIEWID"><br /><br />In an application-oriented operating environment, a user's first encounter<br />with icons is usually with icons that represent applications. Icons that<br />represent applications appear in containers used to group such objects.<br />Users can manipulate these icons to accomplish tasks such as moving the<br />object to a new container. Also, users can start applications by opening<br />the icon for that application.<br /><br /><br />In OS/2 1.3, for example, icons on the desktop also represent minimized<br />windows of running applications. When a user double-clicks or restores a<br />minimized window's icon, the icon disappears from the desktop and is<br />replaced by an open window.<br /><br /><br />In an object-oriented operating environment, icons represent objects.<br />When a user opens an icon, the icon remains visible but is visually<br />augmented to indicate that it is currently in use. This augmentation, or<br />emphasis, is called in-use emphasis.<br /><br /><br />When a user opens an object, a window is opened to display a view of the<br />object. </a><a 1964 href="2.1.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGMOVEID">Figure 141</a> shows an icon being moved from one container to<br /> another container. It also shows an icon displayed with in-use emphasis<br /> in the container.<br /><br /><br /><a 1965 name="FIGMOVEID" id="FIGMOVEID"><br /></a></pre> 1966 <pre></pre> 1967 <hr /> 1968 <pre><a name="FIGMOVEID" id="FIGMOVEID"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 1969 href="picture-129?mode=zoom"><img 1970 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P129.GIF" 1971 alt="PICTURE 129" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 1972 <hr /> 1973 <pre>Figure 141. Icons<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 1974 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.47?DT=19921204095534#HDRICONS">"Icon" in topic 2.2.47</a> 1975 </pre> 1976 <hr /> 1977 <pre><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-126?mode=zoom"><img 1978 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P126.GIF" 1979 alt="PICTURE 126" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 1980 <hr /> 1981 <pre>Figure 138. Multiple Views of an Object<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 1982 <ul> 1983 <li><a href="2.1.3.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.1.1 1984 Help</a></li> 1985 </ul> 1986 <pre></pre> 1987 <hr /> 1988 <h4>2.1.3.1.1 Help</h4> 1989 <pre></pre> 1990 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />While using a product, a user occasionally requires additional information<br />about choices, fields, or how to proceed with a task. This type of<br />information is displayed when a user requests help.<br /><br /><br />Help can be accessed from the menu bar. The choices in the menu give<br />specific kinds of help information, such as an index of the help topics,<br />or help about the window or task. Help can also be accessed from a push<br />button or a key assigned to contextual help on the indicated item.<br />Contextual help can also be accessed from the pop-up menu of an object.<br /><br /><br /><a 1991 href="2.1.3.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGHMENU">Figure 139</a> shows an example of the help menu.<br /><br /><br /><a 1992 name="FIGHMENU" id="FIGHMENU"><br /></a></pre> 1993 <pre></pre> 1994 <hr /> 1995 <pre><a name="FIGHMENU" id="FIGHMENU"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 1996 href="picture-127?mode=zoom"><img 1997 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P127.GIF" 1998 alt="PICTURE 127" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 1999 <hr /> 2000 <pre>Figure 139. Help Menu<br /><br /><br />Users can get contextual help for a choice or object. Contextual help<br />provides specific help information about the choice or object with respect<br />to its current state. For example, getting contextual help on a choice<br />displayed with unavailable-state emphasis might explain why that choice is<br />currently unavailable and what a user would have to do to select the<br />choice. <a 2001 href="2.1.3.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCHELP">Figure 140</a> shows an example of contextual help for the Make field<br /> in the window.<br /><br /><br /><a 2002 name="FIGCHELP" id="FIGCHELP"><br /></a></pre> 2003 <hr /> 2004 <pre><a name="FIGCHELP" id="FIGCHELP"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2005 href="picture-128?mode=zoom"><img 2006 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P128.GIF" 2007 alt="PICTURE 128" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2008 <hr /> 2009 <pre>Figure 140. Contextual Help<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2010 <br /><br /><b>Providing</b> <b>Help</b> <b>for</b> <b>Users</b><br />° <a 2011 href="2.2.17?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTEXH">"Contextual Help" in topic 2.2.17</a><br />° <a 2012 href="2.2.41?DT=19921204095534#HDRGENHELP">"General Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.41</a><br />° <a 2013 href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a><br />° <a 2014 href="2.2.44?DT=19921204095534#HDRHLPINDX">"Help Index (Choice)" in topic 2.2.44</a><br />° <a 2015 href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a><br />° <a 2016 href="2.2.83?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRODINF">"Product Information (Choice)" in topic 2.2.83</a><br />° <a 2017 href="2.2.121?DT=19921204095534#HDRTUTOR">"Tutorial (Choice)" in topic 2.2.121</a><br />° <a 2018 href="2.2.124?DT=19921204095534#HDRUSHELP">"Using Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.124</a> 2019 </pre> 2020 <ul> 2021 <li><a href="2.1.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.2.1 2022 Creating New Objects</a></li> 2023 </ul> 2024 <pre></pre> 2025 <hr /> 2026 <h3>2.1.2.1 Creating New Objects</h3> 2027 <pre></pre> 2028 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />There are several methods available to a user to create new objects. In<br />an application-oriented environment, new objects are created by opening an<br />application window and either selecting the <b>New</b> choice to create a new<br /> object or by selecting the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice to copy an existing object.<br /><br /><br />The <b>New</b> choice is used to create a new object in the window where <b>New</b> was<br /> selected. The new object is typically of the same class as the existing<br /> object in the window, but unique information can be automatically<br /> generated for it when it is created. This unique information may be<br /> simple, such as a new form number, or it can be more elaborate information<br /> taken from the current context. The newly created object reuses the same<br /> window from which the <b>New</b> choice was selected. The location of the new<br /> object is not determined when the object is created; instead, it is<br /> specified by the user from the <b>Save</b> <b>As</b> window when the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice is<br /> selected or when the window is closed.<br /><br /><br />The <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice is used in an application-oriented environment to<br /> create a new object based on an existing object. When this choice is<br /> selected while working with an existing named object in a window, a copy<br /> of the object is made and the <b>Save</b> <b>As</b> window is displayed to allow the<br /> user to specify a name and location for the new object. The original<br /> object in the window is not affected.<br /><br /><br />Two other choices, <b>Create</b> and <b>Copy,</b> are provided in both<br /> application-oriented and object-oriented environments from menus, or their<br /> function can be provided through direct manipulation. In an<br /> object-oriented environment, new objects are created by finding another<br /> object of the desired type and requesting that a new one either be created<br /> from this object or copied from this object. In an application-oriented<br /> environment, <b>Create</b> and <b>Copy</b> are typically used to create or copy objects<br /> within the window. In an object-oriented environment, <b>Create</b> and <b>Copy</b> can<br /> be used for objects within a window, as well as objects on the workplace.<br /><br /><br />When using menus the <b>Create</b> choice is selected from the <b>Edit</b> menu or from<br /> the pop-up menu of an object. The <b>Create</b> choice uses the clipboard. Like<br /> the <b>New</b> choice, this choice may generate unique information for the new<br /> object. A default name is usually generated for the new object, although<br /> the user could change this name later. The location of the new object is<br /> determined by the user when the <b>Paste</b> choice is selected.<br /><br /><br />Like the <b>Create</b> choice, the <b>Copy</b> choice is selected from the <b>Edit</b> menu or<br /> from the pop-up menu of an object and uses the clipboard. The new object<br /> can have the same name as the original object if unique names are not<br /> required. The location of the new object is determined by the user when<br /> the <b>Paste</b> choice is selected.<br /><br /><br />When using direct manipulation, the default operation when a user drags an<br />object can be either a move or a copy. A user can override a default<br />operation, for example, to request that an object be copied instead of<br />moved by pressing a mouse button. In addition, an object may have a<br />create-on-drag setting that allows the user to specify whether when<br />overriding the move default a create operation should be performed instead<br />of the <b>Copy.</b> When this setting is on, the appearance of the object's icon<br /> is changed to reflect that the create operation will occur instead of the<br /> copy.<br /><br /><br />In many situations it may be convenient for users to create a folder<br />containing sample objects from which users can create new objects. Each<br />object in this folder would have the create-on-drag setting on to allow<br />the user to easily create new objects by dragging objects out of this<br />folder (using the override key) to the desired location.<br /><br /><br />In addition to creating new objects a user can create a reflection of an<br />object. Objects that support reflections will have cascaded choices off<br />the <b>Create</b> choice to specify that a reflection is desired. In addition, a<br /> user could create a reflection during direct manipulation.<br /></pre> 2029 <pre></pre> 2030 <ul> 2031 <li><a href="2.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.1 2032 Operating Environment</a></li> 2033 <li><a href="2.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.2 2034 Types of Objects</a></li> 2035 <li><a href="2.1.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3 2036 Elements of the User Interface</a></li> 2037 <li><a href="2.1.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.4 2038 User Interaction</a></li> 2039 <li><a href="2.1.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.5 2040 Cues</a></li> 2041 </ul> 2042 <pre></pre> 2043 <hr /> 2044 <h2>2.1.1 Operating Environment</h2> 2045 <pre></pre> 2046 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines support the development of products that are to be used<br />in application-oriented operating environments and object-oriented<br />operating environments. The operating environment establishes a basic<br />framework of function that products can utilize. The environment<br />typically includes such basic functions as management functions for<br />windows, files, printers, and configuration options.<br /><br /><br />An application-oriented environment is one in which users must first start<br />applications in order to work with objects. The CUA graphical model,<br />first published in 1989, defines a graphical user interface for products<br />that are designed to be used in an application-oriented operating<br />environment. The IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*) 1.3 operating system is<br />an example of an application-oriented operating environment.<br /><br /><br />In an application-oriented environment, groups of available applications<br />are initially represented in application-manager windows as small graphic<br />images called icons. A user can start an application which then displays<br />its own window (or group of windows) from which a user performs tasks<br />related to the application. While an application is running, a user can<br />reduce the size of its window to a minimum size and position it in a handy<br />place on the screen, which is typically referred to as the desktop. The<br />desktop is the screen in an application-oriented operating environment.<br /><a 2047 href="2.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGAPPOE">Figure 136</a> is an example of an application-oriented operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><a 2048 name="FIGAPPOE" id="FIGAPPOE"><br /></a></pre> 2049 <pre></pre> 2050 <hr /> 2051 <pre><a name="FIGAPPOE" id="FIGAPPOE"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2052 href="picture-124?mode=zoom"><img 2053 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P124.GIF" 2054 alt="PICTURE 124" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2055 <hr /> 2056 <pre>Figure 136. Example of an Application-Oriented Environment<br /><br /><br />In OS/2 1.3 a minimized window appears as an icon on the desktop but<br />represents a running application. A user can manipulate running<br />applications on the desktop, but cannot place objects on the desktop.<br />Data transfer within and between applications is typically accomplished by<br />using the <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> and <b>Paste</b> menu choices associated with a<br /> system-provided clipboard.<br /><br /><br />Also introduced in 1989 was the workplace extension to the graphical<br />model. The desktop in an object-oriented environment is called the<br />workplace. The workplace extension defines an object-oriented user<br />interface to support the development of products that are to be used in an<br />object-oriented operating environment. In this environment, icons<br />represent objects rather than running applications. A user no longer must<br />start an application before selecting the object to work with. Instead,<br />the user opens the object which automatically causes a window to be<br />displayed that contains a view of the object. In addition to choosing<br />actions from menus, a user can drag objects--represented as icons on the<br />workplace--to perform some operations. For example, a text object can be<br />printed by dragging its icon to the icon of a printer object. <a 2057 href="2.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGRV036">Figure 137</a><br />is an example of the workplace in an object-oriented operating<br />environment.<br /><br /><br /><a 2058 name="FIGRV036" id="FIGRV036"><br /></a></pre> 2059 <hr /> 2060 <pre><a name="FIGRV036" id="FIGRV036"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2061 href="picture-125?mode=zoom"><img 2062 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P125.GIF" 2063 alt="PICTURE 125" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2064 <hr /> 2065 <pre>Figure 137. Example of an Object-Oriented Environment<br /><br /><br />An object, such as a document, often contains other objects, such as<br />graphs, charts, and tables. The workplace extension defines techniques<br />that allow a user to perform actions on an object as a whole and on<br />objects that are contained within other objects.<br /><br /><br />Because interfaces are evolving to support an object-oriented environment,<br />the CUA guidelines in this book emphasize object-orientation. However,<br />many of the CUA guidelines apply equally to both application-oriented and<br />object-oriented environments. For example, dragging techniques and pop-up<br />menus can be supported within and between product windows on the workplace<br />even if they are not supported on the desktop of an application-oriented<br />environment. By defining interface features useful in both<br />application-oriented and object-oriented environments, the CUA guidelines<br />allow you to position your products advantageously for the evolution to an<br />object-oriented interface while maintaining compatibility with many<br />aspects of an existing application-oriented interface.<br /></pre> 2066 <hr /> 2067 <h4>2.1.3.3.3 Action Windows</h4> 2068 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Some actions require additional information from the user before they can<br />be completed. In these situations, a choice, such as on a menu or push<br />button, leads to a secondary window containing additional choices that<br />clarify the action requested. Such a window is called an action window.<br /><br /><br />The <b>Open</b> and <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choices are examples of menu choices that result in<br /> an action window. <a 2069 href="2.1.3.3.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSAVEA">Figure 144 </a>shows an example of the action window<br /> displayed as a result of selecting the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><a 2070 name="FIGSAVEA" id="FIGSAVEA"><br /></a></pre> 2071 <hr /> 2072 <pre><a name="FIGSAVEA" id="FIGSAVEA"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2073 href="picture-132?mode=zoom"><img 2074 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P132.GIF" 2075 alt="PICTURE 132" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2076 <hr /> 2077 <pre>Figure 144. Save As Action Window<br /></pre> 2078 <hr /> 2079 <h4>2.1.3.3.4 Messages</h4> 2080 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Messages are feedback to the user that occur because of a condition the<br />operating environment or an object in the operating environment has<br />detected. Messages tell a user that something has happened because of a<br />request or that something undesirable or unexpected could occur. The CUA<br />guidelines define three types of messages: information message, warning<br />message, and action message. These three message types are based on the<br />user actions that can be performed, not on the severity of the message.<br /><br /><br />Messages should clearly indicate why the message appeared and what actions<br />can be taken. You can always provide access to help information in any<br />kind of message to further aid a user in determining the problem or to<br />learn how to correct the situation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Information</i> <i>Message</i>: An information message appears when a situation<br /> occurs that a user can do nothing about. The only actions a user can take<br /> when an information message is displayed is to dismiss the message window<br /> or request help information. <a 2081 href="2.1.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGINFMSG">Figure 145</a> shows an example of an<br /> information message.<br /><br /><br /><a 2082 name="FIGINFMSG" id="FIGINFMSG"><br /></a></pre> 2083 <hr /> 2084 <pre><a name="FIGINFMSG" id="FIGINFMSG"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2085 href="picture-133?mode=zoom"><img 2086 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P133.GIF" 2087 alt="PICTURE 133" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2088 <hr /> 2089 <pre>Figure 145. Information Message<br /><br /><br />Information regarding the normal completion of a process can be displayed<br />in an information area instead of as an information message.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Warning</i> <i>Message</i>: Use a warning message when a user can continue the<br /> original request without modification, though a situation exists that the<br /> user should be aware of. Other actions may be provided to allow a user to<br /> modify the original request or cancel it. <a 2090 href="2.1.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGWARMSG">Figure 146</a> shows an example of<br /> a warning message.<br /><br /><br /><a 2091 name="FIGWARMSG" id="FIGWARMSG"><br /></a></pre> 2092 <hr /> 2093 <pre><a name="FIGWARMSG" id="FIGWARMSG"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2094 href="picture-134?mode=zoom"><img 2095 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P134.GIF" 2096 alt="PICTURE 134" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2097 <hr /> 2098 <pre>Figure 146. Warning Message<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Action</i> <i>Message</i>: Use an action message when a situation arises in which<br /> the user must take some explicit action to correct the situation or choose<br /> an alternative action.<br /><br /><br />When an action message is displayed, a user can choose to retry the<br />request after correcting the situation, choose some other action that<br />redirects the request, or cancel the request. An action message can also<br />contain controls, such as an entry field, that allow a user to attempt to<br />correct data that is not valid or not correct.<a 2099 href="2.1.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGACTMSG"> Figure 147</a> and <a 2100 href="2.1.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGACTMSG2">Figure 148</a><br />show examples of action messages.<br /><br /><br /><a 2101 name="FIGACTMSG" id="FIGACTMSG"><br /></a></pre> 2102 <hr /> 2103 <pre><a name="FIGACTMSG" id="FIGACTMSG"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2104 href="picture-135?mode=zoom"><img 2105 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P135.GIF" 2106 alt="PICTURE 135" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2107 <hr /> 2108 <pre>Figure 147. Action Message - Immediate User Attention Not Required<br /><br /><br /><a 2109 name="FIGACTMSG2" id="FIGACTMSG2"><br /></a></pre> 2110 <hr /> 2111 <pre><a name="FIGACTMSG2" id="FIGACTMSG2"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2112 href="picture-136?mode=zoom"><img 2113 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P136.GIF" 2114 alt="PICTURE 136" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2115 <hr /> 2116 <pre>Figure 148. Action Message - Immediate User Attention Required<br /></pre> 2117 <hr /> 2118 <h4>2.1.3.3.5 Progress Indicators</h4> 2119 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />When a user requests a lengthy process, a progress indicator is used to<br />indicate that the process is running and to provide information about the<br />status of the process, such as how far it is from completion. A progress<br />indicator is continually updated to reflect the latest status. Progress<br />indicators may be displayed in the window where the process was requested<br />or in a separate window. When displayed in a separate window, the window<br />may also contain information that may otherwise have been displayed in an<br />information message.<br /><br /><br /><a 2120 href="2.1.3.3.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGPROIND">Figure 149</a> shows an example of a progress indicator in a window.<br /><br /><br /><a 2121 name="FIGPROIND" id="FIGPROIND"><br /></a></pre> 2122 <hr /> 2123 <pre><a name="FIGPROIND" id="FIGPROIND"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2124 href="picture-137?mode=zoom"><img 2125 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P137.GIF" 2126 alt="PICTURE 137" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2127 <hr /> 2128 <pre>Figure 149. Progress Indicator in a Window<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2129 <br /><br /><b>Informing</b> <b>a</b> <b>User</b><br />° <a 2130 href="2.2.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTIONM">"Action Message" in topic 2.2.3</a><br />° <a 2131 href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a><br />° <a 2132 href="2.2.51?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFMS">"Information Message" in topic 2.2.51</a><br />° <a 2133 href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a><br />° <a 2134 href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a><br />° <a 2135 href="2.2.127?DT=19921204095534#HDRWARNMSG">"Warning Message" in topic 2.2.127</a> 2136 </pre> 2137 <hr /> 2138 <h3>2.1.3.4 Choices</h3> 2139 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Choices are used to act on indicated objects. There are three types of<br />choices:<br /><br /><br />° Action choices for performing actions on objects<br /><br /><br />° Routing choices that lead to another menu or window from which<br />additional selections can be made<br /><br /><br />° Settings choices to specify properties of objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2140 href="2.1.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGOCHOICE">Figure 150</a> shows some examples of choices.<br /><br /><br /><a 2141 name="FIGOCHOICE" id="FIGOCHOICE"><br /></a></pre> 2142 <hr /> 2143 <pre><a name="FIGOCHOICE" id="FIGOCHOICE"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2144 href="picture-138?mode=zoom"><img 2145 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P138.GIF" 2146 alt="PICTURE 138" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2147 <hr /> 2148 <pre>Figure 150. Choices<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2149 <br /><br /><b>Action</b> <b>Choices</b><br />° <a 2150 href="2.2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTION">"Action Choice (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.2</a><br />° <a 2151 href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a><br />° <a 2152 href="2.2.13?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLOSE">"Close (Choice)" in topic 2.2.13</a><br />° <a 2153 href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a><br />° <a 2154 href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a><br />° <a 2155 href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a><br />° <a 2156 href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a><br />° <a 2157 href="2.2.58?DT=19921204095534#HDRMAXIMIZ">"Maximize (Choice)" in topic 2.2.58</a><br />° <a 2158 href="2.2.62?DT=19921204095534#HDRMINIMIZ">"Minimize (Choice)" in topic 2.2.62</a><br />° <a 2159 href="2.2.65?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOVE">"Move (Choice)" in topic 2.2.65</a><br />° <a 2160 href="2.2.67?DT=19921204095534#HDRNEW">"New (Choice)" in topic 2.2.67</a><br />° <a 2161 href="2.2.71?DT=19921204095534#HDROPENAS">"Open As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.71</a><br />° <a 2162 href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a><br />° <a 2163 href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a><br />° <a 2164 href="2.2.91?DT=19921204095534#HDRREFRESH">"Refresh and Refresh Now (Choice)" in topic 2.2.91</a><br />° <a 2165 href="2.2.92?DT=19921204095534#HDRRESTORE">"Restore (Choice)" in topic 2.2.92</a><br />° <a 2166 href="2.2.94?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVE">"Save (Choice)" in topic 2.2.94</a><br />° <a 2167 href="2.2.100?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELALLC">"Select All and Deselect All (Choice)" in topic 2.2.100</a><br />° <a 2168 href="2.2.109?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIZE">"Size (Choice)" in topic 2.2.109</a><br />° <a 2169 href="2.2.114?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPLIT">"Split (Choice)" in topic 2.2.114</a><br />° <a 2170 href="2.2.123?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNDO">"Undo and Redo (Choice)" in topic 2.2.123</a><br />° <a 2171 href="2.2.132?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLIST">"Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)" in topic 2.2.132</a><br />° <a 2172 href="2.2.131?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLST1">"Window List (Choice in System Menu)" in topic 2.2.131</a><br /><b>Routing</b> <b>Choices</b><br />° <a 2173 href="2.2.38?DT=19921204095534#HDRFIND">"Find (Choice)" in topic 2.2.38</a><br />° <a 2174 href="2.2.49?DT=19921204095534#HDRINCLUDE">"Include (Choice)" in topic 2.2.49</a><br />° <a 2175 href="2.2.70?DT=19921204095534#HDROPEN">"Open (Choice)" in topic 2.2.70</a><br />° <a 2176 href="2.2.71?DT=19921204095534#HDROPENAS">"Open As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.71</a><br />° <a 2177 href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a><br />° <a 2178 href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a><br />° <a 2179 href="2.2.96?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVEAS">"Save As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.96</a><br />° <a 2180 href="2.2.111?DT=19921204095534#HDRSORT">"Sort (Choice)" in topic 2.2.111</a> 2181 <br /><br /><b>Settings</b> <b>Choices</b><br />° <a 2182 href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a><br />° <a 2183 href="2.2.107?DT=19921204095534#HDRSFMENUS">"Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)" in topic 2.2.107</a> 2184 </pre> 2185 <hr /> 2186 <h3><a name="HDRCONTHD" id="HDRCONTHD">2.1.3.5 2187 Controls</a></h3> 2188 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Controls are components of the interface that allow a user to select<br />choices and to type information. Menus are one type of control that is<br />commonly used to contain choices. Other controls are used, for example,<br />in settings views of objects and in windows that clarify an action<br />request. However, controls may also be used in any view of an object.<br /><br /><br />Some controls can perform the same function, but are better suited for<br />certain tasks or presentation schemes. For example, list boxes,<br />combination boxes, drop-down list boxes, and drop-down combination boxes<br />all perform similar functions. However, some of these controls allow a<br />user to type values not provided by the control or require less space in a<br />window. Because there are many different ways of allowing a user to<br />interact with the interface, the CUA guidelines provide different controls<br />to allow a user to work most efficiently.<a 2189 href="2.1.3.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTRID"> Figure 151</a> shows some examples<br /> of controls.<br /><br /><br /><a 2190 name="FIGCONTRID" id="FIGCONTRID"><br /></a></pre> 2191 <hr /> 2192 <pre><a name="FIGCONTRID" id="FIGCONTRID"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2193 href="picture-139?mode=zoom"><img 2194 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P139.GIF" 2195 alt="PICTURE 139" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2196 <hr /> 2197 <pre>Figure 151. Examples of Some Controls Defined by the CUA Guidelines<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2198 <br /><br /><b>Using</b> <b>Controls</b><br />° <a 2199 href="2.2.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHECKBX">"Check Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.9</a><br />° <a 2200 href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a><br />° <a 2201 href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a><br />° <a 2202 href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a><br />° <a 2203 href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#HDRDEFACT">"Default Action" in topic 2.2.24</a><br />° <a 2204 href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a><br />° <a 2205 href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a><br />° <a 2206 href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a><br />° <a 2207 href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a><br />° <a 2208 href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a><br />° <a 2209 href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a><br />° <a 2210 href="2.2.88?DT=19921204095534#HDRRADIOB">"Radio Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.88</a><br />° <a 2211 href="2.2.110?DT=19921204095534#HDRSLIDERS">"Slider (Control)" in topic 2.2.110</a><br />° <a 2212 href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a><br />° <a 2213 href="2.2.125?DT=19921204095534#HDRVALUSET">"Value Set (Control)" in topic 2.2.125</a> 2214 <br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 2215 <ul> 2216 <li><a href="2.1.3.5.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.3.5.1 2217 Menus</a></li> 2218 </ul> 2219 <pre></pre> 2220 <hr /> 2221 <h4>2.1.3.5.1 Menus</h4> 2222 <pre></pre> 2223 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The types of menus defined by the CUA guidelines are:<br /><br /><br />° Menu bars<br />° Pull-down menus<br />° Cascaded menus<br />° Pop-up menus.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Menu</i> <i>Bar</i> <i>and</i> <i>Pull-Down</i> <i>Menu</i> <i>Contents</i>: Menu bars are displayed at the top<br /> of a window, under the window title. Each choice in the menu bar is a<br /> routing choice that leads to an associated pull-down menu. Choices in the<br /> pull-down menus are typically action or routing choices that relate to the<br /> contents of the window, though settings choices are also allowed. When<br /> routing choices are used, they lead to other windows or to cascaded menus.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines define the common contents of the <b>File,</b> <b>Selected,</b> <b>Edit,</b><br /><b>View,</b> <b>Options,</b> <b>Windows,</b> and <b>Help</b> menu bar choices. In addition, the<br /> contents of the system menu pull-down are also defined. The system menu<br /> is shown as a graphical choice in the top, left-hand corner of the window,<br /> in the title bar.<br /><br /><br />The menu bar choices and contents defined in this version of the CUA<br />guidelines provide an evolutionary step towards an object-oriented menu<br />scheme. Below is a brief description of these choices, along with a<br />description of the system menu and its contents.<a 2224 href="2.1.3.5.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGAPPMEN"> Figure 152</a> and<br /> <a 2225 href="2.1.3.5.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGOBJMEN">Figure 153</a> show the layout of the predefined menu choices on the menu bar<br /> and title bar and also shows the predefined choices within those pull-down<br /> menus. Additional information about these choices is found in "Common<br /> User Access Interface Components" beginning on page<a 2226 href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS"> 2.2</a>.<br /><br /><br /><b>File</b> The <b>File</b> menu contains choices that affect the overall<br /> object in the window. There are two types of <b>File</b> menus:<br /> application-oriented and object-oriented.<br /><br /><br /><b>Application-Oriented</b><br />Contains choices that affect the underlying<br />object presented in the application-oriented<br />window. For example, the <b>File</b> menu could<br /> contain an <b>Open</b> choice that allows a user to<br /> change the object presented in the window.<br /> <b>Object-Oriented</b><br />Contains choices that affect the underlying<br />object presented in the object-oriented window.<br />The label of this choice is the class name of<br />the underlying object that is shown in the<br />window. For example, in the <b>File</b> pull-down<br /> menu for a window displaying a view of a<br /> folder, the label of the menu-bar choice would<br /> be <b>Folder,</b> and its pull-down menu could contain<br /> the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice that would allow a user to<br /> open new windows displaying views of the same<br /> underlying object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Selected</b> The <b>Selected</b> menu is used for containers and data objects<br /> where objects within the window can be selected and<br /> actions applied to them. If the objects in the window<br /> are not homogeneous, then the available choices in this<br /> menu may vary widely, depending on which object is<br /> selected. For example, the names of the views listed<br /> from the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice, may be very different depending<br /> on the views available for the selected object. The<br /> <b>Selected</b> menu has the same contents as the <b>File</b> menu for<br /> the selected object if a window was opened on that<br /> object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Edit</b> The <b>Edit</b> menu contains choices that are standard across<br /> many different object types, such as the choices that<br /> provide access to the clipboard.<br /><br /><br /><b>View</b> The <b>View</b> menu contains choices that change the view type<br /> or some aspects of the view, such as the <b>Include,</b> <b>Sort,</b><br />and <b>Refresh</b> choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Options</b> The <b>Options</b> menu contains choices that allow a user to<br /> tailor the behavior and appearance of an<br /> application-oriented product.<br /><br /><br /><b>Windows</b> The <b>Windows</b> menu contains choices that provide access to<br /> other windows that are related to the same task.<br /><br /><br /><b>Help</b> The <b>Help</b> menu contains choices that provide access to<br /> help information.<br /><br /><br /><b>System</b> <b>menu</b> The system menu contains choices that change the visual<br /> characteristics of a window and other<br /> operating-environment-specific functions. Included in<br /> this menu is a <b>Close</b> choice for closing the window.<br /><br /><br /><a 2227 name="FIGAPPMEN" id="FIGAPPMEN"><br /></a></pre> 2228 <pre></pre> 2229 <hr /> 2230 <pre><a name="FIGAPPMEN" id="FIGAPPMEN"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2231 href="picture-140?mode=zoom"><img 2232 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P140.GIF" 2233 alt="PICTURE 140" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2234 <hr /> 2235 <pre>Figure 152. Application-Oriented Menu Choices<br /><br /><br /><a 2236 name="FIGOBJMEN" id="FIGOBJMEN"><br /></a></pre> 2237 <hr /> 2238 <pre><a name="FIGOBJMEN" id="FIGOBJMEN"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2239 href="picture-141?mode=zoom"><img 2240 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P141.GIF" 2241 alt="PICTURE 141" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2242 <hr /> 2243 <pre>Figure 153. Object-Oriented Menu Choices<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Pop-Up</i> <i>Menu</i> <i>Contents</i>: Pop-up menus provide choices specific to an object.<br /> Pop-up menus are not visible until a user requests the pop-up menu be<br /> displayed. Unlike the choices in the menu bar and pull-downs, choices on<br /> a pop-up menu for a particular object vary depending on the state of the<br /> object. That is, only the choices that are currently valid are displayed<br /> in the pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><a 2244 href="2.1.3.5.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTID">Figure 154</a> shows the content and layout that the CUA guidelines define for<br /> pop-up menus. In the top portion of the menu is the <b>Help</b> choice and other<br /> choices that open a view of the object. In the center of the pop-up menu<br /> are the choices that access the clipboard. In the lower area of the<br /> pop-up menu are object-specific choices provided for convenience to users.<br /> The CUA guidelines define such choices as <b>Undo,</b> <b>Print,</b> and <b>Clear,</b> that may<br /> appear in the lower area of the pop-up menu. Other choices defined by the<br /> product may appear in this area as well.<br /><br /><br /><a 2245 name="FIGCONTID" id="FIGCONTID"><br /></a></pre> 2246 <hr /> 2247 <pre><a name="FIGCONTID" id="FIGCONTID"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 2248 href="picture-142?mode=zoom"><img 2249 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P142.GIF" 2250 alt="PICTURE 142" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 2251 <hr /> 2252 <pre>Figure 154. Pop-Up Menu<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2253 <br /><br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Menus</b><br />° <a 2254 href="2.2.8?DT=19921204095534#HDRCASCDM">"Cascaded Menu" in topic 2.2.8</a><br />° <a 2255 href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a><br />° <a 2256 href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a><br />° <a 2257 href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a><br />° <a 2258 href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a><br />° <a 2259 href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a><br />° <a 2260 href="2.2.85?DT=19921204095534#HDRPULLDWN">"Pull-Down Menu" in topic 2.2.85</a><br />° <a 2261 href="2.2.107?DT=19921204095534#HDRSFMENUS">"Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)" in topic 2.2.107</a> 2262 </pre> 2263 <hr /> 2264 <h2>2.1.4 User Interaction</h2> 2265 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 2266 <ul> 2267 <li><a href="2.1.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.4.1 2268 Selection</a></li> 2269 <li><a href="2.1.4.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.4.2 2270 Data Transfer</a></li> 2271 <li><a href="2.1.4.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.4.3 2272 Direct Manipulation</a></li> 2273 <li><a href="2.1.4.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.4.4 2274 Scrolling</a></li> 2275 <li><a href="2.1.4.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.4.5 2276 Pointers and Cursors</a></li> 2277 </ul> 2278 <pre></pre> 2279 <hr /> 2280 <h3>2.1.4.1 Selection</h3> 2281 <pre></pre> 2282 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A user interacts with an object by identifying the desired object and<br />indicating actions to apply to that object. CUA interface guidelines<br />define that a user must indicate an object or group of objects first, and<br />then choose actions to apply to the object or group of objects.<br /><br /><br />A user can implicitly or explicitly indicate, or select, an object. An<br />object that is implicitly selected does not require a specific selection<br />action by a user and does not display selected-state emphasis. For<br />example, a user does not need to first explicitly select an object in<br />order to request its pop-up menu. Pointing at an object and requesting<br />its pop-up menu will implicitly select the object. However, to request a<br />pop-up menu for a group of objects, the user must explicitly select all<br />objects to be included in the group.<br /><br /><br />An object that is explicitly selected is put into a selected state. This<br />selected state is indicated with selected-state emphasis. Because an<br />object stays selected until it is deselected, multiple actions can be<br />applied to the same object without selecting that object multiple times.<br /><br /><br />Selecting an object does not imply an action, affect the object itself, or<br />commit a user to some action. A user can select or deselect the object<br />without changing the object in any way. In contrast to selecting an<br />object, selecting an action causes something to happen to the selected<br />object. For example, when the <b>Delete</b> choice is applied to a selected<br /> object, that object is deleted.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 2283 <pre></pre> 2284 <hr /> 2285 <h4>2.1.4.1.2 Selection Techniques</h4> 2286 <pre></pre> 2287 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Selection techniques are the interaction mechanisms used for selecting<br />objects. The CUA guidelines define techniques for both the keyboard and<br />the mouse. Of the techniques specified, some are appropriate for<br />selecting one object at a time, and others are appropriate for selecting<br />multiple objects.<br /><br /><br />All selection techniques defined by the CUA guidelines are either point<br />selection, point-to-endpoint selection, or random-point selection. The<br />specific behavior of the selection technique depends on the selection type<br />used, the type of object being selected, and the view of that object.<br /><br /><br />Point selection allows a user to select one object at a time. For<br />example, the user moves the cursor to the object and presses the spacebar<br />or clicks on the object with the mouse.<br /><br /><br />Point-to-endpoint selection allows a user to select all objects between<br />two or more specified points. For example, a user can define two ends of<br />a rectangle to select all objects fully contained within that rectangle;<br />however, in a different type of view, any object or part of an object that<br />falls within the defined area might be selected.<br /><br /><br />Random-point selection allows a user to select objects as the pointer<br />passes over them, in whatever order the user chooses.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2288 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.7?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUTOSEL">"Automatic Selection" in topic 2.2.7</a><br />° <a 2289 href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#HDREXSEL">"Extended Selection" in topic 2.2.34</a><br />° <a 2290 href="2.2.57?DT=19921204095534#HDRMARSEL">"Marquee Selection" in topic 2.2.57</a><br />° <a 2291 href="2.2.66?DT=19921204095534#HDRMULTSEL">"Multiple Selection" in topic 2.2.66</a><br />° <a 2292 href="2.2.78?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIMPSEL">"Point Selection" in topic 2.2.78</a><br />° <a 2293 href="2.2.79?DT=19921204095534#HDRRANSEL">"Point-to-Endpoint Selection" in topic 2.2.79</a><br />° <a 2294 href="2.2.89?DT=19921204095534#HDRTSWPSEL">"Random-Point Selection" in topic 2.2.89</a><br />° <a 2295 href="2.2.100?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELALLC">"Select All and Deselect All (Choice)" in topic 2.2.100</a><br />° <a 2296 href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a><br />° <a 2297 href="2.2.106?DT=19921204095534#HDRSHORTCT">"Shortcut Key" in topic 2.2.106</a><br />° <a 2298 href="2.2.108?DT=19921204095534#HDRSINSEL">"Single Selection" in topic 2.2.108</a> 2299 </pre> 2300 <pre></pre> 2301 <ul> 2302 <li><a href="2.1.4.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.4.1.1 2303 Selection Types</a></li> 2304 <li><a href="2.1.4.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.4.1.2 2305 Selection Techniques</a></li> 2306 </ul> 2307 <pre></pre> 2308 <hr /> 2309 <h4>2.1.4.1.1 Selection Types</h4> 2310 <pre></pre> 2311 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines define three types of selection based on the number of<br />objects that can be selected:<br /><br /><br />° The first type, single selection, allows at most one object to be<br />selected at any time in a scope.<br /><br /><br />° Multiple selection allows a user to select one or more objects at any<br />time in a scope.<br /><br /><br />° Extended selection allows a user to select only one object at a time<br />or to extend the selection to more than one object.<br /><br /><br />One of these types of selection must be defined for each group of objects.<br />For each of the controls discussed in <a 2312 href="2.1.3.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTHD">"Controls" in topic 2.1.3.5</a>, one or<br /> more of these types of selection are already defined.<br /></pre> 2313 <pre></pre> 2314 <hr /> 2315 <h3>2.1.4.2 Data Transfer</h3> 2316 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Users can transfer data within an object, or from one object to another by<br />dragging with the pointing device or by using the clipboard choices (<b>Cut,</b><br /><b>Copy,</b> <b>Create,</b> and <b>Paste</b>). Data-transfer operations allow a user to move<br /> data, copy data, or create a new object.<br /><br /><br />When a mouse is used, a user first identifies the object to be<br />transferred. The object is identified by pressing the mouse manipulation<br />button while the pointer is over the object. If more than one object is<br />to be dragged, then the objects must be selected before the transfer.<br />While holding the mouse manipulation button down, the user moves the mouse<br />and drags the object or group of objects until it is at the desired<br />location. The characteristics of the source and target object determine<br />what the default operation for the object will be, such as a move or copy.<br />The user can be allowed to override this default operation by pressing a<br />key before dropping the object at the desired location.<br /><br /><br />The user can also transfer data by using the clipboard. The clipboard<br />provided by the operating environment can be accessed by any object that<br />provides the <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> <b>Create,</b> and <b>Paste</b> choices.<br /><br /><br />To retrieve the contents of the clipboard, the user selects the <b>Paste</b><br />choice. A copy of the contents of the clipboard is pasted at the cursor<br />position. Because the clipboard contents are preserved, the paste action<br />can be repeated to get additional copies or, for the <b>Create</b> choice, to<br /> paste additional new objects.<br /></pre> 2317 <hr /> 2318 <h3>2.1.4.3 Direct Manipulation</h3> 2319 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Direct manipulation allows a user to perform actions on objects by<br />interacting directly with the objects. Dragging an object with a mouse<br />and dropping it on another object is one form of direct manipulation.<br />Moving, copying, printing, and deleting are examples of actions that can<br />be accomplished using direct-manipulation techniques.<br /><br /><br />Using direct-manipulation techniques is usually an easier method of<br />performing actions than performing the equivalent actions from menu bars<br />and pull-downs. For example, with direct manipulation a user can move a<br />document from one container to another by dragging it to the new<br />container. Using the pull-downs requires that a user first select the<br />document, then select the <b>Copy</b> choice from a pull-down menu to copy the<br /> object to the clipboard and then paste the clipboard contents into the new<br /> folder.<br /><br /><br />The user can perform other actions on objects by requesting a pop-up menu<br />for an object. Pop-up menus can be thought of as a form of direct<br />manipulation because they allow a user to more directly interact with an<br />object, rather than through an intermediate control, such as a pull-down<br />menu in a window that contains a choice that acts on a view of an object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2320 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.17?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTEXH">"Contextual Help" in topic 2.2.17</a><br />° <a 2321 href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a><br />° <a 2322 href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a><br />° <a 2323 href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a><br />° <a 2324 href="2.2.112?DT=19921204095534#HDRSOURCEE">"Source Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.112</a><br />° <a 2325 href="2.2.115?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPLTWIN">"Split Window" in topic 2.2.115</a><br />° <a 2326 href="2.2.118?DT=19921204095534#HDRTARGETE">"Target Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.118</a> 2327 </pre> 2328 <hr /> 2329 <h3>2.1.4.4 Scrolling</h3> 2330 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Scrolling is used to display information in a view that does not fit<br />within the current size of the window or the part of the window allocated<br />for that information. For example, a long list of document names<br />displayed in a window, or in a list box within a window, may require<br />scroll enabling to allow a user to see all the names in the list.<br /><br /><br />A scroll bar is used as a visual indication that information may be<br />scrolled. A user can interact with a scroll bar using the pointing device<br />to scroll the information. In addition the CUA guidelines define<br />techniques for scrolling information using the keyboard.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2331 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a><br />° <a 2332 href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a><br />° <a 2333 href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a><br />° <a 2334 href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a><br />° <a 2335 href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLB">"Scroll Bar" in topic 2.2.97</a><br />° <a 2336 href="2.2.98?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLI">"Scrolling Increment" in topic 2.2.98</a> 2337 </pre> 2338 <hr /> 2339 <h3>2.1.4.5 Pointers and Cursors</h3> 2340 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visible cue is provided for both the pointing device (such as a mouse)<br />and the keyboard to show where interaction will occur. The visual cue for<br />the pointing device is the pointer; the visual cue for the keyboard is the<br />cursor. To avoid confusion as to where input will occur, only one pointer<br />and one cursor are visible at a time.<br /><br /><br />The user moves the pointer freely on the screen. Users can move the<br />cursor to only valid cursor positions. For example, the cursor can be<br />moved to the menu bar choices and push buttons, but not to field prompts<br />or headings. When a user clicks the pointing device, the cursor is placed<br />at the indicated position, if possible. A cursor never affects the<br />pointer location.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines define the following types of pointers: an arrow<br />pointer, an arrow pointer with augmentations, a wait pointer, and an<br />I-beam pointer. Their descriptions follow in <a 2341 href="2.1.4.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGDUMMY">Figure 155</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 2342 name="FIGDUMMY" id="FIGDUMMY" /><a name="TBLDUMMY" id="TBLDUMMY"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 155. Predefined Pointers |<br />|____________________ _______________ ___________________________________|<br />| Arrow pointer | <a 2343 href="picture-143?mode=zoom"><img 2344 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P143.GIF" 2345 alt="PICTURE 143" /></a> | The pointer that the user sees |<br /> | | | most of the time and that is used |<br /> | | | to select choices and objects. |<br /> | | | The arrow pointer is also used |<br /> | | | during a direct-manipulation |<br /> | | | operation on an object to |<br /> | | | indicate that the object will be |<br /> | | | moved. |<br /> |____________________|_______________|___________________________________|<br /> | Arrow pointer -- | <a 2346 href="picture-144?mode=zoom"><img 2347 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P144.GIF" 2348 alt="PICTURE 144" /></a> | The arrow pointer is modified |<br /> | While copying or | | when a user performs a |<br /> | creating | | direct-manipulation operation on |<br /> | | | an object that results in a copy |<br /> | | | of that object being created. |<br /> |____________________|_______________|___________________________________|<br /> | Arrow pointer -- | <a 2349 href="picture-145?mode=zoom"><img 2350 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P145.GIF" 2351 alt="PICTURE 145" /></a> | When an object is not a valid |<br /> | Do not | | target for a direct-manipulation |<br /> | | | operation, the arrow pointer is |<br /> | | | augmented with a circle with a |<br /> | | | slash through it. The source |<br /> | | | object will not be dropped at the |<br /> | | | current pointer location. |<br /> |____________________|_______________|___________________________________|<br /> | Wait pointer | <a 2352 href="picture-146?mode=zoom"><img 2353 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P146.GIF" 2354 alt="PICTURE 146" /></a> | A pointer that indicates to a |<br /> | | | user that the computer is |<br /> | | | performing a process and cannot |<br /> | | | receive input at the current |<br /> | | | pointer location. A user can |<br /> | | | move the wait pointer, but the |<br /> | | | wait pointer cannot be used to |<br /> | | | perform any operation. |<br /> |____________________|_______________|___________________________________|<br /> | I-beam pointer | <a 2355 href="picture-147?mode=zoom"><img 2356 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P147.GIF" 2357 alt="PICTURE 147" /></a> | A pointer that indicates that the |<br /> | | | pointer is positioned over an |<br /> | | | area where text can be typed or |<br /> | | | selected. |<br /> |____________________|_______________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br />Products may change the appearance of the pointer to indicate a product-<br />specific action. A tool palette may be provided by a product to allow<br />easy access to several actions. When a user selects a tool from a tool<br />palette, the pointer shape changes and pointer interaction is determined<br />by the tool. For example, selecting a line-drawing tool causes a line to<br />be drawn as users drag the pointing device.<br /><br /><br />CUA-interface guidelines define two types of cursors:<br /><br /><br /><b>Selection</b> <b>cursor</b> A selection cursor is used for settings<br /> choices and for all objects. This cursor<br /> typically appears as a dotted outline box<br /> around the settings choice or the object. The<br /> cursor is usually seen even when other types<br /> of emphasis are displayed. For example, the<br /> selection cursor is visible on an object that<br /> is displayed with in-use emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Text</b> <b>cursor</b> A text cursor is used for keyboard text input.<br /> Two visuals are typically used for text<br /> cursors: a vertical bar to indicate insert<br /> mode and a colored background behind a<br /> character to indicate replace mode.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2358 <br /><br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Keyboard</b> <b>and</b> <b>Cursor</b> <b>Usage</b><br />° <a 2359 href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a><br />° <a 2360 href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a><br />° <a 2361 href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a><br />° <a 2362 href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a><br />° <a 2363 href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a><br />° <a 2364 href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a><br />° <a 2365 href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a><br />° <a 2366 href="2.2.106?DT=19921204095534#HDRSHORTCT">"Shortcut Key" in topic 2.2.106</a> 2367 <br /><br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Mouse</b> <b>and</b> <b>Pointer</b> <b>Usage</b><br />° <a 2368 href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a><br />° <a 2369 href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a><br />° <a 2370 href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a><br />° <a 2371 href="2.2.77?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTD">"Pointing Device" in topic 2.2.77</a><br />° <a 2372 href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a><br />° <a 2373 href="2.2.120?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOOLP">"Tool Palette" in topic 2.2.120</a> 2374 </pre> 2375 <hr /> 2376 <h2>2.1.5 Cues</h2> 2377 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Cues provide information to users and help to orient them as they interact<br />with the interface. Cues can be used to direct a user's attention to a<br />part of the screen or to indicate a particular state of an object. The<br />two kinds of cues are visible and audible.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 2378 <ul> 2379 <li><a href="2.1.5.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.5.1 2380 Visible Cues</a></li> 2381 <li><a href="2.1.5.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.1.5.2 2382 Audible Cues</a></li> 2383 </ul> 2384 <pre></pre> 2385 <hr /> 2386 <h3>2.1.5.1 Visible Cues</h3> 2387 <pre></pre> 2388 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Visible cues allow users to immediately see the results of their<br />interaction with the interface. We only discuss emphasis here, but arrow<br />pointers, cursors, even animation, can be used as visible cues as well.<br /><br /><br />The type of emphasis used is determined by the type of interaction a user<br />has with an object or choice. More than one type of emphasis may be valid<br />on an object or choice at the same time, and therefore may be seen<br />simultaneously. The CUA guidelines define these types of emphasis:<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>In-Use</b> <b>Emphasis</b>: Indicates that a window is currently open on an object;<br /> users can still interact with the object as they normally would.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Selected-State</b> <b>Emphasis</b>: Indicates that a choice or an object is<br /> selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Unavailable-State</b> <b>Emphasis</b>: Indicates that a choice cannot be selected at<br /> that time.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Target</b> <b>Emphasis</b>: Indicates the object that is the receiver of a<br /> direct-manipulation action. Target emphasis is used in conjunction with<br /> different pointer visuals to indicate the type of action that will be<br /> performed. Target emphasis can also indicate where the source object will<br /> be placed in the target object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Source</b> <b>Emphasis</b>: Indicates that an object is the source for a direct<br /> manipulation action. Source emphasis remains in effect until the direct<br /> manipulation action is complete.<br /></pre> 2389 <pre></pre> 2390 <hr /> 2391 <h3>2.1.5.2 Audible Cues</h3> 2392 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Audible cues are provided when a user attempts to perform an action that<br />is not valid or when an event or state of the operating environment<br />requires the user's attention. For example, when a user tries to select a<br />choice displayed with unavailable-state emphasis, an audible cue should be<br />generated. However, users can always specify in their operating<br />environment that they want audible cues turned off.<br /><br /><br />Audible cues can be anything from a beep to a recorded message. The only<br />limit is the hardware your product runs on and the usefulness of the cue<br />for your users.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 2393 <br /><br /><b>Providing</b> <b>Cues</b><br />° <a 2394 href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a><br />° <a 2395 href="2.2.53?DT=19921204095534#HDRINUSEE">"In-Use Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.53</a><br />° <a 2396 href="2.2.102?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELEMPH">"Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.102</a><br />° <a 2397 href="2.2.112?DT=19921204095534#HDRSOURCEE">"Source Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.112</a><br />° <a 2398 href="2.2.118?DT=19921204095534#HDRTARGETE">"Target Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.118</a><br />° <a 2399 href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 2400 </pre> 2401 <hr /> 2402 <h1><a name="HDRTOPICS" id="HDRTOPICS">2.2 Chapter 8. 5639 5640 5641 5642 5643 5644 5645 5646 5647 5648 5649 5650 <pre width="80"><br />Elements of the user interface, as opposed to objects, are unique to the computer environment. User-interface elements provide the means of representing and interacting with user objects on the desktop or workplace. Windows, icons, choices, and controls are examples of user-interface elements that are commonly found in products using the CUA guidelines.<br /><br /></pre> 5651 5652 5653 5654 5655 5656 5657 <hr /> 5658 5659 5660 5661 5662 <h3>2.1.3.3 Windows</h3> 5663 5664 5665 5666 5667 5668 5669 5670 5671 5672 5673 5674 <pre width="80">Windows are used to present views of objects. In an application-oriented operating environment, users typically open a window and then specify the object they wish to interact with. In an object-oriented operating environment, a view of an object is displayed in the window when the window is opened. This is one difference between an application-oriented operating environment and an object-oriented operating environment: users can display views of objects directly without first specifying the application used to display that view. Another key difference is that in an application-oriented operating environment, the same window could be used to display other objects. In an object-oriented operating environment there is a one-to-one relationship between objects and<br />windows. When a window is open on an object, in order to view another object, the object is displayed in a separate window.<br /><br />Windows are also used to present messages, progress indicators, help information, and choices that further clarify actions.<br /><br />In both application-oriented and object-oriented operating environments, multiple windows can be shown on the screen at the same time. If windows overlap, the active window (the window the user is interacting with) is usually placed on top of any overlapping windows. The two basic types of windows are: primary windows and secondary windows.<br /><br /></pre> 5675 5676 5677 5678 5679 5680 5681 5682 5683 5684 5685 5686 <hr /> 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 <h4>2.1.3.3.2 Secondary window</h4> 5692 5693 5694 5695 5696 5697 5698 5699 5700 5701 5702 5703 <pre width="80">Secondary windows look very much like primary windows. For example, both have window borders and title bars. The important distinction between primary and secondary windows is based on how they are used. Secondary windows are always associated with a primary window and contain information that is dependent on an object in the primary window. Secondary windows are used, for example, to allow a user to further clarify action requests. Secondary windows are removed when the primary window is closed or minimized, and redisplayed when the primary window is<br />opened or restored. <a href="2.1.3.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGSECONID">Figure 143</a> shows a typical secondary window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSECONID" name="FIGSECONID"><br /></a></pre> 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708 5709 5710 5711 5712 5713 5714 5715 <hr /> 5716 5717 5718 5719 5720 <pre><a id="FIGSECONID" name="FIGSECONID"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-131?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 131" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P131.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 5721 5722 5723 5724 5725 5726 5727 5728 5729 5730 <hr /> 5731 5732 5733 5734 5735 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 143. Secondary Window</span><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 5736 <br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Windows</b><br />° <a href="2.2.4?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTIONW">"Action Window" in topic 2.2.4</a><br />° <a href="2.2.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTWIND">"Active Window" in topic 2.2.5</a><br />° <a href="2.2.48?DT=19921204095534#HDRINACTWI">"Inactive Window" in topic 2.2.48</a><br />° <a href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a><br />° <a href="2.2.81?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRIMWIN">"Primary Window" in topic 2.2.81</a><br />° <a href="2.2.99?DT=19921204095534#HDRSECWIND">"Secondary Window" in topic 2.2.99</a><br />° <a href="2.2.115?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPLTWIN">"Split Window" in topic 2.2.115</a><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a><br />° <a href="2.2.134?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINMENU">"Windows Menu" in topic 2.2.134</a><br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Window</b> <b>Layout</b><br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a><br />° <a href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#HDRDESCTXT">"Descriptive Text" in topic 2.2.27</a><br />° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a><br />° <a href="2.2.42?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPBX">"Group Box" in topic 2.2.42</a><br />° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a><br />° <a href="2.2.46?DT=19921204095534#HDRHIDE">"Hide (Choice)" in topic 2.2.46</a><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a><br />° <a href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a><br />° <a href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a><br />° <a href="2.2.104?DT=19921204095534#HDRSEPARAT">"Separator" in topic 2.2.104</a><br />° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a><br />° <a href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a><br />° <a href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWT">"Window Title" in topic 2.2.135</a> 5737 </pre> 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742 5743 5744 <pre></pre> 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749 5750 5751 5752 5753 5754 <hr /> 5755 5756 5757 5758 5759 <h4>2.1.3.3.1 Primary window</h4> 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 5765 5766 5767 5768 5769 5770 5771 <pre width="80">A primary window is used to present a view of an object or group of objects when the information displayed about the object or group of objects is not dependent on any other object. A view of an object is typically displayed in a primary window.<br /><br />Object information is presented in the area of the window below the menu bar (<a href="2.1.3.3.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGPRIMID">Figure 142</a> shows the components of a primary window). A user can control the size and position of primary windows on the screen.<br /><br /><a id="FIGPRIMID" name="FIGPRIMID"><br /></a></pre> 5772 5773 5774 5775 5776 5777 5778 5779 5780 5781 5782 5783 <hr /> 5784 5785 5786 5787 5788 <pre><a id="FIGPRIMID" name="FIGPRIMID"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-130?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 130" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P130.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 <hr /> 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 142. Primary Window</span></pre> 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 5809 5810 <pre></pre> 5811 5812 5813 5814 5815 5816 5817 5818 5819 5820 <hr /> 5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 <h3>2.1.3.1 Views of Objects</h3> 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 <pre width="80">Opening a window on an object displays a view of the object. An object may have more than one view to allow a user to see other aspects of the same object. The CUA guidelines define four common types of views: composed, contents, settings, and help. The appearance of composed and contents views are object-specific. A user can change the view of an object by selecting another view from a menu. The CUA guidelines recommend that the settings view for an object be displayed using a notebook control and help views be displayed by opening another window.<br /><br />A user can display multiple, simultaneous views of an object in multiple windows by opening the same object multiple times. To see different parts of a view in the same window, a <b>Split</b> choice could be provided to allow a user to split the window into different sections. In <a href="2.1.3.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGVIEWID">Figure 138</a> a contents view and a settings view of the same object are displayed.<br /><br /><a id="FIGVIEWID" name="FIGVIEWID"><br /></a></pre> 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 <hr /> 5850 5851 5852 5853 5854 <h3><a id="FIGVIEWID" name="FIGVIEWID">2.1.3.2 5855 Icons</a></h3> 5856 5857 5858 5859 5860 5861 5862 5863 5864 5865 5866 5867 <pre width="80"><a id="FIGVIEWID" name="FIGVIEWID"><br /><br />In an application-oriented operating environment, a user's first encounter with icons is usually with icons that represent applications. Icons that represent applications appear in containers used to group such objects. Users can manipulate these icons to accomplish tasks such as moving the object to a new container. Also, users can start applications by opening the icon for that application.<br /><br />In OS/2 1.3, for example, icons on the desktop also represent minimized windows of running applications. When a user double-clicks or restores a minimized window's icon, the icon disappears from the desktop and is replaced by an open window.<br /><br />In an object-oriented operating environment, icons represent objects. When a user opens an icon, the icon remains visible but is visually augmented to indicate that it is currently in use. This augmentation, or emphasis, is called in-use emphasis.<br /><br />When a user opens an object, a window is opened to display a view of the object. </a><a href="2.1.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGMOVEID">Figure 141</a> shows an icon being moved from one container to another container. It also shows an icon displayed with in-use emphasis in the container.<br /><br /><a id="FIGMOVEID" name="FIGMOVEID"><br /></a></pre> 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 5878 5879 <hr /> 5880 5881 5882 5883 5884 <pre><a id="FIGMOVEID" name="FIGMOVEID"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-129?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 129" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P129.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 5885 5886 5887 5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 <hr /> 5895 5896 5897 5898 5899 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 141. Icons</span><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 5900 <br />° <a href="2.2.47?DT=19921204095534#HDRICONS">"Icon" in topic 2.2.47</a> 5901 </pre> 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 5911 <hr /> 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 <pre><br /><a href="picture-126?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 126" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P126.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 5917 5918 5919 5920 5921 5922 5923 5924 5925 5926 <hr /> 5927 5928 5929 5930 5931 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 138. Multiple Views of an Object</span><br /><br /></pre> 5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 <hr /> 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 <h4>2.1.3.1.1 Help</h4> 5944 5945 5946 5947 5948 5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 <pre width="80">While using a product, a user occasionally requires additional information about choices, fields, or how to proceed with a task. This type of information is displayed when a user requests help.<br /><br />Help can be accessed from the menu bar. The choices in the menu give specific kinds of help information, such as an index of the help topics, or help about the window or task. Help can also be accessed from a push button or a key assigned to contextual help on the indicated item. Contextual help can also be accessed from the pop-up menu of an object.<br /><br /><a href="2.1.3.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGHMENU">Figure 139</a> shows an example of the help menu.<br /><br /><a id="FIGHMENU" name="FIGHMENU"><br /></a></pre> 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 <hr /> 5968 5969 5970 5971 5972 <pre><a id="FIGHMENU" name="FIGHMENU"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-127?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 127" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P127.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 5973 5974 5975 5976 5977 5978 5979 5980 5981 5982 <hr /> 5983 5984 5985 5986 5987 <pre style="width: 640px;"><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 139. Help Menu</span><br /><br />Users can get contextual help for a choice or object. Contextual help provides specific help information about the choice or object with respect to its current state. For example, getting contextual help on a choice displayed with unavailable-state emphasis might explain why that choice is currently unavailable and what a user would have to do to select the choice. <a href="2.1.3.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCHELP">Figure 140</a> shows an example of contextual help for the Make field in the window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCHELP" name="FIGCHELP"><br /></a></pre> 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 <hr /> 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 <pre><a id="FIGCHELP" name="FIGCHELP"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-128?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 128" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P128.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 <hr /> 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 140. Contextual Help</span><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6018 <br /><b>Providing</b> <b>Help</b> <b>for</b> <b>Users</b><br />° <a href="2.2.17?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTEXH">"Contextual Help" in topic 2.2.17</a><br />° <a href="2.2.41?DT=19921204095534#HDRGENHELP">"General Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.41</a><br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a><br />° <a href="2.2.44?DT=19921204095534#HDRHLPINDX">"Help Index (Choice)" in topic 2.2.44</a><br />° <a href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a><br />° <a href="2.2.83?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRODINF">"Product Information (Choice)" in topic 2.2.83</a><br />° <a href="2.2.121?DT=19921204095534#HDRTUTOR">"Tutorial (Choice)" in topic 2.2.121</a><br />° <a href="2.2.124?DT=19921204095534#HDRUSHELP">"Using Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.124</a> 6019 </pre> 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 <pre></pre> 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 <hr /> 6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 <h3>2.1.2.1 Creating New Objects</h3> 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 <pre width="80">There are several methods available to a user to create new objects. In an application-oriented environment, new objects are created by opening an application window and either selecting the <b>New</b> choice to create a new object or by selecting the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice to copy an existing object.<br /><br />The <b>New</b> choice is used to create a new object in the window where <b>New</b> was selected. The new object is typically of the same class as the existing object in the window, but unique information can be automatically generated for it when it is created. This unique information may be simple, such as a new form number, or it can be more elaborate information taken from the current context. The newly created object reuses the same window from which the <b>New</b> choice was selected. The location of the new object is not determined when the object is created; instead, it is specified by the user from the <b>Save</b> <b>As</b> window when the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice is selected or when the window is closed.<br /><br />The <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice is used in an application-oriented environment to create a new object based on an existing object. When this choice is selected while working with an existing named object in a window, a copy of the object is made and the <b>Save</b> <b>As</b> window is displayed to allow the user to specify a name and location for the new object. The original object in the window is not affected.<br /><br />Two other choices, <b>Create</b> and <b>Copy,</b> are provided in both application-oriented and object-oriented environments from menus, or their function can be provided through direct manipulation. In an object-oriented environment, new objects are created by finding another object of the desired type and requesting that a new one either be created from this object or copied from this object. In an application-oriented environment, <b>Create</b> and <b>Copy</b> are typically used to create or copy objects within the window. In an object-oriented environment, <b>Create</b> and <b>Copy</b> can be used for objects within a window, as well as objects on the workplace.<br /><br />When using menus the <b>Create</b> choice is selected from the <b>Edit</b> menu or from the pop-up menu of an object. The <b>Create</b> choice uses the clipboard. Like the <b>New</b> choice, this choice may generate unique information for the new object. A default name is usually generated for the new object, although the user could change this name later. The location of the new object is determined by the user when the <b>Paste</b> choice is selected.<br /><br />Like the <b>Create</b> choice, the <b>Copy</b> choice is selected from the <b>Edit</b> menu or from the pop-up menu of an object and uses the clipboard. The new object can have the same name as the original object if unique names are not required. The location of the new object is determined by the user when the <b>Paste</b> choice is selected.<br /><br />When using direct manipulation, the default operation when a user drags an object can be either a move or a copy. A user can override a default operation, for example, to request that an object be copied instead of moved by pressing a mouse button. In addition, an object may have a create-on-drag setting that allows the user to specify whether when overriding the move default a create operation should be performed instead of the <b>Copy.</b> When this setting is on, the appearance of the object's icon is changed to reflect that the create operation will occur instead of the copy.<br /><br />In many situations it may be convenient for users to create a folder containing sample objects from which users can create new objects. Each object in this folder would have the create-on-drag setting on to allow the user to easily create new objects by dragging objects out of this folder (using the override key) to the desired location.<br /><br />In addition to creating new objects a user can create a reflection of an object. Objects that support reflections will have cascaded choices off the <b>Create</b> choice to specify that a reflection is desired. In addition, a user could create a reflection during direct manipulation.<br /></pre> 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 <ul> 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 6072 </ul> 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 6081 6082 <pre></pre> 6083 6084 6085 6086 6087 6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 <hr /> 6093 6094 6095 6096 6097 <h2>2.1.1 Operating Environment</h2> 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 <pre width="80"><br />The CUA guidelines support the development of products that are to be used in application-oriented operating environments and object-oriented operating environments. The operating environment establishes a basic framework of function that products can utilize. The environment typically includes such basic functions as management functions for windows, files, printers, and configuration options.<br /><br />An application-oriented environment is one in which users must first start applications in order to work with objects. The CUA graphical model, first published in 1989, defines a graphical user interface for products that are designed to be used in an application-oriented operating environment. The IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*) 1.3 operating system is an example of an application-oriented operating environment.<br /><br />In an application-oriented environment, groups of available applications are initially represented in application-manager windows as small graphic images called icons. A user can start an application which then displays its own window (or group of windows) from which a user performs tasks related to the application. While an application is running, a user can reduce the size of its window to a minimum size and position it in a handy place on the screen, which is typically referred to as the desktop. The desktop is the screen in an application-oriented operating environment. <a href="2.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGAPPOE">Figure 136</a> is an example of an application-oriented operating environment.<br /><br /><a id="FIGAPPOE" name="FIGAPPOE"><br /></a></pre> 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 <hr /> 6122 6123 6124 6125 6126 <pre><a id="FIGAPPOE" name="FIGAPPOE"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-124?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 124" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P124.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6127 6128 6129 6130 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 <hr /> 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 136. Example of an Application-Oriented Environment</span><br /><br />In OS/2 1.3 a minimized window appears as an icon on the desktop but represents a running application. A user can manipulate running applications on the desktop, but cannot place objects on the desktop. Data transfer within and between applications is typically accomplished by using the <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> and <b>Paste</b> menu choices associated with a system-provided clipboard.<br /><br />Also introduced in 1989 was the workplace extension to the graphical model. The desktop in an object-oriented environment is called the workplace. The workplace extension defines an object-oriented user interface to support the development of products that are to be used in an object-oriented operating environment. In this environment, icons represent objects rather than running applications. A user no longer must start an application before selecting the object to work with. Instead, the user opens the object which automatically causes a window to be displayed that contains a view of the object. In addition to choosing actions from menus, a user can drag objects--represented as icons on the workplace--to perform some operations. For example, a text object can be printed by dragging its icon to the icon of a printer object. <a href="2.1.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGRV036">Figure 137</a> is an example of the workplace in an object-oriented operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGRV036" name="FIGRV036"><br /></a></pre> 6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6147 6148 6149 6150 6151 <hr /> 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156 <pre><a id="FIGRV036" name="FIGRV036"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-125?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 125" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P125.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /></pre> 6157 6158 6159 6160 6161 6162 6163 6164 6165 6166 <hr /> 6167 6168 6169 6170 6171 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 137. Example of an Object-Oriented Environment</span><br /><br />An object, such as a document, often contains other objects, such as graphs, charts, and tables. The workplace extension defines techniques that allow a user to perform actions on an object as a whole and on objects that are contained within other objects.<br /><br />Because interfaces are evolving to support an object-oriented environment, the CUA guidelines in this book emphasize object-orientation. However, many of the CUA guidelines apply equally to both application-oriented and object-oriented environments. For example, dragging techniques and pop-up menus can be supported within and between product windows on the workplace even if they are not supported on the desktop of an application-oriented environment. By defining interface features useful in both application-oriented and object-oriented environments, the CUA guidelines allow you to position your products advantageously for the evolution to an object-oriented interface while maintaining compatibility with many aspects of an existing application-oriented interface.<br /></pre> 6172 6173 6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 6180 6181 <hr /> 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 <h4>2.1.3.3.3 Action Windows</h4> 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 6196 <pre width="80">Some actions require additional information from the user before they can be completed. In these situations, a choice, such as on a menu or push button, leads to a secondary window containing additional choices that clarify the action requested. Such a window is called an action window.<br /><br />The <b>Open</b> and <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choices are examples of menu choices that result in an action window. <a href="2.1.3.3.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGSAVEA">Figure 144 </a>shows an example of the action window displayed as a result of selecting the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice.<br /><br /><a id="FIGSAVEA" name="FIGSAVEA"><br /></a></pre> 6197 6198 6199 6200 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 6206 <hr /> 6207 6208 6209 6210 6211 <pre><a id="FIGSAVEA" name="FIGSAVEA"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-132?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 132" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P132.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6212 6213 6214 6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 <hr /> 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 144. Save As Action Window</span><br /></pre> 6227 6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 <hr /> 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 <h4>2.1.3.3.4 Messages</h4> 6242 6243 6244 6245 6246 6247 6248 6249 6250 6251 <pre width="80">Messages are feedback to the user that occur because of a condition the operating environment or an object in the operating environment has detected. Messages tell a user that something has happened because of a request or that something undesirable or unexpected could occur. The CUA guidelines define three types of messages: information message, warning message, and action message. These three message types are based on the user actions that can be performed, not on the severity of the message.<br /><br />Messages should clearly indicate why the message appeared and what actions can be taken. You can always provide access to help information in any kind of message to further aid a user in determining the problem or to learn how to correct the situation.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Information</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Message</i>: An information message appears when a situation occurs that a user can do nothing about. The only actions a user can take when an information message is displayed is to dismiss the message window or request help information. <a href="2.1.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGINFMSG">Figure 145</a> shows an example of an information message.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGINFMSG" name="FIGINFMSG"><br /></a></pre> 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 6257 6258 6259 6260 6261 <hr /> 6262 6263 6264 6265 6266 <pre><a id="FIGINFMSG" name="FIGINFMSG"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-133?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 133" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P133.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 <hr /> 6277 6278 6279 6280 6281 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 145. Information Message</span><br /><br />Information regarding the normal completion of a process can be displayed in an information area instead of as an information message.<br /><br /><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Warning</i><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><i style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Message</i>: Use a warning message when a user can continue the original request without modification, though a situation exists that the user should be aware of. Other actions may be provided to allow a user to modify the original request or cancel it. <a href="2.1.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGWARMSG">Figure 146</a> shows an example of a warning message.<br /><br /><a id="FIGWARMSG" name="FIGWARMSG"><br /></a></pre> 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 6288 6289 6290 6291 <hr /> 6292 6293 6294 6295 6296 <pre><a id="FIGWARMSG" name="FIGWARMSG"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-134?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 134" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P134.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 <hr /> 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 146. Warning Message</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Action</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Message</i>: Use an action message when a situation arises in which the user must take some explicit action to correct the situation or choose an alternative action.<br /><br />When an action message is displayed, a user can choose to retry the request after correcting the situation, choose some other action that redirects the request, or cancel the request. An action message can also contain controls, such as an entry field, that allow a user to attempt to correct data that is not valid or not correct.<a href="2.1.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGACTMSG"> Figure 147</a> and <a href="2.1.3.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGACTMSG2">Figure 148</a> show examples of action messages.<br /><br /><a id="FIGACTMSG" name="FIGACTMSG"><br /></a></pre> 6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 6317 6318 6319 6320 6321 <hr /> 6322 6323 6324 6325 6326 <pre><a id="FIGACTMSG" name="FIGACTMSG"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-135?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 135" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P135.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6327 6328 6329 6330 6331 6332 6333 6334 6335 6336 <hr /> 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 147. Action Message - Immediate User Attention Not Required</span><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGACTMSG2" name="FIGACTMSG2"><br /></a></pre> 6342 6343 6344 6345 6346 6347 6348 6349 6350 6351 <hr /> 6352 6353 6354 6355 6356 <pre><a id="FIGACTMSG2" name="FIGACTMSG2"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-136?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 136" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P136.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6357 6358 6359 6360 6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 <hr /> 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 148. Action Message - Immediate User Attention Required</span><br /></pre> 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 <hr /> 6382 6383 6384 6385 6386 <h4>2.1.3.3.5 Progress Indicators</h4> 6387 6388 6389 6390 6391 6392 6393 6394 6395 6396 <pre width="80">When a user requests a lengthy process, a progress indicator is used to indicate that the process is running and to provide information about the status of the process, such as how far it is from completion. A progress indicator is continually updated to reflect the latest status. Progress indicators may be displayed in the window where the process was requested or in a separate window. When displayed in a separate window, the window may also contain information that may otherwise have been displayed in an information message.<br /><br /><a href="2.1.3.3.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGPROIND">Figure 149</a> shows an example of a progress indicator in a window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGPROIND" name="FIGPROIND"><br /></a></pre> 6397 6398 6399 6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 <hr /> 6407 6408 6409 6410 6411 <pre><a id="FIGPROIND" name="FIGPROIND"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-137?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 137" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P137.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6412 6413 6414 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 <hr /> 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 149. Progress Indicator in a Window</span><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6427 <br /><b>Informing</b> <b>a</b> <b>User</b><br />° <a href="2.2.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTIONM">"Action Message" in topic 2.2.3</a><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a><br />° <a href="2.2.51?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFMS">"Information Message" in topic 2.2.51</a><br />° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a><br />° <a href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a><br />° <a href="2.2.127?DT=19921204095534#HDRWARNMSG">"Warning Message" in topic 2.2.127</a> 6428 </pre> 6429 6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 <hr /> 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 <h3>2.1.3.4 Choices</h3> 6444 6445 6446 6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 <pre width="80">Choices are used to act on indicated objects. There are three types of choices:<br /><br />° Action choices for performing actions on objects<br />° Routing choices that lead to another menu or window from which additional selections can be made<br />° Settings choices to specify properties of objects.<br /><br /><a href="2.1.3.4?DT=19921204095534#FIGOCHOICE">Figure 150</a> shows some examples of choices.<br /><br /><a id="FIGOCHOICE" name="FIGOCHOICE"><br /></a></pre> 6454 6455 6456 6457 6458 6459 6460 6461 6462 6463 <hr /> 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 <pre><a id="FIGOCHOICE" name="FIGOCHOICE"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-138?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 138" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P138.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 <hr /> 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 150. Choices</span><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6484 <br /><b>Action</b> <b>Choices</b><br />° <a href="2.2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTION">"Action Choice (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.2</a><br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a><br />° <a href="2.2.13?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLOSE">"Close (Choice)" in topic 2.2.13</a><br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a><br />° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a><br />° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a><br />° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a><br />° <a href="2.2.58?DT=19921204095534#HDRMAXIMIZ">"Maximize (Choice)" in topic 2.2.58</a><br />° <a href="2.2.62?DT=19921204095534#HDRMINIMIZ">"Minimize (Choice)" in topic 2.2.62</a><br />° <a href="2.2.65?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOVE">"Move (Choice)" in topic 2.2.65</a><br />° <a href="2.2.67?DT=19921204095534#HDRNEW">"New (Choice)" in topic 2.2.67</a><br />° <a href="2.2.71?DT=19921204095534#HDROPENAS">"Open As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.71</a><br />° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a><br />° <a href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a><br />° <a href="2.2.91?DT=19921204095534#HDRREFRESH">"Refresh and Refresh Now (Choice)" in topic 2.2.91</a><br />° <a href="2.2.92?DT=19921204095534#HDRRESTORE">"Restore (Choice)" in topic 2.2.92</a><br />° <a href="2.2.94?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVE">"Save (Choice)" in topic 2.2.94</a><br />° <a href="2.2.100?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELALLC">"Select All and Deselect All (Choice)" in topic 2.2.100</a><br />° <a href="2.2.109?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIZE">"Size (Choice)" in topic 2.2.109</a><br />° <a href="2.2.114?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPLIT">"Split (Choice)" in topic 2.2.114</a><br />° <a href="2.2.123?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNDO">"Undo and Redo (Choice)" in topic 2.2.123</a><br />° <a href="2.2.132?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLIST">"Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)" in topic 2.2.132</a><br />° <a href="2.2.131?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLST1">"Window List (Choice in System Menu)" in topic 2.2.131</a><br /><b><br />Routing</b> <b>Choices</b><br />° <a href="2.2.38?DT=19921204095534#HDRFIND">"Find (Choice)" in topic 2.2.38</a><br />° <a href="2.2.49?DT=19921204095534#HDRINCLUDE">"Include (Choice)" in topic 2.2.49</a><br />° <a href="2.2.70?DT=19921204095534#HDROPEN">"Open (Choice)" in topic 2.2.70</a><br />° <a href="2.2.71?DT=19921204095534#HDROPENAS">"Open As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.71</a><br />° <a href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a><br />° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a><br />° <a href="2.2.96?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVEAS">"Save As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.96</a><br />° <a href="2.2.111?DT=19921204095534#HDRSORT">"Sort (Choice)" in topic 2.2.111</a> 6485 <br /><b>Settings</b> <b>Choices</b><br />° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a><br />° <a href="2.2.107?DT=19921204095534#HDRSFMENUS">"Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)" in topic 2.2.107</a> 6486 </pre> 6487 6488 6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 6494 6495 6496 <hr /> 6497 6498 6499 6500 6501 <h3><a id="HDRCONTHD" name="HDRCONTHD">2.1.3.5 6502 Controls</a><br /> 6503 6504 6505 6506 </h3> 6507 6508 6509 6510 6511 6512 6513 6514 6515 6516 <pre width="80">Controls are components of the interface that allow a user to select choices and to type information. Menus are one type of control that is commonly used to contain choices. Other controls are used, for example, in settings views of objects and in windows that clarify an action request. However, controls may also be used in any view of an object.<br /><br />Some controls can perform the same function, but are better suited for certain tasks or presentation schemes. For example, list boxes, combination boxes, drop-down list boxes, and drop-down combination boxes all perform similar functions. However, some of these controls allow a user to type values not provided by the control or require less space in a window. Because there are many different ways of allowing a user to interact with the interface, the CUA guidelines provide different controls to allow a user to work most efficiently.<a href="2.1.3.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTRID"> Figure 151</a> shows some examples of controls.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGCONTRID" name="FIGCONTRID"><br /></a></pre> 6517 6518 6519 6520 6521 6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 <hr /> 6527 6528 6529 6530 6531 <pre><a id="FIGCONTRID" name="FIGCONTRID"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-139?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 139" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P139.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 <hr /> 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 151. Examples of Some Controls Defined by the CUA Guidelines</span><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6547 <br /><b>Using</b> <b>Controls</b><br />° <a href="2.2.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHECKBX">"Check Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.9</a><br />° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a><br />° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a><br />° <a href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#HDRDEFACT">"Default Action" in topic 2.2.24</a><br />° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a><br />° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a><br />° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a><br />° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a><br />° <a href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a><br />° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a><br />° <a href="2.2.88?DT=19921204095534#HDRRADIOB">"Radio Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.88</a><br />° <a href="2.2.110?DT=19921204095534#HDRSLIDERS">"Slider (Control)" in topic 2.2.110</a><br />° <a href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a><br />° <a href="2.2.125?DT=19921204095534#HDRVALUSET">"Value Set (Control)" in topic 2.2.125</a> 6548 <br /></pre> 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 6554 6555 <hr /> 6556 6557 6558 6559 6560 <h4>2.1.3.5.1 Menus</h4> 6561 6562 6563 6564 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 <pre width="80">The types of menus defined by the CUA guidelines are:<br /><br />° Menu bars<br />° Pull-down menus<br />° Cascaded menus<br />° Pop-up menus.<br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Menu</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Bar</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">and</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Pull-Down</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Menu</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Contents</i>: Menu bars are displayed at the top of a window, under the window title. Each choice in the menu bar is a routing choice that leads to an associated pull-down menu. Choices in the pull-down menus are typically action or routing choices that relate to the contents of the window, though settings choices are also allowed. When routing choices are used, they lead to other windows or to cascaded menus.<br /><br />The CUA guidelines define the common contents of the <b>File,</b> <b>Selected,</b> <b>Edit,</b> <b>View,</b> <b>Options,</b> <b>Windows,</b> and <b>Help</b> menu bar choices. In addition, the contents of the system menu pull-down are also defined. The system menu is shown as a graphical choice in the top, left-hand corner of the window, in the title bar.<br /><br />The menu bar choices and contents defined in this version of the CUA guidelines provide an evolutionary step towards an object-oriented menu scheme. Below is a brief description of these choices, along with a description of the system menu and its contents.<a href="2.1.3.5.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGAPPMEN"> Figure 152</a> and <a href="2.1.3.5.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGOBJMEN">Figure 153</a> show the layout of the predefined menu choices on the menu bar and title bar and also shows the predefined choices within those pull-down menus. Additional information about these choices is found in "Common User Access Interface Components" beginning on page<a href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS"> 2.2</a>.<br /><br /><b>File</b> The <b>File</b> menu contains choices that affect the overall object in the window. There are two types of <b>File</b> menus: application-oriented and object-oriented.<br /><br /><b>Application-Oriented</b><br />Contains choices that affect the underlying object presented in the application-oriented window. For example, the <b>File</b> menu could contain an <b>Open</b> choice that allows a user to change the object presented in the window.<br /><br /><b>Object-Oriented</b><br />Contains choices that affect the underlying object presented in the object-oriented window. The label of this choice is the class name of<br />the underlying object that is shown in the window. For example, in the <b>File</b> pull-down menu for a window displaying a view of a folder, the label of the menu-bar choice would be <b>Folder,</b> and its pull-down menu could contain the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice that would allow a user to open new windows displaying views of the same underlying object.<br /><br /><b>Selected</b> The <b>Selected</b> menu is used for containers and data objects where objects within the window can be selected and actions applied to them. If the objects in the window are not homogeneous, then the available choices in this menu may vary widely, depending on which object is selected. For example, the names of the views listed from the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice, may be very different depending on the views available for the selected object. The <b>Selected</b> menu has the same contents as the <b>File</b> menu for the selected object if a window was opened on that object.<br /><br /><b>Edit</b> The <b>Edit</b> menu contains choices that are standard across many different object types, such as the choices that provide access to the clipboard.<br /><br /><b>View</b> The <b>View</b> menu contains choices that change the view type or some aspects of the view, such as the <b>Include,</b> <b>Sort,</b> and <b>Refresh</b> choices.<br /><br /><b>Options</b> The <b>Options</b> menu contains choices that allow a user to tailor the behavior and appearance of an application-oriented product.<br /><br /><b>Windows</b> The <b>Windows</b> menu contains choices that provide access to other windows that are related to the same task.<br /><br /><b>Help</b> The <b>Help</b> menu contains choices that provide access to help information.<br /><br /><b>System</b> <b>menu</b> The system menu contains choices that change the visual characteristics of a window and other operating-environment-specific functions. Included in this menu is a <b>Close</b> choice for closing the window.<br /><br /><a id="FIGAPPMEN" name="FIGAPPMEN"><br /></a></pre> 6573 6574 6575 6576 6577 6578 6579 6580 6581 6582 6583 6584 <hr /> 6585 6586 6587 6588 6589 <pre><a id="FIGAPPMEN" name="FIGAPPMEN"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-140?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 140" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P140.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 6598 6599 <hr /> 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 152. Application-Oriented Menu Choices</span><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGOBJMEN" name="FIGOBJMEN"><br /></a></pre> 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 <hr /> 6615 6616 6617 6618 6619 <pre><a id="FIGOBJMEN" name="FIGOBJMEN"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-141?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 141" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P141.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 6625 6626 6627 6628 6629 <hr /> 6630 6631 6632 6633 6634 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 153. Object-Oriented Menu Choices</span><br /><br /><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Pop-Up</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Menu</i><span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"> </span><i style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;">Contents</i>: Pop-up menus provide choices specific to an object. Pop-up menus are not visible until a user requests the pop-up menu be displayed. Unlike the choices in the menu bar and pull-downs, choices on a pop-up menu for a particular object vary depending on the state of the object. That is, only the choices that are currently valid are displayed in the pop-up menu.<br /><br /><a href="2.1.3.5.1?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTID">Figure 154</a> shows the content and layout that the CUA guidelines define for pop-up menus. In the top portion of the menu is the <b>Help</b> choice and other choices that open a view of the object. In the center of the pop-up menu are the choices that access the clipboard. In the lower area of the pop-up menu are object-specific choices provided for convenience to users. The CUA guidelines define such choices as <b>Undo,</b> <b>Print,</b> and <b>Clear,</b> that may appear in the lower area of the pop-up menu. Other choices defined by the product may appear in this area as well.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCONTID" name="FIGCONTID"><br /></a></pre> 6635 6636 6637 6638 6639 6640 6641 6642 6643 6644 <hr /> 6645 6646 6647 6648 6649 <pre><a id="FIGCONTID" name="FIGCONTID"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-142?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 142" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P142.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 6650 6651 6652 6653 6654 6655 6656 6657 6658 6659 <hr /> 6660 6661 6662 6663 6664 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 154. Pop-Up Menu</span><br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6665 <br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Menus</b><br />° <a href="2.2.8?DT=19921204095534#HDRCASCDM">"Cascaded Menu" in topic 2.2.8</a><br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a><br />° <a href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a><br />° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a><br />° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a><br />° <a href="2.2.85?DT=19921204095534#HDRPULLDWN">"Pull-Down Menu" in topic 2.2.85</a><br />° <a href="2.2.107?DT=19921204095534#HDRSFMENUS">"Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)" in topic 2.2.107</a> 6666 </pre> 6667 6668 6669 6670 6671 6672 6673 6674 6675 6676 <hr /> 6677 6678 6679 6680 6681 <h2>2.1.4 User Interaction</h2> 6682 6683 6684 6685 6686 6687 6688 <hr /> 6689 6690 6691 6692 6693 <h3>2.1.4.1 Selection</h3> 6694 6695 6696 6697 6698 6699 6700 6701 6702 6703 6704 6705 <pre width="80">A user interacts with an object by identifying the desired object and indicating actions to apply to that object. CUA interface guidelines define that a user must indicate an object or group of objects first, and then choose actions to apply to the object or group of objects.<br /><br />A user can implicitly or explicitly indicate, or select, an object. An object that is implicitly selected does not require a specific selection action by a user and does not display selected-state emphasis. For example, a user does not need to first explicitly select an object in order to request its pop-up menu. Pointing at an object and requesting its pop-up menu will implicitly select the object. However, to request a pop-up menu for a group of objects, the user must explicitly select all objects to be included in the group.<br /><br />An object that is explicitly selected is put into a selected state. This selected state is indicated with selected-state emphasis. Because an object stays selected until it is deselected, multiple actions can be applied to the same object without selecting that object multiple times.<br /><br />Selecting an object does not imply an action, affect the object itself, or commit a user to some action. A user can select or deselect the object without changing the object in any way. In contrast to selecting an object, selecting an action causes something to happen to the selected object. For example, when the <b>Delete</b> choice is applied to a selected object, that object is deleted.<br /></pre> 6706 6707 6708 6709 6710 6711 6712 6713 6714 6715 <pre></pre> 6716 6717 6718 6719 6720 6721 6722 6723 6724 6725 <hr /> 6726 6727 6728 6729 6730 <h4>2.1.4.1.2 Selection Techniques</h4> 6731 6732 6733 6734 6735 6736 6737 6738 6739 6740 6741 6742 6743 6744 <pre>Selection techniques are the interaction mechanisms used for selecting objects. The CUA guidelines define techniques for both the keyboard and the mouse. Of the techniques specified, some are appropriate for selecting one object at a time, and others are appropriate for selecting multiple objects.<br /><br />All selection techniques defined by the CUA guidelines are either point selection, point-to-endpoint selection, or random-point selection. The specific behavior of the selection technique depends on the selection type used, the type of object being selected, and the view of that object.<br /><br />Point selection allows a user to select one object at a time. For example, the user moves the cursor to the object and presses the spacebar or clicks on the object with the mouse.<br /><br />Point-to-endpoint selection allows a user to select all objects between two or more specified points. For example, a user can define two ends of a rectangle to select all objects fully contained within that rectangle; however, in a different type of view, any object or part of an object that falls within the defined area might be selected.<br /><br />Random-point selection allows a user to select objects as the pointer passes over them, in whatever order the user chooses.<br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6745 <br />° <a href="2.2.7?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUTOSEL">"Automatic Selection" in topic 2.2.7</a><br />° <a href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#HDREXSEL">"Extended Selection" in topic 2.2.34</a><br />° <a href="2.2.57?DT=19921204095534#HDRMARSEL">"Marquee Selection" in topic 2.2.57</a><br />° <a href="2.2.66?DT=19921204095534#HDRMULTSEL">"Multiple Selection" in topic 2.2.66</a><br />° <a href="2.2.78?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIMPSEL">"Point Selection" in topic 2.2.78</a><br />° <a href="2.2.79?DT=19921204095534#HDRRANSEL">"Point-to-Endpoint Selection" in topic 2.2.79</a><br />° <a href="2.2.89?DT=19921204095534#HDRTSWPSEL">"Random-Point Selection" in topic 2.2.89</a><br />° <a href="2.2.100?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELALLC">"Select All and Deselect All (Choice)" in topic 2.2.100</a><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a><br />° <a href="2.2.106?DT=19921204095534#HDRSHORTCT">"Shortcut Key" in topic 2.2.106</a><br />° <a href="2.2.108?DT=19921204095534#HDRSINSEL">"Single Selection" in topic 2.2.108</a> 6746 </pre> 6747 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 <hr /> 6754 6755 6756 6757 6758 <h4>2.1.4.1.1 Selection Types</h4> 6759 6760 6761 6762 6763 6764 6765 6766 6767 6768 6769 6770 <pre width="80">The CUA guidelines define three types of selection based on the number of objects that can be selected:<br /><br />° The first type, single selection, allows at most one object to be selected at any time in a scope.<br />° Multiple selection allows a user to select one or more objects at any time in a scope.<br />° Extended selection allows a user to select only one object at a time or to extend the selection to more than one object.<br /><br />One of these types of selection must be defined for each group of objects. For each of the controls discussed in <a href="2.1.3.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTHD">"Controls" in topic 2.1.3.5</a>, one or more of these types of selection are already defined.<br /><br /></pre> 6771 6772 6773 6774 6775 6776 6777 6778 6779 6780 6781 6782 <hr /> 6783 6784 6785 6786 6787 <h3>2.1.4.2 Data Transfer</h3> 6788 6789 6790 6791 6792 6793 6794 6795 6796 6797 <pre width="80">Users can transfer data within an object, or from one object to another by dragging with the pointing device or by using the clipboard choices (<b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> <b>Create,</b> and <b>Paste</b>). Data-transfer operations allow a user to move data, copy data, or create a new object.<br /><br />When a mouse is used, a user first identifies the object to be transferred. The object is identified by pressing the mouse manipulation button while the pointer is over the object. If more than one object is to be dragged, then the objects must be selected before the transfer. While holding the mouse manipulation button down, the user moves the mouse and drags the object or group of objects until it is at the desired location. The characteristics of the source and target object determine what the default operation for the object will be, such as a move or copy. The user can be allowed to override this default operation by pressing a<br />key before dropping the object at the desired location.<br /><br />The user can also transfer data by using the clipboard. The clipboard provided by the operating environment can be accessed by any object that provides the <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> <b>Create,</b> and <b>Paste</b> choices.<br /><br />To retrieve the contents of the clipboard, the user selects the <b>Paste</b> choice. A copy of the contents of the clipboard is pasted at the cursor position. Because the clipboard contents are preserved, the paste action can be repeated to get additional copies or, for the <b>Create</b> choice, to paste additional new objects.<br /><br /></pre> 6798 6799 6800 6801 6802 6803 6804 6805 6806 6807 <hr /> 6808 6809 6810 6811 6812 <h3>2.1.4.3 Direct Manipulation</h3> 6813 6814 6815 6816 6817 6818 6819 6820 6821 6822 <pre width="80">Direct manipulation allows a user to perform actions on objects by interacting directly with the objects. Dragging an object with a mouse and dropping it on another object is one form of direct manipulation. Moving, copying, printing, and deleting are examples of actions that can be accomplished using direct-manipulation techniques.<br /><br />Using direct-manipulation techniques is usually an easier method of performing actions than performing the equivalent actions from menu bars and pull-downs. For example, with direct manipulation a user can move a document from one container to another by dragging it to the new container. Using the pull-downs requires that a user first select the document, then select the <b>Copy</b> choice from a pull-down menu to copy the object to the clipboard and then paste the clipboard contents into the new folder.<br /><br />The user can perform other actions on objects by requesting a pop-up menu for an object. Pop-up menus can be thought of as a form of direct manipulation because they allow a user to more directly interact with an object, rather than through an intermediate control, such as a pull-down menu in a window that contains a choice that acts on a view of an object.<br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6823 <br />° <a href="2.2.17?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTEXH">"Contextual Help" in topic 2.2.17</a><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a><br />° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a><br />° <a href="2.2.112?DT=19921204095534#HDRSOURCEE">"Source Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.112</a><br />° <a href="2.2.115?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPLTWIN">"Split Window" in topic 2.2.115</a><br />° <a href="2.2.118?DT=19921204095534#HDRTARGETE">"Target Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.118</a> 6824 </pre> 6825 6826 6827 6828 6829 6830 6831 6832 6833 6834 <hr /> 6835 6836 6837 6838 6839 <h3>2.1.4.4 Scrolling</h3> 6840 6841 6842 6843 6844 6845 6846 6847 6848 6849 <pre width="80">Scrolling is used to display information in a view that does not fit within the current size of the window or the part of the window allocated for that information. For example, a long list of document names displayed in a window, or in a list box within a window, may require scroll enabling to allow a user to see all the names in the list.<br /><br />A scroll bar is used as a visual indication that information may be scrolled. A user can interact with a scroll bar using the pointing device to scroll the information. In addition the CUA guidelines define techniques for scrolling information using the keyboard.<br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6850 <br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a><br />° <a href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a><br />° <a href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLB">"Scroll Bar" in topic 2.2.97</a><br />° <a href="2.2.98?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLI">"Scrolling Increment" in topic 2.2.98</a> 6851 </pre> 6852 6853 6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 6860 6861 <hr /> 6862 6863 6864 6865 6866 <h3>2.1.4.5 Pointers and Cursors</h3> 6867 6868 6869 6870 6871 6872 6873 6874 6875 6876 <pre width="80">A visible cue is provided for both the pointing device (such as a mouse) and the keyboard to show where interaction will occur. The visual cue for the pointing device is the pointer; the visual cue for the keyboard is the cursor. To avoid confusion as to where input will occur, only one pointer and one cursor are visible at a time.<br /><br />The user moves the pointer freely on the screen. Users can move the cursor to only valid cursor positions. For example, the cursor can be moved to the menu bar choices and push buttons, but not to field prompts or headings. When a user clicks the pointing device, the cursor is placed at the indicated position, if possible. A cursor never affects the pointer location.<br /><br />The CUA guidelines define the following types of pointers: an arrow pointer, an arrow pointer with augmentations, a wait pointer, and an I-beam pointer. Their descriptions follow in <a href="2.1.4.5?DT=19921204095534#FIGDUMMY">Figure 155</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGDUMMY" name="FIGDUMMY"></a><a id="TBLDUMMY" name="TBLDUMMY"> <br />_________________________________________________________________</a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 155. Predefined Pointers</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________________________|<br />| Arrow pointer | <a href="picture-143?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 143" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P143.GIF" /></a> | The pointer that the user sees |<br />| | | most of the time and that is used |<br />| | | to select choices and objects. |<br />| | | The arrow pointer is also used |<br />| | | during a direct-manipulation |<br />| | | operation on an object to |<br />| | | indicate that the object will be |<br />| | | moved. |<br />|__________________|____|_______________________________________|<br />| Arrow pointer -- | <a href="picture-144?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 144" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P144.GIF" /></a> | The arrow pointer is modified |<br />| While copying or | | when a user performs a |<br />| creating | | direct-manipulation operation on |<br />| | | an object that results in a copy |<br />| | | of that object being created. |<br />|__________________|____|_______________________________________|<br />| Arrow pointer -- | <a href="picture-145?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 145" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P145.GIF" /></a> | When an object is not a valid |<br />| Do not | | target for a direct-manipulation |<br />| | | operation, the arrow pointer is |<br />| | | augmented with a circle with a |<br />| | | slash through it. The source |<br />| | | object will not be dropped at the |<br />| | | current pointer location. |<br />|__________________|____|_______________________________________|<br />| Wait pointer | <a href="picture-146?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 146" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P146.GIF" /></a> | A pointer that indicates to a |<br />| | | user that the computer is |<br />| | | performing a process and cannot |<br />| | | receive input at the current |<br />| | | pointer location. A user can |<br />| | | move the wait pointer, but the |<br />| | | wait pointer cannot be used to |<br />| | | perform any operation. |<br />|__________________|____|_______________________________________|<br />| I-beam pointer | <a href="picture-147?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 147" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P147.GIF" /></a> | A pointer that indicates that the |<br />| | | pointer is positioned over an |<br />| | | area where text can be typed or |<br />| | | selected. |<br />|__________________|____|_______________________________________|<br /><br />Products may change the appearance of the pointer to indicate a product- specific action. A tool palette may be provided by a product to allow easy access to several actions. When a user selects a tool from a tool palette, the pointer shape changes and pointer interaction is determined by the tool. For example, selecting a line-drawing tool causes a line to be drawn as users drag the pointing device.<br /><br />CUA-interface guidelines define two types of cursors:<br /><br /><b style="font-weight: bold;">Selection</b><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span><b style="font-weight: bold;">cursor</b><br />A selection cursor is used for settings choices and for all objects. This cursor typically appears as a dotted outline box around the settings choice or the object. The cursor is usually seen even when other types of emphasis are displayed. For example, the selection cursor is visible on an object that is displayed with in-use emphasis.<br /><br /><b style="font-weight: bold;">Text</b><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span><b style="font-weight: bold;">cursor</b><br />A text cursor is used for keyboard text input. Two visuals are typically used for text cursors: a vertical bar to indicate insert mode and a colored background behind a character to indicate replace mode.<br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6877 <br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Keyboard</b> <b>and</b> <b>Cursor</b> <b>Usage</b><br />° <a href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a><br />° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a><br />° <a href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a><br />° <a href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a><br />° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a><br />° <a href="2.2.106?DT=19921204095534#HDRSHORTCT">"Shortcut Key" in topic 2.2.106</a> 6878 <br /><b>Designing</b> <b>Mouse</b> <b>and</b> <b>Pointer</b> <b>Usage</b><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a><br />° <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a><br />° <a href="2.2.77?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTD">"Pointing Device" in topic 2.2.77</a><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a><br />° <a href="2.2.120?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOOLP">"Tool Palette" in topic 2.2.120</a> 6879 </pre> 6880 6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 6887 6888 6889 <hr /> 6890 6891 6892 6893 6894 <h2>2.1.5 Cues</h2> 6895 6896 6897 6898 6899 6900 6901 6902 6903 6904 <pre width="80">Cues provide information to users and help to orient them as they interact with the interface. Cues can be used to direct a user's attention to a part of the screen or to indicate a particular state of an object. The two kinds of cues are visible and audible.<br /><br /></pre> 6905 6906 6907 6908 6909 6910 6911 <hr /> 6912 6913 6914 6915 6916 <h3>2.1.5.1 Visible Cues</h3> 6917 6918 6919 6920 6921 6922 6923 6924 6925 6926 6927 6928 <pre width="80">Visible cues allow users to immediately see the results of their interaction with the interface. We only discuss emphasis here, but arrow pointers, cursors, even animation, can be used as visible cues as well.<br /><br />The type of emphasis used is determined by the type of interaction a user has with an object or choice. More than one type of emphasis may be valid on an object or choice at the same time, and therefore may be seen simultaneously. The CUA guidelines define these types of emphasis:<br /><br /><b style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">In-Use</b><span style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;">Emphasis</b>: Indicates that a window is currently open on an object; users can still interact with the object as they normally would.<br /><br /><b style="font-style: italic;">Selected-State</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Emphasis</b>: Indicates that a choice or an object is selected.<br /><br /><b style="font-style: italic;">Unavailable-State</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Emphasis</b>: Indicates that a choice cannot be selected at that time.<br /><br /><b style="font-style: italic;">Target</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Emphasis</b>: Indicates the object that is the receiver of a direct-manipulation action. Target emphasis is used in conjunction with different pointer visuals to indicate the type of action that will be performed. Target emphasis can also indicate where the source object will be placed in the target object.<br /><br /><b style="font-style: italic;">Source</b><span style="font-style: italic;"> </span><b style="font-style: italic;">Emphasis</b>: Indicates that an object is the source for a direct manipulation action. Source emphasis remains in effect until the direct manipulation action is complete.<br /></pre> 6929 6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 6937 6938 <pre></pre> 6939 6940 6941 6942 6943 6944 6945 6946 6947 6948 <hr /> 6949 6950 6951 6952 6953 <h3>2.1.5.2 Audible Cues</h3> 6954 6955 6956 6957 6958 6959 6960 6961 6962 6963 <pre width="80">Audible cues are provided when a user attempts to perform an action that is not valid or when an event or state of the operating environment requires the user's attention. For example, when a user tries to select a choice displayed with unavailable-state emphasis, an audible cue should be generated. However, users can always specify in their operating environment that they want audible cues turned off.<br /><br />Audible cues can be anything from a beep to a recorded message. The only limit is the hardware your product runs on and the usefulness of the cue for your users.<br /><br /><i>Related</i> <i>Topics</i> 6964 <br /><b>Providing</b> <b>Cues</b><br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a><br />° <a href="2.2.53?DT=19921204095534#HDRINUSEE">"In-Use Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.53</a><br />° <a href="2.2.102?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELEMPH">"Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.102</a><br />° <a href="2.2.112?DT=19921204095534#HDRSOURCEE">"Source Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.112</a><br />° <a href="2.2.118?DT=19921204095534#HDRTARGETE">"Target Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.118</a><br />° <a href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 6965 </pre> 6966 6967 6968 6969 6970 6971 6972 6973 6974 6975 <hr /> 6976 6977 6978 6979 6980 <h1 style="width: 640px;"><a id="HDRTOPICS" name="HDRTOPICS">2.2 6981 Chapter 8. 2403 6982 Common User 2404 6983 Access Interface Components</a></h1> 2405 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 2406 <ul> 2407 <li><a href="2.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.1 2408 How to Use the CUA Reference</a></li> 2409 <li><a href="2.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.2 2410 Action Choice (Choice Type)</a></li> 2411 <li><a href="2.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.3 2412 Action Message</a></li> 2413 <li><a href="2.2.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.4 2414 Action Window</a></li> 2415 <li><a href="2.2.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.5 2416 Active Window</a></li> 2417 <li><a href="2.2.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.6 2418 Audible Feedback</a></li> 2419 <li><a href="2.2.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.7 2420 Automatic Selection</a></li> 2421 <li><a href="2.2.8?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.8 2422 Cascaded Menu</a></li> 2423 <li><a href="2.2.9?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.9 2424 Check Box (Control)</a></li> 2425 <li><a href="2.2.10?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.10 2426 Choice</a></li> 2427 <li><a href="2.2.11?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.11 2428 Clear (Choice)</a></li> 2429 <li><a href="2.2.12?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.12 2430 Clipboard</a></li> 2431 <li><a href="2.2.13?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.13 2432 Close (Choice)</a></li> 2433 <li><a href="2.2.14?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.14 2434 Column Heading</a></li> 2435 <li><a href="2.2.15?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.15 2436 Combination Box (Control)</a></li> 2437 <li><a href="2.2.16?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.16 2438 Container (Control)</a></li> 2439 <li><a href="2.2.17?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.17 2440 Contextual Help</a></li> 2441 <li><a href="2.2.18?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.18 2442 Control</a></li> 2443 <li><a href="2.2.19?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.19 2444 Copy (Choice)</a></li> 2445 <li><a href="2.2.20?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.20 2446 Create (Choice)</a></li> 2447 <li><a href="2.2.21?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.21 2448 Cursor</a></li> 2449 <li><a href="2.2.22?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.22 2450 Cut (Choice)</a></li> 2451 <li><a href="2.2.23?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.23 2452 Data Transfer</a></li> 2453 <li><a href="2.2.24?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.24 2454 Default Action</a></li> 2455 <li><a href="2.2.25?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.25 2456 Delete (Choice)</a></li> 2457 <li><a href="2.2.26?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.26 2458 Delete Folder (Object)</a></li> 2459 <li><a href="2.2.27?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.27 2460 Descriptive Text</a></li> 2461 <li><a href="2.2.28?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.28 2462 Device (Object)</a></li> 2463 <li><a href="2.2.29?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.29 2464 Direct Manipulation</a></li> 2465 <li><a href="2.2.30?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.30 2466 Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)</a></li> 2467 <li><a href="2.2.31?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.31 2468 Drop-Down List (Control)</a></li> 2469 <li><a href="2.2.32?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.32 2470 Edit Menu</a></li> 2471 <li><a href="2.2.33?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.33 2472 Entry Field (Control)</a></li> 2473 <li><a href="2.2.34?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.34 2474 Extended Selection</a></li> 2475 <li><a href="2.2.35?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.35 2476 Field Prompt</a></li> 2477 <li><a href="2.2.36?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.36 2478 File Menu (Application-Oriented)</a></li> 2479 <li><a href="2.2.37?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.37 2480 File Menu (Object-Oriented)</a></li> 2481 <li><a href="2.2.38?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.38 2482 Find (Choice)</a></li> 2483 <li><a href="2.2.39?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.39 2484 First-Letter Cursor Navigation</a></li> 2485 <li><a href="2.2.40?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.40 2486 Folder (Object)</a></li> 2487 <li><a href="2.2.41?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.41 2488 General Help (Choice)</a></li> 2489 <li><a href="2.2.42?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.42 2490 Group Box</a></li> 2491 <li><a href="2.2.43?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.43 2492 Group Heading</a></li> 2493 <li><a href="2.2.44?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.44 2494 Help Index (Choice)</a></li> 2495 <li><a href="2.2.45?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.45 2496 Help Menu</a></li> 2497 <li><a href="2.2.46?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.46 2498 Hide (Choice)</a></li> 2499 <li><a href="2.2.47?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.47 2500 Icon</a></li> 2501 <li><a href="2.2.48?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.48 2502 Inactive Window</a></li> 2503 <li><a href="2.2.49?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.49 2504 Include (Choice)</a></li> 2505 <li><a href="2.2.50?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.50 2506 Information Area</a></li> 2507 <li><a href="2.2.51?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.51 2508 Information Message</a></li> 2509 <li><a href="2.2.52?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.52 2510 Input Focus</a></li> 2511 <li><a href="2.2.53?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.53 2512 In-Use Emphasis (Cue)</a></li> 2513 <li><a href="2.2.54?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.54 2514 Keyboard</a></li> 2515 <li><a href="2.2.55?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.55 2516 Keys Help</a></li> 2517 <li><a href="2.2.56?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.56 2518 List Box (Control)</a></li> 2519 <li><a href="2.2.57?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.57 2520 Marquee Selection</a></li> 2521 <li><a href="2.2.58?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.58 2522 Maximize (Choice)</a></li> 2523 <li><a href="2.2.59?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.59 2524 Menu (Control)</a></li> 2525 <li><a href="2.2.60?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.60 2526 Menu Bar</a></li> 2527 <li><a href="2.2.61?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.61 2528 Message</a></li> 2529 <li><a href="2.2.62?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.62 2530 Minimize (Choice)</a></li> 2531 <li><a href="2.2.63?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.63 2532 Mnemonic</a></li> 2533 <li><a href="2.2.64?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.64 2534 Mouse</a></li> 2535 <li><a href="2.2.65?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.65 2536 Move (Choice)</a></li> 2537 <li><a href="2.2.66?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.66 2538 Multiple Selection</a></li> 2539 <li><a href="2.2.67?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.67 2540 New (Choice)</a></li> 2541 <li><a href="2.2.68?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.68 2542 Notebook (Control)</a></li> 2543 <li><a href="2.2.69?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.69 2544 Object</a></li> 2545 <li><a href="2.2.70?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.70 2546 Open (Choice)</a></li> 2547 <li><a href="2.2.71?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.71 2548 Open As (Choice)</a></li> 2549 <li><a href="2.2.72?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.72 2550 Open (Action Window)</a></li> 2551 <li><a href="2.2.73?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.73 2552 Options Menu</a></li> 2553 <li><a href="2.2.74?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.74 2554 Paste (Choice)</a></li> 2555 <li><a href="2.2.75?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.75 2556 Pointer</a></li> 2557 <li><a href="2.2.76?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.76 2558 Pointer (Predefined)</a></li> 2559 <li><a href="2.2.77?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.77 2560 Pointing Device</a></li> 2561 <li><a href="2.2.78?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.78 2562 Point Selection</a></li> 2563 <li><a href="2.2.79?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.79 2564 Point-to-Endpoint Selection</a></li> 2565 <li><a href="2.2.80?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.80 2566 Pop-Up Menu</a></li> 2567 <li><a href="2.2.81?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.81 2568 Primary Window</a></li> 2569 <li><a href="2.2.82?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.82 2570 Print (Choice)</a></li> 2571 <li><a href="2.2.83?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.83 2572 Product Information (Choice)</a></li> 2573 <li><a href="2.2.84?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.84 2574 Progress Indicator</a></li> 2575 <li><a href="2.2.85?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.85 2576 Pull-Down Menu</a></li> 2577 <li><a href="2.2.86?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.86 2578 Push Button (Control)</a></li> 2579 <li><a href="2.2.87?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.87 2580 Push Button (Predefined)</a></li> 2581 <li><a href="2.2.88?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.88 2582 Radio Button (Control)</a></li> 2583 <li><a href="2.2.89?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.89 2584 Random-Point Selection</a></li> 2585 <li><a href="2.2.90?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.90 2586 Reflection (Object)</a></li> 2587 <li><a href="2.2.91?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.91 2588 Refresh and Refresh Now (Choice)</a></li> 2589 <li><a href="2.2.92?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.92 2590 Restore (Choice)</a></li> 2591 <li><a href="2.2.93?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.93 2592 Routing (Choice Type)</a></li> 2593 <li><a href="2.2.94?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.94 2594 Save (Choice)</a></li> 2595 <li><a href="2.2.95?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.95 2596 Save As (Action Window)</a></li> 2597 <li><a href="2.2.96?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.96 2598 Save As (Choice)</a></li> 2599 <li><a href="2.2.97?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.97 2600 Scroll Bar</a></li> 2601 <li><a href="2.2.98?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.98 2602 Scrolling Increment</a></li> 2603 <li><a href="2.2.99?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.99 2604 Secondary Window</a></li> 2605 <li><a href="2.2.100?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.100 2606 Select All and Deselect All (Choice)</a></li> 2607 <li><a href="2.2.101?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.101 2608 Selected Menu</a></li> 2609 <li><a href="2.2.102?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.102 2610 Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)</a></li> 2611 <li><a href="2.2.103?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.103 2612 Selection Types and Techniques</a></li> 2613 <li><a href="2.2.104?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.104 2614 Separator</a></li> 2615 <li><a href="2.2.105?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.105 2616 Settings (Choice Type)</a></li> 2617 <li><a href="2.2.106?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.106 2618 Shortcut Key</a></li> 2619 <li><a href="2.2.107?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.107 2620 Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)</a></li> 2621 <li><a href="2.2.108?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.108 2622 Single Selection</a></li> 2623 <li><a href="2.2.109?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.109 2624 Size (Choice)</a></li> 2625 <li><a href="2.2.110?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.110 2626 Slider (Control)</a></li> 2627 <li><a href="2.2.111?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.111 2628 Sort (Choice)</a></li> 2629 <li><a href="2.2.112?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.112 2630 Source Emphasis (Cue)</a></li> 2631 <li><a href="2.2.113?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.113 2632 Spin Button (Control)</a></li> 2633 <li><a href="2.2.114?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.114 2634 Split (Choice)</a></li> 2635 <li><a href="2.2.115?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.115 2636 Split Window</a></li> 2637 <li><a href="2.2.116?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.116 2638 Status Area (Cue)</a></li> 2639 <li><a href="2.2.117?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.117 2640 System Menu</a></li> 2641 <li><a href="2.2.118?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.118 2642 Target Emphasis (Cue)</a></li> 2643 <li><a href="2.2.119?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.119 2644 Text Entry</a></li> 2645 <li><a href="2.2.120?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.120 2646 Tool Palette</a></li> 2647 <li><a href="2.2.121?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.121 2648 Tutorial (Choice)</a></li> 2649 <li><a href="2.2.122?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.122 2650 Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)</a></li> 2651 <li><a href="2.2.123?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.123 2652 Undo and Redo (Choice)</a></li> 2653 <li><a href="2.2.124?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.124 2654 Using Help (Choice)</a></li> 2655 <li><a href="2.2.125?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.125 2656 Value Set (Control)</a></li> 2657 <li><a href="2.2.126?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.126 2658 View Menu</a></li> 2659 <li><a href="2.2.127?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.127 2660 Warning Message</a></li> 2661 <li><a href="2.2.128?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.128 2662 Window</a></li> 2663 <li><a href="2.2.129?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.129 2664 Window Layout</a></li> 2665 <li><a href="2.2.130?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.130 2666 Window List</a></li> 2667 <li><a href="2.2.131?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.131 2668 Window List (Choice in System Menu)</a></li> 2669 <li><a href="2.2.132?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.132 2670 Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)</a></li> 2671 <li><a href="2.2.133?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.133 2672 Window Navigation</a></li> 2673 <li><a href="2.2.134?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.134 2674 Windows Menu</a></li> 2675 <li><a href="2.2.135?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.135 2676 Window Title</a></li> 2677 <li><a href="2.2.136?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.136 2678 Work Area (Object)</a></li> 2679 <li><a href="2.2.137?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">2.2.137 2680 Workplace</a></li> 2681 </ul> 2682 <pre></pre> 2683 <hr /> 2684 <h2>2.2.1 How to Use the CUA 6984 6985 6986 6987 6988 6989 6990 <h1 style="width: 640px;"><a id="HDRTOPICS" name="HDRTOPICS"></a></h1> 6991 6992 6993 6994 6995 6996 6997 <h1 style="width: 640px;"><a id="HDRTOPICS" name="HDRTOPICS"></a></h1> 6998 6999 7000 7001 7002 7003 7004 <hr /> 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 <h2>2.2.1 How to Use the CUA 2685 7010 Reference</h2> 2686 <pre></pre> 2687 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2688 name="FIGHOWTO" id="FIGHOWTO"> </a><a href="picture-148?mode=zoom"><img 2689 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P148.GIF" 2690 alt="PICTURE 148" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 156. CUA Reference Page Example<br /></pre> 2691 <pre></pre> 2692 <hr /> 2693 <a name="LEN Action Choice (Choice Type)" /> 2694 <h2><a name="LEN Action Choice (Choice Type)">2.2.2 Action 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 7021 7022 <pre width="80"><br /><a id="FIGHOWTO" name="FIGHOWTO"> </a><a href="picture-148?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 148" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P148.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 156. CUA Reference Page Example</span><br /></pre> 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028 7029 7030 7031 7032 <pre></pre> 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7041 7042 <hr /> 7043 <a name="LEN Action Choice (Choice Type)"></a> 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 <h2><a name="LEN Action Choice (Choice Type)">2.2.2 7049 Action 2695 7050 Choice 2696 7051 (Choice Type)</a></h2> 2697 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A choice that immediately begins to perform an action, such as<br />the <b>Close</b> or <b>Copy</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2698 href="picture-149?mode=zoom"><img 2699 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P149.GIF" 2700 alt="PICTURE 149" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2701 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use an action choice for actions on objects that occur<br /> immediately after the choice is selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2702 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects an action choice, immediately begin to<br /> perform the action.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to all action choices through menus or push<br /> buttons, or both.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not use an action choice to open an action window, to display<br /> a cascaded menu, or to display a pull-down menu; instead, use a<br /> routing choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2703 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 2704 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a> 2705 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a> 2706 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2707 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 2708 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 2709 </pre> 2710 <hr /> 2711 <a name="LEN Action Message" /> 2712 <h2><a name="LEN Action Message">2.2.3 Action Message</a></h2> 2713 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A message that indicates that a condition has occurred that<br />requires a response from the user. The user can correct the<br />condition and then continue, withdraw the request, or get help.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2714 href="picture-150?mode=zoom"><img 2715 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P150.GIF" 2716 alt="PICTURE 150" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2717 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an action message when a situation occurs in which a<br /> user must correct the situation and retry, take some related<br /> alternative action, or withdraw the request.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2718 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide controls in the message window that allow a user to<br /> correct the situation that caused the message to appear or to<br /> request a related alternative action. For example, provide an<br /> entry field in which a user can correct a value.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a push button that allows a user to retry the request<br /> after correcting the situation that caused the message to<br /> appear. For example, provide a push button labeled <b>Retry</b> that a<br /> user can select after adding paper to the printer.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If your product can determine that the situation that caused the<br /> message to appear has been corrected so that the process can<br /> continue, immediately remove the message. For example, if the<br /> user puts paper in the printer and the product can determine<br /> that paper has been added, immediately remove the message.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a push button that allows a user to withdraw the<br /> request. For example, provide a push button labeled <b>Cancel.</b> 2719 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user withdraws a request, leave the objects in a form<br /> that is meaningful to a user. For example, when a user requests<br /> to copy a group of objects, and an error occurs that causes the<br /> user to withdraw the request while the fifth object is being<br /> copied, leave the first four copied objects where they are and<br /> remove the partially copied fifth object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In the message text, suggest possible actions that a user can<br /> take to correct the situation that caused the message to appear.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the appropriate symbol in each action message as<br /> <a 2720 href="2.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGACTSYM">Figure 157</a> indicates:<br /><br /><br /><a 2721 name="FIGACTSYM" id="FIGACTSYM" /><a name="TBLACTSYM" id="TBLACTSYM"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 157. Symbols That Appear in Action Messages |<br />|_______________________ ________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Symbol</b> | <b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>use</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a 2722 href="picture-151?mode=zoom"><img 2723 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P151.GIF" 2724 alt="PICTURE 151" /></a> | When a user's immediate attention is not |<br /> | | required, such as when a user's data will not |<br /> | | worsen with time. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a 2725 href="picture-152?mode=zoom"><img 2726 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P152.GIF" 2727 alt="PICTURE 152" /></a> | When a user's immediate attention is required. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide an audible cue when an action message is displayed.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2728 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.51?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFMS">"Information Message" in topic 2.2.51</a> 2729 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a> 2730 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 2731 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.127?DT=19921204095534#HDRWARNMSG">"Warning Message" in topic 2.2.127</a> 2732 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2733 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 2734 </pre> 2735 <hr /> 2736 <a name="LEN Action Window" /> 2737 <h2><a name="LEN Action Window">2.2.4 Action Window</a></h2> 2738 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A secondary window that is used to allow a user to further<br />specify settings that are needed to complete the user's request.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2739 href="picture-153?mode=zoom"><img 2740 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P153.GIF" 2741 alt="PICTURE 153" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2742 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an action window when a user makes a request and more<br /> information is required in order to complete the request.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide an action window when a user selects a routing choice<br /> that leads to a window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2743 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide push buttons in the action window that continue the<br /> request, cancel the request, and allow user to request help.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the default push button continue the request with the<br /> information in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a secondary window to display an action window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2744 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 2745 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 2746 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.99?DT=19921204095534#HDRSECWIND">"Secondary Window" in topic 2.2.99</a> 2747 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2748 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 2749 </pre> 2750 <hr /> 2751 <a name="LEN Active Window" /> 2752 <h2><a name="LEN Active Window">2.2.5 Active Window</a></h2> 2753 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The window that currently has the input focus. The active<br />window is indicated by emphasis displayed on its title bar and<br />border, as specified by the operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2754 href="picture-154?mode=zoom"><img 2755 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P154.GIF" 2756 alt="PICTURE 154" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2757 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Make the window that can currently receive keyboard input the<br /> active window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2758 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a window receives input focus, change the color of the<br /> active window's title bar and border to the color the user has<br /> specified for the operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an inactive window becomes active as a result of a<br /> technique that does not explicitly specify the position of the<br /> cursor, redisplay the cursor in the position it was in when the<br /> window was last active.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a window is reopened and information about the previous<br /> position of the cursor has been saved, redisplay the cursor in<br /> its saved position. Otherwise, display the cursor in a default<br /> position, for example on the top left-most item on which the<br /> cursor can be positioned.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place a window on top of all other primary windows and make it<br /> the active window when a user:<br /><br /><br />° Selects an object in the window<br /><br /><br />° Selects the title bar or window border of that window<br /><br /><br />° Presses the key assigned to the switch between unassociated<br />windows function<br /><br /><br />° Presses the key assigned to the switch between associated<br />windows function.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Design a window so that a user can interact with it or make it<br /> active when it is not the topmost window. For example, when a<br /> user begins a process that searches a text object, allow the<br /> user to interact with the text object while continuing to<br /> display the <b>Find</b> action window on top of the text window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2759 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.48?DT=19921204095534#HDRINACTWI">"Inactive Window" in topic 2.2.48</a> 2760 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a> 2761 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2762 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 2763 </pre> 2764 <hr /> 2765 <a name="LEN Audible Feedback" /> 2766 <h2><a name="LEN Audible Feedback">2.2.6 Audible Feedback</a></h2> 2767 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A sound generated by the computer to draw a user's attention to,<br />or provide feedback about, an event or state of the computer.<br />Audible feedback enhances and reinforces visible feedback.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2768 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide audible feedback when a warning message or action<br /> message is displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide audible feedback when a user types a character that is<br /> not a mnemonic for the window in which the cursor is positioned,<br /> and the control on which the cursor is positioned does not<br /> accept text input. For example, if mnemonics are supported but<br /> no choice has "L" assigned as the mnemonic, provide audible<br /> feedback when "L" is typed. If mnemonics are not supported, do<br /> not provide audible feedback when the user types a character.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide audible feedback when a user attempts to select a choice<br /> that is displayed with unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2769 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user has turned off the audible feedback option for the<br /> operating environment and a situation arises in which the system<br /> would normally generate audible feedback, do not generate<br /> audible feedback. For example, if a user has turned off audible<br /> feedback for the operating environment, do not generate audible<br /> feedback when an action message is displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to take advantage of audio-generation capabilities<br /> of hardware and software. For example, allow a user to specify<br /> different sounds to different events. At a minimum, generate a<br /> beep as audible feedback.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2770 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a> 2771 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 2772 </pre> 2773 <hr /> 2774 <a name="LEN Automatic Selection" /> 2775 <h2><a name="LEN Automatic Selection">2.2.7 Automatic 7052 7053 7054 7055 7056 7057 7058 7059 7060 7061 <pre width="80"><br />A choice that immediately begins to perform an action, such as the <b>Close</b> or <b>Copy</b> choice.<br /><br /><a href="picture-149?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 149" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P149.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7062 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Use an action choice for actions on objects that occur immediately after the choice is selected.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7063 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects an action choice, immediately begin to perform the action.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to all action choices through menus or push buttons, or both.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not use an action choice to open an action window, to display a cascaded menu, or to display a pull-down menu; instead, use a routing choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7064 <br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 7065 ° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a> 7066 ° <a href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a> 7067 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7068 <br />° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 7069 ° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 7070 </pre> 7071 7072 7073 7074 7075 7076 7077 7078 7079 7080 <hr /> 7081 <a name="LEN Action Message"></a> 7082 7083 7084 7085 7086 <h2><a name="LEN Action Message">2.2.3 Action Message</a></h2> 7087 7088 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094 7095 7096 <pre width="80"><br />A message that indicates that a condition has occurred that requires a response from the user. The user can correct the condition and then continue, withdraw the request, or get help.<br /><br /><a href="picture-150?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 150" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P150.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7097 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an action message when a situation occurs in which a user must correct the situation and retry, take some related alternative action, or withdraw the request.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7098 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide controls in the message window that allow a user to correct the situation that caused the message to appear or to request a related alternative action. For example, provide an entry field in which a user can correct a value.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a push button that allows a user to retry the request after correcting the situation that caused the message to appear. For example, provide a push button labeled <b>Retry</b> that a user can select after adding paper to the printer.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If your product can determine that the situation that caused the message to appear has been corrected so that the process can continue, immediately remove the message. For example, if the user puts paper in the printer and the product can determine that paper has been added, immediately remove the message.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a push button that allows a user to withdraw the request. For example, provide a push button labeled <b>Cancel</b>.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user withdraws a request, leave the objects in a form that is meaningful to a user. For example, when a user requests to copy a group of objects, and an error occurs that causes the user to withdraw the request while the fifth object is being copied, leave the first four copied objects where they are and remove the partially copied fifth object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In the message text, suggest possible actions that a user can take to correct the situation that caused the message to appear.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the appropriate symbol in each action message as <a href="2.2.3?DT=19921204095534#FIGACTSYM">Figure 157</a> indicates:<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGACTSYM" name="FIGACTSYM"></a><a id="TBLACTSYM" name="TBLACTSYM"><br /> ________________________________________________________________</a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 157. Symbols That Appear in Action Messages</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Symbol</b> | <b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>use</b> |<br />|________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <a href="picture-151?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 151" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P151.GIF" /></a> | When a user's immediate attention is not |<br />| | required, such as when a user's data will not |<br />| | worsen with time. |<br />|________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <a href="picture-152?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 152" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P152.GIF" /></a> | When a user's immediate attention is required. |<br />|_______________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide an audible cue when an action message is displayed.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7099 <br />° <a href="2.2.51?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFMS">"Information Message" in topic 2.2.51</a> 7100 ° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a> 7101 ° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 7102 ° <a href="2.2.127?DT=19921204095534#HDRWARNMSG">"Warning Message" in topic 2.2.127</a> 7103 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7104 <br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 7105 </pre> 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 <hr /> 7116 <a name="LEN Action Window"></a> 7117 7118 7119 7120 7121 <h2><a name="LEN Action Window">2.2.4 Action Window</a></h2> 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 <pre width="80"><br />A secondary window that is used to allow a user to further specify settings that are needed to complete the user's request.<br /><br /><a href="picture-153?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 153" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P153.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7132 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an action window when a user makes a request and more information is required in order to complete the request.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide an action window when a user selects a routing choice that leads to a window.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7133 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide push buttons in the action window that continue the request, cancel the request, and allow user to request help.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the default push button continue the request with the information in the window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a secondary window to display an action window.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7134 <br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 7135 ° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 7136 ° <a href="2.2.99?DT=19921204095534#HDRSECWIND">"Secondary Window" in topic 2.2.99</a> 7137 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7138 <br />° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 7139 </pre> 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 <hr /> 7150 <a name="LEN Active Window"></a> 7151 7152 7153 7154 7155 <h2><a name="LEN Active Window">2.2.5 Active Window</a></h2> 7156 7157 7158 7159 7160 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 <pre width="80"><br />The window that currently has the input focus. The active window is indicated by emphasis displayed on its title bar and border, as specified by the operating environment.<br /><br /><a href="picture-154?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 154" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P154.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7166 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Make the window that can currently receive keyboard input the active window.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7167 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a window receives input focus, change the color of the active window's title bar and border to the color the user has specified for the operating environment.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an inactive window becomes active as a result of a technique that does not explicitly specify the position of the cursor, redisplay the cursor in the position it was in when the window was last active.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a window is reopened and information about the previous position of the cursor has been saved, redisplay the cursor in its saved position. Otherwise, display the cursor in a default position, for example on the top left-most item on which the cursor can be positioned.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place a window on top of all other primary windows and make it the active window when a user:<br /><br />° Selects an object in the window<br />° Selects the title bar or window border of that window<br />° Presses the key assigned to the switch between unassociated windows function<br />° Presses the key assigned to the switch between associated windows function.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Design a window so that a user can interact with it or make it active when it is not the topmost window. For example, when a user begins a process that searches a text object, allow the user to interact with the text object while continuing to display the <b>Find</b> action window on top of the text window.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7168 <br />° <a href="2.2.48?DT=19921204095534#HDRINACTWI">"Inactive Window" in topic 2.2.48</a> 7169 ° <a href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a> 7170 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7171 <br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 7172 </pre> 7173 7174 7175 7176 7177 7178 7179 7180 7181 7182 <hr /> 7183 <a name="LEN Audible Feedback"></a> 7184 7185 7186 7187 7188 <h2><a name="LEN Audible Feedback">2.2.6 Audible 7189 Feedback</a></h2> 7190 7191 7192 7193 7194 7195 7196 7197 7198 7199 <pre width="80"><br />A sound generated by the computer to draw a user's attention to, or provide feedback about, an event or state of the computer. Audible feedback enhances and reinforces visible feedback.<br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7200 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide audible feedback when a warning message or action message is displayed.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide audible feedback when a user types a character that is not a mnemonic for the window in which the cursor is positioned, and the control on which the cursor is positioned does not accept text input. For example, if mnemonics are supported but no choice has "L" assigned as the mnemonic, provide audible feedback when "L" is typed. If mnemonics are not supported, do not provide audible feedback when the user types a character.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide audible feedback when a user attempts to select a choice that is displayed with unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7201 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user has turned off the audible feedback option for the operating environment and a situation arises in which the system would normally generate audible feedback, do not generate audible feedback. For example, if a user has turned off audible feedback for the operating environment, do not generate audible feedback when an action message is displayed.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to take advantage of audio-generation capabilities of hardware and software. For example, allow a user to specify different sounds to different events. At a minimum, generate a beep as audible feedback.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7202 <br />° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a> 7203 ° <a href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 7204 </pre> 7205 7206 7207 7208 7209 <a name="LEN Automatic Selection"></a> 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 <h2><a name="LEN Automatic Selection">2.2.7 7215 Automatic 2776 7216 Selection</a></h2> 2777 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A selection technique in which moving the keyboard cursor<br />automatically changes the current selection. Provided as a<br />convenience so that a user does not have to explicitly select an<br />object, automatic selection occurs as the cursor moves among the<br />objects or choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2778 href="picture-155?mode=zoom"><img 2779 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P155.GIF" 2780 alt="PICTURE 155" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2781 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide automatic selection when at least one object must always<br /> be selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide automatic selection as the initial technique in extended<br /> selection when using the keyboard.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2782 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Always display selected-state emphasis on the object on which<br /> the cursor is currently positioned.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2783 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#HDREXSEL">"Extended Selection" in topic 2.2.34</a> 2784 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 2785 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.108?DT=19921204095534#HDRSINSEL">"Single Selection" in topic 2.2.108</a> 2786 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2787 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.102?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELEMPH">"Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.102</a> 2788 </pre> 2789 <hr /> 2790 <a name="LEN Cascaded Menu" /> 2791 <h2><a name="LEN Cascaded Menu">2.2.8 Cascaded Menu</a></h2> 2792 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A menu that appears when a cascading choice is selected. It<br />contains a set of choices that are related to the cascading<br />choice. Cascaded menus are used to reduce the length of a menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2793 href="picture-156?mode=zoom"><img 2794 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P156.GIF" 2795 alt="PICTURE 156" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2796 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a cascaded menu to reduce the length of a menu. For<br /> example, place a related set of choices in a cascaded menu<br /> rather than placing them individually on a pull-down menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2797 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects a cascading choice, display the cascaded<br /> menu associated with that choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a right-pointing arrow to the right of a cascading<br /> choice and align the right edge of the arrow with the right edge<br /> of the menu displaying the cascading choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid displaying more than two levels of cascaded menus from a<br /> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2798 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 2799 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 2800 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 2801 </pre> 2802 <hr /> 2803 <a name="LEN Check Box (Control)" /> 2804 <h2><a name="LEN Check Box (Control)">2.2.9 Check Box 7217 7218 7219 7220 7221 7222 7223 7224 7225 7226 <pre width="80"><br />A selection technique in which moving the keyboard cursor automatically changes the current selection. Provided as a convenience so that a user does not have to explicitly select an object, automatic selection occurs as the cursor moves among the objects or choices.<br /><br /><a href="picture-155?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 155" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P155.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7227 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide automatic selection when at least one object must always be selected.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide automatic selection as the initial technique in extended selection when using the keyboard.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7228 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Always display selected-state emphasis on the object on which the cursor is currently positioned.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7229 <br />° <a href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#HDREXSEL">"Extended Selection" in topic 2.2.34</a> 7230 ° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 7231 ° <a href="2.2.108?DT=19921204095534#HDRSINSEL">"Single Selection" in topic 2.2.108</a> 7232 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7233 <br />° <a href="2.2.102?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELEMPH">"Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.102</a> 7234 </pre> 7235 7236 7237 7238 7239 7240 7241 7242 7243 7244 <hr /> 7245 <a name="LEN Cascaded Menu"></a> 7246 7247 7248 7249 7250 <h2><a name="LEN Cascaded Menu">2.2.8 Cascaded Menu</a></h2> 7251 7252 7253 7254 7255 7256 7257 7258 7259 7260 <pre width="80"><br />A menu that appears when a cascading choice is selected. It contains a set of choices that are related to the cascading choice. Cascaded menus are used to reduce the length of a menu.<br /><br /><a href="picture-156?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 156" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P156.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7261 <br /><b>Rec</b> Use a cascaded menu to reduce the length of a menu. For example, place a related set of choices in a cascaded menu rather than placing them individually on a pull-down menu.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7262 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects a cascading choice, display the cascaded menu associated with that choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a right-pointing arrow to the right of a cascading choice and align the right edge of the arrow with the right edge of the menu displaying the cascading choice.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid displaying more than two levels of cascaded menus from a menu.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7263 <br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 7264 ° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 7265 ° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 7266 </pre> 7267 7268 7269 7270 7271 7272 7273 7274 7275 7276 <hr /> 7277 <a name="LEN Check Box (Control)"></a> 7278 7279 7280 7281 7282 <h2><a name="LEN Check Box (Control)">2.2.9 Check 7283 Box 2805 7284 (Control)</a></h2> 2806 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control used to display a settings choice that has two clearly<br />distinguishable states, for example, on and off. Check boxes<br />are typically used in a group to provide a multiple-choice<br />field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2807 href="picture-157?mode=zoom"><img 2808 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P157.GIF" 2809 alt="PICTURE 157" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2810 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a check box to display an individual settings choice that<br /> can be set to on or off.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a group of check boxes for settings choices that are not<br /> mutually exclusive and can each be set to on or off.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a check box only if a user will clearly understand the<br /> meaning of the choice when it is selected or not selected. For<br /> example, use a check box for a choice labeled <b>Locked.</b> A user<br /> can clearly understand that when the check box is selected, the<br /> associated object is locked, and when the check box is not<br /> selected, the associated object is not locked. Otherwise, use a<br /> control that clearly identifies the two choices, such as two<br /> radio buttons.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2811 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a check box to the left of its associated choice text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Arrange the check boxes in a group, in rows or columns, or both.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a check box choice is currently unavailable, display it with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects a check box from a group of check boxes, do<br /> not change the state of any other check boxes within the group.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a check box represents a setting shared by more than one<br /> selected object:<br /><br /><br />° Display a mark in the check box if all of the selected<br />objects have that setting turned on. For example, if two<br />selected objects are both locked, display a mark in the<br /><b>Locked</b> check box.<br /><br /><br />° Fill the box with shading if some, but not all, of the<br />selected objects have that setting turned on. For example,<br />if only one of two selected objects is locked, fill the<br /><b>Locked</b> check box with shading.<br /><br /><br />° Do not display anything in the box if none of the selected<br />objects has that setting turned on. For example, if neither<br />of two selected objects is locked, leave the <b>Locked</b> check<br /> box empty.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign a mnemonic to each check box choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a check box has a mnemonic assigned to it, provide access to<br /> the mnemonic by allowing a user to press the Alt key and that<br /> mnemonic.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a label of<br /> a check box choice unless the label contains an abbreviation,<br /> acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2812 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 2813 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2814 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 2815 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a> 2816 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 2817 </pre> 2818 <hr /> 2819 <a name="LEN Choice" /> 2820 <h2><a name="LEN Choice">2.2.10 Choice</a></h2> 2821 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Text or graphics in a control that a user can select. Examples<br />of choices are push buttons, radio buttons, and menu items. The<br />three kinds of choices are action, routing, and settings.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2822 href="picture-158?mode=zoom"><img 2823 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P158.GIF" 2824 alt="PICTURE 158" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2825 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a choice for any item in a window that a user can<br /> select.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2826 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a choice is not currently available, display it with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis, except in pop-up menus. Do not<br /> include unavailable choices in pop-up menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In a menu that contains a group of mutually exclusive choices,<br /> display unavailable-state emphasis on the choice that is in<br /> effect.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If choices in a group of mutually exclusive choices must show<br /> that they are unavailable and must indicate that one of those<br /> choices is currently in effect, then do not use a menu to<br /> display these choices: display these choices in a window<br /> instead.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user attempts to select a choice that is currently<br /> unavailable, indicate in the information area that the choice<br /> cannot be selected and that <b>Help</b> will indicate why the choice is<br /> unavailable.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Identify a choice with graphics or text, or both, depending on<br /> which best identifies the choice. For example, choices for a<br /> drawing product could consist of graphic fill patterns rather<br /> than text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Dynamically change the name of a choice by adding text or<br /> graphics, or both, to the name of a choice to make the meaning<br /> of that choice clearer in a given context. For example,<br /> changing the name of the <b>Undo</b> choice to <b>Undo</b> <b>typing</b> clarifies<br /> the meaning and differentiates the choice from <b>Undo</b> <b>delete.</b> 2827 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not change the function of a choice because of a given<br /> context. For example, do not provide a push button labeled<br /> "Pause/Resume" that would have the function of either pausing or<br /> resuming a process depending on the current context. In that<br /> case, provide a push button labeled <b>Pause</b> and a push button<br /> labeled <b>Resume</b> and display unavailable-state emphasis on the one<br /> that is not available in the current context.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a name of<br /> a choice unless the name contains an abbreviation, acronym, or<br /> proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use the predefined label for each predefined choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the predefined mnemonic for each predefined textual<br /> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a unique mnemonic for each product-specific textual<br /> choice in a menu, unless no meaningful unique mnemonic can be<br /> found.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use <a 2828 href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#FIGCTYPES">Figure 158</a> to determine the appropriate choice types for<br /> each control. For example, use a check box control, rather than<br /> a menu or push button, for a settings choice that allows a user<br /> to choose whether or not lines are displayed in a table.<br /><br /><br /><a 2829 name="FIGCTYPES" id="FIGCTYPES" /><a name="TBLCTYPES" id="TBLCTYPES"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 158. Recommended Choice Usage |<br />|_________________ __________________ _________________ _________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> <b>or</b> <b>Control</b> | <b>Action</b> <b>choice</b> | <b>Routing</b> <b>choice</b> | <b>Settings</b> <b>choice</b> |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Menu | Yes | Yes | Yes, but |<br /> | | | | recommend using |<br /> | | | | a notebook |<br /> | | | | instead. |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Push button | Yes | Yes | No |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Check box | No | No | Yes |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Radio button | No | No | Yes |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Value set | No | No | Yes |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | List box | No | No | Yes |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Drop-down list | No | No | Yes |<br /> | box | | | |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Combination box | No | No | Yes |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Drop-down | No | No | Yes |<br /> | combination box | | | |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Spin button | No | No | Yes |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /> | Slider | No | No | Yes |<br /> |_________________|__________________|_________________|_________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2830 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTION">"Action Choice (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.2</a> 2831 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 2832 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 2833 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 2834 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 2835 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 2836 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2837 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 2838 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 2839 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a> 2840 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a> 2841 </pre> 2842 <hr /> 2843 <a name="LEN Clear (Choice)" /> 2844 <h2><a name="LEN Clear (Choice)">2.2.11 Clear (Choice)</a></h2> 2845 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that removes a selected object or group of<br />objects without compressing the visible space it occupied.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2846 href="picture-159?mode=zoom"><img 2847 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P159.GIF" 2848 alt="PICTURE 159" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2849 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Clear</b> choice to allow a user to remove an object or<br /> group of objects from a window without compressing the visible<br /> space the object or group of objects occupied. For example,<br /> provide a <b>Clear</b> choice to allow a user to remove information<br /> from selected cells of a spreadsheet without removing the cells<br /> that contained the information.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2850 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Clear</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Clear</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Clear</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Clear</b><br />choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can<br />currently be removed without compressing the visible space it<br />occupied.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Clear</b> choice, display it with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis when the selected object or group of<br /> objects cannot be removed without compressing the visible space<br /> the object or group of objects occupied or when nothing is<br /> selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the default delete folder provided by the operating<br /> environment as the destination of the <b>Clear</b> choice for objects<br /> represented by icons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the destination of the <b>Clear</b> choice is a delete folder,<br /> append the label of the <b>Clear</b> choice with the name of the<br /> associated delete folder. For example, modify the choice to<br /> read <b>Clear</b> <b>to</b> <b>Trash1</b> when "Trash1" is the name assigned to the<br /> delete folder into which the <b>Clear</b> choice will place cleared<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes the name of the delete folder to which cleared<br /> choices are placed, immediately update the label of the <b>Clear</b><br />choice to display the new name of the delete folder.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign the Delete key as the shortcut key for the <b>Clear</b> choice<br /> when the <b>Delete</b> choice is not provided.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "E" as the mnemonic for the <b>Clear</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2851 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 2852 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 2853 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2854 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.26?DT=19921204095534#HDRWBASKET">"Delete Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.26</a> 2855 </pre> 2856 <hr /> 2857 <a name="LEN Clipboard" /> 2858 <h2><a name="LEN Clipboard">2.2.12 Clipboard</a></h2> 2859 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A data storage area used during transfer of information within<br />an object or between objects. A clipboard is typically provided<br />by the operating environment.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2860 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to the clipboard for all objects that support<br /> data transfer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2861 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access to the clipboard through the <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> <b>Create,</b><br />and <b>Paste</b> choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Support as many formats of the object as is practical given the<br /> different views in which the object can be pasted.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2862 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 2863 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a> 2864 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 2865 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 2866 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 2867 </pre> 2868 <hr /> 2869 <a name="LEN Close (Choice)" /> 2870 <h2><a name="LEN Close (Choice)">2.2.13 Close (Choice)</a></h2> 2871 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that removes a window and all of the secondary<br />windows associated with it.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2872 href="picture-160?mode=zoom"><img 2873 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P160.GIF" 2874 alt="PICTURE 160" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2875 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Close</b> choice for each window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2876 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a <b>Close</b> choice is provided, place it on the system menu only,<br /> or on both the system menu and a push button in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If an object's information could be lost when the user selects<br /> the <b>Close</b> choice, display a warning message. For example,<br /> display a warning message if information in a table will be lost<br /> when a user closes the window in which a view of that table is<br /> displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If information in an action window could be lost when the user<br /> selects the <b>Close</b> choice, do not display a warning message. For<br /> example, do not display a warning message if information in a<br /> <b>Find</b> action window will be lost when a user closes the <b>Find</b><br />action window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When closing a window, save its state, including its position,<br /> size, and associated information, action, and warning messages<br /> that are currently displayed, so that they can be restored if<br /> the window is opened at a later time.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When closing a work area, save the position and size of each<br /> open window associated with that work area, so that they can be<br /> restored if the work area is opened at a later time.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Close</b> choice, remove the window and any<br /> associated secondary windows from the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user closes a work area, remove from the workplace all<br /> windows associated with that work area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "C" as the mnemonic for the <b>Close</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F4 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Close</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2877 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 2878 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a> 2879 </pre> 2880 <hr /> 2881 <a name="LEN Column Heading" /> 2882 <h2><a name="LEN Column Heading">2.2.14 Column Heading</a></h2> 2883 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A label above a column of information that serves to identify<br />the contents of the column.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2884 href="picture-161?mode=zoom"><img 2885 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P161.GIF" 2886 alt="PICTURE 161" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2887 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a column heading for each column unless there is only<br /> one column and that column is identified by the window title.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2888 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place a column heading above the column it identifies.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If information can be scrolled vertically, place the column<br /> heading in a separate area that does not scroll so that the<br /> heading will remain visible.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If information can be scrolled horizontally, allow the column<br /> heading to scroll along with the column it is associated with.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a separator to distinguish a column heading from the<br /> information in a column.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize the first letter of the first and last words of a<br /> column heading, and all other words except articles,<br /> coordinating conjunctions, prepositions, and the "to" in<br /> infinitives.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a column heading is wider than the widest item in its<br /> associated column, center the column heading over the column.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a column heading is narrower than the widest item in its<br /> associated column, and the items in the column are left-aligned<br /> and of various lengths, align the column heading with the left<br /> edge of the column.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a column heading is narrower than the widest item in its<br /> associated column, and the items in the column are right-aligned<br /> and of various lengths, align the column heading with the right<br /> edge of the column.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If information in a column is of fixed length, center the column<br /> heading over the column.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to directly edit a column heading in the place<br /> where it is displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you allow a user to directly edit a column heading, allow the<br /> user to edit the column heading by clicking on the text with the<br /> mouse selection button.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2889 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a> 2890 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 2891 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 2892 </pre> 2893 <hr /> 2894 <a name="LEN Combination Box (Control)" /> 2895 <h2><a name="LEN Combination Box (Control)">2.2.15 7285 7286 7287 7288 7289 7290 7291 7292 7293 7294 <pre width="80"><br />A control used to display a settings choice that has two clearly distinguishable states, for example, on and off. Check boxes are typically used in a group to provide a multiple-choice field.<br /><br /><a href="picture-157?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 157" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P157.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7295 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a check box to display an individual settings choice that can be set to on or off.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a group of check boxes for settings choices that are not mutually exclusive and can each be set to on or off.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a check box only if a user will clearly understand the meaning of the choice when it is selected or not selected. For example, use a check box for a choice labeled <b>Locked.</b> A user can clearly understand that when the check box is selected, the associated object is locked, and when the check box is not selected, the associated object is not locked. Otherwise, use a control that clearly identifies the two choices, such as two radio buttons.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7296 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a check box to the left of its associated choice text.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Arrange the check boxes in a group, in rows or columns, or both.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a check box choice is currently unavailable, display it with unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects a check box from a group of check boxes, do not change the state of any other check boxes within the group.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a check box represents a setting shared by more than one selected object:<br /><br />° Display a mark in the check box if all of the selected objects have that setting turned on. For example, if two selected objects are both locked, display a mark in the <b>Locked</b> check box.<br /><br />° Fill the box with shading if some, but not all, of the selected objects have that setting turned on. For example, if only one of two selected objects is locked, fill the <b>Locked</b> check box with shading.<br /><br />° Do not display anything in the box if none of the selected objects has that setting turned on. For example, if neither of two selected objects is locked, leave the <b>Locked</b> check box empty.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign a mnemonic to each check box choice.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a check box has a mnemonic assigned to it, provide access to the mnemonic by allowing a user to press the Alt key and that mnemonic.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a label of a check box choice unless the label contains an abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7297 <br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 7298 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7299 <br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 7300 ° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a> 7301 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 7302 </pre> 7303 7304 7305 7306 7307 7308 7309 7310 7311 7312 <hr /> 7313 <a name="LEN Choice"></a> 7314 7315 7316 7317 7318 <h2><a name="LEN Choice">2.2.10 Choice</a></h2> 7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 <pre width="80"><br />Text or graphics in a control that a user can select. Examples of choices are push buttons, radio buttons, and menu items. The three kinds of choices are action, routing, and settings.<br /><br /><a href="picture-158?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 158" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P158.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7329 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a choice for any item in a window that a user can select.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7330 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a choice is not currently available, display it with unavailable-state emphasis, except in pop-up menus. Do not include unavailable choices in pop-up menus.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In a menu that contains a group of mutually exclusive choices, display unavailable-state emphasis on the choice that is in effect.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If choices in a group of mutually exclusive choices must show that they are unavailable and must indicate that one of those choices is currently in effect, then do not use a menu to display these choices: display these choices in a window instead.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user attempts to select a choice that is currently unavailable, indicate in the information area that the choice cannot be selected and that <b>Help</b> will indicate why the choice is unavailable.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Identify a choice with graphics or text, or both, depending on which best identifies the choice. For example, choices for a drawing product could consist of graphic fill patterns rather than text.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Dynamically change the name of a choice by adding text or graphics, or both, to the name of a choice to make the meaning of that choice clearer in a given context. For example, changing the name of the <b>Undo</b> choice to <b>Undo</b> <b>typing</b> clarifies the meaning and differentiates the choice from <b>Undo</b> <b>delete.</b> 7331 <br /><b>Rec</b> Do not change the function of a choice because of a given context. For example, do not provide a push button labeled "Pause/Resume" that would have the function of either pausing or resuming a process depending on the current context. In that case, provide a push button labeled <b>Pause</b> and a push button labeled <b>Resume</b> and display unavailable-state emphasis on the one that is not available in the current context.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a name of a choice unless the name contains an abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use the predefined label for each predefined choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the predefined mnemonic for each predefined textual choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a unique mnemonic for each product-specific textual choice in a menu, unless no meaningful unique mnemonic can be found.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#FIGCTYPES">Figure 158</a> to determine the appropriate choice types for each control. For example, use a check box control, rather than a menu or push button, for a settings choice that allows a user to choose whether or not lines are displayed in a table.<br /><br /><a id="FIGCTYPES" name="FIGCTYPES"></a><a id="TBLCTYPES" name="TBLCTYPES"><br />_________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 158. Recommended Choice Usage</span> |<br />|_______________________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Menu</b> <b>or</b> <b>Control</b> | <b>Action</b> <b>choice</b> | <b>Routing</b> <b>choice</b> | <b>Settings</b> <b>choice</b> |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Menu | Yes | Yes | Yes, but |<br />| | | | recommend using |<br />| | | | a notebook |<br />| | | | instead. |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Push button | Yes | Yes | No |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Check box | No | No | Yes |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Radio button | No | No | Yes |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Value set | No | No | Yes |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| List box | No | No | Yes |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Drop-down list | No | No | Yes |<br />| box | | | |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Combination box | No | No | Yes |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Drop-down | No | No | Yes |<br />| combination box | | | |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Spin button | No | No | Yes |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br />| Slider | No | No | Yes |<br />|_________________|_______________|________________|____________________|<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7332 <br />° <a href="2.2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTION">"Action Choice (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.2</a> 7333 ° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 7334 ° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 7335 ° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 7336 ° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 7337 ° <a href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 7338 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7339 <br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 7340 ° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 7341 ° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a> 7342 ° <a href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a> 7343 </pre> 7344 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 7351 7352 7353 <hr /> 7354 <a name="LEN Clear (Choice)"></a> 7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 <h2><a name="LEN Clear (Choice)">2.2.11 Clear 7360 (Choice)</a></h2> 7361 7362 7363 7364 7365 7366 7367 7368 7369 7370 <pre width="80"><br /><br />An action choice that removes a selected object or group of objects without compressing the visible space it occupied.<br /><br /><a href="picture-159?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 159" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P159.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7371 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Clear</b> choice to allow a user to remove an object or group of objects from a window without compressing the visible space the object or group of objects occupied. For example, provide a <b>Clear</b> choice to allow a user to remove information from selected cells of a spreadsheet without removing the cells that contained the information.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7372 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Clear</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu, place the <b>Clear</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Clear</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Clear</b> choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can currently be removed without compressing the visible space it occupied.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Clear</b> choice, display it with unavailable-state emphasis when the selected object or group of objects cannot be removed without compressing the visible space the object or group of objects occupied or when nothing is selected.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the default delete folder provided by the operating environment as the destination of the <b>Clear</b> choice for objects represented by icons.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the destination of the <b>Clear</b> choice is a delete folder, append the label of the <b>Clear</b> choice with the name of the associated delete folder. For example, modify the choice to read <b>Clear</b> <b>to</b> <b>Trash1</b> when "Trash1" is the name assigned to the delete folder into which the <b>Clear</b> choice will place cleared objects.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes the name of the delete folder to which cleared choices are placed, immediately update the label of the <b>Clear</b> choice to display the new name of the delete folder.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign the Delete key as the shortcut key for the <b>Clear</b> choice when the <b>Delete</b> choice is not provided.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "E" as the mnemonic for the <b>Clear</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7373 <br />° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 7374 ° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 7375 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7376 <br />° <a href="2.2.26?DT=19921204095534#HDRWBASKET">"Delete Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.26</a> 7377 </pre> 7378 7379 7380 7381 7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 7387 <hr /> 7388 <a name="LEN Clipboard"></a> 7389 7390 7391 7392 7393 <h2><a name="LEN Clipboard">2.2.12 Clipboard</a></h2> 7394 7395 7396 7397 7398 7399 7400 7401 7402 7403 <pre width="80"><br />A data storage area used during transfer of information within an object or between objects. A clipboard is typically provided by the operating environment.<br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7404 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to the clipboard for all objects that support data transfer.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7405 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access to the clipboard through the <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> <b>Create,</b> and <b>Paste</b> choices.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Support as many formats of the object as is practical given the different views in which the object can be pasted.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7406 <br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 7407 ° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a> 7408 ° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 7409 ° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 7410 ° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 7411 </pre> 7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7421 <hr /> 7422 <a name="LEN Close (Choice)"></a> 7423 7424 7425 7426 7427 <h2><a name="LEN Close (Choice)">2.2.13 Close 7428 (Choice)</a></h2> 7429 7430 7431 7432 7433 7434 7435 7436 7437 7438 <pre width="80"><br />An action choice that removes a window and all of the secondary windows associated with it.<br /><br /><a href="picture-160?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 160" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P160.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7439 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Close</b> choice for each window.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7440 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If a <b>Close</b> choice is provided, place it on the system menu only, or on both the system menu and a push button in the window.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If an object's information could be lost when the user selects the <b>Close</b> choice, display a warning message. For example, display a warning message if information in a table will be lost when a user closes the window in which a view of that table is displayed.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If information in an action window could be lost when the user selects the <b>Close</b> choice, do not display a warning message. For example, do not display a warning message if information in a <b>Find</b> action window will be lost when a user closes the <b>Find</b> action window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When closing a window, save its state, including its position, size, and associated information, action, and warning messages that are currently displayed, so that they can be restored if the window is opened at a later time.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When closing a work area, save the position and size of each open window associated with that work area, so that they can be restored if the work area is opened at a later time.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Close</b> choice, remove the window and any associated secondary windows from the workplace.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user closes a work area, remove from the workplace all windows associated with that work area.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "C" as the mnemonic for the <b>Close</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F4 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Close</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7441 <br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 7442 ° <a href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a> 7443 </pre> 7444 7445 7446 7447 7448 7449 7450 7451 7452 7453 <hr /> 7454 <a name="LEN Column Heading"></a> 7455 7456 7457 7458 7459 <h2><a name="LEN Column Heading">2.2.14 Column 7460 Heading</a></h2> 7461 7462 7463 7464 7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 7470 <pre width="80"><br />A label above a column of information that serves to identify the contents of the column.<br /><br /><a href="picture-161?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 161" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P161.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7471 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a column heading for each column unless there is only one column and that column is identified by the window title.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7472 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Place a column heading above the column it identifies.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If information can be scrolled vertically, place the column heading in a separate area that does not scroll so that the heading will remain visible.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If information can be scrolled horizontally, allow the column heading to scroll along with the column it is associated with.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a separator to distinguish a column heading from the information in a column.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize the first letter of the first and last words of a column heading, and all other words except articles, coordinating conjunctions, prepositions, and the "to" in infinitives.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a column heading is wider than the widest item in its associated column, center the column heading over the column.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a column heading is narrower than the widest item in its associated column, and the items in the column are left-aligned and of various lengths, align the column heading with the left edge of the column.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a column heading is narrower than the widest item in its associated column, and the items in the column are right-aligned and of various lengths, align the column heading with the right edge of the column.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If information in a column is of fixed length, center the column heading over the column.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to directly edit a column heading in the place where it is displayed.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you allow a user to directly edit a column heading, allow the user to edit the column heading by clicking on the text with the mouse selection button.<br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7473 <br />° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a> 7474 ° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 7475 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 7476 </pre> 7477 7478 7479 7480 7481 7482 7483 7484 7485 7486 <hr /> 7487 <a name="LEN Combination Box (Control)"></a> 7488 7489 7490 7491 7492 <h2><a name="LEN Combination Box (Control)">2.2.15 2896 7493 Combination Box 2897 7494 (Control)</a></h2> 2898 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that combines the functions of an entry field and a<br />list box. A combination box contains a list of objects or<br />settings choices that a user can scroll through and select from<br />to complete the entry field. Alternatively, a user can type<br />text directly into the entry field. The typed text does not<br />have to match one of the objects or settings choices contained<br />in the list.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2899 href="picture-162?mode=zoom"><img 2900 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P162.GIF" 2901 alt="PICTURE 162" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2902 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a combination box when a user may have to type values<br /> that cannot be provided by the product and a set of commonly<br /> used settings choices or objects can be provided to assist the<br /> user in completing the entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2903 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the settings choices or objects in an order that is<br /> meaningful to a user, such as alphabetic order, numeric order,<br /> or chronological order. For example, display a list of printers<br /> in alphabetic order.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a list that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list box,<br /> do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the combination box large enough to display a minimum of<br /> six settings choices or objects at a time.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user increases the size of the window in which the<br /> combination box is displayed, increase the number of settings<br /> choices or objects displayed in the combination box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user decreases the size of the window in which the<br /> combination box is displayed, decrease the number of settings<br /> choices or objects displayed in the combination box to a minimum<br /> of six. If the window is sized so that six settings choices or<br /> objects cannot be displayed, clip the combination box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a settings<br /> choice or object unless the settings choice or object contains<br /> an abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be<br /> capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display an initial value from the list in the entry field and<br /> display the initial value with selected-state emphasis so that<br /> typed text will replace the value.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide horizontal or vertical scroll bars, or both, when some<br /> of the data is not visible in the combination box.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2904 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 2905 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 2906 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 2907 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 2908 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 2909 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLB">"Scroll Bar" in topic 2.2.97</a> 2910 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2911 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a> 2912 </pre> 2913 <hr /> 2914 <a name="LEN Container (Control)" /> 2915 <h2><a name="LEN Container (Control)">2.2.16 Container 2916 (Control)</a></h2> 2917 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control used to create product-specific containers whose<br />specific purpose is to hold other objects. The operating system<br />provides general purpose containers, such as folders, for use by<br />all products. Products can provide specific containers where<br />needed.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2918 href="picture-163?mode=zoom"><img 2919 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P163.GIF" 2920 alt="PICTURE 163" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2921 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a product-specific container to allow a user to group<br /> and view objects in ways that are not provided by the<br /> system-provided containers.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2922 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide data transfer for the objects in a container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When appropriate, provide additional views, layout, and behavior<br /> for a product-specific container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a container to hold any other object, including other<br /> containers.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Include</b> choice for each view of a container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Sort</b> choice for each view of a container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a status area for contents views of containers.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the number of objects in a container near the<br /> bottom-lefthand corner of the container's icon, so that both the<br /> number and graphic are visible. For example, show the number on<br /> a small square background that has a different color than the<br /> icon.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to turn off the display of the count.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2923 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 2924 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 2925 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2926 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a> 2927 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 2928 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.40?DT=19921204095534#HDRFOLDER">"Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.40</a> 2929 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#HDREXSEL">"Extended Selection" in topic 2.2.34</a> 2930 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.49?DT=19921204095534#HDRINCLUDE">"Include (Choice)" in topic 2.2.49</a> 2931 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.53?DT=19921204095534#HDRINUSEE">"In-Use Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.53</a> 2932 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a> 2933 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.81?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRIMWIN">"Primary Window" in topic 2.2.81</a> 2934 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.111?DT=19921204095534#HDRSORT">"Sort (Choice)" in topic 2.2.111</a> 2935 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 2936 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.136?DT=19921204095534#HDRWRKAREA">"Work Area (Object)" in topic 2.2.136</a> 2937 </pre> 2938 <hr /> 2939 <a name="LEN Contextual Help" /> 2940 <h2><a name="LEN Contextual Help">2.2.17 Contextual Help</a></h2> 2941 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Help information that is adapted to the current context of a<br />choice, object, or group of choices or objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2942 href="picture-164?mode=zoom"><img 2943 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P164.GIF" 2944 alt="PICTURE 164" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2945 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide contextual help for each choice or object that the<br /> cursor can be positioned on.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide contextual help for each direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide contextual help for each object that has a pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2946 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide contextual help for a choice or object, display<br /> contextual help for that choice or object when the cursor is on<br /> it and a user presses the Help key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Help</b> choice from a pop-up menu, display<br /> contextual help for the object from which the pop-up menu was<br /> requested.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> While a user is performing a direct-manipulation operation and<br /> presses the Help key, cancel the direct-manipulation operation<br /> and display contextual help for that direct-manipulation<br /> operation. For example, if a user presses the Help key while<br /> moving an object from one container to another by dragging it,<br /> display contextual help for the direct-manipulation operation,<br /> such as the result of dropping the object on that container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a choice is displayed with unavailable-state emphasis and<br /> contextual help is provided, describe in the help why the choice<br /> is unavailable and how the user might make the choice available.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign F1 as the Help key.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2947 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 2948 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2949 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a> 2950 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.41?DT=19921204095534#HDRGENHELP">"General Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.41</a> 2951 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.44?DT=19921204095534#HDRHLPINDX">"Help Index (Choice)" in topic 2.2.44</a> 2952 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 2953 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a> 2954 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 2955 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.124?DT=19921204095534#HDRUSHELP">"Using Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.124</a> 2956 </pre> 2957 <hr /> 2958 <a name="LEN Control" /> 2959 <h2><a name="LEN Control">2.2.18 Control</a></h2> 2960 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visual user-interface component that allows a user to interact<br />with data. Controls are usually identified by text; for<br />example, headings, labels in push buttons, field prompts, and<br />titles in windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2961 href="picture-165?mode=zoom"><img 2962 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P165.GIF" 2963 alt="PICTURE 165" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 2964 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a control in a window to allow a user to interact with<br /> information.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 2965 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Identify each control or field of controls with a field prompt,<br /> a column heading, or a window title, whichever is most<br /> appropriate.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a label that clearly indicates the control's function.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Immediately update a control when the value it represents<br /> changes. For example, if a slider and an entry field are<br /> provided to represent the same numerical value, immediately<br /> change the slider to represent the value entered into the entry<br /> field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the controls provided by the operating environment rather<br /> than creating new ones.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid changing the function, interaction technique, or<br /> appearance of controls provided by the operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a window is sized, adjust the size of the controls. For<br /> example, make the entry fields longer or shorter as the window<br /> is sized larger or smaller. At some minimal useful size, clip<br /> the controls instead of adjusting the size.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> See Figures <a 2966 href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTRL">159</a> and<a 2967 href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#FIGNTEXT"> 160</a> on page <a 2968 href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTRL">2.2.18</a> and <a 2969 href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#FIGNOTE">Figure 161 </a>for the<br /> recommended usage of text and non-text controls.<br /><br /><br /><a 2970 name="FIGCONTRL" id="FIGCONTRL" /><a name="TBLCONTRL" id="TBLCONTRL"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 159. Recommended Usage of Text-Entry Controls |<br />|_________ __________ _________ __________ _________ __________ _________|<br />| <b>Control</b> | <b>Number</b> | <b>Length</b> | <b>Types</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Shown</b> | <b>Relative</b> | <b>Selectio|</b><br />| | <b>of</b> | <b>of</b> | <b>Selectabl|</b> <b>As</b> | <b>Space</b> | <b>Type</b> |<br /> | | <b>Selectabl|</b> <b>Entry</b> | <b>Choices</b> | | <b>Used</b> | <b>Supporte|</b><br />| | <b>Choices</b> | <b>Field</b> | | | | |<br /> | | | <b>(charact|rs)</b> | | | |<br /> |_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br /> | Entry | None | 60 or | None | Alphanum|rLow | Text |<br /> | field | | fewer | | | | |<br /> | (single | | | | | | |<br /> | line) | | | | | | |<br /> |_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br /> | Entry | None | Any | None | Alphanum|rMedium - | Text |<br /> | field | | | | | high | |<br /> | (multipl|-line) | | | | | |<br /> |_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br /> | Combinat|oAny | 60 or | Variable | Alphanum|rHigh | Single |<br /> | box | number | fewer | settings | | | choice |<br /> | | | | choices | | | in list |<br /> | | | | or | | | and |<br /> | | | | objects | | | text in |<br /> | | | | | | | entry |<br /> | | | | | | | field |<br /> |_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br /> | Drop-dow| Any | 60 or | Variable | Alphanum|rLow | Single |<br /> | combinat|onumber | fewer | settings | | | choice |<br /> | box | | | choices | | | in list |<br /> | | | | or | | | and |<br /> | | | | objects | | | text in |<br /> | | | | | | | entry |<br /> | | | | | | | field |<br /> |_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br /> | Spin | 20 or | 20 or | Settings | Alphanum|rLow | Single |<br /> | button | fewer | fewer | choice | | | choice |<br /> | with | | | from an | | | in list |<br /> | entry | | | ordered | | | and |<br /> | field | | | list | | | text in |<br /> | | | | | | | entry |<br /> | | | | | | | field |<br /> |_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2971 name="FIGNTEXT" id="FIGNTEXT" /><a name="TBLNTEXT" id="TBLNTEXT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 160. Recommended Usage of Non-Text-Entry Controls |<br />|___________ ___________ ____________ ___________ ___________ ___________|<br />| <b>Control</b> | <b>Number</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Types</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Shown</b> <b>As</b> | <b>Relative</b> | <b>Selection</b> |<br /> | | <b>Selectable</b>| <b>Choices</b> | | <b>Space</b> | <b>Type</b> |<br /> | | <b>Choices</b> | | | <b>Used</b> | <b>Supported</b> |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Push | 1 for | Fixed | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br /> | button | each push | action or | Graphic | | |<br /> | | button, 6 | routing | | | |<br /> | | or fewer | choices | | | |<br /> | | per field | | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Radio | 1 for | Fixed | Alphanumer|cMedium | Single |<br /> | button | each | setting | | | |<br /> | | radio | choices | | | |<br /> | | button, 6 | | | | |<br /> | | or fewer | | | | |<br /> | | per field | | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Value set | 20 or | Fixed | Short | Medium | Single |<br /> | | fewer | settings | alphabetic| | |<br /> | | | choices | Numeric, | | |<br /> | | | | Graphic | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | List box | Any | Variable | Alphanumer|cMedium - | Single, |<br /> | | number | settings | Graphic | High | Multiple |<br /> | | | choices or | | | |<br /> | | | objects | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Drop-down | Any | Variable | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br /> | list | number | settings | Graphic | | |<br /> | | | choices or | | | |<br /> | | | objects | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Check box | 1 for | Fixed | Alphanumer|cMedium | Multiple |<br /> | | each | settings | Graphic | | |<br /> | | check | choices | | | |<br /> | | box, 6 or | | | | |<br /> | | fewer per | | | | |<br /> | | field | | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Menu bar | 6 or | Fixed | Alphabetic| Low | Single |<br /> | | fewer | routing | Graphic | | |<br /> | | | choices | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Pull-down | 10 or | Fixed | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br /> | menu | fewer | action or | Graphic | | |<br /> | | | routing | | | |<br /> | | | choices | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Cascaded | 10 or | Fixed | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br /> | menu | fewer | action or | Graphic | | |<br /> | | | routing | | | |<br /> | | | choices | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Pop-up | 10 or | Fixed | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br /> | menu | fewer | action or | Graphic | | |<br /> | | | routing | | | |<br /> | | | choices | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Slider | 60 or | Fixed | Numeric, | Low | Single |<br /> | | fewer | setting in | Graphic | | |<br /> | | visible | a range | | | |<br /> | | increments| | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Spin | 20 or | Setting | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br /> | button | fewer | choice | | | |<br /> | without | | from an | | | |<br /> | entry | | ordered | | | |<br /> | field | | list | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Container | Any | Objects | Alphanumer|cHigh | Extended |<br /> | | number | | Graphic | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 2972 name="FIGNOTE" id="FIGNOTE" /><a name="TBLNOTE" id="TBLNOTE"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 161. Recommended Usage of Notebook Control |<br />|___________ ___________ ____________ ___________ ___________ ___________|<br />| <b>Control</b> | <b>Number</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Types</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Shown</b> <b>As</b> | <b>Relative</b> | <b>Selection</b> |<br /> | | <b>Objects</b> | <b>Objects</b> | | <b>Space</b> | <b>Type</b> |<br /> | | <b>and</b> | <b>and</b> | | <b>Used</b> | <b>Supported</b> |<br /> | | <b>Controls</b> | <b>Controls</b> | | | |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /> | Notebook | Any | Any | Alphanumer|cMedium - | As |<br /> | | number | (except | Graphic | high | appropriat|<br /> | | | another | | | for each |<br /> | | | notebook) | | | object or |<br /> | | | | | | control |<br /> |___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 2973 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHECKBX">"Check Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.9</a> 2974 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 2975 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a> 2976 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a> 2977 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a> 2978 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#HDRDEFACT">"Default Action" in topic 2.2.24</a> 2979 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#HDRDESCTXT">"Descriptive Text" in topic 2.2.27</a> 2980 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 2981 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 2982 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 2983 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a> 2984 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.42?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPBX">"Group Box" in topic 2.2.42</a> 2985 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 2986 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 2987 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a> 2988 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a> 2989 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a> 2990 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.88?DT=19921204095534#HDRRADIOB">"Radio Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.88</a> 2991 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.104?DT=19921204095534#HDRSEPARAT">"Separator" in topic 2.2.104</a> 2992 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.110?DT=19921204095534#HDRSLIDERS">"Slider (Control)" in topic 2.2.110</a> 2993 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a> 2994 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.125?DT=19921204095534#HDRVALUSET">"Value Set (Control)" in topic 2.2.125</a> 2995 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 2996 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 2997 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 2998 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWT">"Window Title" in topic 2.2.135</a> 2999 </pre> 3000 <hr /> 3001 <a name="LEN Copy (Choice)" /> 3002 <h2><a name="LEN Copy (Choice)">2.2.19 Copy (Choice)</a></h2> 3003 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that copies a selected object from the object<br />in which it is contained and places the copy on the clipboard.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3004 href="picture-166?mode=zoom"><img 3005 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P166.GIF" 3006 alt="PICTURE 166" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3007 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Copy</b> choice for all objects for which the user can<br /> create a new object of that same type.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3008 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Copy</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Copy</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Copy</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Copy</b><br />choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can<br />currently be copied.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the <b>Copy</b> choice is selected, create a new object on the<br /> clipboard that is an exact copy of the indicated object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user copies an object to the clipboard, do not change the<br /> state of the source object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user copies an object to the clipboard, do not change the<br /> state of the copied object on the clipboard. For example, do<br /> not change the selection state of the object as a result of<br /> copying that object to the clipboard.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Copy</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when the<br /> selected object cannot be copied to the clipboard or when<br /> nothing is selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Ctrl+Insert as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Copy</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "C" as the mnemonic for the <b>Copy</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3009 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 3010 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a> 3011 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 3012 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 3013 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 3014 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3015 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 3016 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 3017 </pre> 3018 <hr /> 3019 <a name="LEN Create (Choice)" /> 3020 <h2><a name="LEN Create (Choice)">2.2.20 Create (Choice)</a></h2> 3021 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that creates a new object and places it on the<br />clipboard. The newly created object will be of the same class<br />as the selected object, and it can contain new information<br />generated during creation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3022 href="picture-167?mode=zoom"><img 3023 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P167.GIF" 3024 alt="PICTURE 167" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3025 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Create</b> choice for all objects in an object-oriented<br /> environment. For example, provide a <b>Create</b> choice for a printer<br /> object in a container to allow a user to create one or more<br /> additional printers.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3026 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Create</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Create</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Create</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Create</b><br />choice in the pop-up menu for the object when a copy of the<br />object can currently be created.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Create</b> choice, create a new object of<br /> the same type on the clipboard, copy to it all relevant<br /> information from this object, and generate new information if<br /> necessary.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the object for which the <b>Create</b> choice was requested supports<br /> reflections, display the <b>Create</b> choice as a routing choice that<br /> leads to a cascaded menu with choices for selecting a new object<br /> or another appearance of the same object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user creates an object on the clipboard, do not change<br /> the state of the source object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Create</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when a<br /> new object cannot be created from the selected object or when<br /> nothing is selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+Insert as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Create</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "A" as the mnemonic for the <b>Create</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3027 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 3028 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 3029 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 3030 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 3031 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 3032 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 3033 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3034 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 3035 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 3036 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.90?DT=19921204095534#HDRREFLECT">"Reflection (Object)" in topic 2.2.90</a> 3037 </pre> 3038 <hr /> 3039 <a name="LEN Cursor" /> 3040 <h2><a name="LEN Cursor">2.2.21 Cursor</a></h2> 3041 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The symbol cue that indicates the current position of the<br />keyboard-input focus. The keyboard cursors are the selection<br />cursor and the text cursor.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3042 href="picture-168?mode=zoom"><img 3043 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P168.GIF" 3044 alt="PICTURE 168" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3045 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a text cursor in text that can be edited or selected and<br /> currently has input focus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a selection cursor in any component (other than text<br /> that can be edited) that a user can interact with using the<br /> keyboard.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3046 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display only one cursor at a time.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Show the selection cursor as a dotted outline box around the<br /> current object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the text cursor as a vertical bar between characters<br /> when a user is in insert mode.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the text cursor as background shading behind a character<br /> when a user is in replace mode.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Move the cursor to the pointer position when a user presses the<br /> mouse selection button on an object, choice, or text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the cursor visible in addition to any other forms of<br /> emphasis that are currently visible on an object while the<br /> cursor is on that object. For example, display the cursor and<br /> selected-state emphasis on a selected object when the cursor is<br /> moved to that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Except when scrolling by using the cursor-movement keys, scroll<br /> the cursor along with the information, even if that means<br /> scrolling the cursor out of sight.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses any cursor-movement key, keep the cursor in<br /> sight, scrolling the information if necessary. For example, if<br /> a user is viewing a document and presses the End of Data key,<br /> keep the cursor visible while scrolling to the end of the<br /> document.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When moving the cursor to a control causes the control to be<br /> scrolled into view, scroll as much of the control into view as<br /> possible. For example, if moving the cursor to a radio-button<br /> field causes scrolling, scroll as much of the radio-button field<br /> into view as possible.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a component that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list<br /> box, do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a component that cannot be scrolled, such as a menu, allow<br /> the cursor to wrap at the top and bottom of the component.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3047 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 3048 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 3049 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a> 3050 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 3051 </pre> 3052 <hr /> 3053 <a name="LEN Cut (Choice)" /> 3054 <h2><a name="LEN Cut (Choice)">2.2.22 Cut (Choice)</a></h2> 3055 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that removes a selected object from the object<br />in which it is contained and places it onto the clipboard.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3056 href="picture-169?mode=zoom"><img 3057 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P169.GIF" 3058 alt="PICTURE 169" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3059 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Cut</b> choice for all objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3060 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Cut</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Cut</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Cut</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Cut</b><br />choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can<br />currently be cut.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user cuts an object, remove it from the object it was in<br /> and place it on the clipboard.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Cut</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when the<br /> selected object cannot be cut or when nothing is selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Shift+Delete as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Cut</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "T" as the mnemonic for the <b>Cut</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3061 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 3062 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 3063 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a> 3064 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 3065 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 3066 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 3067 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3068 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 3069 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 3070 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 3071 </pre> 3072 <hr /> 3073 <a name="LEN Data Transfer" /> 3074 <h2><a name="LEN Data Transfer">2.2.23 Data Transfer</a></h2> 3075 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The transmission of data from one object to another. Clipboard<br />operations (cut, copy, create and paste) and direct-manipulation<br />techniques, like dragging, are data-transfer operations.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3076 href="picture-170?mode=zoom"><img 3077 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P170.GIF" 3078 alt="PICTURE 170" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3079 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not change the state of a source object or group of objects<br /> as a result of a data-transfer operation. For example, if a<br /> user copies selected text to the clipboard, do not remove<br /> selected-state emphasis from the text when the copying operation<br /> is complete.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the target of a data-transfer operation is an object or group<br /> of objects of a different type from the source, then add,<br /> insert, or combine the source object into the target object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a container is transferred by dragging the container's<br /> icon, transfer the contents of the container along with the<br /> container. For example, when a folder is moved or copied to<br /> another container, move or copy the folder's contents to that<br /> container as well.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3080 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 3081 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 3082 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3083 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 3084 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 3085 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 3086 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 3087 </pre> 3088 <hr /> 3089 <a name="LEN Default Action" /> 3090 <h2><a name="LEN Default Action">2.2.24 Default Action</a></h2> 3091 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A default action is an action that is performed when a user<br />presses the Enter key, double-clicks the selection button on an<br />object, or performs a direct-manipulation operation. The<br />default action is intended to be the action that a user would<br />most likely want in the given situation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3092 href="picture-171?mode=zoom"><img 3093 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P171.GIF" 3094 alt="PICTURE 171" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3095 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a default action:<br /><br /><br />° For double-clicking and dragging of icons<br />° For a frequently-used action on a view of an object<br />° Whenever a predefined push button is provided in a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3096 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign default actions as in <a 3097 href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#FIGFDEFACT">Figure 162</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 3098 name="FIGFDEFACT" id="FIGFDEFACT" /><a name="TBLFDEFACT" 3099 id="TBLFDEFACT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 162. Default Actions |<br />|____________________ ____________________ ______________________________|<br />| <b>Context</b> | <b>User</b> <b>action</b> | <b>Default</b> <b>action</b> |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | System-menu symbol | Double-click mouse | Close window |<br /> | | selection button | |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Minimized window | Double-click mouse | Restore the minimized window |<br /> | | selection button | to its previous size and |<br /> | | | position |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Cursor positioned | Enter key | Restore the minimized window |<br /> | on minimized | | to its previous size and |<br /> | window | | position |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign default actions as in <a 3100 href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#FIGDEFACT">Figure 163</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 3101 name="FIGDEFACT" id="FIGDEFACT" /><a name="TBLDEFACT" id="TBLDEFACT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 163. Recommended Default Actions |<br />|____________________ ____________________ ______________________________|<br />| <b>Context</b> | <b>User</b> <b>action</b> | <b>Recommended</b> <b>default</b> <b>action</b> |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Icon | Double-click mouse | Open a new window containing |<br /> | | selection button | the last displayed view of |<br /> | | | an object. If the icon is |<br /> | | | currently displayed with |<br /> | | | in-use emphasis, surface the |<br /> | | | existing window or open a |<br /> | | | new window, depending on the |<br /> | | | type of behavior the user |<br /> | | | has specified for the |<br /> | | | operating environment. |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Icon | Drag using | <b>Move</b> or <b>Copy,</b> depending on |<br /> | | pointing device | source and target objects |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Cursor positioned | Enter key | Open a new window containing |<br /> | on icon | | the last displayed view of |<br /> | | | an object |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Window containing | Enter key | Perform action assigned to |<br /> | a frequently-used | | the frequently-used push |<br /> | push button choice | | button |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Window not | Enter key | Perform default action |<br /> | containing a | | assigned for object on which |<br /> | frequently-used | | the cursor is positioned |<br /> | push button choice | | |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Information | Enter key | Close information message |<br /> | message | | window (using the <b>OK</b> push |<br /> | | | button) |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Warning message | Enter key | Perform non-destructive |<br /> | | | action |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /> | Action message | Enter key | Retry if supported; |<br /> | | | otherwise, perform a |<br /> | | | non-destructive action. |<br /> |____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a visible cue to indicate which push button in a window<br /> performs the default action for that window. For example, place<br /> a dark border around the push button that performs the default<br /> action for that window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the cursor is on a push button, make that push button the<br /> default for that window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the cursor is moved from a field of push buttons, reset the<br /> default push button to be the same as it was before the cursor<br /> entered that field of push buttons. For example, if a user<br /> moves the cursor from the <b>OK</b> push button (the default) to the<br /> <b>Help</b> push button (the new default), then moves the cursor to a<br /> field of radio buttons, the default push button should again be<br /> the <b>OK</b> push button.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3102 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 3103 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a> 3104 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 3105 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3106 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 3107 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.47?DT=19921204095534#HDRICONS">"Icon" in topic 2.2.47</a> 3108 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a> 3109 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 3110 </pre> 3111 <hr /> 3112 <a name="LEN Delete (Choice)" /> 3113 <h2><a name="LEN Delete (Choice)">2.2.25 Delete (Choice)</a></h2> 3114 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that removes a selected object or group of<br />objects and compresses the space it occupied.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3115 href="picture-172?mode=zoom"><img 3116 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P172.GIF" 3117 alt="PICTURE 172" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3118 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Delete</b> choice if an object or group of objects can be<br /> removed and the space it occupied in the window can be<br /> compressed.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3119 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Delete</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Delete</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Delete</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Delete</b><br />choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can<br />currently be deleted.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Delete</b> choice, display it with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis when the selected object or group of<br /> objects cannot be removed, the space the selected object or<br /> group of objects occupied in the window cannot be compressed, or<br /> nothing is selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the object for which the <b>Delete</b> choice is requested supports<br /> reflections, display the <b>Delete</b> choice as a routing choice that<br /> leads to a cascaded menu with choices for deleting just this<br /> reflection or deleting the entire object and all reflections on<br /> it.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Delete</b> choice, move the remaining<br /> information closer together so that it closes the space<br /> previously occupied by the removed information. For example, if<br /> characters are removed from an entry field, move the remaining<br /> characters closer together.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the default delete folder provided by the operating<br /> environment as the destination of the <b>Delete</b> choice for objects<br /> represented by icons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the destination of the <b>Delete</b> choice is a delete folder,<br /> append the label of the <b>Delete</b> choice with the name of the<br /> associated delete folder. For example, modify the choice to<br /> read <b>Delete</b> <b>to</b> <b>Trash1</b> when "Trash1" is the name assigned to the<br /> delete folder into which the <b>Delete</b> choice will place cleared<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes the name of the delete folder to which deleted<br /> choices are placed, immediately update the label of the <b>Delete</b><br />choice to display the new name of the delete folder.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Delete</b> choice, assign Delete as the shortcut<br /> key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "D" as the mnemonic for the <b>Delete</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3120 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 3121 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 3122 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3123 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.26?DT=19921204095534#HDRWBASKET">"Delete Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.26</a> 3124 </pre> 3125 <hr /> 3126 <a name="LEN Delete Folder (Object)" /> 3127 <h2><a name="LEN Delete Folder (Object)">2.2.26 Delete 7495 7496 7497 7498 7499 7500 7501 7502 7503 7504 <pre width="80"><br />A control that combines the functions of an entry field and a list box. A combination box contains a list of objects or settings choices that a user can scroll through and select from to complete the entry field. Alternatively, a user can type text directly into the entry field. The typed text does not have to match one of the objects or settings choices contained in the list.<br /><br /><a href="picture-162?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 162" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P162.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7505 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a combination box when a user may have to type values that cannot be provided by the product and a set of commonly used settings choices or objects can be provided to assist the user in completing the entry field.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7506 <br /><b>Rec</b> Display the settings choices or objects in an order that is meaningful to a user, such as alphabetic order, numeric order, or chronological order. For example, display a list of printers in alphabetic order.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a list that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list box, do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the combination box large enough to display a minimum of six settings choices or objects at a time.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user increases the size of the window in which the combination box is displayed, increase the number of settings choices or objects displayed in the combination box.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user decreases the size of the window in which the combination box is displayed, decrease the number of settings choices or objects displayed in the combination box to a minimum of six. If the window is sized so that six settings choices or objects cannot be displayed, clip the combination box.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a settings choice or object unless the settings choice or object contains an abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display an initial value from the list in the entry field and display the initial value with selected-state emphasis so that typed text will replace the value.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide horizontal or vertical scroll bars, or both, when some of the data is not visible in the combination box.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7507 <br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 7508 ° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 7509 ° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 7510 ° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 7511 ° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 7512 ° <a href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLB">"Scroll Bar" in topic 2.2.97</a> 7513 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7514 <br />° <a href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a> 7515 </pre> 7516 7517 7518 7519 7520 7521 7522 7523 7524 7525 <hr /> 7526 <a name="LEN Container (Control)"></a> 7527 7528 7529 7530 7531 <h2><a name="LEN Container (Control)">2.2.16 7532 Container 7533 (Control)</a><br /> 7534 7535 7536 7537 </h2> 7538 7539 7540 7541 7542 7543 7544 7545 7546 7547 <pre width="80"><br />A control used to create product-specific containers whose specific purpose is to hold other objects. The operating system provides general purpose containers, such as folders, for use by all products. Products can provide specific containers where needed.<br /><br /><a href="picture-163?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 163" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P163.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7548 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a product-specific container to allow a user to group and view objects in ways that are not provided by the system-provided containers.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7549 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide data transfer for the objects in a container.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When appropriate, provide additional views, layout, and behavior for a product-specific container.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a container to hold any other object, including other containers.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Include</b> choice for each view of a container.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Sort</b> choice for each view of a container.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a status area for contents views of containers.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the number of objects in a container near the bottom-lefthand corner of the container's icon, so that both the number and graphic are visible. For example, show the number on a small square background that has a different color than the icon.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to turn off the display of the count.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7550 <br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 7551 ° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 7552 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7553 <br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a> 7554 ° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 7555 ° <a href="2.2.40?DT=19921204095534#HDRFOLDER">"Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.40</a> 7556 ° <a href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#HDREXSEL">"Extended Selection" in topic 2.2.34</a> 7557 ° <a href="2.2.49?DT=19921204095534#HDRINCLUDE">"Include (Choice)" in topic 2.2.49</a> 7558 ° <a href="2.2.53?DT=19921204095534#HDRINUSEE">"In-Use Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.53</a> 7559 ° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a> 7560 ° <a href="2.2.81?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRIMWIN">"Primary Window" in topic 2.2.81</a> 7561 ° <a href="2.2.111?DT=19921204095534#HDRSORT">"Sort (Choice)" in topic 2.2.111</a> 7562 ° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 7563 ° <a href="2.2.136?DT=19921204095534#HDRWRKAREA">"Work Area (Object)" in topic 2.2.136</a> 7564 </pre> 7565 7566 7567 7568 7569 7570 7571 7572 7573 7574 <hr /> 7575 <a name="LEN Contextual Help"></a> 7576 7577 7578 7579 7580 <h2><a name="LEN Contextual Help">2.2.17 Contextual 7581 Help</a></h2> 7582 7583 7584 7585 7586 7587 7588 7589 7590 7591 <pre width="80"><br />Help information that is adapted to the current context of a choice, object, or group of choices or objects.<br /><br /><a href="picture-164?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 164" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P164.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7592 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide contextual help for each choice or object that the cursor can be positioned on.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide contextual help for each direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide contextual help for each object that has a pop-up menu.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7593 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide contextual help for a choice or object, display contextual help for that choice or object when the cursor is on it and a user presses the Help key.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Help</b> choice from a pop-up menu, display contextual help for the object from which the pop-up menu was requested.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> While a user is performing a direct-manipulation operation and presses the Help key, cancel the direct-manipulation operation and display contextual help for that direct-manipulation operation. For example, if a user presses the Help key while moving an object from one container to another by dragging it, display contextual help for the direct-manipulation operation, such as the result of dropping the object on that container.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a choice is displayed with unavailable-state emphasis and contextual help is provided, describe in the help why the choice is unavailable and how the user might make the choice available.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign F1 as the Help key.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7594 <br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 7595 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7596 <br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a> 7597 ° <a href="2.2.41?DT=19921204095534#HDRGENHELP">"General Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.41</a> 7598 ° <a href="2.2.44?DT=19921204095534#HDRHLPINDX">"Help Index (Choice)" in topic 2.2.44</a> 7599 ° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 7600 ° <a href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a> 7601 ° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 7602 ° <a href="2.2.124?DT=19921204095534#HDRUSHELP">"Using Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.124</a> 7603 </pre> 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 <hr /> 7614 <a name="LEN Control"></a> 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 <h2><a name="LEN Control">2.2.18 Control</a></h2> 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7625 7626 7627 7628 7629 <pre width="80"><br />A visual user-interface component that allows a user to interact with data. Controls are usually identified by text; for example, headings, labels in push buttons, field prompts, and titles in windows.<br /><br /><a href="picture-165?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 165" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P165.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7630 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a control in a window to allow a user to interact with information.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7631 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Identify each control or field of controls with a field prompt, a column heading, or a window title, whichever is most appropriate.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a label that clearly indicates the control's function.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Immediately update a control when the value it represents changes. For example, if a slider and an entry field are provided to represent the same numerical value, immediately change the slider to represent the value entered into the entry field.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the controls provided by the operating environment rather than creating new ones.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid changing the function, interaction technique, or appearance of controls provided by the operating environment.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a window is sized, adjust the size of the controls. For example, make the entry fields longer or shorter as the window is sized larger or smaller. At some minimal useful size, clip the controls instead of adjusting the size.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> See Figures <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTRL">159</a> and<a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#FIGNTEXT"> 160</a> on page <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#FIGCONTRL">2.2.18</a> and <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#FIGNOTE">Figure 161 </a>for the recommended usage of text and non-text controls.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGCONTRL" name="FIGCONTRL"></a><a id="TBLCONTRL" name="TBLCONTRL"> ___________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 159. Recommended Usage of Text-Entry Controls</span> |<br />|_________ __________ _________ __________ _________ __________ __________|<br />| <b>Control</b> | <b>Number</b> | <b>Length</b> | <b>Types</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Shown</b> | <b>Relative</b> | <b>Selection|</b><br />| | <b>of</b> | <b>of</b> | <b>Selectabl|</b> <b>As</b> | <b>Space</b> | <b>Type</b> |<br />| | <b>Selectabl|</b> <b>Entry</b> | <b>Choices</b> | | <b>Used</b> | <b>Supported|</b><br />| | <b>Choices</b> | <b>Field</b> | | | | |<br />| | | <b>(chars)</b> | | | | |<br />|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br />| Entry | None | 60 or | None | Alphanum|rLow | Text |<br />| field | | fewer | | | | |<br />| (single | | | | | | |<br />| line) | | | | | | |<br />|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br />| Entry | None | Any | None | Alphanum|rMedium - | Text |<br />| field | | | | | high | |<br />| (multipl|-line) | | | | | |<br />|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br />| Combinat|oAny | 60 or | Variable | Alphanum|rHigh | Single |<br />| box | number | fewer | settings | | | choice |<br />| | | | choices | | | in list |<br />| | | | or | | | and |<br />| | | | objects | | | text in |<br />| | | | | | | entry |<br />| | | | | | | field |<br />|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br />| Drop-dow| Any | 60 or | Variable | Alphanum|rLow | Single |<br />| combinat|onumber | fewer | settings | | | choice |<br />| box | | | choices | | | in list |<br />| | | | or | | | and |<br />| | | | objects | | | text in |<br />| | | | | | | entry |<br />| | | | | | | field |<br />|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br />| Spin | 20 or | 20 or | Settings | Alphanum|rLow | Single |<br />| button | fewer | fewer | choice | | | choice |<br />| with | | | from an | | | in list |<br />| entry | | | ordered | | | and |<br />| field | | | list | | | text in |<br />| | | | | | | entry |<br />| | | | | | | field |<br />|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|__________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGNTEXT" name="FIGNTEXT"></a><a id="TBLNTEXT" name="TBLNTEXT"> ___________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 160. Recommended Usage of Non-Text-Entry Controls</span> |<br />|___________ ____________ ____________ ___________ __________ ___________|<br />| <b>Control</b> | <b>Number</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Types</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Shown</b> <b>As</b> | <b>Relative</b> | <b>Selection</b> |<br />| | <b>Selectable</b>| <b>Choices</b> | | <b>Space</b> | <b>Type</b><span style="font-family: mon;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span></span>|<br />| | <b>Choices</b> | | | <b>Used</b> | <b>Supported</b> |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Push | 1 for | Fixed | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br />| button | each push | action or | Graphic | | |<br />| | button, 6 | routing | | | |<br />| | or fewer | choices | | | |<br />| | per field | | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Radio | 1 for | Fixed | Alphanumer|cMedium | Single |<br />| button | each | setting | | | |<br />| | radio | choices | | | |<br />| | button, 6 | | | | |<br />| | or fewer | | | | |<br />| | per field | | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Value set | 20 or | Fixed | Short | Medium | Single |<br />| | fewer | settings | alphabetic| | |<br />| | | choices | Numeric, | | |<br />| | | | Graphic | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| List box | Any | Variable | Alphanumer|cMedium - | Single, |<br />| | number | settings | Graphic | High | Multiple |<br />| | | choices or | | | |<br />| | | objects | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Drop-down | Any | Variable | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br />| list | number | settings | Graphic | | |<br />| | | choices or | | | |<br />| | | objects | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Check box | 1 for | Fixed | Alphanumer|cMedium | Multiple |<br />| | each | settings | Graphic | | |<br />| | check | choices | | | |<br />| | box, 6 or | | | | |<br />| | fewer per | | | | |<br />| | field | | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Menu bar | 6 or | Fixed | Alphabetic| Low | Single |<br />| | fewer | routing | Graphic | | |<br />| | | choices | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Pull-down | 10 or | Fixed | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br />| menu | fewer | action or | Graphic | | |<br />| | | routing | | | |<br />| | | choices | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Cascaded | 10 or | Fixed | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br />| menu | fewer | action or | Graphic | | |<br />| | | routing | | | |<br />| | | choices | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Pop-up | 10 or | Fixed | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br />| menu | fewer | action or | Graphic | | |<br />| | | routing | | | |<br />| | | choices | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Slider | 60 or | Fixed | Numeric, | Low | Single |<br />| | fewer | setting in | Graphic | | |<br />| | visible | a range | | | |<br />| | increments| | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Spin | 20 or | Setting | Alphanumer|cLow | Single |<br />| button | fewer | choice | | | |<br />| without | | from an | | | |<br />| entry | | ordered | | | |<br />| field | | list | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Container | Any | Objects | Alphanumer|cHigh | Extended |<br />| | number | | Graphic | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGNOTE" name="FIGNOTE"></a><a id="TBLNOTE" name="TBLNOTE"> ___________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 161. Recommended Usage of Notebook Control</span> |<br />|___________ ___________ ____________ ___________ ___________ ___________|<br />| <b>Control</b> | <b>Number</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Types</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Shown</b> <b>As</b> | <b>Relative</b> | <b>Selection</b> |<br />| | <b>Objects</b> | <b>Objects</b> | | <b>Space</b> | <b>Type</b> |<br />| | <b>and</b> | <b>and</b> | | <b>Used</b> | <b>Supported</b> |<br />| | <b>Controls</b> | <b>Controls</b> | | | |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br />| Notebook | Any | Any | Alphanumer|cMedium - | As |<br />| | number | (except | Graphic | high | appropriat|<br />| | | another | | | for each |<br />| | | notebook) | | | object or |<br />| | | | | | control |<br />|___________|___________|____________|___________|___________|___________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7632 <br />° <a href="2.2.9?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHECKBX">"Check Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.9</a> 7633 ° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 7634 ° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a> 7635 ° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a> 7636 ° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a> 7637 ° <a href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#HDRDEFACT">"Default Action" in topic 2.2.24</a> 7638 ° <a href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#HDRDESCTXT">"Descriptive Text" in topic 2.2.27</a> 7639 ° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 7640 ° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 7641 ° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 7642 ° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a> 7643 ° <a href="2.2.42?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPBX">"Group Box" in topic 2.2.42</a> 7644 ° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 7645 ° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 7646 ° <a href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a> 7647 ° <a href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a> 7648 ° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a> 7649 ° <a href="2.2.88?DT=19921204095534#HDRRADIOB">"Radio Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.88</a> 7650 ° <a href="2.2.104?DT=19921204095534#HDRSEPARAT">"Separator" in topic 2.2.104</a> 7651 ° <a href="2.2.110?DT=19921204095534#HDRSLIDERS">"Slider (Control)" in topic 2.2.110</a> 7652 ° <a href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a> 7653 ° <a href="2.2.125?DT=19921204095534#HDRVALUSET">"Value Set (Control)" in topic 2.2.125</a> 7654 ° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 7655 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 7656 ° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 7657 ° <a href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWT">"Window Title" in topic 2.2.135</a> 7658 </pre> 7659 7660 7661 7662 7663 7664 7665 7666 7667 7668 <hr /> 7669 <a name="LEN Copy (Choice)"></a> 7670 7671 7672 7673 7674 <h2><a name="LEN Copy (Choice)">2.2.19 Copy (Choice)</a></h2> 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 7682 7683 7684 <pre width="80"><br />An action choice that copies a selected object from the object in which it is contained and places the copy on the clipboard.<br /><br /><a href="picture-166?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 166" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P166.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7685 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Copy</b> choice for all objects for which the user can create a new object of that same type.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7686 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Copy</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu, place the <b>Copy</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Copy</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Copy</b> choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can currently be copied.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the <b>Copy</b> choice is selected, create a new object on the clipboard that is an exact copy of the indicated object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user copies an object to the clipboard, do not change the state of the source object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user copies an object to the clipboard, do not change the state of the copied object on the clipboard. For example, do not change the selection state of the object as a result of copying that object to the clipboard.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Copy</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when the selected object cannot be copied to the clipboard or when nothing is selected.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Ctrl+Insert as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Copy</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "C" as the mnemonic for the <b>Copy</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7687 <br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 7688 ° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a> 7689 ° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 7690 ° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 7691 ° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 7692 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7693 <br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 7694 ° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 7695 </pre> 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 <hr /> 7706 <a name="LEN Create (Choice)"></a> 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 <h2><a name="LEN Create (Choice)">2.2.20 Create 7712 (Choice)</a></h2> 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 <pre width="80"><br />An action choice that creates a new object and places it on the clipboard. The newly created object will be of the same class as the selected object, and it can contain new information generated during creation.<br /><br /><a href="picture-167?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 167" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P167.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7723 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Create</b> choice for all objects in an object-oriented environment. For example, provide a <b>Create</b> choice for a printer object in a container to allow a user to create one or more additional printers.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7724 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Create</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu, place the <b>Create</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Create</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Create</b> choice in the pop-up menu for the object when a copy of the object can currently be created.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Create</b> choice, create a new object of the same type on the clipboard, copy to it all relevant information from this object, and generate new information if necessary.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the object for which the <b>Create</b> choice was requested supports reflections, display the <b>Create</b> choice as a routing choice that leads to a cascaded menu with choices for selecting a new object or another appearance of the same object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user creates an object on the clipboard, do not change the state of the source object.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Create</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when a new object cannot be created from the selected object or when nothing is selected.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+Insert as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Create</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "A" as the mnemonic for the <b>Create</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7725 <br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 7726 ° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 7727 ° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 7728 ° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 7729 ° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 7730 ° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 7731 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7732 <br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 7733 ° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 7734 ° <a href="2.2.90?DT=19921204095534#HDRREFLECT">"Reflection (Object)" in topic 2.2.90</a> 7735 </pre> 7736 7737 7738 7739 7740 7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 <hr /> 7746 <a name="LEN Cursor"></a> 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751 <h2><a name="LEN Cursor">2.2.21 Cursor</a></h2> 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 7761 <pre width="80"><br />The symbol cue that indicates the current position of the keyboard-input focus. The keyboard cursors are the selection cursor and the text cursor.<br /><br /><a href="picture-168?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 168" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P168.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7762 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a text cursor in text that can be edited or selected and currently has input focus.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a selection cursor in any component (other than text that can be edited) that a user can interact with using the keyboard.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7763 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Display only one cursor at a time.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Show the selection cursor as a dotted outline box around the current object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the text cursor as a vertical bar between characters when a user is in insert mode.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the text cursor as background shading behind a character when a user is in replace mode.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Move the cursor to the pointer position when a user presses the mouse selection button on an object, choice, or text.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the cursor visible in addition to any other forms of emphasis that are currently visible on an object while the cursor is on that object. For example, display the cursor and selected-state emphasis on a selected object when the cursor is moved to that object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Except when scrolling by using the cursor-movement keys, scroll the cursor along with the information, even if that means scrolling the cursor out of sight.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses any cursor-movement key, keep the cursor in sight, scrolling the information if necessary. For example, if a user is viewing a document and presses the End of Data key, keep the cursor visible while scrolling to the end of the document.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When moving the cursor to a control causes the control to be scrolled into view, scroll as much of the control into view as possible. For example, if moving the cursor to a radio-button field causes scrolling, scroll as much of the radio-button field into view as possible.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a component that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list box, do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a component that cannot be scrolled, such as a menu, allow the cursor to wrap at the top and bottom of the component.<br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7764 <br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 7765 ° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 7766 ° <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a> 7767 ° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 7768 </pre> 7769 7770 7771 7772 7773 7774 7775 7776 7777 7778 <hr /> 7779 <a name="LEN Cut (Choice)"></a> 7780 7781 7782 7783 7784 <h2><a name="LEN Cut (Choice)">2.2.22 Cut (Choice)</a></h2> 7785 7786 7787 7788 7789 7790 7791 7792 7793 7794 <pre width="80"><br />An action choice that removes a selected object from the object in which it is contained and places it onto the clipboard.<br /><br /><a href="picture-169?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 169" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P169.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7795 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Cut</b> choice for all objects.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7796 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Cut</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu, place the <b>Cut</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Cut</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Cut</b> choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can currently be cut.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user cuts an object, remove it from the object it was in and place it on the clipboard.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Cut</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when the selected object cannot be cut or when nothing is selected.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Shift+Delete as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Cut </b>choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "T" as the mnemonic for the <b>Cut</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7797 <br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 7798 ° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 7799 ° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a> 7800 ° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 7801 ° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 7802 ° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 7803 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7804 <br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 7805 ° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 7806 ° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 7807 </pre> 7808 7809 7810 7811 7812 7813 7814 7815 7816 7817 <hr /> 7818 <a name="LEN Data Transfer"></a> 7819 7820 7821 7822 7823 <h2><a name="LEN Data Transfer">2.2.23 Data Transfer</a></h2> 7824 7825 7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 7833 <pre width="80"><br />The transmission of data from one object to another. Clipboard operations (cut, copy, create and paste) and direct-manipulation techniques, like dragging, are data-transfer operations.<br /><br /><a href="picture-170?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 170" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P170.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7834 <br /><b>Rec</b> Do not change the state of a source object or group of objects as a result of a data-transfer operation. For example, if a user copies selected text to the clipboard, do not remove selected-state emphasis from the text when the copying operation is complete.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the target of a data-transfer operation is an object or group of objects of a different type from the source, then add, insert, or combine the source object into the target object.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a container is transferred by dragging the container's icon, transfer the contents of the container along with the container. For example, when a folder is moved or copied to another container, move or copy the folder's contents to that container as well.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7835 <br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 7836 ° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 7837 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7838 <br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 7839 ° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 7840 ° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 7841 ° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 7842 </pre> 7843 7844 7845 7846 7847 7848 7849 7850 7851 7852 <hr /> 7853 <a name="LEN Default Action"></a> 7854 7855 7856 7857 7858 <h2><a name="LEN Default Action">2.2.24 Default 7859 Action</a></h2> 7860 7861 7862 7863 7864 7865 7866 7867 7868 7869 <pre width="80"><br />A default action is an action that is performed when a user presses the Enter key, double-clicks the selection button on an object, or performs a direct-manipulation operation. The default action is intended to be the action that a user would most likely want in the given situation.<br /><br /><a href="picture-171?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 171" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P171.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7870 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a default action:<br /><br />° For double-clicking and dragging of icons<br />° For a frequently-used action on a view of an object<br />° Whenever a predefined push button is provided in a window.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7871 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign default actions as in <a href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#FIGFDEFACT">Figure 162</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFDEFACT" name="FIGFDEFACT"></a><a id="TBLFDEFACT" name="TBLFDEFACT"> ___________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 162. Default Actions</span> |<br />|____________________ ____________________ ______________________________|<br />| <b>Context</b> | <b>User</b> <b>action</b><span style="font-family: mon;"><span style="font-weight: bold;"> </span></span>| <b>Default</b> <b>action</b> |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| System-menu symbol | Double-click mouse | Close window |<br />| | selection button | |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Minimized window | Double-click mouse | Restore the minimized window |<br />| | selection button | to its previous size and |<br />| | | position |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Cursor positioned | Enter key | Restore the minimized window |<br />| on minimized | | to its previous size and |<br />| window | | position |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign default actions as in <a href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#FIGDEFACT">Figure 163</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGDEFACT" name="FIGDEFACT"></a><a id="TBLDEFACT" name="TBLDEFACT"> ___________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 163. Recommended Default Actions |<br />|____________________ ____________________ ______________________________|<br />| <b>Context</b> | <b>User</b> <b>action</b> | <b>Recommended</b> <b>default</b> <b>action</b> |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Icon | Double-click mouse | Open a new window containing |<br />| | selection button | the last displayed view of |<br />| | | an object. If the icon is |<br />| | | currently displayed with |<br />| | | in-use emphasis, surface the |<br />| | | existing window or open a |<br />| | | new window, depending on the |<br />| | | type of behavior the user |<br />| | | has specified for the |<br />| | | operating environment. |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Icon | Drag using | <b>Move</b> or <b>Copy,</b> depending on |<br />| | pointing device | source and target objects |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Cursor positioned | Enter key | Open a new window containing |<br />| on icon | | the last displayed view of |<br />| | | an object |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Window containing | Enter key | Perform action assigned to |<br />| a frequently-used | | the frequently-used push |<br />| push button choice | | button |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Window not | Enter key | Perform default action |<br />| containing a | | assigned for object on which |<br />| frequently-used | | the cursor is positioned |<br />| push button choice | | |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Information | Enter key | Close information message |<br />| message | | window (using the <b>OK</b> push |<br />| | | button) |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Warning message | Enter key | Perform non-destructive |<br />| | | action |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br />| Action message | Enter key | Retry if supported; |<br />| | | otherwise, perform a |<br />| | | non-destructive action. |<br />|____________________|____________________|______________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a visible cue to indicate which push button in a window performs the default action for that window. For example, place a dark border around the push button that performs the default action for that window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the cursor is on a push button, make that push button the default for that window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the cursor is moved from a field of push buttons, reset the default push button to be the same as it was before the cursor entered that field of push buttons. For example, if a user moves the cursor from the <b>OK</b> push button (the default) to the <b>Help</b> push button (the new default), then moves the cursor to a field of radio buttons, the default push button should again be the <b>OK</b> push button.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7872 <br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 7873 ° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a> 7874 ° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 7875 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7876 <br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 7877 ° <a href="2.2.47?DT=19921204095534#HDRICONS">"Icon" in topic 2.2.47</a> 7878 ° <a href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a> 7879 ° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 7880 </pre> 7881 7882 7883 7884 7885 7886 7887 7888 7889 7890 <hr /> 7891 <a name="LEN Delete (Choice)"></a> 7892 7893 7894 7895 7896 <h2><a name="LEN Delete (Choice)">2.2.25 Delete 7897 (Choice)</a></h2> 7898 7899 7900 7901 7902 7903 7904 7905 7906 7907 <pre width="80"><br />An action choice that removes a selected object or group of<br />objects and compresses the space it occupied.<br /><br /><a href="picture-172?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 172" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P172.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7908 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Delete</b> choice if an object or group of objects can be removed and the space it occupied in the window can be compressed.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7909 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Delete</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu, place the <b>Delete</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Delete</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Delete</b> choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can currently be deleted.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Delete</b> choice, display it with unavailable-state emphasis when the selected object or group of objects cannot be removed, the space the selected object or group of objects occupied in the window cannot be compressed, or nothing is selected.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the object for which the <b>Delete</b> choice is requested supports reflections, display the <b>Delete</b> choice as a routing choice that leads to a cascaded menu with choices for deleting just this reflection or deleting the entire object and all reflections on it.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Delete</b> choice, move the remaining information closer together so that it closes the space previously occupied by the removed information. For example, if characters are removed from an entry field, move the remaining characters closer together.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the default delete folder provided by the operating environment as the destination of the <b>Delete</b> choice for objects represented by icons.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the destination of the <b>Delete</b> choice is a delete folder, append the label of the <b>Delete</b> choice with the name of the associated delete folder. For example, modify the choice to read <b>Delete</b> <b>to</b> <b>Trash1</b> when "Trash1" is the name assigned to the delete folder into which the <b>Delete</b> choice will place cleared objects.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes the name of the delete folder to which deleted choices are placed, immediately update the label of the <b>Delete</b> choice to display the new name of the delete folder.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Delete</b> choice, assign Delete as the shortcut key.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "D" as the mnemonic for the <b>Delete</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7910 <br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 7911 ° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 7912 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7913 <br />° <a href="2.2.26?DT=19921204095534#HDRWBASKET">"Delete Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.26</a> 7914 </pre> 7915 7916 7917 7918 7919 7920 7921 7922 7923 7924 <hr /> 7925 <a name="LEN Delete Folder (Object)"></a> 7926 7927 7928 7929 7930 <h2><a name="LEN Delete Folder (Object)">2.2.26 7931 Delete 3128 7932 Folder 3129 7933 (Object)</a></h2> 3130 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A folder that holds objects and that will remove the objects it<br />holds from a user's system. A delete folder could delete<br />objects immediately, or it could allow the user to specify when<br />the objects are to be deleted.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3131 href="picture-173?mode=zoom"><img 3132 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P173.GIF" 3133 alt="PICTURE 173" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3134 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access to the delete folder provided by the operating<br /> environment to allow a user to remove objects from the operating<br /> environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3135 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a delete folder is provided by the operating environment,<br /> support it. For example, allow a user to place your objects in<br /> the delete folder provided by the operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a container is placed in a delete folder, place the<br /> contents of the container in the delete folder along with the<br /> container.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3136 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a> 3137 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3138 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 3139 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 3140 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.40?DT=19921204095534#HDRFOLDER">"Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.40</a> 3141 </pre> 3142 <hr /> 3143 <a name="LEN Descriptive Text" /> 3144 <h2><a name="LEN Descriptive Text">2.2.27 Descriptive Text</a></h2> 3145 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Text used in addition to a field prompt to provide information<br />about a field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3146 href="picture-174?mode=zoom"><img 3147 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P174.GIF" 3148 alt="PICTURE 174" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3149 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use descriptive text to provide additional information about a<br /> control or field of controls when other labels are not<br /> sufficient to explain its function. For example, describe the<br /> required date format for an entry field that will contain a<br /> date.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3150 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide descriptive text, place it to the right or below<br /> the control it describes.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place descriptive text so that it cannot be confused with a<br /> field prompt or column heading. For example, in two columns of<br /> controls, align the second column of field prompts to the right<br /> of the left edge of the longest descriptive text in the first<br /> column of controls as in<a 3151 href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#FIGCOLTEX"> Figure 164</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 3152 name="FIGCOLTEX" id="FIGCOLTEX"><br /></a></pre> 3153 <hr /> 3154 <pre><a name="FIGCOLTEX" id="FIGCOLTEX"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 3155 href="picture-175?mode=zoom"><img 3156 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P175.GIF" 3157 alt="PICTURE 175" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 3158 <hr /> 3159 <pre>Figure 164. Columns of Controls with Descriptive Text<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For controls that support more than one type of selection,<br /> provide information about the number of items that can be<br /> selected. For example, provide descriptive text for list boxes<br /> that provide multiple selection, and show in the descriptive<br /> text that more than one item can be selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3160 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a> 3161 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 3162 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a> 3163 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 3164 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 3165 </pre> 3166 <hr /> 3167 <a name="LEN Device (Object)" /> 3168 <h2><a name="LEN Device (Object)">2.2.28 Device (Object)</a></h2> 3169 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An object that represents a physical or logical device, such as<br />a printer, mouse, or scanner, that is connected to a user's<br />system. Device objects can be provided by products or by the<br />operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3170 href="picture-176?mode=zoom"><img 3171 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P176.GIF" 3172 alt="PICTURE 176" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3173 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a device object for each device to which a user has<br /> access.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3174 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow each device object to support data-transfer operations.<br /> For example, allow a user to drag and drop objects onto printer,<br /> plotter, and film-recorder device objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide access to a device object from a menu and there<br /> is more than one device that a user has access to through that<br /> device object, allow the user to designate the device to be<br /> used. For example from a <b>Print</b> choice, provide a list of<br /> printers in a cascaded menu or in a window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3175 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 3176 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a> 3177 </pre> 3178 <hr /> 3179 <a name="LEN Direct Manipulation" /> 3180 <h2><a name="LEN Direct Manipulation">2.2.29 Direct 7934 7935 7936 7937 7938 7939 7940 7941 7942 7943 <pre width="80"><br />A folder that holds objects and that will remove the objects it holds from a user's system. A delete folder could delete objects immediately, or it could allow the user to specify when the objects are to be deleted.<br /><br /><a href="picture-173?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 173" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P173.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7944 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access to the delete folder provided by the operating environment to allow a user to remove objects from the operating environment.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7945 <br /><b>Rec</b> If a delete folder is provided by the operating environment, support it. For example, allow a user to place your objects in the delete folder provided by the operating environment.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a container is placed in a delete folder, place the contents of the container in the delete folder along with the container.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7946 <br />° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a> 7947 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 7948 <br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 7949 ° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 7950 ° <a href="2.2.40?DT=19921204095534#HDRFOLDER">"Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.40</a> 7951 </pre> 7952 7953 7954 7955 7956 7957 7958 7959 7960 7961 <hr /> 7962 <a name="LEN Descriptive Text"></a> 7963 7964 7965 7966 7967 <h2><a name="LEN Descriptive Text">2.2.27 7968 Descriptive Text</a></h2> 7969 7970 7971 7972 7973 7974 7975 7976 7977 7978 <pre width="80"><br />Text used in addition to a field prompt to provide information about a field.<br /><br /><a href="picture-174?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 174" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P174.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 7979 <br /><b>Rec</b> Use descriptive text to provide additional information about a control or field of controls when other labels are not sufficient to explain its function. For example, describe the required date format for an entry field that will contain a date.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 7980 <br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide descriptive text, place it to the right or below the control it describes.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place descriptive text so that it cannot be confused with a field prompt or column heading. For example, in two columns of controls, align the second column of field prompts to the right of the left edge of the longest descriptive text in the first column of controls as in<a href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#FIGCOLTEX"> Figure 164</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGCOLTEX" name="FIGCOLTEX"></a></pre> 7981 7982 7983 7984 7985 7986 7987 7988 7989 7990 <hr /> 7991 7992 7993 7994 7995 <pre><a id="FIGCOLTEX" name="FIGCOLTEX"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-175?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 175" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P175.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 7996 7997 7998 7999 8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 <hr /> 8006 8007 8008 8009 8010 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 164. Columns of Controls with Descriptive Text</span><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For controls that support more than one type of selection, provide information about the number of items that can be selected. For example, provide descriptive text for list boxes that provide multiple selection, and show in the descriptive text that more than one item can be selected.<br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8011 <br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a> 8012 ° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 8013 ° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a> 8014 ° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 8015 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 8016 </pre> 8017 8018 8019 8020 8021 8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 <hr /> 8027 <a name="LEN Device (Object)"></a> 8028 8029 8030 8031 8032 <h2><a name="LEN Device (Object)">2.2.28 Device 8033 (Object)</a><br /> 8034 8035 8036 8037 </h2> 8038 8039 8040 8041 8042 8043 8044 8045 8046 8047 <pre width="80"><br />An object that represents a physical or logical device, such as a printer, mouse, or scanner, that is connected to a user's system. Device objects can be provided by products or by the operating environment.<br /><br /><a href="picture-176?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 176" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P176.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8048 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a device object for each device to which a user has access.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8049 <br /><b>Rec</b> Allow each device object to support data-transfer operations. For example, allow a user to drag and drop objects onto printer, plotter, and film-recorder device objects.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide access to a device object from a menu and there is more than one device that a user has access to through that device object, allow the user to designate the device to be used. For example from a <b>Print</b> choice, provide a list of printers in a cascaded menu or in a window.<br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8050 <br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 8051 ° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a> 8052 </pre> 8053 8054 8055 8056 8057 8058 8059 8060 8061 8062 <hr /> 8063 <a name="LEN Direct Manipulation"></a> 8064 8065 8066 8067 8068 <h2><a name="LEN Direct Manipulation">2.2.29 Direct 3181 8069 Manipulation</a></h2> 3182 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A set of techniques that allow a user to work with an object by<br />dragging it with a pointing device or interacting with its<br />pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3183 href="picture-177?mode=zoom"><img 3184 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P177.GIF" 3185 alt="PICTURE 177" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3186 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide direct manipulation for all objects represented as icons<br /> on the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3187 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user presses the Cancel key or when a user drops an<br /> object onto the same position it currently occupies, cancel the<br /> direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid changing the input focus as a result of a<br /> direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not change which window is the active window when a<br /> direct-manipulation operation is performed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide contextual help for direct-manipulation operations.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide contextual help for a direct-manipulation<br /> operation, allow a user to display contextual help about the<br /> direct-manipulation operation by pressing the Help key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to transfer data through direct manipulation. For<br /> example, when a user drags a document to a printer, prepare the<br /> document to be printed and schedule it to be printed on that<br /> printer.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> During a direct-manipulation operation, display source emphasis<br /> on the source object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> During a direct-manipulation operation, if a target object is in<br /> a state where it can receive data as a result of the<br /> direct-manipulation operation, display target emphasis on the<br /> target object when the pointer is on that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> During a direct-manipulation operation, if a target object is in<br /> a state where it can receive data as a result of the direct<br /> manipulation operation, but cannot receive the object being<br /> directly manipulated, display target emphasis and change the<br /> pointer when the pointer is over that object. For example,<br /> change the pointer to the "do not" pointer.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> During a direct-manipulation operation on a single object, drag<br /> a copy of the icon or an outline of the object. If an identical<br /> image of an icon for that object is not available, substitute an<br /> outline of the object's icon.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> During a direct-manipulation operation on a group of objects<br /> where the spatial relationship between the objects in the group<br /> is not relevant for positioning in the view of the target<br /> object, such as on the workplace and in folders, drag a generic<br /> image of three overlapped objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a direct-manipulation operation is performed on a group of<br /> objects and the requested action cannot be performed on all of<br /> the objects, perform the requested action on the valid objects<br /> and display a message giving completion information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> During a direct-manipulation operation on a group of objects<br /> where the spatial relationship between the objects in the group<br /> is relevant for positioning in the view of the target object,<br /> such as in a composed view of an object, drag the objects while<br /> maintaining their relative positions.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user drags an image or an outline of an object to perform<br /> a copy operation, dim the image or outline as in Figures <a 3188 href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGDUNNO">165</a> and<br /> <a 3189 href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGKMFDM">166</a> on page <a 3190 href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGDUNNO">2.2.29</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 3191 name="FIGDUNNO" id="FIGDUNNO" /><a name="TBLDUNNO" id="TBLDUNNO"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 165. Dragging an Image of an Object |<br />|_______________________ ________________________ _______________________|<br />| | <b>Single</b> <b>object</b> | <b>Multiple</b> <b>objects</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Move</b> <b>operation</b> | <a 3192 href="picture-178?mode=zoom"><img 3193 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P178.GIF" 3194 alt="PICTURE 178" /></a> | <a href="picture-179?mode=zoom"><img 3195 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P179.GIF" 3196 alt="PICTURE 179" /></a> |<br />|_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br />| <b>Copy</b> <b>operation</b> | <a 3197 href="picture-180?mode=zoom"><img 3198 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P180.GIF" 3199 alt="PICTURE 180" /></a> | <a href="picture-181?mode=zoom"><img 3200 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P181.GIF" 3201 alt="PICTURE 181" /></a> |<br />|_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3202 name="FIGKMFDM" id="FIGKMFDM" /><a name="TBLKMFDM" id="TBLKMFDM"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 166. Dragging an Outline of an Object |<br />|_______________________ ________________________ _______________________|<br />| | <b>Single</b> <b>object</b> | <b>Multiple</b> <b>objects</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Move</b> <b>operation</b> | <a 3203 href="picture-182?mode=zoom"><img 3204 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P182.GIF" 3205 alt="PICTURE 182" /></a> | <a href="picture-183?mode=zoom"><img 3206 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P183.GIF" 3207 alt="PICTURE 183" /></a> |<br />|_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br />| <b>Copy</b> <b>operation</b> | <a 3208 href="picture-184?mode=zoom"><img 3209 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P184.GIF" 3210 alt="PICTURE 184" /></a> | <a href="picture-185?mode=zoom"><img 3211 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P185.GIF" 3212 alt="PICTURE 185" /></a> |<br />|_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user drags an object or group of objects, attach an image<br /> or outline of the object or group of objects to the pointer at<br /> the spot on the object or within the group of objects where the<br /> direct-manipulation operation was initiated.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a direct-manipulation operation will result in a predefined<br /> action, augment the pointer using the predefined pointer<br /> visuals.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a direct-manipulation operation will result in a<br /> product-specific action, augment the pointer to indicate what<br /> the resulting action will be.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a create-on-drag setting in the settings view of each<br /> object. For example, provide a <b>Create</b> <b>on</b> <b>drag</b> check box choice<br /> in an object's settings notebook. When this setting is set on,<br /> change the keyboard override of a direct-manipulation operation<br /> from the copy function to the create function.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the create-on-drag setting is set on, change the object's<br /> icon to show this setting by showing the small icon on a notepad<br /> background as in <a 3213 href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGNOTEPAD">Figure 167</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 3214 name="FIGNOTEPAD" id="FIGNOTEPAD"><br /></a></pre> 3215 <hr /> 3216 <pre><a name="FIGNOTEPAD" id="FIGNOTEPAD"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 3217 href="picture-186?mode=zoom"><img 3218 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P186.GIF" 3219 alt="PICTURE 186" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 3220 <hr /> 3221 <pre>Figure 167. Small Icon on a Notepad Background<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user drags an object to a device or from a device that is<br /> external to the user's environment, such as floppy disk, a<br /> printer, or a mail outbasket, assign the data transfer default<br /> for a direct-manipulation operation so that the source object's<br /> location is left unchanged.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to override the default data transfer for a<br /> direct-manipulation operation by pressing a key during a<br /> direct-manipulation operation, as listed in<a 3222 href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGKEYOVER"> Figure 168</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 3223 name="FIGKEYOVER" id="FIGKEYOVER" /><a name="TBLKEYOVER" 3224 id="TBLKEYOVER"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 168. Keyboard Overrides for Direct-Manipulation Operations |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| Move | Shift+Mouse manipulation button |<br />|____________________________________|___________________________________|<br />| Create or Copy | Ctrl+Mouse manipulation button |<br />|____________________________________|___________________________________|<br />| <b>Note:</b> Ctrl+Mouse manipulation button will perform the create function |<br /> | when the create-on-drag setting is set on for the object; otherwise |<br /> | it will perform a copy operation. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3225 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.17?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTEXH">"Contextual Help" in topic 2.2.17</a> 3226 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 3227 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.65?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOVE">"Move (Choice)" in topic 2.2.65</a> 3228 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a> 3229 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.112?DT=19921204095534#HDRSOURCEE">"Source Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.112</a> 3230 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.118?DT=19921204095534#HDRTARGETE">"Target Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.118</a> 3231 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3232 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 3233 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 3234 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 3235 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.77?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTD">"Pointing Device" in topic 2.2.77</a> 3236 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 3237 </pre> 3238 <hr /> 3239 <a name="LEN Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" /> 3240 <h2><a name="LEN Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)">2.2.30 8070 8071 8072 8073 8074 8075 8076 8077 8078 8079 <pre width="80"><br />A set of techniques that allow a user to work with an object by dragging it with a pointing device or interacting with its pop-up menu.<br /><br /><a href="picture-177?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 177" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P177.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8080 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide direct manipulation for all objects represented as icons on the workplace.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8081 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user presses the Cancel key or when a user drops an object onto the same position it currently occupies, cancel the direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid changing the input focus as a result of a direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not change which window is the active window when a direct-manipulation operation is performed.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide contextual help for direct-manipulation operations.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide contextual help for a direct-manipulation operation, allow a user to display contextual help about the direct-manipulation operation by pressing the Help key.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to transfer data through direct manipulation. For example, when a user drags a document to a printer, prepare the document to be printed and schedule it to be printed on that printer.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> During a direct-manipulation operation, display source emphasis on the source object.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> During a direct-manipulation operation, if a target object is in a state where it can receive data as a result of the direct-manipulation operation, display target emphasis on the target object when the pointer is on that object.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> During a direct-manipulation operation, if a target object is in a state where it can receive data as a result of the direct manipulation operation, but cannot receive the object being directly manipulated, display target emphasis and change the pointer when the pointer is over that object. For example, change the pointer to the "do not" pointer.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> During a direct-manipulation operation on a single object, drag a copy of the icon or an outline of the object. If an identical image of an icon for that object is not available, substitute an outline of the object's icon.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> During a direct-manipulation operation on a group of objects where the spatial relationship between the objects in the group is not relevant for positioning in the view of the target object, such as on the workplace and in folders, drag a generic image of three overlapped objects.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a direct-manipulation operation is performed on a group of objects and the requested action cannot be performed on all of the objects, perform the requested action on the valid objects and display a message giving completion information.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> During a direct-manipulation operation on a group of objects where the spatial relationship between the objects in the group is relevant for positioning in the view of the target object, such as in a composed view of an object, drag the objects while maintaining their relative positions.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user drags an image or an outline of an object to perform a copy operation, dim the image or outline as in Figures <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGDUNNO">165</a> and <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGKMFDM">166</a> on page <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGDUNNO">2.2.29</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGDUNNO" name="FIGDUNNO"></a><a id="TBLDUNNO" name="TBLDUNNO"><br />______________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 165. Dragging an Image of an Object</span> |<br />|________________ ________________________ __________|<br />| | <b>Single</b> <b>object</b> | <b>Multiple</b> <b>objects</b> |<br />|________________|________________|__________________| <br />| <b>Move</b> <b>operation</b> | <a href="picture-178?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 178" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P178.GIF" /></a> | <a href="picture-179?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 179" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P179.GIF" /></a> |<br />|________________|________________|__________________|<br />| <b>Copy</b> <b>operation</b> | <a href="picture-180?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 180" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P180.GIF" /></a> | <a href="picture-181?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 181" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P181.GIF" /></a> |<br />|________________|________________|__________________|<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGKMFDM" name="FIGKMFDM"></a><a id="TBLKMFDM" name="TBLKMFDM"> <br />_____________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 166. Dragging an Outline of an Object</span> |<br />|________________ ________________ __________________|<br />| | <b>Single</b> <b>object</b> | <b>Multiple</b> <b>objects</b> |<br />|________________|________________|__________________|<br />| <b>Move</b> <b>operation</b> | <a href="picture-182?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 182" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P182.GIF" /></a> | <a href="picture-183?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 183" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P183.GIF" /></a> |<br />|________________|________________|__________________|<br />| <b>Copy</b> <b>operation</b> | <a href="picture-184?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 184" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P184.GIF" /></a> | <a href="picture-185?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 185" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P185.GIF" /></a> |<br />|________________|________________|__________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user drags an object or group of objects, attach an image or outline of the object or group of objects to the pointer at the spot on the object or within the group of objects where the direct-manipulation operation was initiated.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a direct-manipulation operation will result in a predefined action, augment the pointer using the predefined pointer visuals.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a direct-manipulation operation will result in a product-specific action, augment the pointer to indicate what the resulting action will be.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a create-on-drag setting in the settings view of each object. For example, provide a <b>Create</b> <b>on</b> <b>drag</b> check box choice in an object's settings notebook. When this setting is set on, change the keyboard override of a direct-manipulation operation from the copy function to the create function.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the create-on-drag setting is set on, change the object's icon to show this setting by showing the small icon on a notepad background as in <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGNOTEPAD">Figure 167</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGNOTEPAD" name="FIGNOTEPAD"><br /></a></pre> 8082 8083 8084 8085 8086 8087 8088 8089 8090 8091 <hr /> 8092 8093 8094 8095 8096 <pre><a id="FIGNOTEPAD" name="FIGNOTEPAD"><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-186?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 186" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P186.GIF" /></a><br /><br /></pre> 8097 8098 8099 8100 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 <hr /> 8107 8108 8109 8110 8111 <pre><span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 167. Small Icon on a Notepad Background</span><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user drags an object to a device or from a device that is external to the user's environment, such as floppy disk, a printer, or a mail outbasket, assign the data transfer default for a direct-manipulation operation so that the source object's location is left unchanged.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to override the default data transfer for a direct-manipulation operation by pressing a key during a direct-manipulation operation, as listed in<a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#FIGKEYOVER"> Figure 168</a>.<br /><br /><a id="FIGKEYOVER" name="FIGKEYOVER"></a><a id="TBLKEYOVER" name="TBLKEYOVER"> <br />________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 168. Keyboard Overrides for Direct-Manipulation Operations</span> |<br />|____________________________________ __________________________________|<br />| Move | Shift+Mouse manipulation button |<br />|________________|______________________________________________________|<br />| Create or Copy | Ctrl+Mouse manipulation button |<br />|________________|______________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Note:</b> Ctrl+Mouse manipulation button will perform the create function |<br />| when the create-on-drag setting is set on for the object; otherwise |<br />| it will perform a copy operation. |<br />|_______________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8112 <br />° <a href="2.2.17?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTEXH">"Contextual Help" in topic 2.2.17</a> 8113 ° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 8114 ° <a href="2.2.65?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOVE">"Move (Choice)" in topic 2.2.65</a> 8115 ° <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a> 8116 ° <a href="2.2.112?DT=19921204095534#HDRSOURCEE">"Source Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.112</a> 8117 ° <a href="2.2.118?DT=19921204095534#HDRTARGETE">"Target Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.118</a> 8118 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8119 <br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 8120 ° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 8121 ° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 8122 ° <a href="2.2.77?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTD">"Pointing Device" in topic 2.2.77</a> 8123 ° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 8124 </pre> 8125 8126 8127 8128 8129 8130 8131 8132 8133 8134 <hr /> 8135 <a name="LEN Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)"></a> 8136 8137 8138 8139 8140 <h2><a name="LEN Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)">2.2.30 3241 8141 Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)</a></h2> 3242 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that is a combination box in which the list is hidden<br />until a user takes an action to make it visible. A drop-down<br />combination box contains a list of objects or settings choices<br />that a user can scroll through and select from to complete the<br />entry field. Alternatively, a user can type text directly into<br />the entry field. The typed text does not have to match one of<br />the objects or settings choices contained in the list.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3243 href="picture-187?mode=zoom"><img 3244 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P187.GIF" 3245 alt="PICTURE 187" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3246 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a drop-down combination box when a window does not have<br /> enough space to use a combination box.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3247 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display an initial value from the list in the entry field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the initial value in the entry field with selected-state<br /> emphasis so that typed characters will replace the value.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the choices or objects in the list in an order that is<br /> meaningful to a user, such as alphabetic order, numeric order,<br /> chronological order, or some other order. For example, display<br /> dates in chronological order.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a list that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list box,<br /> do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display no more than six choices or objects at a time in a<br /> drop-down combination box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide horizontal or vertical scroll bars, or both, when some<br /> of the data is not visible in the drop-down combination box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a choice<br /> or object name unless the choice or object name contains an<br /> abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be<br /> capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3248 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a> 3249 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 3250 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 3251 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 3252 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3253 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 3254 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 3255 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 3256 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 3257 </pre> 3258 <hr /> 3259 <a name="LEN Drop-Down List (Control)" /> 3260 <h2><a name="LEN Drop-Down List (Control)">2.2.31 Drop-Down 8142 8143 8144 8145 8146 8147 8148 8149 8150 8151 <pre width="80"><br />A control that is a combination box in which the list is hidden until a user takes an action to make it visible. A drop-down combination box contains a list of objects or settings choices that a user can scroll through and select from to complete the entry field. Alternatively, a user can type text directly into the entry field. The typed text does not have to match one of the objects or settings choices contained in the list.<br /><br /><a href="picture-187?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 187" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P187.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8152 <br /><b>Rec</b> Use a drop-down combination box when a window does not have enough space to use a combination box.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8153 <br /><b>Rec</b> Display an initial value from the list in the entry field.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the initial value in the entry field with selected-state emphasis so that typed characters will replace the value.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the choices or objects in the list in an order that is meaningful to a user, such as alphabetic order, numeric order, chronological order, or some other order. For example, display dates in chronological order.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a list that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list box, do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display no more than six choices or objects at a time in a drop-down combination box.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide horizontal or vertical scroll bars, or both, when some of the data is not visible in the drop-down combination box.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a choice or object name unless the choice or object name contains an abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8154 <br />° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a> 8155 ° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 8156 ° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 8157 ° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 8158 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8159 <br />° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 8160 ° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 8161 ° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 8162 ° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 8163 </pre> 8164 8165 8166 8167 8168 8169 8170 8171 8172 8173 <hr /> 8174 <a name="LEN Drop-Down List (Control)"></a> 8175 8176 8177 8178 8179 <h2><a name="LEN Drop-Down List (Control)">2.2.31 8180 Drop-Down 3261 8181 List 3262 8182 (Control)</a></h2> 3263 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that is a variation of a list box. A drop-down list<br />only displays one item until the user takes an action to display<br />the other objects or choices. Like a list box, the drop-down<br />list does not allow a user to type information into it.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3264 href="picture-188?mode=zoom"><img 3265 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P188.GIF" 3266 alt="PICTURE 188" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3267 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a drop-down list instead of a single selection list box when<br /> a choice or object is not changed frequently or when space is so<br /> limited that the window does not have enough space to display a<br /> list box.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3268 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an initial value from the list in an entry field that<br /> contains read-only text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the choices or objects in a drop-down list in an order<br /> that is meaningful to a user, such as alphabetic order, numeric<br /> order, chronological order, or some other order. For example,<br /> display modem baud rates in numeric order.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a list that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list box,<br /> do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display no more than six choices or objects at a time in a<br /> drop-down list.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide horizontal or vertical scroll bars, or both, when some<br /> of the information is not visible in the drop-down list.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a choice<br /> or object name unless the choice or object name contains an<br /> abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be<br /> capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3269 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a> 3270 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 3271 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 3272 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.39?DT=19921204095534#HDRLETRSEL">"First-Letter Cursor Navigation" in topic 2.2.39</a> 3273 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 3274 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3275 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 3276 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 3277 </pre> 3278 <hr /> 3279 <a name="LEN Edit Menu" /> 3280 <h2><a name="LEN Edit Menu">2.2.32 Edit Menu</a></h2> 3281 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Edit</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains the undo choices, the clipboard choices, and choices<br /> that affect which objects are selected. The choices in the <i>Edit</i><br />pull-down menu are common across a wide range of objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3282 href="picture-189?mode=zoom"><img 3283 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P189.GIF" 3284 alt="PICTURE 189" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3285 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the <b>Edit</b> menu when a menu bar is provided in a window<br /> and at least two of the following choices are provided: <b>Undo,</b><br /><b>Redo,</b> <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> <b>Create,</b> <b>Paste,</b> <b>Clear,</b> <b>Delete,</b> <b>Find,</b> <b>Select</b> <b>all,</b><br />and <b>Deselect</b> <b>all.</b> 3286 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Edit</b> menu if you provide undo choices, clipboard<br /> choices, or choices that affect the number of objects that are<br /> selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3287 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When any of the following choices are provided, place them in<br /> the following relative order in the <b>Edit</b> menu:<br /><br /><br />° <b>Undo</b><br />° <b>Redo</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Cut</b><br />° <b>Copy</b><br />° <b>Create</b><br />° <b>Paste</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Clear</b><br />° <b>Delete</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Find</b><br />° <b>Select</b> <b>all</b><br />° <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> 3288 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide additional product-specific choices in the <b>Edit</b> menu<br /> grouped with other related choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "E" as the mnemonic for the <b>Edit</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3289 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 3290 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 3291 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a> 3292 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 3293 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 3294 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.38?DT=19921204095534#HDRFIND">"Find (Choice)" in topic 2.2.38</a> 3295 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 3296 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.100?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELALLC">"Select All and Deselect All (Choice)" in topic 2.2.100</a> 3297 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.123?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNDO">"Undo and Redo (Choice)" in topic 2.2.123</a> 3298 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3299 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.101?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELMENU">"Selected Menu" in topic 2.2.101</a> 3300 </pre> 3301 <hr /> 3302 <a name="LEN Entry Field (Control)" /> 3303 <h2><a name="LEN Entry Field (Control)">2.2.33 Entry Field 3304 (Control)</a></h2> 3305 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control into which a user can type one or more lines of text.<br />Entry fields can be scrolled if more information is available<br />than is currently visible.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3306 href="picture-190?mode=zoom"><img 3307 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P190.GIF" 3308 alt="PICTURE 190" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3309 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an entry field to allow a user to type values that<br /> cannot be supplied by the product in a list of choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an entry field containing read-only text when a value is<br /> displayed that a user cannot change.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3310 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the length of the data is predictable, such as a date,<br /> time, or telephone number, make the entry field wide enough and<br /> tall enough to show all of the data of average length.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display an entry field with a background color different from<br /> the background color of the underlying window or an outline<br /> color specified by a user for the operating environment. Use<br /> the user-specified color setting for entry fields if provided by<br /> the operating environment; otherwise, use another related<br /> component setting.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> To indicate a required entry field, display along the bottom<br /> edge of the entry field a thin unbroken line of a solid color<br /> specified by the user for the operating environment. For<br /> example, with VGA resolution use a one-pel solid green line<br /> along the bottom of an entry field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> To indicate an error in the information entered in an entry<br /> field, display, along the bottom, left, and right edges of the<br /> entry field, a thin unbroken line of a solid color specified by<br /> the user for the operating environment. For example, with VGA<br /> resolution use a one-pel solid red line on the bottom, left, and<br /> right edges of an entry field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> To indicate an entry field containing read-only text, display<br /> the entry field text against the normal window background and do<br /> not display an outline box around the text. That is, display<br /> the entry field text against the normal window background.<br /><br /><br /><a 3311 name="FIGTBLUNIQ48" id="FIGTBLUNIQ48" /><a name="TBLTBLUNIQ48" 3312 id="TBLTBLUNIQ48"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 169. Different Types of Entry Fields |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Description</b> | <b>Example</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Entry field with outline box | <a 3313 href="picture-191?mode=zoom"><img 3314 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P191.GIF" 3315 alt="PICTURE 191" /></a> |<br />|____________________________________|___________________________________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a 3316 href="picture-192?mode=zoom"><img 3317 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P192.GIF" 3318 alt="PICTURE 192" /></a> |<br />| of entry field | |<br />|____________________________________|___________________________________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a 3319 href="picture-193?mode=zoom"><img 3320 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P193.GIF" 3321 alt="PICTURE 193" /></a> |<br />| of entry field-- Required | |<br />|____________________________________|___________________________________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a 3322 href="picture-194?mode=zoom"><img 3323 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P194.GIF" 3324 alt="PICTURE 194" /></a> |<br />| of entry field-- Error | |<br />|____________________________________|___________________________________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a 3325 href="picture-195?mode=zoom"><img 3326 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P195.GIF" 3327 alt="PICTURE 195" /></a> |<br />| of the underlying window-- | |<br />| Read-only | |<br />|____________________________________|___________________________________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a 3328 href="picture-196?mode=zoom"><img 3329 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P196.GIF" 3330 alt="PICTURE 196" /></a> |<br />| of entry field-- Scrollable | |<br />|____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to scroll data in an entry field when more text can<br /> be typed or when more information is available than can be<br /> displayed in the entry field at any one time.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When information can be scrolled in an entry field, provide a<br /> visible cue to indicate that the information can be scrolled.<br /> For example, provide left and right arrow scroll push buttons on<br /> an entry field of one line or provide a scroll bar for an entry<br /> field of more than one line.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an entry field allows tabs within the field, allow a user to<br /> press Ctrl+Tab to exit the entry field and to move the cursor to<br /> the next control in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an entry field must contain a value, provide an appropriate<br /> initial value.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user will typically accept the initial value in the entry<br /> field or replace it by typing, display the initial value with<br /> selected-state emphasis so that the text is replaced by the<br /> first typed character.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3331 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 3332 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 3333 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3334 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a> 3335 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 3336 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a> 3337 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 3338 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 3339 </pre> 3340 <hr /> 3341 <a name="LEN Extended Selection" /> 3342 <h2><a name="LEN Extended Selection">2.2.34 Extended 8183 8184 8185 8186 8187 8188 8189 8190 8191 8192 <pre width="80"><br />A control that is a variation of a list box. A drop-down list only displays one item until the user takes an action to display the other objects or choices. Like a list box, the drop-down list does not allow a user to type information into it.<br /><br /><a href="picture-188?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 188" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P188.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8193 <br /><b>Rec</b> Use a drop-down list instead of a single selection list box when a choice or object is not changed frequently or when space is so limited that the window does not have enough space to display a list box.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8194 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an initial value from the list in an entry field that contains read-only text.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the choices or objects in a drop-down list in an order that is meaningful to a user, such as alphabetic order, numeric order, chronological order, or some other order. For example, display modem baud rates in numeric order.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a list that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list box, do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display no more than six choices or objects at a time in a drop-down list.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide horizontal or vertical scroll bars, or both, when some of the information is not visible in the drop-down list.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a choice or object name unless the choice or object name contains an abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8195 <br />° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a> 8196 ° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 8197 ° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 8198 ° <a href="2.2.39?DT=19921204095534#HDRLETRSEL">"First-Letter Cursor Navigation" in topic 2.2.39</a> 8199 ° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 8200 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8201 <br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 8202 ° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 8203 </pre> 8204 8205 8206 8207 8208 8209 8210 8211 8212 8213 <hr /> 8214 <a name="LEN Edit Menu"></a> 8215 8216 8217 8218 8219 <h2><a name="LEN Edit Menu">2.2.32 Edit Menu</a></h2> 8220 8221 8222 8223 8224 8225 8226 8227 8228 8229 <pre width="80"><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Edit</b> choice on a menu bar that contains the undo choices, the clipboard choices, and choices that affect which objects are selected. The choices in the <i>Edit</i> pull-down menu are common across a wide range of objects.<br /><br /><a href="picture-189?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 189" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P189.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8230 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the <b>Edit</b> menu when a menu bar is provided in a window and at least two of the following choices are provided: <b>Undo,</b> <b>Redo,</b> <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> <b>Create,</b> <b>Paste,</b> <b>Clear,</b> <b>Delete,</b> <b>Find,</b> <b>Select</b> <b>all,</b> and <b>Deselect</b> <b>all.</b> 8231 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Edit</b> menu if you provide undo choices, clipboard choices, or choices that affect the number of objects that are selected.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8232 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When any of the following choices are provided, place them in the following relative order in the <b>Edit</b> menu:<br /><br />° <b>Undo</b><br />° <b>Redo</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Cut</b><br />° <b>Copy</b><br />° <b>Create</b><br />° <b>Paste</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Clear</b><br />° <b>Delete</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Find</b><br />° <b>Select</b> <b>all</b><br />° <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> 8233 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide additional product-specific choices in the <b>Edit</b> menu grouped with other related choices.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "E" as the mnemonic for the <b>Edit</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8234 <br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 8235 ° <a href="2.2.19?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOPY">"Copy (Choice)" in topic 2.2.19</a> 8236 ° <a href="2.2.20?DT=19921204095534#HDRCREATE">"Create (Choice)" in topic 2.2.20</a> 8237 ° <a href="2.2.22?DT=19921204095534#HDRCUT">"Cut (Choice)" in topic 2.2.22</a> 8238 ° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 8239 ° <a href="2.2.38?DT=19921204095534#HDRFIND">"Find (Choice)" in topic 2.2.38</a> 8240 ° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 8241 ° <a href="2.2.100?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELALLC">"Select All and Deselect All (Choice)" in topic 2.2.100</a> 8242 ° <a href="2.2.123?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNDO">"Undo and Redo (Choice)" in topic 2.2.123</a> 8243 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8244 <br />° <a href="2.2.101?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELMENU">"Selected Menu" in topic 2.2.101</a> 8245 </pre> 8246 8247 8248 8249 8250 8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 <hr /> 8256 <a name="LEN Entry Field (Control)"></a> 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 <h2><a name="LEN Entry Field (Control)">2.2.33 Entry 8262 Field 8263 (Control)</a><br /> 8264 8265 8266 8267 </h2> 8268 8269 8270 8271 8272 8273 8274 8275 8276 8277 <pre width="80"><br />A control into which a user can type one or more lines of text. Entry fields can be scrolled if more information is available than is currently visible.<br /><br /><a href="picture-190?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 190" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P190.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8278 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an entry field to allow a user to type values that cannot be supplied by the product in a list of choices.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an entry field containing read-only text when a value is displayed that a user cannot change.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8279 <br /><b>Rec</b> When the length of the data is predictable, such as a date, time, or telephone number, make the entry field wide enough and tall enough to show all of the data of average length.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display an entry field with a background color different from the background color of the underlying window or an outline color specified by a user for the operating environment. Use the user-specified color setting for entry fields if provided by the operating environment; otherwise, use another related component setting.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> To indicate a required entry field, display along the bottom edge of the entry field a thin unbroken line of a solid color specified by the user for the operating environment. For example, with VGA resolution use a one-pel solid green line along the bottom of an entry field.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> To indicate an error in the information entered in an entry field, display, along the bottom, left, and right edges of the entry field, a thin unbroken line of a solid color specified by the user for the operating environment. For example, with VGA resolution use a one-pel solid red line on the bottom, left, and right edges of an entry field.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> To indicate an entry field containing read-only text, display the entry field text against the normal window background and do not display an outline box around the text. That is, display the entry field text against the normal window background.<br /><br /><a id="FIGTBLUNIQ48" name="FIGTBLUNIQ48"></a><a id="TBLTBLUNIQ48" name="TBLTBLUNIQ48"> <br />_________________________________________________ </a><br />| <span style="font-style: italic;">Figure 169. Different Types of Entry Fields</span> |<br />|____________________________________ __________|<br />| <b>Description</b> | <b>Example</b> |<br />|____________________________________|__________|<br />| Entry field with outline box | <a href="picture-191?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 191" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P191.GIF" /></a> |<br />|____________________________________|__________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a href="picture-192?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 192" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P192.GIF" /></a> |<br />| of entry field | |<br />|____________________________________|__________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a href="picture-193?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 193" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P193.GIF" /></a> |<br />| of entry field-- Required | |<br />|____________________________________|__________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a href="picture-194?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 194" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P194.GIF" /></a> |<br />| of entry field-- Error | |<br />|____________________________________|__________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a href="picture-195?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 195" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P195.GIF" /></a> |<br />| of the underlying window-- | |<br />| Read-only | |<br />|____________________________________|__________|<br />| Entry field with background color | <a href="picture-196?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 196" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P196.GIF" /></a> |<br />| of entry field-- Scrollable | |<br />|____________________________________|__________|<br /><br /><b><br />Fnd</b> Allow a user to scroll data in an entry field when more text can be typed or when more information is available than can be displayed in the entry field at any one time.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When information can be scrolled in an entry field, provide a visible cue to indicate that the information can be scrolled. For example, provide left and right arrow scroll push buttons on an entry field of one line or provide a scroll bar for an entry field of more than one line.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an entry field allows tabs within the field, allow a user to press Ctrl+Tab to exit the entry field and to move the cursor to the next control in the window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an entry field must contain a value, provide an appropriate initial value.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user will typically accept the initial value in the entry field or replace it by typing, display the initial value with selected-state emphasis so that the text is replaced by the first typed character.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8280 <br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 8281 ° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 8282 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8283 <br />° <a href="2.2.15?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOMBOBX">"Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.15</a> 8284 ° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 8285 ° <a href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a> 8286 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 8287 ° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 8288 </pre> 8289 8290 8291 8292 8293 8294 8295 8296 8297 8298 <hr /> 8299 <a name="LEN Extended Selection"></a> 8300 8301 8302 8303 8304 <h2><a name="LEN Extended Selection">2.2.34 Extended 3343 8305 Selection</a></h2> 3344 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A type of selection optimized for the selection of a single<br />object. A user can extend selection to more than one object, if<br />required.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3345 href="picture-197?mode=zoom"><img 3346 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P197.GIF" 3347 alt="PICTURE 197" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3348 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide extended selection when a user typically performs<br /> actions on one object at a time, but can perform actions on more<br /> than one object at a time.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3349 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a keyboard user to press Shift+F8 to establish a mode in<br /> which the initial deselection is bypassed and the new selected<br /> objects are added or removed from the current group of selected<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to modify the extended selection by pressing and<br /> holding down the Ctrl key while selecting an object or group of<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Design your product so that the results listed in<a 3350 href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#FIGEXT"> Figure 170</a><br />occur during extended selection.<br /><br /><br /><a 3351 name="FIGEXT" id="FIGEXT" /><a name="TBLEXT" id="TBLEXT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 170. Extended Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Deselects all |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | other objects in |<br /> | | with pointer on | selected, press | selection scope; |<br /> | | object to be | Ctrl+Spacebar; | selects single |<br /> | | selected. | also spacebar if | identified |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | object. |<br /> | | | used to type a | |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Point-to-endpoint</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> |____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br /> | Area | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Marquee) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | | selection scope; |<br /> | | point and move | | selects all |<br /> | | the pointer to | | objects contained |<br /> | | the end point; | | within the |<br /> | | release the mouse | | identified area. |<br /> | | selection button | | |<br /> | | at the end point. | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Press mouse | Press Shift at | Deselects all |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | the start point | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | and hold while | selection scope; |<br /> | | point and move | using | selects all |<br /> | | the pointer to | cursor-movement | objects in order |<br /> | | the end point; | keys to move the | from the |<br /> | | release the mouse | cursor to the end | identified start |<br /> | | selection button | point; release | point to the |<br /> | | at the end point. | Shift at end | identified end |<br /> | | | point. | point. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Click mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Click) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | | selection scope; |<br /> | | point; press | | selects all |<br /> | | Shift and click | | objects in order |<br /> | | the mouse | | from the |<br /> | | selection button | | identified start |<br /> | | at the end point, | | point to the |<br /> | | then release | | identified end |<br /> | | Shift key. | | point. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Random-point</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> |____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br /> | Random | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | with pointer on | | selection scope; |<br /> | | first object to | | selects |<br /> | | be selected; | | individual |<br /> | | move the pointer | | objects in the |<br /> | | over other | | order the user |<br /> | | objects to be | | identified the |<br /> | | selected; release | | objects to be |<br /> | | mouse selection | | selected. |<br /> | | button. | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | <b>Modifying</b> <b>extended</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | When a user is using a mouse, pressing the Ctrl key while performing a |<br /> | selection technique allows the user to add objects to and remove |<br /> | objects from the current group of selected objects by bypassing the |<br /> | initial deselection. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point selection and random-point selection, pressing the Ctrl key |<br /> | while selecting an object or group of objects toggles the selection |<br /> | state of the first object or group of objects selected and that new |<br /> | state becomes the selection state of all objects selected thereafter |<br /> | until the Ctrl key is released. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point-to-endpoint selection, the selection state of the start point |<br /> | is toggled first and that new state becomes the selection state of all |<br /> | objects within the range or area. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point selection and random-point selection, pressing spacebar |<br /> | toggles the selection state of the identified object. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3352 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.66?DT=19921204095534#HDRMULTSEL">"Multiple Selection" in topic 2.2.66</a> 3353 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 3354 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.108?DT=19921204095534#HDRSINSEL">"Single Selection" in topic 2.2.108</a> 3355 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3356 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.7?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUTOSEL">"Automatic Selection" in topic 2.2.7</a> 3357 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#HDRDESCTXT">"Descriptive Text" in topic 2.2.27</a> 3358 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 3359 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.57?DT=19921204095534#HDRMARSEL">"Marquee Selection" in topic 2.2.57</a> 3360 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.79?DT=19921204095534#HDRRANSEL">"Point-to-Endpoint Selection" in topic 2.2.79</a> 3361 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.78?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIMPSEL">"Point Selection" in topic 2.2.78</a> 3362 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 3363 </pre> 3364 <hr /> 3365 <a name="LEN Field Prompt" /> 3366 <h2><a name="LEN Field Prompt">2.2.35 Field Prompt</a></h2> 3367 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Text that identifies a field, such as a field of check boxes or<br />an entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3368 href="picture-198?mode=zoom"><img 3369 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P198.GIF" 3370 alt="PICTURE 198" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3371 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a field prompt for each field unless there is only one<br /> field in the window and the window title serves as the field<br /> prompt.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a field prompt for each field unless the fields appear<br /> in columns and the column headings serve as the field prompts.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3372 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place a field prompt above or to the left of the field it is<br /> associated with.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a field prompt is displayed above a field, align the prompt<br /> with the left edge of the field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In high-volume data-entry windows, consider using right-aligned<br /> edges of field prompts next to left-aligned entry fields so that<br /> a narrow vertical column of space is left between the field<br /> prompts and their associated entry fields to allow a user to<br /> quickly scan the choices in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a field prompt is displayed under a group heading, indent the<br /> field prompt to the right of the group heading.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a field<br /> prompt unless the prompt contains an abbreviation, acronym, or<br /> proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use descriptive text to provide additional information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Left-align fields of controls along a margin to the right of the<br /> longest field prompt in a column.<br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3373 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a> 3374 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#HDRDESCTXT">"Descriptive Text" in topic 2.2.27</a> 3375 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 3376 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 3377 </pre> 3378 <hr /> 3379 <a name="LEN File Menu (Application-Oriented)" /> 3380 <h2><a name="LEN File Menu (Application-Oriented)">2.2.36 8306 8307 8308 8309 8310 8311 8312 8313 8314 8315 <pre width="80"><br />A type of selection optimized for the selection of a single object. A user can extend selection to more than one object, if required.<br /><br /><a href="picture-197?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 197" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P197.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8316 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide extended selection when a user typically performs actions on one object at a time, but can perform actions on more than one object at a time.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8317 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a keyboard user to press Shift+F8 to establish a mode in which the initial deselection is bypassed and the new selected objects are added or removed from the current group of selected objects.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to modify the extended selection by pressing and holding down the Ctrl key while selecting an object or group of objects.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Design your product so that the results listed in<a href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#FIGEXT"> Figure 170</a> occur during extended selection.<br /><br /><a id="FIGEXT" name="FIGEXT"></a><a id="TBLEXT" name="TBLEXT"> <br />__________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 170. Extended Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result </b>|<br />|____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br />| Point | Click mouse | With cursor on |Deselects all |<br />| selection | selection button | object to be |other objects in |<br />| | with pointer on | selected, press |selection scope; |<br />| | object to be | Ctrl+Spacebar; |selects single |<br />| | selected. | also spacebar if |identified |<br />| | | spacebar is not |object. |<br />| | | used to type a | |<br />| | | space. | |<br />|____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br />| <b>Point-to-endpoint</b> <b>selection</b> |<br />| |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| Area | Press mouse |Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br />| (Marquee) | selection button | | other objects in |<br />| | at the start | | selection scope; |<br />| | point and move | | selects all |<br />| | the pointer to | | objects contained |<br />| | the end point; | | within the |<br />| | release the mouse | | identified area. |<br />| | selection button | | |<br />| | at the end point. | | |<br />|____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br />| Range | Press mouse | Press Shift at | Deselects all |<br />| (Swipe) | selection button | the start point | other objects in |<br />| | at the start | and hold while | selection scope; |<br />| | point and move | using | selects all |<br />| | the pointer to | cursor-movement | objects in order |<br />| | the end point; | keys to move the | from the |<br />| | release the mouse | cursor to the end | identified start |<br />| | selection button | point; release | point to the |<br />| | at the end point. | Shift at end | identified end |<br />| | | point. | point. |<br />|____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br />| Range | Click mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br />| (Click) | selection button | | other objects in |<br />| | at the start | | selection scope; |<br />| | point; press | | selects all |<br />| | Shift and click | | objects in order |<br />| | the mouse | | from the |<br />| | selection button | | identified start |<br />| | at the end point, | | point to the |<br />| | then release | | identified end |<br />| | Shift key. | | point. |<br />|____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br />| <b>Random-point</b> <b>selection</b> |<br />| |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| Random | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br />| (Swipe) | selection button | | other objects in |<br />| | with pointer on | | selection scope; |<br />| | first object to | | selects |<br />| | be selected; | | individual |<br />| | move the pointer | | objects in the |<br />| | over other | | order the user |<br />| | objects to be | | identified the |<br />| | selected; release | | objects to be |<br />| | mouse selection | | selected. |<br />| | button. | | |<br />|____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br />| <b>Note:</b> |<br />| |<br />| <b>Modifying</b> <b>extended</b> <b>selection</b> |<br />| |<br />| When a user is using a mouse, pressing the Ctrl key while performing a |<br />| selection technique allows the user to add objects to and remove |<br />| objects from the current group of selected objects by bypassing the |<br />| initial deselection. |<br />| |<br />| In point selection and random-point selection, pressing the Ctrl key |<br />| while selecting an object or group of objects toggles the selection |<br />| state of the first object or group of objects selected and that new |<br />| state becomes the selection state of all objects selected thereafter |<br />| until the Ctrl key is released. |<br />| |<br />| In point-to-endpoint selection, the selection state of the start point |<br />| is toggled first and that new state becomes the selection state of all |<br />| objects within the range or area. |<br />| |<br />| In point selection and random-point selection, pressing spacebar |<br />| toggles the selection state of the identified object. |<br />|________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8318 <br />° <a href="2.2.66?DT=19921204095534#HDRMULTSEL">"Multiple Selection" in topic 2.2.66</a> 8319 ° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 8320 ° <a href="2.2.108?DT=19921204095534#HDRSINSEL">"Single Selection" in topic 2.2.108</a> 8321 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8322 <br />° <a href="2.2.7?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUTOSEL">"Automatic Selection" in topic 2.2.7</a> 8323 ° <a href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#HDRDESCTXT">"Descriptive Text" in topic 2.2.27</a> 8324 ° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 8325 ° <a href="2.2.57?DT=19921204095534#HDRMARSEL">"Marquee Selection" in topic 2.2.57</a> 8326 ° <a href="2.2.79?DT=19921204095534#HDRRANSEL">"Point-to-Endpoint Selection" in topic 2.2.79</a> 8327 ° <a href="2.2.78?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIMPSEL">"Point Selection" in topic 2.2.78</a> 8328 ° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 8329 </pre> 8330 8331 8332 8333 8334 8335 8336 8337 8338 8339 <hr /> 8340 <a name="LEN Field Prompt"></a> 8341 8342 8343 8344 8345 <h2><a name="LEN Field Prompt">2.2.35 Field Prompt</a></h2> 8346 8347 8348 8349 8350 8351 8352 8353 8354 8355 <pre width="80"><br />Text that identifies a field, such as a field of check boxes or<br />an entry field.<br /><br /><a href="picture-198?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 198" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P198.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8356 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a field prompt for each field unless there is only one field in the window and the window title serves as the field prompt.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a field prompt for each field unless the fields appear in columns and the column headings serve as the field prompts.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8357 <br /><b>Rec</b> Place a field prompt above or to the left of the field it is associated with.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a field prompt is displayed above a field, align the prompt with the left edge of the field.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In high-volume data-entry windows, consider using right-aligned edges of field prompts next to left-aligned entry fields so that a narrow vertical column of space is left between the field prompts and their associated entry fields to allow a user to quickly scan the choices in the window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a field prompt is displayed under a group heading, indent the field prompt to the right of the group heading.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a field prompt unless the prompt contains an abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use descriptive text to provide additional information.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Left-align fields of controls along a margin to the right of the longest field prompt in a column.<br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8358 <br />° <a href="2.2.14?DT=19921204095534#HDRCOLHEAD">"Column Heading" in topic 2.2.14</a> 8359 ° <a href="2.2.27?DT=19921204095534#HDRDESCTXT">"Descriptive Text" in topic 2.2.27</a> 8360 ° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 8361 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 8362 </pre> 8363 8364 8365 8366 8367 8368 8369 8370 8371 8372 <hr /> 8373 <a name="LEN File Menu (Application-Oriented)"></a> 8374 8375 8376 8377 8378 <h2><a name="LEN File Menu (Application-Oriented)">2.2.36 3381 8379 File Menu 3382 8380 (Application-Oriented)</a></h2> 3383 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>File</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that affect the object presented in that<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3384 href="picture-199?mode=zoom"><img 3385 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P199.GIF" 3386 alt="PICTURE 199" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3387 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>File</b> menu choice in all application-oriented windows<br /> that provide a menu bar if any of the <b>File</b> menu choices are<br /> provided.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3388 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the following choices are provided, place them in the<br /> following relative order in the <b>File</b> menu:<br /><br /><br />° <b>New</b><br />° <b>Open</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Save</b><br />° <b>Save</b> <b>as</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Print</b> 3389 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Add any product-specific choices, as needed, grouped with other<br /> related choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "F" as the mnemonic for the <b>File</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3390 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 3391 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.67?DT=19921204095534#HDRNEW">"New (Choice)" in topic 2.2.67</a> 3392 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.70?DT=19921204095534#HDROPEN">"Open (Choice)" in topic 2.2.70</a> 3393 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a> 3394 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.94?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVE">"Save (Choice)" in topic 2.2.94</a> 3395 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.96?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVEAS">"Save As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.96</a> 3396 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3397 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.37?DT=19921204095534#HDRFILEOB">"File Menu (Object-Oriented)" in topic 2.2.37</a> 3398 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a> 3399 </pre> 3400 <hr /> 3401 <a name="LEN File Menu (Object-Oriented)" /> 3402 <h2><a name="LEN File Menu (Object-Oriented)">2.2.37 File 8381 8382 8383 8384 8385 8386 8387 8388 8389 8390 <pre width="80"><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>File</b> choice on a menu bar that contains choices that affect the object presented in that window.<br /><br /><a href="picture-199?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 199" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P199.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8391 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>File</b> menu choice in all application-oriented windows that provide a menu bar if any of the <b>File</b> menu choices are provided.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8392 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When the following choices are provided, place them in the following relative order in the <b>File</b> menu:<br /><br />° <b>New</b><br />° <b>Open</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Save</b><br />° <b>Save</b> <b>as</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Print</b> 8393 <br /><b>Rec</b> Add any product-specific choices, as needed, grouped with other related choices.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "F" as the mnemonic for the <b>File</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8394 <br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 8395 ° <a href="2.2.67?DT=19921204095534#HDRNEW">"New (Choice)" in topic 2.2.67</a> 8396 ° <a href="2.2.70?DT=19921204095534#HDROPEN">"Open (Choice)" in topic 2.2.70</a> 8397 ° <a href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a> 8398 ° <a href="2.2.94?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVE">"Save (Choice)" in topic 2.2.94</a> 8399 ° <a href="2.2.96?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVEAS">"Save As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.96</a> 8400 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8401 <br />° <a href="2.2.37?DT=19921204095534#HDRFILEOB">"File Menu (Object-Oriented)" in topic 2.2.37</a> 8402 ° <a href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a> 8403 </pre> 8404 8405 8406 8407 8408 8409 8410 8411 8412 8413 <hr /> 8414 <a name="LEN File Menu (Object-Oriented)"></a> 8415 8416 8417 8418 8419 <h2><a name="LEN File Menu (Object-Oriented)">2.2.37 8420 File 3403 8421 Menu 3404 8422 (Object-Oriented)</a></h2> 3405 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from a choice labeled with the class name of<br />the object in the window, that contains choices that affect the<br />underlying object presented in that window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3406 href="picture-200?mode=zoom"><img 3407 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P200.GIF" 3408 alt="PICTURE 200" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3409 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>File</b> menu choice, object-oriented version, in all<br /> object-oriented windows that provide a menu bar if any of the<br /> <b>File</b> menu choices are provided.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3410 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Label the menu bar choice with the class-name of the object in<br /> the window. For example, for a worksheet object, label the<br /> menu-bar choice <b>Worksheet.</b> 3411 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the following choices are provided, place them in the<br /> following relative order in the <b>File</b> menu:<br /><br /><br />° <b>Open</b> <b>as</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Save</b> (use only if the save function is not immediate)<br /> ° --Separator--<br /> ° <b>Print</b> 3412 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Add any product-specific choices, as needed, grouped with other<br /> related choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign a unique mnemonic for the class name choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3413 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 3414 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.71?DT=19921204095534#HDROPENAS">"Open As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.71</a> 3415 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a> 3416 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.94?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVE">"Save (Choice)" in topic 2.2.94</a> 3417 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3418 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.36?DT=19921204095534#HDRFILE">"File Menu (Application-Oriented)" in topic 2.2.36</a> 3419 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a> 3420 </pre> 3421 <hr /> 3422 <a name="LEN Find (Choice)" /> 3423 <h2><a name="LEN Find (Choice)">2.2.38 Find (Choice)</a></h2> 3424 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A routing choice that displays an action window that allows a<br />user to search an object displayed in a window. A user can<br />specify the criteria to be used for the search. The find<br />operation searches the current view of the object from which the<br /><b>Find</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3425 href="picture-201?mode=zoom"><img 3426 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P201.GIF" 3427 alt="PICTURE 201" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3428 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Find</b> choice for each object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3429 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Find</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Find</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Find</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Find</b><br />choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can<br />currently be searched.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Find</b> choice, provide an action window that<br /> allows a user to specify the parameters of the search. For<br /> example, allow a user to specify the text to be found, the<br /> direction of the search, or sensitivity to text capitalization.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid changing the contents of a window as a result of a find<br /> operation, except to scroll the next matching object into sight<br /> and to indicate that it matches the search criteria, such as by<br /> selecting the matching word.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid removing the <b>Find</b> action window unless a user explicitly<br /> requests to remove it, such as by selecting a <b>Close</b> push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Always display the <b>Find</b> action window on top of the primary<br /> window it is dependent on, even when the <b>Find</b> action window is<br /> not the active window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid opening a new window to display the results of the find<br /> operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "F" as the mnemonic for the <b>Find</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3430 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 3431 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3432 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.49?DT=19921204095534#HDRINCLUDE">"Include (Choice)" in topic 2.2.49</a> 3433 </pre> 3434 <hr /> 3435 <a name="LEN First-Letter Cursor Navigation" /> 3436 <h2><a name="LEN First-Letter Cursor Navigation">2.2.39 8423 8424 8425 8426 8427 8428 8429 8430 8431 8432 <pre width="80"><br />A pull-down menu from a choice labeled with the class name of the object in the window, that contains choices that affect the underlying object presented in that window.<br /><br /><a href="picture-200?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 200" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P200.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8433 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>File</b> menu choice, object-oriented version, in all object-oriented windows that provide a menu bar if any of the <b>File</b> menu choices are provided.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8434 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Label the menu bar choice with the class-name of the object in the window. For example, for a worksheet object, label the menu-bar choice <b>Worksheet.</b> 8435 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When the following choices are provided, place them in the following relative order in the <b>File</b> menu:<br /><br />° <b>Open</b> <b>as</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Save</b> (use only if the save function is not immediate)<br /> ° --Separator--<br /> ° <b>Print</b> 8436 <br /><b>Rec</b> Add any product-specific choices, as needed, grouped with other related choices.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign a unique mnemonic for the class name choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8437 <br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 8438 ° <a href="2.2.71?DT=19921204095534#HDROPENAS">"Open As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.71</a> 8439 ° <a href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a> 8440 ° <a href="2.2.94?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVE">"Save (Choice)" in topic 2.2.94</a> 8441 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8442 <br />° <a href="2.2.36?DT=19921204095534#HDRFILE">"File Menu (Application-Oriented)" in topic 2.2.36</a> 8443 ° <a href="2.2.60?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUBAR">"Menu Bar" in topic 2.2.60</a> 8444 </pre> 8445 8446 8447 8448 8449 8450 8451 8452 8453 8454 <hr /> 8455 <a name="LEN Find (Choice)"></a> 8456 8457 8458 8459 8460 <h2><a name="LEN Find (Choice)">2.2.38 Find (Choice)</a></h2> 8461 8462 8463 8464 8465 8466 8467 8468 8469 8470 <pre width="80"><br />A routing choice that displays an action window that allows a user to search an object displayed in a window. A user can specify the criteria to be used for the search. The find operation searches the current view of the object from which the<br /><b>Find</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><a href="picture-201?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 201" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P201.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8471 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Find</b> choice for each object.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8472 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Find</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu, place the <b>Find</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Find</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Find</b> choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can currently be searched.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Find</b> choice, provide an action window that allows a user to specify the parameters of the search. For example, allow a user to specify the text to be found, the direction of the search, or sensitivity to text capitalization.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid changing the contents of a window as a result of a find operation, except to scroll the next matching object into sight and to indicate that it matches the search criteria, such as by selecting the matching word.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid removing the <b>Find</b> action window unless a user explicitly requests to remove it, such as by selecting a <b>Close</b> push button.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Always display the <b>Find</b> action window on top of the primary window it is dependent on, even when the <b>Find</b> action window is not the active window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid opening a new window to display the results of the find operation.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "F" as the mnemonic for the <b>Find</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8473 <br />° <a href="2.2.32?DT=19921204095534#HDREDIT">"Edit Menu" in topic 2.2.32</a> 8474 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8475 <br />° <a href="2.2.49?DT=19921204095534#HDRINCLUDE">"Include (Choice)" in topic 2.2.49</a> 8476 </pre> 8477 8478 8479 8480 8481 8482 8483 8484 8485 8486 <hr /> 8487 <a name="LEN First-Letter Cursor Navigation"></a> 8488 8489 8490 8491 8492 <h2><a name="LEN First-Letter Cursor Navigation">2.2.39 3437 8493 First-Letter Cursor Navigation</a></h2> 3438 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A selection technique in which users select an object in a list<br />by typing the first character of the object they want to select.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3439 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide first-letter cursor navigation in all lists of objects<br /> or settings choices, such as details views, list boxes, and<br /> drop-down lists.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3440 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user types a letter, move the cursor to the next object<br /> or settings choice that starts with that letter.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user types a letter that has no valid match, do not move<br /> the cursor.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to press either the uppercase or lowercase<br /> character to gain access to first-letter cursor navigation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3441 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 3442 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a> 3443 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3444 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 3445 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 3446 </pre> 3447 <hr /> 3448 <a name="LEN Folder (Object)" /> 3449 <h2><a name="LEN Folder (Object)">2.2.40 Folder (Object)</a></h2> 3450 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A container object used to store and organize objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3451 href="picture-202?mode=zoom"><img 3452 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P202.GIF" 3453 alt="PICTURE 202" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3454 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a folder to allow a user to store and group objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3455 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user closes or minimizes a folder, continue to display<br /> any window opened on an object contained in that folder.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If folders are provided by the operating environment, support<br /> them. For example, allow a user to place your objects into the<br /> folders provided by the operating environment and use the<br /> folders provided by the operating environment to create<br /> product-specific folders.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a settings choice that allows a user to change between a<br /> folder and a work area. For example, provide a choice on a<br /> check box in the settings view of a folder that allows a user to<br /> change the folder into a work area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes a folder into a work area, immediately change<br /> its icon to that of a work area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to place any object into a folder.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a folder containing sample objects from which users can<br /> create new objects. Make the create-on-drag setting the initial<br /> setting for the objects in the folder. For example, provide a<br /> folder named "New Forms" containing initialized versions of<br /> frequently-used forms.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3456 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a> 3457 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.136?DT=19921204095534#HDRWRKAREA">"Work Area (Object)" in topic 2.2.136</a> 3458 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3459 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.26?DT=19921204095534#HDRWBASKET">"Delete Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.26</a> 3460 </pre> 3461 <hr /> 3462 <a name="LEN General Help (Choice)" /> 3463 <h2><a name="LEN General Help (Choice)">2.2.41 General Help 8494 8495 8496 8497 8498 8499 8500 8501 8502 8503 <pre width="80"><br />A selection technique in which users select an object in a list by typing the first character of the object they want to select.<br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8504 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide first-letter cursor navigation in all lists of objects or settings choices, such as details views, list boxes, and drop-down lists.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8505 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user types a letter, move the cursor to the next object or settings choice that starts with that letter.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user types a letter that has no valid match, do not move the cursor.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to press either the uppercase or lowercase character to gain access to first-letter cursor navigation.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8506 <br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 8507 ° <a href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a> 8508 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8509 <br />° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 8510 ° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 8511 </pre> 8512 8513 8514 8515 8516 8517 8518 8519 8520 8521 <hr /> 8522 <a name="LEN Folder (Object)"></a> 8523 8524 8525 8526 8527 <h2><a name="LEN Folder (Object)">2.2.40 Folder 8528 (Object)</a></h2> 8529 8530 8531 8532 8533 8534 8535 8536 8537 8538 <pre width="80"><br />A container object used to store and organize objects.<br /><br /><a href="picture-202?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 202" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P202.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8539 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a folder to allow a user to store and group objects.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8540 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user closes or minimizes a folder, continue to display any window opened on an object contained in that folder.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If folders are provided by the operating environment, support them. For example, allow a user to place your objects into the folders provided by the operating environment and use the folders provided by the operating environment to create product-specific folders.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a settings choice that allows a user to change between a folder and a work area. For example, provide a choice on a check box in the settings view of a folder that allows a user to change the folder into a work area.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes a folder into a work area, immediately change its icon to that of a work area.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to place any object into a folder.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a folder containing sample objects from which users can create new objects. Make the create-on-drag setting the initial setting for the objects in the folder. For example, provide a folder named "New Forms" containing initialized versions of frequently-used forms.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8541 <br />° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a> 8542 ° <a href="2.2.136?DT=19921204095534#HDRWRKAREA">"Work Area (Object)" in topic 2.2.136</a> 8543 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8544 <br />° <a href="2.2.26?DT=19921204095534#HDRWBASKET">"Delete Folder (Object)" in topic 2.2.26</a> 8545 </pre> 8546 8547 8548 8549 8550 8551 8552 8553 8554 8555 <hr /> 8556 <a name="LEN General Help (Choice)"></a> 8557 8558 8559 8560 8561 <h2><a name="LEN General Help (Choice)">2.2.41 8562 General Help 3464 8563 (Choice)</a></h2> 3465 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing a brief<br />overview of the function of the window from which the <b>General</b><br /><b>help</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3466 href="picture-203?mode=zoom"><img 3467 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P203.GIF" 3468 alt="PICTURE 203" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3469 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>General</b> <b>help</b> choice for each <b>Help</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3470 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>General</b> <b>help</b> choice, display a window<br /> containing general help information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "G" as the mnemonic for the <b>General</b> <b>help</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3471 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a> 3472 </pre> 3473 <hr /> 3474 <a name="LEN Group Box" /> 3475 <h2><a name="LEN Group Box">2.2.42 Group Box</a></h2> 3476 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A rectangular box drawn around a group of fields to indicate<br />that the fields are related and to provide a label for the<br />group.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3477 href="picture-204?mode=zoom"><img 3478 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P204.GIF" 3479 alt="PICTURE 204" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3480 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a group box only when a group heading or white space does<br /> not visually distinguish groups of fields in a window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3481 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a label for each group box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a label of<br /> a group box unless the label contains an abbreviation, acronym,<br /> or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using a group box around a field of push buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using a group box around a single field. For example,<br /> avoid using a group box around a single list box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3482 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 3483 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 3484 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.104?DT=19921204095534#HDRSEPARAT">"Separator" in topic 2.2.104</a> 3485 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 3486 </pre> 3487 <hr /> 3488 <a name="LEN Group Heading" /> 3489 <h2><a name="LEN Group Heading">2.2.43 Group Heading</a></h2> 3490 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Text that identifies a set of related fields.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3491 href="picture-205?mode=zoom"><img 3492 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P205.GIF" 3493 alt="PICTURE 205" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3494 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a group heading rather than a group box to identify a group<br /> of related fields.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3495 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place a group heading above each group of fields.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Indent the fields in each group under their associated group<br /> heading.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Left-align group headings vertically with the left edge of other<br /> group headings.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize the first letter of the first and last words of a<br /> group heading, and all other words except articles, coordinating<br /> conjunctions, prepositions, and the "to" in infinitives.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a group heading appears in a window that can be scrolled,<br /> scroll the heading with the group it identifies.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3496 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 3497 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a> 3498 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 3499 </pre> 3500 <hr /> 3501 <a name="LEN Help Index (Choice)" /> 3502 <h2><a name="LEN Help Index (Choice)">2.2.44 Help Index 8564 8565 8566 8567 8568 8569 8570 8571 8572 8573 <pre width="80"><br />An action choice that displays a window containing a brief overview of the function of the window from which the <b>General</b> <b>help</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><a href="picture-203?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 203" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P203.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8574 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>General</b> <b>help</b> choice for each <b>Help</b> menu.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8575 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>General</b> <b>help</b> choice, display a window containing general help information.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "G" as the mnemonic for the <b>General</b> <b>help</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8576 <br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a> 8577 </pre> 8578 8579 8580 8581 8582 8583 8584 8585 8586 8587 <hr /> 8588 <a name="LEN Group Box"></a> 8589 8590 8591 8592 8593 <h2><a name="LEN Group Box">2.2.42 Group Box</a></h2> 8594 8595 8596 8597 8598 8599 8600 8601 8602 8603 <pre width="80"><br />A rectangular box drawn around a group of fields to indicate that the fields are related and to provide a label for the group.<br /><br /><a href="picture-204?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 204" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P204.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8604 <br /><b>Rec</b> Use a group box only when a group heading or white space does not visually distinguish groups of fields in a window.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8605 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a label for each group box.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a label of a group box unless the label contains an abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using a group box around a field of push buttons.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using a group box around a single field. For example, avoid using a group box around a single list box.<br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8606 <br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 8607 ° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 8608 ° <a href="2.2.104?DT=19921204095534#HDRSEPARAT">"Separator" in topic 2.2.104</a> 8609 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 8610 </pre> 8611 8612 8613 8614 8615 8616 8617 8618 8619 8620 <hr /> 8621 <a name="LEN Group Heading"></a> 8622 8623 8624 8625 8626 <h2><a name="LEN Group Heading">2.2.43 Group Heading</a></h2> 8627 8628 8629 8630 8631 8632 8633 8634 8635 8636 <pre width="80"><br />Text that identifies a set of related fields.<br /><br /><a href="picture-205?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 205" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P205.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8637 <br /><b>Rec</b> Use a group heading rather than a group box to identify a group of related fields.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8638 <br /><b>Rec</b> Place a group heading above each group of fields.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Indent the fields in each group under their associated group heading.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Left-align group headings vertically with the left edge of other group headings.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize the first letter of the first and last words of a group heading, and all other words except articles, coordinating conjunctions, prepositions, and the "to" in infinitives.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a group heading appears in a window that can be scrolled, scroll the heading with the group it identifies.<br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8639 <br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 8640 ° <a href="2.2.35?DT=19921204095534#HDRFLDPROM">"Field Prompt" in topic 2.2.35</a> 8641 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 8642 </pre> 8643 8644 8645 8646 8647 8648 8649 8650 8651 8652 <hr /> 8653 <a name="LEN Help Index (Choice)"></a> 8654 8655 8656 8657 8658 <h2><a name="LEN Help Index (Choice)">2.2.44 Help 8659 Index 3503 8660 (Choice)</a></h2> 3504 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays an alphabetic listing of all help<br />topics within the product or application.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3505 href="picture-206?mode=zoom"><img 3506 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P206.GIF" 3507 alt="PICTURE 206" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3508 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> choice in each help menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3509 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to keys help from the help index window. For<br /> example, provide a <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> choice in a menu or on a push<br /> button in the help index window that allows a user to get keys<br /> help.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to the help index from every help window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Follow appropriate indexing conventions (such as printed<br /> material conventions) to create a help index.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Indicate which entries in a help index lead to task-oriented<br /> help and tutorial help. For example, provide entries for the<br /> <b>Copy</b> <b>task</b> and the <b>Copy</b> <b>tutorial.</b> 3510 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place in the help index an entry for each help topic about an<br /> object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place in the help index an entry for each help topic about a<br /> window or choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide synonyms for each help index entry.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to search the help index. For example, provide a<br /> <b>Search</b> routing choice in a menu or on a push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user specifies a synonym as a search criterion, find the<br /> corresponding help topic and display it in a secondary window<br /> with a title bar containing the name of the help topic that was<br /> found as a match to the synonym. For example, if a user<br /> specifies the topic "action bar" as a search criterion, and<br /> you've provided help for the topic "menu bar," display help for<br /> menu bar in a window entitled "Menu Bar - Help."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not include the words "Help for" in index entries. For<br /> example, do not label an entry "Help for Cut."<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "I" as the mnemonic for the <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3511 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a> 3512 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a> 3513 </pre> 3514 <hr /> 3515 <a name="LEN Help Menu" /> 3516 <h2><a name="LEN Help Menu">2.2.45 Help Menu</a></h2> 3517 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Help</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that provide information about a window,<br /> choice, object, or a task.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3518 href="picture-207?mode=zoom"><img 3519 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P207.GIF" 3520 alt="PICTURE 207" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3521 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Help</b> choice in the menu bar of all windows that have a<br /> menu bar and provide help.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3522 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the following choices are provided, place them in the<br /> following relative order in the <b>Help</b> menu:<br /><br /><br />° <b>Help</b> <b>index</b><br />° <b>General</b> <b>help</b><br />° <b>Using</b> <b>help</b><br />° <b>Tutorial</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> 3523 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide other <b>Help</b> choices, place them between the <b>Using</b><br /><b>help</b> choice and the <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> choice in the <b>Help</b> menu.<br /> For example, if you provide a <b>Getting</b> <b>started</b> choice, place it<br /> below the <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> choice and above the <b>Product</b> <b>information</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place a <b>Help</b> choice on a push button in a window if that window<br /> does not have a menu bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display help information in a secondary window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Create the title of a <b>Help</b> window by naming the object or action<br /> about which help was requested followed by a dash (-) and the<br /> word <b>Help.</b> 3524 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If additional wording is helpful in identifying the window,<br /> place the extra words after the dash (to the right, left, or<br /> both sides of the word <b>Help</b>). For example, label the window<br /> <b>MyObject</b> <b>-</b> <b>General</b> <b>Help.</b> 3525 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not place the title of a help window in the text of the help<br /> information; instead, rely on the title bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects a Help choice or presses the Help key, do<br /> not change the state or appearance of the object about which<br /> help was requested. For example, if a user requests help about<br /> a check-box choice, do not select the check-box choice because<br /> help was requested.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place a help window so that it does not cover the object for<br /> which help was requested.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide help in the form most appropriate and useful to a user.<br /> For example, use text, graphics, animation, audio, video, or any<br /> other technique or combination of techniques that conveys the<br /> information clearly and concisely.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "H" as the mnemonic for the <b>Help</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3526 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.41?DT=19921204095534#HDRGENHELP">"General Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.41</a> 3527 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.44?DT=19921204095534#HDRHLPINDX">"Help Index (Choice)" in topic 2.2.44</a> 3528 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 3529 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.83?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRODINF">"Product Information (Choice)" in topic 2.2.83</a> 3530 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a> 3531 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.121?DT=19921204095534#HDRTUTOR">"Tutorial (Choice)" in topic 2.2.121</a> 3532 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.124?DT=19921204095534#HDRUSHELP">"Using Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.124</a> 3533 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3534 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.17?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTEXH">"Contextual Help" in topic 2.2.17</a> 3535 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 3536 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a> 3537 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWT">"Window Title" in topic 2.2.135</a> 3538 </pre> 3539 <hr /> 3540 <a name="LEN Hide (Choice)" /> 3541 <h2><a name="LEN Hide (Choice)">2.2.46 Hide (Choice)</a></h2> 3542 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that removes the window and all associated<br />windows from the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3543 href="picture-208?mode=zoom"><img 3544 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P208.GIF" 3545 alt="PICTURE 208" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3546 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Hide</b> choice for windows in an operating environment<br /> that supports the hide function.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3547 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a <b>Hide</b> function is provided, place a hide button on the<br /> title bar of each window that can be hidden.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Hide</b> choice or the hide button, remove<br /> the window and all associated windows from the workplace and<br /> indicate its hidden status in a window list.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F9 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Hide</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "H" as the mnemonic for the <b>Hide</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3548 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.130?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLWIN">"Window List" in topic 2.2.130</a> 3549 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3550 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a> 3551 </pre> 3552 <hr /> 3553 <a name="LEN Icon" /> 3554 <h2><a name="LEN Icon">2.2.47 Icon</a></h2> 3555 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pictorial representation of an object, consisting of an image,<br />image background, and a label. Small icons can be substituted<br />for regular icons. The small icon in the title bar of a window<br />is another icon for the object that is displayed in the window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3556 href="picture-209?mode=zoom"><img 3557 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P209.GIF" 3558 alt="PICTURE 209" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3559 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user places an object on the workplace, use an icon to<br /> represent that object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3560 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display a small icon in the title bar of each window that<br /> displays a view of an object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a small icon in the title bar of a window, place<br /> it immediately to the right of the system-menu symbol.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a small icon in the title bar of a window,<br /> provide the same direct manipulation functions for it as are<br /> available for the object's icon. For example, allow a user to<br /> print the object by dragging the small icon in the title bar to<br /> a printer.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a small icon in the title bar of a window,<br /> display target emphasis on the small icon in the title bar<br /> during a direct manipulation operation when the object in the<br /> window is a valid target of the direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a label for each icon, except for the small icon in the<br /> title bar; in that case, the window title serves as the label<br /> for the small icon in the title bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use the name of the object as the label for the icon.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Design an icon so that it shows the important characteristics of<br /> the object it represents and important states of the object.<br /> Such characteristics might include:<br /><br /><br />° Needs attention, for example, when a printer is out of paper<br /><br /><br />° Threshold reached, for example, when a mailbox is full<br /><br /><br />° Read-only, for example, when a user does not have the<br />ability to edit a document.<br /><br /><br />° Security classification, for example, confidential or<br />restricted<br /><br /><br />° Urgency, for example, when a piece of urgent electronic mail<br />arrives<br /><br /><br />° Quantity, for example, the number of objects a container<br />holds.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an icon displays the state or settings of the object it<br /> represents, immediately update the icon to indicate changes to<br /> the state or settings. For example, if a user selects an<br /> object, immediately display selected-state emphasis on the icon<br /> that represents the selected object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes a folder into a work area or changes a work<br /> area into a folder, immediately update the icon of that<br /> container to indicate the change.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to customize the appearance of an icon. For<br /> example, allow a user to change an icon to make it more<br /> meaningful, recognizable, or personal.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display appropriate emphasis, such as source emphasis, target<br /> emphasis, selected-state emphasis, and in-use emphasis, when a<br /> user interacts with an icon. For example, display an object's<br /> icon with in-use emphasis when a user displays a view of that<br /> object in a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not show in-use emphasis on small icons used in the title<br /> bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not display a count of the number of objects in a container<br /> on a small icon.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not use an algorithmically reduced copy of the original icon<br /> as a small icon. Instead, use a separate graphic to display a<br /> small icon that shows fewer characteristics so that the<br /> characteristics can be more easily distinguished.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to rename an object where that object is displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you allow a user to edit an icon's label, provide text entry<br /> techniques that allow the user to type, select, and manipulate<br /> the text of the icon's label.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3561 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a> 3562 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.53?DT=19921204095534#HDRINUSEE">"In-Use Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.53</a> 3563 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a> 3564 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.102?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELEMPH">"Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.102</a> 3565 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.112?DT=19921204095534#HDRSOURCEE">"Source Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.112</a> 3566 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.118?DT=19921204095534#HDRTARGETE">"Target Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.118</a> 3567 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 3568 </pre> 3569 <hr /> 3570 <a name="LEN Inactive Window" /> 3571 <h2><a name="LEN Inactive Window">2.2.48 Inactive Window</a></h2> 3572 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that does not have the input focus. The inactive<br />window is indicated by the type of emphasis displayed on its<br />title bar and border, as specified by the operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3573 href="picture-210?mode=zoom"><img 3574 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P210.GIF" 3575 alt="PICTURE 210" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3576 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Make any window that does not currently have the input focus an<br /> inactive window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3577 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Change the color of the title bar and window border of an<br /> inactive window to the color specified in the operating<br /> environment.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not continue to display the cursor an inactive window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display any appropriate emphasis types in an inactive window.<br /> For example, display selected-state emphasis for selected<br /> objects displayed in an inactive window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3578 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTWIND">"Active Window" in topic 2.2.5</a> 3579 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a> 3580 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3581 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 3582 </pre> 3583 <hr /> 3584 <a name="LEN Include (Choice)" /> 3585 <h2><a name="LEN Include (Choice)">2.2.49 Include (Choice)</a></h2> 3586 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A routing choice that displays an action window that allows a<br />user to specify characteristics of a subset of objects so that<br />only the subset is displayed in the window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3587 href="picture-211?mode=zoom"><img 3588 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P211.GIF" 3589 alt="PICTURE 211" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3590 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Include</b> choice when it is useful to identify subsets<br /> of objects contained within the object from which the <b>Include</b><br />choice is selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3591 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide an <b>Include</b> choice, and you provide a <b>View</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Include</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Include</b> choice for an object, place the<br /> <b>Include</b> choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object<br /> can currently be included.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to specify the objects that are to be shown in the<br /> view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Include</b> settings in an action window that is<br /> dependent on the window from which the <b>Include</b> choice is<br /> selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the results of the <b>Include</b> operation in the window from<br /> which the <b>Include</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In the window in which the results of the <b>Include</b> operation will<br /> be displayed, provide a status area to list the criteria used to<br /> create the subset. For example, indicate the number of objects<br /> displayed, as well as the total number of objects in the<br /> container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an object is added to another object on which an included<br /> view is displayed and in which the include criteria are being<br /> maintained for that view, and the object being added matches the<br /> include criteria for the subset, place the object being added in<br /> its correct position in the subset. For example, if a document<br /> is added to a folder and that document matches the current<br /> include criteria for that folder, the document will be visible<br /> in the current view; if the document does not match the include<br /> criteria, the document is added to the folder, but the document<br /> will not be visible in the current view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user performs an include operation on an object, apply<br /> the include criteria to the entire object, not just the contents<br /> of the current view of the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "I" as the mnemonic for the <b>Include</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3592 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.126?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEW">"View Menu" in topic 2.2.126</a> 3593 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3594 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.38?DT=19921204095534#HDRFIND">"Find (Choice)" in topic 2.2.38</a> 3595 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 3596 </pre> 3597 <hr /> 3598 <a name="LEN Information Area" /> 3599 <h2><a name="LEN Information Area">2.2.50 Information Area</a></h2> 3600 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A part of a window where information appears about the object or<br />choice that the cursor is on. Information about the normal<br />completion of a process can also appear in the information area.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3601 href="picture-212?mode=zoom"><img 3602 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P212.GIF" 3603 alt="PICTURE 212" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3604 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an information area for each window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3605 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the cursor is on a choice, briefly describe in an<br /> information area what will happen when a user selects that<br /> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the cursor is on an object, briefly suggest in an<br /> information area:<br /><br /><br />° The default action, if any.<br />° The most appropriate action, if any.<br />° How to perform available actions on the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place information about the normal completion of a process in<br /> the information area. For example, indicate in an information<br /> area that a file was successfully saved.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For contents views that provide a selection type other than<br /> extended selection, place in the information area information<br /> about the number of items that can be selected. For example,<br /> for single selection display text saying, "Select at most one."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the information area the same width as the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the information area no taller than necessary to<br /> accommodate brief, but meaningful, information. For example,<br /> when using text, accommodate only two lines of text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide an information area, place it at the bottom of a<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide an information area and there is a horizontal<br /> scroll bar in the window, place the information area below the<br /> scroll bar and above the window border.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a separator to separate the information area from the rest<br /> of the window. For example, use a solid line or a horizontal<br /> scroll bar to separate the information area from the rest of the<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide an information area, do not scroll the<br /> information area when the window's contents are scrolled.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user attempts to select a choice that is currently<br /> displayed with unavailable-state emphasis, indicate in the<br /> information area that the choice cannot be selected and that<br /> requesting help will explain why it is unavailable.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide an information area, allow a user to turn the<br /> display of the information area on or off. For example, provide<br /> a settings choice in the <b>View</b> pull-down menu or on a page in a<br /> settings notebook that allows a user to turn the display of the<br /> information area on or off.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Remove information from the information area as soon as it is no<br /> longer relevant to the current state of the window or the<br /> current position of the cursor.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not allow a user to interact with the information area,<br /> except to copy information from the information area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not use an information area to display information that a<br /> user must see; display that type of information in a message.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user reduces the width of a window with an information area<br /> and the information can wrap in the information area, wrap the<br /> information; otherwise, clip the information area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not provide scroll bars for an information area and do not<br /> allow a user to scroll information in the information area.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3606 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.51?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFMS">"Information Message" in topic 2.2.51</a> 3607 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.104?DT=19921204095534#HDRSEPARAT">"Separator" in topic 2.2.104</a> 3608 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3609 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 3610 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 3611 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a> 3612 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 3613 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 3614 </pre> 3615 <hr /> 3616 <a name="LEN Information Message" /> 3617 <h2><a name="LEN Information Message">2.2.51 Information 8661 8662 8663 8664 8665 8666 8667 8668 8669 8670 <pre width="80"><br />An action choice that displays an alphabetic listing of all help topics within the product or application.<br /><br /><a href="picture-206?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 206" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P206.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8671 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> choice in each help menu.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8672 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to keys help from the help index window. For example, provide a <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> choice in a menu or on a push button in the help index window that allows a user to get keys help.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to the help index from every help window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Follow appropriate indexing conventions (such as printed material conventions) to create a help index.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Indicate which entries in a help index lead to task-oriented help and tutorial help. For example, provide entries for the <b>Copy</b> <b>task</b> and the <b>Copy</b> <b>tutorial.</b> 8673 <br /><b>Rec</b> Place in the help index an entry for each help topic about an object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place in the help index an entry for each help topic about a window or choice.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide synonyms for each help index entry.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to search the help index. For example, provide a <b>Search</b> routing choice in a menu or on a push button.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user specifies a synonym as a search criterion, find the corresponding help topic and display it in a secondary window with a title bar containing the name of the help topic that was found as a match to the synonym. For example, if a user specifies the topic "action bar" as a search criterion, and you've provided help for the topic "menu bar," display help for menu bar in a window entitled "Menu Bar - Help."<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not include the words "Help for" in index entries. For example, do not label an entry "Help for Cut."<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "I" as the mnemonic for the <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8674 <br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a> 8675 ° <a href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a> 8676 </pre> 8677 8678 8679 8680 8681 8682 8683 8684 8685 8686 <hr /> 8687 <a name="LEN Help Menu"></a> 8688 8689 8690 8691 8692 <h2><a name="LEN Help Menu">2.2.45 Help Menu</a></h2> 8693 8694 8695 8696 8697 8698 8699 8700 8701 8702 <pre width="80"><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Help</b> choice on a menu bar that contains choices that provide information about a window, choice, object, or a task.<br /><br /><a href="picture-207?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 207" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P207.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8703 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Help</b> choice in the menu bar of all windows that have a menu bar and provide help.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8704 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When the following choices are provided, place them in the following relative order in the <b>Help</b> menu:<br /><br />° <b>Help</b> <b>index</b><br />° <b>General</b> <b>help</b><br />° <b>Using</b> <b>help</b><br />° <b>Tutorial</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> 8705 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide other <b>Help</b> choices, place them between the <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> choice and the <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> choice in the <b>Help</b> menu. For example, if you provide a <b>Getting</b> <b>started</b> choice, place it below the <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> choice and above the <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place a <b>Help</b> choice on a push button in a window if that window does not have a menu bar.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display help information in a secondary window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Create the title of a <b>Help</b> window by naming the object or action about which help was requested followed by a dash (-) and the word <b>Help.</b> 8706 <br /><b>Rec</b> If additional wording is helpful in identifying the window, place the extra words after the dash (to the right, left, or both sides of the word <b>Help</b>). For example, label the window <b>MyObject</b> <b>-</b> <b>General</b> <b>Help.</b> 8707 <br /><b>Rec</b> Do not place the title of a help window in the text of the help information; instead, rely on the title bar.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects a Help choice or presses the Help key, do not change the state or appearance of the object about which help was requested. For example, if a user requests help about a check-box choice, do not select the check-box choice because help was requested.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place a help window so that it does not cover the object for which help was requested.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide help in the form most appropriate and useful to a user. For example, use text, graphics, animation, audio, video, or any other technique or combination of techniques that conveys the information clearly and concisely.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "H" as the mnemonic for the <b>Help</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8708 <br />° <a href="2.2.41?DT=19921204095534#HDRGENHELP">"General Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.41</a> 8709 ° <a href="2.2.44?DT=19921204095534#HDRHLPINDX">"Help Index (Choice)" in topic 2.2.44</a> 8710 ° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 8711 ° <a href="2.2.83?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRODINF">"Product Information (Choice)" in topic 2.2.83</a> 8712 ° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a> 8713 ° <a href="2.2.121?DT=19921204095534#HDRTUTOR">"Tutorial (Choice)" in topic 2.2.121</a> 8714 ° <a href="2.2.124?DT=19921204095534#HDRUSHELP">"Using Help (Choice)" in topic 2.2.124</a> 8715 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8716 <br />° <a href="2.2.17?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTEXH">"Contextual Help" in topic 2.2.17</a> 8717 ° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 8718 ° <a href="2.2.55?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYHELP">"Keys Help" in topic 2.2.55</a> 8719 ° <a href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWT">"Window Title" in topic 2.2.135</a> 8720 </pre> 8721 8722 8723 8724 8725 8726 8727 8728 8729 8730 <hr /> 8731 <a name="LEN Hide (Choice)"></a> 8732 8733 8734 8735 8736 <h2><a name="LEN Hide (Choice)">2.2.46 Hide (Choice)</a></h2> 8737 8738 8739 8740 8741 8742 8743 8744 8745 8746 <pre width="80"><br />An action choice that removes the window and all associated windows from the workplace.<br /><br /><a href="picture-208?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 208" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P208.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8747 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Hide</b> choice for windows in an operating environment that supports the hide function.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8748 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a <b>Hide</b> function is provided, place a hide button on the title bar of each window that can be hidden.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Hide</b> choice or the hide button, remove the window and all associated windows from the workplace and indicate its hidden status in a window list.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F9 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Hide</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "H" as the mnemonic for the <b>Hide</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8749 <br />° <a href="2.2.130?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLWIN">"Window List" in topic 2.2.130</a> 8750 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8751 <br />° <a href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a> 8752 </pre> 8753 8754 8755 8756 8757 8758 8759 8760 8761 8762 <hr /> 8763 <a name="LEN Icon"></a> 8764 8765 8766 8767 8768 <h2><a name="LEN Icon">2.2.47 Icon</a></h2> 8769 8770 8771 8772 8773 8774 8775 8776 8777 8778 <pre width="80"><br />A pictorial representation of an object, consisting of an image, image background, and a label. Small icons can be substituted for regular icons. The small icon in the title bar of a window is another icon for the object that is displayed in the window.<br /><br /><a href="picture-209?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 209" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P209.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8779 <br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user places an object on the workplace, use an icon to represent that object.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8780 <br /><b>Rec</b> Display a small icon in the title bar of each window that displays a view of an object.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a small icon in the title bar of a window, place it immediately to the right of the system-menu symbol.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a small icon in the title bar of a window, provide the same direct manipulation functions for it as are available for the object's icon. For example, allow a user to print the object by dragging the small icon in the title bar to a printer.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a small icon in the title bar of a window, display target emphasis on the small icon in the title bar during a direct manipulation operation when the object in the window is a valid target of the direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a label for each icon, except for the small icon in the title bar; in that case, the window title serves as the label for the small icon in the title bar.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use the name of the object as the label for the icon.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Design an icon so that it shows the important characteristics of the object it represents and important states of the object. Such characteristics might include:<br /><br />° Needs attention, for example, when a printer is out of paper<br />° Threshold reached, for example, when a mailbox is full<br />° Read-only, for example, when a user does not have the ability to edit a document.<br />° Security classification, for example, confidential or restricted<br />° Urgency, for example, when a piece of urgent electronic mail arrives<br />° Quantity, for example, the number of objects a container holds.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an icon displays the state or settings of the object it represents, immediately update the icon to indicate changes to the state or settings. For example, if a user selects an object, immediately display selected-state emphasis on the icon that represents the selected object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes a folder into a work area or changes a work area into a folder, immediately update the icon of that container to indicate the change.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to customize the appearance of an icon. For example, allow a user to change an icon to make it more meaningful, recognizable, or personal.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display appropriate emphasis, such as source emphasis, target emphasis, selected-state emphasis, and in-use emphasis, when a user interacts with an icon. For example, display an object's icon with in-use emphasis when a user displays a view of that object in a window.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not show in-use emphasis on small icons used in the title bar.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not display a count of the number of objects in a container on a small icon.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not use an algorithmically reduced copy of the original icon as a small icon. Instead, use a separate graphic to display a small icon that shows fewer characteristics so that the characteristics can be more easily distinguished.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to rename an object where that object is displayed.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you allow a user to edit an icon's label, provide text entry techniques that allow the user to type, select, and manipulate the text of the icon's label.<br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8781 <br />° <a href="2.2.16?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTAIN">"Container (Control)" in topic 2.2.16</a> 8782 ° <a href="2.2.53?DT=19921204095534#HDRINUSEE">"In-Use Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.53</a> 8783 ° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a> 8784 ° <a href="2.2.102?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELEMPH">"Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.102</a> 8785 ° <a href="2.2.112?DT=19921204095534#HDRSOURCEE">"Source Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.112</a> 8786 ° <a href="2.2.118?DT=19921204095534#HDRTARGETE">"Target Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.118</a> 8787 ° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 8788 </pre> 8789 8790 8791 8792 8793 8794 8795 8796 8797 8798 <hr /> 8799 <a name="LEN Inactive Window"></a> 8800 8801 8802 8803 8804 <h2><a name="LEN Inactive Window">2.2.48 Inactive 8805 Window</a></h2> 8806 8807 8808 8809 8810 8811 8812 8813 8814 8815 <pre width="80"><br />A window that does not have the input focus. The inactive window is indicated by the type of emphasis displayed on its title bar and border, as specified by the operating environment.<br /><br /><a href="picture-210?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 210" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P210.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8816 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Make any window that does not currently have the input focus an inactive window.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8817 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Change the color of the title bar and window border of an inactive window to the color specified in the operating environment.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not continue to display the cursor an inactive window.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display any appropriate emphasis types in an inactive window. For example, display selected-state emphasis for selected objects displayed in an inactive window.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8818 <br />° <a href="2.2.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTWIND">"Active Window" in topic 2.2.5</a> 8819 ° <a href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a> 8820 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8821 <br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 8822 </pre> 8823 8824 8825 8826 8827 8828 8829 8830 8831 8832 <hr /> 8833 <a name="LEN Include (Choice)"></a> 8834 8835 8836 8837 8838 <h2><a name="LEN Include (Choice)">2.2.49 Include 8839 (Choice)</a></h2> 8840 8841 8842 8843 8844 8845 8846 8847 8848 8849 <pre width="80"><br />A routing choice that displays an action window that allows a user to specify characteristics of a subset of objects so that only the subset is displayed in the window.<br /><br /><a href="picture-211?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 211" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P211.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8850 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Include</b> choice when it is useful to identify subsets of objects contained within the object from which the <b>Include</b> choice is selected.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8851 <br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide an <b>Include</b> choice, and you provide a <b>View</b> menu, place the <b>Include</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Include</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Include</b> choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object can currently be included.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to specify the objects that are to be shown in the view.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Include</b> settings in an action window that is dependent on the window from which the <b>Include</b> choice is selected.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the results of the <b>Include</b> operation in the window from which the <b>Include</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In the window in which the results of the <b>Include</b> operation will be displayed, provide a status area to list the criteria used to create the subset. For example, indicate the number of objects displayed, as well as the total number of objects in the container.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an object is added to another object on which an included view is displayed and in which the include criteria are being maintained for that view, and the object being added matches the include criteria for the subset, place the object being added in its correct position in the subset. For example, if a document is added to a folder and that document matches the current include criteria for that folder, the document will be visible in the current view; if the document does not match the include criteria, the document is added to the folder, but the document will not be visible in the current view.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user performs an include operation on an object, apply the include criteria to the entire object, not just the contents of the current view of the object.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "I" as the mnemonic for the <b>Include</b> choice.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8852 <br />° <a href="2.2.126?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEW">"View Menu" in topic 2.2.126</a> 8853 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8854 <br />° <a href="2.2.38?DT=19921204095534#HDRFIND">"Find (Choice)" in topic 2.2.38</a> 8855 ° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 8856 </pre> 8857 8858 8859 <hr /> 8860 <a name="LEN Information Area"></a> 8861 8862 8863 8864 8865 <h2><a name="LEN Information Area">2.2.50 8866 Information Area</a></h2> 8867 8868 8869 8870 8871 8872 8873 8874 8875 8876 <pre width="80"><br />A part of a window where information appears about the object or choice that the cursor is on. Information about the normal completion of a process can also appear in the information area.<br /><br /><a href="picture-212?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 212" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P212.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8877 <br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an information area for each window.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8878 <br /><b>Rec</b> When the cursor is on a choice, briefly describe in an information area what will happen when a user selects that choice.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the cursor is on an object, briefly suggest in an information area:<br /><br />° The default action, if any.<br />° The most appropriate action, if any.<br />° How to perform available actions on the object.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place information about the normal completion of a process in the information area. For example, indicate in an information area that a file was successfully saved.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For contents views that provide a selection type other than extended selection, place in the information area information about the number of items that can be selected. For example, for single selection display text saying, "Select at most one."<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the information area the same width as the window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the information area no taller than necessary to accommodate brief, but meaningful, information. For example, when using text, accommodate only two lines of text.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide an information area, place it at the bottom of a window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide an information area and there is a horizontal scroll bar in the window, place the information area below the scroll bar and above the window border.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a separator to separate the information area from the rest of the window. For example, use a solid line or a horizontal scroll bar to separate the information area from the rest of the window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide an information area, do not scroll the information area when the window's contents are scrolled.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user attempts to select a choice that is currently displayed with unavailable-state emphasis, indicate in the information area that the choice cannot be selected and that requesting help will explain why it is unavailable.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide an information area, allow a user to turn the display of the information area on or off. For example, provide a settings choice in the <b>View</b> pull-down menu or on a page in a settings notebook that allows a user to turn the display of the information area on or off.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Remove information from the information area as soon as it is no longer relevant to the current state of the window or the current position of the cursor.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not allow a user to interact with the information area, except to copy information from the information area.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not use an information area to display information that a user must see; display that type of information in a message.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user reduces the width of a window with an information area and the information can wrap in the information area, wrap the information; otherwise, clip the information area.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not provide scroll bars for an information area and do not allow a user to scroll information in the information area.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8879 <br />° <a href="2.2.51?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFMS">"Information Message" in topic 2.2.51</a> 8880 ° <a href="2.2.104?DT=19921204095534#HDRSEPARAT">"Separator" in topic 2.2.104</a> 8881 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8882 <br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 8883 ° <a href="2.2.12?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLIPBRD">"Clipboard" in topic 2.2.12</a> 8884 ° <a href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a> 8885 ° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 8886 ° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 8887 </pre> 8888 8889 8890 8891 8892 8893 8894 8895 8896 8897 <hr /> 8898 <a name="LEN Information Message"></a> 8899 8900 8901 8902 8903 <h2><a name="LEN Information Message">2.2.51 8904 Information 3618 8905 Message</a></h2> 3619 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A message that indicates that a condition has occurred that the<br />user can do nothing about. The only actions available to the<br />user are to acknowledge the message or get help.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3620 href="picture-213?mode=zoom"><img 3621 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P213.GIF" 3622 alt="PICTURE 213" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3623 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an information message when a situation has occurred<br /> that the user can do nothing about or when there is additional<br /> information about the status of normal completion. If a<br /> progress indicator is currently displayed in its own window,<br /> display the message information in the progress indicator<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3624 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide an <b>OK</b> push button that allows a user to acknowledge the<br /> information displayed in the information message and remove the<br /> message.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <i>i</i> symbol in each information-message window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3625 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTIONM">"Action Message" in topic 2.2.3</a> 3626 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a> 3627 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a> 3628 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 3629 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.127?DT=19921204095534#HDRWARNMSG">"Warning Message" in topic 2.2.127</a> 3630 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3631 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 3632 </pre> 3633 <hr /> 3634 <a name="LEN Input Focus" /> 3635 <h2><a name="LEN Input Focus">2.2.52 Input Focus</a></h2> 3636 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A state of a component, identified by the existence of a cursor<br />that indicates where the results of a user's interaction with<br />the keyboard will appear.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3637 href="picture-214?mode=zoom"><img 3638 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P214.GIF" 3639 alt="PICTURE 214" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3640 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide input focus for the component that can currently receive<br /> input from the keyboard.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3641 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects a choice that displays a window, move the<br /> input focus to that window unless the user has switched input<br /> focus to another window. When a window is closed, return the<br /> input focus to where it was before that window was opened, if<br /> possible.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window but switches input focus to another<br /> window before the requested window is displayed, do not display<br /> the previously requested window on top of the window that<br /> currently has focus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the mouse selection button, move the input<br /> focus to the pointer position or to the closest part of the<br /> window that can receive the input focus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an inactive window becomes active as a result of a<br /> technique that does not explicitly specify the position of the<br /> cursor, redisplay the cursor in its previous position.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the mouse menu button, move input focus to<br /> the pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid changing the input focus as a result of a<br /> direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the Switch Between Associated Windows key,<br /> move the input focus between windows displayed from the same<br /> object. For example, when a user presses Alt+F6, move the input<br /> focus from a primary window to an associated secondary window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the Switch Between Unassociated Windows key,<br /> move the input focus between the groups of associated windows<br /> displayed from different objects. For example, when a user<br /> presses Alt+Esc, move the input focus from a window to an<br /> unassociated window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3642 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTWIND">"Active Window" in topic 2.2.5</a> 3643 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.48?DT=19921204095534#HDRINACTWI">"Inactive Window" in topic 2.2.48</a> 3644 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3645 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a> 3646 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 3647 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 3648 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 3649 </pre> 3650 <hr /> 3651 <a name="LEN In-Use Emphasis (Cue)" /> 3652 <h2><a name="LEN In-Use Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.53 In-Use 8906 8907 8908 8909 8910 8911 8912 8913 8914 8915 <pre width="80"><br />A message that indicates that a condition has occurred that the user can do nothing about. The only actions available to the user are to acknowledge the message or get help.<br /><br /><a href="picture-213?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 213" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P213.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8916 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an information message when a situation has occurred that the user can do nothing about or when there is additional information about the status of normal completion. If a progress indicator is currently displayed in its own window, display the message information in the progress indicator window.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8917 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide an <b>OK</b> push button that allows a user to acknowledge the information displayed in the information message and remove the message.<br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <i>i</i> symbol in each information-message window.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8918 <br />° <a href="2.2.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTIONM">"Action Message" in topic 2.2.3</a> 8919 ° <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#HDRMESSAGE">"Message" in topic 2.2.61</a> 8920 ° <a href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a> 8921 ° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 8922 ° <a href="2.2.127?DT=19921204095534#HDRWARNMSG">"Warning Message" in topic 2.2.127</a> 8923 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8924 <br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 8925 </pre> 8926 8927 8928 8929 8930 8931 8932 8933 8934 8935 <hr /> 8936 <a name="LEN Input Focus"></a> 8937 8938 8939 8940 8941 <h2><a name="LEN Input Focus">2.2.52 Input Focus</a></h2> 8942 8943 8944 8945 8946 8947 8948 8949 8950 8951 <pre width="80"><br />A state of a component, identified by the existence of a cursor that indicates where the results of a user's interaction with the keyboard will appear.<br /><br /><a href="picture-214?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 214" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P214.GIF" /></a><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8952 <br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide input focus for the component that can currently receive input from the keyboard.<br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 8953 <br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects a choice that displays a window, move the input focus to that window unless the user has switched input focus to another window. When a window is closed, return the input focus to where it was before that window was opened, if possible.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window but switches input focus to another window before the requested window is displayed, do not display the previously requested window on top of the window that currently has focus.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the mouse selection button, move the input focus to the pointer position or to the closest part of the window that can receive the input focus.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an inactive window becomes active as a result of a technique that does not explicitly specify the position of the cursor, redisplay the cursor in its previous position.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the mouse menu button, move input focus to the pop-up menu.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid changing the input focus as a result of a direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the Switch Between Associated Windows key, move the input focus between windows displayed from the same object. For example, when a user presses Alt+F6, move the input focus from a primary window to an associated secondary window.<br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the Switch Between Unassociated Windows key, move the input focus between the groups of associated windows displayed from different objects. For example, when a user presses Alt+Esc, move the input focus from a window to an unassociated window.<br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8954 <br />° <a href="2.2.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTWIND">"Active Window" in topic 2.2.5</a> 8955 ° <a href="2.2.48?DT=19921204095534#HDRINACTWI">"Inactive Window" in topic 2.2.48</a> 8956 <br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 8957 <br />° <a href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a> 8958 ° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 8959 ° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 8960 ° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 8961 </pre> 8962 8963 8964 8965 8966 8967 8968 8969 8970 8971 <hr /> 8972 <a name="LEN In-Use Emphasis (Cue)"></a> 8973 8974 8975 8976 8977 <h2><a name="LEN In-Use Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.53 8978 In-Use 3653 8979 Emphasis 3654 8980 (Cue)</a></h2> 3655 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visible cue that indicates that a window is open on an object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3656 href="picture-215?mode=zoom"><img 3657 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P215.GIF" 3658 alt="PICTURE 215" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8981 8982 8983 8984 8985 8986 8987 8988 8989 8990 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br />@@@@@ A visible cue that indicates that a window is open on an object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-215?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 215" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P215.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3659 8991 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user opens a window on an object represented by an icon,<br /> display in-use emphasis on that object's icon.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3660 8992 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Remove in-use emphasis from an object's icon when all windows<br /> containing a view of that object have been removed from the<br /> user's workplace.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display in-use emphasis as diagonal stripes behind each<br /> appearance of an object's icon.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not display in-use emphasis on the small icon when it is on<br /> the title bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not change the behavior of an object when it is in use. For<br /> example, allow a user to open additional windows by<br /> double-clicking its icon with the pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3661 8993 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.47?DT=19921204095534#HDRICONS">"Icon" in topic 2.2.47</a> 3662 </pre> 3663 <hr /> 3664 <a name="LEN Keyboard" /> 3665 <h2><a name="LEN Keyboard">2.2.54 Keyboard</a></h2> 3666 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A device, consisting of systematically arranged keys, that<br />allows a user to type information, move the cursor, or select<br />functions assigned to keys.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 8994 </pre> 8995 8996 8997 8998 8999 9000 9001 9002 9003 9004 <hr /> 9005 <a name="LEN Keyboard"></a> 9006 9007 9008 9009 9010 <h2><a name="LEN Keyboard">2.2.54 Keyboard</a></h2> 9011 9012 9013 9014 9015 9016 9017 9018 9019 9020 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A device, consisting of systematically arranged keys, that<br />allows a user to type information, move the cursor, or select<br />functions assigned to keys.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3667 9021 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to all functions of an object using equivalent,<br /> though not necessarily identical, keyboard and pointing device<br /> techniques.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3668 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use the Ctrl, Shift, and Alt keys only to modify the function of<br /> other keys or key combinations on the keyboard.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the Alt key only to provide access to mnemonics.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the functions listed in <a 3669 href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#FIGKEYFUNC">Figure 171</a> and <a 3670 href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#FIGKAA">Figure 172</a> are<br /> provided, assign them to the keys listed in the table. Do not<br /> assign these functions to other keys unless a user reassigns<br /> them.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3671 name="FIGKEYFUNC" id="FIGKEYFUNC" /><a name="TBLKEYFUNC" 3672 id="TBLKEYFUNC"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 171. Keyboard Functions and Key Engravings |<br />|_____________ ______________ ___________________________________________|<br />| <b>Function</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>Description</b> |<br /> | | <b>Engraving</b> | |<br /> | | <b>(US</b> | |<br /> | | <b>Keyboard)</b> | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Backspace | __(Backspace| Deletes one character to the left of the |<br /> | | | cursor. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Backtab | Shift+Tab|__| Moves the cursor to the previous field. |<br /> | | (Backtab) | The cursor is positioned either on the |<br /> | | | previous choice in that field or on the |<br /> | | | currently set choice in that field. The |<br /> | | | cursor moves from right to left and |<br /> | | | bottom to top. At the top-leftmost |<br /> | | | field, the cursor moves to the |<br /> | | | bottom-rightmost field. Within an |<br /> | | | entry field, backtab moves the cursor to |<br /> | | | the character position defined by the |<br /> | | | previous tab stop. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Beginning | Ctrl+Home | Moves the cursor to the top-leftmost |<br /> | of data | | position in the current field. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Beginning | Home | Moves the cursor to the leftmost choice |<br /> | of line | | in a group of choices, or to the |<br /> | | | beginning of the current line in an entry |<br /> | | | field. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Cancel | Esc | Removes the window without applying any |<br /> | | | changes that were not previously applied |<br /> | | | in that window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Cancel | Esc | Cancels the direct manipulation |<br /> | direct | | operation. |<br /> | manipulation| | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Create | Alt+Insert | Creates a new object, similar to the |<br /> | | | selected object, and places it on the |<br /> | | | clipboard |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Clear | Delete or no | Removes selected object or group of |<br /> | | assignment | objects from view without compressing the |<br /> | | (see Note) | space previously occupied by the object |<br /> | | | or group of objects. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Close | Alt+F4 | Closes active window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Contextual | F1 | Displays contextual help for the choice, |<br /> | help | | object, control, or group of choices, |<br /> | | | objects, or controls relative to the |<br /> | | | current context, such as the cursor |<br /> | | | position or the process currently in |<br /> | | | progress. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Copy | Ctrl+Insert | Produces a duplicate of the selected |<br /> | | | object or group of objects and places it |<br /> | | | on the clipboard. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Cut | Shift+Delete | Removes the selected object or group of |<br /> | | | objects and copies it to the clipboard. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Default | __| Enter | Performs the default action for the |<br /> | action | or Enter (on | control the cursor is positioned on. |<br /> | | numeric | |<br /> | | keypad), | |<br /> | | depending on | |<br /> | | the control | |<br /> | | the cursor | |<br /> | | is on | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Delete | Delete (see | Removes selected object or group of |<br /> | | Note) | objects from view and compresses the |<br /> | | | space previously occupied by the object |<br /> | | | or group of objects. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Deselect | Ctrl+\ | Removes selected-state emphasis from all |<br /> | all | | objects in the active window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Display | Alt+ (Down | Displays the list for the drop-down list |<br /> | drop-down | Arrow) | or the drop-down combination box. |<br /> | list or | | |<br /> | drop-down | | |<br /> | combination | | |<br /> | box | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | End of data | Ctrl+End | Moves the cursor to the bottom-rightmost |<br /> | | | position in the current field. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | End of line | End | Moves the cursor to the rightmost choice |<br /> | | | in a group of choices, or to the end of |<br /> | | | the current line in an entry field. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Extend | Shift+cursor-| Extends the selection in the direction in |<br /> | selection | movement key | which the cursor is moved. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | General | F2 (in a | Displays a brief overview of each action |<br /> | help | <b>Help</b> window) | or task, or both, that a user can perform |<br /> | | | within the window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Help index | F11 (in a | Displays an alphabetic listing of help |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> window) | topics for an object or a product. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Hide | Alt+F9 | Removes the window and all associated |<br /> | | | windows from the screen. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Keys help | F9 (in a | Displays a listing of all the key |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> window) | assignments for an object or a product. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Maximize | Alt+F10 | Enlarges the window to its largest |<br /> | | | possible size. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Minimize | Alt+F9 | Reduces the window to its smallest |<br /> | | | possible size and removes all of the |<br /> | | | windows associated with that window from |<br /> | | | the screen. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Move | Alt+F7 | Allows a user to move a window to a |<br /> | | | different location. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Move cursor | Arrow keys | Moves the cursor left, right, up, or |<br /> | | | down. At the last choice, the cursor |<br /> | | | wraps. For example, at the bottom-most |<br /> | | | choice, the cursor wraps to the top-most |<br /> | | | choice to the right. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | New line | __| Enter | Performs the default action for the |<br /> | | | control the cursor is positioned on. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Page down | Page Down | A scrolling action that displays |<br /> | | | information below the currently visible |<br /> | | | window area. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Page left | Ctrl+Page Up | A scrolling action that displays |<br /> | | | information to the left of the currently |<br /> | | | visible window area. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Page right | Ctrl+Page | A scrolling action that displays |<br /> | | Down | information to the right of the currently |<br /> | | | visible window area. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Page up | Page Up | A scrolling action that displays |<br /> | | | information above the currently visible |<br /> | | | window area. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Paste | Shift+Insert | Copies the contents of the clipboard into |<br /> | | | an object at the specified location. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Pop-up menu | Shift+F10 | Displays a pop-up menu for the indicated |<br /> | | | object or group of selected objects. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Redo | Shift+Alt+ | Reverses the effect of the last applied |<br /> | | __(Backspace| undo action. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Refresh now | F5 | Updates the window to reflect the |<br /> | | | underlying data. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Restore | Alt+F5 | Returns the window to the size it was and |<br /> | | | the position it was in before the user |<br /> | | | minimized or maximized the window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Select all | Ctrl+/ | Selects all objects in active window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Select | Use Spacebar | Selects object or choice on which cursor |<br /> | object or | if it is not | is positioned. |<br /> | choice on | assigned to | |<br /> | which | any other | |<br /> | cursor is | function; | |<br /> | positioned | otherwise, | |<br /> | | use | |<br /> | | Ctrl+Spacebar| |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Size | Alt+F8 | Allows a user to change the size of the |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch | Alt+F6 | Changes the active window within a group |<br /> | between | | of related windows. |<br /> | associated | | |<br /> | windows | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch | Insert | Toggles between insert and replace modes. |<br /> | between | | |<br /> | insert and | | |<br /> | replace | | |<br /> | modes in | | |<br /> | text entry | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch | Alt+Esc | Changes the input focus between the |<br /> | between | | groups of associated windows displayed |<br /> | unassociated| | from different objects (if more than one |<br /> | windows | | object is displayed by an object). |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch to | F10 | Moves the cursor from within a window to |<br /> | and from | | its menu bar or from the menu bar to |<br /> | menu bar | | within the window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch | F6 | Moves the cursor in a clockwise direction |<br /> | window pane | | from one window pane to the next. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | System menu | Shift+Esc | Displays system menu. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Tab | Tab__ÿ| | Moves the cursor to the next field. The |<br /> | | | cursor is positioned either on the first |<br /> | | | choice in that field or on the currently |<br /> | | | set choice in that field. The cursor |<br /> | | | moves from left to right and top to |<br /> | | | bottom. At the bottom-rightmost field, |<br /> | | | the cursor moves to the top-leftmost |<br /> | | | field. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Within an entry field, tab moves the |<br /> | | | cursor to the character position defined |<br /> | | | by the next tab stop. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Toggle in | Shift+F8 | Toggles in or out of add mode when |<br /> | or out of | | extended selection is provided for a |<br /> | add mode | | view. The initial deselection is |<br /> | when in | | bypassed and the new selected objects are |<br /> | extended | | added or removed from the current group |<br /> | selection | | of selected objects. |<br /> | mode | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Tutorial | Shift+F2 (in | Displays online educational information. |<br /> | | a <b>Help</b> | |<br /> | | window) | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Undo | Alt+Backspace| Reverses the action of the most recently |<br /> | | | performed user action. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Using help | Shift+F10 | Displays help information that describes |<br /> | | (in a <b>Help</b> | how to use the help facility. |<br /> | | window) | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Window list | Ctrl+Esc | Displays the window list window from the |<br /> | | | system menu. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Word left | Ctrl+_ | Moves the cursor to the beginning of the |<br /> | | (Left Arrow) | word to the left of the cursor. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Word right | Ctrl+_ÿ | Moves the cursor to the end of the word |<br /> | | (Right | to the right of the cursor. Includes any |<br /> | | Arrow) | trailing space characters. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> Assign the Delete key to either the Delete or Clear function, |<br /> | if only one is provided. If both Delete and Clear functions are |<br /> | provided, assign the Delete key to the Delete function. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3673 name="FIGKAA" id="FIGKAA" /><a name="TBLKAA" id="TBLKAA"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 172. Keys to Functions |<br />|_____________ ______________ ______________ ______________ _____________|<br />| <b>Key</b> | <b>Key</b> <b>Only</b> | <b>Alt+Key</b> | <b>Ctrl+Key</b> | <b>Shift+Key</b> |<br /> | <b>Engraving</b> | | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F1 | Display | | | |<br /> | | contextual | | | |<br /> | | help | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F2 | In a <b>Help</b> | | | In a <b>Help</b> |<br /> | | window, | | | window, |<br /> | | display | | | display |<br /> | | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | | | <b>Tutorial</b> |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F4 | | Close | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F5 | Refresh now | Restore | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F6 | Switch | Switch from | | |<br /> | | window pane | a window to | | |<br /> | | | an | | |<br /> | | | associated | | |<br /> | | | window | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F7 | | Move | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F8 | | Size | | Toggles |<br /> | | | | | between in |<br /> | | | | | or out of |<br /> | | | | | add mode, |<br /> | | | | | when in |<br /> | | | | | extended |<br /> | | | | | selection |<br /> | | | | | mode |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F9 | In a <b>Help</b> | Minimize or | | |<br /> | | window, | Hide | | |<br /> | | display <b>Keys</b> | | | |<br /> | | <b>help</b> | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F10 | Switch to | Maximize | | Display |<br /> | | menu bar. | | | pop-up |<br /> | | Places the | | | menu. In a |<br /> | | cursor on | | | <b>Help</b> |<br /> | | the menu | | | window, |<br /> | | bar. | | | display |<br /> | | | | | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> |<br /> | | | | | window |<br /> | | | | | instead. |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F11 | In a <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> | | window, | | | |<br /> | | display <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> | | <b>index</b> window | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | \ | | | Deselect all | |<br /> | (Backslash) | | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | __ | Backspace | Undo | | |<br /> | (Backspace)(|) | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Delete | Delete or | | | Cut |<br /> | | Clear | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | (Down | Moves cursor | Display | | Extends |<br /> | Arrow) | down, if | drop-down | | selection |<br /> | | possible | list or | | to the |<br /> | | | drop-down | | current |<br /> | | | combination | | character |<br /> | | | box. | | position on |<br /> | | | | | the line |<br /> | | | Moves from | | below the |<br /> | | | notebook tab | | current |<br /> | | | or page push | | line |<br /> | | | button to | | |<br /> | | | notebook | | |<br /> | | | page. | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | End | End of line | | End of data | Extend |<br /> | | | | | selection |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | __| Enter | Default | | Default | New line |<br /> | | action or | | action | |<br /> | | new line | | | |<br /> | | (when in | | | |<br /> | | text) | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Enter (on | Default | | | |<br /> | numeric | action. | | | |<br /> | keypad) | Never new | | | |<br /> | | line. | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Esc | Cancel or | Switch from | Window list | Display |<br /> | | cancel | a window to | | system menu |<br /> | | direct | an | | |<br /> | | manipulation | unassociated | | |<br /> | | | primary | | |<br /> | | | window | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Home | Beginning of | | Beginning of | Extend |<br /> | | line | | data | selection |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Insert | Switch | Create | Copy | Paste |<br /> | | between | | | |<br /> | | insert and | | | |<br /> | | replace | | | |<br /> | | modes in | | | |<br /> | | text entry | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | _ (Left | Moves cursor | | Word left | Extends |<br /> | Arrow) | left, if | | | selection |<br /> | | possible | | | one |<br /> | | | | | character |<br /> | | | | | position to |<br /> | | | | | the left |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Page Down | Page down | Move to next | Page right | Extend |<br /> | | | page in | | selection |<br /> | | | notebook | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Page Up | Page up | Move to | Page left | Extend |<br /> | | | previous | | selection |<br /> | | | page in | | |<br /> | | | notebook | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | _ÿ (Right | Moves cursor | | Word right | Extends |<br /> | Arrow) | right, if | | | selection |<br /> | | possible | | | one |<br /> | | | | | character |<br /> | | | | | position to |<br /> | | | | | the right |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Spacebar(2) | Toggles the | Display | Always | Inserts a |<br /> | | selection | system menu | toggles the | space where |<br /> | | state of the | | selection | space is |<br /> | | object or | | state of the | allowed |<br /> | | choice on | | object or | |<br /> | | which the | | choice on | |<br /> | | cursor is | | which the | |<br /> | | positioned | | cursor is | |<br /> | | | | positioned | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | / (Slash) | | | Select all | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Tab__ÿ|(3) | Moves cursor | | Moves to the | Moves to |<br /> | | to next | | next control | the |<br /> | | control; in | | when the | previous |<br /> | | an entry | | cursor is | tab |<br /> | | field, moves | | currently in | position or |<br /> | | to next tab | | an entry | to the |<br /> | | position. | | field or in | previous |<br /> | | | | a notebook. | control. |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | " (Up | Moves cursor | Moves focus | | Extends |<br /> | Arrow) | up, if | from | | selection |<br /> | | possible | notebook | | to the |<br /> | | | page to | | current |<br /> | | | notebook tab | | character |<br /> | | | or page push | | position on |<br /> | | | button. | | the line |<br /> | | | | | above the |<br /> | | | | | current |<br /> | | | | | line |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 1. Pressing Shift+Alt+__ (Backspace) performs the Redo action. |<br /> | |<br /> | 2. Use Spacebar if it is not assigned to any other function; |<br /> | otherwise, use Ctrl+Spacebar. |<br /> | |<br /> | 3. Ctrl+Shift+Tab__ÿ| moves to the previous control when the cursor |<br /> | is currently in an entry field. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 9022 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use the Ctrl, Shift, and Alt keys only to modify the function of<br /> other keys or key combinations on the keyboard.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the Alt key only to provide access to mnemonics.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the functions listed in <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#FIGKEYFUNC">Figure 171</a> and <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#FIGKAA">Figure 172</a> are<br /> provided, assign them to the keys listed in the table. Do not<br /> assign these functions to other keys unless a user reassigns<br /> them.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGKEYFUNC" name="FIGKEYFUNC"></a><a id="TBLKEYFUNC" name="TBLKEYFUNC"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 171. Keyboard Functions and Key Engravings |<br />|_____________ ______________ ___________________________________________|<br />| <b>Function</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>Description</b> |<br /> | | <b>Engraving</b> | |<br /> | | <b>(US</b> | |<br /> | | <b>Keyboard)</b> | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Backspace | __(Backspace| Deletes one character to the left of the |<br /> | | | cursor. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Backtab | Shift+Tab|__| Moves the cursor to the previous field. |<br /> | | (Backtab) | The cursor is positioned either on the |<br /> | | | previous choice in that field or on the |<br /> | | | currently set choice in that field. The |<br /> | | | cursor moves from right to left and |<br /> | | | bottom to top. At the top-leftmost |<br /> | | | field, the cursor moves to the |<br /> | | | bottom-rightmost field. Within an |<br /> | | | entry field, backtab moves the cursor to |<br /> | | | the character position defined by the |<br /> | | | previous tab stop. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Beginning | Ctrl+Home | Moves the cursor to the top-leftmost |<br /> | of data | | position in the current field. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Beginning | Home | Moves the cursor to the leftmost choice |<br /> | of line | | in a group of choices, or to the |<br /> | | | beginning of the current line in an entry |<br /> | | | field. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Cancel | Esc | Removes the window without applying any |<br /> | | | changes that were not previously applied |<br /> | | | in that window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Cancel | Esc | Cancels the direct manipulation |<br /> | direct | | operation. |<br /> | manipulation| | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Create | Alt+Insert | Creates a new object, similar to the |<br /> | | | selected object, and places it on the |<br /> | | | clipboard |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Clear | Delete or no | Removes selected object or group of |<br /> | | assignment | objects from view without compressing the |<br /> | | (see Note) | space previously occupied by the object |<br /> | | | or group of objects. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Close | Alt+F4 | Closes active window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Contextual | F1 | Displays contextual help for the choice, |<br /> | help | | object, control, or group of choices, |<br /> | | | objects, or controls relative to the |<br /> | | | current context, such as the cursor |<br /> | | | position or the process currently in |<br /> | | | progress. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Copy | Ctrl+Insert | Produces a duplicate of the selected |<br /> | | | object or group of objects and places it |<br /> | | | on the clipboard. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Cut | Shift+Delete | Removes the selected object or group of |<br /> | | | objects and copies it to the clipboard. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Default | __| Enter | Performs the default action for the |<br /> | action | or Enter (on | control the cursor is positioned on. |<br /> | | numeric | |<br /> | | keypad), | |<br /> | | depending on | |<br /> | | the control | |<br /> | | the cursor | |<br /> | | is on | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Delete | Delete (see | Removes selected object or group of |<br /> | | Note) | objects from view and compresses the |<br /> | | | space previously occupied by the object |<br /> | | | or group of objects. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Deselect | Ctrl+\ | Removes selected-state emphasis from all |<br /> | all | | objects in the active window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Display | Alt+ (Down | Displays the list for the drop-down list |<br /> | drop-down | Arrow) | or the drop-down combination box. |<br /> | list or | | |<br /> | drop-down | | |<br /> | combination | | |<br /> | box | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | End of data | Ctrl+End | Moves the cursor to the bottom-rightmost |<br /> | | | position in the current field. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | End of line | End | Moves the cursor to the rightmost choice |<br /> | | | in a group of choices, or to the end of |<br /> | | | the current line in an entry field. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Extend | Shift+cursor-| Extends the selection in the direction in |<br /> | selection | movement key | which the cursor is moved. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | General | F2 (in a | Displays a brief overview of each action |<br /> | help | <b>Help</b> window) | or task, or both, that a user can perform |<br /> | | | within the window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Help index | F11 (in a | Displays an alphabetic listing of help |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> window) | topics for an object or a product. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Hide | Alt+F9 | Removes the window and all associated |<br /> | | | windows from the screen. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Keys help | F9 (in a | Displays a listing of all the key |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> window) | assignments for an object or a product. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Maximize | Alt+F10 | Enlarges the window to its largest |<br /> | | | possible size. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Minimize | Alt+F9 | Reduces the window to its smallest |<br /> | | | possible size and removes all of the |<br /> | | | windows associated with that window from |<br /> | | | the screen. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Move | Alt+F7 | Allows a user to move a window to a |<br /> | | | different location. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Move cursor | Arrow keys | Moves the cursor left, right, up, or |<br /> | | | down. At the last choice, the cursor |<br /> | | | wraps. For example, at the bottom-most |<br /> | | | choice, the cursor wraps to the top-most |<br /> | | | choice to the right. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | New line | __| Enter | Performs the default action for the |<br /> | | | control the cursor is positioned on. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Page down | Page Down | A scrolling action that displays |<br /> | | | information below the currently visible |<br /> | | | window area. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Page left | Ctrl+Page Up | A scrolling action that displays |<br /> | | | information to the left of the currently |<br /> | | | visible window area. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Page right | Ctrl+Page | A scrolling action that displays |<br /> | | Down | information to the right of the currently |<br /> | | | visible window area. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Page up | Page Up | A scrolling action that displays |<br /> | | | information above the currently visible |<br /> | | | window area. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Paste | Shift+Insert | Copies the contents of the clipboard into |<br /> | | | an object at the specified location. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Pop-up menu | Shift+F10 | Displays a pop-up menu for the indicated |<br /> | | | object or group of selected objects. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Redo | Shift+Alt+ | Reverses the effect of the last applied |<br /> | | __(Backspace| undo action. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Refresh now | F5 | Updates the window to reflect the |<br /> | | | underlying data. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Restore | Alt+F5 | Returns the window to the size it was and |<br /> | | | the position it was in before the user |<br /> | | | minimized or maximized the window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Select all | Ctrl+/ | Selects all objects in active window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Select | Use Spacebar | Selects object or choice on which cursor |<br /> | object or | if it is not | is positioned. |<br /> | choice on | assigned to | |<br /> | which | any other | |<br /> | cursor is | function; | |<br /> | positioned | otherwise, | |<br /> | | use | |<br /> | | Ctrl+Spacebar| |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Size | Alt+F8 | Allows a user to change the size of the |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch | Alt+F6 | Changes the active window within a group |<br /> | between | | of related windows. |<br /> | associated | | |<br /> | windows | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch | Insert | Toggles between insert and replace modes. |<br /> | between | | |<br /> | insert and | | |<br /> | replace | | |<br /> | modes in | | |<br /> | text entry | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch | Alt+Esc | Changes the input focus between the |<br /> | between | | groups of associated windows displayed |<br /> | unassociated| | from different objects (if more than one |<br /> | windows | | object is displayed by an object). |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch to | F10 | Moves the cursor from within a window to |<br /> | and from | | its menu bar or from the menu bar to |<br /> | menu bar | | within the window. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Switch | F6 | Moves the cursor in a clockwise direction |<br /> | window pane | | from one window pane to the next. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | System menu | Shift+Esc | Displays system menu. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Tab | Tab__ÿ| | Moves the cursor to the next field. The |<br /> | | | cursor is positioned either on the first |<br /> | | | choice in that field or on the currently |<br /> | | | set choice in that field. The cursor |<br /> | | | moves from left to right and top to |<br /> | | | bottom. At the bottom-rightmost field, |<br /> | | | the cursor moves to the top-leftmost |<br /> | | | field. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Within an entry field, tab moves the |<br /> | | | cursor to the character position defined |<br /> | | | by the next tab stop. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Toggle in | Shift+F8 | Toggles in or out of add mode when |<br /> | or out of | | extended selection is provided for a |<br /> | add mode | | view. The initial deselection is |<br /> | when in | | bypassed and the new selected objects are |<br /> | extended | | added or removed from the current group |<br /> | selection | | of selected objects. |<br /> | mode | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Tutorial | Shift+F2 (in | Displays online educational information. |<br /> | | a <b>Help</b> | |<br /> | | window) | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Undo | Alt+Backspace| Reverses the action of the most recently |<br /> | | | performed user action. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Using help | Shift+F10 | Displays help information that describes |<br /> | | (in a <b>Help</b> | how to use the help facility. |<br /> | | window) | |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Window list | Ctrl+Esc | Displays the window list window from the |<br /> | | | system menu. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Word left | Ctrl+_ | Moves the cursor to the beginning of the |<br /> | | (Left Arrow) | word to the left of the cursor. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | Word right | Ctrl+_ÿ | Moves the cursor to the end of the word |<br /> | | (Right | to the right of the cursor. Includes any |<br /> | | Arrow) | trailing space characters. |<br /> |_____________|______________|___________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> Assign the Delete key to either the Delete or Clear function, |<br /> | if only one is provided. If both Delete and Clear functions are |<br /> | provided, assign the Delete key to the Delete function. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGKAA" name="FIGKAA"></a><a id="TBLKAA" name="TBLKAA"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 172. Keys to Functions |<br />|_____________ ______________ ______________ ______________ _____________|<br />| <b>Key</b> | <b>Key</b> <b>Only</b> | <b>Alt+Key</b> | <b>Ctrl+Key</b> | <b>Shift+Key</b> |<br /> | <b>Engraving</b> | | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F1 | Display | | | |<br /> | | contextual | | | |<br /> | | help | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F2 | In a <b>Help</b> | | | In a <b>Help</b> |<br /> | | window, | | | window, |<br /> | | display | | | display |<br /> | | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | | | <b>Tutorial</b> |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F4 | | Close | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F5 | Refresh now | Restore | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F6 | Switch | Switch from | | |<br /> | | window pane | a window to | | |<br /> | | | an | | |<br /> | | | associated | | |<br /> | | | window | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F7 | | Move | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F8 | | Size | | Toggles |<br /> | | | | | between in |<br /> | | | | | or out of |<br /> | | | | | add mode, |<br /> | | | | | when in |<br /> | | | | | extended |<br /> | | | | | selection |<br /> | | | | | mode |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F9 | In a <b>Help</b> | Minimize or | | |<br /> | | window, | Hide | | |<br /> | | display <b>Keys</b> | | | |<br /> | | <b>help</b> | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F10 | Switch to | Maximize | | Display |<br /> | | menu bar. | | | pop-up |<br /> | | Places the | | | menu. In a |<br /> | | cursor on | | | <b>Help</b> |<br /> | | the menu | | | window, |<br /> | | bar. | | | display |<br /> | | | | | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> |<br /> | | | | | window |<br /> | | | | | instead. |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | F11 | In a <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> | | window, | | | |<br /> | | display <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> | | <b>index</b> window | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | \ | | | Deselect all | |<br /> | (Backslash) | | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | __ | Backspace | Undo | | |<br /> | (Backspace)(|) | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Delete | Delete or | | | Cut |<br /> | | Clear | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | (Down | Moves cursor | Display | | Extends |<br /> | Arrow) | down, if | drop-down | | selection |<br /> | | possible | list or | | to the |<br /> | | | drop-down | | current |<br /> | | | combination | | character |<br /> | | | box. | | position on |<br /> | | | | | the line |<br /> | | | Moves from | | below the |<br /> | | | notebook tab | | current |<br /> | | | or page push | | line |<br /> | | | button to | | |<br /> | | | notebook | | |<br /> | | | page. | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | End | End of line | | End of data | Extend |<br /> | | | | | selection |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | __| Enter | Default | | Default | New line |<br /> | | action or | | action | |<br /> | | new line | | | |<br /> | | (when in | | | |<br /> | | text) | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Enter (on | Default | | | |<br /> | numeric | action. | | | |<br /> | keypad) | Never new | | | |<br /> | | line. | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Esc | Cancel or | Switch from | Window list | Display |<br /> | | cancel | a window to | | system menu |<br /> | | direct | an | | |<br /> | | manipulation | unassociated | | |<br /> | | | primary | | |<br /> | | | window | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Home | Beginning of | | Beginning of | Extend |<br /> | | line | | data | selection |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Insert | Switch | Create | Copy | Paste |<br /> | | between | | | |<br /> | | insert and | | | |<br /> | | replace | | | |<br /> | | modes in | | | |<br /> | | text entry | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | _ (Left | Moves cursor | | Word left | Extends |<br /> | Arrow) | left, if | | | selection |<br /> | | possible | | | one |<br /> | | | | | character |<br /> | | | | | position to |<br /> | | | | | the left |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Page Down | Page down | Move to next | Page right | Extend |<br /> | | | page in | | selection |<br /> | | | notebook | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Page Up | Page up | Move to | Page left | Extend |<br /> | | | previous | | selection |<br /> | | | page in | | |<br /> | | | notebook | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | _ÿ (Right | Moves cursor | | Word right | Extends |<br /> | Arrow) | right, if | | | selection |<br /> | | possible | | | one |<br /> | | | | | character |<br /> | | | | | position to |<br /> | | | | | the right |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Spacebar(2) | Toggles the | Display | Always | Inserts a |<br /> | | selection | system menu | toggles the | space where |<br /> | | state of the | | selection | space is |<br /> | | object or | | state of the | allowed |<br /> | | choice on | | object or | |<br /> | | which the | | choice on | |<br /> | | cursor is | | which the | |<br /> | | positioned | | cursor is | |<br /> | | | | positioned | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | / (Slash) | | | Select all | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Tab__ÿ|(3) | Moves cursor | | Moves to the | Moves to |<br /> | | to next | | next control | the |<br /> | | control; in | | when the | previous |<br /> | | an entry | | cursor is | tab |<br /> | | field, moves | | currently in | position or |<br /> | | to next tab | | an entry | to the |<br /> | | position. | | field or in | previous |<br /> | | | | a notebook. | control. |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | " (Up | Moves cursor | Moves focus | | Extends |<br /> | Arrow) | up, if | from | | selection |<br /> | | possible | notebook | | to the |<br /> | | | page to | | current |<br /> | | | notebook tab | | character |<br /> | | | or page push | | position on |<br /> | | | button. | | the line |<br /> | | | | | above the |<br /> | | | | | current |<br /> | | | | | line |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 1. Pressing Shift+Alt+__ (Backspace) performs the Redo action. |<br /> | |<br /> | 2. Use Spacebar if it is not assigned to any other function; |<br /> | otherwise, use Ctrl+Spacebar. |<br /> | |<br /> | 3. Ctrl+Shift+Tab__ÿ| moves to the previous control when the cursor |<br /> | is currently in an entry field. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3674 9023 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.11?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLEAR">"Clear (Choice)" in topic 2.2.11</a> 3675 9024 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> … … 3683 9032 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 3684 9033 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 3685 </pre> 3686 <hr /> 3687 <a name="LEN Keys Help" /> 3688 <h2><a name="LEN Keys Help">2.2.55 Keys Help</a></h2> 3689 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An entry in the help index that displays a window containing a<br />listing of key assignments and pointing-device button<br />assignments, if applicable, for the object or application from<br />which keys help was requested.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3690 href="picture-216?mode=zoom"><img 3691 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P216.GIF" 3692 alt="PICTURE 216" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9034 </pre> 9035 9036 9037 9038 9039 9040 9041 9042 9043 9044 <hr /> 9045 <a name="LEN Keys Help"></a> 9046 9047 9048 9049 9050 <h2><a name="LEN Keys Help">2.2.55 Keys Help</a></h2> 9051 9052 9053 9054 9055 9056 9057 9058 9059 9060 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An entry in the help index that displays a window containing a<br />listing of key assignments and pointing-device button<br />assignments, if applicable, for the object or application from<br />which keys help was requested.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-216?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 216" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P216.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3693 9061 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> choice in the help index.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3694 9062 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> List in keys help all key assignments for the window from which<br /> the user requested help.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Indicate to a user which keys are available in the current state<br /> of the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a pointing device is attached to a user's system, list in<br /> keys help the functions assigned to the pointing device buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> List shortcut key assignments in keys help.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user adds or changes key assignments, list the new or<br /> changed assignments in keys help along with any unchanged<br /> assignments.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 3698 9066 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 3699 9067 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.106?DT=19921204095534#HDRSHORTCT">"Shortcut Key" in topic 2.2.106</a> 3700 </pre> 3701 <hr /> 3702 <a name="LEN List Box (Control)" /> 3703 <h2><a name="LEN List Box (Control)">2.2.56 List Box 9068 </pre> 9069 9070 9071 9072 9073 9074 9075 9076 9077 9078 <hr /> 9079 <a name="LEN List Box (Control)"></a> 9080 9081 9082 9083 9084 <h2><a name="LEN List Box (Control)">2.2.56 List Box 3704 9085 (Control)</a></h2> 3705 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that contains a list of objects or settings choices<br />that a user can select. List boxes support single or multiple<br />selection.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3706 href="picture-217?mode=zoom"><img 3707 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P217.GIF" 3708 alt="PICTURE 217" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9086 9087 9088 9089 9090 9091 9092 9093 9094 9095 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that contains a list of objects or settings choices<br />that a user can select. List boxes support single or multiple<br />selection.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-217?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 217" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P217.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3709 9096 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a list box to display a list of settings choices or objects,<br /> but not both, in which the number of choices or objects may<br /> vary.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3710 9097 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the settings choices or objects in a list box in an<br /> order that is meaningful to a user, such as alphabetic order,<br /> numeric order, chronological order, or some other order. For<br /> example, display modem baud rates in numeric order.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make a list box large enough to display six to eight settings<br /> choices or objects at a time, or all settings choices or objects<br /> if fewer than six.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In a list that can be scrolled, such as a scrollable list box,<br /> do not allow the cursor to wrap.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide horizontal or vertical scroll bars, or both, when some<br /> information is not visible in the list box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make list boxes at least wide enough to display the choices or<br /> objects of average width.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user increases the size of the window in which the list<br /> box is displayed, increase the number of settings choices or<br /> objects displayed in the list box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user decreases the size of the window in which the list<br /> box is displayed, decrease the number of settings choices or<br /> objects displayed in the list box to a minimum of six. If the<br /> window is sized so that six settings choices or objects cannot<br /> be displayed, clip the list box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a list box provides multiple selection, place in the<br /> descriptive text for the list box information about the number<br /> of items that can be selected. For example, add text and a<br /> counter near the list box that dynamically shows the number of<br /> items selected, such as "3 selected."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a choice<br /> or object name unless the choice or object name contains an<br /> abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be<br /> capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 3719 9106 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLB">"Scroll Bar" in topic 2.2.97</a> 3720 9107 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 3721 </pre> 3722 <hr /> 3723 <a name="LEN Marquee Selection" /> 3724 <h2><a name="LEN Marquee Selection">2.2.57 Marquee 9108 </pre> 9109 9110 9111 9112 9113 9114 9115 9116 9117 9118 <hr /> 9119 <a name="LEN Marquee Selection"></a> 9120 9121 9122 9123 9124 <h2><a name="LEN Marquee Selection">2.2.57 Marquee 3725 9125 Selection</a></h2> 3726 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A technique that allows a user to select objects by drawing a<br />rectangle around them with a pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3727 href="picture-218?mode=zoom"><img 3728 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P218.GIF" 3729 alt="PICTURE 218" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9126 9127 9128 9129 9130 9131 9132 9133 9134 9135 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A technique that allows a user to select objects by drawing a<br />rectangle around them with a pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-218?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 218" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P218.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3730 9136 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide marquee selection for all multiple selection and<br /> extended selection lists.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3731 9137 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In multiple or extended selection:<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse, when the user presses the mouse selection<br />button on white space and moves the pointer, begin drawing a<br />marquee rectangle that starts at the point where the mouse<br />selection button was pressed and extends to the current<br />mouse pointer location. As objects are encompassed by the<br />marquee rectangle they are selected. Marquee selection is<br />completed when the mouse selection button is released.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the marquee box only during selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display selected-state emphasis on each object as soon as the<br /> object is completely contained within the marquee box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display selected-state emphasis on each icon as soon as the<br /> icon's graphic is completely contained within the marquee box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3732 9138 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.79?DT=19921204095534#HDRRANSEL">"Point-to-Endpoint Selection" in topic 2.2.79</a> 3733 9139 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 3734 </pre> 3735 <hr /> 3736 <a name="LEN Maximize (Choice)" /> 3737 <h2><a name="LEN Maximize (Choice)">2.2.58 Maximize 9140 </pre> 9141 9142 9143 9144 9145 9146 9147 9148 9149 9150 <hr /> 9151 <a name="LEN Maximize (Choice)"></a> 9152 9153 9154 9155 9156 <h2><a name="LEN Maximize (Choice)">2.2.58 Maximize 3738 9157 (Choice)</a></h2> 3739 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that enlarges a window to the largest size<br />possible for that view or to the size of the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3740 href="picture-219?mode=zoom"><img 3741 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P219.GIF" 3742 alt="PICTURE 219" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9158 9159 9160 9161 9162 9163 9164 9165 9166 9167 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that enlarges a window to the largest size<br />possible for that view or to the size of the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-219?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 219" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P219.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3743 9168 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Maximize</b> choice when a user can change the size of a<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3744 9169 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place the <b>Maximize</b> choice in the system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Maximize</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when<br /> the window is maximized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a maximize button on the title bar when the size of a<br /> window can be changed and the window is not currently maximized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Maximize</b> choice or clicks on the<br /> maximize button, enlarge the window to the largest size possible<br /> for the current view or to the size of the workplace, whichever<br /> is smaller.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Change a maximize button to a restore button when a window is<br /> currently maximized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Before maximizing a window, save its state, including its size<br /> and position for use when the window is restored.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F10 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Maximize</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "X" as the mnemonic for the <b>Maximize</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 3748 9173 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.92?DT=19921204095534#HDRRESTORE">"Restore (Choice)" in topic 2.2.92</a> 3749 9174 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.109?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIZE">"Size (Choice)" in topic 2.2.109</a> 3750 </pre> 3751 <hr /> 3752 <a name="LEN Menu (Control)" /> 3753 <h2><a name="LEN Menu (Control)">2.2.59 Menu (Control)</a></h2> 3754 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A list of action, routing, and settings choices. The types of<br />menus are the menu bar, pull-down menu, cascaded menu, and<br />pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3755 href="picture-220?mode=zoom"><img 3756 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P220.GIF" 3757 alt="PICTURE 220" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9175 </pre> 9176 9177 9178 9179 9180 9181 9182 9183 9184 9185 <hr /> 9186 <a name="LEN Menu (Control)"></a> 9187 9188 9189 9190 9191 <h2><a name="LEN Menu (Control)">2.2.59 Menu 9192 (Control)</a></h2> 9193 9194 9195 9196 9197 9198 9199 9200 9201 9202 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A list of action, routing, and settings choices. The types of<br />menus are the menu bar, pull-down menu, cascaded menu, and<br />pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-220?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 220" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P220.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3758 9203 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a menu to present action, routing, or settings choices that<br /> a user can select while performing tasks.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3759 9204 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects a routing choice that leads to a menu,<br /> always display the menu even if all of the choices in it are<br /> unavailable.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not display unavailable-state emphasis on routing choices<br /> that lead to pull-down menus or cascaded menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display unavailable-state emphasis on action and settings<br /> choices that cannot be selected in the current context.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow the cursor to wrap at the top and bottom of a menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Except in the <b>Selected</b> menu, a pop-up menu, or when a user<br /> switches between <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> and <b>Short</b> <b>menus,</b> do not add or<br /> remove choices from a menu to indicate availability of choices.<br /> Instead, display unavailable choices with unavailable-state<br /> emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a choice is never available to a particular user, do not<br /> display it in a menu, and do not save space for it in a menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place related choices together.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use separators to distinguish groups of related choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place product-specific choices either following a group of<br /> related predefined choices or at the bottom of a menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Keep the relative order of identical choices the same among<br /> different menus. For example, keep the order of the <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b><br /><b>Create</b> and <b>Paste</b> choices the same in the <b>Edit</b> pull-down menu and<br /> the pop-up menu for an object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use graphics, text, or both for each choice in a menu depending<br /> on which best identifies the choice. For example, a menu for a<br /> drawing product could be made up of graphic fill-patterns rather<br /> than text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Dynamically add text or graphics to a choice to make the meaning<br /> of that choice clearer in a given context. For example, change<br /> the name of the <b>Undo</b> choice to <b>Undo</b> <b>typing.</b> This clarifies the<br /> meaning and differentiates the choice from <b>Undo</b> <b>delete.</b> … … 3768 9213 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.107?DT=19921204095534#HDRSFMENUS">"Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)" in topic 2.2.107</a> 3769 9214 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 3770 </pre> 3771 <hr /> 3772 <a name="LEN Menu Bar" /> 3773 <h2><a name="LEN Menu Bar">2.2.60 Menu Bar</a></h2> 3774 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The area near the top of a window, below the title bar and above<br />the rest of the window, that contains routing choices that<br />display pull-down menus. Typically, a menu-bar choice is a<br />single word.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3775 href="picture-221?mode=zoom"><img 3776 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P221.GIF" 3777 alt="PICTURE 221" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9215 </pre> 9216 9217 9218 9219 9220 9221 9222 9223 9224 9225 <hr /> 9226 <a name="LEN Menu Bar"></a> 9227 9228 9229 9230 9231 <h2><a name="LEN Menu Bar">2.2.60 Menu Bar</a></h2> 9232 9233 9234 9235 9236 9237 9238 9239 9240 9241 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The area near the top of a window, below the title bar and above<br />the rest of the window, that contains routing choices that<br />display pull-down menus. Typically, a menu-bar choice is a<br />single word.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-221?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 221" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P221.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3778 9242 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a menu bar when a window will provide more than six<br /> action choices or routing choices. Also provide a menu bar if<br /> you provide the functions available in the <b>File,</b> <b>Selected,</b> <b>Edit,</b><br />or <b>View</b> menus.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3779 9243 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a menu bar, place on it only routing choices that<br /> lead to pull-down menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a menu bar is not provided in a window displaying a view of<br /> an object, place all action and routing choices on push buttons<br /> in that window, except for those choices that appear on the<br /> system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to turn the display of the menu bar on and off.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the following choices on the menu bar, in the relative<br /> order shown, if you provide any of the choices listed in their<br /> associated menus:<br /><br /><br />° <b>File</b> (Object-oriented) or <b>File</b> (Application-oriented)<br /> ° <b>Selected</b><br />° <b>Edit</b><br />° <b>View</b><br />° <b>Options</b> (Application-oriented)<br /> ° <b>Windows</b><br />° <b>Help</b> … … 3796 9260 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 3797 9261 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.134?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINMENU">"Windows Menu" in topic 2.2.134</a> 3798 </pre> 3799 <hr /> 3800 <a name="LEN Message" /> 3801 <h2><a name="LEN Message">2.2.61 Message</a></h2> 3802 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Information displayed in a window in response to an unexpected<br />event, a situation in which something undesirable could occur,<br />or when there is additional status information on a process that<br />has completed. The three types of messages are information<br />message, warning message, and action message.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9262 </pre> 9263 9264 9265 9266 9267 9268 9269 9270 9271 9272 <hr /> 9273 <a name="LEN Message"></a> 9274 9275 9276 9277 9278 <h2><a name="LEN Message">2.2.61 Message</a></h2> 9279 9280 9281 9282 9283 9284 9285 9286 9287 9288 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Information displayed in a window in response to an unexpected<br />event, a situation in which something undesirable could occur,<br />or when there is additional status information on a process that<br />has completed. The three types of messages are information<br />message, warning message, and action message.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3803 9289 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a message to report unexpected or undesirable situations to<br /> the user.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a message to indicate that a process has completed<br /> successfully, but there is additional information about the<br /> status of the completion that the user must see.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3804 9290 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a warning message to indicate that an undesirable<br /> situation could occur but that the user can allow the process to<br /> continue.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an action message to indicate that a condition has<br /> occurred and that the user must correct the situation and retry,<br /> choose an alternative action, or withdraw the request.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an information message to indicate that a condition has<br /> occurred that the user can do nothing about or that the user<br /> must see additional information about the status of normal<br /> completion.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a progress indicator is displayed in a separate window,<br /> display information about the status of a process in the<br /> progress-indicator window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Phrase message text so that a user clearly understands what<br /> caused the message as well as what action, if any, can be taken<br /> to correct the situation that caused the message.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid phrasing messages in a way that requires a "Yes" or "No"<br /> response from the user. For example, do not use the message,<br /> "Are you sure you don't want to save the file?" Instead, use,<br /> "File has been modified. Select 'Discard' to throw away changes<br /> or select 'Save' to save the file and then quit." If <b>Yes</b> and <b>No</b><br />push buttons are used, avoid using negatives in the message<br />text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access to help information from each message window by<br /> providing a push button labeled <b>Help.</b> 3805 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an associated window is open, display a message in a<br /> secondary window that is dependant on the associated window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If no associated window is open for which a message must be<br /> displayed, augment that object's icon with a small version of<br /> the message symbol. For example, if a note could not be<br /> successfully sent and no associated window is open, augment the<br /> mail basket icon with an appropriate message symbol, such as an<br /> "i" or "?."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If no associated window is open for which a message must be<br /> displayed and the object's icon is not currently visible,<br /> augment the container that is visible with a small version of<br /> the message symbol. For example, if an object's icon is<br /> contained in a folder that is currently visible, augment the<br /> folder's icon with an appropriate message symbol. If that<br /> folder's icon were not visible because it was contained in a<br /> closed work area, augment the work area's icon with an<br /> appropriate message symbol.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use <a 3806 href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#FIGMESSAGS">Figure 173</a> to determine which symbol to use to visually<br /> identify each type of message.<br /><br /><br /><a 3807 name="FIGMESSAGS" id="FIGMESSAGS" /><a name="TBLMESSAGS" 3808 id="TBLMESSAGS"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 173. Message Symbols and Message Types |<br />|_______________________ ________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Symbol</b> | <b>Message</b> <b>Type</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a 3809 href="picture-222?mode=zoom"><img 3810 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P222.GIF" 3811 alt="PICTURE 222" /></a> | Information Message |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a 3812 href="picture-223?mode=zoom"><img 3813 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P223.GIF" 3814 alt="PICTURE 223" /></a> | Warning Message |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a 3815 href="picture-224?mode=zoom"><img 3816 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P224.GIF" 3817 alt="PICTURE 224" /></a> | Action Message (When a user's immediate |<br /> | | attention is not required, such as when the |<br /> | | situation will not worsen with time.) |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a 3818 href="picture-225?mode=zoom"><img 3819 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P225.GIF" 3820 alt="PICTURE 225" /></a> | Action Message (When a user's immediate |<br /> | | attention is required.) |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the message symbol to the left of the message text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Include in the window title the name of the object and the<br /> action or situation that caused the message to appear. For<br /> example, "Drive A: - Format Diskette" might be used for a<br /> message title for a message displayed during a format operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make messages as modeless as possible. For example, if a<br /> message is associated with an entry field in a window, make the<br /> message modeless.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a message identifier in a message window, place<br /> it in the bottom right-most corner of the message and display it<br /> in a smaller font than the rest of the message text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use <a 3821 href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#FIGFLOWCH">Figure 174</a> to determine when and how to display messages.<br /><br /><br /><a 3822 name="FIGFLOWCH" id="FIGFLOWCH"><br /></a></pre> 3823 <hr /> 3824 <pre><a name="FIGFLOWCH" id="FIGFLOWCH"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a 3825 href="picture-226?mode=zoom"><img 3826 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P226.GIF" 3827 alt="PICTURE 226" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 3828 <hr /> 3829 <pre>Figure 174. Message and Progress Indicator Flowchart<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 9291 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an associated window is open, display a message in a<br /> secondary window that is dependant on the associated window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If no associated window is open for which a message must be<br /> displayed, augment that object's icon with a small version of<br /> the message symbol. For example, if a note could not be<br /> successfully sent and no associated window is open, augment the<br /> mail basket icon with an appropriate message symbol, such as an<br /> "i" or "?."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If no associated window is open for which a message must be<br /> displayed and the object's icon is not currently visible,<br /> augment the container that is visible with a small version of<br /> the message symbol. For example, if an object's icon is<br /> contained in a folder that is currently visible, augment the<br /> folder's icon with an appropriate message symbol. If that<br /> folder's icon were not visible because it was contained in a<br /> closed work area, augment the work area's icon with an<br /> appropriate message symbol.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#FIGMESSAGS">Figure 173</a> to determine which symbol to use to visually<br /> identify each type of message.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMESSAGS" name="FIGMESSAGS"></a><a id="TBLMESSAGS" name="TBLMESSAGS"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 173. Message Symbols and Message Types |<br />|_______________________ ________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Symbol</b> | <b>Message</b> <b>Type</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a href="picture-222?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 222" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P222.GIF" /></a> | Information Message |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a href="picture-223?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 223" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P223.GIF" /></a> | Warning Message |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a href="picture-224?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 224" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P224.GIF" /></a> | Action Message (When a user's immediate |<br /> | | attention is not required, such as when the |<br /> | | situation will not worsen with time.) |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /> | <a href="picture-225?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 225" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P225.GIF" /></a> | Action Message (When a user's immediate |<br /> | | attention is required.) |<br /> |_______________________|________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the message symbol to the left of the message text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Include in the window title the name of the object and the<br /> action or situation that caused the message to appear. For<br /> example, "Drive A: - Format Diskette" might be used for a<br /> message title for a message displayed during a format operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make messages as modeless as possible. For example, if a<br /> message is associated with an entry field in a window, make the<br /> message modeless.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a message identifier in a message window, place<br /> it in the bottom right-most corner of the message and display it<br /> in a smaller font than the rest of the message text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use <a href="2.2.61?DT=19921204095534#FIGFLOWCH">Figure 174</a> to determine when and how to display messages.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFLOWCH" name="FIGFLOWCH"><br /></a></pre> 9292 9293 9294 9295 9296 9297 9298 9299 9300 9301 <hr /> 9302 9303 9304 9305 9306 <pre><a id="FIGFLOWCH" name="FIGFLOWCH"><br /><br /><br /><br /></a><a href="picture-226?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 226" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P226.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></pre> 9307 9308 9309 9310 9311 9312 9313 9314 9315 9316 <hr /> 9317 9318 9319 9320 9321 <pre>Figure 174. Message and Progress Indicator Flowchart<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3830 9322 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.3?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTIONM">"Action Message" in topic 2.2.3</a> 3831 9323 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> … … 3837 9329 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 3838 9330 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 3839 </pre> 3840 <hr /> 3841 <a name="LEN Minimize (Choice)" /> 3842 <h2><a name="LEN Minimize (Choice)">2.2.62 Minimize 9331 </pre> 9332 9333 9334 9335 9336 9337 9338 9339 9340 9341 <hr /> 9342 <a name="LEN Minimize (Choice)"></a> 9343 9344 9345 9346 9347 <h2><a name="LEN Minimize (Choice)">2.2.62 Minimize 3843 9348 (Choice)</a></h2> 3844 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that removes a window and all of its secondary<br />windows from the workplace. A minimized-window visual, such as<br />an application-defined icon, is placed on the workplace to<br />represent a minimized window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3845 href="picture-227?mode=zoom"><img 3846 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P227.GIF" 3847 alt="PICTURE 227" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9349 9350 9351 9352 9353 9354 9355 9356 9357 9358 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that removes a window and all of its secondary<br />windows from the workplace. A minimized-window visual, such as<br />an application-defined icon, is placed on the workplace to<br />represent a minimized window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-227?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 227" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P227.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3848 9359 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Minimize</b> choice for windows that contain views of<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3849 9360 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Minimize</b> choice, place it in the system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Minimize</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when<br /> the window is currently minimized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Minimize</b> choice, place a minimize push button<br /> on the title bar if the window is not currently minimized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user minimizes a window that has not been minimized<br /> previously, place the minimized-window visual near the bottom of<br /> the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user minimizes a window that has been minimized<br /> previously, place the minimized-window visual where it had been<br /> before being restored previously.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user minimizes a work area, remove from the workplace all<br /> windows associated with that work area and save the open state<br /> of each associated window for use when the work area is<br /> restored.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Before minimizing a window, save its state, including its size<br /> and position, along with the state of each of its associated<br /> windows, to be used when the window is restored.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F9 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Minimize</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "N" as the mnemonic for the <b>Minimize</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 3853 9364 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.92?DT=19921204095534#HDRRESTORE">"Restore (Choice)" in topic 2.2.92</a> 3854 9365 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.109?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIZE">"Size (Choice)" in topic 2.2.109</a> 3855 </pre> 3856 <hr /> 3857 <a name="LEN Mnemonic" /> 3858 <h2><a name="LEN Mnemonic">2.2.63 Mnemonic</a></h2> 3859 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A single, easy-to-remember alphanumeric character that moves the<br />cursor to a choice and selects the choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3860 href="picture-228?mode=zoom"><img 3861 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P228.GIF" 3862 alt="PICTURE 228" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9366 </pre> 9367 9368 9369 9370 9371 9372 9373 9374 9375 9376 <hr /> 9377 <a name="LEN Mnemonic"></a> 9378 9379 9380 9381 9382 <h2><a name="LEN Mnemonic">2.2.63 Mnemonic</a></h2> 9383 9384 9385 9386 9387 9388 9389 9390 9391 9392 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A single, easy-to-remember alphanumeric character that moves the<br />cursor to a choice and selects the choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-228?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 228" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P228.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3863 9393 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the predefined mnemonic for each predefined choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a unique mnemonic for each product-specific textual<br /> choice in a menu, unless no meaningful unique mnemonic can be<br /> found.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a unique mnemonic for each choice in a field of choices,<br /> except for push buttons that have a specific key assignment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3864 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses a mnemonic character, move the cursor to the<br /> choice in that scope that corresponds with that mnemonic and<br /> selects that choice; otherwise, generate an audible cue to<br /> indicate that the mnemonic is not valid within that scope.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Make mnemonics unique:<br /><br /><br />° Within each pull-down menu, cascaded menu, and pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br />° For all choices, field prompts, controls that allow typing,<br />push buttons, and menu bar choices within a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In a window with a menu bar, when a user presses Alt+mnemonic<br /> character, move the cursor to a menu-bar choice that has that<br /> mnemonic.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In a control that allows typing, when a user presses<br /> Alt+mnemonic character, move the cursor to a choice that has<br /> that mnemonic outside the control.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Identify each mnemonic with an underline.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a mnemonic is an alphabetic character, allow a user to press<br /> either the uppercase or lowercase character.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a mnemonic for the default push button if the default<br /> push button is not always a push button at the bottom of the<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For push buttons that do not open a new window or close the<br /> current window, avoid moving the cursor when a user types a<br /> mnemonic to select a push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the following choices, assign unique mnemonics to<br /> them as in <a 3865 href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#FIGMNTBAR">175</a> through <a 3866 href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#FIGMNHELPM">185</a> on pages <a 3867 href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#FIGMNTBAR">2.2.63</a> through <a 3868 href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#FIGMNHELPM">2.2.63</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 3869 name="FIGMNTBAR" id="FIGMNTBAR" /><a name="TBLMNTBAR" id="TBLMNTBAR"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 175. Mnemonic Assignments for the Title Bar and Menu Bar |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | System menu | Spacebar |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | File menu | F |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Selected menu | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Edit menu | E |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | View menu | V |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Options menu | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Windows menu | W |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Help menu | H |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3870 name="FIGMNPUSHB" id="FIGMNPUSHB" /><a name="TBLMNPUSHB" 3871 id="TBLMNPUSHB"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 176. Mnemonic Assignments for a Field of Push Buttons |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Push</b> <b>button</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Apply | A |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | OK | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Reset | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Retry | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Stop | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Close | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Continue | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Pause | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Resume | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 1. Reset, Retry, and Resume will not appear within the same field of |<br /> | push buttons. |<br /> | |<br /> | 2. Close and Continue will not appear within the same field of push |<br /> | buttons. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3872 name="FIGMNWICON" id="FIGMNWICON" /><a name="TBLMNWICON" 3873 id="TBLMNWICON"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 177. Mnemonic Assignments for the System Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>System</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Restore | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Move | M |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Size | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Minimize | N |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Hide | H |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Maximize | X |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Close | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Window list | W |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Split | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3874 name="FIGMNFILE" id="FIGMNFILE" /><a name="TBLMNFILE" id="TBLMNFILE"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 178. Mnemonic Assignments for the File Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>File</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | New | N |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Open (Application-oriented) | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Open as (Object-oriented) | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Save | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Save as | A |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Print | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> Open and Open as will not appear within the same menu |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3875 name="FIGMNSELEC" id="FIGMNSELEC" /><a name="TBLMNSELEC" 3876 id="TBLMNSELEC"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 179. Mnemonic Assignments for the Selected Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Selected</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Open as | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Print | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3877 name="FIGMNEDIT" id="FIGMNEDIT" /><a name="TBLMNEDIT" id="TBLMNEDIT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 180. Mnemonic assignments for the Edit Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Edit</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Undo | U |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Redo | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Cut | T |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Copy | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Create | A |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Paste | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Clear | E |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Delete | D |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Find | F |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Select all | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Deselect all | L |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3878 name="FIGMNVIEW" id="FIGMNVIEW" /><a name="TBLMNVIEW" id="TBLMNVIEW"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 181. Mnemonic Assignments for the View Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>View</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Icon | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Details | D |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Settings | T |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Sort | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Include | I |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Refresh | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Refresh now | N |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3879 name="FIGMNREFCH" id="FIGMNREFCH" /><a name="TBLMNREFCH" 3880 id="TBLMNREFCH"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 182. Mnemonic Assignments for the Refresh Cascade Choices |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | On | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Off | F |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3881 name="FIGMNOPTNS" id="FIGMNOPTNS" /><a name="TBLMNOPTNS" 3882 id="TBLMNOPTNS"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 183. Mnemonic Assignments for the Options Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Options</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Short menus | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Full menus | F |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3883 name="FIGMNWIN" id="FIGMNWIN" /><a name="TBLMNWIN" id="TBLMNWIN"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 184. Mnemonic Assignments for the Windows Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Windows</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Window list | W |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3884 name="FIGMNHELPM" id="FIGMNHELPM" /><a name="TBLMNHELPM" 3885 id="TBLMNHELPM"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 185. Mnemonic Assignments for the Help Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Help</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Help index | I |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | General help | G |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Using help | U |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Tutorial | T |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Product information | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> For choices other than those listed in the preceding tables,<br /> assign mnemonic characters by applying the first applicable<br /> guideline that follows:<br /><br /><br />1. Use the first character of the choice name, or the first<br />character of one of the words in a multiple-word choice,<br />unless those characters have been assigned as mnemonics for<br />other choices.<br /><br /><br />2. If the first character of a choice name has been used as the<br />mnemonic for another choice, use a consonant in the choice<br />name.<br /><br /><br />3. If all consonants in a choice name have been used as<br />mnemonics for other choices, use any other character in the<br />choice name.<br /><br /><br />4. If all characters in a choice name have been used as<br />mnemonics for other choices, add a unique character to the<br />choice text and make it the mnemonic. Display the character<br />in parentheses after the choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 9394 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses a mnemonic character, move the cursor to the<br /> choice in that scope that corresponds with that mnemonic and<br /> selects that choice; otherwise, generate an audible cue to<br /> indicate that the mnemonic is not valid within that scope.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Make mnemonics unique:<br /><br /><br />° Within each pull-down menu, cascaded menu, and pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br />° For all choices, field prompts, controls that allow typing,<br />push buttons, and menu bar choices within a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In a window with a menu bar, when a user presses Alt+mnemonic<br /> character, move the cursor to a menu-bar choice that has that<br /> mnemonic.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In a control that allows typing, when a user presses<br /> Alt+mnemonic character, move the cursor to a choice that has<br /> that mnemonic outside the control.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Identify each mnemonic with an underline.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a mnemonic is an alphabetic character, allow a user to press<br /> either the uppercase or lowercase character.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a mnemonic for the default push button if the default<br /> push button is not always a push button at the bottom of the<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For push buttons that do not open a new window or close the<br /> current window, avoid moving the cursor when a user types a<br /> mnemonic to select a push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the following choices, assign unique mnemonics to<br /> them as in <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#FIGMNTBAR">175</a> through <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#FIGMNHELPM">185</a> on pages <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#FIGMNTBAR">2.2.63</a> through <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#FIGMNHELPM">2.2.63</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNTBAR" name="FIGMNTBAR"></a><a id="TBLMNTBAR" name="TBLMNTBAR"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 175. Mnemonic Assignments for the Title Bar and Menu Bar |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | System menu | Spacebar |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | File menu | F |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Selected menu | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Edit menu | E |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | View menu | V |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Options menu | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Windows menu | W |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Help menu | H |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNPUSHB" name="FIGMNPUSHB"></a><a id="TBLMNPUSHB" name="TBLMNPUSHB"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 176. Mnemonic Assignments for a Field of Push Buttons |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Push</b> <b>button</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Apply | A |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | OK | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Reset | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Retry | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Stop | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Close | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Continue | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Pause | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Resume | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 1. Reset, Retry, and Resume will not appear within the same field of |<br /> | push buttons. |<br /> | |<br /> | 2. Close and Continue will not appear within the same field of push |<br /> | buttons. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNWICON" name="FIGMNWICON"></a><a id="TBLMNWICON" name="TBLMNWICON"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 177. Mnemonic Assignments for the System Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>System</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Restore | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Move | M |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Size | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Minimize | N |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Hide | H |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Maximize | X |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Close | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Window list | W |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Split | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNFILE" name="FIGMNFILE"></a><a id="TBLMNFILE" name="TBLMNFILE"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 178. Mnemonic Assignments for the File Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>File</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | New | N |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Open (Application-oriented) | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Open as (Object-oriented) | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Save | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Save as | A |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Print | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> Open and Open as will not appear within the same menu |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNSELEC" name="FIGMNSELEC"></a><a id="TBLMNSELEC" name="TBLMNSELEC"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 179. Mnemonic Assignments for the Selected Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Selected</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Open as | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Print | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNEDIT" name="FIGMNEDIT"></a><a id="TBLMNEDIT" name="TBLMNEDIT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 180. Mnemonic assignments for the Edit Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Edit</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Undo | U |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Redo | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Cut | T |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Copy | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Create | A |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Paste | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Clear | E |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Delete | D |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Find | F |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Select all | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Deselect all | L |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNVIEW" name="FIGMNVIEW"></a><a id="TBLMNVIEW" name="TBLMNVIEW"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 181. Mnemonic Assignments for the View Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>View</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Icon | C |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Details | D |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Settings | T |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Sort | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Include | I |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Refresh | R |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Refresh now | N |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNREFCH" name="FIGMNREFCH"></a><a id="TBLMNREFCH" name="TBLMNREFCH"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 182. Mnemonic Assignments for the Refresh Cascade Choices |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | On | O |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Off | F |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNOPTNS" name="FIGMNOPTNS"></a><a id="TBLMNOPTNS" name="TBLMNOPTNS"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 183. Mnemonic Assignments for the Options Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Options</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Short menus | S |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Full menus | F |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNWIN" name="FIGMNWIN"></a><a id="TBLMNWIN" name="TBLMNWIN"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 184. Mnemonic Assignments for the Windows Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Windows</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Window list | W |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMNHELPM" name="FIGMNHELPM"></a><a id="TBLMNHELPM" name="TBLMNHELPM"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 185. Mnemonic Assignments for the Help Menu |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Help</b> <b>Menu</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Mnemonic</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Help index | I |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | General help | G |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Using help | U |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Tutorial | T |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Product information | P |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> For choices other than those listed in the preceding tables,<br /> assign mnemonic characters by applying the first applicable<br /> guideline that follows:<br /><br /><br />1. Use the first character of the choice name, or the first<br />character of one of the words in a multiple-word choice,<br />unless those characters have been assigned as mnemonics for<br />other choices.<br /><br /><br />2. If the first character of a choice name has been used as the<br />mnemonic for another choice, use a consonant in the choice<br />name.<br /><br /><br />3. If all consonants in a choice name have been used as<br />mnemonics for other choices, use any other character in the<br />choice name.<br /><br /><br />4. If all characters in a choice name have been used as<br />mnemonics for other choices, add a unique character to the<br />choice text and make it the mnemonic. Display the character<br />in parentheses after the choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3886 9395 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 3887 9396 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.39?DT=19921204095534#HDRLETRSEL">"First-Letter Cursor Navigation" in topic 2.2.39</a> 3888 9397 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 3889 9398 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.106?DT=19921204095534#HDRSHORTCT">"Shortcut Key" in topic 2.2.106</a> 3890 </pre> 3891 <hr /> 3892 <a name="LEN Mouse" /> 3893 <h2><a name="LEN Mouse">2.2.64 Mouse</a></h2> 3894 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A commonly used pointing device, containing one or more buttons,<br />that allows a user to interact with a product or the operating<br />environment. A mouse button is mapped to one of three<br />functions: selection, manipulation, and displaying a pop-up<br />menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3895 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign mouse button one as the mouse selection button as the<br /> initial default for a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign mouse button two as the mouse manipulation button as the<br /> initial default for a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign the chording of mouse buttons one and two as the mouse<br /> menu button as the initial default for a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user clicks a mouse button, perform the function assigned<br /> to a click of that button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Design your product so that when a user double-clicks a mouse<br /> button, only the function assigned to a double-click of that<br /> button is performed. Do not allow the function assigned to a<br /> single click of that mouse button to be performed. For example,<br /> if a user double-clicks on an object, the object's selection<br /> state should remain unaffected, and the object should be opened.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not assign double-click as the only way to select a choice<br /> and perform an action. Provide a keyboard alternative, such as<br /> a menu choice or push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not assign double-click functions to choices on which users<br /> will typically perform multiple single clicks, such as on scroll<br /> bar buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Perform the function assigned to a chord when a user presses<br /> more than one mouse button in such a way that the buttons are<br /> down and the mouse moves no more than the distance that the user<br /> has specified for the operating environment. Do not perform the<br /> functions assigned to clicking each mouse button individually.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the mouse selection button, move the input<br /> focus to the pointer position or to the closest part of the<br /> window that can receive the input focus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid moving input focus to the pointer position when a user<br /> presses the mouse menu button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If pop-up menus are provided, allow a user using a 3-button<br /> mouse to select a choice from the pop-up menu with either the<br /> mouse selection button or mouse menu button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to all functions of an object using equivalent,<br /> though not necessarily identical, mouse and keyboard techniques.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign the mouse-button functions for a one-button, two-button,<br /> and three-button mouse as in the following tables:<br /><br /><br /><a 3896 name="FIGSELECT" id="FIGSELECT" /><a name="TBLSELECT" id="TBLSELECT"> _________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 186. Mouse Techniques for Selection |<br />|_________ _______ _______ __________ __________ _________|<br />| <b>Selectio|</b> <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | <b>techniqu|</b> <b>button</b>| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> | <b>action</b> | |<br /> | | <b>presse|</b> | <b>to</b> <b>begin</b> | <b>to</b> <b>end</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>selection</b>| <b>selection</b>| |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Point | Select|onNone | Click on | Not | Selected|state<br /> | selectio| | | any | applicabl| emphasis|<br /> | | | | object | | is |<br /> | | | | or | | displaye|<br /> | | | | choice | | on |<br /> | | | | that can | | object |<br /> | | | | be | | or |<br /> | | | | selected.| | choice. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Begin | Select|onNone | Click in | Not | Anchor |<br /> | point-to|endpoin| | list of | applicabl| point |<br /> | range | | | objects | | is set. |<br /> | (click) | | | or | | |<br /> | selectio| | | choices | | |<br /> | | | | that can | | |<br /> | | | | be | | |<br /> | | | | selected.| | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | End | Select|oShift | Click | Not | All |<br /> | point-to|endpoin| | elsewhere| applicabl| objects |<br /> | range | | | in list | | in |<br /> | (click) | | | of | | range |<br /> | selectio| | | objects | | are |<br /> | | | | or | | selected|<br /> | | | | choices | | |<br /> | | | | that can | | |<br /> | | | | be | | |<br /> | | | | selected.| | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Point-to|eSelect|onNone | Press | Release | All |<br /> | area | | | and hold | mouse | objects |<br /> | (marquee| | | mouse | button. | that |<br /> | selectio| | | button | | are |<br /> | | | | in blank | | fully |<br /> | | | | space, | | within |<br /> | | | | then | | the |<br /> | | | | drag | | marquee |<br /> | | | | until | | box are |<br /> | | | | all | | selected|<br /> | | | | desired | | |<br /> | | | | objects | | |<br /> | | | | are | | |<br /> | | | | within | | |<br /> | | | | the | | |<br /> | | | | marquee | | |<br /> | | | | box. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Random-p|iSelect|onNone | Press | Release | All |<br /> | selectio| | | mouse | mouse | items |<br /> | | | | button | button | passed |<br /> | | | | while | when | over by |<br /> | | | | pointer | pointer | mouse |<br /> | | | | is on an | is on | while |<br /> | | | | object, | last | mouse |<br /> | | | | then | object | button |<br /> | | | | move | to be | was |<br /> | | | | mouse | selected.| down |<br /> | | | | while | | are |<br /> | | | | holding | | selected|<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Deselect| Select|onNone | Click in | Not | Selectio|<br /> | all | | | blank | applicabl| emphasis|<br /> | | | | space. | | is |<br /> | | | | | | removed |<br /> | | | | | | from |<br /> | | | | | | all |<br /> | | | | | | objects |<br /> | | | | | | or |<br /> | | | | | | choices |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3897 name="FIGDIRMAN1" id="FIGDIRMAN1" /><a name="TBLDIRMAN1" 3898 id="TBLDIRMAN1"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 187. Mouse Techniques for Direct Manipulation for a |<br />| One-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Direct</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | <b>manipula|i</b>button| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | <b>techniqu|</b> <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>direct</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>direct</b> | <b>manipulatio|</b> |<br /> | | | | <b>manipulatio|</b> | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Move | Select|onNone | Press | Release | Object |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | is |<br /> | | | | button | button | moved |<br /> | | | | while | when | from |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | source |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | to |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | target. |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Select|oShift | Press | Release | Object |<br /> | Move | | | mouse | mouse | is |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | moved |<br /> | default)| | | while | when | from |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | source |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | to |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | target. |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Copy | Select|onNone | Press | Release | A copy |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | of the |<br /> | | | | button | button | source |<br /> | | | | while | when | object |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | is |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | placed |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | at the |<br /> | | | | then move | | target |<br /> | | | | mouse | | position|<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Select|onCtrl | Press | Release | A copy |<br /> | Copy | | | mouse | mouse | of the |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | source |<br /> | default)|when | | while | when | object |<br /> | create-o|-drag | | pointer is | pointer is | is |<br /> | is set | | | on an | on target | placed |<br /> | off | | | object, | object | at the |<br /> | | | | then move | | target |<br /> | | | | mouse | | position|<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Select|onCtrl | Press | Release | A new |<br /> | Create | | | mouse | mouse | object |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | is |<br /> | default)|when | | while | when | placed |<br /> | create-o|-drag | | pointer is | pointer is | at the |<br /> | is set | | | on an | on target | target |<br /> | on | | | object, | object | position|<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Incremen|aSelect|onNone | Click on | Not | Contents|<br /> | scrollin| | | scroll | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | button in | | window |<br /> | | | | scroll | | are |<br /> | | | | bar. | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | | | one |<br /> | | | | | | smallest|<br /> | | | | | | scrollin|<br /> | | | | | | incremen|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Page | Select|onNone | Click in | Not | Contents|<br /> | scrollin| | | scroll | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | shaft | | window |<br /> | | | | between | | are |<br /> | | | | scroll | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | button and | | one |<br /> | | | | scroll | | page |<br /> | | | | box. | | incremen|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Direct | Select|onNone | Drag | Not | Contents|<br /> | position|ng | | scroll box | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | to a | | window |<br /> | | | | different | | are |<br /> | | | | position | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | on scroll | | to |<br /> | | | | shaft. | | display |<br /> | | | | | | informat|on<br /> | | | | | | at |<br /> | | | | | | relative|<br /> | | | | | | position|<br /> | | | | | | indicate|<br /> | | | | | | by |<br /> | | | | | | scroll |<br /> | | | | | | box. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Split | Select|onNone | Drag split | Not | Window |<br /> | window | | | bar. | applicable | is |<br /> | | | | | | divided |<br /> | | | | | | into |<br /> | | | | | | multiple|<br /> | | | | | | panes. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3899 name="FIGDIRMANT" id="FIGDIRMANT" /><a name="TBLDIRMANT" 3900 id="TBLDIRMANT"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 188. Mouse Techniques for Direct Manipulation for a |<br />| Two-Button or Three-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Direct</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | <b>manipula|i</b>button| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | <b>techniqu|</b> <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>direct</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>direct</b> | <b>manipulatio|</b> |<br /> | | | | <b>manipulatio|</b> | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Move | Manipu|atNone | Press | Release | Object |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | is |<br /> | | | | button | button | moved |<br /> | | | | while | when | from |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | source |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | to |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | target. |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Manipu|aShift | Press | Release | Object |<br /> | Move | | | mouse | mouse | is |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | moved |<br /> | default)| | | while | when | from |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | source |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | to |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | target. |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Copy | Manipu|atNone | Press | Release | A copy |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | of the |<br /> | | | | button | button | source |<br /> | | | | while | when | object |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | is |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | placed |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | at the |<br /> | | | | then move | | target |<br /> | | | | mouse | | position|<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Manipu|atCtrl | Press | Release | A copy |<br /> | Copy | | | mouse | mouse | of the |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | source |<br /> | default)|when | | while | when | object |<br /> | create-o|-drag | | pointer is | pointer is | is |<br /> | is set | | | on an | on target | placed |<br /> | off | | | object, | object | at the |<br /> | | | | then move | | target |<br /> | | | | mouse | | position|<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Manipu|atCtrl | Press | Release | A new |<br /> | Create | | | mouse | mouse | object |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | is |<br /> | default)|when | | while | when | placed |<br /> | create-o|-drag | | pointer is | pointer is | at the |<br /> | is set | | | on an | on target | target |<br /> | on | | | object, | object | position|<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Incremen|aSelect|onNone | Click on | Not | Contents|<br /> | scrollin| | | scroll | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | button in | | window |<br /> | | | | scroll | | are |<br /> | | | | bar. | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | | | one |<br /> | | | | | | smallest|<br /> | | | | | | scrollin|<br /> | | | | | | incremen|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Page | Select|onNone | Click in | Not | Contents|<br /> | scrollin| | | scroll | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | shaft | | window |<br /> | | | | between | | are |<br /> | | | | scroll | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | button and | | one |<br /> | | | | scroll | | page |<br /> | | | | box. | | incremen|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Direct | Select|onNone | Drag | Not | Contents|<br /> | position|ng | | scroll box | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | to a | | window |<br /> | | | | different | | are |<br /> | | | | position | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | on scroll | | to |<br /> | | | | shaft. | | display |<br /> | | | | | | informat|on<br /> | | | | | | at |<br /> | | | | | | relative|<br /> | | | | | | position|<br /> | | | | | | indicate|<br /> | | | | | | by |<br /> | | | | | | scroll |<br /> | | | | | | box. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Split | Manipu|atNone | Drag split | Not | Window |<br /> | window | | | bar. | applicable | is |<br /> | | | | | | divided |<br /> | | | | | | into |<br /> | | | | | | multiple|<br /> | | | | | | panes. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3901 name="FIGMISC1" id="FIGMISC1" /><a name="TBLMISC1" id="TBLMISC1"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 189. Mouse Techniques for Miscellaneous Actions for |<br />| a One-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Action</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | | <b>button</b>| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | | <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>action</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>action</b> | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Create | Select|oCtrl+S|iPress | Release | Create |<br /> | Reflecti|n | | mouse | mouse | a |<br /> | | | | button | button | reflecti|n<br /> | | | | while | | of the |<br /> | | | | pointer is | | object. |<br /> | | | | on an | | |<br /> | | | | object, | | |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Default | Select|onNone | Double-clic| Not | Default |<br /> | action | | | on an | applicable | action |<br /> | | | | object or | | for |<br /> | | | | choice. | | that |<br /> | | | | | | object |<br /> | | | | | | or |<br /> | | | | | | choice |<br /> | | | | | | is |<br /> | | | | | | carried |<br /> | | | | | | out. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Pop-up | Select|onAlt | Click or | Not | Pop-up |<br /> | menu | | | button-down| applicable | menu is |<br /> | | | | | | displaye|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3902 name="FIGMISC" id="FIGMISC" /><a name="TBLMISC" id="TBLMISC"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 190. Mouse Techniques for Miscellaneous Actions for |<br />| a Two-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Action</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | | <b>button</b>| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | | <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>action</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>action</b> | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Create | Manipu|aCtrl+S|iPress | Release | Create |<br /> | Reflecti|n | | mouse | mouse | a |<br /> | | | | button | button | reflecti|n<br /> | | | | while | | of the |<br /> | | | | pointer is | | object. |<br /> | | | | on an | | |<br /> | | | | object, | | |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Default | Select|onNone | Double-clic| Not | Default |<br /> | action | | | on an | applicable | action |<br /> | | | | object or | | for |<br /> | | | | choice. | | that |<br /> | | | | | | object |<br /> | | | | | | or |<br /> | | | | | | choice |<br /> | | | | | | is |<br /> | | | | | | carried |<br /> | | | | | | out. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Pop-up | Select|onNone | Chord | Not | Pop-up |<br /> | menu | and | | mouse | applicable | menu is |<br /> | | Manipu|ation | buttons | | displaye|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | reserved| Manipu|atAlt | Press | Release | This |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | combinat|on<br /> | | | | button | button | is |<br /> | | | | while | | reserved|<br /> | | | | pointer is | | for |<br /> | | | | on an | | future |<br /> | | | | object, | | releases|<br /> | | | | then move | | of the |<br /> | | | | mouse | | CUA |<br /> | | | | while | | interfac|.<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3903 name="FIGMISC2" id="FIGMISC2" /><a name="TBLMISC2" id="TBLMISC2"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 191. Mouse Techniques for Miscellaneous Actions for |<br />| a Three-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Action</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | | <b>button</b>| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | | <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>action</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>action</b> | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Create | Manipu|aCtrl+S|iPress | Release | Create |<br /> | Reflecti|n | | mouse | mouse | a |<br /> | | | | button | button | reflecti|n<br /> | | | | while | | of the |<br /> | | | | pointer is | | object. |<br /> | | | | on an | | |<br /> | | | | object, | | |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Default | Select|onNone | Double-clic| Not | Default |<br /> | action | | | on an | applicable | action |<br /> | | | | object or | | for |<br /> | | | | choice. | | that |<br /> | | | | | | object |<br /> | | | | | | or |<br /> | | | | | | choice |<br /> | | | | | | is |<br /> | | | | | | carried |<br /> | | | | | | out. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Pop-up | Menu | None | Click or | Not | Pop-up |<br /> | menu | | | button | applicable | menu is |<br /> | | | | down | | displaye|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | reserved| Manipu|atAlt | Press | Release | This |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | combinat|on<br /> | | | | button | button | is |<br /> | | | | while | | reserved|<br /> | | | | pointer is | | for |<br /> | | | | on an | | future |<br /> | | | | object, | | versions|<br /> | | | | then move | | of the |<br /> | | | | mouse | | CUA |<br /> | | | | while | | interfac|.<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 9399 </pre> 9400 9401 9402 9403 9404 9405 9406 9407 9408 9409 <hr /> 9410 <a name="LEN Mouse"></a> 9411 9412 9413 9414 9415 <h2><a name="LEN Mouse">2.2.64 Mouse</a></h2> 9416 9417 9418 9419 9420 9421 9422 9423 9424 9425 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A commonly used pointing device, containing one or more buttons,<br />that allows a user to interact with a product or the operating<br />environment. A mouse button is mapped to one of three<br />functions: selection, manipulation, and displaying a pop-up<br />menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 9426 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign mouse button one as the mouse selection button as the<br /> initial default for a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign mouse button two as the mouse manipulation button as the<br /> initial default for a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign the chording of mouse buttons one and two as the mouse<br /> menu button as the initial default for a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user clicks a mouse button, perform the function assigned<br /> to a click of that button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Design your product so that when a user double-clicks a mouse<br /> button, only the function assigned to a double-click of that<br /> button is performed. Do not allow the function assigned to a<br /> single click of that mouse button to be performed. For example,<br /> if a user double-clicks on an object, the object's selection<br /> state should remain unaffected, and the object should be opened.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not assign double-click as the only way to select a choice<br /> and perform an action. Provide a keyboard alternative, such as<br /> a menu choice or push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not assign double-click functions to choices on which users<br /> will typically perform multiple single clicks, such as on scroll<br /> bar buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Perform the function assigned to a chord when a user presses<br /> more than one mouse button in such a way that the buttons are<br /> down and the mouse moves no more than the distance that the user<br /> has specified for the operating environment. Do not perform the<br /> functions assigned to clicking each mouse button individually.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the mouse selection button, move the input<br /> focus to the pointer position or to the closest part of the<br /> window that can receive the input focus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid moving input focus to the pointer position when a user<br /> presses the mouse menu button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If pop-up menus are provided, allow a user using a 3-button<br /> mouse to select a choice from the pop-up menu with either the<br /> mouse selection button or mouse menu button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to all functions of an object using equivalent,<br /> though not necessarily identical, mouse and keyboard techniques.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign the mouse-button functions for a one-button, two-button,<br /> and three-button mouse as in the following tables:<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGSELECT" name="FIGSELECT"></a><a id="TBLSELECT" name="TBLSELECT"> _________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 186. Mouse Techniques for Selection |<br />|_________ _______ _______ __________ __________ _________|<br />| <b>Selectio|</b> <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | <b>techniqu|</b> <b>button</b>| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> | <b>action</b> | |<br /> | | <b>presse|</b> | <b>to</b> <b>begin</b> | <b>to</b> <b>end</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>selection</b>| <b>selection</b>| |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Point | Select|onNone | Click on | Not | Selected|state<br /> | selectio| | | any | applicabl| emphasis|<br /> | | | | object | | is |<br /> | | | | or | | displaye|<br /> | | | | choice | | on |<br /> | | | | that can | | object |<br /> | | | | be | | or |<br /> | | | | selected.| | choice. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Begin | Select|onNone | Click in | Not | Anchor |<br /> | point-to|endpoin| | list of | applicabl| point |<br /> | range | | | objects | | is set. |<br /> | (click) | | | or | | |<br /> | selectio| | | choices | | |<br /> | | | | that can | | |<br /> | | | | be | | |<br /> | | | | selected.| | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | End | Select|oShift | Click | Not | All |<br /> | point-to|endpoin| | elsewhere| applicabl| objects |<br /> | range | | | in list | | in |<br /> | (click) | | | of | | range |<br /> | selectio| | | objects | | are |<br /> | | | | or | | selected|<br /> | | | | choices | | |<br /> | | | | that can | | |<br /> | | | | be | | |<br /> | | | | selected.| | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Point-to|eSelect|onNone | Press | Release | All |<br /> | area | | | and hold | mouse | objects |<br /> | (marquee| | | mouse | button. | that |<br /> | selectio| | | button | | are |<br /> | | | | in blank | | fully |<br /> | | | | space, | | within |<br /> | | | | then | | the |<br /> | | | | drag | | marquee |<br /> | | | | until | | box are |<br /> | | | | all | | selected|<br /> | | | | desired | | |<br /> | | | | objects | | |<br /> | | | | are | | |<br /> | | | | within | | |<br /> | | | | the | | |<br /> | | | | marquee | | |<br /> | | | | box. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Random-p|iSelect|onNone | Press | Release | All |<br /> | selectio| | | mouse | mouse | items |<br /> | | | | button | button | passed |<br /> | | | | while | when | over by |<br /> | | | | pointer | pointer | mouse |<br /> | | | | is on an | is on | while |<br /> | | | | object, | last | mouse |<br /> | | | | then | object | button |<br /> | | | | move | to be | was |<br /> | | | | mouse | selected.| down |<br /> | | | | while | | are |<br /> | | | | holding | | selected|<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /> | Deselect| Select|onNone | Click in | Not | Selectio|<br /> | all | | | blank | applicabl| emphasis|<br /> | | | | space. | | is |<br /> | | | | | | removed |<br /> | | | | | | from |<br /> | | | | | | all |<br /> | | | | | | objects |<br /> | | | | | | or |<br /> | | | | | | choices |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|__________|__________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGDIRMAN1" name="FIGDIRMAN1"></a><a id="TBLDIRMAN1" name="TBLDIRMAN1"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 187. Mouse Techniques for Direct Manipulation for a |<br />| One-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Direct</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | <b>manipula|i</b>button| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | <b>techniqu|</b> <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>direct</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>direct</b> | <b>manipulatio|</b> |<br /> | | | | <b>manipulatio|</b> | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Move | Select|onNone | Press | Release | Object |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | is |<br /> | | | | button | button | moved |<br /> | | | | while | when | from |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | source |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | to |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | target. |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Select|oShift | Press | Release | Object |<br /> | Move | | | mouse | mouse | is |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | moved |<br /> | default)| | | while | when | from |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | source |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | to |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | target. |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Copy | Select|onNone | Press | Release | A copy |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | of the |<br /> | | | | button | button | source |<br /> | | | | while | when | object |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | is |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | placed |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | at the |<br /> | | | | then move | | target |<br /> | | | | mouse | | position|<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Select|onCtrl | Press | Release | A copy |<br /> | Copy | | | mouse | mouse | of the |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | source |<br /> | default)|when | | while | when | object |<br /> | create-o|-drag | | pointer is | pointer is | is |<br /> | is set | | | on an | on target | placed |<br /> | off | | | object, | object | at the |<br /> | | | | then move | | target |<br /> | | | | mouse | | position|<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Select|onCtrl | Press | Release | A new |<br /> | Create | | | mouse | mouse | object |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | is |<br /> | default)|when | | while | when | placed |<br /> | create-o|-drag | | pointer is | pointer is | at the |<br /> | is set | | | on an | on target | target |<br /> | on | | | object, | object | position|<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Incremen|aSelect|onNone | Click on | Not | Contents|<br /> | scrollin| | | scroll | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | button in | | window |<br /> | | | | scroll | | are |<br /> | | | | bar. | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | | | one |<br /> | | | | | | smallest|<br /> | | | | | | scrollin|<br /> | | | | | | incremen|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Page | Select|onNone | Click in | Not | Contents|<br /> | scrollin| | | scroll | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | shaft | | window |<br /> | | | | between | | are |<br /> | | | | scroll | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | button and | | one |<br /> | | | | scroll | | page |<br /> | | | | box. | | incremen|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Direct | Select|onNone | Drag | Not | Contents|<br /> | position|ng | | scroll box | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | to a | | window |<br /> | | | | different | | are |<br /> | | | | position | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | on scroll | | to |<br /> | | | | shaft. | | display |<br /> | | | | | | informat|on<br /> | | | | | | at |<br /> | | | | | | relative|<br /> | | | | | | position|<br /> | | | | | | indicate|<br /> | | | | | | by |<br /> | | | | | | scroll |<br /> | | | | | | box. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Split | Select|onNone | Drag split | Not | Window |<br /> | window | | | bar. | applicable | is |<br /> | | | | | | divided |<br /> | | | | | | into |<br /> | | | | | | multiple|<br /> | | | | | | panes. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGDIRMANT" name="FIGDIRMANT"></a><a id="TBLDIRMANT" name="TBLDIRMANT"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 188. Mouse Techniques for Direct Manipulation for a |<br />| Two-Button or Three-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Direct</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | <b>manipula|i</b>button| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | <b>techniqu|</b> <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>direct</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>direct</b> | <b>manipulatio|</b> |<br /> | | | | <b>manipulatio|</b> | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Move | Manipu|atNone | Press | Release | Object |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | is |<br /> | | | | button | button | moved |<br /> | | | | while | when | from |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | source |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | to |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | target. |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Manipu|aShift | Press | Release | Object |<br /> | Move | | | mouse | mouse | is |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | moved |<br /> | default)| | | while | when | from |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | source |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | to |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | target. |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Copy | Manipu|atNone | Press | Release | A copy |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | of the |<br /> | | | | button | button | source |<br /> | | | | while | when | object |<br /> | | | | pointer is | pointer is | is |<br /> | | | | on an | on target | placed |<br /> | | | | object, | object. | at the |<br /> | | | | then move | | target |<br /> | | | | mouse | | position|<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | the button | | |<br /> | | | | down. | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Manipu|atCtrl | Press | Release | A copy |<br /> | Copy | | | mouse | mouse | of the |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | source |<br /> | default)|when | | while | when | object |<br /> | create-o|-drag | | pointer is | pointer is | is |<br /> | is set | | | on an | on target | placed |<br /> | off | | | object, | object | at the |<br /> | | | | then move | | target |<br /> | | | | mouse | | position|<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Cause | Manipu|atCtrl | Press | Release | A new |<br /> | Create | | | mouse | mouse | object |<br /> | (overrid| | | button | button | is |<br /> | default)|when | | while | when | placed |<br /> | create-o|-drag | | pointer is | pointer is | at the |<br /> | is set | | | on an | on target | target |<br /> | on | | | object, | object | position|<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Incremen|aSelect|onNone | Click on | Not | Contents|<br /> | scrollin| | | scroll | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | button in | | window |<br /> | | | | scroll | | are |<br /> | | | | bar. | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | | | one |<br /> | | | | | | smallest|<br /> | | | | | | scrollin|<br /> | | | | | | incremen|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Page | Select|onNone | Click in | Not | Contents|<br /> | scrollin| | | scroll | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | shaft | | window |<br /> | | | | between | | are |<br /> | | | | scroll | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | button and | | one |<br /> | | | | scroll | | page |<br /> | | | | box. | | incremen|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Direct | Select|onNone | Drag | Not | Contents|<br /> | position|ng | | scroll box | applicable | of |<br /> | | | | to a | | window |<br /> | | | | different | | are |<br /> | | | | position | | scrolled|<br /> | | | | on scroll | | to |<br /> | | | | shaft. | | display |<br /> | | | | | | informat|on<br /> | | | | | | at |<br /> | | | | | | relative|<br /> | | | | | | position|<br /> | | | | | | indicate|<br /> | | | | | | by |<br /> | | | | | | scroll |<br /> | | | | | | box. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Split | Manipu|atNone | Drag split | Not | Window |<br /> | window | | | bar. | applicable | is |<br /> | | | | | | divided |<br /> | | | | | | into |<br /> | | | | | | multiple|<br /> | | | | | | panes. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMISC1" name="FIGMISC1"></a><a id="TBLMISC1" name="TBLMISC1"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 189. Mouse Techniques for Miscellaneous Actions for |<br />| a One-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Action</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | | <b>button</b>| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | | <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>action</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>action</b> | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Create | Select|oCtrl+S|iPress | Release | Create |<br /> | Reflecti|n | | mouse | mouse | a |<br /> | | | | button | button | reflecti|n<br /> | | | | while | | of the |<br /> | | | | pointer is | | object. |<br /> | | | | on an | | |<br /> | | | | object, | | |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Default | Select|onNone | Double-clic| Not | Default |<br /> | action | | | on an | applicable | action |<br /> | | | | object or | | for |<br /> | | | | choice. | | that |<br /> | | | | | | object |<br /> | | | | | | or |<br /> | | | | | | choice |<br /> | | | | | | is |<br /> | | | | | | carried |<br /> | | | | | | out. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Pop-up | Select|onAlt | Click or | Not | Pop-up |<br /> | menu | | | button-down| applicable | menu is |<br /> | | | | | | displaye|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMISC" name="FIGMISC"></a><a id="TBLMISC" name="TBLMISC"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 190. Mouse Techniques for Miscellaneous Actions for |<br />| a Two-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Action</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | | <b>button</b>| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | | <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>action</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>action</b> | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Create | Manipu|aCtrl+S|iPress | Release | Create |<br /> | Reflecti|n | | mouse | mouse | a |<br /> | | | | button | button | reflecti|n<br /> | | | | while | | of the |<br /> | | | | pointer is | | object. |<br /> | | | | on an | | |<br /> | | | | object, | | |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Default | Select|onNone | Double-clic| Not | Default |<br /> | action | | | on an | applicable | action |<br /> | | | | object or | | for |<br /> | | | | choice. | | that |<br /> | | | | | | object |<br /> | | | | | | or |<br /> | | | | | | choice |<br /> | | | | | | is |<br /> | | | | | | carried |<br /> | | | | | | out. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Pop-up | Select|onNone | Chord | Not | Pop-up |<br /> | menu | and | | mouse | applicable | menu is |<br /> | | Manipu|ation | buttons | | displaye|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | reserved| Manipu|atAlt | Press | Release | This |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | combinat|on<br /> | | | | button | button | is |<br /> | | | | while | | reserved|<br /> | | | | pointer is | | for |<br /> | | | | on an | | future |<br /> | | | | object, | | releases|<br /> | | | | then move | | of the |<br /> | | | | mouse | | CUA |<br /> | | | | while | | interfac|.<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMISC2" name="FIGMISC2"></a><a id="TBLMISC2" name="TBLMISC2"> _____________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 191. Mouse Techniques for Miscellaneous Actions for |<br />| a Three-Button Mouse |<br />|_________ _______ _______ ____________ ____________ _________|<br />| <b>Action</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Key</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>User</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> | | <b>button</b>| <b>presse|</b> <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | <b>action</b> <b>to</b> | |<br /> | | <b>presse|</b> | <b>begin</b> | <b>end</b> <b>action</b> | |<br /> | | | | <b>action</b> | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Create | Manipu|aCtrl+S|iPress | Release | Create |<br /> | Reflecti|n | | mouse | mouse | a |<br /> | | | | button | button | reflecti|n<br /> | | | | while | | of the |<br /> | | | | pointer is | | object. |<br /> | | | | on an | | |<br /> | | | | object, | | |<br /> | | | | then move | | |<br /> | | | | mouse | | |<br /> | | | | while | | |<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Default | Select|onNone | Double-clic| Not | Default |<br /> | action | | | on an | applicable | action |<br /> | | | | object or | | for |<br /> | | | | choice. | | that |<br /> | | | | | | object |<br /> | | | | | | or |<br /> | | | | | | choice |<br /> | | | | | | is |<br /> | | | | | | carried |<br /> | | | | | | out. |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | Pop-up | Menu | None | Click or | Not | Pop-up |<br /> | menu | | | button | applicable | menu is |<br /> | | | | down | | displaye|.<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /> | reserved| Manipu|atAlt | Press | Release | This |<br /> | | | | mouse | mouse | combinat|on<br /> | | | | button | button | is |<br /> | | | | while | | reserved|<br /> | | | | pointer is | | for |<br /> | | | | on an | | future |<br /> | | | | object, | | versions|<br /> | | | | then move | | of the |<br /> | | | | mouse | | CUA |<br /> | | | | while | | interfac|.<br /> | | | | holding | | |<br /> | | | | button | | |<br /> | | | | down | | |<br /> |_________|_______|_______|____________|____________|_________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3904 9427 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.23?DT=19921204095534#HDRDATATRN">"Data Transfer" in topic 2.2.23</a> 3905 9428 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.77?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTD">"Pointing Device" in topic 2.2.77</a> … … 3907 9430 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.24?DT=19921204095534#HDRDEFACT">"Default Action" in topic 2.2.24</a> 3908 9431 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a> 3909 </pre> 3910 <hr /> 3911 <a name="LEN Move (Choice)" /> 3912 <h2><a name="LEN Move (Choice)">2.2.65 Move (Choice)</a></h2> 3913 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that allows a user to move a window to a<br />different location.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3914 href="picture-229?mode=zoom"><img 3915 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P229.GIF" 3916 alt="PICTURE 229" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9432 </pre> 9433 9434 9435 9436 9437 9438 9439 9440 9441 9442 <hr /> 9443 <a name="LEN Move (Choice)"></a> 9444 9445 9446 9447 9448 <h2><a name="LEN Move (Choice)">2.2.65 Move (Choice)</a></h2> 9449 9450 9451 9452 9453 9454 9455 9456 9457 9458 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that allows a user to move a window to a<br />different location.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-229?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 229" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P229.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3917 9459 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Move</b> choice for each window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3918 9460 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place the <b>Move</b> choice in the system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Move</b> choice, use the operating<br /> environment's mechanism that allows a user to change the<br /> position of a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F7 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Move</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "M" as the mnemonic for the <b>Move</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 3920 9462 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3921 9463 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 3922 </pre> 3923 <hr /> 3924 <a name="LEN Multiple Selection" /> 3925 <h2><a name="LEN Multiple Selection">2.2.66 Multiple 9464 </pre> 9465 9466 9467 9468 9469 9470 9471 9472 9473 9474 <hr /> 9475 <a name="LEN Multiple Selection"></a> 9476 9477 9478 9479 9480 <h2><a name="LEN Multiple Selection">2.2.66 Multiple 3926 9481 Selection</a></h2> 3927 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A type of selection in which a user can select any number of<br />objects or settings choices, or not select any.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3928 href="picture-230?mode=zoom"><img 3929 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P230.GIF" 3930 alt="PICTURE 230" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9482 9483 9484 9485 9486 9487 9488 9489 9490 9491 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A type of selection in which a user can select any number of<br />objects or settings choices, or not select any.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-230?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 230" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P230.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3931 9492 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide multiple selection when more than one object can be<br /> operated on at a time and a user will typically select more than<br /> one object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide multiple selection when more than one settings choice<br /> can be applied to an object or group of objects at a time and a<br /> user will typically select more than one settings choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3932 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> For the following selection techniques, provide the mouse and<br /> keyboard access mechanisms as listed in <a 3933 href="2.2.66?DT=19921204095534#FIGMULT">Figure 192</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 3934 name="FIGMULT" id="FIGMULT" /><a name="TBLMULT" id="TBLMULT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 192. Multiple Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Toggles the |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | selection state |<br /> | | with pointer on | selected or | of the single |<br /> | | object to be | deselected, press | identified |<br /> | | selected or | Ctrl+Spacebar; | object; does not |<br /> | | deselected. | also spacebar if | affect the state |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | of other objects. |<br /> | | | used to type a | |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point-to-en|point | | |<br /> | selection | | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Area | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Marquee) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | | of the first |<br /> | | point and move | | object and make |<br /> | | the pointer to | | the selection |<br /> | | the end point; | | state of all |<br /> | | release the mouse | | objects within |<br /> | | selection button | | the identified |<br /> | | at the end point. | | area the same as |<br /> | | | | the new selection |<br /> | | | | state of the |<br /> | | | | first object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Press mouse | Press Shift at | Toggle the |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | the start point | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | and hold while | of the first |<br /> | | point and move | using | object and make |<br /> | | the pointer to | cursor-movement | the selection |<br /> | | the end point; | keys to move the | state of all |<br /> | | release the mouse | cursor to the end | other objects in |<br /> | | selection button | point; release | order from the |<br /> | | at the end point. | Shift at end | identified start |<br /> | | | point. | point to the |<br /> | | | | identified end |<br /> | | | | point the same as |<br /> | | | | the new selection |<br /> | | | | state of the |<br /> | | | | first object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Click mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Click) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | | of the first |<br /> | | point; press | | object and make |<br /> | | Shift and click | | the selection |<br /> | | the mouse | | state of all |<br /> | | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the end point, | | order from the |<br /> | | then release | | identified start |<br /> | | Shift key. | | point to the |<br /> | | | | identified |<br /> | | | | endpoint the same |<br /> | | | | as the new |<br /> | | | | selection state |<br /> | | | | of the first |<br /> | | | | object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Random-poin| | | |<br /> | selection | | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Random | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | with pointer on | | of the first |<br /> | | first object to | | object and make |<br /> | | be selected; | | the selection |<br /> | | move the pointer | | state of all |<br /> | | over other | | identified |<br /> | | objects to be | | objects in the |<br /> | | selected; release | | order the user |<br /> | | mouse selection | | identified the |<br /> | | button. | | objects the same |<br /> | | | | as the new |<br /> | | | | selection state |<br /> | | | | of the first |<br /> | | | | object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 9493 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> For the following selection techniques, provide the mouse and<br /> keyboard access mechanisms as listed in <a href="2.2.66?DT=19921204095534#FIGMULT">Figure 192</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMULT" name="FIGMULT"></a><a id="TBLMULT" name="TBLMULT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 192. Multiple Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Toggles the |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | selection state |<br /> | | with pointer on | selected or | of the single |<br /> | | object to be | deselected, press | identified |<br /> | | selected or | Ctrl+Spacebar; | object; does not |<br /> | | deselected. | also spacebar if | affect the state |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | of other objects. |<br /> | | | used to type a | |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point-to-en|point | | |<br /> | selection | | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Area | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Marquee) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | | of the first |<br /> | | point and move | | object and make |<br /> | | the pointer to | | the selection |<br /> | | the end point; | | state of all |<br /> | | release the mouse | | objects within |<br /> | | selection button | | the identified |<br /> | | at the end point. | | area the same as |<br /> | | | | the new selection |<br /> | | | | state of the |<br /> | | | | first object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Press mouse | Press Shift at | Toggle the |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | the start point | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | and hold while | of the first |<br /> | | point and move | using | object and make |<br /> | | the pointer to | cursor-movement | the selection |<br /> | | the end point; | keys to move the | state of all |<br /> | | release the mouse | cursor to the end | other objects in |<br /> | | selection button | point; release | order from the |<br /> | | at the end point. | Shift at end | identified start |<br /> | | | point. | point to the |<br /> | | | | identified end |<br /> | | | | point the same as |<br /> | | | | the new selection |<br /> | | | | state of the |<br /> | | | | first object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Click mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Click) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | | of the first |<br /> | | point; press | | object and make |<br /> | | Shift and click | | the selection |<br /> | | the mouse | | state of all |<br /> | | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the end point, | | order from the |<br /> | | then release | | identified start |<br /> | | Shift key. | | point to the |<br /> | | | | identified |<br /> | | | | endpoint the same |<br /> | | | | as the new |<br /> | | | | selection state |<br /> | | | | of the first |<br /> | | | | object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Random-poin| | | |<br /> | selection | | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Random | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | with pointer on | | of the first |<br /> | | first object to | | object and make |<br /> | | be selected; | | the selection |<br /> | | move the pointer | | state of all |<br /> | | over other | | identified |<br /> | | objects to be | | objects in the |<br /> | | selected; release | | order the user |<br /> | | mouse selection | | identified the |<br /> | | button. | | objects the same |<br /> | | | | as the new |<br /> | | | | selection state |<br /> | | | | of the first |<br /> | | | | object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3935 9494 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#HDREXSEL">"Extended Selection" in topic 2.2.34</a> 3936 9495 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.57?DT=19921204095534#HDRMARSEL">"Marquee Selection" in topic 2.2.57</a> … … 3943 9502 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 3944 9503 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 3945 </pre> 3946 <hr /> 3947 <a name="LEN New (Choice)" /> 3948 <h2><a name="LEN New (Choice)">2.2.67 New (Choice)</a></h2> 3949 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that allows a user to create a new object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3950 href="picture-231?mode=zoom"><img 3951 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P231.GIF" 3952 alt="PICTURE 231" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9504 </pre> 9505 9506 9507 9508 9509 9510 9511 9512 9513 9514 <hr /> 9515 <a name="LEN New (Choice)"></a> 9516 9517 9518 9519 9520 <h2><a name="LEN New (Choice)">2.2.67 New (Choice)</a></h2> 9521 9522 9523 9524 9525 9526 9527 9528 9529 9530 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that allows a user to create a new object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-231?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 231" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P231.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3953 9531 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>New</b> choice for any application for which a user can<br /> create a new object from and replace the current window's<br /> contents with that new object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3954 9532 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>New</b> choice, and you provide an<br /> application-oriented <b>File</b> menu, place the <b>New</b> choice in the<br /> application-oriented <b>File</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>New</b> choice, do the following:<br /><br /><br />° Prompt the user with a message to save any unsaved data in<br />the object displayed in the window.<br /><br /><br />° Remove the existing information from the current window and<br />replace it with the new object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Generate a name for each newly created object. Make the name<br /> unique if the operating environment requires a unique name, for<br /> example, create a unique name by appending a number to the name<br /> of the object it was created from.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "N" as the mnemonic for the <b>New</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3955 9533 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.36?DT=19921204095534#HDRFILE">"File Menu (Application-Oriented)" in topic 2.2.36</a> 3956 9534 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWT">"Window Title" in topic 2.2.135</a> 3957 </pre> 3958 <hr /> 3959 <a name="LEN Notebook (Control)" /> 3960 <h2><a name="LEN Notebook (Control)">2.2.68 Notebook 9535 </pre> 9536 9537 9538 9539 9540 9541 9542 9543 9544 9545 <hr /> 9546 <a name="LEN Notebook (Control)"></a> 9547 9548 9549 9550 9551 <h2><a name="LEN Notebook (Control)">2.2.68 Notebook 3961 9552 (Control)</a></h2> 3962 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that resembles a bound notebook that contains pages<br />separated into sections by tabbed divider-pages. It allows a<br />user to turn the pages of the notebook and to move from one<br />section to another.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3963 href="picture-232?mode=zoom"><img 3964 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P232.GIF" 3965 alt="PICTURE 232" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9553 9554 9555 9556 9557 9558 9559 9560 9561 9562 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that resembles a bound notebook that contains pages<br />separated into sections by tabbed divider-pages. It allows a<br />user to turn the pages of the notebook and to move from one<br />section to another.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-232?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 232" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P232.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3966 9563 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a notebook to present settings choices to be applied to an<br /> object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a notebook to present data that can be logically organized<br /> into groups. For example, use a notebook to present a clip-art<br /> library that is organized alphabetically or by subject.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3967 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place within a single tabbed section information that is<br /> related.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a section has more than one page, indicate the page number<br /> within that section.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Label tabbed-divider pages with either text or graphics, or a<br /> combination of both.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Order tabs so that they initially appear to go deeper from left<br /> to right, and top to bottom.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign a mnemonic to a tabbed-divider page that is labeled with<br /> text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Design each tabbed-divider page to have approximately the same<br /> proportions, to present a balanced appearance.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not place a notebook within a notebook.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place at the bottom of the window, outside of the notebook, push<br /> buttons that affect the entire notebook. For example, provide a<br /> <b>Reset</b> push button to allow a user to return all settings choices<br /> on every page of a notebook to their last applied state.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place on the page of a notebook push buttons that affect only<br /> that page. For example, provide a <b>Reset</b> push button to allow a<br /> user to return all settings choices on the currently displayed<br /> page to their last applied state.<br /><br /><br /><a 3968 href="picture-233?mode=zoom"><img 3969 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P233.GIF" 3970 alt="PICTURE 233" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 9564 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place within a single tabbed section information that is<br /> related.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a section has more than one page, indicate the page number<br /> within that section.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Label tabbed-divider pages with either text or graphics, or a<br /> combination of both.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Order tabs so that they initially appear to go deeper from left<br /> to right, and top to bottom.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign a mnemonic to a tabbed-divider page that is labeled with<br /> text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Design each tabbed-divider page to have approximately the same<br /> proportions, to present a balanced appearance.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not place a notebook within a notebook.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place at the bottom of the window, outside of the notebook, push<br /> buttons that affect the entire notebook. For example, provide a<br /> <b>Reset</b> push button to allow a user to return all settings choices<br /> on every page of a notebook to their last applied state.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place on the page of a notebook push buttons that affect only<br /> that page. For example, provide a <b>Reset</b> push button to allow a<br /> user to return all settings choices on the currently displayed<br /> page to their last applied state.<br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-233?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 233" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P233.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 3971 9565 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 3972 9566 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a> … … 3975 9569 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 3976 9570 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 3977 </pre> 3978 <hr /> 3979 <a name="LEN Object" /> 3980 <h2><a name="LEN Object">2.2.69 Object</a></h2> 3981 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An item that can be manipulated as a unit and that a user works<br />with to perform a task. An object can be represented as text,<br />image, graphic, video, or audio.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 3982 href="picture-234?mode=zoom"><img 3983 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P234.GIF" 3984 alt="PICTURE 234" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9571 </pre> 9572 9573 9574 9575 9576 9577 9578 9579 9580 9581 <hr /> 9582 <a name="LEN Object"></a> 9583 9584 9585 9586 9587 <h2><a name="LEN Object">2.2.69 Object</a></h2> 9588 9589 9590 9591 9592 9593 9594 9595 9596 9597 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An item that can be manipulated as a unit and that a user works<br />with to perform a task. An object can be represented as text,<br />image, graphic, video, or audio.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-234?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 234" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P234.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 3985 9598 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an object to allow a user to manipulate a group of<br /> information as a unit to perform a task.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 3986 9599 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user places an object on the workplace, use an icon to<br /> represent that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow each object to support interaction with the standard<br /> objects provided by the operating environment. For example,<br /> allow each object to interact with a printer.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow each object to support standard data-transfer operations,<br /> such as <b>Cut,</b> <b>Copy,</b> and <b>Paste,</b> with objects provided by other<br /> products.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to display a view of an object in a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to display more than one view of an object at the<br /> same time. For example, allow a user to see an icons view of a<br /> container in one window and a settings view of the same<br /> container in another window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Design each object to support direct manipulation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a pop-up menu for each object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an object can be placed on the workplace, do not prevent that<br /> object from being placed in other containers that can contain<br /> any type of object. For example, if an object can be placed on<br /> the workplace, allow a user to place that object in a<br /> system-provided folder that can contain any type of object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you want a view of an object to be displayed in a window that<br /> is opened, closed, minimized, maximized, restored, or moved<br /> independently of all other windows on the workplace, use a<br /> primary window to display a view of the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you want a view of an object to be displayed in a window that<br /> is opened, closed, minimized, maximized, restored, or moved when<br /> another window (other than a work area window) is opened,<br /> closed, minimized, maximized, restored, or moved, use a<br /> secondary window to display a view of the object and make the<br /> secondary window dependent on a primary window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user closes a window that contains a view of an object,<br /> save the state of the object and the state of the view. For<br /> example, save the size and position of the window as well as the<br /> scrolling location, cursor position, and selection state of the<br /> contents.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window to a particular view of an object or<br /> restores a minimized window, restore the window to its previous<br /> state, if state information is available, regardless of the<br /> amount of time that has elapsed since the user last opened or<br /> restored the window, and regardless of whether the user's system<br /> has been turned off and on again.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide product information about each object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access from both the keyboard and the pointing device to<br /> product-specific functions that can be performed on an object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a name for an object, allow a user to change that<br /> name.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow all objects that can appear on the workplace to have<br /> reflections.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Generate a name for each newly created object. Make the name<br /> unique if the operating environment requires a unique name, for<br /> example, create a unique name by appending a number to the name<br /> of the object it was created from.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a folder containing sample objects from which users can<br /> create new objects. Make the create-on-drag setting the initial<br /> setting for the objects in the folder. For example, provide a<br /> folder named "New Forms" containing initialized versions of<br /> frequently-used forms.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 3994 9607 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.83?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRODINF">"Product Information (Choice)" in topic 2.2.83</a> 3995 9608 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.136?DT=19921204095534#HDRWRKAREA">"Work Area (Object)" in topic 2.2.136</a> 3996 </pre> 3997 <hr /> 3998 <a name="LEN Open (Choice)" /> 3999 <h2><a name="LEN Open (Choice)">2.2.70 Open (Choice)</a></h2> 4000 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A routing choice that displays a window that allows a user to<br />specify an object to be opened in the window from which the<br /><b>Open...</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4001 href="picture-235?mode=zoom"><img 4002 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P235.GIF" 4003 alt="PICTURE 235" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9609 </pre> 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616 9617 9618 9619 <hr /> 9620 <a name="LEN Open (Choice)"></a> 9621 9622 9623 9624 9625 <h2><a name="LEN Open (Choice)">2.2.70 Open (Choice)</a></h2> 9626 9627 9628 9629 9630 9631 9632 9633 9634 9635 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A routing choice that displays a window that allows a user to<br />specify an object to be opened in the window from which the<br /><b>Open...</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-235?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 235" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P235.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4004 9636 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Open</b> choice for objects designed for application-<br /> oriented environments to allow a user to display another object<br /> of the same type in the window from which the <b>Open</b> choice was<br /> selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4005 9637 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide an <b>Open</b> choice, and you provide an<br /> application-oriented <b>File</b> menu, place the <b>Open</b> choice in the<br /> application-oriented <b>File</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Open</b> choice, display the <b>Open</b> action<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "O" as the mnemonic for the <b>Open</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4008 9640 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4009 9641 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 4010 </pre> 4011 <hr /> 4012 <a name="LEN Open As (Choice)" /> 4013 <h2><a name="LEN Open As (Choice)">2.2.71 Open As (Choice)</a></h2> 4014 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing the named<br />view, for example, <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>(view)</b>. Or, when several views are<br /> available, it is a routing choice that leads to a cascaded menu<br /> containing the names of the view choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4015 href="picture-236?mode=zoom"><img 4016 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P236.GIF" 4017 alt="PICTURE 236" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4018 href="picture-237?mode=zoom"><img 4019 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P237.GIF" 4020 alt="PICTURE 237" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9642 </pre> 9643 9644 9645 9646 9647 9648 9649 9650 9651 9652 <hr /> 9653 <a name="LEN Open As (Choice)"></a> 9654 9655 9656 9657 9658 <h2><a name="LEN Open As (Choice)">2.2.71 Open As 9659 (Choice)</a></h2> 9660 9661 9662 9663 9664 9665 9666 9667 9668 9669 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing the named<br />view, for example, <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>(view)</b>. Or, when several views are<br /> available, it is a routing choice that leads to a cascaded menu<br /> containing the names of the view choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-236?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 236" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P236.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-237?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 237" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P237.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4021 9670 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice to allow a user to open a selected<br /> object or group of selected objects in a new window to a<br /> specific view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice to allow a user to open the underlying<br /> object in a window to another view in a new window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a settings view is displayed with a notebook, provide a<br /> cascaded menu from the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>settings</b> choice that provides<br /> direct access to each tabbed-divider page in the notebook.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4022 9671 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice, place it in the <b>Selected</b> menu<br /> if the <b>Selected</b> menu is provided to allow a user to open a<br /> selected object or group of objects to a specified view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If at least one view for an object is available and if a pop-up<br /> menu is provided, place the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice in the pop-up menu<br /> for that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice in the object-oriented <b>File</b> menu if the<br /> object-oriented <b>File</b> menu is provided and your users must<br /> frequently open new windows on the underlying object and require<br /> the flexibility to open a user-specified view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an object has more than three views, make the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice<br /> a cascading choice and place the view names in the cascaded<br /> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a cascaded menu is not used to list the names of the<br /> available views, then for each view, label a choice in the menu<br /> with the name of the view appended to the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice. For<br /> example, show a choice labeled <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> <b>settings.</b> … … 4031 9680 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.99?DT=19921204095534#HDRSECWIND">"Secondary Window" in topic 2.2.99</a> 4032 9681 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 4033 </pre> 4034 <hr /> 4035 <a name="LEN Open (Action Window)" /> 4036 <h2><a name="LEN Open (Action Window)">2.2.72 Open (Action 9682 </pre> 9683 9684 9685 9686 9687 9688 9689 9690 9691 9692 <hr /> 9693 <a name="LEN Open (Action Window)"></a> 9694 9695 9696 9697 9698 <h2><a name="LEN Open (Action Window)">2.2.72 Open 9699 (Action 4037 9700 Window)</a></h2> 4038 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that appears from the routing choice <b>Open</b> that allows a<br /> user to select an object to open.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4039 href="picture-238?mode=zoom"><img 4040 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P238.GIF" 4041 alt="PICTURE 238" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9701 9702 9703 9704 9705 9706 9707 9708 9709 9710 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that appears from the routing choice <b>Open</b> that allows a<br /> user to select an object to open.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-238?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 238" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P238.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4042 9711 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Open</b> window when a user selects the <b>Open</b> choice in<br /> the application-oriented <b>File</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4043 9712 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the <b>Open</b> window in a secondary window that is dependent<br /> upon the window from which the <b>Open</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an entry field to allow a user to type the name of an<br /> object to be opened.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a drop-down list that allows a user to display a list of<br /> file types that can be opened.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a drop-down list that allows a user to specify the<br /> storage device, such as the A:, B:, or C: drive.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a list box of appropriate containers, such as<br /> directories. Use a filled in greater-than symbol (ÿ) to the<br /> left of the current container, and show the containment<br /> hierarchy by indenting containers that are within another<br /> container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide in a list box the names of all objects that are in the<br /> specified container, and on the specified storage device, that<br /> match the specified type.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign the default action, such as double-click, for an object<br /> in the list of objects to open the selected object into the same<br /> window from which the <b>Open</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign the default action, such as double-click, for a container<br /> in the list of containers to display or refresh the list of<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects an object from the list of objects, insert<br /> the name of the selected object into the entry field that<br /> displays the object name.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Cancel</b> push button to allow a user to close the <b>Open</b><br />window without opening a new object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide an <b>Open</b> push button to allow a user to open the<br /> specified object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a push button labeled <b>Help.</b> … … 4051 9720 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.56?DT=19921204095534#HDRLISTBX">"List Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.56</a> 4052 9721 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 4053 </pre> 4054 <hr /> 4055 <a name="LEN Options Menu" /> 4056 <h2><a name="LEN Options Menu">2.2.73 Options Menu</a></h2> 4057 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Options</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that allow a user to customize the functions of<br /> an application.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4058 href="picture-239?mode=zoom"><img 4059 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P239.GIF" 4060 alt="PICTURE 239" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9722 </pre> 9723 9724 9725 9726 9727 9728 9729 9730 9731 9732 <hr /> 9733 <a name="LEN Options Menu"></a> 9734 9735 9736 9737 9738 <h2><a name="LEN Options Menu">2.2.73 Options Menu</a></h2> 9739 9740 9741 9742 9743 9744 9745 9746 9747 9748 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Options</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that allow a user to customize the functions of<br /> an application.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-239?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 239" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P239.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4061 9749 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an <b>Options</b> choice on the menu bar in each window that<br /> provides a menu bar and a user can tailor the appearance or<br /> behavior of the product.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4062 9750 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide choices that are specific to a product, not specific to<br /> a particular view or object. For view-specific options, use the<br /> <b>View</b> pull-down. For object-specific options, provide an object<br /> setting.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "O" as the mnemonic for the <b>Options</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4065 9753 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.107?DT=19921204095534#HDRSFMENUS">"Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)" in topic 2.2.107</a> 4066 9754 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.120?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOOLP">"Tool Palette" in topic 2.2.120</a> 4067 </pre> 4068 <hr /> 4069 <a name="LEN Paste (Choice)" /> 4070 <h2><a name="LEN Paste (Choice)">2.2.74 Paste (Choice)</a></h2> 4071 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that places a copy of the contents of the<br />clipboard into an indicated object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4072 href="picture-240?mode=zoom"><img 4073 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P240.GIF" 4074 alt="PICTURE 240" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9755 </pre> 9756 9757 9758 9759 9760 9761 9762 9763 9764 9765 <hr /> 9766 <a name="LEN Paste (Choice)"></a> 9767 9768 9769 9770 9771 <h2><a name="LEN Paste (Choice)">2.2.74 Paste 9772 (Choice)</a></h2> 9773 9774 9775 9776 9777 9778 9779 9780 9781 9782 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that places a copy of the contents of the<br />clipboard into an indicated object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-240?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 240" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P240.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4075 9783 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Paste</b> choice for all objects that can be modified by a<br /> user.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4076 9784 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Paste</b> choice, and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Paste</b> choice in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Paste</b> choice for an object, place the <b>Paste</b><br />choice in the pop-up menu for the object when the object on the<br />clipboard can currently be copied into the object with the <b>Paste</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Paste</b> choice from a pop-up menu, then<br /> add, insert, or combine the source object into the target object<br /> as appropriate.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Paste</b> choice in a window, place the<br /> source object at the current location of the cursor in the<br /> target object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Paste</b> choice in a window, and no cursor<br /> is provided, place the source object at the current position of<br /> the pointer in the target object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Paste</b> choice in a window and the cursor<br /> is positioned on or adjacent to selected text, replace the<br /> selected text with the source object; otherwise, insert the<br /> source object at the current position of the cursor.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Paste</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when<br /> the clipboard is empty or when the contents cannot be pasted at<br /> the indicated position.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Generate a name for each newly created object. Make the name<br /> unique if the operating environment requires a unique name, for<br /> example, create a unique name by appending a number to the name<br /> of the object it was created from.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "P" as the mnemonic for the <b>Paste</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Shift+Insert as the shortcut key combination for the<br /> <b>Paste</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4084 9792 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a> 4085 9793 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.80?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTXTM">"Pop-Up Menu" in topic 2.2.80</a> 4086 </pre> 4087 <hr /> 4088 <a name="LEN Pointer" /> 4089 <h2><a name="LEN Pointer">2.2.75 Pointer</a></h2> 4090 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The symbol, usually in the shape of an arrow, that is displayed<br />on the screen and is moved by a pointing device, such as a<br />mouse. It is used to point to choices and objects that a user<br />wants to select or otherwise interact with. A position on the<br />pointer called the hot spot indicates where interaction will<br />occur.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4091 href="picture-241?mode=zoom"><img 4092 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P241.GIF" 4093 alt="PICTURE 241" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9794 </pre> 9795 9796 9797 9798 9799 9800 9801 9802 9803 9804 <hr /> 9805 <a name="LEN Pointer"></a> 9806 9807 9808 9809 9810 <h2><a name="LEN Pointer">2.2.75 Pointer</a></h2> 9811 9812 9813 9814 9815 9816 9817 9818 9819 9820 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The symbol, usually in the shape of an arrow, that is displayed<br />on the screen and is moved by a pointing device, such as a<br />mouse. It is used to point to choices and objects that a user<br />wants to select or otherwise interact with. A position on the<br />pointer called the hot spot indicates where interaction will<br />occur.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-241?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 241" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P241.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4094 9821 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a pointer whenever pointing device support is enabled by<br /> the operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4095 9822 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When no other object-specific or task-specific pointer is<br /> displayed, display the arrow pointer.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Move the pointer only when a user moves the pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display a pointer that a user can associate with an action or<br /> set of actions that can be performed within the current context.<br /> For example, augment the pointer with a rectangle when a user<br /> selects a rectangle-drawing tool from a tool palette.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place the pointer hot spot as follows:<br /><br /><br />° Place the pointer hot spot in the upper left-hand corner of<br />the pointer image.<br /><br /><br />° If a user would typically expect the pointer hot spot in a<br />position other than the upper-lefthand corner of the pointer<br />image, place the pointer hot spot where the user would<br />typically expect it. For example, if you provide a<br />crosshair pointer, place the hot spot at the intersection of<br />the two lines, rather than in the upper-lefthand corner of<br />the pointer image.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use the predefined pointer when a user performs a predefined<br /> operation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4099 9826 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 4100 9827 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.77?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTD">"Pointing Device" in topic 2.2.77</a> 4101 </pre> 4102 <hr /> 4103 <a name="LEN Pointer (Predefined)" /> 4104 <h2><a name="LEN Pointer (Predefined)">2.2.76 Pointer 9828 </pre> 9829 9830 9831 9832 9833 9834 9835 9836 9837 9838 <hr /> 9839 <a name="LEN Pointer (Predefined)"></a> 9840 9841 9842 9843 9844 <h2><a name="LEN Pointer (Predefined)">2.2.76 9845 Pointer 4105 9846 (Predefined)</a></h2> 4106 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Pointers used for predefined operations.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4107 href="picture-242?mode=zoom"><img 4108 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P242.GIF" 4109 alt="PICTURE 242" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9847 9848 9849 9850 9851 9852 9853 9854 9855 9856 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Pointers used for predefined operations.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-242?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 242" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P242.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4110 9857 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the move pointer to indicate that the result of the<br /> direct-manipulation operation will be a move.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the copy pointer to indicate that the result of the<br /> direct-manipulation operation will be a copy.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the do-not pointer to indicate that the target object is<br /> not a valid target for the direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the I-beam pointer to indicate that the pointer is over<br /> an area where text can be typed or selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a wait pointer to indicate that the user cannot<br /> currently interact with the component the pointer is over.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4111 9858 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Make the move pointer the default pointer.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user cannot interact with a component because a process is<br /> affecting that component, display the wait pointer while the<br /> pointer is over that component. Do not prevent a user from<br /> interacting with components that are not affected by the process<br /> that is running.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the user uses a pointing device for selection in text that<br /> can be edited, place the text cursor at the pointer position<br /> when the user clicks the selection button.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4116 9863 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.33?DT=19921204095534#HDRENTRY">"Entry Field (Control)" in topic 2.2.33</a> 4117 9864 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#HDRTEXT">"Text Entry" in topic 2.2.119</a> 4118 </pre> 4119 <hr /> 4120 <a name="LEN Pointing Device" /> 4121 <h2><a name="LEN Pointing Device">2.2.77 Pointing Device</a></h2> 4122 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A device, such as a mouse, trackball, or joystick, used to move<br />a pointer on the screen.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9865 </pre> 9866 9867 9868 9869 9870 9871 9872 9873 9874 9875 <hr /> 9876 <a name="LEN Pointing Device"></a> 9877 9878 9879 9880 9881 <h2><a name="LEN Pointing Device">2.2.77 Pointing 9882 Device</a></h2> 9883 9884 9885 9886 9887 9888 9889 9890 9891 9892 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A device, such as a mouse, trackball, or joystick, used to move<br />a pointer on the screen.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4123 9893 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide support for a pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Support one-button, two-button, and three-button mouse pointing<br /> devices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4124 9894 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide access to all functions of an object using equivalent,<br /> though not necessarily identical, pointing device and keyboard<br /> techniques.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4127 9897 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 4128 9898 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a> 4129 </pre> 4130 <hr /> 4131 <a name="LEN Point Selection" /> 4132 <h2><a name="LEN Point Selection">2.2.78 Point Selection</a></h2> 4133 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A selection technique that allows a user to select a single<br />object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4134 href="picture-243?mode=zoom"><img 4135 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P243.GIF" 4136 alt="PICTURE 243" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9899 </pre> 9900 9901 9902 9903 9904 9905 9906 9907 9908 9909 <hr /> 9910 <a name="LEN Point Selection"></a> 9911 9912 9913 9914 9915 <h2><a name="LEN Point Selection">2.2.78 Point 9916 Selection</a></h2> 9917 9918 9919 9920 9921 9922 9923 9924 9925 9926 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A selection technique that allows a user to select a single<br />object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-243?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 243" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P243.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4137 9927 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide point selection for single, multiple, and extended<br /> selection.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4138 9928 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In single selection mode:<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse, when the user presses the mouse selection<br />button, deselect the currently-selected object and select<br />the object the pointer is on.<br /><br /><br />° Using the keyboard, when the user presses Spacebar, deselect<br />the currently-selected object and select the object the<br />cursor is on.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In multiple selection mode:<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse, when the user presses the mouse selection<br />button, toggle the selection state of the object or group of<br />objects the pointer is on. The selection state of all other<br />objects are not affected.<br /><br /><br />° Using the keyboard, when the user presses Spacebar, toggle<br />the selection state of the object or group of objects the<br />cursor is on. The selection state of all other objects are<br />not affected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In extended selection mode:<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse, when the user presses the mouse selection<br />button, deselect the currently-selected object or group of<br />objects and select the object the pointer is on.<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse while holding the Ctrl key, when the user<br />presses the mouse selection button, toggle the selection<br />state of the object or group of objects the pointer is on.<br />The selection state of all other objects are not affected.<br /><br /><br />° Using the keyboard, when the user presses Spacebar, deselect<br />the currently-selected object or group of objects and select<br />the object the cursor is on.<br /><br /><br />° Using the keyboard after pressing Shift+F8, when the user<br />presses spacebar, toggle the selection state of the object<br />or group of objects the cursor is on. The selection state<br />of all other objects are not affected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4141 9931 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.79?DT=19921204095534#HDRRANSEL">"Point-to-Endpoint Selection" in topic 2.2.79</a> 4142 9932 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.89?DT=19921204095534#HDRTSWPSEL">"Random-Point Selection" in topic 2.2.89</a> 4143 </pre> 4144 <hr /> 4145 <a name="LEN Point-to-Endpoint Selection" /> 4146 <h2><a name="LEN Point-to-Endpoint Selection">2.2.79 9933 </pre> 9934 9935 9936 9937 9938 9939 9940 9941 9942 9943 <hr /> 9944 <a name="LEN Point-to-Endpoint Selection"></a> 9945 9946 9947 9948 9949 <h2><a name="LEN Point-to-Endpoint Selection">2.2.79 4147 9950 Point-to-Endpoint Selection</a></h2> 4148 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Selection techniques in which a user selects objects by<br />specifying a beginning point and an end point. The three<br />implementations of point-to-endpoint selection are range<br />(click), range (swipe), and area (marquee).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4149 href="picture-244?mode=zoom"><img 4150 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P244.GIF" 4151 alt="PICTURE 244" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4152 href="picture-245?mode=zoom"><img 4153 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P245.GIF" 4154 alt="PICTURE 245" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9951 9952 9953 9954 9955 9956 9957 9958 9959 9960 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Selection techniques in which a user selects objects by<br />specifying a beginning point and an end point. The three<br />implementations of point-to-endpoint selection are range<br />(click), range (swipe), and area (marquee).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-244?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 244" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P244.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-245?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 245" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P245.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4155 9961 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide one or more point-to-endpoint-selection techniques in<br /> extended selection and multiple selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4156 9962 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a keyboard user to press Shift+F8 to establish a mode in<br /> which the new selected objects are added or removed from the<br /> current group of selected objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In extended selection mode:<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse for an area, the user presses the mouse<br />selection button to deselect all other objects in the<br />selection scope and to select all objects contained within<br />the identified area.<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse for a range while holding the Ctrl key, the<br />user presses the mouse selection button to deselect all<br />other objects in the selection scope and select all objects<br />in order from the start point to the identified end point.<br /><br /><br />° Using the keyboard for a range, the user presses Shift at<br />the start point and moves the cursor to the end point to<br />deselect all other objects in the selection scope and to<br />select all objects in order from the start point to the<br />identified end point.<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse and keyboard for a range, the user presses<br />the mouse selection button at the start point and presses<br />Shift and the mouse selection button at the end point to<br />deselect all other objects in the selection scope and to<br />select all objects in order from the identified start point<br />to the identified end point.<br /><br /><br />° Using the keyboard after pressing Shift+F8, the user presses<br />Spacebar to toggle the selection state of the object the<br />cursor is on.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the marquee box only during selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display selected-state emphasis on each object as soon as it is<br /> completely contained within the marquee box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display selected-state emphasis on each icon as soon as the<br /> icon's graphic is completely contained within the marquee box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display selected-state emphasis on each object as soon as the<br /> pointer passes over it when performing range (swipe) selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4160 9966 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.78?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIMPSEL">"Point Selection" in topic 2.2.78</a> 4161 9967 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.89?DT=19921204095534#HDRTSWPSEL">"Random-Point Selection" in topic 2.2.89</a> 4162 </pre> 4163 <hr /> 4164 <a name="LEN Pop-Up Menu" /> 4165 <h2><a name="LEN Pop-Up Menu">2.2.80 Pop-Up Menu</a></h2> 4166 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A menu that is displayed next to, and contains choices<br />appropriate for, a given object or set of objects in their<br />current context, such as the container it is contained in, what<br />other objects are selected, and what it contains.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4167 href="picture-246?mode=zoom"><img 4168 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P246.GIF" 4169 alt="PICTURE 246" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 9968 </pre> 9969 9970 9971 9972 9973 9974 9975 9976 9977 9978 <hr /> 9979 <a name="LEN Pop-Up Menu"></a> 9980 9981 9982 9983 9984 <h2><a name="LEN Pop-Up Menu">2.2.80 Pop-Up Menu</a></h2> 9985 9986 9987 9988 9989 9990 9991 9992 9993 9994 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A menu that is displayed next to, and contains choices<br />appropriate for, a given object or set of objects in their<br />current context, such as the container it is contained in, what<br />other objects are selected, and what it contains.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-246?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 246" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P246.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4170 9995 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a pop-up menu for each object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4171 9996 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not change the state of a window or an object when a pop-up<br /> menu is displayed. For example, do not change the selection<br /> state of any object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If pop-up menus are provided, allow a user to display the pop-up<br /> menu:<br /><br /><br />° Using the keyboard by pressing Shift+F10 when the cursor is<br />on the object.<br /><br /><br />° Using a one-button mouse by pressing Alt+mouse selection<br />button when the pointer is over the object.<br /><br /><br />° Using a two-button mouse by chording the mouse selection and<br />manipulation buttons when the pointer is over the object.<br /><br /><br />° Using a three-button mouse by pressing the mouse menu button<br />when the pointer is over the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user requests a pop-up menu using the keyboard, place the<br /> pop-up menu centered and to the right of the object from which<br /> it was requested, if possible; otherwise, place it near the<br /> object as space allows, but not covering the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user requests a pop-up menu using a pointing device,<br /> place the pop-up menu centered and to the right of the pointer,<br /> if possible; otherwise, place it near the pointer as space<br /> allows, but not covering the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place the cursor on a choice near the middle of a pop-up menu<br /> when the menu is first displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Continue to display a pop-up menu until a user selects a choice<br /> (other than a cascading choice) from the pop-up menu, presses<br /> the cancel key, or until a user initiates an action outside the<br /> scope of the pop-up menu, such as displaying a pop-up menu for<br /> another object or clicking a button on the pointing device while<br /> the pointer is not over the pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user requests a pop-up menu from one of a group of<br /> selected objects, display in the pop-up menu only those choices<br /> that are applicable to all of the selected objects in the group.<br /> When a user selects a choice in the pop-up menu, apply the<br /> selected choice to each of the selected objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If pop-up menus are provided for an object, allow a user to<br /> display the pop-up menu on an object whether or not the object<br /> is selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a choice in a pop-up menu is not currently available, do not<br /> include it in the menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place choices in a pop-up menu in the following order:<br /><br /><br />° Choices that open a window on an object, such as <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> or<br /> <b>Help.</b> … … 4179 10004 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 4180 10005 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 4181 </pre> 4182 <hr /> 4183 <a name="LEN Primary Window" /> 4184 <h2><a name="LEN Primary Window">2.2.81 Primary Window</a></h2> 4185 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window in which the main interaction between a user and an<br />object takes place. A primary window is used to present<br />information that is used independently from information in all<br />other windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4186 href="picture-247?mode=zoom"><img 4187 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P247.GIF" 4188 alt="PICTURE 247" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10006 </pre> 10007 10008 10009 10010 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 <hr /> 10017 <a name="LEN Primary Window"></a> 10018 10019 10020 10021 10022 <h2><a name="LEN Primary Window">2.2.81 Primary 10023 Window</a></h2> 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030 10031 10032 10033 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window in which the main interaction between a user and an<br />object takes place. A primary window is used to present<br />information that is used independently from information in all<br />other windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-247?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 247" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P247.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4189 10034 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a primary window to display a view of an object that is<br /> independent of all other windows (except work areas) with<br /> respect to the closing, opening, minimizing, and restoring<br /> actions.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a primary window to display all views of objects opened from<br /> the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4190 10035 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a primary window is opened or restored, restore its<br /> associated secondary windows.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a primary window is closed or minimized, remove its<br /> secondary windows.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a view of an object to be displayed in multiple primary<br /> windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4191 10036 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.99?DT=19921204095534#HDRSECWIND">"Secondary Window" in topic 2.2.99</a> 4192 10037 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 4193 </pre> 4194 <hr /> 4195 <a name="LEN Print (Choice)" /> 4196 <h2><a name="LEN Print (Choice)">2.2.82 Print (Choice)</a></h2> 4197 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action or routing choice that causes an object to be printed.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4198 href="picture-248?mode=zoom"><img 4199 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P248.GIF" 4200 alt="PICTURE 248" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10038 </pre> 10039 10040 10041 10042 10043 10044 10045 10046 10047 10048 <hr /> 10049 <a name="LEN Print (Choice)"></a> 10050 10051 10052 10053 10054 <h2><a name="LEN Print (Choice)">2.2.82 Print 10055 (Choice)</a></h2> 10056 10057 10058 10059 10060 10061 10062 10063 10064 10065 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action or routing choice that causes an object to be printed.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-248?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 248" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P248.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4201 10066 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Print</b> choice for all printable objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4202 10067 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Print</b> choice and you provide a <b>File</b> menu, place<br /> the <b>Print</b> choice in the <b>File</b> menu if the underlying object can<br /> be printed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Print</b> choice and you provide a <b>Selected</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Print</b> choice in the <b>Selected</b> menu if the selected<br /> object can be printed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If more than one printer is connected to a user's system, allow<br /> the user to designate the printer to be used. For example,<br /> provide a list of printers in a cascaded menu or in an action<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If additional information is required before an object can be<br /> printed, allow a user to specify that information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access from any object to any printer object through<br /> direct manipulation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Print</b> choice in the:<br /><br /><br />° <b>File</b> menu, print the view in the window.<br /> ° <b>Selected</b> menu, print the default print view.<br /> ° Pop-up menu, print the default print view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user drags an icon (other than the small icon in the<br /> title bar) to a printer object, print the default print view for<br /> the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user drags the small icon in the title bar to a printer<br /> object, print the view in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to specify which view is the default print view for<br /> an object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "P" as the mnemonic for the <b>Print</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4205 10070 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.36?DT=19921204095534#HDRFILE">"File Menu (Application-Oriented)" in topic 2.2.36</a> 4206 10071 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.101?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELMENU">"Selected Menu" in topic 2.2.101</a> 4207 </pre> 4208 <hr /> 4209 <a name="LEN Product Information (Choice)" /> 4210 <h2><a name="LEN Product Information (Choice)">2.2.83 10072 </pre> 10073 10074 10075 10076 10077 10078 10079 10080 10081 10082 <hr /> 10083 <a name="LEN Product Information (Choice)"></a> 10084 10085 10086 10087 10088 <h2><a name="LEN Product Information (Choice)">2.2.83 4211 10089 Product 4212 10090 Information (Choice)</a></h2> 4213 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing product<br />information, such as a copyright notice, a logo, or both.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4214 href="picture-249?mode=zoom"><img 4215 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P249.GIF" 4216 alt="PICTURE 249" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10091 10092 10093 10094 10095 10096 10097 10098 10099 10100 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing product<br />information, such as a copyright notice, a logo, or both.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-249?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 249" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P249.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4217 10101 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> choice in each <b>Help</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4218 10102 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> choice is provided, place it in the<br /> <b>Help</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a secondary window to display product information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a centered <b>OK</b> push button that removes the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "P" as the mnemonic for the <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4219 10103 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a> 4220 </pre> 4221 <hr /> 4222 <a name="LEN Progress Indicator" /> 4223 <h2><a name="LEN Progress Indicator">2.2.84 Progress 10104 </pre> 10105 10106 10107 10108 10109 10110 10111 10112 10113 10114 <hr /> 10115 <a name="LEN Progress Indicator"></a> 10116 10117 10118 10119 10120 <h2><a name="LEN Progress Indicator">2.2.84 Progress 4224 10121 Indicator</a></h2> 4225 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />One or more controls that inform the user about the status of a<br />process. If a progress indicator appears in a dedicated window,<br />information normally presented in an information message can be<br />displayed in that window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4226 href="picture-250?mode=zoom"><img 4227 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P250.GIF" 4228 alt="PICTURE 250" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10122 10123 10124 10125 10126 10127 10128 10129 10130 10131 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />One or more controls that inform the user about the status of a<br />process. If a progress indicator appears in a dedicated window,<br />information normally presented in an information message can be<br />displayed in that window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-250?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 250" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P250.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4229 10132 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a wait pointer has been displayed for more than five<br /> seconds, display a progress indicator in addition to the wait<br /> pointer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4230 10133 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Place a progress indicator in the same window as the process is<br /> requested from to reduce the number of windows the user must<br /> interact with.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Close a progress-indicator window when a request made by a user<br /> completes normally.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If information that would have been displayed in an information<br /> message is displayed in the progress-indicator window, do not<br /> close the window until the user explicitly requests to close it,<br /> such as by selecting the <b>Close</b> push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a progress indicator is displayed, continually update the<br /> progress indicator to accurately represent the known progress of<br /> a request made by a user.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a push button that allows a user to end the process and<br /> close the window. For example, provide a push button labeled<br /> <b>Stop</b> to allow a user to end the process and close the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a push button that allows a user to close the<br /> progress-indicator window without affecting the process. For<br /> example, provide a push button labeled <b>Close</b> to allow a user to<br /> close the progress indicator window without affecting the<br /> process. Do not use a <b>Close</b> push button to end a process.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a push button that allows a user to suspend a process<br /> and provide a push button that allows a user to resume the<br /> process that has been suspended. For example, provide one push<br /> button labeled <b>Pause</b> and another labeled <b>Resume.</b> Display<br /> unavailable-state emphasis on one or the other depending on<br /> whether the process is running or has been suspended.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access to help information from each progress-indicator<br /> window. For example, provide a push button labeled <b>Help.</b> … … 4237 10140 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.110?DT=19921204095534#HDRSLIDERS">"Slider (Control)" in topic 2.2.110</a> 4238 10141 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.127?DT=19921204095534#HDRWARNMSG">"Warning Message" in topic 2.2.127</a> 4239 </pre> 4240 <hr /> 4241 <a name="LEN Pull-Down Menu" /> 4242 <h2><a name="LEN Pull-Down Menu">2.2.85 Pull-Down Menu</a></h2> 4243 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A menu of related choices that extends from a selected choice on<br />a menu bar or from the system-menu symbol.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4244 href="picture-251?mode=zoom"><img 4245 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P251.GIF" 4246 alt="PICTURE 251" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10142 </pre> 10143 10144 10145 10146 10147 10148 10149 10150 10151 10152 <hr /> 10153 <a name="LEN Pull-Down Menu"></a> 10154 10155 10156 10157 10158 <h2><a name="LEN Pull-Down Menu">2.2.85 Pull-Down 10159 Menu</a></h2> 10160 10161 10162 10163 10164 10165 10166 10167 10168 10169 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A menu of related choices that extends from a selected choice on<br />a menu bar or from the system-menu symbol.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-251?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 251" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P251.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4247 10170 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a pull-down menu for each choice on a menu bar and for<br /> the system menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4248 10171 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide choices that do not logically fit within any of<br /> the predefined menus, such as the <b>Edit</b> menu or the <b>View</b> menu,<br /> provide product-specific menu bar choices that lead to menus<br /> that logically group your product-specific choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the predefined mnemonic for each predefined textual<br /> choice in a pull-down menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a unique mnemonic for each product-specific textual<br /> choice in a menu, unless no meaningful unique mnemonic can be<br /> found.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the predefined shortcut key assignment for each<br /> predefined choice in a pull-down menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a unique shortcut key assignment for each<br /> frequently-used product-specific choice in a pull-down menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4255 10178 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.93?DT=19921204095534#HDRROUTING">"Routing (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.93</a> 4256 10179 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 4257 </pre> 4258 <hr /> 4259 <a name="LEN Push Button (Control)" /> 4260 <h2><a name="LEN Push Button (Control)">2.2.86 Push Button 10180 </pre> 10181 10182 10183 10184 10185 10186 10187 10188 10189 10190 <hr /> 10191 <a name="LEN Push Button (Control)"></a> 10192 10193 10194 10195 10196 <h2><a name="LEN Push Button (Control)">2.2.86 Push 10197 Button 4261 10198 (Control)</a></h2> 4262 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control containing text or graphics, or both, representing an<br />action choice or routing choice that will be activated when a<br />user selects it.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4263 href="picture-252?mode=zoom"><img 4264 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P252.GIF" 4265 alt="PICTURE 252" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10199 10200 10201 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control containing text or graphics, or both, representing an<br />action choice or routing choice that will be activated when a<br />user selects it.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-252?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 252" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P252.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4266 10209 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a push button in a window with a menu bar to provide<br /> convenient access to a frequently-used action choice or routing<br /> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a menu bar is not provided in a window displaying a view of<br /> an object, place all action and routing choices on push buttons<br /> in that window, except for those choices that appear on the<br /> system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4267 10210 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid placing settings choices on push buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If one push button in a field is typically used most frequently<br /> by users, make that push button the default push button for the<br /> field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the cursor is on a push button, make that push button the<br /> default push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign the default push button according to the position of the<br /> cursor. For example, when a user moves the cursor to a control<br /> with associated push buttons, assign one of the associated push<br /> buttons as the default push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign a unique mnemonic to each textual push button choice that<br /> does not have a specific keyboard access mechanism, such as Esc<br /> for the <b>Cancel</b> push button or F1 for the <b>Help</b> push button,<br /> unless no meaningful unique mnemonic can be found.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user types a mnemonic assigned to a push button, perform<br /> the action assigned to that push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For push buttons that do not open a new window or close the<br /> current window, avoid moving the cursor when a user types a<br /> mnemonic to select a push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If two push button choices are mutually exclusive, for example,<br /> <b>Undo</b> and <b>Redo,</b> use two push buttons and display<br /> unavailable-state emphasis on whichever one is unavailable given<br /> the current state of the object. Do not change the label or the<br /> function of a push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a choice<br /> appearing on a push button unless the choice contains an<br /> abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be<br /> capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When you provide a push button with the function of one of the<br /> predefined push buttons, use the predefined push-button label<br /> for that push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Label a product-defined action push button to indicate the<br /> action that will be applied to an object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Label a product-specific routing push button to indicate the<br /> window or menu that the user will be routed to.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a push button is used for a routing choice, use an ellipsis<br /> following the choice text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place push buttons that affect the entire window horizontally at<br /> the bottom of the window and justified from the left edge.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a window that can be scrolled contains push buttons that<br /> affect the entire window, scroll the area above the push<br /> buttons, keeping the push buttons visible.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the action indicated by the label on a push button adjusts or<br /> is associated with a component within the same window as the<br /> push button, place the push button near that component. For<br /> example, if the function of a push button is to restore the<br /> initial value in an entry field, place that push button beside<br /> the entry field that it affects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a window contains a push button that affects a component in<br /> the window, scroll the push button along with the component when<br /> a user scrolls the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a push button adjusts (or is associated with) a component<br /> within a window (rather than the entire window), do not close<br /> the window when a user selects the push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using a push button to change the size of a window;<br /> instead, allow a user to change the size of the window using the<br /> size borders and the maximize push button. For example, do not<br /> provide a push button labeled <b>More>></b> to allow a user to enlarge<br /> a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a window contains push buttons and a menu bar, place, in<br /> the pull-down menus, choices that provide function that is<br /> equivalent to the push button functions that affect the entire<br /> window so that the push buttons provide convenient access to<br /> frequently-used choices in the pull-down menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Combine existing menu choices to create new push-button choices<br /> for frequently-used combinations of choices. For example, the<br /> <b>Save</b> and <b>New</b> choices could be combined into a new push-button<br /> choice called <b>Save</b> <b>and</b> <b>new</b> that would perform the <b>Save</b> action<br /> followed by the <b>New</b> action.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If push buttons contain choices that are also available through<br /> another mechanism, such as the menu bar or scroll bar, allow a<br /> user to hide or remove the push buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Clip the push buttons at the bottom of the window when a user<br /> decreases the width of the window rather than reflowing the push<br /> buttons into multiple lines.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using a group box around a field consisting only of push<br /> buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For push buttons that provide choices that can be used<br /> repeatedly, repeat the action as long as the user presses and<br /> holds the mouse selection button. Stop repeating the action<br /> when the user moves the pointer away from the push button and<br /> resume repeating the action if the user moves the pointer back<br /> over the push button without having released the mouse selection<br /> button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4271 10214 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a> 4272 10215 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 4273 </pre> 4274 <hr /> 4275 <a name="LEN Push Button (Predefined)" /> 4276 <h2><a name="LEN Push Button (Predefined)">2.2.87 Push 10216 </pre> 10217 10218 10219 10220 10221 10222 10223 10224 10225 10226 <hr /> 10227 <a name="LEN Push Button (Predefined)"></a> 10228 10229 10230 10231 10232 <h2><a name="LEN Push Button (Predefined)">2.2.87 10233 Push 4277 10234 Button 4278 10235 (Predefined)</a></h2> 4279 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Push buttons that provide predefined functions. The predefined<br />push buttons are <b>OK,</b> <b>Close,</b> <b>Stop,</b> <b>Continue,</b> <b>Retry,</b> <b>Apply,</b> <b>Reset,</b><br /><b>Cancel,</b> <b>Pause,</b> <b>Resume</b> and <b>Help.</b> 4280 <br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-253?mode=zoom"><img 4281 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P253.GIF" 4282 alt="PICTURE 253" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4283 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a push button with the predefined label when you provide the<br /> function defined in <a 4284 href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#FIGSTDEF">Figure 193</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 4285 name="FIGSTDEF" id="FIGSTDEF" /><a name="TBLSTDEF" id="TBLSTDEF"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 193. Predefined Push Buttons |<br />|_________ ______________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Label</b> | <b>Function</b> |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | OK | Accepts any changes that have been made in the window and |<br /> | | removes the window. Also used to indicate that the user |<br /> | | should acknowledge information in the window before removing |<br /> | | the window. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Close | Removes the window without affecting a process. Close does |<br /> | | not change the information in the window. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Stop | Ends a process and removes the window. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Continue| Resumes a process that has been interrupted by the operating |<br /> | | environment when the user may proceed as originally |<br /> | | requested. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Retry | Tries a process again that has been interrupted by the |<br /> | | operating environment because of a situation that the user |<br /> | | can attempt to correct. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Apply | Applies changes made to settings choices without removing |<br /> | | the window in which the changes were made. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Reset | Returns the values of changed settings choices to their last |<br /> | | saved state. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Cancel | Removes the window without applying any changes that were |<br /> | | not previously applied in that window. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Pause | Temporarily suspends a process without ending the process. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Resume | Continues a process that was paused. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Help | Displays a window containing contextual help information. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4286 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Cancel</b> and <b>Help</b> push buttons, place them to<br /> the right of all other push buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Reset</b> push button whenever an <b>Apply</b> push button is<br /> provided.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If <b>Reset</b> is selected, return the values of settings that were<br /> changed only in the window where <b>Reset</b> was selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If <b>Reset</b> is selected, return the object to the state it was in<br /> prior to any uncommitted changes. Changes that have been<br /> previously committed, for example using <b>Apply</b> or <b>OK</b> are not<br /> reset.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not use both a <b>Close</b> push button and a <b>Cancel</b> push button in<br /> the same window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> See <a 4287 href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#FIGDANDD">Figure 194</a> to determine window usage for standard push<br /> buttons and the corresponding functions for the <b>Close</b> choice on<br /> the system menu, the Enter key, and the Esc key.<br /><br /><br /><a 4288 name="FIGDANDD" id="FIGDANDD" /><a name="TBLDANDD" id="TBLDANDD"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 194. Use of Predefined Push Buttons |<br />|_____________ ______________ ______________ ______________ _____________|<br />| <b>Type</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Push</b> <b>Buttons</b> | <b>Result</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Result</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Result</b> <b>of</b> |<br /> | <b>Window</b> | (Listed in | <b>Close</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Enter</b> <b>Key</b> | <b>Esc</b> <b>Key</b> |<br /> | | the relative | <b>in</b> <b>System</b> | | |<br /> | | order they | <b>menu</b> | | |<br /> | | would appear | | | |<br /> | | in) | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Object | Any actions | <b>Close</b> | Any action | <b>Cancel,</b> if |<br /> | views | (for | (Optionally, | | used |<br /> | | example, | provide a | | |<br /> | | <b>Print</b> or | warning | | |<br /> | | <b>Undo</b>) | message for | | |<br /> | | | Save or | | |<br /> | | | Don't Save | | |<br /> | | | changes.) | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Settings | <b>OK</b> | <b>Cancel</b> | <b>OK</b> | <b>Cancel</b> |<br /> | (not | <b>Apply</b>(1) | (Does a | | (Does a |<br /> | immediately | <b>Reset</b>(2) | <b>Reset</b>, | | <b>Reset</b>, |<br /> | saved) | <b>Cancel</b> | then <b>Close</b>) | | then <b>Close</b>) |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Settings | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> |<br /> | (immediately| <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> | saved) | | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Action | Action | <b>Cancel</b> or | Default | <b>Cancel</b> or |<br /> | Window | name(3) | <b>Close</b>(4) | action(5) | <b>Close</b>(4) |<br /> | | <b>Cancel</b> or | (Withdraw | | (Withdraw |<br /> | | <b>Close</b> | action | | action |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> | request) | | request) |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Information | <b>OK</b> | <b>OK</b> | <b>OK</b> | <b>OK</b> |<br /> | message | <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Progress | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> | <b>Pause</b> | <b>Stop</b> if |<br /> | indicator | <b>Stop</b> | | if | supported, |<br /> | | (optional) | | supported, | otherwise |<br /> | | <b>Pause</b> and | | otherwise | <b>Close</b> |<br /> | | <b>Resume</b> | | <b>Close</b> | |<br /> | | (both | | | |<br /> | | optional) | | | |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Warning | Action | <b>Cancel</b> | Non-destructi|e<b>Cancel</b> |<br /> | message | name(3) | (if | action | (if |<br /> | | (optional) | supported, | | supported, |<br /> | | <b>Continue</b>(8) | or else a | | or else a |<br /> | | <b>Cancel</b> | non-destructi|e | non-destruct|ve<br /> | | <b>Help</b> | action) | | action) |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Action | Action | <b>Cancel</b> | <b>Retry</b> | <b>Cancel</b> |<br /> | message | name(3) | (if | (if | (if |<br /> | (general | (optional) | supported, | supported, | supported, |<br /> | case) | <b>Retry</b>(9) | otherwise a | otherwise a | otherwise a |<br /> | | <b>Cancel</b>(7) | non-destructi|enon-destructi|enon-destruct|ve<br /> | | <b>Help</b>(10) | action) | action) | action) |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Action | <b>Yes</b>(6) | Choice of | Choice of | Choice of |<br /> | message | <b>No</b> | <b>Yes/No</b> that | <b>Yes/No</b> that | <b>Yes/No</b> that |<br /> | (simple | <b>Help</b> | does not | does not | does not |<br /> | case) | | lose data | lose data | lose data |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | <b>Notes:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 1. <b>Apply</b> is typical when a large number of settings is possible, and |<br /> | when a user might want to apply a few at a time. |<br /> | |<br /> | 2. Both <b>Reset</b> and <b>Apply</b> are provided together. |<br /> | |<br /> | 3. One or more push buttons that contain the names of the actions |<br /> | must be available. |<br /> | |<br /> | 4. <b>Cancel</b> must remove the action window and return to the window from |<br /> | which the action was requested. |<br /> | |<br /> | 5. This assignment is optional; provide it for a useful, |<br /> | non-destructive action. |<br /> | |<br /> | 6. <b>Yes</b> and <b>No</b> each represent an action, or <b>Yes</b> represents an action |<br /> | and <b>No</b> is <b>Cancel.</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 7. Use <b>Cancel</b> if it is practical. Affected user data must be |<br /> | returned to its original state or left in a useful state. |<br /> | |<br /> | 8. The window must have at least one action that continues the |<br /> | request and one action that cancels the request. |<br /> | |<br /> | 9. Use <b>Retry</b> if it is practical. |<br /> | |<br /> | 10. The window must have at least two from the set: "action," <b>Retry,</b> |<br /> | <b>Cancel.</b> |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 10236 10237 10238 10239 10240 10241 10242 10243 10244 10245 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Push buttons that provide predefined functions. The predefined<br />push buttons are <b>OK,</b> <b>Close,</b> <b>Stop,</b> <b>Continue,</b> <b>Retry,</b> <b>Apply,</b> <b>Reset,</b><br /><b>Cancel,</b> <b>Pause,</b> <b>Resume</b> and <b>Help.</b> 10246 <br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-253?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 253" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P253.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10247 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a push button with the predefined label when you provide the<br /> function defined in <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#FIGSTDEF">Figure 193</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGSTDEF" name="FIGSTDEF"></a><a id="TBLSTDEF" name="TBLSTDEF"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 193. Predefined Push Buttons |<br />|_________ ______________________________________________________________|<br />| <b>Label</b> | <b>Function</b> |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | OK | Accepts any changes that have been made in the window and |<br /> | | removes the window. Also used to indicate that the user |<br /> | | should acknowledge information in the window before removing |<br /> | | the window. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Close | Removes the window without affecting a process. Close does |<br /> | | not change the information in the window. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Stop | Ends a process and removes the window. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Continue| Resumes a process that has been interrupted by the operating |<br /> | | environment when the user may proceed as originally |<br /> | | requested. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Retry | Tries a process again that has been interrupted by the |<br /> | | operating environment because of a situation that the user |<br /> | | can attempt to correct. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Apply | Applies changes made to settings choices without removing |<br /> | | the window in which the changes were made. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Reset | Returns the values of changed settings choices to their last |<br /> | | saved state. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Cancel | Removes the window without applying any changes that were |<br /> | | not previously applied in that window. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Pause | Temporarily suspends a process without ending the process. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Resume | Continues a process that was paused. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /> | Help | Displays a window containing contextual help information. |<br /> |_________|______________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 10248 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Cancel</b> and <b>Help</b> push buttons, place them to<br /> the right of all other push buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Reset</b> push button whenever an <b>Apply</b> push button is<br /> provided.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If <b>Reset</b> is selected, return the values of settings that were<br /> changed only in the window where <b>Reset</b> was selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If <b>Reset</b> is selected, return the object to the state it was in<br /> prior to any uncommitted changes. Changes that have been<br /> previously committed, for example using <b>Apply</b> or <b>OK</b> are not<br /> reset.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not use both a <b>Close</b> push button and a <b>Cancel</b> push button in<br /> the same window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> See <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#FIGDANDD">Figure 194</a> to determine window usage for standard push<br /> buttons and the corresponding functions for the <b>Close</b> choice on<br /> the system menu, the Enter key, and the Esc key.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGDANDD" name="FIGDANDD"></a><a id="TBLDANDD" name="TBLDANDD"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 194. Use of Predefined Push Buttons |<br />|_____________ ______________ ______________ ______________ _____________|<br />| <b>Type</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Push</b> <b>Buttons</b> | <b>Result</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Result</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Result</b> <b>of</b> |<br /> | <b>Window</b> | (Listed in | <b>Close</b> <b>Choice</b> | <b>Enter</b> <b>Key</b> | <b>Esc</b> <b>Key</b> |<br /> | | the relative | <b>in</b> <b>System</b> | | |<br /> | | order they | <b>menu</b> | | |<br /> | | would appear | | | |<br /> | | in) | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Object | Any actions | <b>Close</b> | Any action | <b>Cancel,</b> if |<br /> | views | (for | (Optionally, | | used |<br /> | | example, | provide a | | |<br /> | | <b>Print</b> or | warning | | |<br /> | | <b>Undo</b>) | message for | | |<br /> | | | Save or | | |<br /> | | | Don't Save | | |<br /> | | | changes.) | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Settings | <b>OK</b> | <b>Cancel</b> | <b>OK</b> | <b>Cancel</b> |<br /> | (not | <b>Apply</b>(1) | (Does a | | (Does a |<br /> | immediately | <b>Reset</b>(2) | <b>Reset</b>, | | <b>Reset</b>, |<br /> | saved) | <b>Cancel</b> | then <b>Close</b>) | | then <b>Close</b>) |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Settings | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> |<br /> | (immediately| <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> | saved) | | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Action | Action | <b>Cancel</b> or | Default | <b>Cancel</b> or |<br /> | Window | name(3) | <b>Close</b>(4) | action(5) | <b>Close</b>(4) |<br /> | | <b>Cancel</b> or | (Withdraw | | (Withdraw |<br /> | | <b>Close</b> | action | | action |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> | request) | | request) |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Information | <b>OK</b> | <b>OK</b> | <b>OK</b> | <b>OK</b> |<br /> | message | <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Progress | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> | <b>Pause</b> | <b>Stop</b> if |<br /> | indicator | <b>Stop</b> | | if | supported, |<br /> | | (optional) | | supported, | otherwise |<br /> | | <b>Pause</b> and | | otherwise | <b>Close</b> |<br /> | | <b>Resume</b> | | <b>Close</b> | |<br /> | | (both | | | |<br /> | | optional) | | | |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> | | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Warning | Action | <b>Cancel</b> | Non-destructi|e<b>Cancel</b> |<br /> | message | name(3) | (if | action | (if |<br /> | | (optional) | supported, | | supported, |<br /> | | <b>Continue</b>(8) | or else a | | or else a |<br /> | | <b>Cancel</b> | non-destructi|e | non-destruct|ve<br /> | | <b>Help</b> | action) | | action) |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Action | Action | <b>Cancel</b> | <b>Retry</b> | <b>Cancel</b> |<br /> | message | name(3) | (if | (if | (if |<br /> | (general | (optional) | supported, | supported, | supported, |<br /> | case) | <b>Retry</b>(9) | otherwise a | otherwise a | otherwise a |<br /> | | <b>Cancel</b>(7) | non-destructi|enon-destructi|enon-destruct|ve<br /> | | <b>Help</b>(10) | action) | action) | action) |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Action | <b>Yes</b>(6) | Choice of | Choice of | Choice of |<br /> | message | <b>No</b> | <b>Yes/No</b> that | <b>Yes/No</b> that | <b>Yes/No</b> that |<br /> | (simple | <b>Help</b> | does not | does not | does not |<br /> | case) | | lose data | lose data | lose data |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | <b>Notes:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 1. <b>Apply</b> is typical when a large number of settings is possible, and |<br /> | when a user might want to apply a few at a time. |<br /> | |<br /> | 2. Both <b>Reset</b> and <b>Apply</b> are provided together. |<br /> | |<br /> | 3. One or more push buttons that contain the names of the actions |<br /> | must be available. |<br /> | |<br /> | 4. <b>Cancel</b> must remove the action window and return to the window from |<br /> | which the action was requested. |<br /> | |<br /> | 5. This assignment is optional; provide it for a useful, |<br /> | non-destructive action. |<br /> | |<br /> | 6. <b>Yes</b> and <b>No</b> each represent an action, or <b>Yes</b> represents an action |<br /> | and <b>No</b> is <b>Cancel.</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 7. Use <b>Cancel</b> if it is practical. Affected user data must be |<br /> | returned to its original state or left in a useful state. |<br /> | |<br /> | 8. The window must have at least one action that continues the |<br /> | request and one action that cancels the request. |<br /> | |<br /> | 9. Use <b>Retry</b> if it is practical. |<br /> | |<br /> | 10. The window must have at least two from the set: "action," <b>Retry,</b> |<br /> | <b>Cancel.</b> |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4289 10249 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a> 4290 10250 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4299 10259 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.127?DT=19921204095534#HDRWARNMSG">"Warning Message" in topic 2.2.127</a> 4300 10260 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 4301 </pre> 4302 <hr /> 4303 <a name="LEN Radio Button (Control)" /> 4304 <h2><a name="LEN Radio Button (Control)">2.2.88 Radio Button 10261 </pre> 10262 10263 10264 10265 10266 10267 10268 10269 10270 10271 <hr /> 10272 <a name="LEN Radio Button (Control)"></a> 10273 10274 10275 10276 10277 <h2><a name="LEN Radio Button (Control)">2.2.88 10278 Radio Button 4305 10279 (Control)</a></h2> 4306 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control used to display mutually exclusive textual settings<br />choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4307 href="picture-254?mode=zoom"><img 4308 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P254.GIF" 4309 alt="PICTURE 254" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10280 10281 10282 10283 10284 10285 10286 10287 10288 10289 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control used to display mutually exclusive textual settings<br />choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-254?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 254" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P254.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4310 10290 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a field of radio buttons to display mutually exclusive<br /> settings choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4311 10291 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use radio buttons for settings choices. Do not use radio<br /> buttons to represent action choices or routing choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using a radio button for graphical choices, instead use a<br /> value set for graphical choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use at least two radio buttons in each field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign one of the choices in a radio-button field as the default<br /> except when the radio buttons represents a setting for more than<br /> one selected object and no single choice applies to all the<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user can choose not to select any of the choices, provide a<br /> radio button labeled <b>None</b> or equivalent appropriate text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Arrange the radio buttons in a group in rows, columns, or both.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a radio button choice is currently unavailable, display it<br /> with unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign a mnemonic to each radio-button choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a radio button has a mnemonic, provide access to the mnemonic<br /> by allowing a user to press the Alt key and that mnemonic.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a radio<br /> button choice unless the choice contains an abbreviation,<br /> acronym, or proper noun that should be capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a field of radio buttons represents a setting shared by<br /> more than one selected object:<br /><br /><br />° Do not display a dot in any of the radio buttons if some,<br />but not all, of the selected objects have the setting turned<br />on.<br /><br /><br />° Display a dot in one of the radio buttons if that setting<br />applies to all of the selected objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4318 10298 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 4319 10299 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.125?DT=19921204095534#HDRVALUSET">"Value Set (Control)" in topic 2.2.125</a> 4320 </pre> 4321 <hr /> 4322 <a name="LEN Random-Point Selection" /> 4323 <h2><a name="LEN Random-Point Selection">2.2.89 Random-Point 10300 </pre> 10301 10302 10303 10304 10305 10306 10307 10308 10309 10310 <hr /> 10311 <a name="LEN Random-Point Selection"></a> 10312 10313 10314 10315 10316 <h2><a name="LEN Random-Point Selection">2.2.89 10317 Random-Point 4324 10318 Selection</a></h2> 4325 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A selection technique that allows a user to select objects as<br />the pointer touches them, while the selection button on a mouse<br />is pressed. The implementation of random-point selection is<br />random (swipe).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4326 href="picture-255?mode=zoom"><img 4327 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P255.GIF" 4328 alt="PICTURE 255" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10319 10320 10321 10322 10323 10324 10325 10326 10327 10328 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A selection technique that allows a user to select objects as<br />the pointer touches them, while the selection button on a mouse<br />is pressed. The implementation of random-point selection is<br />random (swipe).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-255?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 255" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P255.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4329 10329 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide random-point selection techniques when multiple objects<br /> can be selected, in any order, not necessarily contiguously.<br /> For example, this provides a user with a technique to select any<br /> documents in a folder and then print those documents in the<br /> order they were selected with one action request.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4330 10330 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In extended selection:<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse, when the user presses the mouse selection<br />button on the first object to be selected and moves the<br />pointer over other objects to be selected, deselect all<br />other objects in the selection scope and select the<br />individual objects in the order the user identified them.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> In multiple selection:<br /><br /><br />° Using the mouse, when the user presses the mouse selection<br />button on the first object to be selected and moves the<br />pointer over other objects to be selected, select the<br />individual objects in the order the user identified them.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Toggle the selection state of objects that the pointer touches<br /> when a user is using random-point selection. Objects that were<br /> not already in the same selection state as the first object then<br /> take on the selection state of the first object. In extended<br /> selection, all previously selected objects are deselected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide sufficient space between objects for a user to move the<br /> mouse around and not touch objects they do not wish to select.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4331 10331 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.102?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELEMPH">"Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.102</a> 4332 10332 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 4333 </pre> 4334 <hr /> 4335 <a name="LEN Reflection (Object)" /> 4336 <h2><a name="LEN Reflection (Object)">2.2.90 Reflection 10333 </pre> 10334 10335 10336 10337 10338 10339 10340 10341 10342 10343 <hr /> 10344 <a name="LEN Reflection (Object)"></a> 10345 10346 10347 10348 10349 <h2><a name="LEN Reflection (Object)">2.2.90 10350 Reflection 4337 10351 (Object)</a></h2> 4338 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An object that is represented by more than one icon. If a user<br />changes an object's reflection, all other reflections of the<br />object are changed. If a user deletes a reflection, other<br />reflections of the object are not necessarily deleted.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4339 href="picture-256?mode=zoom"><img 4340 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P256.GIF" 4341 alt="PICTURE 256" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10352 10353 10354 10355 10356 10357 10358 10359 10360 10361 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An object that is represented by more than one icon. If a user<br />changes an object's reflection, all other reflections of the<br />object are changed. If a user deletes a reflection, other<br />reflections of the object are not necessarily deleted.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-256?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 256" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P256.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4342 10362 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide reflections for all objects to provide access to an<br /> object from more than one location.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4343 10363 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a choice that allows a user to create a<br /> reflection of an object and you provide an <b>Edit</b> menu, place the<br /> choice that creates the reflection in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a choice that allows a user to create a<br /> reflection of an object, place the choice that creates the<br /> reflection in the pop-up menu for the object when a reflection<br /> of the object can be created.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the reflection override key and performs a<br /> direct-manipulation operation on an object or group of selected<br /> objects, create a reflection of the indicated object or group of<br /> selected objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the object for which the <b>Delete</b> choice is requested supports<br /> reflections, display the <b>Delete</b> choice as a routing choice that<br /> leads to a cascaded menu with choices for deleting just this<br /> reflection or deleting the entire object and all reflections of<br /> the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4347 10367 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 4348 10368 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a> 4349 </pre> 4350 <hr /> 4351 <a name="LEN Refresh and Refresh Now (Choice)" /> 4352 <h2><a name="LEN Refresh and Refresh Now (Choice)">2.2.91 10369 </pre> 10370 10371 10372 10373 10374 10375 10376 10377 10378 10379 <hr /> 10380 <a name="LEN Refresh and Refresh Now (Choice)"></a> 10381 10382 10383 10384 10385 <h2><a name="LEN Refresh and Refresh Now (Choice)">2.2.91 4353 10386 Refresh 4354 10387 and Refresh Now (Choice)</a></h2> 4355 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Choices that allow a user to control whether changes made to<br />underlying data are immediately displayed in the current view or<br />are displayed upon user request at a later time. <b>Refresh</b> is a<br /> routing choice that leads to a cascaded menu or an action window<br /> that allows the user to select refresh options. <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> is<br /> an action choice that causes the current view to be immediately<br /> updated to match the underlying information.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4356 href="picture-257?mode=zoom"><img 4357 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P257.GIF" 4358 alt="PICTURE 257" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10388 10389 10390 10391 10392 10393 10394 10395 10396 10397 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Choices that allow a user to control whether changes made to<br />underlying data are immediately displayed in the current view or<br />are displayed upon user request at a later time. <b>Refresh</b> is a<br /> routing choice that leads to a cascaded menu or an action window<br /> that allows the user to select refresh options. <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> is<br /> an action choice that causes the current view to be immediately<br /> updated to match the underlying information.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-257?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 257" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P257.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4359 10398 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide the <b>Refresh</b> and <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choices to allow a user to<br /> control when a view will be updated to reflect changes in the<br /> underlying data. For example, provide <b>Refresh</b> and <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b><br />choices:<br /><br /><br />° To increase a user's control over the display of data when<br />the data can be changed by another user or by another<br />process.<br /><br /><br />° When the time it takes to redisplay the data could interfere<br />with a user's ability to interact with the data.<br /><br /><br />° When the data of interest to a user is located on another<br />system and subject to communications performance<br />constraints.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4360 10399 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Refresh</b> or <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choices, and you<br /> provide a <b>View</b> menu, place the <b>Refresh</b> or <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choices in<br /> the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Refresh</b> or <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choices for an object,<br /> place the <b>Refresh</b> or <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choices in the pop-up menu for<br /> the object when the object can currently be refreshed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide at least the <b>On</b> and <b>Off</b> choices to allow a user to<br /> specify if the view will be updated.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide object-specific choices as appropriate. For example,<br /> provide a short list of time intervals, such as <b>5</b> <b>minutes,</b> <b>10</b><br /><b>minutes,</b> or <b>30</b> <b>minutes</b> in a cascaded menu or provide more<br /> choices in an action window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>On,</b> and <b>Off</b> choices, place them in a cascaded<br /> menu from the <b>Refresh</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choice, immediately update<br /> the view to display the current data.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>On</b> choice, continually update the view<br /> to display the most current data in the view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Off</b> choice, do not continue to update<br /> the view until a user selects the <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> or <b>On</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>On</b> choice, make it the default setting unless<br /> a user has specified otherwise.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display unavailable-state emphasis on the <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choice if<br /> the current display is known to match the underlying data.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choice and you do not currently<br /> know or can never know if the current display matches the<br /> underlying data, make the <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choice available.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis<br /> if <b>On</b> is currently selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "R" as the mnemonic for the <b>Refresh</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "N" as the mnemonic for the <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "O" as the mnemonic for the <b>On</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "F" as the mnemonic for the <b>Off</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4361 10400 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.126?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEW">"View Menu" in topic 2.2.126</a> 4362 </pre> 4363 <hr /> 4364 <a name="LEN Restore (Choice)" /> 4365 <h2><a name="LEN Restore (Choice)">2.2.92 Restore (Choice)</a></h2> 4366 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that returns a window to the size it was and<br />the position it was in before it was previously minimized or<br />maximized.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4367 href="picture-258?mode=zoom"><img 4368 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P258.GIF" 4369 alt="PICTURE 258" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10401 </pre> 10402 10403 10404 10405 10406 10407 10408 10409 10410 10411 <hr /> 10412 <a name="LEN Restore (Choice)"></a> 10413 10414 10415 10416 10417 <h2><a name="LEN Restore (Choice)">2.2.92 Restore 10418 (Choice)</a></h2> 10419 10420 10421 10422 10423 10424 10425 10426 10427 10428 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that returns a window to the size it was and<br />the position it was in before it was previously minimized or<br />maximized.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-258?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 258" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P258.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4370 10429 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a window can be minimized, provide a <b>Restore</b> choice to allow<br /> a user to return the window from the minimized state to its last<br /> saved size and position prior to being minimized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a window can be maximized, provide a <b>Restore</b> choice to allow<br /> a user to return the window from the maximized state to its last<br /> saved size and position prior to being maximized.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4371 10430 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Restore</b> choice, place it in the system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Restore</b> choice with unavailable-state emphasis when<br /> the window is not maximized or minimized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Change the maximize button to a restore button in the title bar<br /> when the size of a window can be changed and the window has been<br /> maximized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Restore</b> choice from the minimized state,<br /> return the window to the size it was and the position it was in<br /> before it was last minimized. For example, if a window was<br /> maximized prior to being minimized, display the window in the<br /> maximized state when a user selects the <b>Restore</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the restore button from the maximized state,<br /> return the window to the size it was and the position it was in<br /> before it was last maximized. For example, if a window was at a<br /> user-defined size prior to being maximized, return the window to<br /> the user-defined size when the user selects the <b>Restore</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Restore</b> choice from a minimized work<br /> area, restore any associated windows that were open when the<br /> work area was last minimized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user restores a minimized work area, restore the work<br /> area window and any associated windows to their previous states,<br /> regardless of the amount of time that has elapsed since a user<br /> last restored the work area, and regardless of whether the<br /> user's system has been turned off and on again.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Restore</b> choice from a minimized primary<br /> window, restore any secondary windows that were open when the<br /> primary window was last minimized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user restores a minimized primary window, restore the<br /> primary window and any secondary windows to their previous<br /> states, regardless of the amount of time that has elapsed since<br /> a user last restored the primary window, and regardless of<br /> whether the user's system has been turned off and on again.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Change the restore button to the maximize button after a window<br /> has been restored to a state other than maximized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F5 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Restore</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "R" as the mnemonic for the <b>Restore</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4375 10434 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.62?DT=19921204095534#HDRMINIMIZ">"Minimize (Choice)" in topic 2.2.62</a> 4376 10435 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.109?DT=19921204095534#HDRSIZE">"Size (Choice)" in topic 2.2.109</a> 4377 </pre> 4378 <hr /> 4379 <a name="LEN Routing (Choice Type)" /> 4380 <h2><a name="LEN Routing (Choice Type)">2.2.93 Routing 10436 </pre> 10437 10438 10439 10440 10441 10442 10443 10444 10445 10446 <hr /> 10447 <a name="LEN Routing (Choice Type)"></a> 10448 10449 10450 10451 10452 <h2><a name="LEN Routing (Choice Type)">2.2.93 10453 Routing 4381 10454 (Choice 4382 10455 Type)</a></h2> 4383 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A choice that displays a pull-down menu, a cascaded menu, or a<br />window that contains additional choices used to further specify<br />or clarify the routing choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4384 href="picture-259?mode=zoom"><img 4385 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P259.GIF" 4386 alt="PICTURE 259" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10456 10457 10458 10459 10460 10461 10462 10463 10464 10465 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A choice that displays a pull-down menu, a cascaded menu, or a<br />window that contains additional choices used to further specify<br />or clarify the routing choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-259?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 259" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P259.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4387 10466 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a routing choice to display a pull-down menu or cascaded<br /> menu or to display an action window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4388 10467 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a right-pointing arrow (ÿ) after a pull-down menu choice,<br /> cascaded menu, or pop-up menu choice that causes a cascaded menu<br /> to be displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use ellipses (...) after a choice in a pull-down menu, cascaded<br /> menu, pop-up menu, or on a push button that causes an action<br /> window to be displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not use ellipses (...) or a right-pointing arrow (ÿ) after a<br /> menu bar choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4393 10472 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 4394 10473 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.86?DT=19921204095534#HDRPUSHB">"Push Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.86</a> 4395 </pre> 4396 <hr /> 4397 <a name="LEN Save (Choice)" /> 4398 <h2><a name="LEN Save (Choice)">2.2.94 Save (Choice)</a></h2> 4399 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that stores the object in the window on a<br />storage device, such as a disk or diskette.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4400 href="picture-260?mode=zoom"><img 4401 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P260.GIF" 4402 alt="PICTURE 260" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10474 </pre> 10475 10476 10477 10478 10479 10480 10481 10482 10483 10484 <hr /> 10485 <a name="LEN Save (Choice)"></a> 10486 10487 10488 10489 10490 <h2><a name="LEN Save (Choice)">2.2.94 Save (Choice)</a></h2> 10491 10492 10493 10494 10495 10496 10497 10498 10499 10500 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that stores the object in the window on a<br />storage device, such as a disk or diskette.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-260?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 260" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P260.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4403 10501 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Save</b> choice for each object that is not automatically<br /> saved when changed.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4404 10502 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Save</b> choice, and you provide a <b>File</b> menu, place<br /> the <b>Save</b> choice in the <b>File</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not close the window when a user selects the <b>Save</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not change the appearance or position of the object in a<br /> window when a user selects the <b>Save</b> choice. For example do not<br /> scroll the object in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the object being saved does not have a user-assigned name,<br /> display the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "S" as the mnemonic for the <b>Save</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4406 10504 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.37?DT=19921204095534#HDRFILEOB">"File Menu (Object-Oriented)" in topic 2.2.37</a> 4407 10505 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.96?DT=19921204095534#HDRSAVEAS">"Save As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.96</a> 4408 </pre> 4409 <hr /> 4410 <a name="LEN Save As (Action Window)" /> 4411 <h2><a name="LEN Save As (Action Window)">2.2.95 Save As 10506 </pre> 10507 10508 10509 10510 10511 10512 10513 10514 10515 10516 <hr /> 10517 <a name="LEN Save As (Action Window)"></a> 10518 10519 10520 10521 10522 <h2><a name="LEN Save As (Action Window)">2.2.95 10523 Save As 4412 10524 (Action 4413 10525 Window)</a></h2> 4414 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window from the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice that allows a user to save a<br /> copy of an object by giving it a different name.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4415 href="picture-261?mode=zoom"><img 4416 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P261.GIF" 4417 alt="PICTURE 261" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10526 10527 10528 10529 10530 10531 10532 10533 10534 10535 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window from the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice that allows a user to save a<br /> copy of an object by giving it a different name.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-261?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 261" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P261.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4418 10536 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Save</b> <b>As</b> window when a user selects the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4419 10537 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the <b>Save</b> <b>As</b> window in a secondary window that is<br /> dependent upon the window from which the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice was<br /> selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide an entry field to allow a user to type the name of the<br /> new object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a drop-down list that allows a user to display a list of<br /> the file types that can be saved.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a drop-down list that allows a user to specify the<br /> storage device, such as the "A:," "B:," or "C:" drive.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a list box of the appropriate containers. Use a filled<br /> in greater-than symbol (ÿ) to the left of the current container,<br /> and show the containment hierarchy by indenting containers that<br /> are within another container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide in a list box the names of all objects in the specified<br /> container and on the specified storage device that match the<br /> specified type.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not provide a default action, such as a double-click, that<br /> allows a user to select an object within the list of existing<br /> objects. Use this list only to present the names of existing<br /> objects; not as an easy way to overwrite an existing object. To<br /> overwrite an existing object, allow a user to type its name into<br /> the entry field that presents the new object name.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign the default action, such as double-click, for a container<br /> in the list of containers to display or refresh the list of<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Cancel</b> push button to allow a user to close the <b>Save</b><br /><b>As</b> window without saving the current object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Save</b> push button to allow a user to save the current<br /> object under the specified name.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a push button labeled <b>Help.</b> … … 4428 10546 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.72?DT=19921204095534#HDROPENWIN">"Open (Action Window)" in topic 2.2.72</a> 4429 10547 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 4430 </pre> 4431 <hr /> 4432 <a name="LEN Save As (Choice)" /> 4433 <h2><a name="LEN Save As (Choice)">2.2.96 Save As (Choice)</a></h2> 4434 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A routing choice that presents a window that allows a user to<br />specify a name for the object to be saved on a storage device,<br />such as a disk or diskette. The original object remains<br />unchanged if a different name is used.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4435 href="picture-262?mode=zoom"><img 4436 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P262.GIF" 4437 alt="PICTURE 262" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10548 </pre> 10549 10550 10551 10552 10553 10554 10555 10556 10557 10558 <hr /> 10559 <a name="LEN Save As (Choice)"></a> 10560 10561 10562 10563 10564 <h2><a name="LEN Save As (Choice)">2.2.96 Save As 10565 (Choice)</a></h2> 10566 10567 10568 10569 10570 10571 10572 10573 10574 10575 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A routing choice that presents a window that allows a user to<br />specify a name for the object to be saved on a storage device,<br />such as a disk or diskette. The original object remains<br />unchanged if a different name is used.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-262?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 262" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P262.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4438 10576 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice for each object in an<br /> application-oriented environment for which a user can save with<br /> a specified name.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4439 10577 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice, and you provide a <b>File</b> menu,<br /> place the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice in the <b>File</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the <b>Save</b> <b>As</b> action window when the user selects the <b>Save</b><br /><b>as</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "A" as the mnemonic for the <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4440 10578 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.36?DT=19921204095534#HDRFILE">"File Menu (Application-Oriented)" in topic 2.2.36</a> 4441 10579 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.95?DT=19921204095534#HDRSVASWIN">"Save As (Action Window)" in topic 2.2.95</a> 4442 </pre> 4443 <hr /> 4444 <a name="LEN Scroll Bar" /> 4445 <h2><a name="LEN Scroll Bar">2.2.97 Scroll Bar</a></h2> 4446 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window component, associated with a scrollable area, that<br />indicates to a user that more information is available or can be<br />added in a particular direction and can be scrolled into view.<br />The two types of scroll bars are: horizontal and vertical. The<br />components of a scroll bar are the scroll box, shaft, and scroll<br />buttons.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4447 href="picture-263?mode=zoom"><img 4448 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P263.GIF" 4449 alt="PICTURE 263" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10580 </pre> 10581 10582 10583 10584 10585 10586 10587 10588 10589 10590 <hr /> 10591 <a name="LEN Scroll Bar"></a> 10592 10593 10594 10595 10596 <h2><a name="LEN Scroll Bar">2.2.97 Scroll Bar</a></h2> 10597 10598 10599 10600 10601 10602 10603 10604 10605 10606 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window component, associated with a scrollable area, that<br />indicates to a user that more information is available or can be<br />added in a particular direction and can be scrolled into view.<br />The two types of scroll bars are: horizontal and vertical. The<br />components of a scroll bar are the scroll box, shaft, and scroll<br />buttons.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-263?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 263" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P263.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4450 10607 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a scroll bar if the information is not fully visible<br /> within a window in a particular direction.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a scroll bar if the information in a window can be<br /> extended to a size that is larger than the window. For example,<br /> provide scroll bars for a text object that can become smaller or<br /> larger as a user works with it.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4451 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a scroll bar along the dimension in which more<br /> information is available. For example, if an object is wider,<br /> provide a horizontal scroll bar, and if an object is taller,<br /> provide a vertical scroll bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the information in the window is extendable, but is not<br /> currently scrollable, display the scroll bar with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a scroll bar when scrolling windows. Use a slider to<br /> display a numeric value.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user scrolls by dragging the scroll box, update the<br /> information in the window as the user drags the scroll box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If it is not possible to continually update information in a<br /> window as it is being scrolled, update the information in the<br /> window when the user pauses scrolling.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign scrolling actions as in <a 4452 href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#FIGSCROLL">Figure 195</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 4453 name="FIGSCROLL" id="FIGSCROLL" /><a name="TBLSCROLL" id="TBLSCROLL"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 195. User Actions and Scrolling Actions |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>User</b> <b>action</b> | <b>Scrolling</b> <b>action</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on up scroll button (") | Scroll one smallest |<br /> | | vertical-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward bottom of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on down scroll button | Scroll one smallest |<br /> | () | vertical-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward top of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on right scroll button | Scroll one smallest |<br /> | (ÿ) | horizontal-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward left of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on left scroll button | Scroll one smallest |<br /> | () | horizontal-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward right of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on scroll shaft above | Scroll one |<br /> | scroll box in vertical scroll bar | vertical-page-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward bottom of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on scroll shaft below | Scroll one |<br /> | scroll box in vertical scroll bar | vertical-page-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward top of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on scroll shaft to | Scroll one |<br /> | right of scroll box in horizontal | horizontal-page-scrolling-incremen|<br /> | scroll bar | toward left of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on scroll shaft to left | Scroll one |<br /> | of scroll box in horizontal scroll | horizontal-page-scrolling-incremen|<br /> | bar | right of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Drag scroll box with selection | Scroll so that information |<br /> | button and release button when | indicated by position of scroll |<br /> | scroll box is in new location in | box is visible in window |<br /> | scroll shaft | |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When cursoring to a control causes the control to be scrolled<br /> into view, scroll as much of the control into view as possible.<br /> For example, if cursoring to a radio button field causes<br /> scrolling, scroll as much of the radio button field into view as<br /> possible.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a scroll button with unavailable-state emphasis when<br /> there is no more information in the direction indicated on the<br /> button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Adjust the size of a scroll box so that it is proportional to<br /> the amount of information that can be visible in the scrollable<br /> area in relation to the total amount of information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Adjust the position of a scroll box so that it indicates the<br /> position of the information visible in the scrollable area in<br /> relation to the total amount of information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not change the size of a scroll box unless:<br /><br /><br />° Information is added to or removed from the object<br />represented in the window<br /><br /><br />° The window's size changes<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 10608 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a scroll bar along the dimension in which more<br /> information is available. For example, if an object is wider,<br /> provide a horizontal scroll bar, and if an object is taller,<br /> provide a vertical scroll bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the information in the window is extendable, but is not<br /> currently scrollable, display the scroll bar with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use a scroll bar when scrolling windows. Use a slider to<br /> display a numeric value.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user scrolls by dragging the scroll box, update the<br /> information in the window as the user drags the scroll box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If it is not possible to continually update information in a<br /> window as it is being scrolled, update the information in the<br /> window when the user pauses scrolling.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign scrolling actions as in <a href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#FIGSCROLL">Figure 195</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGSCROLL" name="FIGSCROLL"></a><a id="TBLSCROLL" name="TBLSCROLL"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 195. User Actions and Scrolling Actions |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>User</b> <b>action</b> | <b>Scrolling</b> <b>action</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on up scroll button (") | Scroll one smallest |<br /> | | vertical-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward bottom of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on down scroll button | Scroll one smallest |<br /> | () | vertical-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward top of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on right scroll button | Scroll one smallest |<br /> | (ÿ) | horizontal-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward left of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on left scroll button | Scroll one smallest |<br /> | () | horizontal-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward right of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on scroll shaft above | Scroll one |<br /> | scroll box in vertical scroll bar | vertical-page-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward bottom of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on scroll shaft below | Scroll one |<br /> | scroll box in vertical scroll bar | vertical-page-scrolling-increment |<br /> | | toward top of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on scroll shaft to | Scroll one |<br /> | right of scroll box in horizontal | horizontal-page-scrolling-incremen|<br /> | scroll bar | toward left of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Click once on scroll shaft to left | Scroll one |<br /> | of scroll box in horizontal scroll | horizontal-page-scrolling-incremen|<br /> | bar | right of window |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Drag scroll box with selection | Scroll so that information |<br /> | button and release button when | indicated by position of scroll |<br /> | scroll box is in new location in | box is visible in window |<br /> | scroll shaft | |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When cursoring to a control causes the control to be scrolled<br /> into view, scroll as much of the control into view as possible.<br /> For example, if cursoring to a radio button field causes<br /> scrolling, scroll as much of the radio button field into view as<br /> possible.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a scroll button with unavailable-state emphasis when<br /> there is no more information in the direction indicated on the<br /> button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Adjust the size of a scroll box so that it is proportional to<br /> the amount of information that can be visible in the scrollable<br /> area in relation to the total amount of information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Adjust the position of a scroll box so that it indicates the<br /> position of the information visible in the scrollable area in<br /> relation to the total amount of information.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not change the size of a scroll box unless:<br /><br /><br />° Information is added to or removed from the object<br />represented in the window<br /><br /><br />° The window's size changes<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4454 10609 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.98?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLI">"Scrolling Increment" in topic 2.2.98</a> 4455 10610 <br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4458 10613 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 4459 10614 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 4460 </pre> 4461 <hr /> 4462 <a name="LEN Scrolling Increment" /> 4463 <h2><a name="LEN Scrolling Increment">2.2.98 Scrolling 10615 </pre> 10616 10617 10618 10619 10620 10621 10622 10623 10624 10625 <hr /> 10626 <a name="LEN Scrolling Increment"></a> 10627 10628 10629 10630 10631 <h2><a name="LEN Scrolling Increment">2.2.98 10632 Scrolling 4464 10633 Increment</a></h2> 4465 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The amount of information that can be scrolled with a single<br />scrolling action.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4466 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to control the scrolling increment. For example,<br /> give the user an option of page scrolling text the entire height<br /> of the scrollable area, instead of the height of the scrollable<br /> area minus the height of one line.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the initial scrolling increments equal to those shown in<br /> <a 4467 href="2.2.98?DT=19921204095534#FIGBAUHAUS">Figure 196</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 4468 name="FIGBAUHAUS" id="FIGBAUHAUS" /><a name="TBLBAUHAUS" 4469 id="TBLBAUHAUS"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 196. Scrolling Increments |<br />|_____________ _____________________________ ____________________________|<br />| <b>Type</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Smallest</b> <b>Scrolling</b> | <b>Page</b> <b>Scrolling</b> <b>Increment</b> |<br /> | <b>data</b> | <b>Increment</b> | |<br /> | |______________ ______________|______________ _____________|<br /> | | <b>Horizontal</b> | <b>Vertical</b> | <b>Horizontal</b> | <b>Vertical</b> |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Text | Width of em | Bottom of | Width of | Height of |<br /> | | (M) | one line to | scrollable | scrollable |<br /> | | character | bottom of | area minus | area minus |<br /> | | (1) | next line | width of one | some |<br /> | | | | em (M) | portion of |<br /> | | | | character | the area |<br /> | | | | | (for |<br /> | | | | | example, |<br /> | | | | | one line) |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Icon | Width of | Height of | Width of | Height of |<br /> | | smallest | smallest | scrollable | scrollable |<br /> | | icon | icon | area minus | area minus |<br /> | | | | width of | height of |<br /> | | | | smallest | smallest |<br /> | | | | icon | icon |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Graphic | 5% of the | 5% of the | 95% of the | 95% of the |<br /> | | width of the | height of | width of the | height of |<br /> | | view, or by | the view, or | view | the view |<br /> | | units of a | by units of | | |<br /> | | scale | a scale | | |<br /> | | specified by | specified by | | |<br /> | | the user | the user | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 1. Smallest horizontal scrolling increment is the width of em (M) |<br /> | character when scrolling using the arrow keys or scroll bar. When |<br /> | typing, the increment should be a percentage of the entire field. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user is scrolling, make the information being scrolled<br /> appear to be scrolling smoothly by actually moving the data in<br /> smaller increments than the smallest scrolling increment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 10634 10635 10636 10637 10638 10639 10640 10641 10642 10643 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The amount of information that can be scrolled with a single<br />scrolling action.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 10644 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to control the scrolling increment. For example,<br /> give the user an option of page scrolling text the entire height<br /> of the scrollable area, instead of the height of the scrollable<br /> area minus the height of one line.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the initial scrolling increments equal to those shown in<br /> <a href="2.2.98?DT=19921204095534#FIGBAUHAUS">Figure 196</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGBAUHAUS" name="FIGBAUHAUS"></a><a id="TBLBAUHAUS" name="TBLBAUHAUS"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 196. Scrolling Increments |<br />|_____________ _____________________________ ____________________________|<br />| <b>Type</b> <b>of</b> | <b>Smallest</b> <b>Scrolling</b> | <b>Page</b> <b>Scrolling</b> <b>Increment</b> |<br /> | <b>data</b> | <b>Increment</b> | |<br /> | |______________ ______________|______________ _____________|<br /> | | <b>Horizontal</b> | <b>Vertical</b> | <b>Horizontal</b> | <b>Vertical</b> |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Text | Width of em | Bottom of | Width of | Height of |<br /> | | (M) | one line to | scrollable | scrollable |<br /> | | character | bottom of | area minus | area minus |<br /> | | (1) | next line | width of one | some |<br /> | | | | em (M) | portion of |<br /> | | | | character | the area |<br /> | | | | | (for |<br /> | | | | | example, |<br /> | | | | | one line) |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Icon | Width of | Height of | Width of | Height of |<br /> | | smallest | smallest | scrollable | scrollable |<br /> | | icon | icon | area minus | area minus |<br /> | | | | width of | height of |<br /> | | | | smallest | smallest |<br /> | | | | icon | icon |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | Graphic | 5% of the | 5% of the | 95% of the | 95% of the |<br /> | | width of the | height of | width of the | height of |<br /> | | view, or by | the view, or | view | the view |<br /> | | units of a | by units of | | |<br /> | | scale | a scale | | |<br /> | | specified by | specified by | | |<br /> | | the user | the user | | |<br /> |_____________|______________|______________|______________|_____________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | 1. Smallest horizontal scrolling increment is the width of em (M) |<br /> | character when scrolling using the arrow keys or scroll bar. When |<br /> | typing, the increment should be a percentage of the entire field. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user is scrolling, make the information being scrolled<br /> appear to be scrolling smoothly by actually moving the data in<br /> smaller increments than the smallest scrolling increment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4470 10645 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLB">"Scroll Bar" in topic 2.2.97</a> 4471 10646 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4472 10647 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 4473 10648 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 4474 </pre> 4475 <hr /> 4476 <a name="LEN Secondary Window" /> 4477 <h2><a name="LEN Secondary Window">2.2.99 Secondary Window</a></h2> 4478 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that is used to supplement the interaction in the<br />primary window it is dependent on.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4479 href="picture-264?mode=zoom"><img 4480 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P264.GIF" 4481 alt="PICTURE 264" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10649 </pre> 10650 10651 10652 10653 10654 10655 10656 10657 10658 10659 <hr /> 10660 <a name="LEN Secondary Window"></a> 10661 10662 10663 10664 10665 <h2><a name="LEN Secondary Window">2.2.99 Secondary 10666 Window</a></h2> 10667 10668 10669 10670 10671 10672 10673 10674 10675 10676 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that is used to supplement the interaction in the<br />primary window it is dependent on.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-264?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 264" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P264.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4482 10677 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a secondary window to display an action window. For<br /> example, use a secondary window to display an action window that<br /> allows a user to specify criteria associated with an <b>Include</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a secondary window to view an object only if the secondary<br /> window is used to support interaction with its associated<br /> primary window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a secondary window to display a message.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4483 10678 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Remove a secondary window when the primary window it is<br /> associated with is closed or minimized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a secondary window was open when its associated primary<br /> window was closed or minimized, display that secondary window<br /> when its associated primary window is opened or restored.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a sizing border that allows a user to change the size of<br /> a secondary window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make secondary windows as modeless as possible. For example,<br /> when a user begins a process that searches a text object, allow<br /> the user to interact with the text object while continuing to<br /> display the <b>Find</b> action window on top of the text window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to minimize a secondary window that displays a view<br /> of an object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4486 10681 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4487 10682 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.4?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTIONW">"Action Window" in topic 2.2.4</a> 4488 </pre> 4489 <hr /> 4490 <a name="LEN Select All and Deselect All (Choice)" /> 4491 <h2><a name="LEN Select All and Deselect All (Choice)">2.2.100 10683 </pre> 10684 10685 10686 10687 10688 10689 10690 10691 10692 10693 <hr /> 10694 <a name="LEN Select All and Deselect All (Choice)"></a> 10695 10696 10697 10698 10699 <h2><a name="LEN Select All and Deselect All (Choice)">2.2.100 4492 10700 Select All and Deselect All (Choice)</a></h2> 4493 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Action choices that allow a user to select all the objects in a<br />view or deselect all of the selected objects in the view from<br />which the choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4494 href="picture-265?mode=zoom"><img 4495 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P265.GIF" 4496 alt="PICTURE 265" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10701 10702 10703 10704 10705 10706 10707 10708 10709 10710 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Action choices that allow a user to select all the objects in a<br />view or deselect all of the selected objects in the view from<br />which the choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-265?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 265" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P265.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4497 10711 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide the <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> choice to allow a user to select all<br /> objects in the view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide the <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> choice to allow a user to deselect all<br /> objects in the view.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4498 10712 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> and <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> choices, and you<br /> provide an <b>Edit</b> menu, place the <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> and <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b><br />choices in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the following choices with unavailable-state emphasis<br /> under the following conditions:<br /><br /><br />° <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> - when all objects in the view are selected.<br /> ° <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> - when no objects in the view are selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> choice, select all the<br /> objects in the view, including all objects in the view that are<br /> not currently visible in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> choice, cancel the<br /> selection of all objects in the view, including all object in<br /> the view that are not currently visible in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Ctrl+/ as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Select</b> <b>all</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Ctrl+\ as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Deselect</b><br /><b>all</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "S" as the mnemonic for the <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "L" as the mnemonic for the <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4500 10714 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4501 10715 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 4502 </pre> 4503 <hr /> 4504 <a name="LEN Selected Menu" /> 4505 <h2><a name="LEN Selected Menu">2.2.101 Selected Menu</a></h2> 4506 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Selected</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that allow a user to work with the selected<br /> objects in the current view.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4507 href="picture-266?mode=zoom"><img 4508 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P266.GIF" 4509 alt="PICTURE 266" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10716 </pre> 10717 10718 10719 10720 10721 10722 10723 10724 10725 10726 <hr /> 10727 <a name="LEN Selected Menu"></a> 10728 10729 10730 10731 10732 <h2><a name="LEN Selected Menu">2.2.101 Selected Menu</a></h2> 10733 10734 10735 10736 10737 10738 10739 10740 10741 10742 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Selected</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that allow a user to work with the selected<br /> objects in the current view.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-266?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 266" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P266.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4510 10743 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Selected</b> choice on the menu bar in each window that<br /> provides a menu bar if any objects in that window can be<br /> selected and displayed in another window, printed, or operated<br /> on by some other action other than those provided in the <b>Edit</b><br />menu, unless those choices are provided on push buttons in the<br />window. For example, provide a <b>Selected</b> choice in a container<br /> to allow a user to open selected objects that are in that<br /> container.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4511 10744 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Include in the <b>Selected</b> menu choices that apply to the selected<br /> object or group of objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If nothing is currently selected, include in the <b>Selected</b> menu<br /> of a view only choices displayed with unavailable-state emphasis<br /> that apply to the object on which the cursor is currently<br /> positioned. For example, provide in the <b>Selected</b> menu of a<br /> folder choices that are specific to a document object if the<br /> object on which the cursor is currently positioned is a<br /> document.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not display choices that can never apply to the selected<br /> object, or object on which the cursor is positioned if nothing<br /> is selected, even if those choices could apply to other objects<br /> in another context in the same view. For example, if a user<br /> moves the cursor from a container object to a data object,<br /> remove from the <b>Selected</b> menu those choices that can apply only<br /> to container objects and add choices that apply to data objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide an <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice for the selectable objects in a<br /> view, place it in the <b>Selected</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Print</b> choice for the selectable objects in a<br /> view, place it in the Selected menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide other object-specific choices as needed. For example,<br /> provide a <b>Send</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "S" as the mnemonic for the <b>Selected</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4514 10747 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.71?DT=19921204095534#HDROPENAS">"Open As (Choice)" in topic 2.2.71</a> 4515 10748 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.82?DT=19921204095534#HDRPRINT">"Print (Choice)" in topic 2.2.82</a> 4516 </pre> 4517 <hr /> 4518 <a name="LEN Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)" /> 4519 <h2><a name="LEN Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.102 10749 </pre> 10750 10751 10752 10753 10754 10755 10756 10757 10758 10759 <hr /> 10760 <a name="LEN Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)"></a> 10761 10762 10763 10764 10765 <h2><a name="LEN Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.102 4520 10766 Selected-State Emphasis (Cue)</a></h2> 4521 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Emphasis used on a choice or object to indicate that it is<br />selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4522 href="picture-267?mode=zoom"><img 4523 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P267.GIF" 4524 alt="PICTURE 267" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10767 10768 10769 10770 10771 10772 10773 10774 10775 10776 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Emphasis used on a choice or object to indicate that it is<br />selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-267?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 267" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P267.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4525 10777 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display selected-state emphasis on all selected choices and<br /> objects.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4526 10778 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display selected-state emphasis by changing the foreground and<br /> background colors of the selected object to those set in the<br /> operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display selected-state emphasis on all selected objects or<br /> groups of selected objects in all windows simultaneously.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4527 10779 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> 4528 </pre> 4529 <hr /> 4530 <a name="LEN Selection Types and Techniques" /> 4531 <h2><a name="LEN Selection Types and Techniques">2.2.103 10780 </pre> 10781 10782 10783 10784 10785 10786 10787 10788 10789 10790 <hr /> 10791 <a name="LEN Selection Types and Techniques"></a> 10792 10793 10794 10795 10796 <h2><a name="LEN Selection Types and Techniques">2.2.103 4532 10797 Selection 4533 10798 Types and Techniques</a></h2> 4534 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Methods that a user can employ to identify objects to which<br />actions are to be applied. The three types of selection are:<br />single selection, extended selection, and multiple selection.<br />The three techniques for selection are point selection,<br />point-to-endpoint selection, and random-point selection.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10799 10800 10801 10802 10803 10804 10805 10806 10807 10808 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Methods that a user can employ to identify objects to which<br />actions are to be applied. The three types of selection are:<br />single selection, extended selection, and multiple selection.<br />The three techniques for selection are point selection,<br />point-to-endpoint selection, and random-point selection.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4535 10809 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide selection techniques to allow a user to identify objects<br /> and choices for subsequent interaction.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4536 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display selected-state emphasis on an object to indicate that it<br /> is currently selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an action or settings choice is applied to a selected<br /> object, do not change the selection state of that object, unless<br /> changing the selection state of the object is a part of the<br /> operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not apply an action to an object as a result of selecting<br /> that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When only one object can be in the selected state at any time,<br /> provide single selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When any number of objects can be in the selected state at any<br /> time, provide multiple selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user will typically operate on one object at a time but<br /> multiple objects can be operated on at the same time, provide<br /> extended selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When extended selection is provided for a view, allow a keyboard<br /> user to press Shift+F8 to establish a mode in which the initial<br /> deselection is bypassed and the new selected objects are added<br /> or removed from the current group of selected objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When extended selection is provided for a view, allow a user<br /> using a pointing device to modify extended selection by pressing<br /> the Ctrl key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When single selection is provided for a view, deselect all<br /> objects in the scope when a user clicks a button on blank space,<br /> unless selection is required on at least one object at all<br /> times.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When multiple selection is provided for a view, do not affect<br /> the selection state of objects in the scope when a user clicks a<br /> button on blank space.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When extended selection is provided for a view, deselect all<br /> objects in the scope when a user clicks a button on blank space.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Refer to <a 4537 href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#FIGSINTYP">Figure 197</a>, <a 4538 href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#FIGMULTTYP">Figure 198</a>, and <a 4539 href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#FIGEXTTYP">Figure 199</a> to determine<br /> which selection techniques to provide for a view.<br /><br /><br /><a 4540 name="FIGSINTYP" id="FIGSINTYP" /><a name="TBLSINTYP" id="TBLSINTYP"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 197. Single Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Deselects |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | currently-selected|<br /> | | with pointer on | selected, press | object in |<br /> | | object to be | Ctrl+Spacebar; | selection scope; |<br /> | | selected. | also Spacebar if | selects single |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | identified |<br /> | | | used to type a | object. |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> In zero-based single-selection mode, selecting the |<br /> | currently-selected object does not deselect the object. To deselect |<br /> | the currently-selected object, select the <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> choice. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4541 name="FIGMULTTYP" id="FIGMULTTYP" /><a name="TBLMULTTYP" 4542 id="TBLMULTTYP"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 198. Multiple Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Toggles the |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | selection state |<br /> | | with pointer on | selected or | of the single |<br /> | | object to be | deselected, press | identified |<br /> | | selected or | Ctrl+Spacebar; | object; does not |<br /> | | deselected. | also spacebar if | affect the state |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | of other objects. |<br /> | | | used to type a | |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point-to-en|point | | |<br /> | selection | | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Area | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Marquee) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | | of the first |<br /> | | point and move | | object and make |<br /> | | the pointer to | | the selection |<br /> | | the end point; | | state of all |<br /> | | release the mouse | | objects within |<br /> | | selection button | | the identified |<br /> | | at the end point. | | area the same as |<br /> | | | | the new selection |<br /> | | | | state of the |<br /> | | | | first object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Press mouse | Press Shift at | Toggle the |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | the start point | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | and hold while | of the first |<br /> | | point and move | using | object and make |<br /> | | the pointer to | cursor-movement | the selection |<br /> | | the end point; | keys to move the | state of all |<br /> | | release the mouse | cursor to the end | other objects in |<br /> | | selection button | point; release | order from the |<br /> | | at the end point. | Shift at end | identified start |<br /> | | | point. | point to the |<br /> | | | | identified end |<br /> | | | | point the same as |<br /> | | | | the new selection |<br /> | | | | state of the |<br /> | | | | first object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Click mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Click) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | | of the first |<br /> | | point; press | | object and make |<br /> | | Shift and click | | the selection |<br /> | | the mouse | | state of all |<br /> | | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the end point, | | order from the |<br /> | | then release | | identified start |<br /> | | Shift key. | | point to the |<br /> | | | | identified |<br /> | | | | endpoint the same |<br /> | | | | as the new |<br /> | | | | selection state |<br /> | | | | of the first |<br /> | | | | object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Random-poin| | | |<br /> | selection | | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Random | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | with pointer on | | of the first |<br /> | | first object to | | object and make |<br /> | | be selected; | | the selection |<br /> | | move the pointer | | state of all |<br /> | | over other | | identified |<br /> | | objects to be | | objects in the |<br /> | | selected; release | | order the user |<br /> | | mouse selection | | identified the |<br /> | | button. | | objects the same |<br /> | | | | as the new |<br /> | | | | selection state |<br /> | | | | of the first |<br /> | | | | object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4543 name="FIGEXTTYP" id="FIGEXTTYP" /><a name="TBLEXTTYP" id="TBLEXTTYP"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 199. Extended Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Deselects all |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | other objects in |<br /> | | with pointer on | selected, press | selection scope; |<br /> | | object to be | Ctrl+Spacebar; | selects single |<br /> | | selected. | also spacebar if | identified |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | object. |<br /> | | | used to type a | |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Point-to-endpoint</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> |____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br /> | Area | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Marquee) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | | selection scope; |<br /> | | point and move | | selects all |<br /> | | the pointer to | | objects contained |<br /> | | the end point; | | within the |<br /> | | release the mouse | | identified area. |<br /> | | selection button | | |<br /> | | at the end point. | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Press mouse | Press Shift at | Deselects all |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | the start point | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | and hold while | selection scope; |<br /> | | point and move | using | selects all |<br /> | | the pointer to | cursor-movement | objects in order |<br /> | | the end point; | keys to move the | from the |<br /> | | release the mouse | cursor to the end | identified start |<br /> | | selection button | point; release | point to the |<br /> | | at the end point. | Shift at end | identified end |<br /> | | | point. | point. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Click mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Click) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | | selection scope; |<br /> | | point; press | | selects all |<br /> | | Shift and click | | objects in order |<br /> | | the mouse | | from the |<br /> | | selection button | | identified start |<br /> | | at the end point, | | point to the |<br /> | | then release | | identified end |<br /> | | Shift key. | | point. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Random-point</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> |____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br /> | Random | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | with pointer on | | selection scope; |<br /> | | first object to | | selects |<br /> | | be selected; | | individual |<br /> | | move the pointer | | objects in the |<br /> | | over other | | order the user |<br /> | | objects to be | | identified the |<br /> | | selected; release | | objects to be |<br /> | | mouse selection | | selected. |<br /> | | button. | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | <b>Modifying</b> <b>extended</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | When a user is using a mouse, pressing the Ctrl key while performing a |<br /> | selection technique allows the user to add objects to and remove |<br /> | objects from the current group of selected objects by bypassing the |<br /> | initial deselection. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point selection and random-point selection, pressing the Ctrl key |<br /> | while selecting an object or group of objects toggles the selection |<br /> | state of the first object or group of objects selected and that new |<br /> | state becomes the selection state of all objects selected thereafter |<br /> | until the Ctrl key is released. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point-to-endpoint selection, the selection state of the start point |<br /> | is toggled first and that new state becomes the selection state of all |<br /> | objects within the range or area. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point selection and random-point selection, pressing spacebar |<br /> | toggles the selection state of the identified object. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 10810 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display selected-state emphasis on an object to indicate that it<br /> is currently selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an action or settings choice is applied to a selected<br /> object, do not change the selection state of that object, unless<br /> changing the selection state of the object is a part of the<br /> operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not apply an action to an object as a result of selecting<br /> that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When only one object can be in the selected state at any time,<br /> provide single selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When any number of objects can be in the selected state at any<br /> time, provide multiple selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user will typically operate on one object at a time but<br /> multiple objects can be operated on at the same time, provide<br /> extended selection.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When extended selection is provided for a view, allow a keyboard<br /> user to press Shift+F8 to establish a mode in which the initial<br /> deselection is bypassed and the new selected objects are added<br /> or removed from the current group of selected objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When extended selection is provided for a view, allow a user<br /> using a pointing device to modify extended selection by pressing<br /> the Ctrl key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When single selection is provided for a view, deselect all<br /> objects in the scope when a user clicks a button on blank space,<br /> unless selection is required on at least one object at all<br /> times.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When multiple selection is provided for a view, do not affect<br /> the selection state of objects in the scope when a user clicks a<br /> button on blank space.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When extended selection is provided for a view, deselect all<br /> objects in the scope when a user clicks a button on blank space.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Refer to <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#FIGSINTYP">Figure 197</a>, <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#FIGMULTTYP">Figure 198</a>, and <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#FIGEXTTYP">Figure 199</a> to determine<br /> which selection techniques to provide for a view.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGSINTYP" name="FIGSINTYP"></a><a id="TBLSINTYP" name="TBLSINTYP"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 197. Single Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Deselects |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | currently-selected|<br /> | | with pointer on | selected, press | object in |<br /> | | object to be | Ctrl+Spacebar; | selection scope; |<br /> | | selected. | also Spacebar if | selects single |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | identified |<br /> | | | used to type a | object. |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> In zero-based single-selection mode, selecting the |<br /> | currently-selected object does not deselect the object. To deselect |<br /> | the currently-selected object, select the <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> choice. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMULTTYP" name="FIGMULTTYP"></a><a id="TBLMULTTYP" name="TBLMULTTYP"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 198. Multiple Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Toggles the |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | selection state |<br /> | | with pointer on | selected or | of the single |<br /> | | object to be | deselected, press | identified |<br /> | | selected or | Ctrl+Spacebar; | object; does not |<br /> | | deselected. | also spacebar if | affect the state |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | of other objects. |<br /> | | | used to type a | |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point-to-en|point | | |<br /> | selection | | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Area | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Marquee) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | | of the first |<br /> | | point and move | | object and make |<br /> | | the pointer to | | the selection |<br /> | | the end point; | | state of all |<br /> | | release the mouse | | objects within |<br /> | | selection button | | the identified |<br /> | | at the end point. | | area the same as |<br /> | | | | the new selection |<br /> | | | | state of the |<br /> | | | | first object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Press mouse | Press Shift at | Toggle the |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | the start point | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | and hold while | of the first |<br /> | | point and move | using | object and make |<br /> | | the pointer to | cursor-movement | the selection |<br /> | | the end point; | keys to move the | state of all |<br /> | | release the mouse | cursor to the end | other objects in |<br /> | | selection button | point; release | order from the |<br /> | | at the end point. | Shift at end | identified start |<br /> | | | point. | point to the |<br /> | | | | identified end |<br /> | | | | point the same as |<br /> | | | | the new selection |<br /> | | | | state of the |<br /> | | | | first object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Click mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Click) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | at the start | | of the first |<br /> | | point; press | | object and make |<br /> | | Shift and click | | the selection |<br /> | | the mouse | | state of all |<br /> | | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the end point, | | order from the |<br /> | | then release | | identified start |<br /> | | Shift key. | | point to the |<br /> | | | | identified |<br /> | | | | endpoint the same |<br /> | | | | as the new |<br /> | | | | selection state |<br /> | | | | of the first |<br /> | | | | object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Random-poin| | | |<br /> | selection | | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Random | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Toggle the |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | | selection state |<br /> | | with pointer on | | of the first |<br /> | | first object to | | object and make |<br /> | | be selected; | | the selection |<br /> | | move the pointer | | state of all |<br /> | | over other | | identified |<br /> | | objects to be | | objects in the |<br /> | | selected; release | | order the user |<br /> | | mouse selection | | identified the |<br /> | | button. | | objects the same |<br /> | | | | as the new |<br /> | | | | selection state |<br /> | | | | of the first |<br /> | | | | object. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGEXTTYP" name="FIGEXTTYP"></a><a id="TBLEXTTYP" name="TBLEXTTYP"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 199. Extended Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Deselects all |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | other objects in |<br /> | | with pointer on | selected, press | selection scope; |<br /> | | object to be | Ctrl+Spacebar; | selects single |<br /> | | selected. | also spacebar if | identified |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | object. |<br /> | | | used to type a | |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Point-to-endpoint</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> |____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br /> | Area | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Marquee) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | | selection scope; |<br /> | | point and move | | selects all |<br /> | | the pointer to | | objects contained |<br /> | | the end point; | | within the |<br /> | | release the mouse | | identified area. |<br /> | | selection button | | |<br /> | | at the end point. | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Press mouse | Press Shift at | Deselects all |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | the start point | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | and hold while | selection scope; |<br /> | | point and move | using | selects all |<br /> | | the pointer to | cursor-movement | objects in order |<br /> | | the end point; | keys to move the | from the |<br /> | | release the mouse | cursor to the end | identified start |<br /> | | selection button | point; release | point to the |<br /> | | at the end point. | Shift at end | identified end |<br /> | | | point. | point. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Range | Click mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Click) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | at the start | | selection scope; |<br /> | | point; press | | selects all |<br /> | | Shift and click | | objects in order |<br /> | | the mouse | | from the |<br /> | | selection button | | identified start |<br /> | | at the end point, | | point to the |<br /> | | then release | | identified end |<br /> | | Shift key. | | point. |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Random-point</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> |____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br /> | Random | Press mouse | Not applicable. | Deselects all |<br /> | (Swipe) | selection button | | other objects in |<br /> | | with pointer on | | selection scope; |<br /> | | first object to | | selects |<br /> | | be selected; | | individual |<br /> | | move the pointer | | objects in the |<br /> | | over other | | order the user |<br /> | | objects to be | | identified the |<br /> | | selected; release | | objects to be |<br /> | | mouse selection | | selected. |<br /> | | button. | | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | <b>Modifying</b> <b>extended</b> <b>selection</b> |<br /> | |<br /> | When a user is using a mouse, pressing the Ctrl key while performing a |<br /> | selection technique allows the user to add objects to and remove |<br /> | objects from the current group of selected objects by bypassing the |<br /> | initial deselection. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point selection and random-point selection, pressing the Ctrl key |<br /> | while selecting an object or group of objects toggles the selection |<br /> | state of the first object or group of objects selected and that new |<br /> | state becomes the selection state of all objects selected thereafter |<br /> | until the Ctrl key is released. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point-to-endpoint selection, the selection state of the start point |<br /> | is toggled first and that new state becomes the selection state of all |<br /> | objects within the range or area. |<br /> | |<br /> | In point selection and random-point selection, pressing spacebar |<br /> | toggles the selection state of the identified object. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4544 10811 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.34?DT=19921204095534#HDREXSEL">"Extended Selection" in topic 2.2.34</a> 4545 10812 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.66?DT=19921204095534#HDRMULTSEL">"Multiple Selection" in topic 2.2.66</a> … … 4554 10821 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.89?DT=19921204095534#HDRTSWPSEL">"Random-Point Selection" in topic 2.2.89</a> 4555 10822 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.100?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELALLC">"Select All and Deselect All (Choice)" in topic 2.2.100</a> 4556 </pre> 4557 <hr /> 4558 <a name="LEN Separator" /> 4559 <h2><a name="LEN Separator">2.2.104 Separator</a></h2> 4560 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A boundary, such as blank space, a line, or color change, that<br />provides a visual distinction between two adjacent areas.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4561 href="picture-268?mode=zoom"><img 4562 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P268.GIF" 4563 alt="PICTURE 268" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10823 </pre> 10824 10825 10826 10827 10828 10829 10830 10831 10832 10833 <hr /> 10834 <a name="LEN Separator"></a> 10835 10836 10837 10838 10839 <h2><a name="LEN Separator">2.2.104 Separator</a></h2> 10840 10841 10842 10843 10844 10845 10846 10847 10848 10849 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A boundary, such as blank space, a line, or color change, that<br />provides a visual distinction between two adjacent areas.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-268?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 268" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P268.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4564 10850 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a separator to visually separate choices into distinct<br /> choice groups in menus and fields of controls into distinct<br /> groups in windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4565 10851 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use blank space as a separator, except in menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In menus, use a line as a separator.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4569 10855 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.42?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPBX">"Group Box" in topic 2.2.42</a> 4570 10856 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 4571 </pre> 4572 <hr /> 4573 <a name="LEN Settings (Choice Type)" /> 4574 <h2><a name="LEN Settings (Choice Type)">2.2.105 Settings 10857 </pre> 10858 10859 10860 10861 10862 10863 10864 10865 10866 10867 <hr /> 10868 <a name="LEN Settings (Choice Type)"></a> 10869 10870 10871 10872 10873 <h2><a name="LEN Settings (Choice Type)">2.2.105 10874 Settings 4575 10875 (Choice 4576 10876 Type)</a></h2> 4577 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A choice that allows a user to change a property of an object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4578 href="picture-269?mode=zoom"><img 4579 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P269.GIF" 4580 alt="PICTURE 269" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10877 10878 10879 10880 10881 10882 10883 10884 10885 10886 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A choice that allows a user to change a property of an object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-269?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 269" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P269.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4581 10887 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a settings choice to allow a user to change a property of an<br /> object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4582 10888 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display settings choices in a notebook.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid placing settings choices on push buttons or in menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to place settings choices in menus as a<br /> customization option.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a menu contains a group of settings choices that are not<br /> mutually exclusive, display a check mark to the left of each<br /> choice that has been selected. Remove the check mark when the<br /> choice no longer applies to the object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a menu contains a group of settings choices that are mutually<br /> exclusive, display unavailable-state emphasis on the choice that<br /> currently applies. Remove the unavailable-state emphasis when<br /> the choice no longer applies.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects a settings choice, immediately apply the<br /> choice to the selected object or group of objects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If it is not practical to apply settings choices to an object<br /> immediately, provide a sample within the window that<br /> demonstrates the change that will occur when the settings are<br /> applied. For example, instead of applying a font change to a<br /> large document immediately, display sample text with the new<br /> font selection and provide an <b>Apply</b> push button that applies the<br /> selected font to the text in the document when the user makes a<br /> final decision.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4586 10892 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4587 10893 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a> 4588 </pre> 4589 <hr /> 4590 <a name="LEN Shortcut Key" /> 4591 <h2><a name="LEN Shortcut Key">2.2.106 Shortcut Key</a></h2> 4592 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A key or combination of keys that a user can press to perform an<br />action that is available from a menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4593 href="picture-270?mode=zoom"><img 4594 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P270.GIF" 4595 alt="PICTURE 270" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10894 </pre> 10895 10896 10897 10898 10899 10900 10901 10902 10903 10904 <hr /> 10905 <a name="LEN Shortcut Key"></a> 10906 10907 10908 10909 10910 <h2><a name="LEN Shortcut Key">2.2.106 Shortcut Key</a></h2> 10911 10912 10913 10914 10915 10916 10917 10918 10919 10920 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A key or combination of keys that a user can press to perform an<br />action that is available from a menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-270?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 270" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P270.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4596 10921 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the predefined shortcut key assignment for each<br /> predefined choice in a menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a unique shortcut key assignment for each<br /> frequently-used choice in a menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4597 10922 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a choice in a menu has a shortcut key assignment, display it<br /> next to that choice in the menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Left-align shortcut keys to the right of the choices in a menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to hide or display shortcut keys. For example,<br /> provide in a settings view of an object a check box choice<br /> labeled <b>Display</b> <b>shortcut</b> <b>keys.</b> 4598 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Ship products with shortcut keys not displayed as the default.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Include all shortcut key assignments in keys help.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to change shortcut key assignments.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user can change shortcut key assignments, display the new<br /> assignments in menus and list the new assignments in keys help.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user turns off the display of shortcut keys in menus,<br /> continue to provide access to the choices that are displayed in<br /> the menus using shortcut keys.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When displaying shortcut keys, use a plus sign (+) between the<br /> key names to indicate that a user must press two or more keys<br /> at the same time. For example, use Alt+F4 for the <b>Close</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Perform the function assigned to a shortcut key only if it is<br /> assigned within the active window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If short menus are displayed, do not perform functions assigned<br /> to choices displayed only in full menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Perform the identical function, whether a user presses the<br /> shortcut key or selects the associated choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a shortcut key uses an alphabetic character, apply the choice<br /> if a user presses either the uppercase or lowercase character.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Identify shortcut keys by their actual key-top engravings.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not assign more than one shortcut key to the same function.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign the same shortcut key for the same choice in all windows<br /> that provide that choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the Ctrl key as part of product-specific shortcut key<br /> assignments.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using the Alt key as part of the shortcut key assignment.<br /> Alt should be used for mnemonic access only.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign shortcut keys as in <a 4599 href="2.2.106?DT=19921204095534#FIGRECSHRT">Figure 200</a>:<br /><br /><br /><a 4600 name="FIGRECSHRT" id="FIGRECSHRT" /><a name="TBLRECSHRT" 4601 id="TBLRECSHRT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 200. Shortcut Key Assignments |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Function</b> | <b>Shortcut</b> <b>key</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Clear | Delete (unless a Delete choice is |<br /> | | also provided) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Close | Alt+F4 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Copy | Ctrl+Insert |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Create | Alt+Insert |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Cut | Shift+Delete |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Delete | Delete |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Deselect all | Ctrl+\ |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | General help | F2 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Help index | F11 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Hide | Alt+F9 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Keys help | F9 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Maximize | Alt+F10 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Minimize | Alt+F9 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Move | Alt+F7 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Paste | Shift+Insert |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Redo | Shift+Alt+__(backspace) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Refresh now | F5 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Restore | Alt+F5 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Select all | Ctrl+/ |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Size | Alt+F8 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Tutorial | Shift+F2 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Undo | Alt+__(backspace) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Using help | Shift+F10 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Window list (in the system menu) | Ctrl+Esc |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 10923 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Ship products with shortcut keys not displayed as the default.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Include all shortcut key assignments in keys help.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to change shortcut key assignments.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user can change shortcut key assignments, display the new<br /> assignments in menus and list the new assignments in keys help.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user turns off the display of shortcut keys in menus,<br /> continue to provide access to the choices that are displayed in<br /> the menus using shortcut keys.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When displaying shortcut keys, use a plus sign (+) between the<br /> key names to indicate that a user must press two or more keys<br /> at the same time. For example, use Alt+F4 for the <b>Close</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Perform the function assigned to a shortcut key only if it is<br /> assigned within the active window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If short menus are displayed, do not perform functions assigned<br /> to choices displayed only in full menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Perform the identical function, whether a user presses the<br /> shortcut key or selects the associated choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a shortcut key uses an alphabetic character, apply the choice<br /> if a user presses either the uppercase or lowercase character.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Identify shortcut keys by their actual key-top engravings.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not assign more than one shortcut key to the same function.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign the same shortcut key for the same choice in all windows<br /> that provide that choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use the Ctrl key as part of product-specific shortcut key<br /> assignments.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using the Alt key as part of the shortcut key assignment.<br /> Alt should be used for mnemonic access only.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign shortcut keys as in <a href="2.2.106?DT=19921204095534#FIGRECSHRT">Figure 200</a>:<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGRECSHRT" name="FIGRECSHRT"></a><a id="TBLRECSHRT" name="TBLRECSHRT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 200. Shortcut Key Assignments |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Function</b> | <b>Shortcut</b> <b>key</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Clear | Delete (unless a Delete choice is |<br /> | | also provided) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Close | Alt+F4 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Copy | Ctrl+Insert |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Create | Alt+Insert |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Cut | Shift+Delete |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Delete | Delete |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Deselect all | Ctrl+\ |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | General help | F2 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Help index | F11 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Hide | Alt+F9 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Keys help | F9 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Maximize | Alt+F10 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Minimize | Alt+F9 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Move | Alt+F7 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Paste | Shift+Insert |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Redo | Shift+Alt+__(backspace) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Refresh now | F5 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Restore | Alt+F5 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Select all | Ctrl+/ |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Size | Alt+F8 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Tutorial | Shift+F2 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Undo | Alt+__(backspace) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Using help | Shift+F10 (in a Help window only) |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Window list (in the system menu) | Ctrl+Esc |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4602 10924 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 4603 10925 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.63?DT=19921204095534#HDRMNEM">"Mnemonic" in topic 2.2.63</a> … … 4605 10927 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.59?DT=19921204095534#HDRMENUS">"Menu (Control)" in topic 2.2.59</a> 4606 10928 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.107?DT=19921204095534#HDRSFMENUS">"Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)" in topic 2.2.107</a> 4607 </pre> 4608 <hr /> 4609 <a name="LEN Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)" /> 4610 <h2><a name="LEN Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)">2.2.107 10929 </pre> 10930 10931 10932 10933 10934 10935 10936 10937 10938 10939 <hr /> 10940 <a name="LEN Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)"></a> 10941 10942 10943 10944 10945 <h2><a name="LEN Short Menus and Full Menus (Choice)">2.2.107 4611 10946 Short 4612 10947 Menus and Full Menus (Choice)</a></h2> 4613 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Choices that allow a user to change the number of choices that<br />appear in menus. Short menus contain a limited number of<br />choices. Full menus contain all the possible choices for the<br />window that they are associated with. When a user selects<br />either the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> or the <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> choice, any or all<br /> menus are affected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4614 href="picture-271?mode=zoom"><img 4615 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P271.GIF" 4616 alt="PICTURE 271" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10948 10949 10950 10951 10952 10953 10954 10955 10956 10957 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Choices that allow a user to change the number of choices that<br />appear in menus. Short menus contain a limited number of<br />choices. Full menus contain all the possible choices for the<br />window that they are associated with. When a user selects<br />either the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> or the <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> choice, any or all<br /> menus are affected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-271?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 271" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P271.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4617 10958 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide both a <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> choice and a <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> choice for an<br /> object that has a large number of choices and there is a useful<br /> subset of choices for new users. This presents a simpler<br /> interface for the new user to learn.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4618 10959 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> and the <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> choices and<br /> you provide settings views, place the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> and <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b><br />choices in the settings view of the object as radio buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> and <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> choices and you do<br /> not provide settings views, place the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> and <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b><br />choices in the <b>Options</b> menu in the window displaying a view of<br /> that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Include in the short menus the minimum number of choices<br /> necessary to accomplish useful work. For example, in making<br /> this decision, developers might consider which choices might be<br /> offered in higher-priced and lower-priced versions of the<br /> product and separate them along those lines.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When displaying short menus, do not reserve space for choices<br /> that are included in the full menus but are not displayed in the<br /> short menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When displaying short menus, do not support shortcut keys for<br /> choices that are included in the full menus but are not<br /> displayed in the short menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user selects the <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> choice from the <b>Options</b> menu,<br /> display the choice with unavailable-state emphasis until the<br /> user selects the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user selects the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> choice from the <b>Options</b> menu,<br /> display the choice with unavailable-state emphasis until the<br /> user selects the <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Do not change the location of a choice from one pull-down menu<br /> to another when a user changes from full menus to short menus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When selecting the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> choice would remove all choices<br /> from a pull-down menu, remove that menu bar choice from the menu<br /> bar rather than displaying the menu bar choice with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When selecting the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> choice would remove all choices<br /> in a cascaded menu, remove the choice that causes the cascaded<br /> menu to be displayed rather than displaying that choice with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When selecting the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> choice would reduce a cascaded<br /> menu to only one choice, do not use a cascaded menu. Instead,<br /> replace the cascading choice with the choice from the cascaded<br /> menu. For example, if <b>Icons</b> is the only choice that would<br /> cascade from the <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice, change the name to <b>Open</b> <b>as</b><br /><b>icons</b> and do not make it a cascading choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> choice the default to allow new users to<br /> easily use a product to accomplish basic tasks.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "S" as the mnemonic for the <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> choice that<br /> appears in the <b>Options</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "F" as the mnemonic for the <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> choice that<br /> appears in the <b>Options</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4622 10963 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.88?DT=19921204095534#HDRRADIOB">"Radio Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.88</a> 4623 10964 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.105?DT=19921204095534#HDRSETTING">"Settings (Choice Type)" in topic 2.2.105</a> 4624 </pre> 4625 <hr /> 4626 <a name="LEN Single Selection" /> 4627 <h2><a name="LEN Single Selection">2.2.108 Single 10965 </pre> 10966 10967 10968 10969 10970 10971 10972 10973 10974 10975 <hr /> 10976 <a name="LEN Single Selection"></a> 10977 10978 10979 10980 10981 <h2><a name="LEN Single Selection">2.2.108 Single 4628 10982 Selection</a></h2> 4629 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A type of selection that allows a user to have only one object<br />in the selected state at any one time.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 10983 10984 10985 10986 10987 10988 10989 10990 10991 10992 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A type of selection that allows a user to have only one object<br />in the selected state at any one time.<br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4630 10993 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use single selection when only one object can be operated on at<br /> a time.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4631 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> See <a href="2.2.108?DT=19921204095534#FIGSIN">Figure 201</a> to determine which single selection techniques to<br /> use.<br /><br /><br /><a 4632 name="FIGSIN" id="FIGSIN" /><a name="TBLSIN" id="TBLSIN"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 201. Single Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Deselects |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | currently-selected|<br /> | | with pointer on | selected, press | object in |<br /> | | object to be | Ctrl+Spacebar; | selection scope; |<br /> | | selected. | also Spacebar if | selects single |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | identified |<br /> | | | used to type a | object. |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> In zero-based single-selection mode, selecting the |<br /> | currently-selected object does not deselect the object. To deselect |<br /> | the currently-selected object, select the <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> choice. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use automatic selection as a convenience to a user when one<br /> object must always be selected, such as in a list box used to<br /> display a list of fonts.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 10994 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> See <a href="2.2.108?DT=19921204095534#FIGSIN">Figure 201</a> to determine which single selection techniques to<br /> use.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGSIN" name="FIGSIN"></a><a id="TBLSIN" name="TBLSIN"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 201. Single Selection Techniques |<br />|____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________|<br />| <b>Technique</b> | <b>Mouse</b> | <b>Keyboard</b> | <b>Result</b> |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | Point | Click mouse | With cursor on | Deselects |<br /> | selection | selection button | object to be | currently-selected|<br /> | | with pointer on | selected, press | object in |<br /> | | object to be | Ctrl+Spacebar; | selection scope; |<br /> | | selected. | also Spacebar if | selects single |<br /> | | | spacebar is not | identified |<br /> | | | used to type a | object. |<br /> | | | space. | |<br /> |____________|___________________|___________________|___________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> In zero-based single-selection mode, selecting the |<br /> | currently-selected object does not deselect the object. To deselect |<br /> | the currently-selected object, select the <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> choice. |<br /> |________________________________________________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use automatic selection as a convenience to a user when one<br /> object must always be selected, such as in a list box used to<br /> display a list of fonts.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4633 10995 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.7?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUTOSEL">"Automatic Selection" in topic 2.2.7</a> 4634 10996 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.103?DT=19921204095534#HDRSELTECH">"Selection Types and Techniques" in topic 2.2.103</a> … … 4638 11000 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.64?DT=19921204095534#HDRMOUSE">"Mouse" in topic 2.2.64</a> 4639 11001 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.66?DT=19921204095534#HDRMULTSEL">"Multiple Selection" in topic 2.2.66</a> 4640 </pre> 4641 <hr /> 4642 <a name="LEN Size (Choice)" /> 4643 <h2><a name="LEN Size (Choice)">2.2.109 Size (Choice)</a></h2> 4644 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that allows a user to change the size of a<br />window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4645 href="picture-272?mode=zoom"><img 4646 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P272.GIF" 4647 alt="PICTURE 272" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11002 </pre> 11003 11004 11005 11006 11007 11008 11009 11010 11011 11012 <hr /> 11013 <a name="LEN Size (Choice)"></a> 11014 11015 11016 11017 11018 <h2><a name="LEN Size (Choice)">2.2.109 Size (Choice)</a></h2> 11019 11020 11021 11022 11023 11024 11025 11026 11027 11028 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that allows a user to change the size of a<br />window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-272?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 272" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P272.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4648 11029 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Size</b> choice when a user can change the size of a<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4649 11030 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Size</b> choice, place it in the system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Size</b> choice, use the operating<br /> environment's mechanism that allows a user to change the size of<br /> a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+F8 as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Size</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "S" as the mnemonic for the <b>Size</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4655 11036 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.92?DT=19921204095534#HDRRESTORE">"Restore (Choice)" in topic 2.2.92</a> 4656 11037 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 4657 </pre> 4658 <hr /> 4659 <a name="LEN Slider (Control)" /> 4660 <h2><a name="LEN Slider (Control)">2.2.110 Slider 11038 </pre> 11039 11040 11041 11042 11043 11044 11045 11046 11047 11048 <hr /> 11049 <a name="LEN Slider (Control)"></a> 11050 11051 11052 11053 11054 <h2><a name="LEN Slider (Control)">2.2.110 Slider 4661 11055 (Control)</a></h2> 4662 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that represents a quantity and its relationship to the<br />range of possible values for that quantity. The control also<br />allows a user to change the value of the quantity. The slider<br />consists of a slider arm, slider shaft, and optionally, detents,<br />a scale and slider buttons.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4663 href="picture-273?mode=zoom"><img 4664 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P273.GIF" 4665 alt="PICTURE 273" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11056 11057 11058 11059 11060 11061 11062 11063 11064 11065 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that represents a quantity and its relationship to the<br />range of possible values for that quantity. The control also<br />allows a user to change the value of the quantity. The slider<br />consists of a slider arm, slider shaft, and optionally, detents,<br />a scale and slider buttons.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-273?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 273" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P273.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4666 11066 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a slider when it is useful to see the current value relative<br /> to the range of possible values.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4667 11067 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user cannot change the value displayed in a slider, do not<br /> display a slider arm or slider buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a scale to indicate the units of measure represented by<br /> the slider. For example, provide an incremental scale in units<br /> of millimeters to indicate length or provide an incremental<br /> scale in units of minutes to indicate time.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide slider buttons to allow the user to move one smallest<br /> increment.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide additional controls that can affect the slider setting.<br /> For example, provide a <b>Reset</b> push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a scale is displayed, allow a user to change the units of<br /> measure that the scale represents. For example, allow the user<br /> to change the scale from inches to millimeters.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to set the exact value represented by the detent,<br /> unless the slider is read-only.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide detents to allow a user to easily set values that have<br /> special meaning. For example, on a slider used to set<br /> temperature for heating a room, provide a detent at 68 degrees.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to specify or change the value or values for which<br /> a detent will be displayed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the exact value of the quantity represented is important to a<br /> user, provide a separate control in addition to the slider to<br /> display the value. For example, use an entry field to display<br /> the current value represented by the slider.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Fill the slider shaft when the proportion of the value is more<br /> important than the value itself. For example, in a progress<br /> indicator to show relative amount of process completed and not<br /> completed.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you fill a slider shaft, fill horizontal sliders from the<br /> left to the slider arm and vertical sliders from the bottom to<br /> the slider arm.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4669 11069 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.84?DT=19921204095534#HDRPROGIND">"Progress Indicator" in topic 2.2.84</a> 4670 11070 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.97?DT=19921204095534#HDRSCROLLB">"Scroll Bar" in topic 2.2.97</a> 4671 </pre> 4672 <hr /> 4673 <a name="LEN Sort (Choice)" /> 4674 <h2><a name="LEN Sort (Choice)">2.2.111 Sort (Choice)</a></h2> 4675 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A routing choice that displays an action window or a cascaded<br />menu that allows a user to arrange the objects in a view into a<br />specified order.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4676 href="picture-274?mode=zoom"><img 4677 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P274.GIF" 4678 alt="PICTURE 274" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11071 </pre> 11072 11073 11074 11075 11076 11077 11078 11079 11080 11081 <hr /> 11082 <a name="LEN Sort (Choice)"></a> 11083 11084 11085 11086 11087 <h2><a name="LEN Sort (Choice)">2.2.111 Sort (Choice)</a></h2> 11088 11089 11090 11091 11092 11093 11094 11095 11096 11097 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A routing choice that displays an action window or a cascaded<br />menu that allows a user to arrange the objects in a view into a<br />specified order.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-274?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 274" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P274.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4679 11098 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Sort</b> choice for all objects whose contents can be<br /> sorted in a way that is meaningful to a user.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Sort</b> choice to allow a user to sort the contents of<br /> the current view into a particular order and to maintain that<br /> order as new objects are added to the object displayed in the<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4680 11099 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a <b>Sort</b> choice, and you provide a <b>View</b> menu, place<br /> the <b>Sort</b> choice in the <b>View</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the contents of a view are sorted, indicate the sorting<br /> order. For example, display "A-Z" in the status area to<br /> indicate that the view was sorted alphabetically.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display an action window or a cascaded menu to allow a user to<br /> specify the sort criteria.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an object is added to a group of objects that are<br /> maintained in a specific order, place the new object in its<br /> correct position.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If an object is added to a group of sorted objects, but its<br /> position is not currently visible, provide an indication that it<br /> was accepted. For example, increase the count displayed in the<br /> status area by one.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "S" as the mnemonic for the <b>Sort</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4681 11100 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.116?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTATUSA">"Status Area (Cue)" in topic 2.2.116</a> 4682 11101 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.126?DT=19921204095534#HDRVIEW">"View Menu" in topic 2.2.126</a> 4683 </pre> 4684 <hr /> 4685 <a name="LEN Source Emphasis (Cue)" /> 4686 <h2><a name="LEN Source Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.112 Source 11102 </pre> 11103 11104 11105 11106 11107 11108 11109 11110 11111 11112 <hr /> 11113 <a name="LEN Source Emphasis (Cue)"></a> 11114 11115 11116 11117 11118 <h2><a name="LEN Source Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.112 11119 Source 4687 11120 Emphasis 4688 11121 (Cue)</a></h2> 4689 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visible cue that indicates the source object of a<br />direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4690 href="picture-275?mode=zoom"><img 4691 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P275.GIF" 4692 alt="PICTURE 275" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11122 11123 11124 11125 11126 11127 11128 11129 11130 11131 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visible cue that indicates the source object of a<br />direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-275?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 275" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P275.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4693 11132 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display source emphasis on an object during a<br /> direct-manipulation operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4694 11133 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display source emphasis by reducing the contrast of the object<br /> being manipulated. For example, change an object's icon by<br /> changing every other pel to the background color thus making the<br /> icon appear to dim.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4695 11134 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 4696 </pre> 4697 <hr /> 4698 <a name="LEN Spin Button (Control)" /> 4699 <h2><a name="LEN Spin Button (Control)">2.2.113 Spin Button 11135 </pre> 11136 11137 11138 11139 11140 11141 11142 11143 11144 11145 <hr /> 11146 <a name="LEN Spin Button (Control)"></a> 11147 11148 11149 11150 11151 <h2><a name="LEN Spin Button (Control)">2.2.113 Spin 11152 Button 4700 11153 (Control)</a></h2> 4701 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control used to display, in sequence, a ring of related but<br />mutually exclusive choices. It contains a field that can accept<br />user input, which allows a user to make a selection by typing a<br />valid choice, or a field that can display a value that the user<br />can merely accept. The user can change the value by spinning<br />through the ring of choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4702 href="picture-276?mode=zoom"><img 4703 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P276.GIF" 4704 alt="PICTURE 276" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11154 11155 11156 11157 11158 11159 11160 11161 11162 11163 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control used to display, in sequence, a ring of related but<br />mutually exclusive choices. It contains a field that can accept<br />user input, which allows a user to make a selection by typing a<br />valid choice, or a field that can display a value that the user<br />can merely accept. The user can change the value by spinning<br />through the ring of choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-276?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 276" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P276.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4705 11164 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a spin button to display a list of choices that have a<br /> logical consecutive order. For example, use a spin button for a<br /> list of the months of the year. When a list of choices does not<br /> have a logical consecutive order, use a drop-down list or<br /> drop-down combination box.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4706 11165 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When all the possible values are in the list of choices, make<br /> the spin button field a read-only field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When all the possible values are not included in the list of<br /> choices, make the spin button field an entry field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When using a spin button for alphabetical values, move down the<br /> order when a user selects the Down Arrow and back up the order<br /> when a user selects the Up Arrow. For example, if the letter<br /> "S" is currently displayed and a user selects the Up Arrow,<br /> display the letter "R;" if a user selects the Down Arrow,<br /> display the letter "T."<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When using a spin button for a value that represents magnitude,<br /> such as a list of numbers, display a larger value when a user<br /> selects the Up Arrow and a smaller value when a user selects the<br /> Down Arrow.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Present the choices as a ring of choices that wrap. For<br /> example, if a user is at the largest number and presses the Up<br /> Arrow, the smallest number is displayed and vice versa so that<br /> the user can spin through the all the choices by pressing the<br /> same arrow.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4710 11169 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.30?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDC">"Drop-Down Combination Box (Control)" in topic 2.2.30</a> 4711 11170 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.31?DT=19921204095534#HDRDROPDL">"Drop-Down List (Control)" in topic 2.2.31</a> 4712 </pre> 4713 <hr /> 4714 <a name="LEN Split (Choice)" /> 4715 <h2><a name="LEN Split (Choice)">2.2.114 Split (Choice)</a></h2> 4716 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that allows a user to divide a window to<br />display a view of an object in more than one pane of a window<br />and to subsequently change the sizes of the panes.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4717 href="picture-277?mode=zoom"><img 4718 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P277.GIF" 4719 alt="PICTURE 277" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11171 </pre> 11172 11173 11174 11175 11176 11177 11178 11179 11180 11181 <hr /> 11182 <a name="LEN Split (Choice)"></a> 11183 11184 11185 11186 11187 <h2><a name="LEN Split (Choice)">2.2.114 Split 11188 (Choice)</a></h2> 11189 11190 11191 11192 11193 11194 11195 11196 11197 11198 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that allows a user to divide a window to<br />display a view of an object in more than one pane of a window<br />and to subsequently change the sizes of the panes.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-277?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 277" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P277.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4720 11199 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Split</b> choice for each window that can be split or is<br /> currently split.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4721 11200 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Split</b> choice, place it in the system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Split</b> choice and the window has not<br /> previously been split, display a split bar and allow the user to<br /> position the split bar in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Split</b> choice and the window has<br /> previously been split, allow the user to reposition the current<br /> split bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "P" as the mnemonic for the <b>Split</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4722 11201 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.115?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPLTWIN">"Split Window" in topic 2.2.115</a> 4723 11202 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.117?DT=19921204095534#HDRSYSMENU">"System Menu" in topic 2.2.117</a> 4724 </pre> 4725 <hr /> 4726 <a name="LEN Split Window" /> 4727 <h2><a name="LEN Split Window">2.2.115 Split Window</a></h2> 4728 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that contains a split bar that allows a user to display<br />a view of an object in different panes of a window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4729 href="picture-278?mode=zoom"><img 4730 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P278.GIF" 4731 alt="PICTURE 278" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11203 </pre> 11204 11205 11206 11207 11208 11209 11210 11211 11212 11213 <hr /> 11214 <a name="LEN Split Window"></a> 11215 11216 11217 11218 11219 <h2><a name="LEN Split Window">2.2.115 Split Window</a></h2> 11220 11221 11222 11223 11224 11225 11226 11227 11228 11229 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that contains a split bar that allows a user to display<br />a view of an object in different panes of a window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-278?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 278" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P278.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4732 11230 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a split window when it is useful for a user to display a<br /> view of an object in different panes of a window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4733 11231 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to change the size of a pane by selecting the <b>Split</b><br />choice or by directly manipulating a split bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> To split a window horizontally, provide a split box at the top<br /> of the topmost vertical scroll bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> To split a window vertically, provide a split box on the left of<br /> the leftmost horizontal scroll bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access to a split bar by allowing a user to directly<br /> manipulate a split box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to split a window multiple times vertically and<br /> horizontally. For example, use a pointing device to drag<br /> another split bar from the split box.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Distinguish and separate the panes with horizontal or vertical<br /> split bars or scroll bars.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the cursor only in the active pane.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When an object is changed in one pane, immediately update the<br /> view of the object in other panes that display the same part of<br /> that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a horizontal scroll bar or vertical scroll bar, or both,<br /> for each pane.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Do not move the cursor when a user splits a window. For<br /> example, when the cursor is on an object and the window is<br /> split, the panes display the part of the object that was<br /> displayed before the window was split. The cursor's location in<br /> the window does not change as a result of the split.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide coordinated scrolling of related panes. For example,<br /> allow a user to scroll a single pane and have all other panes<br /> scroll with the first pane.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to switch input focus between active panes by<br /> pressing F6.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to switch input focus between active panes by<br /> pressing the mouse selection button.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4735 11233 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4736 11234 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.52?DT=19921204095534#HDRINPUTF">"Input Focus" in topic 2.2.52</a> 4737 </pre> 4738 <hr /> 4739 <a name="LEN Status Area (Cue)" /> 4740 <h2><a name="LEN Status Area (Cue)">2.2.116 Status Area 11235 </pre> 11236 11237 11238 11239 11240 11241 11242 11243 11244 11245 <hr /> 11246 <a name="LEN Status Area (Cue)"></a> 11247 11248 11249 11250 11251 <h2><a name="LEN Status Area (Cue)">2.2.116 Status 11252 Area 4741 11253 (Cue)</a></h2> 4742 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A part of a window where information appears that shows the<br />state of an object or the state of a particular view of an<br />object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4743 href="picture-279?mode=zoom"><img 4744 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P279.GIF" 4745 alt="PICTURE 279" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11254 11255 11256 11257 11258 11259 11260 11261 11262 11263 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A part of a window where information appears that shows the<br />state of an object or the state of a particular view of an<br />object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-279?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 279" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P279.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4746 11264 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a status area for the contents view of a container.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a status area for each window in which it is useful to<br /> display information about the current state of an object or view<br /> displayed in the window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4747 11265 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a status area, place it below the title bar and<br /> below the menu bar, if a menu bar is provided, and above the<br /> rest of the window. For example, place a status area below the<br /> menu bar and above column headings in a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a status area, do not scroll the status area when<br /> the window's contents are scrolled.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a separator to separate the status area from the rest of the<br /> window. For example, use a gray line to separate the status<br /> area from the rest of the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Update information in the status area to reflect the current<br /> state of the window or the current position of the cursor.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a window provides a selection type other than single<br /> selection, indicate in the window's status area the number of<br /> items currently selected. For example, place in the status area<br /> text saying, "2 cars selected."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If only some objects are displayed in a window, indicate in that<br /> window's status area the number of objects to be displayed in<br /> proportion to the total number of objects. For example, place<br /> in a status area text that says "3 of 10 cars included."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If only some objects are displayed in a window, indicate in that<br /> window's status area what criteria the objects met in order to<br /> be displayed in the window. For example, place in a status area<br /> text that says "Displaying documents created between 10/29/90<br /> and 2/1/91" or if a view of an object has been sorted, indicate<br /> in a status area the criteria used for sorting.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide only one status area in a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user reduces the width of a window, compress the status<br /> area, if possible; otherwise, clip the status area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the status area the same width as the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make the status area no taller than necessary to accommodate<br /> brief, but meaningful, information. For example, when using<br /> text, accommodate only one line of text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a status area, allow a user to turn the display<br /> of the status area on or off. For example, provide a settings<br /> choice in the <b>View</b> pull-down menu or on a page in a settings<br /> notebook that allows a user to turn the display of the status<br /> area on or off.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4748 11266 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 4749 11267 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.129?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLAY">"Window Layout" in topic 2.2.129</a> 4750 </pre> 4751 <hr /> 4752 <a name="LEN System Menu" /> 4753 <h2><a name="LEN System Menu">2.2.117 System Menu</a></h2> 4754 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu, from the system menu symbol on the title bar<br />of a window, that contains choices that affect the window and<br />other operating-environment-specific functions.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4755 href="picture-280?mode=zoom"><img 4756 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P280.GIF" 4757 alt="PICTURE 280" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11268 </pre> 11269 11270 11271 11272 11273 11274 11275 11276 11277 11278 <hr /> 11279 <a name="LEN System Menu"></a> 11280 11281 11282 11283 11284 <h2><a name="LEN System Menu">2.2.117 System Menu</a></h2> 11285 11286 11287 11288 11289 11290 11291 11292 11293 11294 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu, from the system menu symbol on the title bar<br />of a window, that contains choices that affect the window and<br />other operating-environment-specific functions.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-280?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 280" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P280.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4758 11295 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a system menu for each window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4759 11296 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place the system-menu symbol in the leftmost corner of the title<br /> bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display the system menu when the user selects the system-menu<br /> symbol.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If any of the following choices are included in the system menu,<br /> place them in the following relative order:<br /><br /><br />° <b>Restore</b><br />° <b>Move</b><br />° <b>Size</b><br />° <b>Minimize</b> or <b>Hide</b><br />° <b>Maximize</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Close</b><br />° --Separator--<br />° <b>Window</b> <b>list</b><br />° <b>Split</b> … … 4769 11306 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 4770 11307 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.131?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLST1">"Window List (Choice in System Menu)" in topic 2.2.131</a> 4771 </pre> 4772 <hr /> 4773 <a name="LEN Target Emphasis (Cue)" /> 4774 <h2><a name="LEN Target Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.118 Target 11308 </pre> 11309 11310 11311 11312 11313 11314 11315 11316 11317 11318 <hr /> 11319 <a name="LEN Target Emphasis (Cue)"></a> 11320 11321 11322 11323 11324 <h2><a name="LEN Target Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.118 11325 Target 4775 11326 Emphasis 4776 11327 (Cue)</a></h2> 4777 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visible cue that indicates that an object can act as a<br />receiver of the source object in a direct-manipulation<br />operation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4778 href="picture-281?mode=zoom"><img 4779 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P281.GIF" 4780 alt="PICTURE 281" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11328 11329 11330 11331 11332 11333 11334 11335 11336 11337 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visible cue that indicates that an object can act as a<br />receiver of the source object in a direct-manipulation<br />operation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-281?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 281" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P281.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4781 11338 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display target emphasis during a direct manipulation operation<br /> when the hot spot of the pointer is over an object that supports<br /> direct manipulation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4782 11339 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a target object is an icon, display target emphasis as a<br /> solid thin line around the icon image.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a target object is an icon or small icon in the title bar<br /> of a window, do not display target emphasis on other icons of<br /> the object. For example, during a direct-manipulation<br /> operation, if multiple views of an object are displayed in<br /> separate windows, display target emphasis only on the small icon<br /> in the title bar of the window over which the icon is currently<br /> positioned. Do not display target emphasis on the small icon in<br /> the title bars of the other windows displaying views of that<br /> object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a target object is a window containing a view of a<br /> container, display target emphasis as a solid thin line around<br /> the inside of the window adjacent to the border.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When items in a window are maintained in an order, use a line<br /> between the items to indicate that an object being directly<br /> manipulated will be inserted between those items. The line<br /> indicates that the object will be added after the object that<br /> precedes the line and prior to the object following the line.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Make target emphasis visible in addition to any other forms of<br /> emphasis that are currently visible on an object. For example,<br /> display target emphasis and selected-state emphasis on a<br /> selected object that is the target of a direct-manipulation<br /> operation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4783 11340 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.29?DT=19921204095534#HDRDIRMAN">"Direct Manipulation" in topic 2.2.29</a> 4784 </pre> 4785 <hr /> 4786 <a name="LEN Text Entry" /> 4787 <h2><a name="LEN Text Entry">2.2.119 Text Entry</a></h2> 4788 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Techniques that a user employs for typing, selecting, and<br />manipulating text.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4789 href="picture-282?mode=zoom"><img 4790 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P282.GIF" 4791 alt="PICTURE 282" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4792 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide insert and replace modes for all text entry. Allow a<br /> user to switch between these modes by pressing the Insert key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to perform data-transfer operations on text by<br /> using direct manipulation. For example, allow a user to drag<br /> selected text from one position in a document to another, or<br /> from one window containing an entry field to a different window<br /> containing an entry field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to perform data-transfer operations on text. For<br /> example, allow a user to transfer text using the clipboard.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For each window that and allows text entry, provide a <b>Delete</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user moves or copies text to a target that is selected<br /> text, replace the selected text in the target object with the<br /> text from the source object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When text is selected and the cursor is in the selected text or<br /> adjacent to it, replace the selected text with the text typed by<br /> a user.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the cursor is in text and no text is selected, remove one<br /> character to the left of the cursor when a user presses the<br /> Backspace key, compressing the space occupied by that character.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the cursor is in text and nothing is selected, remove one<br /> character to the right of the cursor when a user presses the<br /> Delete key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When text is selected and the cursor is in the selected text or<br /> adjacent to it, remove the selected text when a user presses<br /> either the Backspace or the Delete key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> See <a 4793 href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#FIGTEXTSEL">Figure 202</a> for selection techniques for text.<br /><br /><br /><a 4794 name="FIGTEXTSEL" id="FIGTEXTSEL" /><a name="TBLTEXTSEL" 4795 id="TBLTEXTSEL"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 202. Extended Selection Techniques Used for Text |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Selection</b> <b>technique</b> | <b>What</b> <b>to</b> <b>do</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Point selection | Position the text cursor and |<br /> | | remove selected-state emphasis |<br /> | | from all other text |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Point-to-endpoint selection | Select all contiguous text in the |<br /> | (Range) | range and remove selected-state |<br /> | | emphasis from all other text |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Point-to-endpoint selection (Area) | Select only the text in the |<br /> | | marquee box and remove |<br /> | | selected-state emphasis from all |<br /> | | other text |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Random-point selection | Not applicable |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to double-click the mouse selection button in text,<br /> to select the entire word over which the pointer is positioned.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a margin that allows a user to click the mouse selection<br /> button to select an entire line of text and allows a user to<br /> double-click the mouse selection button to select an entire<br /> paragraph of text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user performs a direct-manipulation operation on text by<br /> dragging it, make the default for the direct-manipulation<br /> operation a move, unless the text can only be copied.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 11341 </pre> 11342 11343 11344 11345 11346 11347 11348 11349 11350 11351 <hr /> 11352 <a name="LEN Text Entry"></a> 11353 11354 11355 11356 11357 <h2><a name="LEN Text Entry">2.2.119 Text Entry</a></h2> 11358 11359 11360 11361 11362 11363 11364 11365 11366 11367 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Techniques that a user employs for typing, selecting, and<br />manipulating text.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-282?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 282" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P282.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 11368 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide insert and replace modes for all text entry. Allow a<br /> user to switch between these modes by pressing the Insert key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to perform data-transfer operations on text by<br /> using direct manipulation. For example, allow a user to drag<br /> selected text from one position in a document to another, or<br /> from one window containing an entry field to a different window<br /> containing an entry field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to perform data-transfer operations on text. For<br /> example, allow a user to transfer text using the clipboard.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> For each window that and allows text entry, provide a <b>Delete</b><br />choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user moves or copies text to a target that is selected<br /> text, replace the selected text in the target object with the<br /> text from the source object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When text is selected and the cursor is in the selected text or<br /> adjacent to it, replace the selected text with the text typed by<br /> a user.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the cursor is in text and no text is selected, remove one<br /> character to the left of the cursor when a user presses the<br /> Backspace key, compressing the space occupied by that character.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If the cursor is in text and nothing is selected, remove one<br /> character to the right of the cursor when a user presses the<br /> Delete key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When text is selected and the cursor is in the selected text or<br /> adjacent to it, remove the selected text when a user presses<br /> either the Backspace or the Delete key.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> See <a href="2.2.119?DT=19921204095534#FIGTEXTSEL">Figure 202</a> for selection techniques for text.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGTEXTSEL" name="FIGTEXTSEL"></a><a id="TBLTEXTSEL" name="TBLTEXTSEL"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 202. Extended Selection Techniques Used for Text |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Selection</b> <b>technique</b> | <b>What</b> <b>to</b> <b>do</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Point selection | Position the text cursor and |<br /> | | remove selected-state emphasis |<br /> | | from all other text |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Point-to-endpoint selection | Select all contiguous text in the |<br /> | (Range) | range and remove selected-state |<br /> | | emphasis from all other text |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Point-to-endpoint selection (Area) | Select only the text in the |<br /> | | marquee box and remove |<br /> | | selected-state emphasis from all |<br /> | | other text |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Random-point selection | Not applicable |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to double-click the mouse selection button in text,<br /> to select the entire word over which the pointer is positioned.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a margin that allows a user to click the mouse selection<br /> button to select an entire line of text and allows a user to<br /> double-click the mouse selection button to select an entire<br /> paragraph of text.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user performs a direct-manipulation operation on text by<br /> dragging it, make the default for the direct-manipulation<br /> operation a move, unless the text can only be copied.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4796 11369 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.18?DT=19921204095534#HDRCONTROL">"Control" in topic 2.2.18</a> 4797 11370 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a> … … 4809 11382 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.74?DT=19921204095534#HDRPASTE">"Paste (Choice)" in topic 2.2.74</a> 4810 11383 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 4811 </pre> 4812 <hr /> 4813 <a name="LEN Tool Palette" /> 4814 <h2><a name="LEN Tool Palette">2.2.120 Tool Palette</a></h2> 4815 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />One or more controls in a window, separate window, or menu that<br />provide a set of graphical choices that represent tools. The<br />tools redefine the set of operations possible with a pointing<br />device.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4816 href="picture-283?mode=zoom"><img 4817 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P283.GIF" 4818 alt="PICTURE 283" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11384 </pre> 11385 11386 11387 11388 11389 11390 11391 11392 11393 11394 <hr /> 11395 <a name="LEN Tool Palette"></a> 11396 11397 11398 11399 11400 <h2><a name="LEN Tool Palette">2.2.120 Tool Palette</a></h2> 11401 11402 11403 11404 11405 11406 11407 11408 11409 11410 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />One or more controls in a window, separate window, or menu that<br />provide a set of graphical choices that represent tools. The<br />tools redefine the set of operations possible with a pointing<br />device.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-283?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 283" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P283.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4819 11411 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a tool palette when there are different modes of the<br /> pointer that the user can select. For example, provide a<br /> rectangle choice and a circle choice to allow the user to choose<br /> between drawing rectangles and circles in a graphics editor.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4820 11412 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Allow a user to select only one choice at a time from a tool<br /> palette.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the user selects a choice from the tool palette, change or<br /> augment the pointer to indicate the operation a user can perform<br /> with the pointing device. For example, display a rectangular<br /> pointer when a user selects a rectangle-drawing choice from a<br /> tool palette.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the pointer is moved to a position that is outside the<br /> scope of the mode change, return the pointer to the appropriate<br /> pointer for the action it is over. For example, change the<br /> pointer to an arrow pointer when a user moves the pointer to the<br /> menu bar to provide access to the menu bar choices.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When choices are provided on a tool palette, also provide access<br /> to those choices from a menu. For example, provide access to<br /> the choices on a tool palette from a <b>Tools</b> menu bar choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a tool palette as a menu, as well as in a window,<br /> allow a user to turn the display of the tool palette on or off.<br /> For example, provide a choice in the <b>Options</b> menu or on a page<br /> in a settings notebook that allows a user to turn the display of<br /> the tool palette in the window on or off.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user selects a choice from a tool palette and the pointer<br /> will not be restored to the arrow pointer after the operation<br /> has been completed, provide an arrow-pointer choice on the tool<br /> palette.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When displayed in its own window, display a tool palette in a<br /> secondary window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If there are settings that would be used with a tool palette and<br /> the tool palette is displayed in a secondary window, place those<br /> settings in the secondary window with the tool palette.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a value set to display a tool palette.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4824 11416 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4825 11417 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.73?DT=19921204095534#HDROPTIONS">"Options Menu" in topic 2.2.73</a> 4826 </pre> 4827 <hr /> 4828 <a name="LEN Tutorial (Choice)" /> 4829 <h2><a name="LEN Tutorial (Choice)">2.2.121 Tutorial 11418 </pre> 11419 11420 11421 11422 11423 11424 11425 11426 11427 11428 <hr /> 11429 <a name="LEN Tutorial (Choice)"></a> 11430 11431 11432 11433 11434 <h2><a name="LEN Tutorial (Choice)">2.2.121 Tutorial 4830 11435 (Choice)</a></h2> 4831 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that provides access to online educational<br />information.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4832 href="picture-284?mode=zoom"><img 4833 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P284.GIF" 4834 alt="PICTURE 284" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11436 11437 11438 11439 11440 11441 11442 11443 11444 11445 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that provides access to online educational<br />information.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-284?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 284" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P284.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4835 11446 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide online educational information for tasks and objects for<br /> users who require information that is not provided in general<br /> help or contextual help, or who require information that is<br /> structured in a different manner than is provided elsewhere.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4836 11447 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide a tutorial, place the <b>Tutorial</b> choice in the <b>Help</b><br />menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "T" as the mnemonic for the <b>Tutorial</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4838 11449 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4839 11450 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.44?DT=19921204095534#HDRHLPINDX">"Help Index (Choice)" in topic 2.2.44</a> 4840 </pre> 4841 <hr /> 4842 <a name="LEN Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" /> 4843 <h2><a name="LEN Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.122 11451 </pre> 11452 11453 11454 11455 11456 11457 11458 11459 11460 11461 <hr /> 11462 <a name="LEN Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)"></a> 11463 11464 11465 11466 11467 <h2><a name="LEN Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)">2.2.122 4844 11468 Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)</a></h2> 4845 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visible cue that indicates that a choice cannot be selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4846 href="picture-285?mode=zoom"><img 4847 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P285.GIF" 4848 alt="PICTURE 285" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11469 11470 11471 11472 11473 11474 11475 11476 11477 11478 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A visible cue that indicates that a choice cannot be selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-285?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 285" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P285.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4849 11479 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display unavailable-state emphasis on choices that represent<br /> operations that cannot be selected in the current context.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4850 11480 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display unavailable-state emphasis by dimming the choice that<br /> cannot be selected. For example, indicate a menu choice that is<br /> unavailable by changing every other pel to the background color.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When the contents of a list are variable from one presentation<br /> to the next, such as a list of documents, avoid displaying them<br /> with unavailable-state emphasis; instead, do not include<br /> choices in the list that are unavailable.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user attempts to select a choice that is currently<br /> displayed with unavailable-state emphasis, indicate in the<br /> information area that the choice cannot be selected and that<br /> requesting help will explain why it is unavailable.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide audible feedback when a user attempts to select a choice<br /> that is displayed with unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a choice is never available to a particular user, do not<br /> display the choice rather than displaying it with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4851 11481 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.10?DT=19921204095534#HDRCHOICE">"Choice" in topic 2.2.10</a> 4852 </pre> 4853 <hr /> 4854 <a name="LEN Undo and Redo (Choice)" /> 4855 <h2><a name="LEN Undo and Redo (Choice)">2.2.123 Undo and 11482 </pre> 11483 11484 11485 11486 11487 11488 11489 11490 11491 11492 <hr /> 11493 <a name="LEN Undo and Redo (Choice)"></a> 11494 11495 11496 11497 11498 <h2><a name="LEN Undo and Redo (Choice)">2.2.123 11499 Undo and 4856 11500 Redo 4857 11501 (Choice)</a></h2> 4858 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The <b>Undo</b> choice is an action choice that reverses the effect of<br /> the last applied operation on an object, returning the object to<br /> the state it was in before the operation was applied. The <b>Redo</b><br />choice is an action choice that reverses the effect of the last<br />applied undo action.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4859 href="picture-286?mode=zoom"><img 4860 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P286.GIF" 4861 alt="PICTURE 286" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11502 11503 11504 11505 11506 11507 11508 11509 11510 11511 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The <b>Undo</b> choice is an action choice that reverses the effect of<br /> the last applied operation on an object, returning the object to<br /> the state it was in before the operation was applied. The <b>Redo</b><br />choice is an action choice that reverses the effect of the last<br />applied undo action.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-286?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 286" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P286.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4862 11512 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide the <b>Undo</b> and <b>Redo</b> choices for each object.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4863 11513 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Undo</b> and <b>Redo</b> choices and you provide the<br /> <b>Edit</b> menu, place the <b>Undo</b> and <b>Redo</b> choices in the <b>Edit</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Undo</b> and <b>Redo</b> choices for an object, place<br /> them in the pop-up menu for that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide the <b>Undo</b> choice, display it with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis if the user cannot undo the last<br /> operation.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> After a user selects the <b>Undo</b> choice, display it with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis until the user performs another<br /> operation that can be undone.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Redo</b> choice, <b>Undo</b> becomes available and<br /> <b>Redo</b> becomes unavailable.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Dynamically append to the name of the <b>Undo</b> choice to indicate<br /> the action that will be undone. For example, change <b>Undo</b> to<br /> <b>Undo</b> <b>typing</b> or <b>Undo</b> <b>delete</b>.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Dynamically append to the name of the <b>Redo</b> choice to indicate<br /> the action that will be undone.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When undoing an action, return all objects affected by the<br /> action to the state they were in before the action occurred.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "U" as the mnemonic for the <b>Undo</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "R" as the mnemonic for the <b>Redo</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Alt+Backspace as the shortcut key combination for the<br /> <b>Undo</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Shift+Alt+Backspace as the shortcut key combination for<br /> the <b>Redo</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4868 11518 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.25?DT=19921204095534#HDRDELETE">"Delete (Choice)" in topic 2.2.25</a> 4869 11519 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.54?DT=19921204095534#HDRKEYBD">"Keyboard" in topic 2.2.54</a> 4870 </pre> 4871 <hr /> 4872 <a name="LEN Using Help (Choice)" /> 4873 <h2><a name="LEN Using Help (Choice)">2.2.124 Using Help 11520 </pre> 11521 11522 11523 11524 11525 11526 11527 11528 11529 11530 <hr /> 11531 <a name="LEN Using Help (Choice)"></a> 11532 11533 11534 11535 11536 <h2><a name="LEN Using Help (Choice)">2.2.124 Using 11537 Help 4874 11538 (Choice)</a></h2> 4875 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing information<br />about how to use the help function.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4876 href="picture-287?mode=zoom"><img 4877 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P287.GIF" 4878 alt="PICTURE 287" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11539 11540 11541 11542 11543 11544 11545 11546 11547 11548 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing information<br />about how to use the help function.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-287?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 287" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P287.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4879 11549 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide the <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> choice in each <b>Help</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4880 11550 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> choice, display a window<br /> containing information about how to use the help function.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "U" as the mnemonic for the <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4881 11551 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.45?DT=19921204095534#HDRHELP">"Help Menu" in topic 2.2.45</a> 4882 </pre> 4883 <hr /> 4884 <a name="LEN Value Set (Control)" /> 4885 <h2><a name="LEN Value Set (Control)">2.2.125 Value Set 11552 </pre> 11553 11554 11555 11556 11557 11558 11559 11560 11561 11562 <hr /> 11563 <a name="LEN Value Set (Control)"></a> 11564 11565 11566 11567 11568 <h2><a name="LEN Value Set (Control)">2.2.125 Value 11569 Set 4886 11570 (Control)</a></h2> 4887 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that allows a user to select one choice from a group<br />of mutually exclusive choices. A value set is used primarily<br />for graphical choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4888 href="picture-288?mode=zoom"><img 4889 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P288.GIF" 4890 alt="PICTURE 288" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11571 11572 11573 11574 11575 11576 11577 11578 11579 11580 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A control that allows a user to select one choice from a group<br />of mutually exclusive choices. A value set is used primarily<br />for graphical choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-288?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 288" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P288.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4891 11581 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a value set for graphical choices that are mutually<br /> exclusive.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a value set for short textual choices that are mutually<br /> exclusive; otherwise, use a field of radio buttons.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4892 11582 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display only settings choices in a value set. Do not display<br /> action choices or routing choices in a value set.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Use at least two choices when a value set is used.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a value set choice is currently unavailable, display it with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a value set represents a setting shared by more than one<br /> selected object:<br /><br /><br />° Do not display selected emphasis on any of the value set<br />choices if some, but not all of the objects, have the same<br />setting selected.<br />° Display selected emphasis on one of the value set choices if<br />all of the objects have the same setting selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize only the first letter of the first word of a label<br /> for a value set choice unless the label contains an<br /> abbreviation, acronym, or proper noun that should be<br /> capitalized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign a mnemonic to each choice in a value set when all choices<br /> are textual.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a value set choice has a mnemonic assigned to it, provide<br /> access to the mnemonic by allowing a user to press the Alt key<br /> and that mnemonic.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign one of the choices in a value set as the default choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4896 11586 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.122?DT=19921204095534#HDRUNAVLEM">"Unavailable-State Emphasis (Cue)" in topic 2.2.122</a> 4897 11587 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4898 <br /><br /><br /><br />° <a 4899 href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a> 11588 <br /><br /><br /><br />° <a href="2.2.113?DT=19921204095534#HDRSPINBTN">"Spin Button (Control)" in topic 2.2.113</a> 4900 11589 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.120?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOOLP">"Tool Palette" in topic 2.2.120</a> 4901 </pre> 4902 <hr /> 4903 <a name="LEN View Menu" /> 4904 <h2><a name="LEN View Menu">2.2.126 View Menu</a></h2> 4905 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>View</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that affect the way an object is presented, for<br /> example, alternative formats, how much information is presented,<br /> what order it is presented in, and other related viewing<br /> choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4906 href="picture-289?mode=zoom"><img 4907 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P289.GIF" 4908 alt="PICTURE 289" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11590 </pre> 11591 11592 11593 11594 11595 11596 11597 11598 11599 11600 <hr /> 11601 <a name="LEN View Menu"></a> 11602 11603 11604 11605 11606 <h2><a name="LEN View Menu">2.2.126 View Menu</a></h2> 11607 11608 11609 11610 11611 11612 11613 11614 11615 11616 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>View</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that affect the way an object is presented, for<br /> example, alternative formats, how much information is presented,<br /> what order it is presented in, and other related viewing<br /> choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-289?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 289" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P289.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4909 11617 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>View</b> choice on the menu bar of each window that<br /> provides a menu bar when more than one view is available for an<br /> object or any of the following choices are provided: <b>Sort,</b><br /><b>Include,</b> <b>Refresh</b> or <b>Refresh</b> <b>now.</b> 4910 11618 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> … … 4916 11624 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4917 11625 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.50?DT=19921204095534#HDRINFOAR">"Information Area" in topic 2.2.50</a> 4918 </pre> 4919 <hr /> 4920 <a name="LEN Warning Message" /> 4921 <h2><a name="LEN Warning Message">2.2.127 Warning Message</a></h2> 4922 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A message that indicates that an undesirable condition could<br />occur but the user can allow the process to continue.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4923 href="picture-290?mode=zoom"><img 4924 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P290.GIF" 4925 alt="PICTURE 290" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11626 </pre> 11627 11628 11629 11630 11631 11632 11633 11634 11635 11636 <hr /> 11637 <a name="LEN Warning Message"></a> 11638 11639 11640 11641 11642 <h2><a name="LEN Warning Message">2.2.127 Warning 11643 Message</a></h2> 11644 11645 11646 11647 11648 11649 11650 11651 11652 11653 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A message that indicates that an undesirable condition could<br />occur but the user can allow the process to continue.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-290?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 290" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P290.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4926 11654 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Display a warning message to indicate that an undesirable<br /> situation could occur but that the user can allow the process to<br /> continue.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4927 11655 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide controls in the message window that allow a user to<br /> correct the situation that caused the message to appear. For<br /> example, provide an entry field in which a user can correct a<br /> value.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a push button that allows a user to continue the request<br /> as originally requested. For example, in a message that warns a<br /> user copying multiple files that the diskette is 95% full, the<br /> user can continue with a push button labeled <b>Continue.</b> … … 4934 11662 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4935 11663 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.6?DT=19921204095534#HDRAUDCUE">"Audible Feedback" in topic 2.2.6</a> 4936 </pre> 4937 <hr /> 4938 <a name="LEN Window" /> 4939 <h2><a name="LEN Window">2.2.128 Window</a></h2> 4940 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An area on the display screen used to present a view of an<br />object or to conduct a dialog with a user. The two types of<br />windows are primary windows and secondary windows. Window are<br />used to present objects, action options, and messages.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4941 href="picture-291?mode=zoom"><img 4942 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P291.GIF" 4943 alt="PICTURE 291" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11664 </pre> 11665 11666 11667 11668 11669 11670 11671 11672 11673 11674 <hr /> 11675 <a name="LEN Window"></a> 11676 11677 11678 11679 11680 <h2><a name="LEN Window">2.2.128 Window</a></h2> 11681 11682 11683 11684 11685 11686 11687 11688 11689 11690 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An area on the display screen used to present a view of an<br />object or to conduct a dialog with a user. The two types of<br />windows are primary windows and secondary windows. Window are<br />used to present objects, action options, and messages.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-291?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 291" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P291.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4944 11691 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a window to display a view of an object or to conduct a<br /> dialog with a user.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4945 11692 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a border, window title, and system-menu symbol for each<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a small version of the object's icon in the title bar<br /> when a window displays a view of that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Close a window when:<br /><br /><br />° A user selects the <b>Close</b> choice from the system menu or from<br /> a push button labeled <b>Close.</b> 4946 <br /><br />° A user selects the <b>Cancel</b> choice from a push button.<br /><br /><br />° A user selects a choice that completes the action<br />represented in the window.<br /><br /><br />° The window has no further relevance. For example, close a<br />progress-indicator window when the action the user has<br />requested is complete.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to change the size and position of all windows.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user closes , minimizes, or hides a window, save its<br /> current state, including its size and position, for use when the<br /> window is restored.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window from an object to a particular view<br /> or restores a minimized or hidden window, restore the window and<br /> any dependent windows to their previous state, regardless of the<br /> amount of time that has elapsed since a user last opened or<br /> restored the window, and regardless of whether the user's system<br /> has been turned off and on again.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user is opening or restoring a window on a screen of a<br /> different size than the screen on which the window was last<br /> viewed, and the window, when opened or restored, would otherwise<br /> be positioned outside the bounds of the user's current screen,<br /> ensure that at least part of the window's title bar is visible<br /> on the user's screen.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window that has no previous state<br /> information:<br /><br /><br />° Place and size the window so that it is completely visible<br />within the workplace.<br /><br /><br />° Make the window large enough for a user to perform useful<br />work, but less than the full size of the user's workplace.<br /><br /><br />° Place the window so that it will draw a user's attention<br />without impeding the user's work. For example, place a help<br />window next to the window from which it was requested, not<br />on top of that window.<br /><br /><br />° Place the window near where the user's attention was most<br />likely focused when the user's request caused the window to<br />appear. For example, place the window near the pointer or<br />near the cursor.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window but switches input focus to another<br /> window before the requested window is displayed, do not display<br /> the previously requested window on top of the window that<br /> currently has focus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens another window from an object that already has<br /> open windows, do not completely cover the other windows<br /> associated with that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user selects and opens more than one object, display each<br /> object in a separate window. Open the windows in the order that<br /> the objects were selected, so that the window for the object<br /> that was selected last has input focus and is not obscured by<br /> any other window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> See <a 4947 href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#FIGWINCO">Figure 203</a> to determine the components to provide in a<br /> window based on the usage of that window.<br /><br /><br /><a 4948 name="FIGWINCO" id="FIGWINCO" /><a name="TBLWINCO" id="TBLWINCO"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 203. Recommended Window Component Usage |<br />|_____________ _______ ______ ______________ ______ _______ ______ ______|<br />| <b>Window</b> | <b>System</b>| <b>Small</b>| <b>Title</b> | <b>Minim|z</b>Maximi|e<b>Menu</b> | <b>Sizin|</b><br />| <b>Usage</b> | <b>Menu</b> | <b>Icon</b> | | <b>Push</b> | <b>and</b> | <b>Bar</b> | <b>Borde|</b><br />| | | <b>in</b> | | <b>Butto|</b> <b>Restor|</b> | |<br /> | | | <b>Title</b>| | | <b>Push</b> | | |<br /> | | | <b>Bar</b> | | | <b>Button</b>| | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Object | Yes | Yes | object name | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |<br /> | | | | - view | | | | |<br /> | | | | name:number | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Messages | Yes | No | object name | No | Yes | No | Yes |<br /> | | | | - action or | | | | |<br /> | | | | situation | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Progress | Yes | No | object name | No | Yes | No | Yes |<br /> | Indicator | | | - process | | | | |<br /> | | | | <i>Progress</i> | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Help | Yes | No | object/action|fNold | Yes | Yes | Yes |<br /> | | | | - <i>Help</i> | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Action | Yes | No | object name | No | Yes | No | Yes |<br /> | | | | - action | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Application-|rYested| Yes | Application | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |<br /> | window | | | name - | | | | |<br /> | | | | object name | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 11693 <br /><br />° A user selects the <b>Cancel</b> choice from a push button.<br /><br /><br />° A user selects a choice that completes the action<br />represented in the window.<br /><br /><br />° The window has no further relevance. For example, close a<br />progress-indicator window when the action the user has<br />requested is complete.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to change the size and position of all windows.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user closes , minimizes, or hides a window, save its<br /> current state, including its size and position, for use when the<br /> window is restored.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window from an object to a particular view<br /> or restores a minimized or hidden window, restore the window and<br /> any dependent windows to their previous state, regardless of the<br /> amount of time that has elapsed since a user last opened or<br /> restored the window, and regardless of whether the user's system<br /> has been turned off and on again.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user is opening or restoring a window on a screen of a<br /> different size than the screen on which the window was last<br /> viewed, and the window, when opened or restored, would otherwise<br /> be positioned outside the bounds of the user's current screen,<br /> ensure that at least part of the window's title bar is visible<br /> on the user's screen.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window that has no previous state<br /> information:<br /><br /><br />° Place and size the window so that it is completely visible<br />within the workplace.<br /><br /><br />° Make the window large enough for a user to perform useful<br />work, but less than the full size of the user's workplace.<br /><br /><br />° Place the window so that it will draw a user's attention<br />without impeding the user's work. For example, place a help<br />window next to the window from which it was requested, not<br />on top of that window.<br /><br /><br />° Place the window near where the user's attention was most<br />likely focused when the user's request caused the window to<br />appear. For example, place the window near the pointer or<br />near the cursor.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens a window but switches input focus to another<br /> window before the requested window is displayed, do not display<br /> the previously requested window on top of the window that<br /> currently has focus.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens another window from an object that already has<br /> open windows, do not completely cover the other windows<br /> associated with that object.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user selects and opens more than one object, display each<br /> object in a separate window. Open the windows in the order that<br /> the objects were selected, so that the window for the object<br /> that was selected last has input focus and is not obscured by<br /> any other window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> See <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#FIGWINCO">Figure 203</a> to determine the components to provide in a<br /> window based on the usage of that window.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGWINCO" name="FIGWINCO"></a><a id="TBLWINCO" name="TBLWINCO"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 203. Recommended Window Component Usage |<br />|_____________ _______ ______ ______________ ______ _______ ______ ______|<br />| <b>Window</b> | <b>System</b>| <b>Small</b>| <b>Title</b> | <b>Minim|z</b>Maximi|e<b>Menu</b> | <b>Sizin|</b><br />| <b>Usage</b> | <b>Menu</b> | <b>Icon</b> | | <b>Push</b> | <b>and</b> | <b>Bar</b> | <b>Borde|</b><br />| | | <b>in</b> | | <b>Butto|</b> <b>Restor|</b> | |<br /> | | | <b>Title</b>| | | <b>Push</b> | | |<br /> | | | <b>Bar</b> | | | <b>Button</b>| | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Object | Yes | Yes | object name | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |<br /> | | | | - view | | | | |<br /> | | | | name:number | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Messages | Yes | No | object name | No | Yes | No | Yes |<br /> | | | | - action or | | | | |<br /> | | | | situation | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Progress | Yes | No | object name | No | Yes | No | Yes |<br /> | Indicator | | | - process | | | | |<br /> | | | | <i>Progress</i> | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Help | Yes | No | object/action|fNold | Yes | Yes | Yes |<br /> | | | | - <i>Help</i> | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Action | Yes | No | object name | No | Yes | No | Yes |<br /> | | | | - action | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /> | Application-|rYested| Yes | Application | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |<br /> | window | | | name - | | | | |<br /> | | | | object name | | | | |<br /> |_____________|_______|______|______________|______|_______|______|______|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4949 11694 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.5?DT=19921204095534#HDRACTWIND">"Active Window" in topic 2.2.5</a> 4950 11695 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.48?DT=19921204095534#HDRINACTWI">"Inactive Window" in topic 2.2.48</a> … … 4956 11701 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.133?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINNAV">"Window Navigation" in topic 2.2.133</a> 4957 11702 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOWT">"Window Title" in topic 2.2.135</a> 4958 </pre> 4959 <hr /> 4960 <a name="LEN Window Layout" /> 4961 <h2><a name="LEN Window Layout">2.2.129 Window Layout</a></h2> 4962 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The guidelines for the placement of controls in a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 11703 </pre> 11704 11705 11706 11707 11708 11709 11710 11711 11712 11713 <hr /> 11714 <a name="LEN Window Layout"></a> 11715 11716 11717 11718 11719 <h2><a name="LEN Window Layout">2.2.129 Window Layout</a></h2> 11720 11721 11722 11723 11724 11725 11726 11727 11728 11729 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The guidelines for the placement of controls in a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4963 11730 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Design the initial size and layout of an action window so that a<br /> user will not typically need to scroll the window. If the<br /> initial size of an action window is not large enough to display<br /> all of the controls, place less frequently used controls out of<br /> view.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If more information is contained in a view than is visible in<br /> the initial size and layout of a window, ensure that the break<br /> between visible and hidden information is at a logical point.<br /> For example, avoid clipping an entry field so that only a<br /> portion of it is visible.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Within a column of controls, left-align the edges of the<br /> controls to the right of the longest field prompt.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the contents of a window can be scaled when the window is<br /> sized, provide a user option to specify whether to scale or clip<br /> the contents.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place push buttons that affect the entire window horizontally at<br /> the bottom of the window and justified from the left edge.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a window that can be scrolled vertically contains push<br /> buttons that affect the entire window, scroll the area above the<br /> push buttons, keeping the push buttons visible.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid placing push buttons in more than two rows.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the action indicated by the label on a push button adjusts or<br /> is associated with a component within the same window as the<br /> push button, place the push button near that component. For<br /> example, if the function of a push button is to restore the<br /> initial value in an entry field, place that push button beside<br /> the entry field that it affects.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Avoid using a push button to change the size of a window;<br /> instead, allow a user to change the size of the window using the<br /> size borders and the maximize push button or <b>Maximize</b> choice.<br /> For example, do not provide a push button labeled <b>More>></b> to<br /> allow a user to enlarge a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Use a notebook to organize groups of controls when they will not<br /> fit in a single window. Avoid placing related controls in<br /> separate windows connected by routing choices on push buttons.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> In high-volume data-entry windows, consider using right-aligned<br /> edges of field prompts next to left-aligned entry fields so that<br /> a narrow vertical column of space is left between the field<br /> prompts and their associated entry fields to allow a user to<br /> quickly scan the choices in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to adjust the size of each column in a window,<br /> where appropriate. For example, provide column borders that a<br /> user can directly manipulate to change the size of columns.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a user cannot adjust the width of a column or scroll the<br /> column, make the column at least as wide as the widest item in<br /> the column or as wide as the column's heading, whichever is<br /> wider.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user can adjust the width of a column, make the initial<br /> width of the column wide enough to display choices of average<br /> width.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If the order of columns can be changed, allow a user to directly<br /> manipulate each column. For example, allow a user to drag<br /> column headings to change the order of columns.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide an information area, place it at the bottom of a<br /> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide an information area and there is a horizontal<br /> scroll bar in the window, place the information area below the<br /> scroll bar and above the window border.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide a status area, place it below the title bar and<br /> below the menu bar, if a menu bar is provided, and above the<br /> rest of the window. For example, place a status area below the<br /> menu bar and above column headings in a window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 4964 11731 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> … … 4970 11737 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.43?DT=19921204095534#HDRGROUPHD">"Group Heading" in topic 2.2.43</a> 4971 11738 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.68?DT=19921204095534#HDRNOTEBK">"Notebook (Control)" in topic 2.2.68</a> 4972 </pre> 4973 <hr /> 4974 <a name="LEN Window List" /> 4975 <h2><a name="LEN Window List">2.2.130 Window List</a></h2> 4976 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that contains a list of the windows associated with the<br />window from which the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4977 href="picture-292?mode=zoom"><img 4978 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P292.GIF" 4979 alt="PICTURE 292" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11739 </pre> 11740 11741 11742 11743 11744 11745 11746 11747 11748 11749 <hr /> 11750 <a name="LEN Window List"></a> 11751 11752 11753 11754 11755 <h2><a name="LEN Window List">2.2.130 Window List</a></h2> 11756 11757 11758 11759 11760 11761 11762 11763 11764 11765 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A window that contains a list of the windows associated with the<br />window from which the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-292?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 292" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P292.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4980 11766 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display a window list window to show a user the organization of<br /> the windows, and to provide access to functions available for<br /> those windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4981 11767 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Display the window list window as a secondary window that is<br /> dependent on the window from which the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice was<br /> selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice in the <b>Windows</b> menu is selected,<br /> display a list of the windows associated with the window from<br /> which the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice was selected.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Indicate the state of each window listed in the window list<br /> window. For example, indicate which windows are minimized and<br /> maximized.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Organize the names of the windows displayed in the window list<br /> window in a manner that helps users understand the relationships<br /> between windows. For example, indent names of secondary windows<br /> under their associated primary windows.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to condense or expand the number of window names<br /> that are displayed in the window list window. For example,<br /> provide a choice that displays only primary windows when the<br /> window list window is organized in a tree structure.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Assign the default action for the window list window to switch<br /> to the selected window. For example, provide a default push<br /> button labeled <b>Show</b> that closes the window list and makes the<br /> selected window the active window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide access to common window functions such as <b>Minimize</b> and<br /> <b>Close</b> for the windows in the list.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Support extended selection for the list of windows in the window<br /> list action window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 4987 11773 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.13?DT=19921204095534#HDRCLOSE">"Close (Choice)" in topic 2.2.13</a> 4988 11774 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.62?DT=19921204095534#HDRMINIMIZ">"Minimize (Choice)" in topic 2.2.62</a> 4989 </pre> 4990 <hr /> 4991 <a name="LEN Window List (Choice in System Menu)" /> 4992 <h2><a name="LEN Window List (Choice in System Menu)">2.2.131 11775 </pre> 11776 11777 11778 11779 11780 11781 11782 11783 11784 11785 <hr /> 11786 <a name="LEN Window List (Choice in System Menu)"></a> 11787 11788 11789 11790 11791 <h2><a name="LEN Window List (Choice in System Menu)">2.2.131 4993 11792 Window List (Choice in System Menu)</a></h2> 4994 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing a list of all<br />of the active applications in an application-oriented<br />environment or a list of all open windows in an object-oriented<br />environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 4995 href="picture-293?mode=zoom"><img 4996 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P293.GIF" 4997 alt="PICTURE 293" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11793 11794 11795 11796 11797 11798 11799 11800 11801 11802 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays a window containing a list of all<br />of the active applications in an application-oriented<br />environment or a list of all open windows in an object-oriented<br />environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-293?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 293" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P293.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 4998 11803 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice for each window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 4999 11804 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place a <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice in the system menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user selects the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice, use the mechanism<br /> provided by the operating environment that displays the <b>Window</b><br /><b>list</b> window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign Ctrl+Esc as the shortcut key combination for the <b>Window</b><br /><b>list</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "W" as the mnemonic for the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 5002 11807 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 5003 11808 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.130?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLWIN">"Window List" in topic 2.2.130</a> 5004 </pre> 5005 <hr /> 5006 <a name="LEN Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)" /> 5007 <h2><a name="LEN Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)">2.2.132 11809 </pre> 11810 11811 11812 11813 11814 11815 11816 11817 11818 11819 <hr /> 11820 <a name="LEN Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)"></a> 11821 11822 11823 11824 11825 <h2><a name="LEN Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)">2.2.132 5008 11826 Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)</a></h2> 5009 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays the window list window that<br />allows a user to manage associated windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5010 href="picture-294?mode=zoom"><img 5011 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P294.GIF" 5012 alt="PICTURE 294" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11827 11828 11829 11830 11831 11832 11833 11834 11835 11836 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An action choice that displays the window list window that<br />allows a user to manage associated windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-294?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 294" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P294.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 5013 11837 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice to provide access to the window<br /> list window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 5014 11838 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you provide the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice that allows a user to<br /> manage associated windows, and you provide a <b>Windows</b> menu, place<br /> the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice in the <b>Windows</b> menu.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user selects the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice, display the window<br /> list action window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "W" as the mnemonic for the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 5017 11841 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.131?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLST1">"Window List (Choice in System Menu)" in topic 2.2.131</a> 5018 11842 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.134?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINMENU">"Windows Menu" in topic 2.2.134</a> 5019 </pre> 5020 <hr /> 5021 <a name="LEN Window Navigation" /> 5022 <h2><a name="LEN Window Navigation">2.2.133 Window 11843 </pre> 11844 11845 11846 11847 11848 11849 11850 11851 11852 11853 <hr /> 11854 <a name="LEN Window Navigation"></a> 11855 11856 11857 11858 11859 <h2><a name="LEN Window Navigation">2.2.133 Window 5023 11860 Navigation</a></h2> 5024 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Guidelines for the movement of the cursor in a window and access<br />from a keyboard to any part of a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 11861 11862 11863 11864 11865 11866 11867 11868 11869 11870 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Guidelines for the movement of the cursor in a window and access<br />from a keyboard to any part of a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 5025 11871 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a mnemonic for each choice in a window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user presses the Alt key and types the mnemonic assigned<br /> to a push button, select that push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the cursor is positioned on a push button in a group of<br /> push buttons, allow a user to select a push button in that group<br /> by pressing the mnemonic character, if provided, assigned to<br /> that push button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user presses a key that moves the cursor to a field in<br /> which one of the choices is selected, place the cursor on the<br /> selected choice; otherwise, place the cursor on the first<br /> choice or on the default choice.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user presses the Tab or Backtab key that moves the cursor<br /> to a group of push buttons, place the cursor on the default push<br /> button in that group.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the cursor is on a push button and a user presses the Tab<br /> or Backtab key, move the cursor to the next field in the window,<br /> not to another push button in the same field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the Tab key, move the cursor between fields,<br /> from left-to-right and top-to-bottom in the window. When the<br /> cursor is on the bottom-rightmost field in the window, and a<br /> user presses the Tab key, move the cursor to the top-leftmost<br /> field in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user presses the Backtab key (Shift+Tab), move the cursor<br /> between fields, from right-to-left, and bottom-to-top in the<br /> window. When the cursor is on the top-leftmost field in the<br /> window, and a user presses the Backtab key, move the cursor to<br /> the bottom-rightmost field in the window.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When the cursor is moved from a field of push buttons, reset the<br /> default push button to be the same as it was before the cursor<br /> entered that field of push buttons. For example, if a user<br /> moved the cursor off of the <b>OK</b> push button (the default) to the<br /> <b>Help</b> push button, then moved the cursor to a field of radio<br /> buttons, the default push button should again be the <b>OK</b> push<br /> button.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to interact with a field that is displayed with<br /> unavailable-state emphasis because of a setting elsewhere in<br /> that window. When a user changes a setting that makes that<br /> field available, apply the contents of the field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 5026 11872 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.21?DT=19921204095534#HDRCURSOR">"Cursor" in topic 2.2.21</a> … … 5032 11878 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.87?DT=19921204095534#HDRSTNDPBS">"Push Button (Predefined)" in topic 2.2.87</a> 5033 11879 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 5034 </pre> 5035 <hr /> 5036 <a name="LEN Windows Menu" /> 5037 <h2><a name="LEN Windows Menu">2.2.134 Windows Menu</a></h2> 5038 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Windows</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that allow a user to access the window list and<br /> other product-specific window-related choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5039 href="picture-295?mode=zoom"><img 5040 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P295.GIF" 5041 alt="PICTURE 295" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11880 </pre> 11881 11882 11883 11884 11885 11886 11887 11888 11889 11890 <hr /> 11891 <a name="LEN Windows Menu"></a> 11892 11893 11894 11895 11896 <h2><a name="LEN Windows Menu">2.2.134 Windows Menu</a></h2> 11897 11898 11899 11900 11901 11902 11903 11904 11905 11906 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A pull-down menu from the <b>Windows</b> choice on a menu bar that<br /> contains choices that allow a user to access the window list and<br /> other product-specific window-related choices.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-295?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 295" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P295.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 5042 11907 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a <b>Windows</b> choice on the menu bar in each window that<br /> provides a menu bar and has secondary windows that are used to<br /> display objects or other associated primary windows.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 5043 11908 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide choices in the <b>Windows</b> menu that provide access to other<br /> associated windows without using the window list action window.<br /> For example, provide a <b>Close</b> <b>all</b> choice or a list of the last<br /> three windows that were active.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Assign "W" as the mnemonic for the <b>Windows</b> menu choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 5046 11911 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.131?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLST1">"Window List (Choice in System Menu)" in topic 2.2.131</a> 5047 11912 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.132?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINLIST">"Window List (Choice in Windows Menu)" in topic 2.2.132</a> 5048 </pre> 5049 <hr /> 5050 <a name="LEN Window Title" /> 5051 <h2><a name="LEN Window Title">2.2.135 Window Title</a></h2> 5052 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The area in a title bar that identifies the window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5053 href="picture-296?mode=zoom"><img 5054 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P296.GIF" 5055 alt="PICTURE 296" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11913 </pre> 11914 11915 11916 11917 11918 11919 11920 11921 11922 11923 <hr /> 11924 <a name="LEN Window Title"></a> 11925 11926 11927 11928 11929 <h2><a name="LEN Window Title">2.2.135 Window Title</a></h2> 11930 11931 11932 11933 11934 11935 11936 11937 11938 11939 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The area in a title bar that identifies the window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-296?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 296" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P296.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 5056 11940 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Provide a title for every window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 5057 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Refer to <a 5058 href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#FIGWINDOWT">Figure 204</a> to determine how to title a window:<br /><br /><br /><a 5059 name="FIGWINDOWT" id="FIGWINDOWT" /><a name="TBLWINDOWT" 5060 id="TBLWINDOWT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 204. Recommended Window Titling Formats |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Window</b> <b>usage</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>title</b> <b>format</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Display view of an object | Object name - view name:n; for |<br /> | | example, MyDoc - Settings:3 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> where n is a number when multiple views of an object are |<br /> | provided |<br /> |____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br /> | Message | Object name - action or |<br /> | | situation; for example, Drive A: |<br /> | | - Format Diskette |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Progress indicator displayed in | Object name - action Progress; |<br /> | separate window | for example, MyDoc - Print |<br /> | | Progress |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Help | Object name, Action, or Field - |<br /> | | xyz Help abc; for example, Font |<br /> | | List - Help |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> where xyz and abc are optional related identifying information |<br /> |____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br /> | Action window | Object name - action; for |<br /> | | example, MyDoc - Find |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Application-oriented window | Application name - file name; |<br /> | | for example, Editor - MyDoc |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If more than one view of the same type has been opened from an<br /> object, append a colon (:) and unique number to the title of<br /> each of those windows. For example, if two icons views are<br /> opened on an object, label them "MyObject - Icons:1" and<br /> "MyObject - Icons:2."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens more than one view of the same type on an<br /> object, begin numbering the window with "1" and continuing<br /> numbering with unique numbers. For the original window, change<br /> its title from "Object - View" to "Object - View:1" and label<br /> the next window displaying that same view "Object - View:2."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize the first letter of the first and last words and the<br /> first letter of all other words except articles, coordinating<br /> conjunctions, prepositions, and the "to" in infinitives.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user sizes a window so that all of the title cannot be<br /> displayed in the title bar, clip the window title from the<br /> right.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to directly edit a window title in the title bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you allow a user to directly edit a window title, allow the<br /> user to edit the window title by clicking on the text with the<br /> mouse.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 11941 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Refer to <a href="2.2.135?DT=19921204095534#FIGWINDOWT">Figure 204</a> to determine how to title a window:<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGWINDOWT" name="FIGWINDOWT"></a><a id="TBLWINDOWT" name="TBLWINDOWT"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 204. Recommended Window Titling Formats |<br />|____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br />| <b>Window</b> <b>usage</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>title</b> <b>format</b> |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Display view of an object | Object name - view name:n; for |<br /> | | example, MyDoc - Settings:3 |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> where n is a number when multiple views of an object are |<br /> | provided |<br /> |____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br /> | Message | Object name - action or |<br /> | | situation; for example, Drive A: |<br /> | | - Format Diskette |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Progress indicator displayed in | Object name - action Progress; |<br /> | separate window | for example, MyDoc - Print |<br /> | | Progress |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Help | Object name, Action, or Field - |<br /> | | xyz Help abc; for example, Font |<br /> | | List - Help |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | <b>Note:</b> where xyz and abc are optional related identifying information |<br /> |____________________________________ ___________________________________|<br /> | Action window | Object name - action; for |<br /> | | example, MyDoc - Find |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /> | Application-oriented window | Application name - file name; |<br /> | | for example, Editor - MyDoc |<br /> |____________________________________|___________________________________|<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If more than one view of the same type has been opened from an<br /> object, append a colon (:) and unique number to the title of<br /> each of those windows. For example, if two icons views are<br /> opened on an object, label them "MyObject - Icons:1" and<br /> "MyObject - Icons:2."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> When a user opens more than one view of the same type on an<br /> object, begin numbering the window with "1" and continuing<br /> numbering with unique numbers. For the original window, change<br /> its title from "Object - View" to "Object - View:1" and label<br /> the next window displaying that same view "Object - View:2."<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Capitalize the first letter of the first and last words and the<br /> first letter of all other words except articles, coordinating<br /> conjunctions, prepositions, and the "to" in infinitives.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user sizes a window so that all of the title cannot be<br /> displayed in the title bar, clip the window title from the<br /> right.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to directly edit a window title in the title bar.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If you allow a user to directly edit a window title, allow the<br /> user to edit the window title by clicking on the text with the<br /> mouse.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 5061 11942 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 5062 </pre> 5063 <hr /> 5064 <a name="LEN Work Area (Object)" /> 5065 <h2><a name="LEN Work Area (Object)">2.2.136 Work Area 11943 </pre> 11944 11945 11946 11947 11948 11949 11950 11951 11952 11953 <hr /> 11954 <a name="LEN Work Area (Object)"></a> 11955 11956 11957 11958 11959 <h2><a name="LEN Work Area (Object)">2.2.136 Work 11960 Area 5066 11961 (Object)</a></h2> 5067 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A container used to group windows and objects to perform a task.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5068 href="picture-297?mode=zoom"><img 5069 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P297.GIF" 5070 alt="PICTURE 297" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 11962 11963 11964 11965 11966 11967 11968 11969 11970 11971 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A container used to group windows and objects to perform a task.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-297?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 297" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P297.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />FND guidelines are required; REC guidelines are recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>When</b> <b>to</b> <b>Use</b> 5071 11972 <br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Provide a work area to allow a user to group objects to perform<br /> a specific task or set of related tasks.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 5072 11973 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user closes or minimizes a work area, remove any window<br /> that was opened from an object in that work area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> If a window was open on an object in a work area when the work<br /> area was closed or minimized, restore that window when the work<br /> area is opened or restored.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> When a user closes or minimizes a work area, save the position<br /> and size of each open window associated with that work area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If you provide work areas, provide a settings choice that allows<br /> a user to change between a work area and a folder.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> If a user changes a work area into a folder, immediately change<br /> its icon to that of a folder.<br /><br /><br /><b>Rec</b> Allow a user to place any object into a work area.<br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> … … 5078 11979 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.128?DT=19921204095534#HDRWINDOW">"Window" in topic 2.2.128</a> 5079 11980 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.137?DT=19921204095534#HDRWORKPLA">"Workplace" in topic 2.2.137</a> 5080 </pre> 5081 <hr /> 5082 <a name="LEN Workplace" /> 5083 <h2><a name="LEN Workplace">2.2.137 Workplace</a></h2> 5084 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A container provided by the operating environment where a user<br />performs all tasks and where all user objects reside. The<br />screen represents the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5085 href="picture-298?mode=zoom"><img 5086 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P298.GIF" 5087 alt="PICTURE 298" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 11981 </pre> 11982 11983 11984 11985 11986 11987 11988 11989 11990 11991 <hr /> 11992 <a name="LEN Workplace"></a> 11993 11994 11995 11996 11997 <h2><a name="LEN Workplace">2.2.137 Workplace</a></h2> 11998 11999 12000 12001 12002 12003 12004 12005 12006 12007 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A container provided by the operating environment where a user<br />performs all tasks and where all user objects reside. The<br />screen represents the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-298?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 298" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P298.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Guidelines</b> 5088 12008 <br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Place all windows on the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><b>Fnd</b> Represent all objects on the workplace as icons.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Essential</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 5089 12009 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.69?DT=19921204095534#HDROBJECT">"Object" in topic 2.2.69</a> … … 5091 12011 <br /><br /><br /><br /><b>Supplemental</b> <b>Related</b> <b>Topics</b> 5092 12012 <br /><br />° <a href="2.2.47?DT=19921204095534#HDRICONS">"Icon" in topic 2.2.47</a> 5093 </pre> 5094 <hr /> 5095 <h1><a name="LEN" id="LEN">A.0 Appendix A. Applying 12013 </pre> 12014 12015 12016 12017 12018 12019 12020 12021 12022 12023 <hr /> 12024 12025 12026 12027 12028 <h1><a id="LEN" name="LEN">A.0 Appendix A. 12029 Applying 5096 12030 CUA Concepts to 5097 12031 Touch Input and Multimedia User Interfaces</a></h1> 5098 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />The following sections describe two areas of advanced development for CUA<br />user interfaces: touch input and multimedia. Although the CUA guidelines<br />do not yet provide detailed information about how to design touch and<br />multimedia components of a product's interface, general information is<br />provided here for designers and developers who want to add these features<br />to their products.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5099 <ul> 5100 <li><a href="A.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.1 12032 12033 12034 12035 12036 12037 12038 12039 12040 12041 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />The following sections describe two areas of advanced development for CUA<br />user interfaces: touch input and multimedia. Although the CUA guidelines<br />do not yet provide detailed information about how to design touch and<br />multimedia components of a product's interface, general information is<br />provided here for designers and developers who want to add these features<br />to their products.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 12042 12043 12044 12045 12046 12047 12048 12049 12050 12051 <ul> 12052 12053 12054 12055 12056 12057 <li><a target="_top" href="A.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.1 5101 12058 Design Considerations for Touch Input</a></li> 5102 <li><a href="A.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.2 12059 12060 12061 12062 12063 12064 <li><a target="_top" href="A.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.2 5103 12065 Design Considerations for Multimedia</a></li> 5104 </ul> 5105 <pre></pre> 5106 <hr /> 5107 <h2>A.1 Design Considerations for 12066 12067 12068 12069 12070 12071 12072 12073 12074 12075 </ul> 12076 12077 12078 12079 12080 12081 12082 12083 12084 12085 <pre></pre> 12086 12087 12088 12089 12090 12091 12092 12093 12094 12095 <hr /> 12096 12097 12098 12099 12100 <h2>A.1 Design Considerations for 5108 12101 Touch Input</h2> 5109 <pre></pre> 5110 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The CUA user interface has been designed to accommodate point-and-select<br />interaction techniques. Although the CUA user interface is primarily<br />intended for use with a pointing device such as a mouse, many CUA concepts<br />and techniques can be incorporated in products that accept <i>touch</i><br /><i>input</i>--that is, input generated when a user places a finger on a display<br /> screen.<br /><br /><br />The design process for products that accept touch input is the same as for<br />other kinds of products. However, a designer must be sure to accommodate<br />the input device: a user's finger. Because a finger is larger than a<br />cursor or pointer and can obscure objects and choices beneath it, a<br />designer must pay special attention to a product's interaction techniques<br />and visible cues to ensure that the result of a user's interaction is the<br />result the user intended. A designer must ensure that a user knows which<br />items can be selected. A designer must also ensure that a user is able to<br />select items easily and accurately.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5111 <pre></pre> 5112 <hr /> 5113 <h3>A.1.2 Making Selection Easy 12102 12103 12104 12105 12106 12107 12108 12109 12110 12111 <pre></pre> 12112 12113 12114 12115 12116 12117 12118 12119 12120 12121 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The CUA user interface has been designed to accommodate point-and-select<br />interaction techniques. Although the CUA user interface is primarily<br />intended for use with a pointing device such as a mouse, many CUA concepts<br />and techniques can be incorporated in products that accept <i>touch</i><br /><i>input</i>--that is, input generated when a user places a finger on a display<br /> screen.<br /><br /><br />The design process for products that accept touch input is the same as for<br />other kinds of products. However, a designer must be sure to accommodate<br />the input device: a user's finger. Because a finger is larger than a<br />cursor or pointer and can obscure objects and choices beneath it, a<br />designer must pay special attention to a product's interaction techniques<br />and visible cues to ensure that the result of a user's interaction is the<br />result the user intended. A designer must ensure that a user knows which<br />items can be selected. A designer must also ensure that a user is able to<br />select items easily and accurately.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 12122 12123 12124 12125 12126 12127 12128 12129 12130 12131 <pre></pre> 12132 12133 12134 12135 12136 12137 12138 12139 12140 12141 <hr /> 12142 12143 12144 12145 12146 <h3>A.1.2 Making Selection Easy 5114 12147 and Accurate</h3> 5115 <pre></pre> 5116 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Several kinds of variables affect the ease and accuracy of touch input.<br />These include:<br /><br /><br />° User variables--for example, user experience, height, position<br />(sitting or standing), pointing acuity, left-handedness or<br />right-handedness, and finger size<br /><br /><br />° Display variables--for example, image quality, height and angle of<br />display screen, and physical support for the user's finger<br /><br /><br />° Product variables--for example, the number, size, and types of objects<br />and choices, the frequency of use of objects and choices, and the<br />types of interaction required.<br /><br /><br />Obviously, a software interface designer has no control over user<br />variables and display variables, but a designer can control product<br />variables to make it easy for a typical user to select items accurately.<br />Several techniques for improving ease and accuracy are discussed in the<br />following sections.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5117 <pre></pre> 5118 <hr /> 5119 <h4>A.1.2.2 Providing a Touch 12148 12149 12150 12151 12152 12153 12154 12155 12156 12157 <pre></pre> 12158 12159 12160 12161 12162 12163 12164 12165 12166 12167 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Several kinds of variables affect the ease and accuracy of touch input.<br />These include:<br /><br /><br />° User variables--for example, user experience, height, position<br />(sitting or standing), pointing acuity, left-handedness or<br />right-handedness, and finger size<br /><br /><br />° Display variables--for example, image quality, height and angle of<br />display screen, and physical support for the user's finger<br /><br /><br />° Product variables--for example, the number, size, and types of objects<br />and choices, the frequency of use of objects and choices, and the<br />types of interaction required.<br /><br /><br />Obviously, a software interface designer has no control over user<br />variables and display variables, but a designer can control product<br />variables to make it easy for a typical user to select items accurately.<br />Several techniques for improving ease and accuracy are discussed in the<br />following sections.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 12168 12169 12170 12171 12172 12173 12174 12175 12176 12177 <pre></pre> 12178 12179 12180 12181 12182 12183 12184 12185 12186 12187 <hr /> 12188 12189 12190 12191 12192 <h4>A.1.2.2 Providing a Touch 5120 12193 Pointer</h4> 5121 <pre></pre> 5122 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />A designer can provide a <i>touch</i> <i>pointer,</i> which is a smaller version of the<br /> arrow pointer (see <a 5123 href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a>). A touch pointer helps a<br /> user be more accurate in selecting a particular item.<br /><br /><br />A designer can provide a touch pointer when items on a screen are small or<br />are closely spaced. A touch pointer can be displayed continuously or only<br />when a user's finger is in contact with the screen. In either case, a<br />touch pointer should be displayed only in a small area near the point<br />where a user's finger is in contact with a screen, and it should be placed<br />so that it is not obscured by the user's finger. When a user's finger<br />moves to a new position on the screen, the touch pointer should also move.<br /><br /><br />If an item is particularly small and is likely to be completely obscured<br />by a user's finger, a designer can choose to display visual highlighting<br />on the touch pointer (rather than on the item to be selected) when the<br />user touches the small item.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5124 name="FIGTUCHPNT" id="FIGTUCHPNT"> </a><a href="picture-300?mode=zoom"><img 5125 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P300.GIF" 5126 alt="PICTURE 300" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 206. Touch Pointer. A touch pointer helps a user be more accurate<br />when selecting objects or choices that are small or are close<br />together.<br /></pre> 5127 <pre></pre> 5128 <ul> 5129 <li><a href="A.1.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.1.2.1 12194 12195 12196 12197 12198 12199 12200 12201 12202 12203 <pre></pre> 12204 12205 12206 12207 12208 12209 12210 12211 12212 12213 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />A designer can provide a <i>touch</i> <i>pointer,</i> which is a smaller version of the<br /> arrow pointer (see <a href="2.2.75?DT=19921204095534#HDRPOINTER">"Pointer" in topic 2.2.75</a>). A touch pointer helps a<br /> user be more accurate in selecting a particular item.<br /><br /><br />A designer can provide a touch pointer when items on a screen are small or<br />are closely spaced. A touch pointer can be displayed continuously or only<br />when a user's finger is in contact with the screen. In either case, a<br />touch pointer should be displayed only in a small area near the point<br />where a user's finger is in contact with a screen, and it should be placed<br />so that it is not obscured by the user's finger. When a user's finger<br />moves to a new position on the screen, the touch pointer should also move.<br /><br /><br />If an item is particularly small and is likely to be completely obscured<br />by a user's finger, a designer can choose to display visual highlighting<br />on the touch pointer (rather than on the item to be selected) when the<br />user touches the small item.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGTUCHPNT" name="FIGTUCHPNT"> </a><a href="picture-300?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 300" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P300.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 206. Touch Pointer. A touch pointer helps a user be more accurate<br />when selecting objects or choices that are small or are close<br />together.<br /></pre> 12214 12215 12216 12217 12218 12219 12220 12221 12222 12223 <pre></pre> 12224 12225 12226 12227 12228 12229 12230 12231 12232 12233 <ul> 12234 12235 12236 12237 12238 12239 <li><a target="_top" href="A.1.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.1.2.1 5130 12240 Providing Visible Cues</a></li> 5131 <li><a href="A.1.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.1.2.2 12241 12242 12243 12244 12245 12246 <li><a target="_top" href="A.1.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.1.2.2 5132 12247 Providing a Touch Pointer</a></li> 5133 <li><a href="A.1.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.1.2.3 12248 12249 12250 12251 12252 12253 <li><a target="_top" href="A.1.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.1.2.3 5134 12254 Providing Adequate Visual Targets and 5135 12255 Detection Zones</a></li> 5136 </ul> 5137 <pre></pre> 5138 <hr /> 5139 <h4>A.1.2.1 Providing Visible Cues</h4> 5140 <pre></pre> 5141 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />By providing obvious and consistent visible cues, a designer can make sure<br />a user knows which items can be selected and which cannot. By giving<br />special consideration to the design of items that can be selected, a<br />designer can increase a user's accuracy in selecting items. Typically, a<br />designer would use visible cues to help a user identify and select items,<br />although audible cues can be appropriate for some products and some groups<br />of users.<br /><br /><br />To make an interface component more obvious to a user, a designer can<br />strengthen its visual representation. For example, a designer could<br />specify a distinctive border for each item that can be selected. A<br />designer can also provide special highlighting when a user touches an<br />object that can be selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5142 name="FIGTUCHVIS" id="FIGTUCHVIS"> </a><a href="picture-299?mode=zoom"><img 5143 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P299.GIF" 5144 alt="PICTURE 299" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 205. Distinctive Visual Cues. A designer can accentuate some of<br />the visual characteristics of an object or choice to indicate<br />to a user that the item can be selected.<br /></pre> 5145 <pre></pre> 5146 <ul> 5147 <li><a href="A.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.1.1 12256 12257 12258 12259 12260 12261 12262 12263 12264 12265 </ul> 12266 12267 12268 12269 12270 12271 12272 12273 12274 12275 <pre></pre> 12276 12277 12278 12279 12280 12281 12282 12283 12284 12285 <hr /> 12286 12287 12288 12289 12290 <h4>A.1.2.1 Providing Visible Cues</h4> 12291 12292 12293 12294 12295 12296 12297 12298 12299 12300 <pre></pre> 12301 12302 12303 12304 12305 12306 12307 12308 12309 12310 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />By providing obvious and consistent visible cues, a designer can make sure<br />a user knows which items can be selected and which cannot. By giving<br />special consideration to the design of items that can be selected, a<br />designer can increase a user's accuracy in selecting items. Typically, a<br />designer would use visible cues to help a user identify and select items,<br />although audible cues can be appropriate for some products and some groups<br />of users.<br /><br /><br />To make an interface component more obvious to a user, a designer can<br />strengthen its visual representation. For example, a designer could<br />specify a distinctive border for each item that can be selected. A<br />designer can also provide special highlighting when a user touches an<br />object that can be selected.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGTUCHVIS" name="FIGTUCHVIS"> </a><a href="picture-299?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 299" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P299.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 205. Distinctive Visual Cues. A designer can accentuate some of<br />the visual characteristics of an object or choice to indicate<br />to a user that the item can be selected.<br /></pre> 12311 12312 12313 12314 12315 12316 12317 12318 12319 12320 <pre></pre> 12321 12322 12323 12324 12325 12326 12327 12328 12329 12330 <ul> 12331 12332 12333 12334 12335 12336 <li><a target="_top" href="A.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.1.1 5148 12337 Deciding When Selection Occurs</a></li> 5149 <li><a href="A.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.1.2 12338 12339 12340 12341 12342 12343 <li><a target="_top" href="A.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.1.2 5150 12344 Making Selection Easy and Accurate</a></li> 5151 </ul> 5152 <pre></pre> 5153 <hr /> 5154 <h3>A.1.1 Deciding When Selection 12345 12346 12347 12348 12349 12350 12351 12352 12353 12354 </ul> 12355 12356 12357 12358 12359 12360 12361 12362 12363 12364 <pre></pre> 12365 12366 12367 12368 12369 12370 12371 12372 12373 12374 <hr /> 12375 12376 12377 12378 12379 <h3>A.1.1 Deciding When Selection 5155 12380 Occurs</h3> 5156 <pre></pre> 5157 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />When using a product that accepts touch input, a user can:<br /><br /><br />° Touch the display screen with a finger<br />° Lift a finger from the display screen<br />° Slide a finger while maintaining contact with the display screen.<br /><br /><br />Selection in a touch-input environment can occur at either the moment a<br />user touches the screen or the moment a user lifts a finger from the<br />screen.<br /><br /><br />Selection at the moment of the initial touch is the most intuitive method<br />for selection and requires the least amount of training for users.<br />However, this method of selection does not give a user the opportunity to<br />cancel a selection once finger contact is made. If a designer chooses<br />this method of selection, the designer should make the visual<br />representations of a product's objects and choices relatively large. A<br />designer should also provide mechanisms that make it easy for a user to<br />identify errors and correct them.<br /><br /><br />Selection at the moment a user lifts a finger from the display screen<br />allows a user to cancel an impending selection by sliding the finger away<br />from an item before lifting the finger from the display screen. If a<br />designer chooses this method of selection, the designer should provide<br />some kind of visual highlighting on each object or choice that a user<br />touches so that the user knows the item will be selected if the user lifts<br />the finger. Users might require more training before they can use this<br />method effectively to select objects and cancel selection.<br /><br /><br />In a variation of the second method of selection, a user touches the<br />screen, slides the finger until the desired item is highlighted, then<br />lifts the finger to select the highlighted item. This method works well<br />for small or closely spaced items. If a designer chooses this method of<br />selection, the designer should provide blank areas on the display screen<br />so that a user can cancel an impending selection.<br /><br /><br />Some display screens can differentiate between a light touch and a heavier<br />touch. For these displays a designer might specify a light touch for<br />sliding a finger to an item and a heavier touch for selecting an item.<br /><br /><br />A designer can combine these different methods of selection. For example,<br />a designer might specify that a user can select a choice on the menu bar<br />at the moment the user touches the choice. Then, when the corresponding<br />pull-down menu appears, the user could slide the finger up or down the<br />pull-down menu until the desired choice is highlighted. The highlighted<br />choice would be selected at the moment the user lifts the finger from the<br />screen. This method is similar to the pointing device method used for<br />selecting choices from menu bars and pull-down menus.<br /></pre> 5158 <pre></pre> 5159 <hr /> 5160 <h4>A.1.2.3 Providing Adequate 12381 12382 12383 12384 12385 12386 12387 12388 12389 12390 <pre></pre> 12391 12392 12393 12394 12395 12396 12397 12398 12399 12400 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />When using a product that accepts touch input, a user can:<br /><br /><br />° Touch the display screen with a finger<br />° Lift a finger from the display screen<br />° Slide a finger while maintaining contact with the display screen.<br /><br /><br />Selection in a touch-input environment can occur at either the moment a<br />user touches the screen or the moment a user lifts a finger from the<br />screen.<br /><br /><br />Selection at the moment of the initial touch is the most intuitive method<br />for selection and requires the least amount of training for users.<br />However, this method of selection does not give a user the opportunity to<br />cancel a selection once finger contact is made. If a designer chooses<br />this method of selection, the designer should make the visual<br />representations of a product's objects and choices relatively large. A<br />designer should also provide mechanisms that make it easy for a user to<br />identify errors and correct them.<br /><br /><br />Selection at the moment a user lifts a finger from the display screen<br />allows a user to cancel an impending selection by sliding the finger away<br />from an item before lifting the finger from the display screen. If a<br />designer chooses this method of selection, the designer should provide<br />some kind of visual highlighting on each object or choice that a user<br />touches so that the user knows the item will be selected if the user lifts<br />the finger. Users might require more training before they can use this<br />method effectively to select objects and cancel selection.<br /><br /><br />In a variation of the second method of selection, a user touches the<br />screen, slides the finger until the desired item is highlighted, then<br />lifts the finger to select the highlighted item. This method works well<br />for small or closely spaced items. If a designer chooses this method of<br />selection, the designer should provide blank areas on the display screen<br />so that a user can cancel an impending selection.<br /><br /><br />Some display screens can differentiate between a light touch and a heavier<br />touch. For these displays a designer might specify a light touch for<br />sliding a finger to an item and a heavier touch for selecting an item.<br /><br /><br />A designer can combine these different methods of selection. For example,<br />a designer might specify that a user can select a choice on the menu bar<br />at the moment the user touches the choice. Then, when the corresponding<br />pull-down menu appears, the user could slide the finger up or down the<br />pull-down menu until the desired choice is highlighted. The highlighted<br />choice would be selected at the moment the user lifts the finger from the<br />screen. This method is similar to the pointing device method used for<br />selecting choices from menu bars and pull-down menus.<br /></pre> 12401 12402 12403 12404 12405 12406 12407 12408 12409 12410 <pre></pre> 12411 12412 12413 12414 12415 12416 12417 12418 12419 12420 <hr /> 12421 12422 12423 12424 12425 <h4>A.1.2.3 Providing Adequate 5161 12426 Visual Targets and Detection 5162 12427 Zones</h4> 5163 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Items that can be selected have two components:<br /><br /><br />° Visual target--the graphic or text representation of the object or<br />choice<br />° Detection zone--the area in which the touch of a user's finger is<br />recognized as input.<br /><br /><br />The detection zone should encompass at least the entire area occupied by<br />the visual target. In many cases, a designer will find it helpful to<br />users to provide a detection zone that extends somewhat beyond the visual<br />target.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines do not specify a minimum size for objects or choices.<br />Instead, a designer should determine the appropriate size by considering a<br />product's users and the tasks the users will want to accomplish. Usually,<br />the more varied and less experienced the users, the larger a product's<br />visual targets and detection zones should be.<br /></pre> 5164 <hr /> 5165 <h2>A.2 Design Considerations for 12428 12429 12430 12431 12432 12433 12434 12435 12436 12437 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Items that can be selected have two components:<br /><br /><br />° Visual target--the graphic or text representation of the object or<br />choice<br />° Detection zone--the area in which the touch of a user's finger is<br />recognized as input.<br /><br /><br />The detection zone should encompass at least the entire area occupied by<br />the visual target. In many cases, a designer will find it helpful to<br />users to provide a detection zone that extends somewhat beyond the visual<br />target.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines do not specify a minimum size for objects or choices.<br />Instead, a designer should determine the appropriate size by considering a<br />product's users and the tasks the users will want to accomplish. Usually,<br />the more varied and less experienced the users, the larger a product's<br />visual targets and detection zones should be.<br /></pre> 12438 12439 12440 12441 12442 12443 12444 12445 12446 12447 <hr /> 12448 12449 12450 12451 12452 <h2>A.2 Design Considerations for 5166 12453 Multimedia</h2> 5167 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Conventional user interfaces allow a user to work with textual information<br />or with textual and graphical information. A multimedia user interface<br />allows a user to work with more complex types of information, such as<br />synchronized audio and video information. In addition to text and simple<br />graphics, a multimedia user interface typically makes use of:<br /><br /><br />° Images, both static and moving, recorded and synthesized<br />° Audio, both recorded and synthesized.<br /><br /><br />The CUA environment allows the use of multimedia information. Products<br />with a CUA interface can include:<br /><br /><br />° Enhanced visible cues, such as animated icons<br />° Enhanced audible cues, such as speech or music<br />° Animated objects, such as charts and graphs<br />° Video images, such as product demonstrations<br />° Computer visualizations, such as images based on data gathered from<br />sensors.<br /><br /><br />Multimedia information can enrich and improve communication between people<br />and between users and their computers.<br /><br /><br />However, designing a product that uses multimedia information is more<br />challenging than designing a product that uses only text and graphics. To<br />create a product with a multimedia user interface, a designer must be well<br />versed in graphic design and in audio and video production, or must have<br />access to people skilled in these areas.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5168 <ul> 5169 <li><a href="A.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.2.1 12454 12455 12456 12457 12458 12459 12460 12461 12462 12463 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Conventional user interfaces allow a user to work with textual information<br />or with textual and graphical information. A multimedia user interface<br />allows a user to work with more complex types of information, such as<br />synchronized audio and video information. In addition to text and simple<br />graphics, a multimedia user interface typically makes use of:<br /><br /><br />° Images, both static and moving, recorded and synthesized<br />° Audio, both recorded and synthesized.<br /><br /><br />The CUA environment allows the use of multimedia information. Products<br />with a CUA interface can include:<br /><br /><br />° Enhanced visible cues, such as animated icons<br />° Enhanced audible cues, such as speech or music<br />° Animated objects, such as charts and graphs<br />° Video images, such as product demonstrations<br />° Computer visualizations, such as images based on data gathered from<br />sensors.<br /><br /><br />Multimedia information can enrich and improve communication between people<br />and between users and their computers.<br /><br /><br />However, designing a product that uses multimedia information is more<br />challenging than designing a product that uses only text and graphics. To<br />create a product with a multimedia user interface, a designer must be well<br />versed in graphic design and in audio and video production, or must have<br />access to people skilled in these areas.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 12464 12465 12466 12467 12468 12469 12470 12471 12472 12473 <ul> 12474 12475 12476 12477 12478 12479 <li><a target="_top" href="A.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.2.1 5170 12480 Displaying and Manipulating Multimedia 5171 12481 Information</a></li> 5172 <li><a href="A.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">A.2.2 12482 12483 12484 12485 12486 12487 <li><a target="_top" href="A.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">A.2.2 5173 12488 Accommodating Different System Configurations</a></li> 5174 </ul> 5175 <pre></pre> 5176 <hr /> 5177 <h3>A.2.1 Displaying and 12489 12490 12491 12492 12493 12494 12495 12496 12497 12498 </ul> 12499 12500 12501 12502 12503 12504 12505 12506 12507 12508 <pre></pre> 12509 12510 12511 12512 12513 12514 12515 12516 12517 12518 <hr /> 12519 12520 12521 12522 12523 <h3>A.2.1 Displaying and 5178 12524 Manipulating Multimedia Information</h3> 5179 <pre></pre> 5180 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A multimedia object has certain unique characteristics that affect the way<br />a designer should display the object in a product. A multimedia object is<br />typically a collection of data presented to a user in succession. To be<br />displayed correctly, the data in a multimedia object must be presented to<br />a user in the correct sequence and at the correct time. For example, an<br />animation sequence is presented to a user as a series of images rather<br />than as a single image. For the sequence to play correctly, each frame<br />must appear in the correct relative order, and the interval from the<br />appearance of one frame to the appearance of the next must be constant and<br />must match the interval at which the sequence was developed. Otherwise,<br />the motion in the sequence will seem jerky.<br /><br /><br />Multimedia objects can be combined. For example, a video object can be<br />combined with an audio object. To achieve the desired effect, however, a<br />designer must synchronize the objects. That is, a designer must link<br />segments of data from each object so that the two segments will be<br />displayed at the same point in time.<br /><br /><br />A designer can use standard components of the CUA interface, such as<br />windows and controls, to display a multimedia object. For example, a<br />product could display the waveform for an audio signal in a window. A<br />user could see different parts of the waveform by scrolling the contents<br />of the window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5181 name="FIGWAVEFRM" id="FIGWAVEFRM"> </a><a href="picture-301?mode=zoom"><img 5182 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P301.GIF" 5183 alt="PICTURE 301" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 207. Displaying a Multimedia Object. A multimedia object can be<br />displayed in a window. In the example above, the two windows<br />display the same object, but they represent different segments<br />of the object that correspond to different points in time. To<br />view or work with a particular segment of the multimedia<br />object, a user can scroll the window.<br /><br /><br />However, a designer should keep in mind that a scroll bar indicates the<br />position and quantity of the information visible in a window only in<br />relation to the quantity of information in the entire object being<br />displayed. A scroll bar does not represent an absolute position or<br />quantity.<br />Therefore, a scroll bar can be used to adjust the view of the object<br />displayed in the window, but it should not be used to represent or adjust<br />a specific quantity, such as time.<br /><br /><br />Instead, a designer should use a slider to represent a specific quantity.<br />For example, in a product used for video editing, a designer could use a<br />slider to indicate the total length (or time) of a "master tape" object.<br />The slider arm would indicate the specific position or point in time of a<br />single frame of the tape. To view the preceding (earlier) or following<br />(later) frames, a user could manipulate the slider arm.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5184 name="FIGSLIDERF" id="FIGSLIDERF"> </a><a href="picture-302?mode=zoom"><img 5185 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P302.GIF" 5186 alt="PICTURE 302" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 208. Slider. A slider can be used to represent a quantitative<br />aspect of a multimedia object.<br /><br /><br />A designer can modify the visuals for controls when appropriate. For<br />example, in a product used for video recording, the push buttons could be<br />designed to resemble the Record, Pause, and Play buttons on an actual<br />video recorder.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5187 name="FIGMMEDCP" id="FIGMMEDCP"> </a><a href="picture-303?mode=zoom"><img 5188 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P303.GIF" 5189 alt="PICTURE 303" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 209. Multimedia Control Panel. The standard CUA controls can be<br />used in multimedia products. The visuals for the controls can<br />be modified as needed.<br /><br /><br />A designer could use a notebook to display the settings choices for audio<br />or video equipment. Each section of the notebook could represent a<br />different piece of equipment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5190 name="FIGMMEDNOT" id="FIGMMEDNOT"> </a><a href="picture-304?mode=zoom"><img 5191 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P304.GIF" 5192 alt="PICTURE 304" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 210. Notebook for Multimedia Objects. A notebook can be used to<br />display settings choices for multimedia objects.<br /><br /><br />When deciding which controls and which visuals to use to display a<br />multimedia object, a designer should keep a user's conceptual model in<br />mind and, when possible, should mimic real-world objects that the user is<br />accustomed to.<br /></pre> 5193 <pre></pre> 5194 <hr /> 5195 <h3>A.2.2 Accommodating Different 12525 12526 12527 12528 12529 12530 12531 12532 12533 12534 <pre></pre> 12535 12536 12537 12538 12539 12540 12541 12542 12543 12544 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A multimedia object has certain unique characteristics that affect the way<br />a designer should display the object in a product. A multimedia object is<br />typically a collection of data presented to a user in succession. To be<br />displayed correctly, the data in a multimedia object must be presented to<br />a user in the correct sequence and at the correct time. For example, an<br />animation sequence is presented to a user as a series of images rather<br />than as a single image. For the sequence to play correctly, each frame<br />must appear in the correct relative order, and the interval from the<br />appearance of one frame to the appearance of the next must be constant and<br />must match the interval at which the sequence was developed. Otherwise,<br />the motion in the sequence will seem jerky.<br /><br /><br />Multimedia objects can be combined. For example, a video object can be<br />combined with an audio object. To achieve the desired effect, however, a<br />designer must synchronize the objects. That is, a designer must link<br />segments of data from each object so that the two segments will be<br />displayed at the same point in time.<br /><br /><br />A designer can use standard components of the CUA interface, such as<br />windows and controls, to display a multimedia object. For example, a<br />product could display the waveform for an audio signal in a window. A<br />user could see different parts of the waveform by scrolling the contents<br />of the window.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGWAVEFRM" name="FIGWAVEFRM"> </a><a href="picture-301?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 301" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P301.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 207. Displaying a Multimedia Object. A multimedia object can be<br />displayed in a window. In the example above, the two windows<br />display the same object, but they represent different segments<br />of the object that correspond to different points in time. To<br />view or work with a particular segment of the multimedia<br />object, a user can scroll the window.<br /><br /><br />However, a designer should keep in mind that a scroll bar indicates the<br />position and quantity of the information visible in a window only in<br />relation to the quantity of information in the entire object being<br />displayed. A scroll bar does not represent an absolute position or<br />quantity.<br />Therefore, a scroll bar can be used to adjust the view of the object<br />displayed in the window, but it should not be used to represent or adjust<br />a specific quantity, such as time.<br /><br /><br />Instead, a designer should use a slider to represent a specific quantity.<br />For example, in a product used for video editing, a designer could use a<br />slider to indicate the total length (or time) of a "master tape" object.<br />The slider arm would indicate the specific position or point in time of a<br />single frame of the tape. To view the preceding (earlier) or following<br />(later) frames, a user could manipulate the slider arm.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGSLIDERF" name="FIGSLIDERF"> </a><a href="picture-302?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 302" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P302.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 208. Slider. A slider can be used to represent a quantitative<br />aspect of a multimedia object.<br /><br /><br />A designer can modify the visuals for controls when appropriate. For<br />example, in a product used for video recording, the push buttons could be<br />designed to resemble the Record, Pause, and Play buttons on an actual<br />video recorder.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMMEDCP" name="FIGMMEDCP"> </a><a href="picture-303?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 303" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P303.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 209. Multimedia Control Panel. The standard CUA controls can be<br />used in multimedia products. The visuals for the controls can<br />be modified as needed.<br /><br /><br />A designer could use a notebook to display the settings choices for audio<br />or video equipment. Each section of the notebook could represent a<br />different piece of equipment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGMMEDNOT" name="FIGMMEDNOT"> </a><a href="picture-304?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 304" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P304.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 210. Notebook for Multimedia Objects. A notebook can be used to<br />display settings choices for multimedia objects.<br /><br /><br />When deciding which controls and which visuals to use to display a<br />multimedia object, a designer should keep a user's conceptual model in<br />mind and, when possible, should mimic real-world objects that the user is<br />accustomed to.<br /></pre> 12545 12546 12547 12548 12549 12550 12551 12552 12553 12554 <pre></pre> 12555 12556 12557 12558 12559 12560 12561 12562 12563 12564 <hr /> 12565 12566 12567 12568 12569 <h3>A.2.2 Accommodating Different 5196 12570 System Configurations</h3> 5197 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A multimedia user interface can place considerable demands on a user's<br />computer system. Factors that affect a user's ability to manage and<br />manipulate multimedia objects include:<br /><br /><br />° Size, color, and resolution of a user's display screen<br /><br /><br />° Adapter cards and peripheral hardware, such as video or audio players<br />or recorders<br /><br /><br />° System memory and storage capacity.<br /><br /><br />A designer should be aware that some users of a product might not have all<br />the hardware necessary for an ideal installation. To accommodate a wider<br />range of users, a product should include options for users with various<br />system configurations. For example, a product developed on an elaborate<br />system might contain an animation sequence that makes use of the system's<br />high resolution and many colors. The product should also include a<br />mechanism that allows a user to view the sequence on a less elaborate<br />system that has lower resolution and fewer colors.<br /></pre> 5198 <hr /> 5199 <h1><a name="HDRAPPCOL" id="HDRAPPCOL">B.0 Appendix 12571 12572 12573 12574 12575 12576 12577 12578 12579 12580 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A multimedia user interface can place considerable demands on a user's<br />computer system. Factors that affect a user's ability to manage and<br />manipulate multimedia objects include:<br /><br /><br />° Size, color, and resolution of a user's display screen<br /><br /><br />° Adapter cards and peripheral hardware, such as video or audio players<br />or recorders<br /><br /><br />° System memory and storage capacity.<br /><br /><br />A designer should be aware that some users of a product might not have all<br />the hardware necessary for an ideal installation. To accommodate a wider<br />range of users, a product should include options for users with various<br />system configurations. For example, a product developed on an elaborate<br />system might contain an animation sequence that makes use of the system's<br />high resolution and many colors. The product should also include a<br />mechanism that allows a user to view the sequence on a less elaborate<br />system that has lower resolution and fewer colors.<br /></pre> 12581 12582 12583 12584 12585 12586 12587 12588 12589 12590 <hr /> 12591 12592 12593 12594 12595 <h1><a id="HDRAPPCOL" name="HDRAPPCOL">B.0 12596 Appendix 5200 12597 B. Design 5201 12598 Considerations for the Use of Color</a></h1> 5202 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />Color serves as a visible cue that can draw a user's attention to--or away<br />from--a particular component of an interface. By using color, a designer<br />can improve the appearance and effectiveness of a product's user<br />interface. However, a designer should use color with care. If the colors<br />in an interface are poorly chosen and poorly applied, the usability of the<br />interface can be diminished.<br /><br /><br />Because some users might not have access to a color display screen, and<br />because some users might have varying degrees of color blindness, a<br />designer shouldn't rely solely on color to distinguish one interface<br />component from another. Color should be used in combination with other<br />cues, such as tonal value (contrast), size, shape, placement, and overlap.<br />In fact, designers should design the interface in black and white first<br />and should add color only after achieving a satisfactory design in black<br />and white.<br /><br /><br />In general, a designer should use fewer colors and should apply them<br />sparingly. Certain color combinations should be avoided. A red image on<br />a green background, or a green image on a red background, can be difficult<br />to see, particularly if the colors are of the same intensity. A designer<br />should be aware that many users have red-green color blindness. Also,<br />because saturated red and blue lines can appear to have depth, a designer<br />should use them with care. Lighting conditions can also affect the<br />visibility of colors. Before specifying colors for a user interface, a<br />designer should consult someone skilled in the application of color to<br />user interfaces.<br /><br /><br />Because users seek meaning in colors, a designer should take special care<br />to learn what a particular color represents to a product's intended users.<br />For example, in many Western cultures the color red means "stop" or<br />"unsatisfactory conditions," the color yellow means "caution," and the<br />color green means "go" or "satisfactory conditions." If a designer is<br />certain that the users of a product will ascribe those meanings to those<br />colors, the designer can use the colors to convey those meanings.<br />However, if a product will be used by an international audience, a<br />designer should not assume that red, yellow, and green will mean the same<br />things to all users.<br /><br /><br />A designer should use the same color to convey the same meaning within a<br />particular scope. For example, if the border of an entry field in a<br />notebook changes to red when a user places an inappropriate value in the<br />entry field, the border colors of other controls in the notebook should<br />also change to red when a user supplies an inappropriate value. A<br />designer could use red to convey a different meaning in the same product<br />as long as the red appears in a different scope. For example, if a<br />designer uses a slider to represent temperature, the designer could make<br />one end of the slider red and the other blue to represent hot and cold,<br />respectively.<br /><br /><br />Finally, whenever a designer includes color in a user interface, the<br />designer should also provide mechanisms that allow a user to change the<br />color. A designer should also provide a default set of colors that a user<br />can revert to after changing to other colors.<br /></pre> 5203 <hr /> 5204 <h1><a name="HDRSOC" id="HDRSOC">C.0 Appendix C. 12599 12600 12601 12602 12603 12604 12605 12606 12607 12608 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />Color serves as a visible cue that can draw a user's attention to--or away<br />from--a particular component of an interface. By using color, a designer<br />can improve the appearance and effectiveness of a product's user<br />interface. However, a designer should use color with care. If the colors<br />in an interface are poorly chosen and poorly applied, the usability of the<br />interface can be diminished.<br /><br /><br />Because some users might not have access to a color display screen, and<br />because some users might have varying degrees of color blindness, a<br />designer shouldn't rely solely on color to distinguish one interface<br />component from another. Color should be used in combination with other<br />cues, such as tonal value (contrast), size, shape, placement, and overlap.<br />In fact, designers should design the interface in black and white first<br />and should add color only after achieving a satisfactory design in black<br />and white.<br /><br /><br />In general, a designer should use fewer colors and should apply them<br />sparingly. Certain color combinations should be avoided. A red image on<br />a green background, or a green image on a red background, can be difficult<br />to see, particularly if the colors are of the same intensity. A designer<br />should be aware that many users have red-green color blindness. Also,<br />because saturated red and blue lines can appear to have depth, a designer<br />should use them with care. Lighting conditions can also affect the<br />visibility of colors. Before specifying colors for a user interface, a<br />designer should consult someone skilled in the application of color to<br />user interfaces.<br /><br /><br />Because users seek meaning in colors, a designer should take special care<br />to learn what a particular color represents to a product's intended users.<br />For example, in many Western cultures the color red means "stop" or<br />"unsatisfactory conditions," the color yellow means "caution," and the<br />color green means "go" or "satisfactory conditions." If a designer is<br />certain that the users of a product will ascribe those meanings to those<br />colors, the designer can use the colors to convey those meanings.<br />However, if a product will be used by an international audience, a<br />designer should not assume that red, yellow, and green will mean the same<br />things to all users.<br /><br /><br />A designer should use the same color to convey the same meaning within a<br />particular scope. For example, if the border of an entry field in a<br />notebook changes to red when a user places an inappropriate value in the<br />entry field, the border colors of other controls in the notebook should<br />also change to red when a user supplies an inappropriate value. A<br />designer could use red to convey a different meaning in the same product<br />as long as the red appears in a different scope. For example, if a<br />designer uses a slider to represent temperature, the designer could make<br />one end of the slider red and the other blue to represent hot and cold,<br />respectively.<br /><br /><br />Finally, whenever a designer includes color in a user interface, the<br />designer should also provide mechanisms that allow a user to change the<br />color. A designer should also provide a default set of colors that a user<br />can revert to after changing to other colors.<br /></pre> 12609 12610 12611 12612 12613 12614 12615 12616 12617 12618 <hr /> 12619 12620 12621 12622 12623 <h1><a id="HDRSOC" name="HDRSOC">C.0 Appendix 12624 C. 5205 12625 Comparison of 1989 5206 12626 and 1991 Rules and Recommendations</a></h1> 5207 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This section provides information for designers migrating products from<br />the <i>graphical</i> <i>model</i> defined in 1989 to the application-oriented and<br /> object-oriented models described in this guide. Not every rule is<br /> discussed in this section. Its intent is to point out some particularly<br /> important rules that have been changed and to make the reader aware of the<br /> new or changed topics. For specific implementation rules and guidelines<br /> refer to the appropriate component in <a 5208 href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS">Chapter 8, Common User Access</a><br /><a 5209 href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS">Interface Components</a> beginning on page <a 5210 href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS">2.2</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a 5211 name="FIGTBLUNIQ49" id="FIGTBLUNIQ49" /><a name="TBLTBLUNIQ49" 5212 id="TBLTBLUNIQ49"> _______________________ ________________________ _______________________ </a><br />| <b>Section</b> | <b>CUA</b> <b>Guidelines</b> <b>--</b> <b>1989</b> | <b>CUA</b> <b>Guidelines</b> <b>--</b> |<br /> | | | <b>1991</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Accelerator | Accelerator term used. | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | called a Shortcut |<br /> | | | key. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Action bar | Action bar term used. | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | called a Menu bar. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Used if more than six |<br /> | | Used if more than one | actions available, or |<br /> | | action available. | when any of the |<br /> | | | predefined menu bar |<br /> | | | actions are |<br /> | | | available. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Action message | Stop-sign symbol | Question mark or |<br /> | | always used. | stop-sign symbol may |<br /> | | | be used. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Audible feedback | Beep recommended. | Recommend using |<br /> | | | available audio |<br /> | | | capabilities as |<br /> | | | feedback. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Column heading | Alignment of columns | Alignment of columns |<br /> | | and headings not | and headings are |<br /> | | addressed. | defined based on |<br /> | | | length. |<br /> | | Use of separators not | |<br /> | | addressed. | Recommend separators |<br /> | | | between columns and |<br /> | | Required headings not | headings. |<br /> | | addressed. | |<br /> | | | Column headings not |<br /> | | | required if there is |<br /> | | | only one column. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Combination box | Default choices not | Recommend displaying |<br /> | | addressed. | a default choice. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Container | Addressed at a | A new control. An |<br /> | | direction level only. | object used to hold |<br /> | | | other objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Contents of menus | May contain action, | May contain action or |<br /> | | routing, or settings | routing choices. |<br /> | | (properties) choices. | Encourages using a |<br /> | | | notebook control for |<br /> | | | settings choices. |<br /> | | | <b>Short</b> <b>Menus</b> and <b>Full</b> |<br /> | | <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> and <b>Full</b> | <b>Menus</b> -- the contents |<br /> | | <b>menus:</b> Not addressed. | and techniques are |<br /> | | | defined. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Contextual help | Contextual help for | Defined for |<br /> | | direct-manipulation | direct-manipulation |<br /> | | tasks not addressed. | tasks. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Delete folder | Not addressed. | A container used to |<br /> | | | remove objects from |<br /> | | | the operating |<br /> | | | environment. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Dialog box | Dialog boxes used to | Secondary windows |<br /> | | continue users | used to continue |<br /> | | requests (movable, but | users requests. |<br /> | | not sizable). | Recommend they are |<br /> | | | movable and sizable. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change - |<br /> | | | dialog box term no |<br /> | | | longer used. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Direct manipulation | Direct manipulation | Direct manipulation |<br /> | | discussed briefly. | discussed as a |<br /> | | | pervasive technique. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Recommendation to |<br /> | | Direct manipulation of | provide direct |<br /> | | split bar not | manipulation for all |<br /> | | addressed | objects. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Manipulation button |<br /> | | | drags split bar. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Do-not pointer | Not addressed. | Defines do-not |<br /> | | | pointer for use |<br /> | | | during |<br /> | | | direct-manipulation |<br /> | | | operations. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Drop-down combination | Order and number of | Recommend placing |<br /> | box | choices not addressed. | choices in numeric, |<br /> | | | alphabetic, or |<br /> | | | chronological order |<br /> | | | and display at least |<br /> | | | six choices in a box. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Drop-down list | Order and number of | Recommend placing |<br /> | | choices not addressed. | choices in numeric, |<br /> | | | alphabetic, or |<br /> | | | chronological order |<br /> | | | and display at least |<br /> | | | six choices in a box. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> menu | <b>Redo:</b> Not addressed. | <b>Redo</b> choice used to |<br /> | | | reverse the effect of |<br /> | | | an undo action. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Create:</b> Not | <b>Create</b> choice used to |<br /> | | addressed. | create a new object |<br /> | | | or a reflection of |<br /> | | | the current object |<br /> | | | using the clipboard. |<br /> | | <b>Find:</b> Not addressed. | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | <b>Find</b> choice allows a |<br /> | | | user to search for an |<br /> | | | object or a part of |<br /> | | | an object. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Field prompts | Left-align field | Allow left-aligned or |<br /> | | prompts only. | right-aligned field |<br /> | | | prompts. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Field prompts followed | Field prompts |<br /> | | by colons shown in | followed by colons no |<br /> | | many examples. | longer suggested or |<br /> | | | used in examples. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>File</b> menu | <b>File:</b> Name used for | File -- used for |<br /> | | first menu choice on | application- oriented |<br /> | | the menu bar. | windows; "class name" |<br /> | | | used for first menu |<br /> | | | choice of |<br /> | | | object-oriented |<br /> | | <b>Open</b> <b>as:</b> Not | windows. |<br /> | | addressed. | |<br /> | | | Opens another view of |<br /> | | | the object in another |<br /> | | <b>Print:</b> Allows a | window. |<br /> | | window for more | |<br /> | | information | <b>Print:</b> Allows a |<br /> | | | window for more |<br /> | | | information, and |<br /> | | <b>Exit</b> (optional) | allows a cascaded |<br /> | | | menu for printer |<br /> | | | selection |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Not used; performed |<br /> | | | by close action of |<br /> | | | system menu in |<br /> | | | associated primary |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Folder | Not addressed. | System-provided |<br /> | | | container used to |<br /> | | | group objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Group box | Capitalization rules | Capitalize first |<br /> | | not addressed. | letter only (some |<br /> | | | exceptions |<br /> | | Not addressed. | described). |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Recommend using only |<br /> | | | when white space or |<br /> | | | group headings would |<br /> | | | be insufficient. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> menu | <b>Help</b> menu choices | <b>Help</b> menu choices are |<br /> | | displayed with | not displayed with |<br /> | | ellipses. | ellipses. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> <b>for</b> <b>help</b> choice | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | <b>Using</b> <b>help.</b> |<br /> | | | Position change in |<br /> | | <b>Extended</b> <b>help</b> choice | the <b>Help</b> menu. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Removed from <b>Help</b> |<br /> | | Not addressed. | menu, now accessed |<br /> | | | from the help index. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> choice | Recommend describing |<br /> | | | settings for buttons |<br /> | | <b>About</b> choice -- leads | on pointing device in |<br /> | | to a logo window. | keys help. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Position change in |<br /> | | | <b>Help</b> menu. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> |<br /> | | | choice leads to a |<br /> | | | product-information |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Hide | Not addressed. | A choice that removes |<br /> | | | a window and all |<br /> | | | associated windows |<br /> | | | from the workplace. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Hourglass pointer | Hourglass pointer term | Recommend displaying |<br /> | | used. | wait pointer over |<br /> | | | parts of a window. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | called a wait |<br /> | | | pointer. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Two wait pointer |<br /> | | | visuals are |<br /> | | | available. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Information area | Not addressed. | Information area |<br /> | | | defined as part of a |<br /> | | | window where |<br /> | | | information appears |<br /> | | | about the object or |<br /> | | | choice that the |<br /> | | | cursor is on. |<br /> | | | Information about the |<br /> | | | normal completion of |<br /> | | | a process can also |<br /> | | | appear in the |<br /> | | | information area. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Information message | Used for normal | Used when additional |<br /> | | processing situations | information about a |<br /> | | when there are no | completed process is |<br /> | | additional actions | available and no |<br /> | | available. | progress indicator is |<br /> | | | displayed, or when a |<br /> | | | process cannot |<br /> | | | complete and there |<br /> | | | are no additional |<br /> | | | actions available. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | In-use emphasis | Not addressed. | In-use emphasis |<br /> | | | defined for opened |<br /> | | | objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Keyboard | Accelerator keys | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | Shortcut keys |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | No guidance given | If changed by users, |<br /> | | about user changes. | changes reflected in |<br /> | | | menus and help. |<br /> | | Case sensitivity not | |<br /> | | addressed. | Allow either upper or |<br /> | | | lowercase characters. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Use of preferred | |<br /> | | modifiers not | Recommend using the |<br /> | | addressed. | Alt key element of |<br /> | | | shortcut key |<br /> | | | assignments to only |<br /> | | | provide access to |<br /> | | | mnemonics and to |<br /> | | | provide access to |<br /> | | | operating-environment-|rovided<br /> | | | shortcut keys. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Message box | Special type of dialog | Secondary windows |<br /> | | box used for messages | used for messages. |<br /> | | (modal and sizable) | Recommend they are |<br /> | | | modeless and sizable. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | message box term no |<br /> | | | longer used. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Messages | Application name used | <i>Object</i> <i>name</i> <i>--</i> <i>action</i> |<br /> | | for window title. | used in window title. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Messages are | |<br /> | | application modal and | Recommend to allow a |<br /> | | nonsizable. | user to continue |<br /> | | | interacting with |<br /> | | | parts of an object |<br /> | | | while message |<br /> | | Controls in messages | displayed and size |<br /> | | not addressed. | messages. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Not addressed. | Recommend providing |<br /> | | | interactive controls |<br /> | | | in messages. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Describes displaying |<br /> | | | message symbol on |<br /> | | | icon if window is not |<br /> | | | open. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Modal and modeless | Modeless dialogs used | Modeless windows |<br /> | | only for repeat | encouraged for all |<br /> | | actions. | windows. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Mouse | Using mouse to create | Ctrl+Shift+Manipulatio|<br /> | | a reflection not | button assigned to |<br /> | | addressed. | create reflection |<br /> | | | operation. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Effect of move and | Move and copy |<br /> | | copy operations on | operations effect on |<br /> | | pointer visuals not | pointer visuals |<br /> | | addressed. | defined. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Multiple document | Used to view many | Multiple windows used |<br /> | interface | objects or multiple | to view many objects |<br /> | | views of same object. | or multiple views of |<br /> | | All windows contained | the same object. |<br /> | | within one window and | Multiple document |<br /> | | share a menu bar. | interface only |<br /> | | | addressed in the |<br /> | | | context of migration. |<br /> | | | Also see the <b>Windows</b> |<br /> | | | menu. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Notebook | Not addressed. | New control. |<br /> | | | Recommended for |<br /> | | | displaying settings |<br /> | | | and some types of |<br /> | | | objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Options</b> menu | Contains | Used primarily in |<br /> | | product-specific | application- oriented |<br /> | | choices related to the | windows. Encourages |<br /> | | application. | using a notebook |<br /> | | | control for these |<br /> | | | types of choices. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Pop-up menu | Not defined | Pop-up menus defined |<br /> | | | to display actions |<br /> | | | for indicated object. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Shift+F10 and |<br /> | | | chording selection |<br /> | | | and manipulation |<br /> | | | buttons display |<br /> | | | pop-up menu of |<br /> | | | indicated object. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Progress indicator | Display a progress | Display a progress |<br /> | | indicator for complex | indicator for tasks |<br /> | | tasks. | that take more than 5 |<br /> | | | seconds. |<br /> | | Not addressed. | |<br /> | | | Display a progress |<br /> | | | indicator in action |<br /> | | | window where process |<br /> | | Only a <b>Stop</b> push | is requested. |<br /> | | button is defined for | |<br /> | | controlling the | <b>Stop,</b> <b>Pause,</b> and |<br /> | | process. | <b>Resume</b> push buttons |<br /> | | | defined for |<br /> | | | controlling the |<br /> | | | process. <b>Close</b> push |<br /> | | Title not addressed. | button not allowed |<br /> | | | for stopping the |<br /> | | | process. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Help not addressed. | Use the word |<br /> | | | "progress" in the |<br /> | | Removing the progress | window title. |<br /> | | indicator not | |<br /> | | addressed. | Recommend providing |<br /> | | | <b>Help.</b> |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Product removes the |<br /> | | | progress indicator if |<br /> | | | no special completion |<br /> | | | information needed; |<br /> | | | otherwise the user |<br /> | | | removes the progress |<br /> | | | indicator. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Pull-down menu | Recommended at least | Not addressed. |<br /> | | two choices in a | |<br /> | | pull-down menu. | |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Push button | Changing contents of a | Use two push buttons, |<br /> | | push button not | do not change content |<br /> | | addressed. | of same push button. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Normal position is in | Place push buttons |<br /> | | lower area of window. | that affect an entire |<br /> | | | window horizontally |<br /> | | | at the bottom of the |<br /> | | | window, justified |<br /> | | | from the left edge. |<br /> | | | If a push button is |<br /> | | | associated with a |<br /> | | Push buttons not | component, place it |<br /> | | allowed in windows | near the component. |<br /> | | with menu bars. | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Position of push | Push buttons allowed |<br /> | | buttons when sizing or | in windows with menu |<br /> | | scrolling not | bars. |<br /> | | addressed. | |<br /> | | Default push button | Push buttons remain |<br /> | | required for each | in same relative |<br /> | | window containing push | position when sizing |<br /> | | buttons. | or scrolling. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Pause,</b> <b>Resume,</b> <b>Close,</b> | Default push button |<br /> | | and <b>Continue:</b> not | recommended for each |<br /> | | addressed. | window containing |<br /> | | | push buttons. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Recommended usage |<br /> | | | described for <b>Pause,</b> |<br /> | | | <b>Resume,</b> <b>Close,</b> and |<br /> | | | <b>Continue.</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Radio button | <b>None</b> choice not | Recommend <b>None</b> choice |<br /> | | addressed. | if a user can choose |<br /> | | | not to select any of |<br /> | | | a set of choices. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Reflection | Not addressed. | An object represented |<br /> | | | by more than one |<br /> | | | icon. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Restore of minimized | <b>Restore</b> returns to | <b>Restore</b> returns to |<br /> | windows | middle size. | previous size and |<br /> | | | position. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Scroll bar | Slider box -- part of | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | the scroll bar used to | scroll box. |<br /> | | scroll. | |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Scroll increment | General descriptions | Recommendations |<br /> | | given, text examples | included for icons, |<br /> | | provided. | graphics, and text. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Secondary window | Term used only to | Terminology |<br /> | | refer to movable, | change--definition |<br /> | | sizable windows | expanded to include |<br /> | | dependent on another | all windows dependent |<br /> | | primary window. | on another primary |<br /> | | | window (independent |<br /> | | | of whether they are |<br /> | | May not be minimized | movable or sizable). |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | May be minimized when |<br /> | | | used to display views |<br /> | | | of objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Selected emphasis | Referred to as | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | selected emphasis | selected-state |<br /> | | | emphasis. |<br /> | | Use inverse color for | |<br /> | | selected emphasis on | For all objects show |<br /> | | text. | by changing the |<br /> | | | foreground and |<br /> | | | background colors. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Selected</b> menu | Functions were | New menu-bar choice |<br /> | | available in the <b>File</b> | used for actions on |<br /> | | menu for list | selected objects |<br /> | | handlers. | within the window. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Choice used to |<br /> | | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice -- Not | display another view |<br /> | | addressed. | of an object in a |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Separators | Not addressed. | White space |<br /> | | | recommended except in |<br /> | | | menus. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Single-line entry | Specific rules for | When the length of |<br /> | field | visible length not | data is predictable, |<br /> | | addressed. | such as time or date, |<br /> | | | the field should be |<br /> | | | entirely visible. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Slider | Not addressed. | New control to |<br /> | | | represent a quantity |<br /> | | | and its relationship |<br /> | | | to a range of |<br /> | | Usage of scroll bar | possible values. |<br /> | | for numeric values not | |<br /> | | addressed. | Slider control used. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Source emphasis and | Not defined | Defines source |<br /> | target emphasis | | emphasis and target |<br /> | | | emphasis for |<br /> | | | direct-manipulation |<br /> | | | operations. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Spin button | Not defined. | Order of choices is |<br /> | | | based on type of |<br /> | | | data. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Split window | Allows only one | Allows multiple |<br /> | | vertical and one | vertical and |<br /> | | horizontal split. | horizontal splits. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Status area | Not addressed. | Status area defined |<br /> | | | as part of a window |<br /> | | | where information |<br /> | | | appears about the |<br /> | | | state of an object or |<br /> | | | the state of a |<br /> | | | particular view of an |<br /> | | | object. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | System menu | <b>Close</b> choice does not | <b>Close</b> choice |<br /> | | address saving window | recommends saving |<br /> | | status information. | window state, such as |<br /> | | | its position, size, |<br /> | | <b>Close</b> choice only | and associated |<br /> | | addressed for dialog | messages. |<br /> | | boxes. | |<br /> | | | Result of <b>Close</b> |<br /> | | | choice defined |<br /> | | | depending on window |<br /> | | | content. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Title bar mini-icon | Introduced in the | Referred to as the |<br /> | | workplace environment | small icon in the |<br /> | | and referred to as the | title bar. |<br /> | | Title bar mini-icon. | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Defines use of target |<br /> | | Not addressed. | emphasis during |<br /> | | | direct-manipulation |<br /> | | | operations. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Tool palette | Briefly described | Content and usage |<br /> | | | described. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Value set control | When to use value set | Use a value set for |<br /> | | as opposed to a radio | graphical and short |<br /> | | button was not | textual choices. Use |<br /> | | addressed. | a radio button for |<br /> | | | textual choices. |<br /> | | Type of choices to | Display only setting |<br /> | | allow not addressed | choices in a value |<br /> | | | set. |<br /> | | Minimum number of | |<br /> | | choices not addressed | Use at least two |<br /> | | | choices when a value |<br /> | | | set is used. |<br /> | | How to display shared | |<br /> | | setting not addressed | Use the same sharing |<br /> | | | emphasis that is used |<br /> | | | for radio buttons. |<br /> | | Providing a default | |<br /> | | choice not addressed. | Provide one of the |<br /> | | | choices as a default |<br /> | | | choice. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>View</b> menu | Names of views | Names of views are |<br /> | | addressed in the <b>View</b> | listed at the top of |<br /> | | menu. | the <b>View</b> menu. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>All:</b> Used to see the | <b>Include:</b> Used to see |<br /> | | entire contents. | the entire contents |<br /> | | | or part of the |<br /> | | <b>Some:</b> Used to see | contents. |<br /> | | part of the contents. | |<br /> | | | <b>Include:</b> Used to see |<br /> | | | the entire contents |<br /> | | <b>By:</b> Used to sort the | or part of the |<br /> | | contents. | contents. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Refresh:</b> Not | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | addressed. | <b>Sort.</b> |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>ÿ</b> <b>On/Off</b> used |<br /> | | | to allow a user to |<br /> | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now:</b> Not | control updates to |<br /> | | addressed. | the window contents. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now:</b> Used to |<br /> | | | update the window |<br /> | | | contents immediately. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Warning message | <b>Yes</b> and <b>No</b> push | Recommend using |<br /> | | buttons allowed. | <b>Continue</b> push buttons |<br /> | | | and action push |<br /> | | | buttons. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Window</b> menu | Used for MDI windows. | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | <b>Windows</b> menu used to |<br /> | | | access and manage |<br /> | | | related windows. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Window title | "Application name -- | Added window title |<br /> | | OS/2 file name" | rules for |<br /> | | | object-oriented |<br /> | | | windows |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Work area | Not addressed. | A container used to |<br /> | | | group objects by |<br /> | | | task. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /></pre> 5213 <hr /> 5214 <h1><a name="HDRNLS" id="HDRNLS">D.0 Appendix D. 12627 12628 12629 12630 12631 12632 12633 12634 12635 12636 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This section provides information for designers migrating products from<br />the <i>graphical</i> <i>model</i> defined in 1989 to the application-oriented and<br /> object-oriented models described in this guide. Not every rule is<br /> discussed in this section. Its intent is to point out some particularly<br /> important rules that have been changed and to make the reader aware of the<br /> new or changed topics. For specific implementation rules and guidelines<br /> refer to the appropriate component in <a href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS">Chapter 8, Common User Access</a><br /><a href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS">Interface Components</a> beginning on page <a href="2.2?DT=19921204095534#HDRTOPICS">2.2</a>.<br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGTBLUNIQ49" name="FIGTBLUNIQ49"></a><a id="TBLTBLUNIQ49" name="TBLTBLUNIQ49"> _______________________ ________________________ _______________________ </a><br />| <b>Section</b> | <b>CUA</b> <b>Guidelines</b> <b>--</b> <b>1989</b> | <b>CUA</b> <b>Guidelines</b> <b>--</b> |<br /> | | | <b>1991</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Accelerator | Accelerator term used. | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | called a Shortcut |<br /> | | | key. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Action bar | Action bar term used. | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | called a Menu bar. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Used if more than six |<br /> | | Used if more than one | actions available, or |<br /> | | action available. | when any of the |<br /> | | | predefined menu bar |<br /> | | | actions are |<br /> | | | available. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Action message | Stop-sign symbol | Question mark or |<br /> | | always used. | stop-sign symbol may |<br /> | | | be used. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Audible feedback | Beep recommended. | Recommend using |<br /> | | | available audio |<br /> | | | capabilities as |<br /> | | | feedback. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Column heading | Alignment of columns | Alignment of columns |<br /> | | and headings not | and headings are |<br /> | | addressed. | defined based on |<br /> | | | length. |<br /> | | Use of separators not | |<br /> | | addressed. | Recommend separators |<br /> | | | between columns and |<br /> | | Required headings not | headings. |<br /> | | addressed. | |<br /> | | | Column headings not |<br /> | | | required if there is |<br /> | | | only one column. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Combination box | Default choices not | Recommend displaying |<br /> | | addressed. | a default choice. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Container | Addressed at a | A new control. An |<br /> | | direction level only. | object used to hold |<br /> | | | other objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Contents of menus | May contain action, | May contain action or |<br /> | | routing, or settings | routing choices. |<br /> | | (properties) choices. | Encourages using a |<br /> | | | notebook control for |<br /> | | | settings choices. |<br /> | | | <b>Short</b> <b>Menus</b> and <b>Full</b> |<br /> | | <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> and <b>Full</b> | <b>Menus</b> -- the contents |<br /> | | <b>menus:</b> Not addressed. | and techniques are |<br /> | | | defined. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Contextual help | Contextual help for | Defined for |<br /> | | direct-manipulation | direct-manipulation |<br /> | | tasks not addressed. | tasks. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Delete folder | Not addressed. | A container used to |<br /> | | | remove objects from |<br /> | | | the operating |<br /> | | | environment. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Dialog box | Dialog boxes used to | Secondary windows |<br /> | | continue users | used to continue |<br /> | | requests (movable, but | users requests. |<br /> | | not sizable). | Recommend they are |<br /> | | | movable and sizable. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change - |<br /> | | | dialog box term no |<br /> | | | longer used. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Direct manipulation | Direct manipulation | Direct manipulation |<br /> | | discussed briefly. | discussed as a |<br /> | | | pervasive technique. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Recommendation to |<br /> | | Direct manipulation of | provide direct |<br /> | | split bar not | manipulation for all |<br /> | | addressed | objects. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Manipulation button |<br /> | | | drags split bar. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Do-not pointer | Not addressed. | Defines do-not |<br /> | | | pointer for use |<br /> | | | during |<br /> | | | direct-manipulation |<br /> | | | operations. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Drop-down combination | Order and number of | Recommend placing |<br /> | box | choices not addressed. | choices in numeric, |<br /> | | | alphabetic, or |<br /> | | | chronological order |<br /> | | | and display at least |<br /> | | | six choices in a box. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Drop-down list | Order and number of | Recommend placing |<br /> | | choices not addressed. | choices in numeric, |<br /> | | | alphabetic, or |<br /> | | | chronological order |<br /> | | | and display at least |<br /> | | | six choices in a box. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> menu | <b>Redo:</b> Not addressed. | <b>Redo</b> choice used to |<br /> | | | reverse the effect of |<br /> | | | an undo action. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Create:</b> Not | <b>Create</b> choice used to |<br /> | | addressed. | create a new object |<br /> | | | or a reflection of |<br /> | | | the current object |<br /> | | | using the clipboard. |<br /> | | <b>Find:</b> Not addressed. | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | <b>Find</b> choice allows a |<br /> | | | user to search for an |<br /> | | | object or a part of |<br /> | | | an object. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Field prompts | Left-align field | Allow left-aligned or |<br /> | | prompts only. | right-aligned field |<br /> | | | prompts. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Field prompts followed | Field prompts |<br /> | | by colons shown in | followed by colons no |<br /> | | many examples. | longer suggested or |<br /> | | | used in examples. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>File</b> menu | <b>File:</b> Name used for | File -- used for |<br /> | | first menu choice on | application- oriented |<br /> | | the menu bar. | windows; "class name" |<br /> | | | used for first menu |<br /> | | | choice of |<br /> | | | object-oriented |<br /> | | <b>Open</b> <b>as:</b> Not | windows. |<br /> | | addressed. | |<br /> | | | Opens another view of |<br /> | | | the object in another |<br /> | | <b>Print:</b> Allows a | window. |<br /> | | window for more | |<br /> | | information | <b>Print:</b> Allows a |<br /> | | | window for more |<br /> | | | information, and |<br /> | | <b>Exit</b> (optional) | allows a cascaded |<br /> | | | menu for printer |<br /> | | | selection |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Not used; performed |<br /> | | | by close action of |<br /> | | | system menu in |<br /> | | | associated primary |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Folder | Not addressed. | System-provided |<br /> | | | container used to |<br /> | | | group objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Group box | Capitalization rules | Capitalize first |<br /> | | not addressed. | letter only (some |<br /> | | | exceptions |<br /> | | Not addressed. | described). |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Recommend using only |<br /> | | | when white space or |<br /> | | | group headings would |<br /> | | | be insufficient. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> menu | <b>Help</b> menu choices | <b>Help</b> menu choices are |<br /> | | displayed with | not displayed with |<br /> | | ellipses. | ellipses. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> <b>for</b> <b>help</b> choice | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | <b>Using</b> <b>help.</b> |<br /> | | | Position change in |<br /> | | <b>Extended</b> <b>help</b> choice | the <b>Help</b> menu. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Removed from <b>Help</b> |<br /> | | Not addressed. | menu, now accessed |<br /> | | | from the help index. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> choice | Recommend describing |<br /> | | | settings for buttons |<br /> | | <b>About</b> choice -- leads | on pointing device in |<br /> | | to a logo window. | keys help. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Position change in |<br /> | | | <b>Help</b> menu. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | <b>Product</b> <b>information</b> |<br /> | | | choice leads to a |<br /> | | | product-information |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Hide | Not addressed. | A choice that removes |<br /> | | | a window and all |<br /> | | | associated windows |<br /> | | | from the workplace. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Hourglass pointer | Hourglass pointer term | Recommend displaying |<br /> | | used. | wait pointer over |<br /> | | | parts of a window. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | called a wait |<br /> | | | pointer. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Two wait pointer |<br /> | | | visuals are |<br /> | | | available. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Information area | Not addressed. | Information area |<br /> | | | defined as part of a |<br /> | | | window where |<br /> | | | information appears |<br /> | | | about the object or |<br /> | | | choice that the |<br /> | | | cursor is on. |<br /> | | | Information about the |<br /> | | | normal completion of |<br /> | | | a process can also |<br /> | | | appear in the |<br /> | | | information area. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Information message | Used for normal | Used when additional |<br /> | | processing situations | information about a |<br /> | | when there are no | completed process is |<br /> | | additional actions | available and no |<br /> | | available. | progress indicator is |<br /> | | | displayed, or when a |<br /> | | | process cannot |<br /> | | | complete and there |<br /> | | | are no additional |<br /> | | | actions available. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | In-use emphasis | Not addressed. | In-use emphasis |<br /> | | | defined for opened |<br /> | | | objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Keyboard | Accelerator keys | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | Shortcut keys |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | No guidance given | If changed by users, |<br /> | | about user changes. | changes reflected in |<br /> | | | menus and help. |<br /> | | Case sensitivity not | |<br /> | | addressed. | Allow either upper or |<br /> | | | lowercase characters. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Use of preferred | |<br /> | | modifiers not | Recommend using the |<br /> | | addressed. | Alt key element of |<br /> | | | shortcut key |<br /> | | | assignments to only |<br /> | | | provide access to |<br /> | | | mnemonics and to |<br /> | | | provide access to |<br /> | | | operating-environment-|rovided<br /> | | | shortcut keys. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Message box | Special type of dialog | Secondary windows |<br /> | | box used for messages | used for messages. |<br /> | | (modal and sizable) | Recommend they are |<br /> | | | modeless and sizable. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | message box term no |<br /> | | | longer used. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Messages | Application name used | <i>Object</i> <i>name</i> <i>--</i> <i>action</i> |<br /> | | for window title. | used in window title. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Messages are | |<br /> | | application modal and | Recommend to allow a |<br /> | | nonsizable. | user to continue |<br /> | | | interacting with |<br /> | | | parts of an object |<br /> | | | while message |<br /> | | Controls in messages | displayed and size |<br /> | | not addressed. | messages. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Not addressed. | Recommend providing |<br /> | | | interactive controls |<br /> | | | in messages. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Describes displaying |<br /> | | | message symbol on |<br /> | | | icon if window is not |<br /> | | | open. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Modal and modeless | Modeless dialogs used | Modeless windows |<br /> | | only for repeat | encouraged for all |<br /> | | actions. | windows. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Mouse | Using mouse to create | Ctrl+Shift+Manipulatio|<br /> | | a reflection not | button assigned to |<br /> | | addressed. | create reflection |<br /> | | | operation. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Effect of move and | Move and copy |<br /> | | copy operations on | operations effect on |<br /> | | pointer visuals not | pointer visuals |<br /> | | addressed. | defined. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Multiple document | Used to view many | Multiple windows used |<br /> | interface | objects or multiple | to view many objects |<br /> | | views of same object. | or multiple views of |<br /> | | All windows contained | the same object. |<br /> | | within one window and | Multiple document |<br /> | | share a menu bar. | interface only |<br /> | | | addressed in the |<br /> | | | context of migration. |<br /> | | | Also see the <b>Windows</b> |<br /> | | | menu. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Notebook | Not addressed. | New control. |<br /> | | | Recommended for |<br /> | | | displaying settings |<br /> | | | and some types of |<br /> | | | objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Options</b> menu | Contains | Used primarily in |<br /> | | product-specific | application- oriented |<br /> | | choices related to the | windows. Encourages |<br /> | | application. | using a notebook |<br /> | | | control for these |<br /> | | | types of choices. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Pop-up menu | Not defined | Pop-up menus defined |<br /> | | | to display actions |<br /> | | | for indicated object. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Shift+F10 and |<br /> | | | chording selection |<br /> | | | and manipulation |<br /> | | | buttons display |<br /> | | | pop-up menu of |<br /> | | | indicated object. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Progress indicator | Display a progress | Display a progress |<br /> | | indicator for complex | indicator for tasks |<br /> | | tasks. | that take more than 5 |<br /> | | | seconds. |<br /> | | Not addressed. | |<br /> | | | Display a progress |<br /> | | | indicator in action |<br /> | | | window where process |<br /> | | Only a <b>Stop</b> push | is requested. |<br /> | | button is defined for | |<br /> | | controlling the | <b>Stop,</b> <b>Pause,</b> and |<br /> | | process. | <b>Resume</b> push buttons |<br /> | | | defined for |<br /> | | | controlling the |<br /> | | | process. <b>Close</b> push |<br /> | | Title not addressed. | button not allowed |<br /> | | | for stopping the |<br /> | | | process. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Help not addressed. | Use the word |<br /> | | | "progress" in the |<br /> | | Removing the progress | window title. |<br /> | | indicator not | |<br /> | | addressed. | Recommend providing |<br /> | | | <b>Help.</b> |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Product removes the |<br /> | | | progress indicator if |<br /> | | | no special completion |<br /> | | | information needed; |<br /> | | | otherwise the user |<br /> | | | removes the progress |<br /> | | | indicator. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Pull-down menu | Recommended at least | Not addressed. |<br /> | | two choices in a | |<br /> | | pull-down menu. | |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Push button | Changing contents of a | Use two push buttons, |<br /> | | push button not | do not change content |<br /> | | addressed. | of same push button. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Normal position is in | Place push buttons |<br /> | | lower area of window. | that affect an entire |<br /> | | | window horizontally |<br /> | | | at the bottom of the |<br /> | | | window, justified |<br /> | | | from the left edge. |<br /> | | | If a push button is |<br /> | | | associated with a |<br /> | | Push buttons not | component, place it |<br /> | | allowed in windows | near the component. |<br /> | | with menu bars. | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | Position of push | Push buttons allowed |<br /> | | buttons when sizing or | in windows with menu |<br /> | | scrolling not | bars. |<br /> | | addressed. | |<br /> | | Default push button | Push buttons remain |<br /> | | required for each | in same relative |<br /> | | window containing push | position when sizing |<br /> | | buttons. | or scrolling. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Pause,</b> <b>Resume,</b> <b>Close,</b> | Default push button |<br /> | | and <b>Continue:</b> not | recommended for each |<br /> | | addressed. | window containing |<br /> | | | push buttons. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Recommended usage |<br /> | | | described for <b>Pause,</b> |<br /> | | | <b>Resume,</b> <b>Close,</b> and |<br /> | | | <b>Continue.</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Radio button | <b>None</b> choice not | Recommend <b>None</b> choice |<br /> | | addressed. | if a user can choose |<br /> | | | not to select any of |<br /> | | | a set of choices. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Reflection | Not addressed. | An object represented |<br /> | | | by more than one |<br /> | | | icon. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Restore of minimized | <b>Restore</b> returns to | <b>Restore</b> returns to |<br /> | windows | middle size. | previous size and |<br /> | | | position. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Scroll bar | Slider box -- part of | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | the scroll bar used to | scroll box. |<br /> | | scroll. | |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Scroll increment | General descriptions | Recommendations |<br /> | | given, text examples | included for icons, |<br /> | | provided. | graphics, and text. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Secondary window | Term used only to | Terminology |<br /> | | refer to movable, | change--definition |<br /> | | sizable windows | expanded to include |<br /> | | dependent on another | all windows dependent |<br /> | | primary window. | on another primary |<br /> | | | window (independent |<br /> | | | of whether they are |<br /> | | May not be minimized | movable or sizable). |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | May be minimized when |<br /> | | | used to display views |<br /> | | | of objects. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Selected emphasis | Referred to as | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | selected emphasis | selected-state |<br /> | | | emphasis. |<br /> | | Use inverse color for | |<br /> | | selected emphasis on | For all objects show |<br /> | | text. | by changing the |<br /> | | | foreground and |<br /> | | | background colors. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Selected</b> menu | Functions were | New menu-bar choice |<br /> | | available in the <b>File</b> | used for actions on |<br /> | | menu for list | selected objects |<br /> | | handlers. | within the window. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Choice used to |<br /> | | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> choice -- Not | display another view |<br /> | | addressed. | of an object in a |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Separators | Not addressed. | White space |<br /> | | | recommended except in |<br /> | | | menus. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Single-line entry | Specific rules for | When the length of |<br /> | field | visible length not | data is predictable, |<br /> | | addressed. | such as time or date, |<br /> | | | the field should be |<br /> | | | entirely visible. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Slider | Not addressed. | New control to |<br /> | | | represent a quantity |<br /> | | | and its relationship |<br /> | | | to a range of |<br /> | | Usage of scroll bar | possible values. |<br /> | | for numeric values not | |<br /> | | addressed. | Slider control used. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Source emphasis and | Not defined | Defines source |<br /> | target emphasis | | emphasis and target |<br /> | | | emphasis for |<br /> | | | direct-manipulation |<br /> | | | operations. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Spin button | Not defined. | Order of choices is |<br /> | | | based on type of |<br /> | | | data. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Split window | Allows only one | Allows multiple |<br /> | | vertical and one | vertical and |<br /> | | horizontal split. | horizontal splits. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Status area | Not addressed. | Status area defined |<br /> | | | as part of a window |<br /> | | | where information |<br /> | | | appears about the |<br /> | | | state of an object or |<br /> | | | the state of a |<br /> | | | particular view of an |<br /> | | | object. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | System menu | <b>Close</b> choice does not | <b>Close</b> choice |<br /> | | address saving window | recommends saving |<br /> | | status information. | window state, such as |<br /> | | | its position, size, |<br /> | | <b>Close</b> choice only | and associated |<br /> | | addressed for dialog | messages. |<br /> | | boxes. | |<br /> | | | Result of <b>Close</b> |<br /> | | | choice defined |<br /> | | | depending on window |<br /> | | | content. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Title bar mini-icon | Introduced in the | Referred to as the |<br /> | | workplace environment | small icon in the |<br /> | | and referred to as the | title bar. |<br /> | | Title bar mini-icon. | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | Defines use of target |<br /> | | Not addressed. | emphasis during |<br /> | | | direct-manipulation |<br /> | | | operations. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Tool palette | Briefly described | Content and usage |<br /> | | | described. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Value set control | When to use value set | Use a value set for |<br /> | | as opposed to a radio | graphical and short |<br /> | | button was not | textual choices. Use |<br /> | | addressed. | a radio button for |<br /> | | | textual choices. |<br /> | | Type of choices to | Display only setting |<br /> | | allow not addressed | choices in a value |<br /> | | | set. |<br /> | | Minimum number of | |<br /> | | choices not addressed | Use at least two |<br /> | | | choices when a value |<br /> | | | set is used. |<br /> | | How to display shared | |<br /> | | setting not addressed | Use the same sharing |<br /> | | | emphasis that is used |<br /> | | | for radio buttons. |<br /> | | Providing a default | |<br /> | | choice not addressed. | Provide one of the |<br /> | | | choices as a default |<br /> | | | choice. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>View</b> menu | Names of views | Names of views are |<br /> | | addressed in the <b>View</b> | listed at the top of |<br /> | | menu. | the <b>View</b> menu. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>All:</b> Used to see the | <b>Include:</b> Used to see |<br /> | | entire contents. | the entire contents |<br /> | | | or part of the |<br /> | | <b>Some:</b> Used to see | contents. |<br /> | | part of the contents. | |<br /> | | | <b>Include:</b> Used to see |<br /> | | | the entire contents |<br /> | | <b>By:</b> Used to sort the | or part of the |<br /> | | contents. | contents. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | <b>Refresh:</b> Not | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | addressed. | <b>Sort.</b> |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>ÿ</b> <b>On/Off</b> used |<br /> | | | to allow a user to |<br /> | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now:</b> Not | control updates to |<br /> | | addressed. | the window contents. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now:</b> Used to |<br /> | | | update the window |<br /> | | | contents immediately. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Warning message | <b>Yes</b> and <b>No</b> push | Recommend using |<br /> | | buttons allowed. | <b>Continue</b> push buttons |<br /> | | | and action push |<br /> | | | buttons. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | <b>Window</b> menu | Used for MDI windows. | Terminology change -- |<br /> | | | <b>Windows</b> menu used to |<br /> | | | access and manage |<br /> | | | related windows. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Window title | "Application name -- | Added window title |<br /> | | OS/2 file name" | rules for |<br /> | | | object-oriented |<br /> | | | windows |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Work area | Not addressed. | A container used to |<br /> | | | group objects by |<br /> | | | task. |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /></pre> 12637 12638 12639 12640 12641 12642 12643 12644 12645 12646 <hr /> 12647 12648 12649 12650 12651 <h1><a id="HDRNLS" name="HDRNLS">D.0 Appendix 12652 D. 5215 12653 Common User Access 5216 12654 and National Language Support</a></h1> 5217 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />The purpose of the Common User Access (CUA) guidelines of the Systems<br />Application Architecture (SAA) is to facilitate the design of products<br />that are easy to learn, easy to use, productive and consistent. While<br />consistency is well understood, "ease of learning" and "ease of use" is<br />very much dependent on a user's cultural environment, particularly their<br />language.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines are given in the main body of this publication. This<br />appendix assumes you are familiar with those guidelines and only describes<br />features of the interface that may require different guidelines or need<br />clarification when applied in different users' cultural environments.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5218 <ul> 5219 <li><a href="D.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.1 12655 12656 12657 12658 12659 12660 12661 12662 12663 12664 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />The purpose of the Common User Access (CUA) guidelines of the Systems<br />Application Architecture (SAA) is to facilitate the design of products<br />that are easy to learn, easy to use, productive and consistent. While<br />consistency is well understood, "ease of learning" and "ease of use" is<br />very much dependent on a user's cultural environment, particularly their<br />language.<br /><br /><br />The CUA guidelines are given in the main body of this publication. This<br />appendix assumes you are familiar with those guidelines and only describes<br />features of the interface that may require different guidelines or need<br />clarification when applied in different users' cultural environments.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 12665 12666 12667 12668 12669 12670 12671 12672 12673 12674 <ul> 12675 12676 12677 12678 12679 12680 <li><a target="_top" href="D.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.1 5220 12681 General Considerations for National Language and the CUA 5221 12682 Guidelines</a></li> 5222 <li><a href="D.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.2 12683 12684 12685 12686 12687 12688 <li><a target="_top" href="D.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.2 5223 12689 Double-Byte Character Sets</a></li> 5224 <li><a href="D.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3 12690 12691 12692 12693 12694 12695 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3 5225 12696 Bidirectional Languages</a></li> 5226 </ul> 5227 <pre></pre> 5228 <hr /> 5229 <h2>D.1 General Considerations for 12697 12698 12699 12700 12701 12702 12703 12704 12705 12706 </ul> 12707 12708 12709 12710 12711 12712 12713 12714 12715 12716 <pre></pre> 12717 12718 12719 12720 12721 12722 12723 12724 12725 12726 <hr /> 12727 12728 12729 12730 12731 <h2>D.1 General Considerations for 5230 12732 National Language and the CUA 5231 12733 Guidelines</h2> 5232 <pre></pre> 5233 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following clarifies some of the CUA guidelines when applied to a<br />National Language environment.<br /><br /><br /><b>Capitalization</b> The guidelines stated for capitalization in this<br /> manual are for the English language developer. When a<br /> product is developed in another language or translated<br /> to another language, the rules of that language must<br /> be followed. For example, in the German language all<br /> nouns are capitalized, no matter what their position<br /> in a phrase or sentence.<br /><br /><br /><b>Column</b> <b>Headings</b> The space needed for a column heading after<br /> translation may increase. For usability purposes, the<br /> additional space may be achieved by increasing the<br /> number of rows in the heading.<br /><br /><br /><b>Descriptive</b> <b>Text</b> Descriptive text will sometimes reflect a localized or<br /> culturally sensitive format. Allow the user to edit<br /> the descriptive text in place.<br /><br /><br /><b>Field</b> <b>Prompts</b> The translation of field prompts may cause a field to<br /> be moved. Fields must be realigned after translation.<br /><br /><br /><b>First-Letter</b> <b>Cursor</b> <b>Navigation</b><br />Allow a user to press the unaccented, uppercase, or<br />lowercase character to access accented first letters.<br /><br /><br /><b>Icon</b> An icon designed for the international market place<br /> should follow these additional design criteria.<br /><br /><br />° Avoid body parts<br />° Use international symbols where possible<br />° Do not include text<br />° If alphabetic characters are included, use<br />uppercase<br />° Avoid symbolic written material that is oriented<br />for left-to-right text<br />° Avoid stars and crosses<br />° Do not use humor<br />° Do not use regional metaphors.<br /><br /><br /><b>Length</b> <b>of</b> <b>Text</b> When a product will be translated to another language,<br /> developers should consider translation space when<br /> evaluating length of text in entry fields. For<br /> example, CUA guidelines recommend 60 or fewer<br /> characters in a single-line entry field. If the<br /> product will be translated, 40 or fewer characters are<br /> recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>Shortcut</b> <b>Keys</b> The use of Alt+(A-Z) for shortcut keys can be very<br /> awkward on non-US keyboards since only either the left<br /> hand Alt key or the right hand Alt key may be<br /> available for this function.<br /><br /><br /><b>Sort</b> Each country has a different way of sorting, and may<br /> have several ways of sorting within the country, such<br /> as in a telephone book or a dictionary. The sort menu<br /> should be defined by each country or application. The<br /> sort menu may have to allow selection of these<br /> criteria based on the requirements of the country or<br /> application. In addition, when lists are ordered<br /> alphabetically, as in spin buttons, the list must be<br /> reordered after translation.<br /></pre> 5234 <pre></pre> 5235 <hr /> 5236 <h2>D.2 Double-Byte Character Sets</h2> 5237 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following are some of the special considerations when applying the CUA<br />guidelines to Double-Byte Character Sets.<br /><br /><br />° Mnemonic Selection: A <i>mnemonic</i> is a single character that provides a<br /> fast interaction technique for selecting choices from the keyboard.<br /> When users type a valid mnemonic, the selection cursor moves to the<br /> choice that the mnemonic is assigned to and the choice is<br /> automatically selected or deselected as appropriate. This saves<br /> keystrokes for choices that are usually selected explicitly.<br /><br /><br />All the guidelines for mnemonics in a single-byte-character-set (SBCS)<br />language apply to a double-byte-character-set (DBCS) language except<br />for how the mnemonics are shown. If all the letters in a choice are<br />already assigned, or the choice consists of DBCS characters, you may<br />choose another letter or a keyboard character, such as the comma (,).<br />Choices that appear many times in an application should be assigned<br />the same mnemonic throughout.<br /><br /><br />Applications translated from SBCS languages to DBCS languages can keep<br />the SBCS mnemonics.<br /><br /><br />° DBCS Keyboard Shift Status: In the DBCS environment, the Presentation<br />Manager has the capability to display the keyboard shift status in the<br />information area. This technique should be used in primary and<br />secondary windows that accept keyboard data entry for DBCS<br />applications.<br /><br /><br />° Sort: For components, such as the combination box control, that<br />specify choices should be shown in a specific sort order such as<br />alphabetic order, the sort order may actually depend on the<br />application. For example, for Japanese Kanji it may be better to sort<br />by Japanese phonetic order or some other appropriate order depending<br />on the information in the field.<br /></pre> 5238 <hr /> 5239 <h2>D.3 Bidirectional Languages</h2> 5240 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The main factor affecting CUA guidelines for users of bidirectional<br />languages (Arabic and Hebrew) is the right-to-left (RTL) orientation of<br />these languages; Hebrew or Arabic text is written from right to left and<br />from top to bottom. However, English words and numbers are written from<br />left to right (LTR). This makes bidirectionality a must in any system<br />intended for Arabic or Hebrew users.<br /><br /><br /><b>This</b> <b>is</b> <b>the</b> <b>basic</b> <b>rule</b> <b>of</b> <b>bidirectional</b> <b>applications.</b> 12734 12735 12736 12737 12738 12739 12740 12741 12742 12743 <pre></pre> 12744 12745 12746 12747 12748 12749 12750 12751 12752 12753 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following clarifies some of the CUA guidelines when applied to a<br />National Language environment.<br /><br /><br /><b>Capitalization</b> The guidelines stated for capitalization in this<br /> manual are for the English language developer. When a<br /> product is developed in another language or translated<br /> to another language, the rules of that language must<br /> be followed. For example, in the German language all<br /> nouns are capitalized, no matter what their position<br /> in a phrase or sentence.<br /><br /><br /><b>Column</b> <b>Headings</b> The space needed for a column heading after<br /> translation may increase. For usability purposes, the<br /> additional space may be achieved by increasing the<br /> number of rows in the heading.<br /><br /><br /><b>Descriptive</b> <b>Text</b> Descriptive text will sometimes reflect a localized or<br /> culturally sensitive format. Allow the user to edit<br /> the descriptive text in place.<br /><br /><br /><b>Field</b> <b>Prompts</b> The translation of field prompts may cause a field to<br /> be moved. Fields must be realigned after translation.<br /><br /><br /><b>First-Letter</b> <b>Cursor</b> <b>Navigation</b><br />Allow a user to press the unaccented, uppercase, or<br />lowercase character to access accented first letters.<br /><br /><br /><b>Icon</b> An icon designed for the international market place<br /> should follow these additional design criteria.<br /><br /><br />° Avoid body parts<br />° Use international symbols where possible<br />° Do not include text<br />° If alphabetic characters are included, use<br />uppercase<br />° Avoid symbolic written material that is oriented<br />for left-to-right text<br />° Avoid stars and crosses<br />° Do not use humor<br />° Do not use regional metaphors.<br /><br /><br /><b>Length</b> <b>of</b> <b>Text</b> When a product will be translated to another language,<br /> developers should consider translation space when<br /> evaluating length of text in entry fields. For<br /> example, CUA guidelines recommend 60 or fewer<br /> characters in a single-line entry field. If the<br /> product will be translated, 40 or fewer characters are<br /> recommended.<br /><br /><br /><b>Shortcut</b> <b>Keys</b> The use of Alt+(A-Z) for shortcut keys can be very<br /> awkward on non-US keyboards since only either the left<br /> hand Alt key or the right hand Alt key may be<br /> available for this function.<br /><br /><br /><b>Sort</b> Each country has a different way of sorting, and may<br /> have several ways of sorting within the country, such<br /> as in a telephone book or a dictionary. The sort menu<br /> should be defined by each country or application. The<br /> sort menu may have to allow selection of these<br /> criteria based on the requirements of the country or<br /> application. In addition, when lists are ordered<br /> alphabetically, as in spin buttons, the list must be<br /> reordered after translation.<br /></pre> 12754 12755 12756 12757 12758 12759 12760 12761 12762 12763 <pre></pre> 12764 12765 12766 12767 12768 12769 12770 12771 12772 12773 <hr /> 12774 12775 12776 12777 12778 <h2>D.2 Double-Byte Character Sets</h2> 12779 12780 12781 12782 12783 12784 12785 12786 12787 12788 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following are some of the special considerations when applying the CUA<br />guidelines to Double-Byte Character Sets.<br /><br /><br />° Mnemonic Selection: A <i>mnemonic</i> is a single character that provides a<br /> fast interaction technique for selecting choices from the keyboard.<br /> When users type a valid mnemonic, the selection cursor moves to the<br /> choice that the mnemonic is assigned to and the choice is<br /> automatically selected or deselected as appropriate. This saves<br /> keystrokes for choices that are usually selected explicitly.<br /><br /><br />All the guidelines for mnemonics in a single-byte-character-set (SBCS)<br />language apply to a double-byte-character-set (DBCS) language except<br />for how the mnemonics are shown. If all the letters in a choice are<br />already assigned, or the choice consists of DBCS characters, you may<br />choose another letter or a keyboard character, such as the comma (,).<br />Choices that appear many times in an application should be assigned<br />the same mnemonic throughout.<br /><br /><br />Applications translated from SBCS languages to DBCS languages can keep<br />the SBCS mnemonics.<br /><br /><br />° DBCS Keyboard Shift Status: In the DBCS environment, the Presentation<br />Manager has the capability to display the keyboard shift status in the<br />information area. This technique should be used in primary and<br />secondary windows that accept keyboard data entry for DBCS<br />applications.<br /><br /><br />° Sort: For components, such as the combination box control, that<br />specify choices should be shown in a specific sort order such as<br />alphabetic order, the sort order may actually depend on the<br />application. For example, for Japanese Kanji it may be better to sort<br />by Japanese phonetic order or some other appropriate order depending<br />on the information in the field.<br /></pre> 12789 12790 12791 12792 12793 12794 12795 12796 12797 12798 <hr /> 12799 12800 12801 12802 12803 <h2>D.3 Bidirectional Languages</h2> 12804 12805 12806 12807 12808 12809 12810 12811 12812 12813 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The main factor affecting CUA guidelines for users of bidirectional<br />languages (Arabic and Hebrew) is the right-to-left (RTL) orientation of<br />these languages; Hebrew or Arabic text is written from right to left and<br />from top to bottom. However, English words and numbers are written from<br />left to right (LTR). This makes bidirectionality a must in any system<br />intended for Arabic or Hebrew users.<br /><br /><br /><b>This</b> <b>is</b> <b>the</b> <b>basic</b> <b>rule</b> <b>of</b> <b>bidirectional</b> <b>applications.</b> 5241 12814 <br /><br />In CUA-interface-conforming applications, all pieces of data must<br />be displayed in the orientation that is correct for the<br />application user. Data input must be supported in the orientation<br />that is natural for users.<br /><br /><br />General information concerning the Arabic language can be found in<br /><cite>National</cite> <cite>Language</cite> <cite>Information</cite> <cite>and</cite> <cite>Design</cite> <cite>Guide,</cite> <cite>Volume</cite> <cite>3:</cite> <cite>Arabic</cite> <cite>Script</cite><br /><cite>Languages,</cite> <cite>(SE09-8003)</cite>. This publication describes the Arabic language,<br /> and the main keyboard functions implemented on terminals and programmable<br /> workstations with Arabic support.<br /><br /><br />General information concerning the Hebrew language may be found in<br /><cite>National</cite> <cite>Language</cite> <cite>Information</cite> <cite>and</cite> <cite>Design</cite> <cite>Guide,</cite> <cite>Volume</cite> <cite>4:</cite> <cite>Hebrew</cite><br />(SE09-8004). This publication describes the Hebrew language, and the main<br />keyboard functions implemented on terminals and programmable workstations<br />with Hebrew support.<br /><br /><br />In most cases, Arabic and Hebrew can be handled in the same way. We will<br />use "Arabic and Hebrew" as a generic designator for the national language<br />used by a bidirectional application. Whenever special considerations<br />apply to Arabic only or to Hebrew only, they will be mentioned explicitly.<br /><br /><br />In all examples, Arabic and Hebrew text is represented by lowercase Latin,<br />written from right to left. English text is represented by uppercase,<br />although in reality it would be written in mixed case, if appropriate.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5242 <ul> 5243 <li><a href="D.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.1 12815 12816 12817 12818 12819 12820 12821 12822 12823 12824 <ul> 12825 12826 12827 12828 12829 12830 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.1 5244 12831 Language Usage</a></li> 5245 <li><a href="D.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.2 12832 12833 12834 12835 12836 12837 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.2 5246 12838 Orientation</a></li> 5247 <li><a href="D.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3 12839 12840 12841 12842 12843 12844 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3 5248 12845 RTL Flavor of CUA-Interface Components</a></li> 5249 <li><a href="D.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.4 12846 12847 12848 12849 12850 12851 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.4 5250 12852 Entry Fields</a></li> 5251 <li><a href="D.3.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5 12853 12854 12855 12856 12857 12858 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5 5252 12859 Navigation in a RTL Window</a></li> 5253 <li><a href="D.3.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.6 12860 12861 12862 12863 12864 12865 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.6 5254 12866 Key Assignments</a></li> 5255 </ul> 5256 <pre></pre> 5257 <hr /> 5258 <h3>D.3.1 Language Usage</h3> 5259 <pre></pre> 5260 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Arabic and Hebrew applications must generally use the national language<br />for titles, instructions, headings, prompts, and other window components,<br />with the following exceptions:<br /><br /><br />° English acronyms or terms commonly used untranslated, for example,<br />DOS, EXE, CICS.<br /><br /><br />° Key names must be identical to the key top engraving, for example, F1,<br />Alt, Ctrl, Enter.<br /><br /><br />° Key combinations must be displayed as English phrases, for example,<br />"Alt+F2."<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5261 <pre></pre> 5262 <hr /> 5263 <h4>D.3.1.2 Mnemonics</h4> 5264 <pre></pre> 5265 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In a RTL window, choices appear in Arabic and Hebrew and their mnemonics<br />are in Arabic and Hebrew. However, if a choice is in English, its<br />corresponding mnemonic must also be English.<br /><br /><br />In Arabic, any shape of a letter can be used for mnemonic.<br /></pre> 5266 <pre></pre> 5267 <ul> 5268 <li><a href="D.3.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.1.1 12867 12868 12869 12870 12871 12872 12873 12874 12875 12876 </ul> 12877 12878 12879 12880 12881 12882 12883 12884 12885 12886 <pre></pre> 12887 12888 12889 12890 12891 12892 12893 12894 12895 12896 <hr /> 12897 12898 12899 12900 12901 <h3>D.3.1 Language Usage</h3> 12902 12903 12904 12905 12906 12907 12908 12909 12910 12911 <pre></pre> 12912 12913 12914 12915 12916 12917 12918 12919 12920 12921 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Arabic and Hebrew applications must generally use the national language<br />for titles, instructions, headings, prompts, and other window components,<br />with the following exceptions:<br /><br /><br />° English acronyms or terms commonly used untranslated, for example,<br />DOS, EXE, CICS.<br /><br /><br />° Key names must be identical to the key top engraving, for example, F1,<br />Alt, Ctrl, Enter.<br /><br /><br />° Key combinations must be displayed as English phrases, for example,<br />"Alt+F2."<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 12922 12923 12924 12925 12926 12927 12928 12929 12930 12931 <pre></pre> 12932 12933 12934 12935 12936 12937 12938 12939 12940 12941 <hr /> 12942 12943 12944 12945 12946 <h4>D.3.1.2 Mnemonics</h4> 12947 12948 12949 12950 12951 12952 12953 12954 12955 12956 <pre></pre> 12957 12958 12959 12960 12961 12962 12963 12964 12965 12966 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In a RTL window, choices appear in Arabic and Hebrew and their mnemonics<br />are in Arabic and Hebrew. However, if a choice is in English, its<br />corresponding mnemonic must also be English.<br /><br /><br />In Arabic, any shape of a letter can be used for mnemonic.<br /></pre> 12967 12968 12969 12970 12971 12972 12973 12974 12975 12976 <pre></pre> 12977 12978 12979 12980 12981 12982 12983 12984 12985 12986 <ul> 12987 12988 12989 12990 12991 12992 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.1.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.1.1 5269 12993 Application Language Specification</a></li> 5270 <li><a href="D.3.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.1.2 12994 12995 12996 12997 12998 12999 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.1.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.1.2 5271 13000 Mnemonics</a></li> 5272 <li><a href="D.3.1.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.1.3 13001 13002 13003 13004 13005 13006 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.1.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.1.3 5273 13007 Character Presentation Shapes in 5274 13008 Arabic</a></li> 5275 <li><a href="D.3.1.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.1.4 13009 13010 13011 13012 13013 13014 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.1.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.1.4 5276 13015 Numeric Shape Selection in Arabic</a></li> 5277 </ul> 5278 <pre></pre> 5279 <hr /> 5280 <h4>D.3.1.1 Application Language 13016 13017 13018 13019 13020 13021 13022 13023 13024 13025 </ul> 13026 13027 13028 13029 13030 13031 13032 13033 13034 13035 <pre></pre> 13036 13037 13038 13039 13040 13041 13042 13043 13044 13045 <hr /> 13046 13047 13048 13049 13050 <h4>D.3.1.1 Application Language 5281 13051 Specification</h4> 5282 <pre></pre> 5283 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An application may allow dynamic language selection. When a new language<br />is chosen by a user, headings, messages, and commands should adhere to the<br />new language. For RTL languages, the application interface reflects CUA<br />guidelines with this bidirectional language addendum. When the<br />application contains a mixture of RTL and LTR language elements, the LTR<br />elements follow the unmodified CUA guidelines while the RTL elements<br />follow CUA guidelines with this bidirectional Languages addendum.<br /><br /><br />The application language must be mentioned in the product information<br />window, if the application is not unilingual. If the application allows<br />dynamic language selection, the initial language must be mentioned in the<br />product information window.<br /></pre> 5284 <pre></pre> 5285 <hr /> 5286 <h4>D.3.1.3 Character Presentation 13052 13053 13054 13055 13056 13057 13058 13059 13060 13061 <pre></pre> 13062 13063 13064 13065 13066 13067 13068 13069 13070 13071 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />An application may allow dynamic language selection. When a new language<br />is chosen by a user, headings, messages, and commands should adhere to the<br />new language. For RTL languages, the application interface reflects CUA<br />guidelines with this bidirectional language addendum. When the<br />application contains a mixture of RTL and LTR language elements, the LTR<br />elements follow the unmodified CUA guidelines while the RTL elements<br />follow CUA guidelines with this bidirectional Languages addendum.<br /><br /><br />The application language must be mentioned in the product information<br />window, if the application is not unilingual. If the application allows<br />dynamic language selection, the initial language must be mentioned in the<br />product information window.<br /></pre> 13072 13073 13074 13075 13076 13077 13078 13079 13080 13081 <pre></pre> 13082 13083 13084 13085 13086 13087 13088 13089 13090 13091 <hr /> 13092 13093 13094 13095 13096 <h4>D.3.1.3 Character Presentation 5287 13097 Shapes in Arabic</h4> 5288 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Arabic characters take various presentation shapes according to the<br />writing context and the writer's intention:<br /><br /><br />° For continuous text, traditional characters' presentation shapes may<br />be automatically selected for each character according to its linkage<br />capabilities and to the linkage capabilities of its neighbors.<br /><br /><br />° In some cases (like acronyms, abbreviations, paragraph numbering, or<br />stock item part numbers), character presentation shapes are usually<br />selected by the writer without following the traditional contextual<br />writing rules.<br /><br /><br />° Applications, and users within the limits defined by the application,<br />must be allowed to decide on characters' presentation shapes and on<br />their relevance in the various contexts.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Data</i> <i>Entry</i>: Arabic keyboards provide one single representative (one<br /> shape) for each Arabic character, using one of its shapes selected for the<br /> best balanced readability of the whole keyboard. Specific function keys<br /> allow the user to either activate automatic contextual selection of Arabic<br /> characters' presentation shapes, or to specify which is the desired<br /> presentation shape for a given occurrence of a character.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Data</i> <i>Handling</i>: According to the type of data and to the processing<br /> required, various cases may occur:<br /><br /><br />° Actual character shape is significant: exact match on shapes where<br />another shape of the same letter will result in a no-match. For<br />example: text formatting for final presentation.<br /><br /><br />° Actual shape is indifferent: any can be used and all should be<br />permitted. This is the case where a shape has been selected as a<br />mnemonic for a choice in an menu bar, and any shape for this character<br />must be allowed as a correct match to the mnemonic.<br /></pre> 5289 <hr /> 5290 <h4>D.3.1.4 Numeric Shape 13098 13099 13100 13101 13102 13103 13104 13105 13106 13107 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Arabic characters take various presentation shapes according to the<br />writing context and the writer's intention:<br /><br /><br />° For continuous text, traditional characters' presentation shapes may<br />be automatically selected for each character according to its linkage<br />capabilities and to the linkage capabilities of its neighbors.<br /><br /><br />° In some cases (like acronyms, abbreviations, paragraph numbering, or<br />stock item part numbers), character presentation shapes are usually<br />selected by the writer without following the traditional contextual<br />writing rules.<br /><br /><br />° Applications, and users within the limits defined by the application,<br />must be allowed to decide on characters' presentation shapes and on<br />their relevance in the various contexts.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Data</i> <i>Entry</i>: Arabic keyboards provide one single representative (one<br /> shape) for each Arabic character, using one of its shapes selected for the<br /> best balanced readability of the whole keyboard. Specific function keys<br /> allow the user to either activate automatic contextual selection of Arabic<br /> characters' presentation shapes, or to specify which is the desired<br /> presentation shape for a given occurrence of a character.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Data</i> <i>Handling</i>: According to the type of data and to the processing<br /> required, various cases may occur:<br /><br /><br />° Actual character shape is significant: exact match on shapes where<br />another shape of the same letter will result in a no-match. For<br />example: text formatting for final presentation.<br /><br /><br />° Actual shape is indifferent: any can be used and all should be<br />permitted. This is the case where a shape has been selected as a<br />mnemonic for a choice in an menu bar, and any shape for this character<br />must be allowed as a correct match to the mnemonic.<br /></pre> 13108 13109 13110 13111 13112 13113 13114 13115 13116 13117 <hr /> 13118 13119 13120 13121 13122 <h4>D.3.1.4 Numeric Shape 5291 13123 Selection in Arabic</h4> 5292 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In any given Arabic-language environment:<br /><br /><br />° Digits appearing in a Latin context will be presented in their usual<br />Arabic shapes.<br /><br /><br />° Digits appearing in an Arabic context will be presented in either<br />their Hindi shapes or their Arabic shapes, according to the prevailing<br />local tradition.<br /><br /><br />° Applications, and users within the limits defined by the application,<br />must be allowed to select digit presentation shapes and to decide on<br />their relevance in the various contexts.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Data</i> <i>entry</i>: Hindi and Arabic shapes for the same digit are on the same<br /> key on the keyboard. Depending on the customization done for digit-shape<br /> selection and on the currently selected keyboard language, the<br /> corresponding digit codes and shapes are generated and presented.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Data</i> <i>handling</i>: The possible cases are very similar to those for Arabic<br /> characters: digit shapes may be indifferent (for arithmetic processing) or<br /> mandatory (for presentation preparation).<br /></pre> 5293 <hr /> 5294 <h3>D.3.2 Orientation</h3> 5295 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Arabic and Hebrew applications, since written for the Arabic and Hebrew<br />language, use the screen space in RTL orientation. Thus the right side of<br />a window becomes the "begin" side, and its left side is the "end" side.<br />Most references to "right" and "left" in the CUA guidelines for LTR<br />languages remain true in Arabic and Hebrew, providing that "right" and<br />"left" are exchanged (in some cases, "right" and "left" must be conserved<br />as-is for Arabic and Hebrew. They are mentioned in the following<br />paragraph).<br /><br /><br />The appearance of an Arabic and Hebrew window is mostly the mirror<br />symmetric of a corresponding English window ("mostly" because the position<br />of system and maximize and minimize push buttons in the title bar does not<br />change. A discussion about vertical scroll bars appears in the following<br />paragraphs).<br /><br /><br />For instance, a window with some choices could look like <a 5296 href="D.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGWINWC">Figure 211</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5297 name="FIGWINWC" id="FIGWINWC"> </a><a href="picture-305?mode=zoom"><img 5298 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P305.GIF" 5299 alt="PICTURE 305" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 211. Window with Choices<br /><br /><br />It must be understood that orientation applies at multiple levels:<br /><br /><br />° In a bidirectional environment, the end user selects the orientation<br />of the workplace (for example, screen orientation). Selection is done<br />according to the user's main usage, standards, or preferences and<br />controls the way the screen and windows are organized. If this<br />orientation is RTL:<br /><br /><br />- Windows are tiled, cascaded, or superimposed with the older<br />primary window on the right and the newer secondary on the left<br /><br /><br />- Application icons are ordered from right-to-left beginning from<br />the right side of the screen.<br /><br /><br />- In a workplace environment, icons should be originally ordered<br />from right-to-left and top-to-bottom if there is a meaningful<br />sequence among them.<br /><br /><br />° An application has a general orientation for its windows, which is LTR<br />for English applications and generally RTL for Arabic and Hebrew<br />applications.<br /><br /><br />° A window has an orientation. If the window orientation is RTL, its<br />elements are logically ordered from right-to-left and from<br />top-to-bottom.<br /><br /><br />For a RTL window, the priority for positioning associated secondary<br />windows (like help windows) is: to the left of, to the right of,<br />above, or below the application window.<br /><br /><br />Note that an Arabic or Hebrew application can include some LTR<br />windows.<br /><br /><br />Note also that a LTR window can be used on a RTL screen and<br />vice-versa. This means that English services and applications can be<br />used while the screen is oriented RTL and Arabic and Hebrew (RTL)<br />applications can be used on a LTR screen.<br /><br /><br />° Within the same window, text and graphics may have differing<br />orientations. This may be the case, for instance, for a geographic<br />map where the graphics will be left-to-right (as for an English<br />application), but the Arabic and Hebrew captions will be<br />right-to-left.<br /><br /><br />° Entry fields are a special case: for each field, an orientation is<br />defined, which by default is RTL within RTL windows. However, fields<br />which are to receive numeric data or English text should be defined as<br />LTR oriented.<br /><br /><br />Within an entry field, the keying (or cursor) direction may be RTL or<br />LTR, according to the data entered (Arabic or Hebrew text, or English<br />and numbers).<br /><br /><br />More explanations on entry fields will be found in the following<br />paragraphs.<br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> While the "right" and "left" have exchanged their meaning, the<br /> physical right and left are still the same, thus the following have the<br /> same effect for Arabic and Hebrew as for English:<br /><br /><br />° Cursor movement keys (left and right arrows) must still move the<br />cursor according to the direction of the arrow engraved on the key top<br />(this is also true for combinations of the left and right arrow keys<br />with Shift, Ctrl or Alt).<br /><br /><br />Likewise, Ctrl+PgUp must always scroll to the left, and Ctrl+PgDn<br />scroll to the right.<br /><br /><br />° Right and left buttons of a pointing device.<br /><br /><br />° Right and left movement of a pointing device.<br /><br /><br />° Graphics may be unaffected by the window orientation: for instance, a<br />map must still have the East on the right side and the West on the<br />left side.<br /></pre> 5300 <hr /> 5301 <h3>D.3.3 RTL Flavor of 13124 13125 13126 13127 13128 13129 13130 13131 13132 13133 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In any given Arabic-language environment:<br /><br /><br />° Digits appearing in a Latin context will be presented in their usual<br />Arabic shapes.<br /><br /><br />° Digits appearing in an Arabic context will be presented in either<br />their Hindi shapes or their Arabic shapes, according to the prevailing<br />local tradition.<br /><br /><br />° Applications, and users within the limits defined by the application,<br />must be allowed to select digit presentation shapes and to decide on<br />their relevance in the various contexts.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Data</i> <i>entry</i>: Hindi and Arabic shapes for the same digit are on the same<br /> key on the keyboard. Depending on the customization done for digit-shape<br /> selection and on the currently selected keyboard language, the<br /> corresponding digit codes and shapes are generated and presented.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Data</i> <i>handling</i>: The possible cases are very similar to those for Arabic<br /> characters: digit shapes may be indifferent (for arithmetic processing) or<br /> mandatory (for presentation preparation).<br /></pre> 13134 13135 13136 13137 13138 13139 13140 13141 13142 13143 <hr /> 13144 13145 13146 13147 13148 <h3>D.3.2 Orientation</h3> 13149 13150 13151 13152 13153 13154 13155 13156 13157 13158 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Arabic and Hebrew applications, since written for the Arabic and Hebrew<br />language, use the screen space in RTL orientation. Thus the right side of<br />a window becomes the "begin" side, and its left side is the "end" side.<br />Most references to "right" and "left" in the CUA guidelines for LTR<br />languages remain true in Arabic and Hebrew, providing that "right" and<br />"left" are exchanged (in some cases, "right" and "left" must be conserved<br />as-is for Arabic and Hebrew. They are mentioned in the following<br />paragraph).<br /><br /><br />The appearance of an Arabic and Hebrew window is mostly the mirror<br />symmetric of a corresponding English window ("mostly" because the position<br />of system and maximize and minimize push buttons in the title bar does not<br />change. A discussion about vertical scroll bars appears in the following<br />paragraphs).<br /><br /><br />For instance, a window with some choices could look like <a href="D.3.2?DT=19921204095534#FIGWINWC">Figure 211</a>.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGWINWC" name="FIGWINWC"> </a><a href="picture-305?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 305" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P305.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 211. Window with Choices<br /><br /><br />It must be understood that orientation applies at multiple levels:<br /><br /><br />° In a bidirectional environment, the end user selects the orientation<br />of the workplace (for example, screen orientation). Selection is done<br />according to the user's main usage, standards, or preferences and<br />controls the way the screen and windows are organized. If this<br />orientation is RTL:<br /><br /><br />- Windows are tiled, cascaded, or superimposed with the older<br />primary window on the right and the newer secondary on the left<br /><br /><br />- Application icons are ordered from right-to-left beginning from<br />the right side of the screen.<br /><br /><br />- In a workplace environment, icons should be originally ordered<br />from right-to-left and top-to-bottom if there is a meaningful<br />sequence among them.<br /><br /><br />° An application has a general orientation for its windows, which is LTR<br />for English applications and generally RTL for Arabic and Hebrew<br />applications.<br /><br /><br />° A window has an orientation. If the window orientation is RTL, its<br />elements are logically ordered from right-to-left and from<br />top-to-bottom.<br /><br /><br />For a RTL window, the priority for positioning associated secondary<br />windows (like help windows) is: to the left of, to the right of,<br />above, or below the application window.<br /><br /><br />Note that an Arabic or Hebrew application can include some LTR<br />windows.<br /><br /><br />Note also that a LTR window can be used on a RTL screen and<br />vice-versa. This means that English services and applications can be<br />used while the screen is oriented RTL and Arabic and Hebrew (RTL)<br />applications can be used on a LTR screen.<br /><br /><br />° Within the same window, text and graphics may have differing<br />orientations. This may be the case, for instance, for a geographic<br />map where the graphics will be left-to-right (as for an English<br />application), but the Arabic and Hebrew captions will be<br />right-to-left.<br /><br /><br />° Entry fields are a special case: for each field, an orientation is<br />defined, which by default is RTL within RTL windows. However, fields<br />which are to receive numeric data or English text should be defined as<br />LTR oriented.<br /><br /><br />Within an entry field, the keying (or cursor) direction may be RTL or<br />LTR, according to the data entered (Arabic or Hebrew text, or English<br />and numbers).<br /><br /><br />More explanations on entry fields will be found in the following<br />paragraphs.<br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> While the "right" and "left" have exchanged their meaning, the<br /> physical right and left are still the same, thus the following have the<br /> same effect for Arabic and Hebrew as for English:<br /><br /><br />° Cursor movement keys (left and right arrows) must still move the<br />cursor according to the direction of the arrow engraved on the key top<br />(this is also true for combinations of the left and right arrow keys<br />with Shift, Ctrl or Alt).<br /><br /><br />Likewise, Ctrl+PgUp must always scroll to the left, and Ctrl+PgDn<br />scroll to the right.<br /><br /><br />° Right and left buttons of a pointing device.<br /><br /><br />° Right and left movement of a pointing device.<br /><br /><br />° Graphics may be unaffected by the window orientation: for instance, a<br />map must still have the East on the right side and the West on the<br />left side.<br /></pre> 13159 13160 13161 13162 13163 13164 13165 13166 13167 13168 <hr /> 13169 13170 13171 13172 13173 <h3>D.3.3 RTL Flavor of 5302 13174 CUA-Interface Components</h3> 5303 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following topics address the various aspects of the CUA guidelines as<br />applied in the bidirectional Language environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5304 <ul> 5305 <li><a href="D.3.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.1 13175 13176 13177 13178 13179 13180 13181 13182 13183 13184 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following topics address the various aspects of the CUA guidelines as<br />applied in the bidirectional Language environment.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 13185 13186 13187 13188 13189 13190 13191 13192 13193 13194 <ul> 13195 13196 13197 13198 13199 13200 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.1 5306 13201 Title Bar</a></li> 5307 <li><a href="D.3.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.2 13202 13203 13204 13205 13206 13207 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.2 5308 13208 Scroll Bars</a></li> 5309 <li><a href="D.3.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.3 13209 13210 13211 13212 13213 13214 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.3 5310 13215 Menu Bar</a></li> 5311 <li><a href="D.3.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.4 13216 13217 13218 13219 13220 13221 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.4 5312 13222 Menu Bar Pull-Down Menus in a RTL 5313 13223 Window</a></li> 5314 <li><a href="D.3.3.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.5 13224 13225 13226 13227 13228 13229 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.5 5315 13230 RTL Radio Button</a></li> 5316 <li><a href="D.3.3.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.6 13231 13232 13233 13234 13235 13236 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.6 5317 13237 RTL Check Box</a></li> 5318 <li><a href="D.3.3.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.7 13238 13239 13240 13241 13242 13243 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.7 5319 13244 RTL List Box</a></li> 5320 <li><a href="D.3.3.8?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.8 13245 13246 13247 13248 13249 13250 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.8?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.8 5321 13251 Push buttons in a RTL Window</a></li> 5322 <li><a href="D.3.3.9?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.9 13252 13253 13254 13255 13256 13257 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.9?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.9 5323 13258 Progress Indicator in a RTL Window</a></li> 5324 <li><a href="D.3.3.10?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.10 13259 13260 13261 13262 13263 13264 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.10?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.10 5325 13265 RTL Message Window</a></li> 5326 <li><a href="D.3.3.11?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.11 13266 13267 13268 13269 13270 13271 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.11?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.11 5327 13272 RTL Combination Box</a></li> 5328 <li><a href="D.3.3.12?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.12 13273 13274 13275 13276 13277 13278 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.12?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.12 5329 13279 RTL Drop-Down Combination Box</a></li> 5330 <li><a href="D.3.3.13?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.13 13280 13281 13282 13283 13284 13285 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.13?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.13 5331 13286 RTL Drop-Down List</a></li> 5332 <li><a href="D.3.3.14?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.14 13287 13288 13289 13290 13291 13292 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.14?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.14 5333 13293 RTL Value Set</a></li> 5334 <li><a href="D.3.3.15?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.15 13294 13295 13296 13297 13298 13299 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.15?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.15 5335 13300 RTL Spin Button</a></li> 5336 <li><a href="D.3.3.16?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.16 13301 13302 13303 13304 13305 13306 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.16?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.16 5337 13307 Field Prompt in a RTL Window</a></li> 5338 <li><a href="D.3.3.17?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.17 13308 13309 13310 13311 13312 13313 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.17?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.17 5339 13314 Column and Group Headings in a RTL 5340 13315 Window</a></li> 5341 <li><a href="D.3.3.18?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.18 13316 13317 13318 13319 13320 13321 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.18?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.18 5342 13322 Group Box in a RTL Window</a></li> 5343 <li><a href="D.3.3.19?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.19 13323 13324 13325 13326 13327 13328 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.19?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.19 5344 13329 Notebook</a></li> 5345 <li><a href="D.3.3.20?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.3.20 13330 13331 13332 13333 13334 13335 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.3.20?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.3.20 5346 13336 Slider</a></li> 5347 </ul> 5348 <pre></pre> 5349 <hr /> 5350 <h4>D.3.3.1 Title Bar</h4> 5351 <pre></pre> 5352 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Title bars have the same general layout in right-to-left windows as in<br />left-to-right windows:<br /><br /><br />° Window-menu icon on the left<br />° Window title in the middle<br />° Window-sizing buttons on the right.<br /><br /><br />When the window title itself has a right-to-left orientation (written in<br />Arabic or Hebrew), it must truncate on the left whenever it would truncate<br />on the right if written in English. This is true both for right-to-left<br />and left-to-right windows.<br /></pre> 5353 <pre></pre> 5354 <hr /> 5355 <h4>D.3.3.2 Scroll Bars</h4> 5356 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° Vertical scroll bars are on the right side for left-to-right windows,<br />on the left side for right-to-left windows.<br /><br /><br />° Horizontal scroll bars never extend under the vertical scroll bar of<br />the same window. If the vertical scroll bar is on the left<br />(right-to-left window), the horizontal scroll bar may extend from the<br />right window border to the right side of the vertical bar.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5357 name="FIGFIGUNIQ50" id="FIGFIGUNIQ50"> </a><a 5358 href="picture-306?mode=zoom"><img 5359 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P306.GIF" 5360 alt="PICTURE 306" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 212. Scroll Bars in a Right-to-Left Window<br /></pre> 5361 <hr /> 5362 <h4>D.3.3.3 Menu Bar</h4> 5363 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The text of the menu bar choices is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br />° If the list of actions is too long to be contained in one line, it is<br />its "end" part that wraps to an additional line: left part for a<br />right-to-left window, right part for a left-to-right window.<br /></pre> 5364 <hr /> 5365 <h4>D.3.3.4 Menu Bar Pull-Down 13337 13338 13339 13340 13341 13342 13343 13344 13345 13346 </ul> 13347 13348 13349 13350 13351 13352 13353 13354 13355 13356 <pre></pre> 13357 13358 13359 13360 13361 13362 13363 13364 13365 13366 <hr /> 13367 13368 13369 13370 13371 <h4>D.3.3.1 Title Bar</h4> 13372 13373 13374 13375 13376 13377 13378 13379 13380 13381 <pre></pre> 13382 13383 13384 13385 13386 13387 13388 13389 13390 13391 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Title bars have the same general layout in right-to-left windows as in<br />left-to-right windows:<br /><br /><br />° Window-menu icon on the left<br />° Window title in the middle<br />° Window-sizing buttons on the right.<br /><br /><br />When the window title itself has a right-to-left orientation (written in<br />Arabic or Hebrew), it must truncate on the left whenever it would truncate<br />on the right if written in English. This is true both for right-to-left<br />and left-to-right windows.<br /></pre> 13392 13393 13394 13395 13396 13397 13398 13399 13400 13401 <pre></pre> 13402 13403 13404 13405 13406 13407 13408 13409 13410 13411 <hr /> 13412 13413 13414 13415 13416 <h4>D.3.3.2 Scroll Bars</h4> 13417 13418 13419 13420 13421 13422 13423 13424 13425 13426 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° Vertical scroll bars are on the right side for left-to-right windows,<br />on the left side for right-to-left windows.<br /><br /><br />° Horizontal scroll bars never extend under the vertical scroll bar of<br />the same window. If the vertical scroll bar is on the left<br />(right-to-left window), the horizontal scroll bar may extend from the<br />right window border to the right side of the vertical bar.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ50" name="FIGFIGUNIQ50"> </a><a href="picture-306?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 306" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P306.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 212. Scroll Bars in a Right-to-Left Window<br /></pre> 13427 13428 13429 13430 13431 13432 13433 13434 13435 13436 <hr /> 13437 13438 13439 13440 13441 <h4>D.3.3.3 Menu Bar</h4> 13442 13443 13444 13445 13446 13447 13448 13449 13450 13451 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The text of the menu bar choices is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br />° If the list of actions is too long to be contained in one line, it is<br />its "end" part that wraps to an additional line: left part for a<br />right-to-left window, right part for a left-to-right window.<br /></pre> 13452 13453 13454 13455 13456 13457 13458 13459 13460 13461 <hr /> 13462 13463 13464 13465 13466 <h4>D.3.3.4 Menu Bar Pull-Down 5366 13467 Menus in a RTL Window</h4> 5367 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The right border of a pull-down menu is aligned with the right side of<br />its corresponding menu bar choice.<br /><br /><br />° Text of pull-down choices is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br />° Ellipses (...) appear on the left of the corresponding choice.<br /><br /><br />° Shortcut keys appear on the left of the corresponding choice.<br /><br /><br />° For cascaded menus, a left-pointing arrow appears at the left of the<br />pull-down choice text as a visual cue that this choice has an<br />associated, hidden pull-down. The cascaded pull-down will be<br />displayed on the left of its first-level choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5368 name="FIGFIGUNIQ51" id="FIGFIGUNIQ51"> </a><a 5369 href="picture-307?mode=zoom"><img 5370 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P307.GIF" 5371 alt="PICTURE 307" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 213. Cascaded Menu<br /></pre> 5372 <hr /> 5373 <h4>D.3.3.5 RTL Radio Button</h4> 5374 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The circle appears to the right of the choice.<br />° The text of the choice is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5375 name="FIGFIGUNIQ52" id="FIGFIGUNIQ52"> </a><a 5376 href="picture-308?mode=zoom"><img 5377 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P308.GIF" 5378 alt="PICTURE 308" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 214. Radio Buttons<br /></pre> 5379 <hr /> 5380 <h4>D.3.3.6 RTL Check Box</h4> 5381 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The square box appears to the right of the choice.<br />° The text of the choice is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5382 name="FIGFIGUNIQ53" id="FIGFIGUNIQ53"> </a><a 5383 href="picture-309?mode=zoom"><img 5384 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P309.GIF" 5385 alt="PICTURE 309" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 215. Check Boxes<br /></pre> 5386 <hr /> 5387 <h4>D.3.3.7 RTL List Box</h4> 5388 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The text of the choice is aligned on the right.<br />° The vertical scroll bar is on the left side.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5389 name="FIGFIGUNIQ54" id="FIGFIGUNIQ54"> </a><a 5390 href="picture-310?mode=zoom"><img 5391 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P310.GIF" 5392 alt="PICTURE 310" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 216. List Box<br /></pre> 5393 <hr /> 5394 <h4>D.3.3.8 Push buttons in a RTL 13468 13469 13470 13471 13472 13473 13474 13475 13476 13477 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The right border of a pull-down menu is aligned with the right side of<br />its corresponding menu bar choice.<br /><br /><br />° Text of pull-down choices is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br />° Ellipses (...) appear on the left of the corresponding choice.<br /><br /><br />° Shortcut keys appear on the left of the corresponding choice.<br /><br /><br />° For cascaded menus, a left-pointing arrow appears at the left of the<br />pull-down choice text as a visual cue that this choice has an<br />associated, hidden pull-down. The cascaded pull-down will be<br />displayed on the left of its first-level choice.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ51" name="FIGFIGUNIQ51"> </a><a href="picture-307?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 307" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P307.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 213. Cascaded Menu<br /></pre> 13478 13479 13480 13481 13482 13483 13484 13485 13486 13487 <hr /> 13488 13489 13490 13491 13492 <h4>D.3.3.5 RTL Radio Button</h4> 13493 13494 13495 13496 13497 13498 13499 13500 13501 13502 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The circle appears to the right of the choice.<br />° The text of the choice is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ52" name="FIGFIGUNIQ52"> </a><a href="picture-308?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 308" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P308.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 214. Radio Buttons<br /></pre> 13503 13504 13505 13506 13507 13508 13509 13510 13511 13512 <hr /> 13513 13514 13515 13516 13517 <h4>D.3.3.6 RTL Check Box</h4> 13518 13519 13520 13521 13522 13523 13524 13525 13526 13527 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The square box appears to the right of the choice.<br />° The text of the choice is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ53" name="FIGFIGUNIQ53"> </a><a href="picture-309?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 309" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P309.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 215. Check Boxes<br /></pre> 13528 13529 13530 13531 13532 13533 13534 13535 13536 13537 <hr /> 13538 13539 13540 13541 13542 <h4>D.3.3.7 RTL List Box</h4> 13543 13544 13545 13546 13547 13548 13549 13550 13551 13552 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The text of the choice is aligned on the right.<br />° The vertical scroll bar is on the left side.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ54" name="FIGFIGUNIQ54"> </a><a href="picture-310?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 310" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P310.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 216. List Box<br /></pre> 13553 13554 13555 13556 13557 13558 13559 13560 13561 13562 <hr /> 13563 13564 13565 13566 13567 <h4>D.3.3.8 Push buttons in a RTL 5395 13568 Window</h4> 5396 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° Push buttons are ordered from right to left.<br /><br /><br />° The label in a push button is centered.<br /><br /><br />° If there is not enough room to place push buttons horizontally in the<br />lower part of a window, they may be placed vertically at the left side<br />of a window.<br /></pre> 5397 <hr /> 5398 <h4>D.3.3.9 Progress Indicator in 13569 13570 13571 13572 13573 13574 13575 13576 13577 13578 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° Push buttons are ordered from right to left.<br /><br /><br />° The label in a push button is centered.<br /><br /><br />° If there is not enough room to place push buttons horizontally in the<br />lower part of a window, they may be placed vertically at the left side<br />of a window.<br /></pre> 13579 13580 13581 13582 13583 13584 13585 13586 13587 13588 <hr /> 13589 13590 13591 13592 13593 <h4>D.3.3.9 Progress Indicator in 5399 13594 a RTL Window</h4> 5400 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The progress indicator in a right-to-left window advances from right<br />to left.<br /></pre> 5401 <hr /> 5402 <h4>D.3.3.10 RTL Message Window</h4> 5403 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The text must appear on the left side of the icon.<br /><br /><br />° In information messages and action messages, the label in the icon<br />must be the national equivalent of "i" and "STOP," respectively.<br /></pre> 5404 <hr /> 5405 <h4>D.3.3.11 RTL Combination Box</h4> 5406 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° A combination box in a right-to-left window combines the bidirectional<br />characteristics of an entry field in a right-to-left window and a list<br />box in a right-to-left window.<br /><br /><br />° The list box appears beneath and to the left of an entry field.<br /><br /><br />° The vertical scroll bar of the list box appears on its left side.<br /><br /><br />° The left side of the list box is aligned with the left side of the<br />entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5407 name="FIGFIGUNIQ55" id="FIGFIGUNIQ55"> </a><a 5408 href="picture-311?mode=zoom"><img 5409 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P311.GIF" 5410 alt="PICTURE 311" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 217. Combination Box<br /></pre> 5411 <hr /> 5412 <h4>D.3.3.12 RTL Drop-Down 13595 13596 13597 13598 13599 13600 13601 13602 13603 13604 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The progress indicator in a right-to-left window advances from right<br />to left.<br /></pre> 13605 13606 13607 13608 13609 13610 13611 13612 13613 13614 <hr /> 13615 13616 13617 13618 13619 <h4>D.3.3.10 RTL Message Window</h4> 13620 13621 13622 13623 13624 13625 13626 13627 13628 13629 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The text must appear on the left side of the icon.<br /><br /><br />° In information messages and action messages, the label in the icon<br />must be the national equivalent of "i" and "STOP," respectively.<br /></pre> 13630 13631 13632 13633 13634 13635 13636 13637 13638 13639 <hr /> 13640 13641 13642 13643 13644 <h4>D.3.3.11 RTL Combination Box</h4> 13645 13646 13647 13648 13649 13650 13651 13652 13653 13654 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° A combination box in a right-to-left window combines the bidirectional<br />characteristics of an entry field in a right-to-left window and a list<br />box in a right-to-left window.<br /><br /><br />° The list box appears beneath and to the left of an entry field.<br /><br /><br />° The vertical scroll bar of the list box appears on its left side.<br /><br /><br />° The left side of the list box is aligned with the left side of the<br />entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ55" name="FIGFIGUNIQ55"> </a><a href="picture-311?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 311" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P311.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 217. Combination Box<br /></pre> 13655 13656 13657 13658 13659 13660 13661 13662 13663 13664 <hr /> 13665 13666 13667 13668 13669 <h4>D.3.3.12 RTL Drop-Down 5413 13670 Combination Box</h4> 5414 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The list button containing a downward-pointing arrow is at the left<br />side of the entry field.<br /><br /><br />° The left side of the list box is aligned with the left side of the<br />list button.<br /><br /><br />° The vertical scroll bar is on the left side.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5415 name="FIGFIGUNIQ56" id="FIGFIGUNIQ56"> </a><a 5416 href="picture-312?mode=zoom"><img 5417 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P312.GIF" 5418 alt="PICTURE 312" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 218. Drop-Down Combination Box<br /></pre> 5419 <hr /> 5420 <h4>D.3.3.13 RTL Drop-Down List</h4> 5421 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The list button containing a downward-pointing arrow is at the left<br />side of the selection field.<br /><br /><br />° The vertical scroll bar is on the left side.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5422 name="FIGFIGUNIQ57" id="FIGFIGUNIQ57"> </a><a 5423 href="picture-313?mode=zoom"><img 5424 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P313.GIF" 5425 alt="PICTURE 313" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 219. Drop-Down List<br /></pre> 5426 <hr /> 5427 <h4>D.3.3.14 RTL Value Set</h4> 5428 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° Values are ordered from right-to-left (and from top-to-bottom).<br /></pre> 5429 <hr /> 5430 <h4>D.3.3.15 RTL Spin Button</h4> 5431 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The up and down arrow buttons are at the left side of the entry field.<br /><br /><br />° The prompt text, next to the arrow, is right aligned.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5432 name="FIGFIGUNIQ58" id="FIGFIGUNIQ58"> </a><a 5433 href="picture-314?mode=zoom"><img 5434 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P314.GIF" 5435 alt="PICTURE 314" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 220. Spin Button<br /></pre> 5436 <hr /> 5437 <h4>D.3.3.16 Field Prompt in a RTL 13671 13672 13673 13674 13675 13676 13677 13678 13679 13680 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The list button containing a downward-pointing arrow is at the left<br />side of the entry field.<br /><br /><br />° The left side of the list box is aligned with the left side of the<br />list button.<br /><br /><br />° The vertical scroll bar is on the left side.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ56" name="FIGFIGUNIQ56"> </a><a href="picture-312?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 312" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P312.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 218. Drop-Down Combination Box<br /></pre> 13681 13682 13683 13684 13685 13686 13687 13688 13689 13690 <hr /> 13691 13692 13693 13694 13695 <h4>D.3.3.13 RTL Drop-Down List</h4> 13696 13697 13698 13699 13700 13701 13702 13703 13704 13705 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The list button containing a downward-pointing arrow is at the left<br />side of the selection field.<br /><br /><br />° The vertical scroll bar is on the left side.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ57" name="FIGFIGUNIQ57"> </a><a href="picture-313?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 313" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P313.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 219. Drop-Down List<br /></pre> 13706 13707 13708 13709 13710 13711 13712 13713 13714 13715 <hr /> 13716 13717 13718 13719 13720 <h4>D.3.3.14 RTL Value Set</h4> 13721 13722 13723 13724 13725 13726 13727 13728 13729 13730 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° Values are ordered from right-to-left (and from top-to-bottom).<br /></pre> 13731 13732 13733 13734 13735 13736 13737 13738 13739 13740 <hr /> 13741 13742 13743 13744 13745 <h4>D.3.3.15 RTL Spin Button</h4> 13746 13747 13748 13749 13750 13751 13752 13753 13754 13755 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The up and down arrow buttons are at the left side of the entry field.<br /><br /><br />° The prompt text, next to the arrow, is right aligned.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ58" name="FIGFIGUNIQ58"> </a><a href="picture-314?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 314" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P314.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 220. Spin Button<br /></pre> 13756 13757 13758 13759 13760 13761 13762 13763 13764 13765 <hr /> 13766 13767 13768 13769 13770 <h4>D.3.3.16 Field Prompt in a RTL 5438 13771 Window</h4> 5439 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The field prompt is located above or to the right of the affected<br />field. Its text is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br />° If it is located above the field, it is right-aligned with the right<br />side of the field.<br /><br /><br />° If it is located to the right of a field, it must be right-aligned<br />with other field prompts.<br /><br /><br />° If descriptive text supplements the field prompt, it must be placed to<br />the left of the affected entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5440 name="FIGFIGUNIQ59" id="FIGFIGUNIQ59"> ______________ </a><br />99 ot pu | | :seipoc<br />|______________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 221. Descriptive Text. "99 ot pu" is descriptive text<br /></pre> 5441 <hr /> 5442 <h4>D.3.3.17 Column and Group 13772 13773 13774 13775 13776 13777 13778 13779 13780 13781 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The field prompt is located above or to the right of the affected<br />field. Its text is aligned on the right.<br /><br /><br />° If it is located above the field, it is right-aligned with the right<br />side of the field.<br /><br /><br />° If it is located to the right of a field, it must be right-aligned<br />with other field prompts.<br /><br /><br />° If descriptive text supplements the field prompt, it must be placed to<br />the left of the affected entry field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ59" name="FIGFIGUNIQ59"> ______________ </a><br />99 ot pu | | :seipoc<br />|______________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 221. Descriptive Text. "99 ot pu" is descriptive text<br /></pre> 13782 13783 13784 13785 13786 13787 13788 13789 13790 13791 <hr /> 13792 13793 13794 13795 13796 <h4>D.3.3.17 Column and Group 5443 13797 Headings in a RTL Window</h4> 5444 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° All alignments are to the right.<br /></pre> 5445 <hr /> 5446 <h4>D.3.3.18 Group Box in a RTL 13798 13799 13800 13801 13802 13803 13804 13805 13806 13807 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° All alignments are to the right.<br /></pre> 13808 13809 13810 13811 13812 13813 13814 13815 13816 13817 <hr /> 13818 13819 13820 13821 13822 <h4>D.3.3.18 Group Box in a RTL 5447 13823 Window</h4> 5448 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The title appears at the top-right side of a group box (see the<br />examples for radio button and check box).<br /></pre> 5449 <hr /> 5450 <h4>D.3.3.19 Notebook</h4> 5451 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° A RTL notebook has back pages painted on the left side by default.<br /><br /><br />° If the tabs are on the top or bottom edge, they are ordered logically<br />from right to left.<br /><br /><br />° If the notebook has arrows to turn the pages forward or backward, they<br />should be on the left side of the page.<br /></pre> 5452 <hr /> 5453 <h4>D.3.3.20 Slider</h4> 5454 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° Place slider buttons to the left of the slider shaft.<br /><br /><br />° Horizontal slider shafts should be filled from the right to the slider<br />arm.<br /></pre> 5455 <hr /> 5456 <h3>D.3.4 Entry Fields</h3> 5457 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In a bidirectional application, each field has an orientation that is<br />defined by the application (by default, entry fields assume the same<br />orientation as the encompassing window). According to the expected<br />contents of the field, the application must define it as RTL (Arabic and<br />Hebrew textual data) or LTR (numeric data, or English textual data).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5458 <ul> 5459 <li><a href="D.3.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.4.1 13824 13825 13826 13827 13828 13829 13830 13831 13832 13833 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° The title appears at the top-right side of a group box (see the<br />examples for radio button and check box).<br /></pre> 13834 13835 13836 13837 13838 13839 13840 13841 13842 13843 <hr /> 13844 13845 13846 13847 13848 <h4>D.3.3.19 Notebook</h4> 13849 13850 13851 13852 13853 13854 13855 13856 13857 13858 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° A RTL notebook has back pages painted on the left side by default.<br /><br /><br />° If the tabs are on the top or bottom edge, they are ordered logically<br />from right to left.<br /><br /><br />° If the notebook has arrows to turn the pages forward or backward, they<br />should be on the left side of the page.<br /></pre> 13859 13860 13861 13862 13863 13864 13865 13866 13867 13868 <hr /> 13869 13870 13871 13872 13873 <h4>D.3.3.20 Slider</h4> 13874 13875 13876 13877 13878 13879 13880 13881 13882 13883 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />° Place slider buttons to the left of the slider shaft.<br /><br /><br />° Horizontal slider shafts should be filled from the right to the slider<br />arm.<br /></pre> 13884 13885 13886 13887 13888 13889 13890 13891 13892 13893 <hr /> 13894 13895 13896 13897 13898 <h3>D.3.4 Entry Fields</h3> 13899 13900 13901 13902 13903 13904 13905 13906 13907 13908 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In a bidirectional application, each field has an orientation that is<br />defined by the application (by default, entry fields assume the same<br />orientation as the encompassing window). According to the expected<br />contents of the field, the application must define it as RTL (Arabic and<br />Hebrew textual data) or LTR (numeric data, or English textual data).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 13909 13910 13911 13912 13913 13914 13915 13916 13917 13918 <ul> 13919 13920 13921 13922 13923 13924 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.4.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.4.1 5460 13925 RTL Entry Fields</a></li> 5461 <li><a href="D.3.4.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.4.2 13926 13927 13928 13929 13930 13931 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.4.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.4.2 5462 13932 Text Cursor Appearance</a></li> 5463 <li><a href="D.3.4.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.4.3 13933 13934 13935 13936 13937 13938 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.4.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.4.3 5464 13939 Text Cursor Position in Insert Mode</a></li> 5465 <li><a href="D.3.4.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.4.4 13940 13941 13942 13943 13944 13945 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.4.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.4.4 5466 13946 Bidirectional Keyboard Functions in Entry 5467 13947 Fields</a></li> 5468 <li><a href="D.3.4.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.4.5 13948 13949 13950 13951 13952 13953 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.4.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.4.5 5469 13954 How Various Keys Work in RTL Entry 5470 13955 Fields</a></li> 5471 <li><a href="D.3.4.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.4.6 13956 13957 13958 13959 13960 13961 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.4.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.4.6 5472 13962 Multiple-Line Entry Field</a></li> 5473 </ul> 5474 <pre></pre> 5475 <hr /> 5476 <h4>D.3.4.1 RTL Entry Fields</h4> 5477 <pre></pre> 5478 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />RTL fields differ from LTR fields in the following ways:<br /><br /><br />° Data are right-aligned in the field.<br /><br /><br />° At initial entry, the cursor is located at the rightmost position.<br /><br /><br />° The cursor movement is initiated as right-to-left: in <b>Replace</b> mode,<br /> with each entry the text cursor moves left to the next entry position;<br /> in <b>Insert</b> mode, the cursor and all characters to the left of the<br /> cursor are shifted one position to the left with each entry.<br /><br /><br />° If the field is scrollable, the rightmost field positions are<br />initially visible. When the cursor moves to the left, the information<br />scrolls so as to show more characters on the left side. In summary,<br />the beginning of the information is on the right side, its end on the<br />left side.<br /><br /><br />The following example illustrates initial cursor placement and cursor<br />movement when typing RTL data in a RTL entry field (in <b>Insert</b> mode).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5479 name="FIGFIGUNIQ60" id="FIGFIGUNIQ60"> ______________________ </a><br />initial state | | | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "a" | |a | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "b" | |ba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "c" | |cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type " street," | | ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 222. Typing in a RTL field<br /><br /><br />When text must be typed in an orientation opposite to the field<br />orientation (like numbers within a RTL field), the special bidirectional<br />functions "Push" and "EndPush" are used.<br /><br /><br />In the following example, the house number (LTR) is added to the address<br />(RTL field).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5480 name="FIGFIGUNIQ61" id="FIGFIGUNIQ61"> ______________________ </a><br />| | ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />press "Push" | | ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "1" | 1| ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "2" | 12| ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "3" | 123| ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 223. Typing a Push Segment<br /><br /><br />Note that during a Push operation, the cursor does not move (calculator<br />effect). The cursor stands on the character at the boundary between the<br />surrounding RTL text (the street name in our example) and the Push segment<br />(the house number).<br /><br /><br />When "EndPush" is pressed to end the operation, the cursor skips beyond<br />the Push segment. This allows to continue the RTL text if necessary.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5481 name="FIGFIGUNIQ62" id="FIGFIGUNIQ62"> ______________________ </a><br />Push is active | 123| ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />press "EndPush" | |123 ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "." | |.123 ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 224. Ending a Push Segment<br /></pre> 5482 <pre></pre> 5483 <hr /> 5484 <h4>D.3.4.2 Text Cursor Appearance</h4> 5485 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />It must be apparent whether the cursor stands at a "Push boundary" or not.<br />The Push boundary is where the latest character typed in a Push operation<br />appears (assuming that arrow keys were not used to move the cursor away).<br />Typing data at the Push boundary does not always have the same effect<br />("calculator" effect) as typing elsewhere, thus some visual feedback must<br />help the user differentiate between the two.<br /></pre> 5486 <hr /> 5487 <h4>D.3.4.3 Text Cursor Position 13963 13964 13965 13966 13967 13968 13969 13970 13971 13972 </ul> 13973 13974 13975 13976 13977 13978 13979 13980 13981 13982 <pre></pre> 13983 13984 13985 13986 13987 13988 13989 13990 13991 13992 <hr /> 13993 13994 13995 13996 13997 <h4>D.3.4.1 RTL Entry Fields</h4> 13998 13999 14000 14001 14002 14003 14004 14005 14006 14007 <pre></pre> 14008 14009 14010 14011 14012 14013 14014 14015 14016 14017 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />RTL fields differ from LTR fields in the following ways:<br /><br /><br />° Data are right-aligned in the field.<br /><br /><br />° At initial entry, the cursor is located at the rightmost position.<br /><br /><br />° The cursor movement is initiated as right-to-left: in <b>Replace</b> mode,<br /> with each entry the text cursor moves left to the next entry position;<br /> in <b>Insert</b> mode, the cursor and all characters to the left of the<br /> cursor are shifted one position to the left with each entry.<br /><br /><br />° If the field is scrollable, the rightmost field positions are<br />initially visible. When the cursor moves to the left, the information<br />scrolls so as to show more characters on the left side. In summary,<br />the beginning of the information is on the right side, its end on the<br />left side.<br /><br /><br />The following example illustrates initial cursor placement and cursor<br />movement when typing RTL data in a RTL entry field (in <b>Insert</b> mode).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ60" name="FIGFIGUNIQ60"> ______________________ </a><br />initial state | | | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "a" | |a | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "b" | |ba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "c" | |cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type " street," | | ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 222. Typing in a RTL field<br /><br /><br />When text must be typed in an orientation opposite to the field<br />orientation (like numbers within a RTL field), the special bidirectional<br />functions "Push" and "EndPush" are used.<br /><br /><br />In the following example, the house number (LTR) is added to the address<br />(RTL field).<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ61" name="FIGFIGUNIQ61"> ______________________ </a><br />| | ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />press "Push" | | ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "1" | 1| ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "2" | 12| ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "3" | 123| ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 223. Typing a Push Segment<br /><br /><br />Note that during a Push operation, the cursor does not move (calculator<br />effect). The cursor stands on the character at the boundary between the<br />surrounding RTL text (the street name in our example) and the Push segment<br />(the house number).<br /><br /><br />When "EndPush" is pressed to end the operation, the cursor skips beyond<br />the Push segment. This allows to continue the RTL text if necessary.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ62" name="FIGFIGUNIQ62"> ______________________ </a><br />Push is active | 123| ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />press "EndPush" | |123 ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br />______________________<br />type "." | |.123 ,teerts cba | . . . sserdda<br />|______________________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 224. Ending a Push Segment<br /></pre> 14018 14019 14020 14021 14022 14023 14024 14025 14026 14027 <pre></pre> 14028 14029 14030 14031 14032 14033 14034 14035 14036 14037 <hr /> 14038 14039 14040 14041 14042 <h4>D.3.4.2 Text Cursor Appearance</h4> 14043 14044 14045 14046 14047 14048 14049 14050 14051 14052 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />It must be apparent whether the cursor stands at a "Push boundary" or not.<br />The Push boundary is where the latest character typed in a Push operation<br />appears (assuming that arrow keys were not used to move the cursor away).<br />Typing data at the Push boundary does not always have the same effect<br />("calculator" effect) as typing elsewhere, thus some visual feedback must<br />help the user differentiate between the two.<br /></pre> 14053 14054 14055 14056 14057 14058 14059 14060 14061 14062 <hr /> 14063 14064 14065 14066 14067 <h4>D.3.4.3 Text Cursor Position 5488 14068 in Insert Mode</h4> 5489 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In general, the cursor has the same appearance as described for LTR text.<br />However, in Insert mode the vertical bar representing the cursor must be<br />on the proper side of the position of the cursor.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5490 name="FIGFIGUNIQ63" id="FIGFIGUNIQ63"> _____________ </a><br />EMPLOYEE'S NUMBER . . . | 12|345 | (Insert mode)<br />|_____________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 225. Cursor Placement in LTR Text (Insert Mode). "3" is the<br />cursored character; new text is inserted between "2" and "3."<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5491 name="FIGFIGUNIQ64" id="FIGFIGUNIQ64"> _____________ </a><br />| edc|ba | . . . eman s'eeyolpme (Insert mode)<br />|_____________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 226. Cursor Placement in RTL Text (Insert Mode). "c" is the<br />cursored character; new text is inserted between "b" and "c."<br /></pre> 5492 <hr /> 5493 <h4>D.3.4.4 Bidirectional Keyboard 14069 14070 14071 14072 14073 14074 14075 14076 14077 14078 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />In general, the cursor has the same appearance as described for LTR text.<br />However, in Insert mode the vertical bar representing the cursor must be<br />on the proper side of the position of the cursor.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ63" name="FIGFIGUNIQ63"> _____________ </a><br />EMPLOYEE'S NUMBER . . . | 12|345 | (Insert mode)<br />|_____________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 225. Cursor Placement in LTR Text (Insert Mode). "3" is the<br />cursored character; new text is inserted between "2" and "3."<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGFIGUNIQ64" name="FIGFIGUNIQ64"> _____________ </a><br />| edc|ba | . . . eman s'eeyolpme (Insert mode)<br />|_____________|<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Figure 226. Cursor Placement in RTL Text (Insert Mode). "c" is the<br />cursored character; new text is inserted between "b" and "c."<br /></pre> 14079 14080 14081 14082 14083 14084 14085 14086 14087 14088 <hr /> 14089 14090 14091 14092 14093 <h4>D.3.4.4 Bidirectional Keyboard 5494 14094 Functions in Entry Fields</h4> 5495 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> The descriptions given in this section are only an overview. For<br /> more details, product-specific documentation must be consulted.<br /><br /><br />SAA-conforming and CUA-interface-conforming applications must support the<br />Arabic or Hebrew keyboard functions:<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Language</i> <i>selection</i> <i>(Arabic</i> <i>or</i> <i>Hebrew/English)</i>: This function manually<br /> selects the active keyboard layer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Shape</i> <i>selection</i> <i>(for</i> <i>Arabic</i> <i>only)</i>: These functions allow the user to<br /> enable automatic shape determination (ASD) or to select the requested<br /> letter shapes manually.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Shape</i> <i>(for</i> <i>Arabic</i> <i>only)</i>: These functions lets the user reshape the whole<br /> content of an entry field using the ASD mechanism.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>DeShape</i> <i>(for</i> <i>Arabic</i> <i>only)</i>: These functions let the user convert the<br /> content of an entry field to base shapes.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Field</i> <i>Reverse</i>: This function swaps the field orientation. It overrides<br /> the application-defined field orientation for the current entry operation.<br /> For instance, a "customer name" field, defined as having RTL orientation,<br /> is overridden to LTR orientation in order to type the name of an English<br /> customer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Push/EndPush</i>: These functions allow the typing of a piece of text with an<br /> orientation opposite to the general orientation of the field. This may be<br /> used to type numbers or English words within a RTL field, or Arabic and<br /> Hebrew words within a LTR field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>AutoPush</i>: This feature (which can be enabled or disabled by the user)<br /> automatically exercises the Push and EndPush functions when certain<br /> characters are typed. For instance, typing digits or English letters<br /> within a RTL field automatically begins a Push operation; typing Arabic or<br /> Hebrew afterwards begins an EndPush operation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Bidirectional</i> <i>Status</i> <i>Window</i>: This function puts a window on the screen<br /> that displays the status of all bidirectional indicators.<br /></pre> 5496 <hr /> 5497 <h4>D.3.4.5 How Various Keys Work 14095 14096 14097 14098 14099 14100 14101 14102 14103 14104 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> The descriptions given in this section are only an overview. For<br /> more details, product-specific documentation must be consulted.<br /><br /><br />SAA-conforming and CUA-interface-conforming applications must support the<br />Arabic or Hebrew keyboard functions:<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Language</i> <i>selection</i> <i>(Arabic</i> <i>or</i> <i>Hebrew/English)</i>: This function manually<br /> selects the active keyboard layer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Shape</i> <i>selection</i> <i>(for</i> <i>Arabic</i> <i>only)</i>: These functions allow the user to<br /> enable automatic shape determination (ASD) or to select the requested<br /> letter shapes manually.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Shape</i> <i>(for</i> <i>Arabic</i> <i>only)</i>: These functions lets the user reshape the whole<br /> content of an entry field using the ASD mechanism.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>DeShape</i> <i>(for</i> <i>Arabic</i> <i>only)</i>: These functions let the user convert the<br /> content of an entry field to base shapes.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Field</i> <i>Reverse</i>: This function swaps the field orientation. It overrides<br /> the application-defined field orientation for the current entry operation.<br /> For instance, a "customer name" field, defined as having RTL orientation,<br /> is overridden to LTR orientation in order to type the name of an English<br /> customer.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Push/EndPush</i>: These functions allow the typing of a piece of text with an<br /> orientation opposite to the general orientation of the field. This may be<br /> used to type numbers or English words within a RTL field, or Arabic and<br /> Hebrew words within a LTR field.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>AutoPush</i>: This feature (which can be enabled or disabled by the user)<br /> automatically exercises the Push and EndPush functions when certain<br /> characters are typed. For instance, typing digits or English letters<br /> within a RTL field automatically begins a Push operation; typing Arabic or<br /> Hebrew afterwards begins an EndPush operation.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Bidirectional</i> <i>Status</i> <i>Window</i>: This function puts a window on the screen<br /> that displays the status of all bidirectional indicators.<br /></pre> 14105 14106 14107 14108 14109 14110 14111 14112 14113 14114 <hr /> 14115 14116 14117 14118 14119 <h4>D.3.4.5 How Various Keys Work 5498 14120 in RTL Entry Fields</h4> 5499 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><i>Left-Arrow</i> <i>Key</i>: The Left-Arrow key moves the text cursor one character<br /> position to the left until it reaches the last visible position. If the<br /> field scrolls, the Left-Arrow key moves the cursor until it reaches the<br /> next available character space after the end of the information in the<br /> field, at the same time information scrolls to the right.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Right-Arrow</i> <i>Key</i>: The Right-Arrow key moves the text cursor one character<br /> position to the right until it reaches the entry field boundary; that is,<br /> until the cursor is under the first character for <b>Replace</b> mode, or until<br /> it is to the right of the first character for <b>Insert</b> mode. If the field<br /> scrolls, the Right-Arrow key moves the cursor to the beginning of the<br /> field, while information scrolls left.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Word-Left</i> <i>Key</i>: The Word-Left key moves the cursor to the first logical<br /> position of the word on the left of the nearest blank to the left on the<br /> line.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Word-Right</i> <i>Key</i>: The Word-Right key moves the cursor to the first logical<br /> position of the word on the right of the nearest blank to the right on the<br /> line.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Delete</i> <i>Key</i> <i>in</i> <i>RTL</i> <i>Text</i>: If something is selected, this key deletes the<br /> selection. If no selection exists (for example, in <b>Insert</b> mode), it<br /> deletes the character to the left of the text cursor. Characters to the<br /> left of the deleted character move right to fill the vacated position.<br /> The cursor remains stationary at the point where the character was<br /> deleted.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Backspace</i> <i>Key</i> <i>in</i> <i>RTL</i> <i>Text</i>: If something is selected, this key deletes the<br /> selection. If no selection exists (for example, in <b>Insert</b> mode), it<br /> deletes the character to the right of the cursor and moves the cursor one<br /> space to the right. The characters to the left of the cursor move right<br /> one position to fill the vacated space. The Backspace key has no effect<br /> when the cursor is at the beginning of an entry field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> The descriptions given in this section are only an overview. For<br /> more details, product-specific documentation must be consulted.<br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> Some keys mentioned in this section may cause a change in the shape<br /> of Arabic characters at the cursor position and adjacent to it.<br /></pre> 5500 <hr /> 5501 <h4>D.3.4.6 Multiple-Line Entry 14121 14122 14123 14124 14125 14126 14127 14128 14129 14130 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><i>Left-Arrow</i> <i>Key</i>: The Left-Arrow key moves the text cursor one character<br /> position to the left until it reaches the last visible position. If the<br /> field scrolls, the Left-Arrow key moves the cursor until it reaches the<br /> next available character space after the end of the information in the<br /> field, at the same time information scrolls to the right.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Right-Arrow</i> <i>Key</i>: The Right-Arrow key moves the text cursor one character<br /> position to the right until it reaches the entry field boundary; that is,<br /> until the cursor is under the first character for <b>Replace</b> mode, or until<br /> it is to the right of the first character for <b>Insert</b> mode. If the field<br /> scrolls, the Right-Arrow key moves the cursor to the beginning of the<br /> field, while information scrolls left.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Word-Left</i> <i>Key</i>: The Word-Left key moves the cursor to the first logical<br /> position of the word on the left of the nearest blank to the left on the<br /> line.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Word-Right</i> <i>Key</i>: The Word-Right key moves the cursor to the first logical<br /> position of the word on the right of the nearest blank to the right on the<br /> line.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Delete</i> <i>Key</i> <i>in</i> <i>RTL</i> <i>Text</i>: If something is selected, this key deletes the<br /> selection. If no selection exists (for example, in <b>Insert</b> mode), it<br /> deletes the character to the left of the text cursor. Characters to the<br /> left of the deleted character move right to fill the vacated position.<br /> The cursor remains stationary at the point where the character was<br /> deleted.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><i>Backspace</i> <i>Key</i> <i>in</i> <i>RTL</i> <i>Text</i>: If something is selected, this key deletes the<br /> selection. If no selection exists (for example, in <b>Insert</b> mode), it<br /> deletes the character to the right of the cursor and moves the cursor one<br /> space to the right. The characters to the left of the cursor move right<br /> one position to fill the vacated space. The Backspace key has no effect<br /> when the cursor is at the beginning of an entry field.<br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> The descriptions given in this section are only an overview. For<br /> more details, product-specific documentation must be consulted.<br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> Some keys mentioned in this section may cause a change in the shape<br /> of Arabic characters at the cursor position and adjacent to it.<br /></pre> 14131 14132 14133 14134 14135 14136 14137 14138 14139 14140 <hr /> 14141 14142 14143 14144 14145 <h4>D.3.4.6 Multiple-Line Entry 5502 14146 Field</h4> 5503 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />For RTL multiple-line entry fields, the following additional consideration<br />applies. If the cursor is in a multiple-line entry field, pressing the<br />Enter key moves the cursor to the next line. Any text that was to the<br />left of the cursor prior to pressing the Enter key is repositioned on the<br />next line. The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the line.<br /></pre> 5504 <hr /> 5505 <h3>D.3.5 Navigation in a RTL 14147 14148 14149 14150 14151 14152 14153 14154 14155 14156 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />For RTL multiple-line entry fields, the following additional consideration<br />applies. If the cursor is in a multiple-line entry field, pressing the<br />Enter key moves the cursor to the next line. Any text that was to the<br />left of the cursor prior to pressing the Enter key is repositioned on the<br />next line. The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the line.<br /></pre> 14157 14158 14159 14160 14161 14162 14163 14164 14165 14166 <hr /> 14167 14168 14169 14170 14171 <h3>D.3.5 Navigation in a RTL 5506 14172 Window</h3> 5507 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5508 <ul> 5509 <li><a href="D.3.5.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.1 14173 14174 14175 14176 14177 14178 14179 14180 14181 14182 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 14183 14184 14185 14186 14187 14188 14189 14190 14191 14192 <ul> 14193 14194 14195 14196 14197 14198 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.1 5510 14199 Tab</a></li> 5511 <li><a href="D.3.5.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.2 14200 14201 14202 14203 14204 14205 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.2 5512 14206 Backtab</a></li> 5513 <li><a href="D.3.5.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.3 14207 14208 14209 14210 14211 14212 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.3 5514 14213 Beginning of Data</a></li> 5515 <li><a href="D.3.5.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.4 14214 14215 14216 14217 14218 14219 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.4 5516 14220 End of Data</a></li> 5517 <li><a href="D.3.5.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.5 14221 14222 14223 14224 14225 14226 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.5 5518 14227 Beginning of Line</a></li> 5519 <li><a href="D.3.5.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.6 14228 14229 14230 14231 14232 14233 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.6 5520 14234 End of Line</a></li> 5521 <li><a href="D.3.5.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.7 14235 14236 14237 14238 14239 14240 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.7 5522 14241 Up Arrow</a></li> 5523 <li><a href="D.3.5.8?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.8 14242 14243 14244 14245 14246 14247 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.8?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.8 5524 14248 Down Arrow</a></li> 5525 <li><a href="D.3.5.9?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.9 14249 14250 14251 14252 14253 14254 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.9?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.9 5526 14255 Left Arrow key</a></li> 5527 <li><a href="D.3.5.10?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.10 14256 14257 14258 14259 14260 14261 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.10?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.10 5528 14262 Right Arrow</a></li> 5529 <li><a href="D.3.5.11?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.11 14263 14264 14265 14266 14267 14268 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.11?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.11 5530 14269 Next Key</a></li> 5531 <li><a href="D.3.5.12?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">D.3.5.12 14270 14271 14272 14273 14274 14275 <li><a target="_top" href="D.3.5.12?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">D.3.5.12 5532 14276 Previous Key</a></li> 5533 </ul> 5534 <pre></pre> 5535 <hr /> 5536 <h4>D.3.5.1 Tab</h4> 5537 <pre></pre> 5538 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next field, either the next entry field<br />or the first choice of a selection field if no choice is selected, The<br />cursor moves from right to left and top to bottom. At the bottom-leftmost<br />field, the cursor moves to the top-rightmost field.<br /></pre> 5539 <pre></pre> 5540 <hr /> 5541 <h4>D.3.5.2 Backtab</h4> 5542 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the previous field, either the previous entry<br />field or the first choice of a selection field if no choice is selected,<br />The cursor moves from left to right and bottom to top. At the<br />top-rightmost field, the cursor moves to the bottom-leftmost field.<br /></pre> 5543 <hr /> 5544 <h4>D.3.5.3 Beginning of Data</h4> 5545 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the first logical position in the current<br />field: top-rightmost for a RTL field, top-leftmost for a LTR field.<br /></pre> 5546 <hr /> 5547 <h4>D.3.5.4 End of Data</h4> 5548 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the last logical position in the current<br />field: bottom-leftmost for a RTL field, bottom-rightmost for a LTR field.<br /></pre> 5549 <hr /> 5550 <h4>D.3.5.5 Beginning of Line</h4> 5551 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the rightmost choice.<br /></pre> 5552 <hr /> 5553 <h4>D.3.5.6 End of Line</h4> 5554 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the leftmost choice.<br /></pre> 5555 <hr /> 5556 <h4>D.3.5.7 Up Arrow</h4> 5557 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next choice above the current choice in<br />the field. At the topmost choice, the cursor wraps to the bottom of the<br />next choice to the right. At the top-rightmost choice, the cursor wraps<br />to the bottom-leftmost choice in the field. Scrolling should be performed<br />as required to ensure that the selection cursor remains visible.<br /></pre> 5558 <hr /> 5559 <h4>D.3.5.8 Down Arrow</h4> 5560 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next choice below the current choice in<br />the field. At the bottommost choice, the cursor wraps to the top of the<br />next choice to the left. At the bottom-leftmost choice, the cursor wraps<br />to the top-rightmost choice in the field. Scrolling should be performed<br />as required to ensure that the selection cursor remains visible.<br /></pre> 5561 <hr /> 5562 <h4>D.3.5.9 Left Arrow key</h4> 5563 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next choice to the left of the current<br />choice in the field. At the leftmost choice, the cursor wraps to the<br />rightmost choice below the current position in the field. At the<br />bottom-leftmost choice, the cursor wraps to the top-rightmost choice in<br />the field. Scrolling should be performed as required to ensure that the<br />selection cursor remains visible.<br /></pre> 5564 <hr /> 5565 <h4>D.3.5.10 Right Arrow</h4> 5566 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next choice to the right of the current<br />choice in the field. At the rightmost choice, the cursor wraps to the<br />leftmost choice above the current position in the field. At the<br />top-rightmost choice, the cursor wraps to the bottom-leftmost choice in<br />the field. Scrolling should be performed as required to ensure that the<br />selection cursor remains visible.<br /></pre> 5567 <hr /> 5568 <h4>D.3.5.11 Next Key</h4> 5569 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The Next key moves the cursor one position forward according to the<br />logical sequence. On the boundary between segments of different<br />orientations, this key steps through the transition states from one<br />segment to the logically following one.<br /></pre> 5570 <hr /> 5571 <h4>D.3.5.12 Previous Key</h4> 5572 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The Previous key moves the cursor one position backward according to the<br />logical sequence. On the boundary between segments of different<br />orientations, this key steps through the transition states from one<br />segment to the logically preceding one.<br /></pre> 5573 <hr /> 5574 <h3>D.3.6 Key Assignments</h3> 5575 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following notes apply to the table below:<br /><br /><br />1. The key combinations in the table are used for Arabic and Hebrew<br />keyboard functions and therefore must not be used in any way for any<br />other purpose.<br /><br /><br />2. The entries for "Personal Computer" apply equally to native Personal<br />Computer operation and to terminal emulation.<br /><br /><br />3. Current Arabic and Hebrew products implement subsets or variants of<br />the functions appearing in the table. The table reflects the SAA and<br />CUA interface guidelines for Arabic and Hebrew functions from now on.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5576 name="FIGTBLUNIQ65" id="FIGTBLUNIQ65" /><a name="TBLTBLUNIQ65" 5577 id="TBLTBLUNIQ65"> _______________________ ________________________ _______________________ </a><br />| <b>Function</b> | <b>Key</b> <b>Combinations</b> | <b>Key</b> <b>Numbers</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | National Language | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(right shift) | 60,62 + 57 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(right shift) | 60,62 + 57 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(right shift) | 60,62 + 57 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | English Language | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(left shift) | 60,62 + 44 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(left shift) | 60,62 + 44 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(left shift) | 60,62 + 44 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Push | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Shift+NumLock | 44,57 + 90 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Push | 90 |<br /> | System/370 | Push | 90 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | EndPush | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Shift+(Pad /) | 44,57 + 95 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| EndPush | 95 |<br /> | System/370 | EndPush | 95 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Field Reverse | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+NumLock | 60,62 + 90 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+Push | 60,62 + 90 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+Push | 60,62 + 90 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | AutoPush | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad /) | 60,62 + 95 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+EndPush | 60,62 + 95 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+EndPush | 60,62 + 95 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Next | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 0) | 60,62 + 99 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 0) | 60,62 + 99 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 0) | 60,62 + 99 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Previous | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad .) | 60,62 + 104 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad .) | 60,62 + 104 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad .) | 60,62 + 104 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Screen Reverse | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+Enter (Hebrew) | 60,62 + 43 |<br /> | | Alt+Newline (Arabic) | 60,62 + 43 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Field Exit) | 60,62 + 43 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+NewLine | 60,62 + 43 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | AutoReverse | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 5) | 60,62 + 97 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| -- | |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 5) | 60,62 + 97 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Indicator Window | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+ScrollLock | 60,62 + 125 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| -- | |<br /> | System/370 | -- | |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | ASD Active (Arabic) | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 4) | 60,62 + 92 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 4) | 60,62 + 92 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 4) | 60,62 + 92 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Isolated Shape (Arabic| | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 2) | 60,62 + 98 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 2) | 60,62 + 98 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 2) | 60,62 + 98 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Initial Shape (Arabic)| | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 1) | 60,62 + 93 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 1) | 60,62 + 93 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 1) | 60,62 + 93 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Middle Shape (Arabic) | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 7) | 60,62 + 91 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 7) | 60,62 + 91 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 7) | 60,62 + 91 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Final Shape (Arabic) | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 8) | 60,62 + 96 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 8) | 60,62 + 96 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 8) | 60,62 + 96 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Passthrough Shape (Ara|ic) | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 3) | 60,62 + 103 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 3) | 60,62 + 103 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 3) | 60,62 + 103 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | FLD/X Shape (Arabic) | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 9) | 60,62 + 101 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 9) | 60,62 + 101 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 9) | 60,62 + 101 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | FLD/B Deshape (Arabic)| | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 6) | 60,62 + 102 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 6) | 60,62 + 102 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 6) | 60,62 + 102 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /></pre> 5578 <hr /> 5579 <h1>E.0 Appendix E. Translated 14277 14278 14279 14280 14281 14282 14283 14284 14285 14286 </ul> 14287 14288 14289 14290 14291 14292 14293 14294 14295 14296 <pre></pre> 14297 14298 14299 14300 14301 14302 14303 14304 14305 14306 <hr /> 14307 14308 14309 14310 14311 <h4>D.3.5.1 Tab</h4> 14312 14313 14314 14315 14316 14317 14318 14319 14320 14321 <pre></pre> 14322 14323 14324 14325 14326 14327 14328 14329 14330 14331 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next field, either the next entry field<br />or the first choice of a selection field if no choice is selected, The<br />cursor moves from right to left and top to bottom. At the bottom-leftmost<br />field, the cursor moves to the top-rightmost field.<br /></pre> 14332 14333 14334 14335 14336 14337 14338 14339 14340 14341 <pre></pre> 14342 14343 14344 14345 14346 14347 14348 14349 14350 14351 <hr /> 14352 14353 14354 14355 14356 <h4>D.3.5.2 Backtab</h4> 14357 14358 14359 14360 14361 14362 14363 14364 14365 14366 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the previous field, either the previous entry<br />field or the first choice of a selection field if no choice is selected,<br />The cursor moves from left to right and bottom to top. At the<br />top-rightmost field, the cursor moves to the bottom-leftmost field.<br /></pre> 14367 14368 14369 14370 14371 14372 14373 14374 14375 14376 <hr /> 14377 14378 14379 14380 14381 <h4>D.3.5.3 Beginning of Data</h4> 14382 14383 14384 14385 14386 14387 14388 14389 14390 14391 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the first logical position in the current<br />field: top-rightmost for a RTL field, top-leftmost for a LTR field.<br /></pre> 14392 14393 14394 14395 14396 14397 14398 14399 14400 14401 <hr /> 14402 14403 14404 14405 14406 <h4>D.3.5.4 End of Data</h4> 14407 14408 14409 14410 14411 14412 14413 14414 14415 14416 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the last logical position in the current<br />field: bottom-leftmost for a RTL field, bottom-rightmost for a LTR field.<br /></pre> 14417 14418 14419 14420 14421 14422 14423 14424 14425 14426 <hr /> 14427 14428 14429 14430 14431 <h4>D.3.5.5 Beginning of Line</h4> 14432 14433 14434 14435 14436 14437 14438 14439 14440 14441 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the rightmost choice.<br /></pre> 14442 14443 14444 14445 14446 14447 14448 14449 14450 14451 <hr /> 14452 14453 14454 14455 14456 <h4>D.3.5.6 End of Line</h4> 14457 14458 14459 14460 14461 14462 14463 14464 14465 14466 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the leftmost choice.<br /></pre> 14467 14468 14469 14470 14471 14472 14473 14474 14475 14476 <hr /> 14477 14478 14479 14480 14481 <h4>D.3.5.7 Up Arrow</h4> 14482 14483 14484 14485 14486 14487 14488 14489 14490 14491 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next choice above the current choice in<br />the field. At the topmost choice, the cursor wraps to the bottom of the<br />next choice to the right. At the top-rightmost choice, the cursor wraps<br />to the bottom-leftmost choice in the field. Scrolling should be performed<br />as required to ensure that the selection cursor remains visible.<br /></pre> 14492 14493 14494 14495 14496 14497 14498 14499 14500 14501 <hr /> 14502 14503 14504 14505 14506 <h4>D.3.5.8 Down Arrow</h4> 14507 14508 14509 14510 14511 14512 14513 14514 14515 14516 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next choice below the current choice in<br />the field. At the bottommost choice, the cursor wraps to the top of the<br />next choice to the left. At the bottom-leftmost choice, the cursor wraps<br />to the top-rightmost choice in the field. Scrolling should be performed<br />as required to ensure that the selection cursor remains visible.<br /></pre> 14517 14518 14519 14520 14521 14522 14523 14524 14525 14526 <hr /> 14527 14528 14529 14530 14531 <h4>D.3.5.9 Left Arrow key</h4> 14532 14533 14534 14535 14536 14537 14538 14539 14540 14541 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next choice to the left of the current<br />choice in the field. At the leftmost choice, the cursor wraps to the<br />rightmost choice below the current position in the field. At the<br />bottom-leftmost choice, the cursor wraps to the top-rightmost choice in<br />the field. Scrolling should be performed as required to ensure that the<br />selection cursor remains visible.<br /></pre> 14542 14543 14544 14545 14546 14547 14548 14549 14550 14551 <hr /> 14552 14553 14554 14555 14556 <h4>D.3.5.10 Right Arrow</h4> 14557 14558 14559 14560 14561 14562 14563 14564 14565 14566 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />This key moves the cursor to the next choice to the right of the current<br />choice in the field. At the rightmost choice, the cursor wraps to the<br />leftmost choice above the current position in the field. At the<br />top-rightmost choice, the cursor wraps to the bottom-leftmost choice in<br />the field. Scrolling should be performed as required to ensure that the<br />selection cursor remains visible.<br /></pre> 14567 14568 14569 14570 14571 14572 14573 14574 14575 14576 <hr /> 14577 14578 14579 14580 14581 <h4>D.3.5.11 Next Key</h4> 14582 14583 14584 14585 14586 14587 14588 14589 14590 14591 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The Next key moves the cursor one position forward according to the<br />logical sequence. On the boundary between segments of different<br />orientations, this key steps through the transition states from one<br />segment to the logically following one.<br /></pre> 14592 14593 14594 14595 14596 14597 14598 14599 14600 14601 <hr /> 14602 14603 14604 14605 14606 <h4>D.3.5.12 Previous Key</h4> 14607 14608 14609 14610 14611 14612 14613 14614 14615 14616 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The Previous key moves the cursor one position backward according to the<br />logical sequence. On the boundary between segments of different<br />orientations, this key steps through the transition states from one<br />segment to the logically preceding one.<br /></pre> 14617 14618 14619 14620 14621 14622 14623 14624 14625 14626 <hr /> 14627 14628 14629 14630 14631 <h3>D.3.6 Key Assignments</h3> 14632 14633 14634 14635 14636 14637 14638 14639 14640 14641 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following notes apply to the table below:<br /><br /><br />1. The key combinations in the table are used for Arabic and Hebrew<br />keyboard functions and therefore must not be used in any way for any<br />other purpose.<br /><br /><br />2. The entries for "Personal Computer" apply equally to native Personal<br />Computer operation and to terminal emulation.<br /><br /><br />3. Current Arabic and Hebrew products implement subsets or variants of<br />the functions appearing in the table. The table reflects the SAA and<br />CUA interface guidelines for Arabic and Hebrew functions from now on.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a id="FIGTBLUNIQ65" name="FIGTBLUNIQ65"></a><a id="TBLTBLUNIQ65" name="TBLTBLUNIQ65"> _______________________ ________________________ _______________________ </a><br />| <b>Function</b> | <b>Key</b> <b>Combinations</b> | <b>Key</b> <b>Numbers</b> |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | National Language | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(right shift) | 60,62 + 57 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(right shift) | 60,62 + 57 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(right shift) | 60,62 + 57 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | English Language | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(left shift) | 60,62 + 44 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(left shift) | 60,62 + 44 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(left shift) | 60,62 + 44 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Push | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Shift+NumLock | 44,57 + 90 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Push | 90 |<br /> | System/370 | Push | 90 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | EndPush | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Shift+(Pad /) | 44,57 + 95 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| EndPush | 95 |<br /> | System/370 | EndPush | 95 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Field Reverse | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+NumLock | 60,62 + 90 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+Push | 60,62 + 90 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+Push | 60,62 + 90 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | AutoPush | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad /) | 60,62 + 95 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+EndPush | 60,62 + 95 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+EndPush | 60,62 + 95 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Next | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 0) | 60,62 + 99 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 0) | 60,62 + 99 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 0) | 60,62 + 99 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Previous | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad .) | 60,62 + 104 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad .) | 60,62 + 104 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad .) | 60,62 + 104 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Screen Reverse | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+Enter (Hebrew) | 60,62 + 43 |<br /> | | Alt+Newline (Arabic) | 60,62 + 43 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Field Exit) | 60,62 + 43 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+NewLine | 60,62 + 43 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | AutoReverse | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 5) | 60,62 + 97 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| -- | |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 5) | 60,62 + 97 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Indicator Window | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+ScrollLock | 60,62 + 125 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| -- | |<br /> | System/370 | -- | |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | ASD Active (Arabic) | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 4) | 60,62 + 92 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 4) | 60,62 + 92 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 4) | 60,62 + 92 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Isolated Shape (Arabic| | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 2) | 60,62 + 98 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 2) | 60,62 + 98 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 2) | 60,62 + 98 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Initial Shape (Arabic)| | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 1) | 60,62 + 93 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 1) | 60,62 + 93 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 1) | 60,62 + 93 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Middle Shape (Arabic) | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 7) | 60,62 + 91 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 7) | 60,62 + 91 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 7) | 60,62 + 91 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Final Shape (Arabic) | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 8) | 60,62 + 96 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 8) | 60,62 + 96 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 8) | 60,62 + 96 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | Passthrough Shape (Ara|ic) | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 3) | 60,62 + 103 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 3) | 60,62 + 103 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 3) | 60,62 + 103 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | FLD/X Shape (Arabic) | | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 9) | 60,62 + 101 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 9) | 60,62 + 101 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 9) | 60,62 + 101 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /> | FLD/B Deshape (Arabic)| | |<br /> | Personal Computer | Alt+(Pad 6) | 60,62 + 102 |<br /> | System/3X and AS/400| Alt+(Pad 6) | 60,62 + 102 |<br /> | System/370 | Alt+(Pad 6) | 60,62 + 102 |<br /> |_______________________|________________________|_______________________|<br /></pre> 14642 14643 14644 14645 14646 14647 14648 14649 14650 14651 <hr /> 14652 14653 14654 14655 14656 <h1>E.0 Appendix E. Translated 5580 14657 Terms</h1> 5581 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This section contains a list of user terms that are part of the Common<br />User Access architecture and that non-English speaking application<br />developers use in their native languages. These terms, shown in English<br />and translated, are presented to users in windows and in information about<br />windows, such as messages, help, and documentation. Use only the<br />designated translations for these terms.<br /><br /><br />In this appendix, the terms are translated into the following languages:<br /><br /><br />° Arabic<br />° Brazilian Portuguese<br />° Chinese<br />° Danish<br />° Dutch<br />° Finnish<br />° French and French (Canadian)<br />° German<br />° Hebrew<br />° Italian<br />° Japanese<br />° Korean<br />° Norwegian<br />° Portuguese<br />° Spanish<br />° Swedish.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5582 <ul> 5583 <li><a href="E.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.1 14658 14659 14660 14661 14662 14663 14664 14665 14666 14667 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This section contains a list of user terms that are part of the Common<br />User Access architecture and that non-English speaking application<br />developers use in their native languages. These terms, shown in English<br />and translated, are presented to users in windows and in information about<br />windows, such as messages, help, and documentation. Use only the<br />designated translations for these terms.<br /><br /><br />In this appendix, the terms are translated into the following languages:<br /><br /><br />° Arabic<br />° Brazilian Portuguese<br />° Chinese<br />° Danish<br />° Dutch<br />° Finnish<br />° French and French (Canadian)<br />° German<br />° Hebrew<br />° Italian<br />° Japanese<br />° Korean<br />° Norwegian<br />° Portuguese<br />° Spanish<br />° Swedish.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 14668 14669 14670 14671 14672 14673 14674 14675 14676 14677 <ul> 14678 14679 14680 14681 14682 14683 <li><a target="_top" href="E.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.1 5584 14684 Arabic</a></li> 5585 <li><a href="E.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.2 14685 14686 14687 14688 14689 14690 <li><a target="_top" href="E.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.2 5586 14691 Brazilian Portuguese</a></li> 5587 <li><a href="E.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.3 14692 14693 14694 14695 14696 14697 <li><a target="_top" href="E.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.3 5588 14698 Chinese</a></li> 5589 <li><a href="E.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.4 14699 14700 14701 14702 14703 14704 <li><a target="_top" href="E.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.4 5590 14705 Danish</a></li> 5591 <li><a href="E.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.5 14706 14707 14708 14709 14710 14711 <li><a target="_top" href="E.5?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.5 5592 14712 Dutch</a></li> 5593 <li><a href="E.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.6 14713 14714 14715 14716 14717 14718 <li><a target="_top" href="E.6?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.6 5594 14719 Finnish</a></li> 5595 <li><a href="E.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.7 14720 14721 14722 14723 14724 14725 <li><a target="_top" href="E.7?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.7 5596 14726 French and French (Canadian)</a></li> 5597 <li><a href="E.8?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.8 14727 14728 14729 14730 14731 14732 <li><a target="_top" href="E.8?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.8 5598 14733 German</a></li> 5599 <li><a href="E.9?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.9 14734 14735 14736 14737 14738 14739 <li><a target="_top" href="E.9?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.9 5600 14740 Hebrew</a></li> 5601 <li><a href="E.10?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.10 14741 14742 14743 14744 14745 14746 <li><a target="_top" href="E.10?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.10 5602 14747 Italian</a></li> 5603 <li><a href="E.11?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.11 14748 14749 14750 14751 14752 14753 <li><a target="_top" href="E.11?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.11 5604 14754 Japanese</a></li> 5605 <li><a href="E.12?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.12 14755 14756 14757 14758 14759 14760 <li><a target="_top" href="E.12?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.12 5606 14761 Korean</a></li> 5607 <li><a href="E.13?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.13 14762 14763 14764 14765 14766 14767 <li><a target="_top" href="E.13?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.13 5608 14768 Norwegian</a></li> 5609 <li><a href="E.14?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.14 14769 14770 14771 14772 14773 14774 <li><a target="_top" href="E.14?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.14 5610 14775 Portuguese</a></li> 5611 <li><a href="E.15?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.15 14776 14777 14778 14779 14780 14781 <li><a target="_top" href="E.15?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.15 5612 14782 Spanish</a></li> 5613 <li><a href="E.16?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">E.16 14783 14784 14785 14786 14787 14788 <li><a target="_top" href="E.16?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">E.16 5614 14789 Swedish</a></li> 5615 </ul> 5616 <pre></pre> 5617 <hr /> 5618 <h2>E.1 Arabic</h2> 5619 <pre></pre> 5620 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Two terms have been added for the bidirectional CUA guidelines.<br /><br /><br /><b>direction</b> The order of a sequence of objects which can be LTR or RTL.<br /> For instance, the typing direction (order of the generated<br /> characters) may be RTL or LTR.<br /><br /><br /><b>orientation</b> Attribute of an object which can be LTR or RTL as defined<br /> by the order of its subordinate elements. For instance, a<br /> field has RTL orientation if its characters are ordered<br /> from right to left.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5621 href="picture-315?mode=zoom"><img 5622 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P315.GIF" 5623 alt="PICTURE 315" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5624 href="picture-316?mode=zoom"><img 5625 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P316.GIF" 5626 alt="PICTURE 316" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5627 href="picture-317?mode=zoom"><img 5628 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P317.GIF" 5629 alt="PICTURE 317" /></a><br /></pre> 5630 <pre></pre> 5631 <hr /> 5632 <h2>E.2 Brazilian Portuguese</h2> 5633 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Brazilian</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />action ação<br />active window janela ativa<br />Apply Aplicar<br />border margem<br />button botão<br />Cancel Cancelar<br />cascaded menu menu em cascata<br />cascading choice escolha em cascata<br />check box caixa de verificação<br />check mark visto<br />choice escolha<br />chord acorde<br />Clear Limpar<br />click clique<br />clipboard memória temporária<br />Close Fechar<br />container contêiner<br />contextual help auxílio contextual<br />Continue Continuar<br />Copy Copiar<br />Create Criar<br />cursor cursor<br />Cut Remover<br />Delete Eliminar<br />Delete folder Pasta de eliminação<br />Deselect all Cancelar seleções<br />dialog diálogo<br />direct manipulation manipulação direta<br />directory diretório<br />do-not pointer Indicador não-fazer<br />double-click clique duplo<br />drag arrastar<br />drag and drop arrastar e fixar<br />Edit Editar<br />emphasis destaque<br />entry field campo de entrada<br />field campo<br />field prompt orientador de campo<br />File Arquivo<br />Find Pesquisar<br />folder pasta<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Brazilian</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menus completos<br />General help Auxílio geral<br />group heading cabeçalho de grupo<br />Help Auxílio<br />Help index Índice remissivo de auxílio<br />Hide Esconder<br />I-beam pointer Indicador-I<br />icon ícone<br />inactive window janela inativa<br />Include Incluir<br />information area área de informação<br />Keys help Auxílio para teclas<br />list button botão de lista<br />manipulation button botão de manipulação<br />Maximize Maximizar<br />maximize button botão de maximizar<br />menu menu<br />menu bar barra de opções<br />menu-bar choice escolha da barra de opções<br />menu button botão de menu<br />menu choice opção de menu<br />message mensagem<br />Minimize Minimizar<br />minimize button botão de minimizar<br />mouse rato<br />mouse button botão do rato<br />Move Mover<br />New Novo<br />notebook arquivo de notas<br />object objeto<br />Off Desativar<br />OK OK<br />On Ativar<br />Open Abrir<br />Open as Abrir como<br />Options Opções<br />palette paleta<br />pane painel<br />Paste Anexar<br />Pause Pausa<br />pointer indicador<br />pointing device dispositivo de indicação<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Brazilian</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu menu sobreposto<br />Print Imprimir<br />Product information Informações do produto<br />progress indicator indicador de processamento<br />push button botão de comando<br />radio button botão de opção<br />Redo Refazer<br />Reflection Reflexo<br />Refresh Atualizar<br />Refresh now Atualizar imediatamente<br />Rename Redenominar<br />Reset Restabelecer<br />Restore Restaurar<br />restore button botão de restaurar<br />Resume Prosseguir<br />Retry Tentar novamente<br />Save Salvar<br />Save as Salvar como<br />screen tela<br />scroll bar barra de deslocamento<br />scroll box caixa de deslocamento<br />select selecionar<br />Select all Selecionar todos<br />Selected Selecionado<br />selection button botão de seleção<br />selection cursor cursor de seleção<br />Settings Configuração<br />shortcut key tecla de atalho<br />Short menus Menus reduzidos<br />Size Tamanho<br />slider barra de rolagem<br />slider arm caixa de rolagem<br />slider button botão de rolagem<br />Sort Classificar<br />spin button botão giratório<br />Split Dividir<br />split box caixa de dividir<br />status area área de status<br />Stop Interromper<br />system menu menu do sistema<br />system-menu symbol símbolo de menu do sistema<br />tabbed-divider page página divisória<br />text cursor cursor de texto<br />title bar barra de título<br />tool palette paleta de ferramenta<br />Tutorial Guia<br />Undo Desfazer<br />Using help Usando o auxílio<br />View Ver<br />window janela<br />Windows Janelas<br />Window list Lista de janelas<br />window title título de janela<br />work area área de trabalho<br />workplace local de trabalho<br /></pre> 5634 <hr /> 5635 <h2>E.3 Chinese</h2> 5636 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a 5637 href="picture-318?mode=zoom"><img 5638 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P318.GIF" 5639 alt="PICTURE 318" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5640 href="picture-319?mode=zoom"><img 5641 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P319.GIF" 5642 alt="PICTURE 319" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5643 href="picture-320?mode=zoom"><img 5644 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P320.GIF" 5645 alt="PICTURE 320" /></a><br /></pre> 5646 <hr /> 5647 <h2>E.4 Danish</h2> 5648 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Danish</b> <b>Term</b><br />action funktion<br />active window aktivt vindue<br />Apply Aktivér<br />border ramme<br />button knap<br />Cancel Annullér<br />cascaded menu undermenu<br />cascading choice punkt med undermenu<br />check box afkrydsningsfelt<br />check mark hak<br />choice valgmulighed<br />chord trykke samtidigt<br />Clear Ryd<br />click klikke<br />clipboard udklipsholder<br />Close Luk<br />container opbevaringssted<br />contextual help specifik hjælp<br />Continue Fortsæt<br />Copy Kopiér<br />Create Opret<br />cursor markør<br />Cut Klip<br />Delete Slet<br />Delete folder Makuleringsfolder<br />Deselect all Ophæv markering af alle<br />dialog dialog<br />direct manipulation direkte manipulering<br />directory bibliotek<br />do-not pointer forbudsmarkør<br />double-click dobbeltklikke<br />drag trække<br />drag and drop trække og placere<br />Edit Redigér<br />emphasis fremhævning<br />entry field indtastningsfelt<br />field felt<br />field prompt ledetekst<br />File Fil<br />Find Søg<br />folder folder<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Danish</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Hele menuer<br />General help Generel hjælp<br />group heading gruppeoverskrift<br />Help Hjælp<br />Help index Stikord<br />Hide Skjul<br />I-beam pointer I-markør<br />icon ikon<br />inactive window ikke-aktivt vindue<br />Include Inkludér<br />information area informationsområde<br />Keys help Taster<br />list button oversigtsknap<br />manipulation button manipuleringsknap<br />Maximize Maksimér<br />maximize button maksimérknap<br />menu menu<br />menu bar menulinie<br />menu-bar choice punkt på menulinien<br />menu button menuknap<br />menu choice menupunkt<br />message meddelelse<br />Minimize Minimér<br />minimize button minimérknap<br />mouse mus<br />mouse button museknap<br />Move Flyt<br />New Ny<br />notebook notesbog<br />object objekt<br />Off Deaktiveret<br />OK OK<br />On Aktiveret<br />Open Åbn<br />Open as Åbn som<br />Options Tilpasning<br />palette palet<br />pane delvindue<br />Paste Klistre<br />Pause Pause<br />pointer pilmarkør<br />pointing device pegeudstyr<br />pop-up menu pop-op-menu<br />Print Udskriv<br />Product information Produktinformation<br />progress indicator statusindikator<br />push button trykknap<br />radio button valgknap<br />Redo Fortryd igen<br />Reflection Afspejling<br />Refresh Opfrisk<br />Refresh now Opfrisk nu<br />Rename Nyt navn<br />Reset Reset<br />Restore Gendan<br />restore button gendanknap<br />Resume Genoptag<br />Retry Prøv igen<br />Save Gem<br />Save as Gem som<br />screen skærm<br />scroll bar bladringsfelt<br />scroll box bladringsboks<br />select vælge, markere<br />Select all Markér alle<br />Selected Markerede objekter<br />selection button valgknap<br />selection cursor valgmarkør<br />Settings Indstillinger<br />shortcut key genvejstast<br />Short menus Korte menuer<br />Size Tilpas størrelse<br />slider skala<br />slider arm skyder<br />slider button finindstillingsknap<br />Sort Sortér<br />spin button bladringsknap<br />Split Opdel<br />split box opdelingsboks<br />status area statusområde<br />Stop Stop<br />system menu systemmenu<br />system-menu symbol symbol for systemmenu<br />tabbed-divider page skilleblad<br />text cursor tekstmarkør<br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Danish</b> <b>Term</b><br />title bar overskriftslinie<br />tool palette redskabspalet<br />Tutorial Øveprogram<br />Undo Fortryd<br />Using help Brug af hjælp<br />View Vis<br />window vindue<br />Windows Vinduer<br />Window list Vinduesoversigt<br />window title vinduesnavn<br />work area arbejdsområde<br />workplace arbejdsplads<br /></pre> 5649 <hr /> 5650 <h2>E.5 Dutch</h2> 5651 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Dutch</b> <b>Term</b><br />action actie<br />active window werkvenster<br />Apply Aanbrengen<br />border kader<br />button knop (1); knop (2); symbool (3)<br />Cancel Annuleren<br />cascaded menu vervolgmenu<br />cascading choice optie met vervolgmenu<br />check box aankruisvakje<br />check mark vinkje<br />choice optie<br />chord combinatieklik<br />Clear Verwijderen<br />click klikken<br />clipboard klembord<br />Close Sluiten<br />container opbergplaats<br />contextual help specifieke Help<br />Continue Doorgaan<br />Copy Kopiëren<br />Create Maken<br />cursor cursor<br />Cut Knippen<br />Delete Wissen<br />Delete Folder Wismap<br />Deselect all Alle selecties opheffen<br />dialog dialoog<br />direct manipulation rechtstreekse actie<br />directory directory<br />do-not pointer verbodsaanwijzer<br />double-click dubbelklikken<br />drag slepen<br />drag and drop slepen en neerzetten<br />Edit Bewerken<br />emphasis accentuering<br />entry field invoerveld<br />field veld<br />field prompt aanwijzing<br />File Bestand<br />Find Zoeken<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Dutch</b> <b>Term</b><br />folder map<br />Full menus Volledige menu´s<br />General help Algemene Help<br />group heading groepskop<br />Help Help<br />Help index Help-index<br />Hide Verbergen<br />I-beam pointer invoegsymbool<br />icon pictogram<br />inactive window achtergrondvenster<br />Include Opnemen<br />information area informatiegebied<br />Keys help Help bij toetsen<br />list button lijstsymbool<br />manipulation button actieknop<br />Maximize Maximumvenster<br />maximize button symbool Maximumvenster<br />menu menu<br />menu bar menubalk<br />menu-bar choice menubalk-optie<br />menu button menuknop<br />menu choice menu-optie<br />message bericht<br />Minimize Pictogram<br />minimize button symbool Pictogram<br />mouse muis<br />mouse button muisknop<br />Move Verplaatsen<br />New Nieuw<br />notebook notitieboek<br />object object<br />Off Uit<br />OK OK<br />On Aan<br />Open Openen<br />Open as Openen als<br />Options Opties<br />palette palet<br />pane deelvenster<br />Paste Plakken<br />Pause Onderbreken<br />pointer aanwijzer<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Dutch</b> <b>Term</b><br />pointing device aanwijsapparaat<br />pop-up menu voorgrondmenu<br />Print Afdrukken<br />Product information Info<br />progress indicator voortgangsindicatie<br />push button opdrachtknop<br />radio button keuzerondje<br />Redo Herstellen<br />reflection reflectie<br />Refresh Vernieuwen<br />Refresh now Nu vernieuwen<br />Rename Naam wijzigen<br />Reset Beginwaarde; Beginwaarden<br />Restore Vorig formaat<br />restore button symbool Vorig formaat<br />Resume Doorgaan<br />Retry Herhalen<br />Save Opslaan<br />Save as Opslaan als<br />screen beeldscherm<br />scroll bar schuifbalk<br />scroll box schuifblokje<br />select selecteren<br />Select all Alles selecteren<br />Selected Geselecteerd<br />selection button selectieknop<br />selection cursor selectiecursor<br />Settings Instellingen<br />shortcut key sneltoets<br />Short menus Beknopte menu´s<br />Size Formaat wijzigen<br />slider schuifregelaar<br />slider arm schuifarm<br />slider button regelknop<br />Sort Sorteren<br />spin button ringveldknop<br />Split Splitsen<br />split box splitsblokje<br />status area statusgebied<br />Stop Stoppen<br />system menu systeemmenu<br />system-menu symbol symbool Systeemmenu<br />tabbed-divider page tabblad<br />text cursor tekstcursor<br />title bar titelbalk<br />tool palette werkpalet<br />Tutorial Zelfstudie<br />Undo Ongedaan maken<br />Using help Help gebruiken<br />View Beeld<br />window venster<br />Windows Vensters<br />Window list Taakoverzicht<br />window title venstertitel<br />work area werkgebied<br />workplace werkplek<br /></pre> 5652 <hr /> 5653 <h2>E.6 Finnish</h2> 5654 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Finnish</b> <b>Term</b><br />action toiminto<br />active window actiivinen ikkuna<br />Apply Aktivointi<br />border kehys,reuna<br />button painike, nappi<br />Cancel Peruutus<br />cascaded menu limittyvä valikko<br />cascading choice limitysvalinta<br />check box valintaruutu<br />check mark valintamerkki<br />choice valinta, vaihtoehto<br />chord yhdistelmänapsautus<br />Clear Tyhjennys<br />click napsauttaa, napsautus<br />clipboard leikepöytä<br />Close Sulkeminen<br />container säilö<br />contextual help kohdeohje<br />Continue Jatko<br />Copy Kopiointi<br />Create Luonti<br />cursor kohdistin<br />Cut Leikkaus<br />Delete Poisto<br />Delete Folder Kansion poisto<br />Deselect all Valintojen peruutus<br />dialog keskustelu, valintaikkuna<br />direct manipulation suorakäsittely<br />directory hakemisto<br />do-not pointer kielto-osoitin<br />double-click napsauttaa kahdesti,<br />kaksoisnapsautus<br />drag vetäminen, veto<br />drag and drop veto ja pudotus<br />Edit Muokkaus<br />emphasis korostus<br />entry field syöttökenttä<br />field kenttä<br />field prompt kentän selite<br />File Tiedosto<br />Find Etsintä<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Finnish</b> <b>Term</b><br />folder kansio<br />Full menus Pitkät valikot<br />General help Yleisohje<br />group heading ryhmäotsikko<br />Help Ohje<br />Help index Ohjehakemisto<br />Hide Piilotus<br />I-beam pointer I-osoitin<br />icon kuvake<br />inactive window passiivinen ikkuna<br />Include Sisältö, sisällytys<br />information area ilmoitusalue<br />Keys help Näppäinohje<br />list button luettelopainike<br />manipulation button käsittelypainike<br />Maximize Suurennus<br />maximize button suurennuspainike<br />menu valikko<br />menu bar valikkorivi<br />menu-bar choice valikkorivin vaihtoehto<br />menu button valikkopainike<br />menu choice valikon vaihtoehto<br />message sanoma<br />Minimize Pienennys<br />minimize button pienennyspainike<br />mouse hiiri<br />mouse button hiiren painike<br />Move Siirto<br />New Uusi<br />notebook muistikirja<br />object objekti<br />Off Ei käytössä<br />OK OK<br />On Käytössä<br />Open Avaus<br />Open as Avauksen valinta<br />Options Muut valinnat, asetukset<br />palette valikoima<br />pane ruutu<br />Paste Littäminen<br />Pause Keskeytys<br />pointer osoitin<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Finnish</b> <b>Term</b><br />pointing device paikannuslaite<br />pop-up menu kohovalikko<br />Print Tulostus (kirjoittimella)<br />Product information Tietoja ohjelmasta<br />progress indicator tilanneilmaisin<br />push button painike<br />radio button valintanappi<br />Redo Uusinta<br />reflection heijastus, heijaste<br />Refresh Verestys<br />Refresh now Verestys nyt<br />Rename Nimeäminen<br />Reset Palautus<br />Restore Palautus<br />restore button palautuspainike<br />Resume Jatko<br />Retry Uusinta<br />Save Tallennus<br />Save as Tallennus nimellä<br />screen kuvaruutu<br />scroll bar vierityspalkki<br />scroll box vieritysruutu<br />select valita, valinta<br />Select all Kaikkien valinta<br />Selected Valitut<br />selection button valintapainike<br />selection cursor valintakohdistin<br />Settings Asetukset<br />shortcut key pikanäppäin<br />Short menus Lyhyet valikot<br />Size Koon muutto<br />slider liukusäädin<br />slider arm liukuruutu<br />slider button liukupainike<br />Sort Lajittelu<br />spin button selauspainike<br />Split Jaettu ikkuna<br />split box jakoruutu<br />status area tilakenttä<br />Stop Lopetus<br />system menu ohjausvalikko<br />system-menu symbol ohjausvalikon symboli<br />tabbed-divider page välilehti<br />text cursor tekstikohdistin<br />title bar otsikkorivi<br />tool palette työkaluvalikoima<br />Tutorial Opetusohjelma<br />Undo Kumous<br />Using help Ohjeiden käyttö<br />View Näyttö, esitystapa<br />window ikkuna<br />Window list Ikkunaluettelo<br />Windows Ikkunat<br />window title ikkunan otsikko<br />work area työalue<br />workplace työpöytä<br /></pre> 5655 <hr /> 5656 <h2>E.7 French and French 14790 14791 14792 14793 14794 14795 14796 14797 14798 14799 </ul> 14800 14801 14802 14803 14804 14805 14806 14807 14808 14809 <pre></pre> 14810 14811 14812 14813 14814 14815 14816 14817 14818 14819 <hr /> 14820 14821 14822 14823 14824 <h2>E.1 Arabic</h2> 14825 14826 14827 14828 14829 14830 14831 14832 14833 14834 <pre></pre> 14835 14836 14837 14838 14839 14840 14841 14842 14843 14844 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Two terms have been added for the bidirectional CUA guidelines.<br /><br /><br /><b>direction</b> The order of a sequence of objects which can be LTR or RTL.<br /> For instance, the typing direction (order of the generated<br /> characters) may be RTL or LTR.<br /><br /><br /><b>orientation</b> Attribute of an object which can be LTR or RTL as defined<br /> by the order of its subordinate elements. For instance, a<br /> field has RTL orientation if its characters are ordered<br /> from right to left.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-315?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 315" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P315.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-316?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 316" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P316.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-317?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 317" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P317.GIF" /></a><br /></pre> 14845 14846 14847 14848 14849 14850 14851 14852 14853 14854 <pre></pre> 14855 14856 14857 14858 14859 14860 14861 14862 14863 14864 <hr /> 14865 14866 14867 14868 14869 <h2>E.2 Brazilian Portuguese</h2> 14870 14871 14872 14873 14874 14875 14876 14877 14878 14879 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Brazilian</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />action ação<br />active window janela ativa<br />Apply Aplicar<br />border margem<br />button botão<br />Cancel Cancelar<br />cascaded menu menu em cascata<br />cascading choice escolha em cascata<br />check box caixa de verificação<br />check mark visto<br />choice escolha<br />chord acorde<br />Clear Limpar<br />click clique<br />clipboard memória temporária<br />Close Fechar<br />container contêiner<br />contextual help auxílio contextual<br />Continue Continuar<br />Copy Copiar<br />Create Criar<br />cursor cursor<br />Cut Remover<br />Delete Eliminar<br />Delete folder Pasta de eliminação<br />Deselect all Cancelar seleções<br />dialog diálogo<br />direct manipulation manipulação direta<br />directory diretório<br />do-not pointer Indicador não-fazer<br />double-click clique duplo<br />drag arrastar<br />drag and drop arrastar e fixar<br />Edit Editar<br />emphasis destaque<br />entry field campo de entrada<br />field campo<br />field prompt orientador de campo<br />File Arquivo<br />Find Pesquisar<br />folder pasta<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Brazilian</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menus completos<br />General help Auxílio geral<br />group heading cabeçalho de grupo<br />Help Auxílio<br />Help index Índice remissivo de auxílio<br />Hide Esconder<br />I-beam pointer Indicador-I<br />icon ícone<br />inactive window janela inativa<br />Include Incluir<br />information area área de informação<br />Keys help Auxílio para teclas<br />list button botão de lista<br />manipulation button botão de manipulação<br />Maximize Maximizar<br />maximize button botão de maximizar<br />menu menu<br />menu bar barra de opções<br />menu-bar choice escolha da barra de opções<br />menu button botão de menu<br />menu choice opção de menu<br />message mensagem<br />Minimize Minimizar<br />minimize button botão de minimizar<br />mouse rato<br />mouse button botão do rato<br />Move Mover<br />New Novo<br />notebook arquivo de notas<br />object objeto<br />Off Desativar<br />OK OK<br />On Ativar<br />Open Abrir<br />Open as Abrir como<br />Options Opções<br />palette paleta<br />pane painel<br />Paste Anexar<br />Pause Pausa<br />pointer indicador<br />pointing device dispositivo de indicação<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Brazilian</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu menu sobreposto<br />Print Imprimir<br />Product information Informações do produto<br />progress indicator indicador de processamento<br />push button botão de comando<br />radio button botão de opção<br />Redo Refazer<br />Reflection Reflexo<br />Refresh Atualizar<br />Refresh now Atualizar imediatamente<br />Rename Redenominar<br />Reset Restabelecer<br />Restore Restaurar<br />restore button botão de restaurar<br />Resume Prosseguir<br />Retry Tentar novamente<br />Save Salvar<br />Save as Salvar como<br />screen tela<br />scroll bar barra de deslocamento<br />scroll box caixa de deslocamento<br />select selecionar<br />Select all Selecionar todos<br />Selected Selecionado<br />selection button botão de seleção<br />selection cursor cursor de seleção<br />Settings Configuração<br />shortcut key tecla de atalho<br />Short menus Menus reduzidos<br />Size Tamanho<br />slider barra de rolagem<br />slider arm caixa de rolagem<br />slider button botão de rolagem<br />Sort Classificar<br />spin button botão giratório<br />Split Dividir<br />split box caixa de dividir<br />status area área de status<br />Stop Interromper<br />system menu menu do sistema<br />system-menu symbol símbolo de menu do sistema<br />tabbed-divider page página divisória<br />text cursor cursor de texto<br />title bar barra de título<br />tool palette paleta de ferramenta<br />Tutorial Guia<br />Undo Desfazer<br />Using help Usando o auxílio<br />View Ver<br />window janela<br />Windows Janelas<br />Window list Lista de janelas<br />window title título de janela<br />work area área de trabalho<br />workplace local de trabalho<br /></pre> 14880 14881 14882 14883 14884 14885 14886 14887 14888 14889 <hr /> 14890 14891 14892 14893 14894 <h2>E.3 Chinese</h2> 14895 14896 14897 14898 14899 14900 14901 14902 14903 14904 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-318?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 318" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P318.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-319?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 319" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P319.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-320?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 320" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P320.GIF" /></a><br /></pre> 14905 14906 14907 14908 14909 14910 14911 14912 14913 14914 <hr /> 14915 14916 14917 14918 14919 <h2>E.4 Danish</h2> 14920 14921 14922 14923 14924 14925 14926 14927 14928 14929 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Danish</b> <b>Term</b><br />action funktion<br />active window aktivt vindue<br />Apply Aktivér<br />border ramme<br />button knap<br />Cancel Annullér<br />cascaded menu undermenu<br />cascading choice punkt med undermenu<br />check box afkrydsningsfelt<br />check mark hak<br />choice valgmulighed<br />chord trykke samtidigt<br />Clear Ryd<br />click klikke<br />clipboard udklipsholder<br />Close Luk<br />container opbevaringssted<br />contextual help specifik hjælp<br />Continue Fortsæt<br />Copy Kopiér<br />Create Opret<br />cursor markør<br />Cut Klip<br />Delete Slet<br />Delete folder Makuleringsfolder<br />Deselect all Ophæv markering af alle<br />dialog dialog<br />direct manipulation direkte manipulering<br />directory bibliotek<br />do-not pointer forbudsmarkør<br />double-click dobbeltklikke<br />drag trække<br />drag and drop trække og placere<br />Edit Redigér<br />emphasis fremhævning<br />entry field indtastningsfelt<br />field felt<br />field prompt ledetekst<br />File Fil<br />Find Søg<br />folder folder<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Danish</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Hele menuer<br />General help Generel hjælp<br />group heading gruppeoverskrift<br />Help Hjælp<br />Help index Stikord<br />Hide Skjul<br />I-beam pointer I-markør<br />icon ikon<br />inactive window ikke-aktivt vindue<br />Include Inkludér<br />information area informationsområde<br />Keys help Taster<br />list button oversigtsknap<br />manipulation button manipuleringsknap<br />Maximize Maksimér<br />maximize button maksimérknap<br />menu menu<br />menu bar menulinie<br />menu-bar choice punkt på menulinien<br />menu button menuknap<br />menu choice menupunkt<br />message meddelelse<br />Minimize Minimér<br />minimize button minimérknap<br />mouse mus<br />mouse button museknap<br />Move Flyt<br />New Ny<br />notebook notesbog<br />object objekt<br />Off Deaktiveret<br />OK OK<br />On Aktiveret<br />Open Åbn<br />Open as Åbn som<br />Options Tilpasning<br />palette palet<br />pane delvindue<br />Paste Klistre<br />Pause Pause<br />pointer pilmarkør<br />pointing device pegeudstyr<br />pop-up menu pop-op-menu<br />Print Udskriv<br />Product information Produktinformation<br />progress indicator statusindikator<br />push button trykknap<br />radio button valgknap<br />Redo Fortryd igen<br />Reflection Afspejling<br />Refresh Opfrisk<br />Refresh now Opfrisk nu<br />Rename Nyt navn<br />Reset Reset<br />Restore Gendan<br />restore button gendanknap<br />Resume Genoptag<br />Retry Prøv igen<br />Save Gem<br />Save as Gem som<br />screen skærm<br />scroll bar bladringsfelt<br />scroll box bladringsboks<br />select vælge, markere<br />Select all Markér alle<br />Selected Markerede objekter<br />selection button valgknap<br />selection cursor valgmarkør<br />Settings Indstillinger<br />shortcut key genvejstast<br />Short menus Korte menuer<br />Size Tilpas størrelse<br />slider skala<br />slider arm skyder<br />slider button finindstillingsknap<br />Sort Sortér<br />spin button bladringsknap<br />Split Opdel<br />split box opdelingsboks<br />status area statusområde<br />Stop Stop<br />system menu systemmenu<br />system-menu symbol symbol for systemmenu<br />tabbed-divider page skilleblad<br />text cursor tekstmarkør<br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Danish</b> <b>Term</b><br />title bar overskriftslinie<br />tool palette redskabspalet<br />Tutorial Øveprogram<br />Undo Fortryd<br />Using help Brug af hjælp<br />View Vis<br />window vindue<br />Windows Vinduer<br />Window list Vinduesoversigt<br />window title vinduesnavn<br />work area arbejdsområde<br />workplace arbejdsplads<br /></pre> 14930 14931 14932 14933 14934 14935 14936 14937 14938 14939 <hr /> 14940 14941 14942 14943 14944 <h2>E.5 Dutch</h2> 14945 14946 14947 14948 14949 14950 14951 14952 14953 14954 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Dutch</b> <b>Term</b><br />action actie<br />active window werkvenster<br />Apply Aanbrengen<br />border kader<br />button knop (1); knop (2); symbool (3)<br />Cancel Annuleren<br />cascaded menu vervolgmenu<br />cascading choice optie met vervolgmenu<br />check box aankruisvakje<br />check mark vinkje<br />choice optie<br />chord combinatieklik<br />Clear Verwijderen<br />click klikken<br />clipboard klembord<br />Close Sluiten<br />container opbergplaats<br />contextual help specifieke Help<br />Continue Doorgaan<br />Copy Kopiëren<br />Create Maken<br />cursor cursor<br />Cut Knippen<br />Delete Wissen<br />Delete Folder Wismap<br />Deselect all Alle selecties opheffen<br />dialog dialoog<br />direct manipulation rechtstreekse actie<br />directory directory<br />do-not pointer verbodsaanwijzer<br />double-click dubbelklikken<br />drag slepen<br />drag and drop slepen en neerzetten<br />Edit Bewerken<br />emphasis accentuering<br />entry field invoerveld<br />field veld<br />field prompt aanwijzing<br />File Bestand<br />Find Zoeken<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Dutch</b> <b>Term</b><br />folder map<br />Full menus Volledige menu´s<br />General help Algemene Help<br />group heading groepskop<br />Help Help<br />Help index Help-index<br />Hide Verbergen<br />I-beam pointer invoegsymbool<br />icon pictogram<br />inactive window achtergrondvenster<br />Include Opnemen<br />information area informatiegebied<br />Keys help Help bij toetsen<br />list button lijstsymbool<br />manipulation button actieknop<br />Maximize Maximumvenster<br />maximize button symbool Maximumvenster<br />menu menu<br />menu bar menubalk<br />menu-bar choice menubalk-optie<br />menu button menuknop<br />menu choice menu-optie<br />message bericht<br />Minimize Pictogram<br />minimize button symbool Pictogram<br />mouse muis<br />mouse button muisknop<br />Move Verplaatsen<br />New Nieuw<br />notebook notitieboek<br />object object<br />Off Uit<br />OK OK<br />On Aan<br />Open Openen<br />Open as Openen als<br />Options Opties<br />palette palet<br />pane deelvenster<br />Paste Plakken<br />Pause Onderbreken<br />pointer aanwijzer<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Dutch</b> <b>Term</b><br />pointing device aanwijsapparaat<br />pop-up menu voorgrondmenu<br />Print Afdrukken<br />Product information Info<br />progress indicator voortgangsindicatie<br />push button opdrachtknop<br />radio button keuzerondje<br />Redo Herstellen<br />reflection reflectie<br />Refresh Vernieuwen<br />Refresh now Nu vernieuwen<br />Rename Naam wijzigen<br />Reset Beginwaarde; Beginwaarden<br />Restore Vorig formaat<br />restore button symbool Vorig formaat<br />Resume Doorgaan<br />Retry Herhalen<br />Save Opslaan<br />Save as Opslaan als<br />screen beeldscherm<br />scroll bar schuifbalk<br />scroll box schuifblokje<br />select selecteren<br />Select all Alles selecteren<br />Selected Geselecteerd<br />selection button selectieknop<br />selection cursor selectiecursor<br />Settings Instellingen<br />shortcut key sneltoets<br />Short menus Beknopte menu´s<br />Size Formaat wijzigen<br />slider schuifregelaar<br />slider arm schuifarm<br />slider button regelknop<br />Sort Sorteren<br />spin button ringveldknop<br />Split Splitsen<br />split box splitsblokje<br />status area statusgebied<br />Stop Stoppen<br />system menu systeemmenu<br />system-menu symbol symbool Systeemmenu<br />tabbed-divider page tabblad<br />text cursor tekstcursor<br />title bar titelbalk<br />tool palette werkpalet<br />Tutorial Zelfstudie<br />Undo Ongedaan maken<br />Using help Help gebruiken<br />View Beeld<br />window venster<br />Windows Vensters<br />Window list Taakoverzicht<br />window title venstertitel<br />work area werkgebied<br />workplace werkplek<br /></pre> 14955 14956 14957 14958 14959 14960 14961 14962 14963 14964 <hr /> 14965 14966 14967 14968 14969 <h2>E.6 Finnish</h2> 14970 14971 14972 14973 14974 14975 14976 14977 14978 14979 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Finnish</b> <b>Term</b><br />action toiminto<br />active window actiivinen ikkuna<br />Apply Aktivointi<br />border kehys,reuna<br />button painike, nappi<br />Cancel Peruutus<br />cascaded menu limittyvä valikko<br />cascading choice limitysvalinta<br />check box valintaruutu<br />check mark valintamerkki<br />choice valinta, vaihtoehto<br />chord yhdistelmänapsautus<br />Clear Tyhjennys<br />click napsauttaa, napsautus<br />clipboard leikepöytä<br />Close Sulkeminen<br />container säilö<br />contextual help kohdeohje<br />Continue Jatko<br />Copy Kopiointi<br />Create Luonti<br />cursor kohdistin<br />Cut Leikkaus<br />Delete Poisto<br />Delete Folder Kansion poisto<br />Deselect all Valintojen peruutus<br />dialog keskustelu, valintaikkuna<br />direct manipulation suorakäsittely<br />directory hakemisto<br />do-not pointer kielto-osoitin<br />double-click napsauttaa kahdesti,<br />kaksoisnapsautus<br />drag vetäminen, veto<br />drag and drop veto ja pudotus<br />Edit Muokkaus<br />emphasis korostus<br />entry field syöttökenttä<br />field kenttä<br />field prompt kentän selite<br />File Tiedosto<br />Find Etsintä<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Finnish</b> <b>Term</b><br />folder kansio<br />Full menus Pitkät valikot<br />General help Yleisohje<br />group heading ryhmäotsikko<br />Help Ohje<br />Help index Ohjehakemisto<br />Hide Piilotus<br />I-beam pointer I-osoitin<br />icon kuvake<br />inactive window passiivinen ikkuna<br />Include Sisältö, sisällytys<br />information area ilmoitusalue<br />Keys help Näppäinohje<br />list button luettelopainike<br />manipulation button käsittelypainike<br />Maximize Suurennus<br />maximize button suurennuspainike<br />menu valikko<br />menu bar valikkorivi<br />menu-bar choice valikkorivin vaihtoehto<br />menu button valikkopainike<br />menu choice valikon vaihtoehto<br />message sanoma<br />Minimize Pienennys<br />minimize button pienennyspainike<br />mouse hiiri<br />mouse button hiiren painike<br />Move Siirto<br />New Uusi<br />notebook muistikirja<br />object objekti<br />Off Ei käytössä<br />OK OK<br />On Käytössä<br />Open Avaus<br />Open as Avauksen valinta<br />Options Muut valinnat, asetukset<br />palette valikoima<br />pane ruutu<br />Paste Littäminen<br />Pause Keskeytys<br />pointer osoitin<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Finnish</b> <b>Term</b><br />pointing device paikannuslaite<br />pop-up menu kohovalikko<br />Print Tulostus (kirjoittimella)<br />Product information Tietoja ohjelmasta<br />progress indicator tilanneilmaisin<br />push button painike<br />radio button valintanappi<br />Redo Uusinta<br />reflection heijastus, heijaste<br />Refresh Verestys<br />Refresh now Verestys nyt<br />Rename Nimeäminen<br />Reset Palautus<br />Restore Palautus<br />restore button palautuspainike<br />Resume Jatko<br />Retry Uusinta<br />Save Tallennus<br />Save as Tallennus nimellä<br />screen kuvaruutu<br />scroll bar vierityspalkki<br />scroll box vieritysruutu<br />select valita, valinta<br />Select all Kaikkien valinta<br />Selected Valitut<br />selection button valintapainike<br />selection cursor valintakohdistin<br />Settings Asetukset<br />shortcut key pikanäppäin<br />Short menus Lyhyet valikot<br />Size Koon muutto<br />slider liukusäädin<br />slider arm liukuruutu<br />slider button liukupainike<br />Sort Lajittelu<br />spin button selauspainike<br />Split Jaettu ikkuna<br />split box jakoruutu<br />status area tilakenttä<br />Stop Lopetus<br />system menu ohjausvalikko<br />system-menu symbol ohjausvalikon symboli<br />tabbed-divider page välilehti<br />text cursor tekstikohdistin<br />title bar otsikkorivi<br />tool palette työkaluvalikoima<br />Tutorial Opetusohjelma<br />Undo Kumous<br />Using help Ohjeiden käyttö<br />View Näyttö, esitystapa<br />window ikkuna<br />Window list Ikkunaluettelo<br />Windows Ikkunat<br />window title ikkunan otsikko<br />work area työalue<br />workplace työpöytä<br /></pre> 14980 14981 14982 14983 14984 14985 14986 14987 14988 14989 <hr /> 14990 14991 14992 14993 14994 <h2>E.7 French and French 5657 14995 (Canadian)</h2> 5658 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>French</b> <b>Term</b><br />action action<br />active window fenêtre active<br />Apply Validation<br />border cadre<br />button bouton<br />Cancel Annulation<br />cascaded menu menu en cascade<br />cascading choice option en cascade<br />check box case à cocher<br />check mark marque<br />choice option<br />chord clic simultané<br />Clear Effacement<br />click clic<br />clipboard presse-papiers<br />Close Fermeture<br />container contenant<br />contextual help aide contextuelle<br />Continue Continuer<br />Copy Copie<br />Create Création<br />cursor curseur<br />Cut Couper<br />Delete Suppression<br />Delete folder Dossier suppression<br />Deselect all Désélecter tout<br />dialog dialogue<br />direct manipulation manipulation directe<br />directory répertoire<br />do-not pointer panneau d'interdiction<br />double-click cliquer deux fois<br />drag faire glisser<br />drag and drop amener<br />Edit Édition<br />emphasis mise en évidence<br />entry field zone d'entrée<br />field zone<br />field prompt indicatif de zone<br />File Fichier<br />Find Recherche<br />folder dossier<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>French</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menus complets<br />General help Aide générale<br />group heading en-tête de groupe<br />Help Aide<br />Help index Index d'aide<br />Hide Cacher<br />I-beam pointer pointeur en I<br />icon icône<br />inactive window fenêtre inactive<br />Include Inclusion<br />information area zone d'information<br />Keys help Aide sur les touches<br />list button bouton de listage<br />manipulation button bouton de manipulation<br />Maximize Agrandissement<br />maximize button bouton d'agrandissement<br />menu menu<br />menu bar barre de menus<br />menu-bar choice option de barre de menus<br />menu button bouton de menu<br />menu choice option de menu<br />message message<br />Minimize Réduction<br />minimize button bouton de réduction<br />mouse souris<br />mouse button bouton de la souris<br />Move Déplacement<br />New Nouveau<br />notebook bloc-notes<br />object objet<br />Off Hors fonction<br />OK OK<br />On En fonction<br />Open Ouvrir<br />Open as Ouvrir et présenter<br />Options Options<br />palette palette<br />pane sous-fenêtre<br />Paste Coller<br />Pause Pause<br />pointer pointeur<br />pointing device périphérique de pointage<br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>French</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu incrustation<br />Print Impression<br />Product information Infos produit<br />progress indicator indicateur de déroulement<br />push button plaquette<br />radio button pastille<br />Redo Refaire<br />reflection double<br />Refresh Régénération<br />Refresh now Régénération immédiate<br />Rename Renommer<br />Reset Réinitialisation<br />Restore Restauration<br />restore button bouton de restauration<br />Resume Reprendre<br />Retry Reprise<br />Save Sauvegarde<br />Save as Sauvegarde en<br />screen écran<br />scroll bar barre de défilement<br />scroll box case de défilement<br />select sélection<br />Select all Sélecter tout<br />Selected Objets sélectés<br />selection button bouton de sélection<br />selection cursor curseur de sélection<br />Settings Paramètres<br />Short menus Menus courts<br />shortcut key raccourci-clavier<br />Size Dimensionnement<br />slider règle<br />slider arm index de la règle<br />slider button bouton de la règle<br />Sort Tri<br />spin button sélecteur rotatif<br />Split Partager<br />split box marque de partage<br />status area zone d'état<br />Stop Stop<br />system menu menu système<br />system-menu symbol symbole de menu système<br />tabbed-divider page intercalaire<br />text cursor curseur texte<br />title bar barre de titre<br />tool palette palette d'outils<br />Tutorial Tutoriel<br />Undo Défaire<br />Using help Utiliser l'aide<br />View Visualisation<br />window fenêtre<br />Windows Fenêtres<br />Window list Liste de fenêtres<br />window title titre de fenêtre<br />work area zone de travail<br />workplace bureau électronique<br /></pre> 5659 <hr /> 5660 <h2>E.8 German</h2> 5661 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The German translations may change in order to be kept up to date.<br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>German</b> <b>Term</b><br />action Aktion<br />active window aktives Fenster<br />Apply Anwenden<br />border Rahmen<br />button Taste, Knopf<br />Cancel Abbrechen<br />cascaded menu Untermenüfenster<br />cascading choice weiterführende Auswahl<br />check box Markierungsfeld<br />check mark Haken<br />choice Auswahl<br />chord gleichzeitiges Klicken<br />Clear Löschen<br />click klicken<br />clipboard Zwischenablage<br />Close Schließen<br />container Behälter<br />contextual help Kontexthilfe<br />Continue Weiter<br />Copy Kopieren<br />Create Erstellen<br />cursor Cursor<br />Cut Trennen<br />Delete Löschen<br />Delete Folder Ordner löschen<br />Deselect all Auswahl zurücknehmen<br />dialog Dialog<br />direct manipulation direkte Manipulation<br />directory Verzeichnis<br />do-not pointer Verbotssymbol<br />double-click doppelt klicken<br />drag ziehen<br />drag and drop ziehen und übergeben<br />Edit Editieren<br />emphasis Hervorhebung<br />entry field Eingabefeld<br />field Feld<br />field prompt Feldbezeichnung<br />File Datei<br />Find Suchen<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>German</b> <b>Term</b><br />folder Ordner<br />Full menus Gesamtmenüs<br />General help Allgemeine Hilfe<br />group heading Gruppenüberschrift<br />Help Hilfe<br />Help index Hilfeindex<br />Hide Verdecken<br />I-beam pointer Textcursor<br />icon Symbol<br />inactive window inaktives Fenster<br />Include Anzeigeoptionen<br />information area Informationsbereich<br />Keys help Hilfe für Tasten<br />list button Listenknopf<br />manipulation button Manipulationstaste<br />Maximize maximale Größe<br />maximize button Knopf für maximale Größe<br />menu Menü<br />menu bar Menüauswahl<br />menu-bar choice Menüleistenauswahl<br />menu button Menüknopf<br />menu choice Menüauswahl<br />message Nachricht<br />Minimize Symbolgröße<br />minimize button Knopf für Symbolgröße<br />mouse Maus<br />mouse button Maustaste<br />Move Verschieben<br />New Neu<br />notebook Notizbuch<br />object Objekt<br />Off Aus<br />OK OK<br />On Ein<br />Open Öffnen<br />Open as Öffnen als<br />Options Optionen<br />palette Palette<br />pane Teilfenster<br />Paste Einfügen<br />pointer Zeiger<br />pointing device Zeigereinheit<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>German</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu Dialogmenü<br />Print Drucken<br />Product information Produktinformation<br />progress indicator Statusanzeigefeld<br />push button Druckknopf<br />radio button Radioknopf<br />Redo Widerruf zurücknehmen<br />reflection Gespiegeltes Symbol<br />Refresh Neuanzeige<br />Refresh now Neuanzeige sofort<br />Rename Umbenennen<br />Reset Zurücksetzen<br />Restore Wiederherstellen<br />restore button Knopf für Wiederherstellung<br />Resume Wiederaufnehmen<br />Retry Wiederholen<br />Save Sichern<br />Save as Sichern als<br />screen Bildschirm<br />scroll bar Schiebeleiste<br />scroll box Schiebefeld<br />select auswählen<br />Select all Alles auswählen<br />Selected Ausgewählt<br />selection button Auswahltaste<br />selection cursor Auswahlcursor<br />Settings Einstellungen<br />shortcut key Direktaufruf<br />Short menus Kurzmenüs<br />Size Größe ändern<br />slider Schiebeleiste<br />slider arm Schiebefeld<br />slider button Schiebepfeil<br />Sort Sortieren<br />spin button Drehknopf<br />Split Geteiltes Fenster<br />split box Trennmarke<br />status area Statusbereich<br />Stop Stoppen<br />system menu Systemmenü<br />system-menu symbol Systemmenüsymbol<br />tabbed-divider page Registerblatt<br />text cursor Textcursor<br />title bar Titelleiste<br />tool palette Funktionspalette<br />Tutorial Lerntext<br />Undo Widerrufen<br />Using help Hilfe für Hilfe<br />View Anzeige<br />window Fenster<br />Windows Fenster<br />Window list Fensterliste<br />window title Fenstertitel<br />work area Arbeitsbereich<br />workplace Arbeitsoberfläche<br /></pre> 5662 <hr /> 5663 <h2>E.9 Hebrew</h2> 5664 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Two terms have been added for the bidirectional CUA guidelines.<br /><br /><br /><b>direction</b> the order of a sequence of objects which can be LTR or RTL.<br /> For instance, the typing direction (order of the generated<br /> characters) may be RTL or LTR.<br /><br /><br /><b>orientation</b> attribute of an object which can be LTR or RTL as defined<br /> by the order of its subordinate elements. For instance, a<br /> field has RTL orientation if its characters are ordered<br /> from right to left.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5665 href="picture-321?mode=zoom"><img 5666 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P321.GIF" 5667 alt="PICTURE 321" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5668 href="picture-322?mode=zoom"><img 5669 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P322.GIF" 5670 alt="PICTURE 322" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5671 href="picture-323?mode=zoom"><img 5672 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P323.GIF" 5673 alt="PICTURE 323" /></a><br /></pre> 5674 <hr /> 5675 <h2>E.10 Italian</h2> 5676 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Italian</b> <b>Term</b><br />action azione<br />active window finestra attiva<br />Apply Applicare<br />border bordo<br />button tastino<br />Cancel Annullare<br />cascaded menu menu a cascata<br />cascading choice scelta a cascata<br />check box casella di spunta<br />check mark segno di spunta<br />choice scelta<br />chord accordo<br />Clear Pulire<br />click fare click<br />clipboard notes<br />Close Chiudere<br />container contenitore<br />contextual help aiuto specifico<br />Continue Continuare<br />Copy Copiare<br />Create Creare<br />cursor cursore<br />Cut Ritagliare<br />Delete Cancellare<br />Delete Folder Cancellare cartella<br />Deselect all Annullare selezioni<br />dialog dialogo<br />direct manipulation manipolazione diretta<br />directory indirizzario<br />do-not pointer puntatore di divieto<br />double-click fare doppio click<br />drag trascinare<br />drag and drop trascinare e rilasciare<br />Edit Editare<br />emphasis enfasi<br />entry field campo di immissione<br />field campo<br />field prompt richiesta per il campo<br />File File<br />Find Cercare<br />folder cartella<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Italian</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menu completi<br />General help Aiuto generale<br />group heading intestazione del gruppo<br />Help Aiuto<br />Help index Indice analitico dell´aiuto<br />Hide Nascondere<br />I-beam pointer puntatore a I<br />icon icona<br />inactive window finestra non attiva<br />Include Includere<br />information area area di informazione<br />Keys help Aiuto per tasti funzione<br />list button pulsante per lista<br />manipulation button tasto per manipolazione<br />Maximize Ingrandire al massimo<br />maximize button pulsante per ingrandimento al<br />massimo<br />menu menu<br />menu bar barra menu<br />menu-bar choice scelta della barra menu<br />menu button tasto di menu<br />menu choice scelta del menu<br />message messaggio<br />Minimize ridurre al minimo<br />minimize button pulsante per riduzione al minimo<br />mouse mouse<br />mouse button tastino del mouse<br />Move Spostare<br />New Nuovo<br />notebook taccuino<br />object oggetto<br />Off Spento<br />OK OK<br />On Acceso<br />Open Aprire<br />Open as Aprire come<br />Options Opzioni<br />palette tavolozza<br />pane riquadro di finestra<br />Paste Attaccare<br />Pause Pausa<br />pointer puntatore<br />pointing device dispositivo di puntamento<br />pop-up menu menu concatenato<br />Print Stampare<br />Product information Informazioni sul prodotto<br />progress indicator indicatore di avanzamento<br />push button pulsante<br />radio button pallino<br />Redo Rifare<br />reflection riflessione<br />Refresh Aggiornamento<br />Refresh now Aggiornare ora<br />Rename Rinominare<br />Reset Reimpostare<br />Restore Ripristinare<br />restore button pulsante di ripristino<br />Resume Riprendere<br />Retry Riprovare<br />Save Salvare<br />Save as Salvare con nome<br />screen schermo<br />scroll bar barra di scorrimento<br />scroll box indicatore di posizione<br />select selezionare<br />Select all Selezionare tutto<br />Selected Selezionato<br />selection button pulsante di selezione<br />selection cursor cursore di selezione<br />Settings Impostazioni<br />shortcut key tasto di accesso rapido<br />Short menus Menu sintetici<br />Size Dimensione<br />slider slitta<br />slider arm indicatore della slitta<br />slider button pulsante della slitta<br />Sort Ordinare<br />spin button pulsante per rotazione<br />Split Dividere<br />split box cassella di divisione<br />status area area di stato<br />Stop Arrestare<br />system menu menu di sistema<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Italian</b> <b>Term</b><br />system-menu symbol simbolo del menu di sistema<br />tabbed-divider page separatore pagine<br />text cursor cursore del testo<br />title bar barra del titolo<br />tool palette tavola degli strumenti<br />Tutorial Supporto didattico<br />Undo Regressione<br />Using help Utilizzo dell´aiuto<br />View Visualizzare<br />window finestra<br />Window list Elenco finestre<br />Windows Finestre<br />window title titolo di finestra<br />work area area di lavoro<br />workplace postazione di lavoro<br /></pre> 5677 <hr /> 5678 <h2>E.11 Japanese</h2> 5679 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a 5680 href="picture-324?mode=zoom"><img 5681 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P324.GIF" 5682 alt="PICTURE 324" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5683 href="picture-325?mode=zoom"><img 5684 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P325.GIF" 5685 alt="PICTURE 325" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5686 href="picture-326?mode=zoom"><img 5687 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P326.GIF" 5688 alt="PICTURE 326" /></a><br /></pre> 5689 <hr /> 5690 <h2>E.12 Korean</h2> 5691 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a 5692 href="picture-327?mode=zoom"><img 5693 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P327.GIF" 5694 alt="PICTURE 327" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5695 href="picture-328?mode=zoom"><img 5696 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P328.GIF" 5697 alt="PICTURE 328" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a 5698 href="picture-329?mode=zoom"><img 5699 src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P329.GIF" 5700 alt="PICTURE 329" /></a><br /></pre> 5701 <hr /> 5702 <h2>E.13 Norwegian</h2> 5703 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Norwegian</b> <b>Term</b><br />action handling<br />active window aktivt vindu<br />Apply Prøve<br />border ramme<br />button knapp<br />Cancel Avbryt<br />cascaded menu undermeny<br />cascading choice valg med undermeny<br />check box valgrute<br />check mark hake<br />choice valg<br />chord klikke samtidig<br />Clear Fjerne<br />click klikke<br />clipboard utklippstavle<br />Close Lukke<br />container container<br />contextual help spesifikk hjelp<br />Continue Fortsett<br />Copy Kopiere<br />Create Opprette<br />cursor markør<br />Cut Klippe ut<br />Delete Slette<br />Delete folder Sletting<br />Deselect all Oppheve valg av alle<br />dialog dialog<br />direct manipulation direkte manipulering<br />directory katalog<br />do-not pointer forbudsskilt<br />double-click dobbeltklikke<br />drag dra<br />drag and drop dra og slippe<br />Edit Redigere<br />emphasis utheving<br />entry field inndatafelt<br />field felt<br />field prompt ledetekst<br />File Fil<br />Find Søke<br />folder mappe<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Norwegian</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Fullstendige menyer<br />General help Generell hjelp<br />group heading gruppeoverskrift<br />Help Hjelp<br />Help index Stikkord<br />Hide Skjule<br />I-beam pointer skrivepeker<br />icon ikon<br />inactive window passivt vindu<br />Include Ta med<br />information area informasjonsområde<br />Keys help Tasthjelp<br />list button listeknapp<br />manipulation button manipuleringsknapp<br />Maximize Maksimere<br />maximize button maksimeringsknapp<br />menu meny<br />menu bar handlingslinje<br />menu-bar choice valg på handlingslinjen<br />menu button menyknapp<br />menu choice menyvalg<br />message melding<br />Minimize Minimere<br />minimize button minimeringsknapp<br />mouse mus<br />mouse button museknapp<br />Move Flytte<br />New Ny / Nytt<br />notebook notisbok<br />object objekt<br />Off Av<br />OK Enter<br />On På<br />Open Åpne<br />Open as Åpne som<br />Options Alternativer<br />palette palett<br />pane vindussegment<br />Paste Lime inn<br />Pause Pause<br />pointer peker<br />pointing device pekeenhet<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Norwegian</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu tilleggsmeny<br />Print Skrive ut<br />Product information Om programmet...<br />progress indicator statusindikator<br />push button skjermtast<br />radio button valgknapp<br />Redo Gjøre om<br />reflection speilbilde<br />Refresh Fornye<br />Refresh now Fornye nå<br />Rename Endre navn<br />Reset Tilbakestill<br />Restore Gjenopprette<br />restore button gjenopprettingsknapp<br />Resume Gjenoppta<br />Retry Prøv igjen<br />Save Lagre<br />Save as Lagre som<br />screen skjerm<br />scroll bar blafelt<br />scroll box posisjonsviser<br />select velge<br />Select all Velge alle<br />Selected Valgte<br />selection button valgknapp<br />selection cursor valgmarkør<br />Settings Innstillinger<br />shortcut key direktetast<br />Short menus Korte menyer<br />Size Endre størrelse<br />slider skala<br />slider arm skalaindikator<br />slider button skalaknapp<br />Sort Sortere<br />spin button blaknapp<br />Split Dele<br />split box delemerke<br />status area statusområde<br />Stop Stopp<br />system menu systemmeny<br />system-menu symbol systemmeny-symbol<br />tabbed-divider page skilleark<br />text cursor tekstmarkør<br />title bar tittellinje<br />tool palette verktøypalett<br />Tutorial Opplæring<br />Undo Oppheve<br />Using help Bruke hjelp<br />View Se på<br />window vindu<br />Window list Vindusoversikt<br />Windows Vinduer<br />window title vindustittel<br />work area arbeidsområde<br />workplace arbeidsvindu<br /></pre> 5704 <hr /> 5705 <h2>E.14 Portuguese</h2> 5706 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />action acção<br />active window janela ativa<br />Apply Aplicar<br />border contorno<br />button botão; selector<br />Cancel Cancelar<br />cascaded menu submenu<br />cascading choice opção com submenu<br />check box selector de confirmação<br />check mark marca de confirmação<br />choice opção<br />chord premir simultaneamente<br />Clear Limpar<br />click fazer clique<br />clipboard área de transição<br />Close Fechar<br />container contentor<br />contextual help ajuda contextual<br />Continue Continuar<br />Copy Copiar<br />Create Criar<br />cursor cursor<br />Cut Cortar<br />Delete Eliminar<br />Delete Folder Eliminar Arquivador<br />Deselect all Desmarcar tudo<br />dialog diálogo<br />direct manipulation manipulação directa<br />directory directório<br />do-not pointer indicador de proibição<br />double-click fazer duplo clique<br />drag arrastar<br />drag and drop arrastar e largar<br />Edit Editar<br />emphasis realce<br />entry field campo de entrada<br />field campo<br />field prompt identificação do campo<br />File Ficheiro<br />Find Encontrar<br />folder arquivador<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menus completos<br />General help Ajuda geral<br />group heading título do grupo<br />Help Ajuda<br />Help index Índice da Ajuda<br />Hide Ocultar<br />I-beam pointer indicador em I<br />icon ícone<br />inactive window janela inativa<br />Include Incluir<br />information area área de informações<br />Keys help Ajuda para teclas<br />list button botão de lista<br />manipulation button botão de manipulação<br />Maximize Maximizar<br />maximize button botão de maximização<br />menu menu<br />menu bar barra de acções<br />menu-bar choice opção da barra de acções<br />menu button botão de menu<br />menu choice opção de menu<br />message mensagem<br />Minimize Minimizar<br />minimize button botão de minimização<br />mouse button botão do rato<br />mouse rato<br />Move Mover<br />New Novo<br />notebook bloco de notas<br />object objecto<br />Off Inactivo<br />OK OK<br />On Activo<br />Open Abrir<br />Open as Abrir como<br />Options Opções<br />palette paleta<br />pane área da janela<br />Paste Colar<br />Pause Pausa<br />pointer indicador<br />pointing device dispositivo indicador<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu menu emergente<br />Print Imprimir<br />Product information Informação sobre o produto<br />progress indicator indicador de progressão<br />push button selector de acção<br />radio button selector de opção<br />Redo Refazer<br />reflection duplicação<br />Refresh Actualizar<br />Refresh now Atualizar agora<br />Rename Mudar o nome<br />Reset Repor<br />Restore Restaurar<br />restore button botão de restauro<br />Resume Retomar<br />Retry Repetir<br />Save Guardar<br />Save as Guardar como<br />screen écran<br />scroll bar barra de deslocamento<br />scroll box selector de deslocamento<br />select seleccionar<br />Select all Seleccionar tudo<br />Selected Seleccionados<br />selection button botão de selecção<br />selection cursor cursor de selecção<br />Settings Definições<br />shortcut key tecla de acção directa<br />Short menus Menus resumidos<br />Size Dimensionar<br />slider escala<br />slider arm selector de escala<br />slider button botão de escala<br />Sort Ordenar<br />spin button selector rotativo<br />Split Dividir<br />split box selector de divisão<br />status area área de estado<br />Stop Parar<br />system menu menu do sistema<br />system-menu symbol símbolo do menu do sistema<br />tabbed-divider page página do bloco<br />text cursor cursor de texto<br />title bar barra do título<br />tool palette paleta de funções<br />Tutorial Inciação<br />Undo Desfazer<br />Using help Utilizar a Ajuda<br />View Ver<br />window janela<br />Window list Lista<br />Windows Janelas<br />window title título da janela<br />work area área de trabalho<br />workplace interface de trabalho<br /></pre> 5707 <hr /> 5708 <h2>E.15 Spanish</h2> 5709 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Spanish</b> <b>Term</b><br />action acción<br />active window ventana activa<br />Apply Aplicar<br />border marco<br />button botón<br />Cancel Cancelar<br />cascaded menu menú en cascada<br />cascading choice elección de cascada<br />check box recuadro de selección<br />check mark marca de selección<br />choice elección<br />chord acorde<br />Clear Limpiar<br />click pulsar el botón<br />clipboard área común<br />Close Cerrar<br />container contenedor<br />contextual help ayuda según contexto<br />Continue Continuar<br />Copy Copiar<br />Create Crear<br />cursor cursor<br />Cut Cortar<br />Delete Suprimir<br />Delete Folder Suprimir Carpeta<br />Deselect all Anular selecciones<br />dialog diálogo<br />direct manipulation manipulación directa<br />directory directorio<br />do-not pointer puntero de prohibición<br />double-click doble pulsación<br />drag arrastrar<br />drag and drop arrastrar y soltar<br />Edit Editar<br />emphasis énfasis<br />entry field campo de entrada<br />field campo<br />field prompt indicador de campo<br />File Archivo<br />Find Encontrar<br />folder carpeta<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Spanish</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menús completos<br />General help Ayuda general<br />group heading cabecera de grupo<br />Help Ayuda<br />Help index Indice de la ayuda<br />Hide Ocultar<br />I-beam pointer indicador en I<br />icon icono<br />inactive window ventana inactiva<br />Include Incluir<br />information area área de información<br />Keys help Ayuda para teclas<br />list button botón de lista<br />manipulation button botón de manipulación<br />Maximize Maximizar<br />maximize button botón de maximizar<br />menu menú<br />menu bar barra de menús<br />menu-bar choice elección de barra de menús<br />menu button botón de menú<br />menu choice elección de menú<br />message mensaje<br />Minimize Minimizar<br />minimize button botón de minimizar<br />mouse ratón<br />mouse button botón de ratón<br />Move Mover<br />New Nuevo<br />notebook cuaderno<br />object objeto<br />Off Desactivar<br />OK Bien<br />On Activar<br />Open Abrir<br />Open as Abrir como<br />Options Opciones<br />palette paleta<br />pane panel<br />Paste Pegar<br />Pause Pausa<br />pointer puntero<br />pointing device dispositivo de puntero<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Spanish</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu menú emergente<br />Print Imprimir<br />Product information Información sobre el producto<br />progress indicator indicador de progreso<br />push button pulsador<br />radio button botón de selección<br />Redo Rehacer<br />Reflection Reflejo<br />Refresh Renovar<br />Refresh now Renovar ahora<br />Rename Renombrar<br />Reset Restablecer<br />Restore Restaurar<br />restore button botón de restaurar<br />Resume Reanudar<br />Retry Reintentar<br />Save Guardar<br />Save as Guardar como<br />screen pantalla<br />scroll bar área de desplazamiento<br />scroll box recuadro de desplazamiento<br />select seleccionar<br />Select all Seleccionar todo<br />Selected Seleccionado<br />selection button botón de selección<br />selection cursor cursor de selección<br />Settings Valores<br />shortcut key tecla de atajo<br />Short menus Menús abreviados<br />Size Tama¦o<br />slider graduador<br />slider arm nivel del graduador<br />slider button botón del graduador<br />Sort Ordenar<br />spin button selector cíclico<br />Split Partir<br />split box recuadro de partición<br />status area área de estado<br />Stop Parar<br />system menu menú del sistema<br />system-menu symbol símbolo del menú del sistema<br />tabbed-divider page página separadora<br />text cursor cursor de texto<br />title bar área de título<br />tool palette paleta de utensilios<br />Tutorial Guía de Aprendizaje<br />Undo Deshacer<br />Using help Utilizar ayuda<br />View Ver<br />window ventana<br />Windows Ventanas<br />Window list Lista de ventanas<br />window title Título de la ventana<br />work area ärea de trabajo<br />workplace lugar de trabajo<br /></pre> 5710 <hr /> 5711 <h2>E.16 Swedish</h2> 5712 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Swedish</b> <b>Term</b><br />action åtgärd<br />active window aktivt fönster<br />Apply Prova<br />border ram<br />button knapp<br />Cancel Avbryt<br />cascaded menu undermeny<br />cascading choice alternativ med undermeny<br />check box kryssruta<br />check mark bock<br />choice alternativ<br />chord kombinationsklicka<br />Clear Ta bort<br />click klicka<br />clipboard urklipp<br />Close Stäng<br />container behållare<br />contextual help relaterad hjälp<br />Continue Fortsätt<br />Copy Kopiera<br />Create Skapa<br />cursor markör<br />Cut Klipp ut<br />Delete Ta bort<br />Delete folder Borttagsmapp<br />Deselect all Avmarkera alla<br />dialog dialog<br />direct manipulation direkthantering<br />directory katalog<br />do-not pointer stopptecken<br />double-click dubbelklicka<br />drag dra<br />drag and drop dra och släpp<br />Edit Redigera<br />emphasis framhävning<br />entry field indatafält<br />field fält<br />field prompt ledtext<br />File Arkiv<br />Find Sök<br />folder mapp<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Swedish</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Långa menyer<br />General help Allmän hjälp<br />group heading grupprubrik<br />Help Hjälp<br />Help index Hjälpindex<br />Hide Göm<br />I-beam pointer textmarkör<br />icon ikon<br />inactive window inaktivt fönster<br />Include Inkludera<br />information area informationsfält<br />Keys help Tangentfunktioner<br />list button listknapp<br />manipulation button direkthanteringsknapp<br />Maximize Maximera<br />maximize button maximeringsknapp<br />menu meny<br />menu bar menyrad<br />menu-bar choice alternativ på menyraden<br />menu button menyknapp<br />menu choice menyalternativ<br />message meddelande<br />Minimize Minimera<br />minimize button minimeringsknapp<br />mouse mus<br />mouse button musknapp<br />Move Flytta<br />New Ny, Nytt<br />notebook anteckningar<br />object objekt<br />Off Av<br />OK OK<br />On På<br />Open Öppna<br />Open as Öppna som<br />Options Inställningar<br />palette palett<br />pane ruta<br />Paste Klistra in<br />Pause Paus<br />pointer pekare<br />pointing device pekdon<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Swedish</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu tilläggsmeny<br />Print Skriv ut<br />Product information Produktinformation<br />progress indicator statusindikator<br />push button (kommando)knapp<br />radio button radioknapp<br />Redo Upphäv ångra<br />reflection reflex<br />Refresh Förnya<br />Refresh now Förnya nu<br />Rename Döp om<br />Reset Återställ<br />Restore Återställ<br />restore button återställningsknapp<br />Resume Fortsätt<br />Retry Försök igen<br />Save Lagra<br />Save as Lagra som<br />screen skärm<br />scroll bar bläddringsstapel<br />scroll box bläddringsruta<br />select markera<br />Select all Markera alla<br />Selected Markerade objekt<br />selection button (val)knapp<br />selection cursor (val)markör<br />Settings Inställningar<br />shortcut key kortkommando<br />Short menus Korta menyer<br />Size Ändra storlek<br />slider skjutreglage<br />slider arm skjutreglage<br />slider button (inställnings)knapp<br />Sort Sortera<br />spin button (bläddrings)knapp<br />Split Dela<br />split box delningsruta<br />status area statusfält<br />Stop Stopp<br />system menu systemmeny<br />system-menu symbol systemmenysymbol<br />tabbed-divider page registerblad<br />text cursor textmarkör<br />title bar rubrikrad<br />tool palette verktygspalett<br />Tutorial Självstudiekurs<br />Undo Ångra<br />Using help Om hjälpfunktionen<br />View Vy, Visa<br />window fönster<br />Window list Lista<br />Windows Fönster<br />window title fönsterrubrik<br />work area arbetsfält<br />workplace arbetsplats<br /></pre> 5713 <hr /> 5714 <h1><a name="HDRTERM" id="HDRTERM">F.0 Appendix F. 14996 14997 14998 14999 15000 15001 15002 15003 15004 15005 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>French</b> <b>Term</b><br />action action<br />active window fenêtre active<br />Apply Validation<br />border cadre<br />button bouton<br />Cancel Annulation<br />cascaded menu menu en cascade<br />cascading choice option en cascade<br />check box case à cocher<br />check mark marque<br />choice option<br />chord clic simultané<br />Clear Effacement<br />click clic<br />clipboard presse-papiers<br />Close Fermeture<br />container contenant<br />contextual help aide contextuelle<br />Continue Continuer<br />Copy Copie<br />Create Création<br />cursor curseur<br />Cut Couper<br />Delete Suppression<br />Delete folder Dossier suppression<br />Deselect all Désélecter tout<br />dialog dialogue<br />direct manipulation manipulation directe<br />directory répertoire<br />do-not pointer panneau d'interdiction<br />double-click cliquer deux fois<br />drag faire glisser<br />drag and drop amener<br />Edit Édition<br />emphasis mise en évidence<br />entry field zone d'entrée<br />field zone<br />field prompt indicatif de zone<br />File Fichier<br />Find Recherche<br />folder dossier<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>French</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menus complets<br />General help Aide générale<br />group heading en-tête de groupe<br />Help Aide<br />Help index Index d'aide<br />Hide Cacher<br />I-beam pointer pointeur en I<br />icon icône<br />inactive window fenêtre inactive<br />Include Inclusion<br />information area zone d'information<br />Keys help Aide sur les touches<br />list button bouton de listage<br />manipulation button bouton de manipulation<br />Maximize Agrandissement<br />maximize button bouton d'agrandissement<br />menu menu<br />menu bar barre de menus<br />menu-bar choice option de barre de menus<br />menu button bouton de menu<br />menu choice option de menu<br />message message<br />Minimize Réduction<br />minimize button bouton de réduction<br />mouse souris<br />mouse button bouton de la souris<br />Move Déplacement<br />New Nouveau<br />notebook bloc-notes<br />object objet<br />Off Hors fonction<br />OK OK<br />On En fonction<br />Open Ouvrir<br />Open as Ouvrir et présenter<br />Options Options<br />palette palette<br />pane sous-fenêtre<br />Paste Coller<br />Pause Pause<br />pointer pointeur<br />pointing device périphérique de pointage<br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>French</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu incrustation<br />Print Impression<br />Product information Infos produit<br />progress indicator indicateur de déroulement<br />push button plaquette<br />radio button pastille<br />Redo Refaire<br />reflection double<br />Refresh Régénération<br />Refresh now Régénération immédiate<br />Rename Renommer<br />Reset Réinitialisation<br />Restore Restauration<br />restore button bouton de restauration<br />Resume Reprendre<br />Retry Reprise<br />Save Sauvegarde<br />Save as Sauvegarde en<br />screen écran<br />scroll bar barre de défilement<br />scroll box case de défilement<br />select sélection<br />Select all Sélecter tout<br />Selected Objets sélectés<br />selection button bouton de sélection<br />selection cursor curseur de sélection<br />Settings Paramètres<br />Short menus Menus courts<br />shortcut key raccourci-clavier<br />Size Dimensionnement<br />slider règle<br />slider arm index de la règle<br />slider button bouton de la règle<br />Sort Tri<br />spin button sélecteur rotatif<br />Split Partager<br />split box marque de partage<br />status area zone d'état<br />Stop Stop<br />system menu menu système<br />system-menu symbol symbole de menu système<br />tabbed-divider page intercalaire<br />text cursor curseur texte<br />title bar barre de titre<br />tool palette palette d'outils<br />Tutorial Tutoriel<br />Undo Défaire<br />Using help Utiliser l'aide<br />View Visualisation<br />window fenêtre<br />Windows Fenêtres<br />Window list Liste de fenêtres<br />window title titre de fenêtre<br />work area zone de travail<br />workplace bureau électronique<br /></pre> 15006 15007 15008 15009 15010 15011 15012 15013 15014 15015 <hr /> 15016 15017 15018 15019 15020 <h2>E.8 German</h2> 15021 15022 15023 15024 15025 15026 15027 15028 15029 15030 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The German translations may change in order to be kept up to date.<br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>German</b> <b>Term</b><br />action Aktion<br />active window aktives Fenster<br />Apply Anwenden<br />border Rahmen<br />button Taste, Knopf<br />Cancel Abbrechen<br />cascaded menu Untermenüfenster<br />cascading choice weiterführende Auswahl<br />check box Markierungsfeld<br />check mark Haken<br />choice Auswahl<br />chord gleichzeitiges Klicken<br />Clear Löschen<br />click klicken<br />clipboard Zwischenablage<br />Close Schließen<br />container Behälter<br />contextual help Kontexthilfe<br />Continue Weiter<br />Copy Kopieren<br />Create Erstellen<br />cursor Cursor<br />Cut Trennen<br />Delete Löschen<br />Delete Folder Ordner löschen<br />Deselect all Auswahl zurücknehmen<br />dialog Dialog<br />direct manipulation direkte Manipulation<br />directory Verzeichnis<br />do-not pointer Verbotssymbol<br />double-click doppelt klicken<br />drag ziehen<br />drag and drop ziehen und übergeben<br />Edit Editieren<br />emphasis Hervorhebung<br />entry field Eingabefeld<br />field Feld<br />field prompt Feldbezeichnung<br />File Datei<br />Find Suchen<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>German</b> <b>Term</b><br />folder Ordner<br />Full menus Gesamtmenüs<br />General help Allgemeine Hilfe<br />group heading Gruppenüberschrift<br />Help Hilfe<br />Help index Hilfeindex<br />Hide Verdecken<br />I-beam pointer Textcursor<br />icon Symbol<br />inactive window inaktives Fenster<br />Include Anzeigeoptionen<br />information area Informationsbereich<br />Keys help Hilfe für Tasten<br />list button Listenknopf<br />manipulation button Manipulationstaste<br />Maximize maximale Größe<br />maximize button Knopf für maximale Größe<br />menu Menü<br />menu bar Menüauswahl<br />menu-bar choice Menüleistenauswahl<br />menu button Menüknopf<br />menu choice Menüauswahl<br />message Nachricht<br />Minimize Symbolgröße<br />minimize button Knopf für Symbolgröße<br />mouse Maus<br />mouse button Maustaste<br />Move Verschieben<br />New Neu<br />notebook Notizbuch<br />object Objekt<br />Off Aus<br />OK OK<br />On Ein<br />Open Öffnen<br />Open as Öffnen als<br />Options Optionen<br />palette Palette<br />pane Teilfenster<br />Paste Einfügen<br />pointer Zeiger<br />pointing device Zeigereinheit<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>German</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu Dialogmenü<br />Print Drucken<br />Product information Produktinformation<br />progress indicator Statusanzeigefeld<br />push button Druckknopf<br />radio button Radioknopf<br />Redo Widerruf zurücknehmen<br />reflection Gespiegeltes Symbol<br />Refresh Neuanzeige<br />Refresh now Neuanzeige sofort<br />Rename Umbenennen<br />Reset Zurücksetzen<br />Restore Wiederherstellen<br />restore button Knopf für Wiederherstellung<br />Resume Wiederaufnehmen<br />Retry Wiederholen<br />Save Sichern<br />Save as Sichern als<br />screen Bildschirm<br />scroll bar Schiebeleiste<br />scroll box Schiebefeld<br />select auswählen<br />Select all Alles auswählen<br />Selected Ausgewählt<br />selection button Auswahltaste<br />selection cursor Auswahlcursor<br />Settings Einstellungen<br />shortcut key Direktaufruf<br />Short menus Kurzmenüs<br />Size Größe ändern<br />slider Schiebeleiste<br />slider arm Schiebefeld<br />slider button Schiebepfeil<br />Sort Sortieren<br />spin button Drehknopf<br />Split Geteiltes Fenster<br />split box Trennmarke<br />status area Statusbereich<br />Stop Stoppen<br />system menu Systemmenü<br />system-menu symbol Systemmenüsymbol<br />tabbed-divider page Registerblatt<br />text cursor Textcursor<br />title bar Titelleiste<br />tool palette Funktionspalette<br />Tutorial Lerntext<br />Undo Widerrufen<br />Using help Hilfe für Hilfe<br />View Anzeige<br />window Fenster<br />Windows Fenster<br />Window list Fensterliste<br />window title Fenstertitel<br />work area Arbeitsbereich<br />workplace Arbeitsoberfläche<br /></pre> 15031 15032 15033 15034 15035 15036 15037 15038 15039 15040 <hr /> 15041 15042 15043 15044 15045 <h2>E.9 Hebrew</h2> 15046 15047 15048 15049 15050 15051 15052 15053 15054 15055 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Two terms have been added for the bidirectional CUA guidelines.<br /><br /><br /><b>direction</b> the order of a sequence of objects which can be LTR or RTL.<br /> For instance, the typing direction (order of the generated<br /> characters) may be RTL or LTR.<br /><br /><br /><b>orientation</b> attribute of an object which can be LTR or RTL as defined<br /> by the order of its subordinate elements. For instance, a<br /> field has RTL orientation if its characters are ordered<br /> from right to left.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-321?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 321" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P321.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-322?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 322" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P322.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-323?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 323" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P323.GIF" /></a><br /></pre> 15056 15057 15058 15059 15060 15061 15062 15063 15064 15065 <hr /> 15066 15067 15068 15069 15070 <h2>E.10 Italian</h2> 15071 15072 15073 15074 15075 15076 15077 15078 15079 15080 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Italian</b> <b>Term</b><br />action azione<br />active window finestra attiva<br />Apply Applicare<br />border bordo<br />button tastino<br />Cancel Annullare<br />cascaded menu menu a cascata<br />cascading choice scelta a cascata<br />check box casella di spunta<br />check mark segno di spunta<br />choice scelta<br />chord accordo<br />Clear Pulire<br />click fare click<br />clipboard notes<br />Close Chiudere<br />container contenitore<br />contextual help aiuto specifico<br />Continue Continuare<br />Copy Copiare<br />Create Creare<br />cursor cursore<br />Cut Ritagliare<br />Delete Cancellare<br />Delete Folder Cancellare cartella<br />Deselect all Annullare selezioni<br />dialog dialogo<br />direct manipulation manipolazione diretta<br />directory indirizzario<br />do-not pointer puntatore di divieto<br />double-click fare doppio click<br />drag trascinare<br />drag and drop trascinare e rilasciare<br />Edit Editare<br />emphasis enfasi<br />entry field campo di immissione<br />field campo<br />field prompt richiesta per il campo<br />File File<br />Find Cercare<br />folder cartella<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Italian</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menu completi<br />General help Aiuto generale<br />group heading intestazione del gruppo<br />Help Aiuto<br />Help index Indice analitico dell´aiuto<br />Hide Nascondere<br />I-beam pointer puntatore a I<br />icon icona<br />inactive window finestra non attiva<br />Include Includere<br />information area area di informazione<br />Keys help Aiuto per tasti funzione<br />list button pulsante per lista<br />manipulation button tasto per manipolazione<br />Maximize Ingrandire al massimo<br />maximize button pulsante per ingrandimento al<br />massimo<br />menu menu<br />menu bar barra menu<br />menu-bar choice scelta della barra menu<br />menu button tasto di menu<br />menu choice scelta del menu<br />message messaggio<br />Minimize ridurre al minimo<br />minimize button pulsante per riduzione al minimo<br />mouse mouse<br />mouse button tastino del mouse<br />Move Spostare<br />New Nuovo<br />notebook taccuino<br />object oggetto<br />Off Spento<br />OK OK<br />On Acceso<br />Open Aprire<br />Open as Aprire come<br />Options Opzioni<br />palette tavolozza<br />pane riquadro di finestra<br />Paste Attaccare<br />Pause Pausa<br />pointer puntatore<br />pointing device dispositivo di puntamento<br />pop-up menu menu concatenato<br />Print Stampare<br />Product information Informazioni sul prodotto<br />progress indicator indicatore di avanzamento<br />push button pulsante<br />radio button pallino<br />Redo Rifare<br />reflection riflessione<br />Refresh Aggiornamento<br />Refresh now Aggiornare ora<br />Rename Rinominare<br />Reset Reimpostare<br />Restore Ripristinare<br />restore button pulsante di ripristino<br />Resume Riprendere<br />Retry Riprovare<br />Save Salvare<br />Save as Salvare con nome<br />screen schermo<br />scroll bar barra di scorrimento<br />scroll box indicatore di posizione<br />select selezionare<br />Select all Selezionare tutto<br />Selected Selezionato<br />selection button pulsante di selezione<br />selection cursor cursore di selezione<br />Settings Impostazioni<br />shortcut key tasto di accesso rapido<br />Short menus Menu sintetici<br />Size Dimensione<br />slider slitta<br />slider arm indicatore della slitta<br />slider button pulsante della slitta<br />Sort Ordinare<br />spin button pulsante per rotazione<br />Split Dividere<br />split box cassella di divisione<br />status area area di stato<br />Stop Arrestare<br />system menu menu di sistema<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Italian</b> <b>Term</b><br />system-menu symbol simbolo del menu di sistema<br />tabbed-divider page separatore pagine<br />text cursor cursore del testo<br />title bar barra del titolo<br />tool palette tavola degli strumenti<br />Tutorial Supporto didattico<br />Undo Regressione<br />Using help Utilizzo dell´aiuto<br />View Visualizzare<br />window finestra<br />Window list Elenco finestre<br />Windows Finestre<br />window title titolo di finestra<br />work area area di lavoro<br />workplace postazione di lavoro<br /></pre> 15081 15082 15083 15084 15085 15086 15087 15088 15089 15090 <hr /> 15091 15092 15093 15094 15095 <h2>E.11 Japanese</h2> 15096 15097 15098 15099 15100 15101 15102 15103 15104 15105 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-324?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 324" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P324.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-325?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 325" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P325.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-326?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 326" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P326.GIF" /></a><br /></pre> 15106 15107 15108 15109 15110 15111 15112 15113 15114 15115 <hr /> 15116 15117 15118 15119 15120 <h2>E.12 Korean</h2> 15121 15122 15123 15124 15125 15126 15127 15128 15129 15130 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-327?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 327" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P327.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-328?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 328" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P328.GIF" /></a><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><a href="picture-329?mode=zoom"><img alt="PICTURE 329" src="/bookmgr/pictures/f29al000.19921204095534.P329.GIF" /></a><br /></pre> 15131 15132 15133 15134 15135 15136 15137 15138 15139 15140 <hr /> 15141 15142 15143 15144 15145 <h2>E.13 Norwegian</h2> 15146 15147 15148 15149 15150 15151 15152 15153 15154 15155 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Norwegian</b> <b>Term</b><br />action handling<br />active window aktivt vindu<br />Apply Prøve<br />border ramme<br />button knapp<br />Cancel Avbryt<br />cascaded menu undermeny<br />cascading choice valg med undermeny<br />check box valgrute<br />check mark hake<br />choice valg<br />chord klikke samtidig<br />Clear Fjerne<br />click klikke<br />clipboard utklippstavle<br />Close Lukke<br />container container<br />contextual help spesifikk hjelp<br />Continue Fortsett<br />Copy Kopiere<br />Create Opprette<br />cursor markør<br />Cut Klippe ut<br />Delete Slette<br />Delete folder Sletting<br />Deselect all Oppheve valg av alle<br />dialog dialog<br />direct manipulation direkte manipulering<br />directory katalog<br />do-not pointer forbudsskilt<br />double-click dobbeltklikke<br />drag dra<br />drag and drop dra og slippe<br />Edit Redigere<br />emphasis utheving<br />entry field inndatafelt<br />field felt<br />field prompt ledetekst<br />File Fil<br />Find Søke<br />folder mappe<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Norwegian</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Fullstendige menyer<br />General help Generell hjelp<br />group heading gruppeoverskrift<br />Help Hjelp<br />Help index Stikkord<br />Hide Skjule<br />I-beam pointer skrivepeker<br />icon ikon<br />inactive window passivt vindu<br />Include Ta med<br />information area informasjonsområde<br />Keys help Tasthjelp<br />list button listeknapp<br />manipulation button manipuleringsknapp<br />Maximize Maksimere<br />maximize button maksimeringsknapp<br />menu meny<br />menu bar handlingslinje<br />menu-bar choice valg på handlingslinjen<br />menu button menyknapp<br />menu choice menyvalg<br />message melding<br />Minimize Minimere<br />minimize button minimeringsknapp<br />mouse mus<br />mouse button museknapp<br />Move Flytte<br />New Ny / Nytt<br />notebook notisbok<br />object objekt<br />Off Av<br />OK Enter<br />On På<br />Open Åpne<br />Open as Åpne som<br />Options Alternativer<br />palette palett<br />pane vindussegment<br />Paste Lime inn<br />Pause Pause<br />pointer peker<br />pointing device pekeenhet<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Norwegian</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu tilleggsmeny<br />Print Skrive ut<br />Product information Om programmet...<br />progress indicator statusindikator<br />push button skjermtast<br />radio button valgknapp<br />Redo Gjøre om<br />reflection speilbilde<br />Refresh Fornye<br />Refresh now Fornye nå<br />Rename Endre navn<br />Reset Tilbakestill<br />Restore Gjenopprette<br />restore button gjenopprettingsknapp<br />Resume Gjenoppta<br />Retry Prøv igjen<br />Save Lagre<br />Save as Lagre som<br />screen skjerm<br />scroll bar blafelt<br />scroll box posisjonsviser<br />select velge<br />Select all Velge alle<br />Selected Valgte<br />selection button valgknapp<br />selection cursor valgmarkør<br />Settings Innstillinger<br />shortcut key direktetast<br />Short menus Korte menyer<br />Size Endre størrelse<br />slider skala<br />slider arm skalaindikator<br />slider button skalaknapp<br />Sort Sortere<br />spin button blaknapp<br />Split Dele<br />split box delemerke<br />status area statusområde<br />Stop Stopp<br />system menu systemmeny<br />system-menu symbol systemmeny-symbol<br />tabbed-divider page skilleark<br />text cursor tekstmarkør<br />title bar tittellinje<br />tool palette verktøypalett<br />Tutorial Opplæring<br />Undo Oppheve<br />Using help Bruke hjelp<br />View Se på<br />window vindu<br />Window list Vindusoversikt<br />Windows Vinduer<br />window title vindustittel<br />work area arbeidsområde<br />workplace arbeidsvindu<br /></pre> 15156 15157 15158 15159 15160 15161 15162 15163 15164 15165 <hr /> 15166 15167 15168 15169 15170 <h2>E.14 Portuguese</h2> 15171 15172 15173 15174 15175 15176 15177 15178 15179 15180 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />action acção<br />active window janela ativa<br />Apply Aplicar<br />border contorno<br />button botão; selector<br />Cancel Cancelar<br />cascaded menu submenu<br />cascading choice opção com submenu<br />check box selector de confirmação<br />check mark marca de confirmação<br />choice opção<br />chord premir simultaneamente<br />Clear Limpar<br />click fazer clique<br />clipboard área de transição<br />Close Fechar<br />container contentor<br />contextual help ajuda contextual<br />Continue Continuar<br />Copy Copiar<br />Create Criar<br />cursor cursor<br />Cut Cortar<br />Delete Eliminar<br />Delete Folder Eliminar Arquivador<br />Deselect all Desmarcar tudo<br />dialog diálogo<br />direct manipulation manipulação directa<br />directory directório<br />do-not pointer indicador de proibição<br />double-click fazer duplo clique<br />drag arrastar<br />drag and drop arrastar e largar<br />Edit Editar<br />emphasis realce<br />entry field campo de entrada<br />field campo<br />field prompt identificação do campo<br />File Ficheiro<br />Find Encontrar<br />folder arquivador<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menus completos<br />General help Ajuda geral<br />group heading título do grupo<br />Help Ajuda<br />Help index Índice da Ajuda<br />Hide Ocultar<br />I-beam pointer indicador em I<br />icon ícone<br />inactive window janela inativa<br />Include Incluir<br />information area área de informações<br />Keys help Ajuda para teclas<br />list button botão de lista<br />manipulation button botão de manipulação<br />Maximize Maximizar<br />maximize button botão de maximização<br />menu menu<br />menu bar barra de acções<br />menu-bar choice opção da barra de acções<br />menu button botão de menu<br />menu choice opção de menu<br />message mensagem<br />Minimize Minimizar<br />minimize button botão de minimização<br />mouse button botão do rato<br />mouse rato<br />Move Mover<br />New Novo<br />notebook bloco de notas<br />object objecto<br />Off Inactivo<br />OK OK<br />On Activo<br />Open Abrir<br />Open as Abrir como<br />Options Opções<br />palette paleta<br />pane área da janela<br />Paste Colar<br />Pause Pausa<br />pointer indicador<br />pointing device dispositivo indicador<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Portuguese</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu menu emergente<br />Print Imprimir<br />Product information Informação sobre o produto<br />progress indicator indicador de progressão<br />push button selector de acção<br />radio button selector de opção<br />Redo Refazer<br />reflection duplicação<br />Refresh Actualizar<br />Refresh now Atualizar agora<br />Rename Mudar o nome<br />Reset Repor<br />Restore Restaurar<br />restore button botão de restauro<br />Resume Retomar<br />Retry Repetir<br />Save Guardar<br />Save as Guardar como<br />screen écran<br />scroll bar barra de deslocamento<br />scroll box selector de deslocamento<br />select seleccionar<br />Select all Seleccionar tudo<br />Selected Seleccionados<br />selection button botão de selecção<br />selection cursor cursor de selecção<br />Settings Definições<br />shortcut key tecla de acção directa<br />Short menus Menus resumidos<br />Size Dimensionar<br />slider escala<br />slider arm selector de escala<br />slider button botão de escala<br />Sort Ordenar<br />spin button selector rotativo<br />Split Dividir<br />split box selector de divisão<br />status area área de estado<br />Stop Parar<br />system menu menu do sistema<br />system-menu symbol símbolo do menu do sistema<br />tabbed-divider page página do bloco<br />text cursor cursor de texto<br />title bar barra do título<br />tool palette paleta de funções<br />Tutorial Inciação<br />Undo Desfazer<br />Using help Utilizar a Ajuda<br />View Ver<br />window janela<br />Window list Lista<br />Windows Janelas<br />window title título da janela<br />work area área de trabalho<br />workplace interface de trabalho<br /></pre> 15181 15182 15183 15184 15185 15186 15187 15188 15189 15190 <hr /> 15191 15192 15193 15194 15195 <h2>E.15 Spanish</h2> 15196 15197 15198 15199 15200 15201 15202 15203 15204 15205 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Spanish</b> <b>Term</b><br />action acción<br />active window ventana activa<br />Apply Aplicar<br />border marco<br />button botón<br />Cancel Cancelar<br />cascaded menu menú en cascada<br />cascading choice elección de cascada<br />check box recuadro de selección<br />check mark marca de selección<br />choice elección<br />chord acorde<br />Clear Limpiar<br />click pulsar el botón<br />clipboard área común<br />Close Cerrar<br />container contenedor<br />contextual help ayuda según contexto<br />Continue Continuar<br />Copy Copiar<br />Create Crear<br />cursor cursor<br />Cut Cortar<br />Delete Suprimir<br />Delete Folder Suprimir Carpeta<br />Deselect all Anular selecciones<br />dialog diálogo<br />direct manipulation manipulación directa<br />directory directorio<br />do-not pointer puntero de prohibición<br />double-click doble pulsación<br />drag arrastrar<br />drag and drop arrastrar y soltar<br />Edit Editar<br />emphasis énfasis<br />entry field campo de entrada<br />field campo<br />field prompt indicador de campo<br />File Archivo<br />Find Encontrar<br />folder carpeta<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Spanish</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Menús completos<br />General help Ayuda general<br />group heading cabecera de grupo<br />Help Ayuda<br />Help index Indice de la ayuda<br />Hide Ocultar<br />I-beam pointer indicador en I<br />icon icono<br />inactive window ventana inactiva<br />Include Incluir<br />information area área de información<br />Keys help Ayuda para teclas<br />list button botón de lista<br />manipulation button botón de manipulación<br />Maximize Maximizar<br />maximize button botón de maximizar<br />menu menú<br />menu bar barra de menús<br />menu-bar choice elección de barra de menús<br />menu button botón de menú<br />menu choice elección de menú<br />message mensaje<br />Minimize Minimizar<br />minimize button botón de minimizar<br />mouse ratón<br />mouse button botón de ratón<br />Move Mover<br />New Nuevo<br />notebook cuaderno<br />object objeto<br />Off Desactivar<br />OK Bien<br />On Activar<br />Open Abrir<br />Open as Abrir como<br />Options Opciones<br />palette paleta<br />pane panel<br />Paste Pegar<br />Pause Pausa<br />pointer puntero<br />pointing device dispositivo de puntero<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Spanish</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu menú emergente<br />Print Imprimir<br />Product information Información sobre el producto<br />progress indicator indicador de progreso<br />push button pulsador<br />radio button botón de selección<br />Redo Rehacer<br />Reflection Reflejo<br />Refresh Renovar<br />Refresh now Renovar ahora<br />Rename Renombrar<br />Reset Restablecer<br />Restore Restaurar<br />restore button botón de restaurar<br />Resume Reanudar<br />Retry Reintentar<br />Save Guardar<br />Save as Guardar como<br />screen pantalla<br />scroll bar área de desplazamiento<br />scroll box recuadro de desplazamiento<br />select seleccionar<br />Select all Seleccionar todo<br />Selected Seleccionado<br />selection button botón de selección<br />selection cursor cursor de selección<br />Settings Valores<br />shortcut key tecla de atajo<br />Short menus Menús abreviados<br />Size Tama¦o<br />slider graduador<br />slider arm nivel del graduador<br />slider button botón del graduador<br />Sort Ordenar<br />spin button selector cíclico<br />Split Partir<br />split box recuadro de partición<br />status area área de estado<br />Stop Parar<br />system menu menú del sistema<br />system-menu symbol símbolo del menú del sistema<br />tabbed-divider page página separadora<br />text cursor cursor de texto<br />title bar área de título<br />tool palette paleta de utensilios<br />Tutorial Guía de Aprendizaje<br />Undo Deshacer<br />Using help Utilizar ayuda<br />View Ver<br />window ventana<br />Windows Ventanas<br />Window list Lista de ventanas<br />window title Título de la ventana<br />work area ärea de trabajo<br />workplace lugar de trabajo<br /></pre> 15206 15207 15208 15209 15210 15211 15212 15213 15214 15215 <hr /> 15216 15217 15218 15219 15220 <h2>E.16 Swedish</h2> 15221 15222 15223 15224 15225 15226 15227 15228 15229 15230 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Swedish</b> <b>Term</b><br />action åtgärd<br />active window aktivt fönster<br />Apply Prova<br />border ram<br />button knapp<br />Cancel Avbryt<br />cascaded menu undermeny<br />cascading choice alternativ med undermeny<br />check box kryssruta<br />check mark bock<br />choice alternativ<br />chord kombinationsklicka<br />Clear Ta bort<br />click klicka<br />clipboard urklipp<br />Close Stäng<br />container behållare<br />contextual help relaterad hjälp<br />Continue Fortsätt<br />Copy Kopiera<br />Create Skapa<br />cursor markör<br />Cut Klipp ut<br />Delete Ta bort<br />Delete folder Borttagsmapp<br />Deselect all Avmarkera alla<br />dialog dialog<br />direct manipulation direkthantering<br />directory katalog<br />do-not pointer stopptecken<br />double-click dubbelklicka<br />drag dra<br />drag and drop dra och släpp<br />Edit Redigera<br />emphasis framhävning<br />entry field indatafält<br />field fält<br />field prompt ledtext<br />File Arkiv<br />Find Sök<br />folder mapp<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Swedish</b> <b>Term</b><br />Full menus Långa menyer<br />General help Allmän hjälp<br />group heading grupprubrik<br />Help Hjälp<br />Help index Hjälpindex<br />Hide Göm<br />I-beam pointer textmarkör<br />icon ikon<br />inactive window inaktivt fönster<br />Include Inkludera<br />information area informationsfält<br />Keys help Tangentfunktioner<br />list button listknapp<br />manipulation button direkthanteringsknapp<br />Maximize Maximera<br />maximize button maximeringsknapp<br />menu meny<br />menu bar menyrad<br />menu-bar choice alternativ på menyraden<br />menu button menyknapp<br />menu choice menyalternativ<br />message meddelande<br />Minimize Minimera<br />minimize button minimeringsknapp<br />mouse mus<br />mouse button musknapp<br />Move Flytta<br />New Ny, Nytt<br />notebook anteckningar<br />object objekt<br />Off Av<br />OK OK<br />On På<br />Open Öppna<br />Open as Öppna som<br />Options Inställningar<br />palette palett<br />pane ruta<br />Paste Klistra in<br />Pause Paus<br />pointer pekare<br />pointing device pekdon<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><b>English</b> <b>Term</b> <b>Swedish</b> <b>Term</b><br />pop-up menu tilläggsmeny<br />Print Skriv ut<br />Product information Produktinformation<br />progress indicator statusindikator<br />push button (kommando)knapp<br />radio button radioknapp<br />Redo Upphäv ångra<br />reflection reflex<br />Refresh Förnya<br />Refresh now Förnya nu<br />Rename Döp om<br />Reset Återställ<br />Restore Återställ<br />restore button återställningsknapp<br />Resume Fortsätt<br />Retry Försök igen<br />Save Lagra<br />Save as Lagra som<br />screen skärm<br />scroll bar bläddringsstapel<br />scroll box bläddringsruta<br />select markera<br />Select all Markera alla<br />Selected Markerade objekt<br />selection button (val)knapp<br />selection cursor (val)markör<br />Settings Inställningar<br />shortcut key kortkommando<br />Short menus Korta menyer<br />Size Ändra storlek<br />slider skjutreglage<br />slider arm skjutreglage<br />slider button (inställnings)knapp<br />Sort Sortera<br />spin button (bläddrings)knapp<br />Split Dela<br />split box delningsruta<br />status area statusfält<br />Stop Stopp<br />system menu systemmeny<br />system-menu symbol systemmenysymbol<br />tabbed-divider page registerblad<br />text cursor textmarkör<br />title bar rubrikrad<br />tool palette verktygspalett<br />Tutorial Självstudiekurs<br />Undo Ångra<br />Using help Om hjälpfunktionen<br />View Vy, Visa<br />window fönster<br />Window list Lista<br />Windows Fönster<br />window title fönsterrubrik<br />work area arbetsfält<br />workplace arbetsplats<br /></pre> 15231 15232 15233 15234 15235 15236 15237 15238 15239 15240 <hr /> 15241 15242 15243 15244 15245 <h1><a id="HDRTERM" name="HDRTERM">F.0 15246 Appendix F. 5715 15247 Documenting the 5716 15248 CUA User Interface in Products</a></h1> 5717 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />The following information is provided to help you document your product's<br />user interface and associated information. The following table contains<br />both technical and user terms. The user terms are defined and suggestions<br />are given on how to explain the technical concepts to users.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5718 <ul> 5719 <li><a href="F.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">F.1 15249 15250 15251 15252 15253 15254 15255 15256 15257 15258 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />The following information is provided to help you document your product's<br />user interface and associated information. The following table contains<br />both technical and user terms. The user terms are defined and suggestions<br />are given on how to explain the technical concepts to users.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 15259 15260 15261 15262 15263 15264 15265 15266 15267 15268 <ul> 15269 15270 15271 15272 15273 15274 <li><a target="_top" href="F.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">F.1 5720 15275 General Terminology Guidelines</a></li> 5721 <li><a href="F.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">F.2 15276 15277 15278 15279 15280 15281 <li><a target="_top" href="F.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">F.2 5722 15282 How to Use This Table</a></li> 5723 </ul> 5724 <pre></pre> 5725 <hr /> 5726 <h3>F.1 General Terminology 15283 15284 15285 15286 15287 15288 15289 15290 15291 15292 </ul> 15293 15294 15295 15296 15297 15298 15299 15300 15301 15302 <pre></pre> 15303 15304 15305 15306 15307 15308 15309 15310 15311 15312 <hr /> 15313 15314 15315 15316 15317 <h3>F.1 General Terminology 5727 15318 Guidelines</h3> 5728 <pre></pre> 5729 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The terminology used in your product should be suited to the task domain<br />of the product's users. For example, if the primary users of a product<br />are programmers, use terms programmers are familiar with and understand;<br />similarly, if the primary users are members of the medical community or<br />the insurance community, use terms those users will expect and understand.<br /><br /><br />If your product has a particular implementation of a concept that you want<br />to include in the definition, you may append that information to the end<br />of the definition. Precede the appended information with a phrase such<br />as: <tt>In</tt> <i><u>myproduct</u></i><tt>,.</tt><tt>.</tt><tt>.</tt><tt>.</tt> 15319 15320 15321 15322 15323 15324 15325 15326 15327 15328 <pre></pre> 15329 15330 15331 15332 15333 15334 15335 15336 15337 15338 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The terminology used in your product should be suited to the task domain<br />of the product's users. For example, if the primary users of a product<br />are programmers, use terms programmers are familiar with and understand;<br />similarly, if the primary users are members of the medical community or<br />the insurance community, use terms those users will expect and understand.<br /><br /><br />If your product has a particular implementation of a concept that you want<br />to include in the definition, you may append that information to the end<br />of the definition. Precede the appended information with a phrase such<br />as: <tt>In</tt> <i><u>myproduct</u></i><tt>,.</tt><tt>.</tt><tt>.</tt><tt>.</tt> 5730 15339 <br /><br />Predefined user-interface terminology (terms that appear in the table in<br /><b>bold</b> text) must be used for all users. Synonyms for these terms are not<br /> allowed.<br /></pre> 5731 <pre></pre> 5732 <hr /> 5733 <h3>F.2 How to Use This Table</h3> 5734 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Use the terms and their definitions in your product documentation just as<br />they appear in the following table. Some of the terms that appear as<br />choices on the user interface can either be action or routing choices. If<br />they are used by your product as routing choices, append either an<br />ellipsis or a right-pointing arrow to the term as appropriate.<br /><br /><br />Some of the technical terms in this table do not have equivalent user<br />terms. To help you explain to users the concepts represented by these<br />technical terms, suggestions are given in the right-hand column of the<br />table. The documentation suggestions appear in <i>italic</i> text to distinguish<br /> them from term definitions.<br /><br /><br />Other technical terms in the table have equivalent user terms; for<br />example, look at the term "action message" in the table. In the<br />right-hand column, you are referred to "message" for the definition;<br />"message" is the user equivalent of "action message."<br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> Predefined capitalization rules have been applied to the<br /> user-interface terminology in the following table. Terms in <b>bold</b> text<br /> appear in CUA-conforming user interfaces as choices in menus, labels on<br /> push buttons, and labels associated with icons.<br /><br /><br /></pre> 5735 <pre><a name="FIGTERM" id="FIGTERM" /><a name="TBLTERM" id="TBLTERM"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 227. Technical Terms with Equivalent User Terms and User |<br />| Definitions |<br />|____________ ______________ ____________________________________________|<br />| | | |<br />| <b>Technical</b> | <b>User</b> <b>Term</b> | <b>User</b> <b>Definition</b> <b>or</b> <b>Documentation</b> |<br /> | <b>Term</b> | | <b>Suggestion</b> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | action | action | An action performs a task on an object. A |<br /> | | | user requests actions by selecting a |<br /> | | | choice from a menu, interacting with |<br /> | | | buttons in a window, or by manipulating |<br /> | | | objects directly. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | action | | See <i>message</i>. |<br /> | message | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | active | active | The window that can receive input from the |<br /> | window | window | keyboard. It is distinguishable by the |<br /> | | | unique color of its title bar and window |<br /> | | | border. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Apply</b> | <b>Apply</b> | A push button that carries out the |<br /> | | | selected choices in a window without |<br /> | | | closing the window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | audible | | <i>Use</i> <i>"</i><i>beep</i><i>"</i> <i>or</i> <i>describe</i> <i>the</i> <i>sound.</i> |<br /> | feedback | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | automatic | | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>moving</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>keyboard</i> <i>cursor</i> <i>automatically</i> <i>changes</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>current</i> <i>selection.</i> <i>A</i> <i>user</i> <i>does</i> <i>not</i> <i>have</i> |<br /> | | | <i>to</i> <i>identify</i> <i>a</i> <i>choice</i> <i>or</i> <i>object</i> <i>to</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> | | | <i>it,</i> <i>selection</i> <i>occurs</i> <i>automatically</i> <i>as</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>cursor</i> <i>moves</i> <i>among</i> <i>the</i> <i>choices</i> <i>or</i> <i>objects.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | border | border | A visual indication of the boundaries of a |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | button | button | (1) A mechanism on a pointing device, |<br /> | | | such as a mouse, used to request or |<br /> | | | initiate an action or a process. (2) A |<br /> | | | graphical device that identifies a choice. |<br /> | | | (3) A graphical mechanism that, when |<br /> | | | selected, performs a visible action. For |<br /> | | | example, when a user clicks on a list |<br /> | | | button, a list of choices appears. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Cancel</b> | <b>Cancel</b> | A push button that removes a window |<br /> | | | without applying any changes made in that |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | cascaded | cascaded | A menu that appears from, and contains |<br /> | menu | menu | choices related to, a cascading choice in |<br /> | | | another menu. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | cascading | cascading | A choice on a menu that, when selected, |<br /> | choice | choice | presents another menu with additional |<br /> | | | related choices. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | check box | check box | A square box with associated text that |<br /> | | | represents a choice. When a user selects |<br /> | | | the choice, the check box is filled to |<br /> | | | indicate that the choice is selected. The |<br /> | | | user can clear the check box by selecting |<br /> | | | the choice again, thereby deselecting the |<br /> | | | choice. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | check mark | check mark | A character (&check.) that indicates that |<br /> | | | a choice is active. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | choice | choice | Graphics or text that a user can select to |<br /> | | | modify or manipulate an object. Choices |<br /> | | | appear in menus, on push buttons, and in |<br /> | | | fields as in, for example, a field of |<br /> | | | radio buttons. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | chord | chord | To press more than one button on a |<br /> | | | pointing device while the pointer is |<br /> | | | within the limits that the user has |<br /> | | | specified for the operating environment. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Clear</b> | <b>Clear</b> | A choice that removes a selected object |<br /> | | | and leaves the visible space that it |<br /> | | | occupied. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | click | click | To press and release a button on a |<br /> | | | pointing device without moving the pointer |<br /> | | | off of the object or choice. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | clipboard | clipboard | An area of storage provided by the system |<br /> | | | to hold data temporarily. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> | A choice that removes a window and all of |<br /> | | | the windows associated with it from the |<br /> | | | workplace. For example, if a user is |<br /> | | | performing a task in a window and a |<br /> | | | message appears, or the user asks for |<br /> | | | help, both the message and the help |<br /> | | | windows disappear when the user closes the |<br /> | | | original window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | combination| | <i>Refer</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> <i>list</i> <i>of</i> <i>objects</i> <i>or</i> <i>choices</i> |<br /> | box | | <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>access</i> <i>by</i> <i>selecting</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>list</i> <i>button,</i> <i>and</i> <i>the</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> <i>into</i> |<br /> | | | <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>type</i> <i>directly.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | container | container | A visual user-interface component whose |<br /> | | | specific purpose is to hold objects. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | contextual | contextual | Help information about the specific choice |<br /> | help | help | or object that the cursor is on. The help |<br /> | | | is contextual because it provides |<br /> | | | information about the item in its current |<br /> | | | context. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | control | | <i>Name</i> <i>the</i> <i>control</i> <i>if</i> <i>it</i> <i>is</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>term;</i> |<br /> | | | <i>otherwise</i> <i>describe</i> <i>it,</i> <i>its</i> <i>various</i> <i>parts,</i> |<br /> | | | <i>or</i> <i>tell</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>how</i> <i>to</i> <i>interact</i> <i>with</i> <i>it.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Copy</b> | <b>Copy</b> | A choice that places a copy of a selected |<br /> | | | object onto the clipboard. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Create</b> | <b>Create</b> | An action choice that produces a new |<br /> | | | object, similar to a selected object, and |<br /> | | | places it on the clipboard. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | current-set|ing | <i>A</i> <i>mark,</i> <i>such</i> <i>as</i> <i>a</i> <i>checkmark,</i> <i>an</i> <i>"</i><i>X</i><i>"</i> <i>in</i> <i>a</i> |<br /> | indicator | | <i>check</i> <i>box,</i> <i>or</i> <i>a</i> <i>filled</i> <i>circle</i> <i>in</i> <i>a</i> <i>radio</i> |<br /> | | | <i>button,</i> <i>that</i> <i>indicates</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>choice</i> <i>is</i> |<br /> | | | <i>currently</i> <i>selected.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | current | | <i>The</i> <i>state</i> <i>of</i> <i>an</i> <i>object</i> <i>or</i> <i>choice,</i> <i>active</i> |<br /> | state | | <i>or</i> <i>inactive,</i> <i>that</i> <i>allows</i> <i>it</i> <i>to</i> <i>be</i> <i>selected</i> |<br /> | | | <i>or</i> <i>directly</i> <i>manipulated.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | cursor | cursor | A visible indication of the position where |<br /> | | | user interaction with the keyboard will |<br /> | | | appear. The keyboard cursors are the |<br /> | | | selection cursor and the text cursor. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Cut</b> | <b>Cut</b> | A choice that moves a selected object and |<br /> | | | places it onto the clipboard. The space |<br /> | | | it occupied is usually filled by the |<br /> | | | remaining object or objects in the window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | data | | <i>The</i> <i>movement</i> <i>of</i> <i>data</i> <i>from</i> <i>one</i> <i>object</i> <i>to</i> |<br /> | transfer | | <i>another</i> <i>by</i> <i>way</i> <i>of</i> <i>the</i> <i>clipboard</i> <i>or</i> <i>by</i> |<br /> | | | <i>direct</i> <i>manipulation</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Delete</b> | <b>Delete</b> | A choice that removes a selected object. |<br /> | | | The space it occupied is usually filled by |<br /> | | | the remaining object or objects in the |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | delete | delete | A folder that holds objects and that will |<br /> | folder | folder | remove the objects it holds from a user's |<br /> | | | system. A delete folder could delete |<br /> | | | objects immediately, or it could allow the |<br /> | | | user to specify when the objects are to be |<br /> | | | deleted. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Deselect</b> | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | A choice that cancels the selection of all |<br /> | <b>all</b> | | of the objects that have been selected in |<br /> | | | that window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | default | | <i>Explain</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>that</i> <i>when</i> <i>some</i> <i>action</i> |<br /> | action | | <i>is</i> <i>taken,</i> <i>such</i> <i>as</i> <i>pressing</i> <i>the</i> <i>Enter</i> <i>key,</i> |<br /> | | | <i>the</i> <i>default</i> <i>action</i> <i>(describe</i> <i>the</i> <i>emphasis</i> |<br /> | | | <i>that</i> <i>identifies</i> <i>it)</i> <i>will</i> <i>be</i> <i>performed.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | descriptive| | <i>Text</i> <i>used</i> <i>in</i> <i>addition</i> <i>to</i> <i>a</i> <i>field</i> <i>prompt</i> <i>to</i> |<br /> | text | | <i>give</i> <i>more</i> <i>information</i> <i>about</i> <i>a</i> <i>field.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | detent | | <i>A</i> <i>point</i> <i>on</i> <i>a</i> <i>slider</i> <i>that</i> <i>represents</i> <i>an</i> |<br /> | | | <i>exact</i> <i>value</i> <i>to</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>move</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>slider</i> <i>arm.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | dialog | dialog | The interaction between a user and a |<br /> | | | computer. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | dimmed | | <i>Reduced</i> <i>contrast</i> <i>that</i> <i>indicates</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> |<br /> | | | <i>choice</i> <i>or</i> <i>object</i> <i>cannot</i> <i>be</i> <i>selected</i> <i>or</i> |<br /> | | | <i>directly</i> <i>manipulated.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | direct | direct | Techniques that a user employs to work |<br /> | manipulatio| manipulation | with objects directly, through a pointing |<br /> | | | device, or through the objects' context |<br /> | | | menus. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | directory | directory | A container of files and other |<br /> | | | directories. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | double-clic| double-click | To press and release a button on a |<br /> | | | pointing device twice while a pointer is |<br /> | | | within the limits that the user has |<br /> | | | specified for the operating environment. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | drag | drag | To use a pointing device to move an |<br /> | | | object. For example, a user can drag a |<br /> | | | window border to make it larger. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | drag and | drag and | To directly manipulate an object by moving |<br /> | drop | drop | it and placing it somewhere else using a |<br /> | | | pointing device. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | drop-down | | <i>Tell</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>how</i> <i>to</i> <i>interact</i> <i>with</i> <i>it;</i> |<br /> | combination| | <i>refer</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> <i>and</i> <i>the</i> <i>list</i> |<br /> | box | | <i>button.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | drop-down | | <i>Tell</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>how</i> <i>to</i> <i>interact</i> <i>with</i> <i>it;</i> |<br /> | list | | <i>refer</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> <i>list</i> <i>of</i> <i>items</i> <i>that</i> <i>are</i> <i>shown</i> |<br /> | | | <i>when</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>clicks</i> <i>on</i> <i>the</i> <i>list</i> <i>button.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> | <b>Edit</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices that enable a user |<br /> | | | to modify data. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | emphasis | emphasis | Highlighting, color change, or other |<br /> | | | visible indication of the condition of an |<br /> | | | object or choice and the effect of that |<br /> | | | condition on a user's ability to interact |<br /> | | | with that object or choice. Emphasis can |<br /> | | | also give a user additional information |<br /> | | | about the state of an object or choice. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | <b>Note:</b> Describe to the user what the |<br /> | | | emphasis indicates. For example, that |<br /> | | | selected-state emphasis shows that a |<br /> | | | choice or object is selected. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | entry | entry field | An area into which a user types or places |<br /> | field | | text. Its boundaries are usually |<br /> | | | indicated. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | extended | | <i>A</i> <i>type</i> <i>of</i> <i>selection</i> <i>usually</i> <i>used</i> <i>for</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>selection</i> <i>of</i> <i>a</i> <i>single</i> <i>object.</i> <i>A</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> |<br /> | | | <i>extend</i> <i>selection</i> <i>to</i> <i>more</i> <i>than</i> <i>one</i> <i>object,</i> |<br /> | | | <i>if</i> <i>required.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | field | field | An identifiable area in a window. |<br /> | | | Examples of fields are: an entry field, |<br /> | | | into which a user can type or place text, |<br /> | | | and a field of radio button choices, from |<br /> | | | which a user can select one choice. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | field | field prompt | Text that identifies a field, such as an |<br /> | prompt | | entry field or a field of check boxes. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>File</b> | <b>File</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices that enable a user |<br /> | | | to work with the object in the window as a |<br /> | | | whole. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Find</b> | <b>Find</b> | A choice or push button that initiates a |<br /> | | | search for an object or within an object |<br /> | | | displayed in that window. A user can |<br /> | | | specify the criteria to be used for the |<br /> | | | search. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | first-lette| | <i>A</i> <i>navigation</i> <i>and</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> |<br /> | navigation | | <i>which</i> <i>users</i> <i>select</i> <i>a</i> <i>choice</i> <i>in</i> <i>a</i> <i>list</i> <i>by</i> |<br /> | | | <i>typing</i> <i>the</i> <i>first</i> <i>character</i> <i>of</i> <i>the</i> <i>choice</i> |<br /> | | | <i>they</i> <i>want</i> <i>to</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | folder | folder | A container used to organize objects. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> | <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> | A choice that a user selects to see all of |<br /> | | | the choices available in menus. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>General</b> | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | A choice that gives a user a brief |<br /> | <b>help</b> | | overview of each action or task, or both, |<br /> | | | that a user can perform within a window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | group | group | A heading that identifies a set of related |<br /> | heading | heading | fields. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> | A choice that gives a user access to |<br /> | | | helpful information about objects, |<br /> | | | choices, tasks, and products. A <b>Help</b> |<br /> | | | choice can appear on a menu bar or as a |<br /> | | | push button. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | A choice on the <b>Help</b> menu that presents an |<br /> | | | alphabetic listing of help topics for an |<br /> | | | object or a product. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Hide</b> | <b>Hide</b> | A choice that removes a window and all |<br /> | | | associated windows from the workplace. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | I-beam | I-beam | A pointer that indicates that the pointer |<br /> | pointer | pointer | is over an area that can be edited, for |<br /> | | | example, an entry field. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | icon | icon | A graphical representation of an object, |<br /> | | | consisting of an image, image background, |<br /> | | | and a label. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | inactive | inactive | A window that is not receiving keyboard |<br /> | window | window | input. It can be distinguished from an |<br /> | | | active window by the difference in its |<br /> | | | title bar and border colors. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Include</b> | <b>Include</b> | A choice that presents a window in which a |<br /> | | | user can specify a reduced or expanded set |<br /> | | | of objects, so that only the objects |<br /> | | | included in the reduced or expanded set |<br /> | | | are displayed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | information| information | A specific part of a window in which |<br /> | area | area | information about the object or choice |<br /> | | | that the cursor is on is displayed. The |<br /> | | | information area can also contain a |<br /> | | | message about the completion of a process. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | information| | See <i>message</i>. |<br /> | message | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | initial | | <i>Information</i> <i>that</i> <i>appears</i> <i>in</i> <i>an</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> |<br /> | value | | <i>when</i> <i>that</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> <i>is</i> <i>first</i> <i>displayed</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | input | | <i>The</i> <i>position,</i> <i>indicated</i> <i>on</i> <i>the</i> <i>screen,</i> |<br /> | focus | | <i>where</i> <i>a</i> <i>user's</i> <i>interaction</i> <i>with</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>keyboard</i> <i>will</i> <i>appear.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | in-use | | See <i>emphasis</i>. |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> | <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> | A choice that presents a listing of all |<br /> | | | the key assignments for an object or a |<br /> | | | product. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | list box | | <i>A</i> <i>control</i> <i>that</i> <i>contains</i> <i>a</i> <i>list</i> <i>of</i> <i>objects</i> |<br /> | | | <i>or</i> <i>settings</i> <i>choices</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> | | | <i>from.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | list | list button | A button labeled with an underlined |<br /> | button | | down-arrow that presents a list of valid |<br /> | | | objects or choices that can be selected |<br /> | | | for that field. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | manipulatio| manipulation | The button on a pointing device a user |<br /> | button | button | presses to directly manipulate an object, |<br /> | | | for example mouse button 2 is the default |<br /> | | | manipulation button on a two-button mouse. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | marquee | | <i>The</i> <i>rectangle</i> <i>that</i> <i>appears</i> <i>during</i> <i>a</i> |<br /> | box | | <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | | | <i>selects</i> <i>objects</i> <i>by</i> <i>drawing</i> <i>a</i> <i>box</i> <i>around</i> |<br /> | | | <i>them</i> <i>with</i> <i>a</i> <i>pointing</i> <i>device.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | marquee | | <i>A</i> <i>technique</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>employs</i> <i>to</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>objects</i> <i>by</i> <i>using</i> <i>a</i> <i>pointing</i> <i>device</i> <i>to</i> <i>draw</i> |<br /> | | | <i>a</i> <i>box</i> <i>around</i> <i>them.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Maximize</b> | <b>Maximize</b> | A choice that enlarges a window to its |<br /> | | | largest possible size. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | maximize | maximize | A button in the rightmost part of a title |<br /> | button | button | bar that a user clicks on to enlarge the |<br /> | | | window to its largest possible size. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu | menu | A list of choices that can be applied to |<br /> | | | an object. A menu can contain choices |<br /> | | | that are not available for selection in |<br /> | | | certain contexts. Those choices are |<br /> | | | indicated by reduced contrast. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu bar | menu bar | The area near the top of a window, below |<br /> | | | the title bar and above the rest of the |<br /> | | | window, that contains choices that provide |<br /> | | | access to other menus. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu-bar | menu-bar | A graphical or textual item on a menu bar, |<br /> | choice | choice | which provides access to menus that |<br /> | | | contain choices that can be applied to an |<br /> | | | object. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu | menu button | The button on a pointing device that a |<br /> | button | | user presses to view a pop-up menu |<br /> | | | associated with an object, for example |<br /> | | | mouse button 3 is the default menu button |<br /> | | | on a three-button mouse. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu | menu choice | A graphical or textual item on a menu. A |<br /> | choice | | user selects a menu choice to work with an |<br /> | | | object in some way. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | message | message | Information not requested by a user but |<br /> | | | displayed by a product in response to an |<br /> | | | unexpected event or when something |<br /> | | | undesirable could occur. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Minimize</b> | <b>Minimize</b> | A choice that reduces a window to its |<br /> | | | smallest possible size and removes all of |<br /> | | | the windows associated with that window |<br /> | | | from the screen. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | minimize | minimize | A button, located next to the rightmost |<br /> | button | button | button in a title bar, that reduces the |<br /> | | | window to its smallest possible size and |<br /> | | | removes all the windows associated with |<br /> | | | that window from the screen. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | mnemonic | | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique;</i> <i>refer</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>"</i><i>underlined</i> <i>character</i><i>"</i> <i>or</i> <i>the</i> <i>"</i><i>character</i> |<br /> | | | <i>in</i> <i>parentheses</i><i>"</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>type</i> <i>to</i> |<br /> | | | <i>move</i> <i>the</i> <i>cursor</i> <i>to</i> <i>a</i> <i>choice</i> <i>or</i> <i>to</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> | | | <i>the</i> <i>choice</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> <i>cursor</i> <i>is</i> <i>on.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | mouse | mouse | A commonly used pointing device, |<br /> | | | containing one or more buttons, with which |<br /> | | | a user can interact with a product or the |<br /> | | | operating environment. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | mouse | mouse button | A mechanism on a mouse pointing device |<br /> | button | | used to select objects or choices, |<br /> | | | initiate actions, or directly manipulate |<br /> | | | objects. that a user presses to interact |<br /> | | | with a computer system. The button makes |<br /> | | | a "clicking" sound when pressed and |<br /> | | | released. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Move</b> | <b>Move</b> | A choice that moves a window to a |<br /> | | | different location on the work area. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | multiple-li|eentry field | See <i>entry</i> <i>field.</i> |<br /> | entry | | |<br /> | field | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>New</b> | <b>New</b> | A choice that creates another object from |<br /> | | | an existing object. The new object will |<br /> | | | appear in the existing window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | notebook | notebook | A graphical representation that resembles |<br /> | | | a spiral-bound notebook that contains |<br /> | | | pages separated into sections by tabbed |<br /> | | | divider-pages. A user can turn the pages |<br /> | | | of a notebook to move from one section to |<br /> | | | another. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | object | object | An item that a user can manipulate as a |<br /> | | | single unit to perform a task. An object |<br /> | | | can appear as text, an icon, or both. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Off</b> | <b>Off</b> | A choice that appears in the cascaded menu |<br /> | | | from the <b>Refresh</b> choice. It sets the |<br /> | | | refresh function to off. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>OK</b> | <b>OK</b> | A push button that accepts the information |<br /> | | | in a window and closes it. If the window |<br /> | | | contains changed information, those |<br /> | | | changes are applied before the window is |<br /> | | | closed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>On</b> | <b>On</b> | A choice that appears in a cascaded menu |<br /> | | | from the <b>Refresh</b> choice. It immediately |<br /> | | | refreshes the view in a window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Open</b> | <b>Open</b> | A choice that leads to a window in which |<br /> | | | users can select the object they want to |<br /> | | | open. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | A cascading choice that leads to a |<br /> | | | cascaded menu which contains choices that |<br /> | | | a user can select to determine how an |<br /> | | | object is presented. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Options</b> | <b>Options</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices that enable a user |<br /> | | | to customize a product or application. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | palette | palette | A set of mutually exclusive, typically |<br /> | | | graphical, choices. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pane | pane | One of the separate areas in a split |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Paste</b> | <b>Paste</b> | A choice that places the contents of the |<br /> | | | clipboard at the current cursor position. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pointer | pointer | A symbol, usually in the shape of an |<br /> | | | arrow, that a user can move with a |<br /> | | | pointing device. Users place the pointer |<br /> | | | over objects they want to work with. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pointing | pointing | A device, such as a mouse, trackball, or |<br /> | device | device | joystick, used to move a pointer on the |<br /> | | | screen. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | point | point | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | selection | selection | <i>selects</i> <i>or</i> <i>deselects</i> <i>an</i> <i>item</i> <i>by</i> <i>clicking</i> |<br /> | | | <i>the</i> <i>selection</i> <i>button</i> <i>on</i> <i>a</i> <i>mouse</i> <i>while</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>pointer</i> <i>is</i> <i>positioned</i> <i>over</i> <i>an</i> <i>object</i> <i>or</i> |<br /> | | | <i>choice.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pop-up | pop-up menu | A menu that, when requested, appears next |<br /> | menu | | to the object it is associated with. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | primary | | See <i>window</i>. |<br /> | window | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Print</b> | <b>Print</b> | A choice that prepares and schedules an |<br /> | | | object to be printed on a designated |<br /> | | | printer. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Product</b> | <b>Product</b> | A choice that displays a window that |<br /> | <b>information</b>| <b>information</b> | contains information about an application |<br /> | | | or product, such as its copyright notice, |<br /> | | | a logo, or both. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | progress | progress | Visual user-interface components that |<br /> | indicator | indicator | inform a user about the status of a |<br /> | | | computer process. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pull-down | | See <i>menu</i>. |<br /> | menu | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | push | push button | A button, labeled with text, graphics, or |<br /> | button | | both, that represents an action that will |<br /> | | | be initiated when a user selects it. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | radio | radio button | A circle with text beside it. Radio |<br /> | button | | buttons are combined to show a user a |<br /> | | | fixed set of choices from which the user |<br /> | | | can select one. The circle becomes |<br /> | | | partially filled when a choice is |<br /> | | | selected. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | random-poin| | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>presses</i> <i>a</i> <i>mouse</i> <i>button</i> <i>and</i> <i>holds</i> <i>it</i> <i>down</i> |<br /> | | | <i>while</i> <i>moving</i> <i>the</i> <i>pointer</i> <i>so</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>pointer</i> <i>travels</i> <i>to</i> <i>a</i> <i>different</i> <i>location</i> <i>on</i> |<br /> | | | <i>the</i> <i>screen.</i> <i>Everything</i> <i>the</i> <i>pointer</i> |<br /> | | | <i>touches</i> <i>while</i> <i>the</i> <i>button</i> <i>is</i> <i>held</i> <i>down</i> <i>is</i> |<br /> | | | <i>selected.</i> <i>Random-point</i> <i>selection</i> <i>ends</i> |<br /> | | | <i>when</i> <i>the</i> <i>mouse</i> <i>button</i> <i>is</i> <i>released.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | range | | <i>A</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>selects</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>multiple</i> <i>objects</i> <i>in</i> <i>a</i> <i>range</i> <i>by</i> <i>identifying</i> |<br /> | | | <i>a</i> <i>beginning</i> <i>and</i> <i>end</i> <i>corner.</i> <i>When</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>second</i> <i>corner</i> <i>is</i> <i>identified,</i> <i>all</i> <i>objects</i> |<br /> | | | <i>within</i> <i>the</i> <i>specified</i> <i>range</i> <i>are</i> <i>selected.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | range-swipe| | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>moves</i> <i>a</i> <i>pointer</i> <i>across</i> <i>a</i> <i>range</i> <i>of</i> <i>objects.</i> |<br /> | | | <i>Each</i> <i>object</i> <i>becomes</i> <i>selected</i> <i>as</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>pointer</i> <i>touches</i> <i>it.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Redo</b> | <b>Redo</b> | A choice that reverses the effect of the |<br /> | | | most recently performed undo operation on |<br /> | | | an object, returning the object to the |<br /> | | | state it was in before the undo operation |<br /> | | | was performed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | reflection | | <i>An</i> <i>object</i> <i>that</i> <i>is</i> <i>represented</i> <i>by</i> <i>more</i> <i>than</i> |<br /> | | | <i>one</i> <i>icon.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Refresh</b> | <b>Refresh</b> | A cascading choice that gives a user |<br /> | | | access to other choices (<b>On</b> and <b>Off</b>) that |<br /> | | | control whether changes made to underlying |<br /> | | | data in a window are displayed |<br /> | | | immediately, not displayed at all, or |<br /> | | | displayed at a later time. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Refresh</b> | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> | A choice that shows changes made to |<br /> | <b>now</b> | | underlying data in a window immediately. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Reset</b> | <b>Reset</b> | A push button that returns an object to |<br /> | | | the condition it was in when it was last |<br /> | | | opened, or to the condition it was in |<br /> | | | before the most recent changes were |<br /> | | | applied to it. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Restore</b> | <b>Restore</b> | A choice that returns a window to the size |<br /> | | | it was and the position it was in before |<br /> | | | the user minimized or maximized the |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | restore | restore | A button that appears in the rightmost |<br /> | button | button | corner of the title bar after a window has |<br /> | | | been maximized. When the restore button |<br /> | | | is selected, the window returns to the |<br /> | | | size it was before it was maximized. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Retry</b> | <b>Retry</b> | A push button that, when selected, |<br /> | | | attempts to complete an interrupted |<br /> | | | process. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Save</b> | <b>Save</b> | A choice that stores an object onto a |<br /> | | | storage device, such as a disk or |<br /> | | | diskette. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> | <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> | A choice that creates a new object from an |<br /> | | | existing object and leaves the existing |<br /> | | | object as it was. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | screen | screen | The physical surface of a display device |<br /> | | | upon which information is shown to users. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | scrollable | | <i>An</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> <i>that</i> <i>can</i> <i>be</i> <i>scrolled.</i> |<br /> | entry | | |<br /> | field | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | scroll bar | scroll bar | A window component that shows a user that |<br /> | | | more information is available in a |<br /> | | | particular direction and can be scrolled |<br /> | | | into view. Scroll bars can be either |<br /> | | | horizontal or vertical. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | scroll box | scroll box | The part of a scroll bar that indicates |<br /> | | | the position of the visible information |<br /> | | | relative to the total amount of |<br /> | | | information available in a window. A user |<br /> | | | clicks on a scroll box with a pointing |<br /> | | | device and manipulates it to see |<br /> | | | information that is not currently visible. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | scrolling | | <i>A</i> <i>fixed</i> <i>amount</i> <i>of</i> <i>information</i> <i>that</i> <i>can</i> <i>be</i> |<br /> | increment | | <i>scrolled</i> <i>with</i> <i>a</i> <i>single</i> <i>scrolling</i> <i>action.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | secondary | | See <i>window</i>. |<br /> | window | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | select | select | To explicitly identify one or more objects |<br /> | | | to which a subsequent choice will apply. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | A choice that causes all of the objects in |<br /> | | | a window to be selected. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Selected</b> | <b>Selected</b> | A choice in the menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to choices that apply to the |<br /> | | | selected objects in the current view. |<br /> | | | Products can change the name of the choice |<br /> | | | to match the types of objects that appear |<br /> | | | in the current view, for example if a view |<br /> | | | contains only document objects, a product |<br /> | | | might name this choice <b>Documents.</b> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | selected-st|te | See <i>emphasis</i>. |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | selection | selection | The process of explicitly identifying one |<br /> | | | or more objects to which a subsequent |<br /> | | | choice will apply. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | selection | selection | The button on a pointing device that a |<br /> | button | button | user presses to select an object, for |<br /> | | | example mouse button 1 is the select |<br /> | | | button on a two-button mouse. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | selection | selection | A keyboard cursor, in the shape of a |<br /> | cursor | cursor | dotted outline box, that moves as users |<br /> | | | indicate the choice they want to interact |<br /> | | | with. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Settings</b> | <b>Settings</b> | A choice that sets characteristics of |<br /> | | | objects or displays identifying |<br /> | | | characteristics of objects. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | shortcut | shortcut key | A key or combination of keys assigned to a |<br /> | key | | menu choice that initiates that choice, |<br /> | | | even if the associated menu is not |<br /> | | | currently displayed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Short</b> | <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> | A choice that reduces the number of |<br /> | <b>menus</b> | | choices that appear in menus. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | single-line| | See <i>entry</i> <i>field</i>. |<br /> | entry | | |<br /> | field | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Size</b> | <b>Size</b> | An action choice that allows a user to |<br /> | | | change the size of a window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | slider | slider | A visual component of a user interface |<br /> | | | that represents a quantity and its |<br /> | | | relationship to the range of possible |<br /> | | | values for that quantity. A user can also |<br /> | | | change the value of the quantity. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | slider arm | slider arm | The visual indicator in the slider that a |<br /> | | | user can move to change the numerical |<br /> | | | value. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | slider | slider | A button on a slider that a user clicks on |<br /> | button | button | to move the slider arm one increment in a |<br /> | | | particular direction, as indicated by the |<br /> | | | directional arrow on the button. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | slider | | <i>The</i> <i>part</i> <i>of</i> <i>the</i> <i>slider</i> <i>on</i> <i>which</i> <i>the</i> <i>slider</i> |<br /> | shaft | | <i>arm</i> <i>moves.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Sort</b> | <b>Sort</b> | A choice that arranges the objects in a |<br /> | | | view into a specified order. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | source | | See <i>emphasis</i>. |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | spin | spin button | A component used to display, in sequence, |<br /> | button | | a ring of related but mutually exclusive |<br /> | | | choices. A user can accept the value |<br /> | | | displayed in the entry field or can type a |<br /> | | | valid choice into the entry field. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | split box | split box | A box in the scroll bar of a window that a |<br /> | | | user can interact with to split a window |<br /> | | | into separate panes. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Split</b> | <b>Split</b> | A choice that divides a window into more |<br /> | | | than one pane. Also, a choice used to |<br /> | | | change the size of each pane. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | status | status area | A part of a window where information |<br /> | area | | appears that shows the state of an object |<br /> | | | or the state of a particular view of an |<br /> | | | object. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | system | system menu | A menu that appears from the system menu |<br /> | menu | | symbol in the leftmost part of a title |<br /> | | | bar. It contains choices that affect the |<br /> | | | window or the view it contains. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | system-menu| system-menu | A symbol (shaped like a Spacebar) in the |<br /> | symbol | symbol | leftmost corner of a title bar that gives |<br /> | | | a user access to choices that affect the |<br /> | | | window or the view it contains. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | tabbed | tabbed | A graphical representation of a tabbed |<br /> | divider-pag| divider-page | page in a notebook. Tabbed divider-pages |<br /> | | | separate sections of the notebook. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | table | table | An object, such as a spreadsheet, that is |<br /> | | | organized in a grid of rows and columns. |<br /> | | | Each intersection is called a cell and can |<br /> | | | contain objects, such as text or graphics, |<br /> | | | or both. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | target | | See <i>emphasis.</i> |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | text | text cursor | A symbol displayed in text that shows a |<br /> | cursor | | user where typed input will appear. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | title bar | title bar | The area at the top of each window that |<br /> | | | contains the system menu symbol, a small |<br /> | | | icon, a window title, and the maximize, |<br /> | | | minimize, and restore buttons. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | tool | tool palette | A palette whose choices represent tools. |<br /> | palette | | When a user selects a choice from the tool |<br /> | | | palette and moves the pointer into the |<br /> | | | window, the pointer changes to the shape |<br /> | | | of the selected choice and the pointing |<br /> | | | device performs the operation indicated by |<br /> | | | the pointer. For example, a user might |<br /> | | | select a "pencil" choice from the tool |<br /> | | | palette to make a drawing in the window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Tutorial</b> | <b>Tutorial</b> | A choice that gives a user access to |<br /> | | | online educational information. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | unavailable|state | See <i>emphasis</i>. |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Undo</b> | <b>Undo</b> | A choice that reverses the effect of the |<br /> | | | most recently performed operation on an |<br /> | | | object, returning the object to the state |<br /> | | | it was in before the operation was |<br /> | | | performed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | A choice on the <b>Help</b> menu that gives a |<br /> | | | user information about how the help |<br /> | | | function works. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | value set | | <i>A</i> <i>set</i> <i>of</i> <i>mutually</i> <i>exclusive,</i> <i>graphical</i> <i>or</i> |<br /> | | | <i>textual</i> <i>choices.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>View</b> | <b>View</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices that enable a user |<br /> | | | to choose how an object is presented, how |<br /> | | | much information is presented, what order |<br /> | | | it is presented in, and other choices |<br /> | | | related to the way an object is presented. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | visible | | <i>Describe</i> <i>the</i> <i>visual</i> <i>cue</i> <i>and</i> <i>tell</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | cue | | <i>what</i> <i>it</i> <i>indicates.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | wait | | <i>A</i> <i>pointer</i> <i>that</i> <i>indicates</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> <i>computer</i> |<br /> | pointer | | <i>is</i> <i>performing</i> <i>a</i> <i>process</i> <i>and</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | | | <i>cannot</i> <i>interact</i> <i>with</i> <i>the</i> <i>part</i> <i>of</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>underlying</i> <i>window</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> <i>wait</i> <i>pointer</i> <i>is</i> |<br /> | | | <i>positioned</i> <i>over.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | window | window | An area with visible boundaries that |<br /> | | | presents a view of an object or with which |<br /> | | | a user conducts a dialog with a computer |<br /> | | | system. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Windows</b> | <b>Windows</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices with which users |<br /> | | | can manage all of the open windows on |<br /> | | | their system that are associated with the |<br /> | | | product. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Window</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | A choice that presents a list of all of |<br /> | <b>list</b> | | the open windows associated with the |<br /> | | | window from which the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice |<br /> | | | was selected. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | window | window title | The area on a title bar that contains a |<br /> | title | | short description of the contents of the |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | work area | work area | A container used to group windows and |<br /> | | | objects to perform a task. Users can |<br /> | | | modify sample work areas to suit their own |<br /> | | | needs. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | workplace | workplace | A container that fills the entire screen |<br /> | | | and holds all of the objects that make up |<br /> | | | the user interface. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /></pre> 5736 <pre></pre> 5737 <hr /> 5738 <h1><a name="HDRGLOSS" id="HDRGLOSS">BACK_1 Glossary</a></h1> 5739 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This glossary is intended to be used by the reader of this book as a<br />reference to the terminology contained herein. For CUA terms and<br />definitions that can be used in product glossaries, refer to the <cite>CUA</cite><br /><cite>Reference.</cite> 5740 <br /><br /><a name="GLS action choice"> <b>action</b> <b>choice</b>. A choice that immediately begins to process a request made</a><br />by a user or immediately applies settings to an object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5741 name="GLS application"> <b>application</b>. A collection of related components with which a user</a><br />performs a task.<br /><br /><br /><a 5742 name="GLS audible cue"> <b>audible</b> <b>cue</b>. A sound generated by the computer to draw a user's attention</a><br />to, or provide feedback about, an event or state of the computer. Audible<br />cues enhance and reinforce visible cues.<br /><br /><br /><a 5743 name="GLS automatic selection"> <b>automatic</b> <b>selection</b>. A selection technique in which moving the keyboard</a><br />cursor automatically changes the current selection. Automatic selection<br />is provided as a convenience so that a user does not have to select an<br />object explicitly.<br /><br /><br /><a 5744 name="GLS border"> <b>border</b>. A visual indication of the boundaries of a window.</a> 5745 <br /><br /><a name="GLS button"> <b>button</b>. (1) A mechanism on a pointing device, such as a mouse, used to</a><br />request or initiate an action or a process. (2) A graphical device that<br />identifies a choice. (3) A graphical mechanism that, when selected,<br />performs a visible action. For example, when a user clicks on a list<br />button, a list of choices appears.<br /><br /><br /><a 5746 name="GLS cascaded menu"> <b>cascaded</b> <b>menu</b>. A menu that appears from, and contains choices related to,</a><br />a cascading choice in another menu. Cascaded menus are used to reduce the<br />length of a pull-down menu or a pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><a 5747 name="GLS cascading choice"> <b>cascading</b> <b>choice</b>. A choice on a menu that leads to a cascaded menu</a><br />containing related choices. A cascading choice is indicated by a<br />rightward-pointing arrow (ÿ) to the right of the choice.<br /><br /><br /><a 5748 name="GLS check box"> <b>check</b> <b>box</b>. A square box with associated text that represents a choice.</a><br />When a user selects the choice, an "X" appears in the check box to<br />indicate that the choice is selected. The user can clear the check box by<br />selecting the choice again, thereby canceling the selection.<br /><br /><br /><a 5749 name="GLS check mark"> <b>check</b> <b>mark</b>. A character (&check.) that indicates that a settings choice</a><br />is active.<br /><br /><br /><a 5750 name="GLS choice"> <b>choice</b>. Text or graphics that a user can select. Examples of choices</a><br />are: push buttons, radio buttons, and menu items. There are three kinds<br />of choices: action, routing, and settings. Choices appear in menus, on<br />push buttons, and in fields, for example a field of radio buttons.<br /><br /><br /><a 5751 name="GLS chord"> <b>chord</b>. To press more than one button on a pointing device while the</a><br />pointer is within the limits that the user has specified for the operating<br />environment.<br /><br /><br /><a 5752 name="GLS class"> <b>class</b>. See <i>object</i> <i>class.</i></a> 5753 <br /><br /><a name="GLS class hierarchy"> <b>class</b> <b>hierarchy</b>. A collection of object classes organized to indicate the</a><br />other classes from which they have inherited various attributes.<br /><br /><br /><a 5754 name="GLS click"> <b>click</b>. To press and release a button on a pointing device without moving</a><br />the pointer off of the object or choice.<br /><br /><br /><a 5755 name="GLS clipboard"> <b>clipboard</b>. An area of storage provided by the system to hold data</a><br />temporarily.<br /><br /><br /><a 5756 name="GLS combination box"> <b>combination</b> <b>box</b>. A control that combines the functions of an entry field</a><br />and a list box. A combination box contains a list of objects that a user<br />can scroll through and select from to complete the entry field.<br />Alternatively, a user can type text directly into the entry field.<br /><br /><br /><a 5757 name="GLS composite object"> <b>composite</b> <b>object</b>. An object that contains other objects, usually of a</a><br />different type. For example, a document object that contains not only<br />text, but graphics or image objects that may each be separate objects.<br /><br /><br /><a 5758 name="GLS composed view"> <b>composed</b> <b>view</b>. A view of an object in which relationships of the parts</a><br />contribute to the overall meaning. Composed views are provided primarily<br />for data objects.<br /><br /><br /><a 5759 name="GLS container object"> <b>container</b> <b>object</b>. An object whose specific purpose is to hold other</a><br />objects. A folder is an example of a container object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5760 name="GLS containment"> <b>containment</b>. The principle that objects hold other objects and can be</a><br />held by other objects.<br /><br /><br /><a 5761 name="GLS contents view"> <b>contents</b> <b>view</b>. A view of an object that shows the contents of the object</a><br />in list form. Contents views are provided for container objects and for<br />any object that has container behavior, for example, a device object such<br />as a printer. The two types of contents views are the icons view and the<br />details view.<br /><br /><br /><a 5762 name="GLS controls"> <b>controls</b>. Visual user-interface components that allow a user to interact</a><br />with data. Controls are usually identified by text, for example,<br />headings, labels in push buttons, field prompts, and titles in windows.<br /><br /><br /><a 5763 name="GLS current-setting indicator"> <b>current-setting</b> <b>indicator</b>. A visible indication that a choice is active</a><br />or inactive, for example the "X" that appears in a check box when it is<br />selected.<br /><br /><br /><a 5764 name="GLS cursor"> <b>cursor</b>. A visible indication of the position where user interaction with</a><br />the keyboard will appear. The keyboard cursor can be either the selection<br />cursor or the text cursor.<br /><br /><br /><a 5765 name="GLS data object"> <b>data</b> <b>object</b>. An object whose primary purpose is to convey information,</a><br />such as text, graphics, audio, or video. A newsletter is an example of a<br />data object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5766 name="GLS deselection"> <b>deselection</b>. The process of removing selection from a previously selected</a><br />object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5767 name="GLS details view"> <b>details</b> <b>view</b>. A standard contents view in which a small icon is combined</a><br />with text to provide descriptive information about an object. The text is<br />arranged in rows and columns so that there is one row for each object and<br />one column for each type of descriptive information displayed.<br /><br /><br /><a 5768 name="GLS device object"> <b>device</b> <b>object</b>. An object that provides a means for communication between</a><br />a computer and another piece of equipment. A printer and an electronic<br />mail out-basket are examples of device objects.<br /><br /><br /><a 5769 name="GLS dialog"> <b>dialog</b>. The interaction between a user and a computer.</a> 5770 <br /><br /><a name="GLS direct manipulation"> <b>direct</b> <b>manipulation</b>. A set of techniques that allow a user to work with</a><br />an object by dragging it with a pointing device or interacting with its<br />pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><a 5771 name="GLS double-click"> <b>double-click</b>. To press and release a button on a pointing device twice</a><br />while a pointer is within the limits that the user has specified for the<br />operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><a 5772 name="GLS drag"> <b>drag</b>. To use a pointing device to move or copy an object. For example, a</a><br />user can drag a window border to make it larger. To drag something, a<br />user presses and holds a button on the pointing device while moving the<br />pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><a 5773 name="GLS drag and drop"> <b>drag</b> <b>and</b> <b>drop</b>. To directly manipulate an object by moving it and placing</a><br />it somewhere else using a pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><a 5774 name="GLS drop-down combination box"> <b>drop-down</b> <b>combination</b> <b>box</b>. A combination box in which the list is hidden</a><br />until a user takes an action to make it visible.<br /><br /><br /><a 5775 name="GLS drop-down list"> <b>drop-down</b> <b>list</b>. A control that is a variation of a list box. A drop-down</a><br />list only displays one item until the user takes an action to display the<br />other objects or choices.<br /><br /><br /><a 5776 name="GLS emphasis"> <b>emphasis</b>. Highlighting, color change, or other visible indication of the</a><br />condition of an object or choice and the effect of that condition on a<br />user's ability to interact with that object or choice. Emphasis can also<br />give a user additional information about the state of an object or choice.<br /><br /><br /><a 5777 name="GLS entry field"> <b>entry</b> <b>field</b>. A control into which a user places text. Its boundaries</a><br />are usually indicated. Entry fields can scroll if more information is<br />available than is currently visible.<br /><br /><br /><a 5778 name="GLS exception"> <b>exception</b>. An event or situation that prevents, or could prevent, an</a><br />action requested by a user from being completed in a manner that the user<br />would expect. Exceptions occur when a product is unable to interpret a<br />user's input.<br /><br /><br /><a 5779 name="GLS explicit selection"> <b>explicit</b> <b>selection</b>. A type of selection in which users expressly identify</a><br />the item or items that they want to select.<br /><br /><br /><a 5780 name="GLS extended selection"> <b>extended</b> <b>selection</b>. A type of selection optimized for the selection of a</a><br />single object. A user can extend selection to more than one object, if<br />required.<br /><br /><br /><a 5781 name="GLS field"> <b>field</b>. An identifiable area in a window, for example an entry field into</a><br />which a user can type text, or a field of radio buttons from which a user<br />can select one choice in the field.<br /><br /><br /><a 5782 name="GLS field prompt"> <b>field</b> <b>prompt</b>. Text that identifies a field, such as an entry field or a</a><br />field of check boxes.<br /><br /><br /><a 5783 name="GLS folder"> <b>folder</b>. A container used to organize objects.</a> 5784 <br /><br /><a name="GLS graphical user interface"> <b>graphical</b> <b>user</b> <b>interface</b>. A type of user interface that takes advantage</a><br />of high-resolution graphics. In common usage, a graphical user interface<br />includes a combination of graphics, the object-action paradigm, the use of<br />pointing devices, menu bars and other menus, overlapping windows, and<br />icons.<br /><br /><br /><a 5785 name="GLS group heading"> <b>group</b> <b>heading</b>. A heading that identifies a set of related fields.</a> 5786 <br /><br /><a name="GLS help view"> <b>help</b> <b>view</b>. A view of an object that provides information to assist users</a><br />in working with that object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5787 name="GLS hide button"> <b>hide</b> <b>button</b>. A button on a title bar that a user clicks on to remove a</a><br />window from the workplace without closing the window. When the window is<br />hidden, the state of window, as represented in the window list, changes.<br /><br /><br /><a 5788 name="GLS I-beam pointer"> <b>I-beam</b> <b>pointer</b>. A pointer, shaped like a steel girder, that indicates</a><br />that the pointer is over an area where text can be typed.<br /><br /><br /><a 5789 name="GLS icon"> <b>icon</b>. A graphical representation of an object, consisting of an image,</a><br />image background, and a label.<br /><br /><br /><a 5790 name="GLS icons view"> <b>icons</b> <b>view</b>. A standard contents view in which each object contained in a</a><br />container object is displayed as an icon.<br /><br /><br /><a 5791 name="GLS implicit selection"> <b>implicit</b> <b>selection</b>. A type of selection in which a user does not</a><br />expressly select the item on which an action will be taken, but still has<br />access to the actions available for the item.<br /><br /><br /><a 5792 name="GLS inactive window"> <b>inactive</b> <b>window</b>. A window that cannot receive keyboard input at a given</a><br />moment.<br /><br /><br /><a 5793 name="GLS information area"> <b>information</b> <b>area</b>. A specific part of a window in which information about</a><br />the object or choice that the cursor is on is displayed. The information<br />area can also contain a message about the completion of a process.<br /><br /><br /><a 5794 name="GLS inheritance"> <b>inheritance</b>. The principle that objects acquire attributes from other</a><br />classes of objects.<br /><br /><br /><a 5795 name="GLS keys help"> <b>keys</b> <b>help</b>. A type of help information that lists all the key assignments</a><br />for an object or a product.<br /><br /><br /><a 5796 name="GLS list box"> <b>list</b> <b>box</b>. A control that contains a list of objects or settings choices</a><br />that a user can select.<br /><br /><br /><a 5797 name="GLS manipulation button"> <b>manipulation</b> <b>button</b>. The button on a pointing device a user presses to</a><br />directly manipulate an object. For example mouse button 2 is the default<br />manipulation button on a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><a 5798 name="GLS maximize button"> <b>maximize</b> <b>button</b>. A button on the rightmost part of a title bar that a</a><br />user clicks on to enlarge the window to its largest possible size.<br /><br /><br /><a 5799 name="GLS menu"> <b>menu</b>. A list of choices that can be applied to an object. A menu can</a><br />contain choices that are not available for selection in certain contexts.<br />Those choices are indicated by reduced contrast.<br /><br /><br /><a 5800 name="GLS menu bar"> <b>menu</b> <b>bar</b>. The area near the top of a window, below the title bar and</a><br />above the rest of the window, that contains routing choices that provide<br />access to pull-down menus.<br /><br /><br /><a 5801 name="GLS menu-bar choice"> <b>menu-bar</b> <b>choice</b>. A graphical or textual item on a menu bar that provides</a><br />access to pull-down menus which contain choices that can be applied to an<br />object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5802 name="GLS menu choice"> <b>menu</b> <b>choice</b>. A graphical or textual item on a menu. A user selects a</a><br />menu choice to work with an object in some way.<br /><br /><br /><a 5803 name="GLS message"> <b>message</b>. Information not requested by a user but displayed by a product</a><br />or application in response to an unexpected event, or when something<br />undesirable could occur.<br /><br /><br /><a 5804 name="GLS metaphor"> <b>metaphor</b>. A word, phrase, or visual representation that denotes or</a><br />depicts one object or idea but suggests a likeness or analogy with another<br />object or idea.<br /><br /><br /><a 5805 name="GLS minimize button"> <b>minimize</b> <b>button</b>. A button, located next to the rightmost button in a</a><br />title bar, that reduces the window to its smallest possible size and<br />removes all the windows associated with that window from the screen.<br /><br /><br /><a 5806 name="GLS mode"> <b>mode</b>. A method of operation in which the actions that are available to a</a><br />user are determined by the state of the system.<br /><br /><br /><a 5807 name="GLS model"> <b>model</b>. The conceptual and operational understanding that a person has</a><br />about something.<br /><br /><br /><a 5808 name="GLS mouse"> <b>mouse</b>. A commonly used pointing device that has one or more buttons that</a><br />a user presses to interact with a computer system.<br /><br /><br /><a 5809 name="GLS mouse button"> <b>mouse</b> <b>button</b>. A mechanism on a mouse pointing device used to select</a><br />choices, initiate actions, or manipulate objects with the pointer. The<br />button makes a "clicking" sound when pressed and released.<br /><br /><br /><a 5810 name="GLS multiple selection"> <b>multiple</b> <b>selection</b>. A selection technique in which a user can select any</a><br />number of objects, or not select any.<br /><br /><br /><a 5811 name="GLS notebook"> <b>notebook</b>. A graphical representation that resembles a bound notebook that</a><br />contains pages separated into sections by tabbed divider pages. A user<br />can turn the pages of a notebook to move from one section to another.<br /><br /><br /><a 5812 name="GLS object"> <b>object</b>. A visual component of a user interface that a user can work with</a><br />to perform a task. An object can appear as text or an icon.<br /><br /><br /><a 5813 name="GLS object-action paradigm"> <b>object-action</b> <b>paradigm</b>. A pattern for interaction in which a user selects</a><br />an object and then selects an action to apply to that object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5814 name="GLS object class"> <b>object</b> <b>class</b>. A categorization or grouping of objects that share similar</a><br />behaviors and characteristics.<br /><br /><br /><a 5815 name="GLS object decomposition"> <b>object</b> <b>decomposition</b>. The process of breaking an object into its</a><br />component parts.<br /><br /><br /><a 5816 name="GLS object hierarchy"> <b>object</b> <b>hierarchy</b>. A way of illustrating relationships among objects.</a><br />Each object that appears in a level below another object is an example of<br />the upper object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5817 name="GLS object inheritance"> <b>object</b> <b>inheritance</b>. <i>See</i> inheritance.</a> 5818 <br /><br /><a name="GLS object orientation"> <b>object</b> <b>orientation</b>. An orientation in a user interface in which a user's</a><br />attention is directed toward the objects the user works with to perform a<br />task.<br /><br /><br /><a 5819 name="GLS object-oriented programming"> <b>object-oriented</b> <b>programming</b>. A type of programming in which code is</a><br />divided into modules called "objects" that communicate with each other by<br />passing messages.<br /><br /><br /><a 5820 name="GLS object-oriented user interface"> <b>object-oriented</b> <b>user</b> <b>interface</b>. A type of user interface that implements</a><br />the object-action paradigm.<br /><br /><br /><a 5821 name="GLS object subclass"> <b>object</b> <b>subclass</b>. An object created from another object and from which the</a><br />properties of the original object are inherited.<br /><br /><br /><a 5822 name="GLS object superclass"> <b>object</b> <b>superclass</b>. The object from which subclass objects are created.</a><br />The properties of the superclass object are inherited by the subclass<br />object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5823 name="GLS one-based selection"> <b>one-based</b> <b>selection</b>. A scope of selection in which one item within the</a><br />scope must always be selected.<br /><br /><br /><a 5824 name="GLS pane"> <b>pane</b>. One of the separate areas in a split window.</a> 15340 15341 15342 15343 15344 15345 15346 15347 15348 15349 <pre></pre> 15350 15351 15352 15353 15354 15355 15356 15357 15358 15359 <hr /> 15360 15361 15362 15363 15364 <h3>F.2 How to Use This Table</h3> 15365 15366 15367 15368 15369 15370 15371 15372 15373 15374 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Use the terms and their definitions in your product documentation just as<br />they appear in the following table. Some of the terms that appear as<br />choices on the user interface can either be action or routing choices. If<br />they are used by your product as routing choices, append either an<br />ellipsis or a right-pointing arrow to the term as appropriate.<br /><br /><br />Some of the technical terms in this table do not have equivalent user<br />terms. To help you explain to users the concepts represented by these<br />technical terms, suggestions are given in the right-hand column of the<br />table. The documentation suggestions appear in <i>italic</i> text to distinguish<br /> them from term definitions.<br /><br /><br />Other technical terms in the table have equivalent user terms; for<br />example, look at the term "action message" in the table. In the<br />right-hand column, you are referred to "message" for the definition;<br />"message" is the user equivalent of "action message."<br /><br /><br /><b>Note:</b> Predefined capitalization rules have been applied to the<br /> user-interface terminology in the following table. Terms in <b>bold</b> text<br /> appear in CUA-conforming user interfaces as choices in menus, labels on<br /> push buttons, and labels associated with icons.<br /><br /><br /></pre> 15375 15376 15377 15378 15379 15380 15381 15382 15383 15384 <pre><a id="FIGTERM" name="FIGTERM"></a><a id="TBLTERM" name="TBLTERM"> ________________________________________________________________________ </a><br />| Figure 227. Technical Terms with Equivalent User Terms and User |<br />| Definitions |<br />|____________ ______________ ____________________________________________|<br />| | | |<br />| <b>Technical</b> | <b>User</b> <b>Term</b> | <b>User</b> <b>Definition</b> <b>or</b> <b>Documentation</b> |<br /> | <b>Term</b> | | <b>Suggestion</b> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | action | action | An action performs a task on an object. A |<br /> | | | user requests actions by selecting a |<br /> | | | choice from a menu, interacting with |<br /> | | | buttons in a window, or by manipulating |<br /> | | | objects directly. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | action | | See <i>message</i>. |<br /> | message | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | active | active | The window that can receive input from the |<br /> | window | window | keyboard. It is distinguishable by the |<br /> | | | unique color of its title bar and window |<br /> | | | border. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Apply</b> | <b>Apply</b> | A push button that carries out the |<br /> | | | selected choices in a window without |<br /> | | | closing the window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | audible | | <i>Use</i> <i>"</i><i>beep</i><i>"</i> <i>or</i> <i>describe</i> <i>the</i> <i>sound.</i> |<br /> | feedback | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | automatic | | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>moving</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>keyboard</i> <i>cursor</i> <i>automatically</i> <i>changes</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>current</i> <i>selection.</i> <i>A</i> <i>user</i> <i>does</i> <i>not</i> <i>have</i> |<br /> | | | <i>to</i> <i>identify</i> <i>a</i> <i>choice</i> <i>or</i> <i>object</i> <i>to</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> | | | <i>it,</i> <i>selection</i> <i>occurs</i> <i>automatically</i> <i>as</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>cursor</i> <i>moves</i> <i>among</i> <i>the</i> <i>choices</i> <i>or</i> <i>objects.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | border | border | A visual indication of the boundaries of a |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | button | button | (1) A mechanism on a pointing device, |<br /> | | | such as a mouse, used to request or |<br /> | | | initiate an action or a process. (2) A |<br /> | | | graphical device that identifies a choice. |<br /> | | | (3) A graphical mechanism that, when |<br /> | | | selected, performs a visible action. For |<br /> | | | example, when a user clicks on a list |<br /> | | | button, a list of choices appears. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Cancel</b> | <b>Cancel</b> | A push button that removes a window |<br /> | | | without applying any changes made in that |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | cascaded | cascaded | A menu that appears from, and contains |<br /> | menu | menu | choices related to, a cascading choice in |<br /> | | | another menu. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | cascading | cascading | A choice on a menu that, when selected, |<br /> | choice | choice | presents another menu with additional |<br /> | | | related choices. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | check box | check box | A square box with associated text that |<br /> | | | represents a choice. When a user selects |<br /> | | | the choice, the check box is filled to |<br /> | | | indicate that the choice is selected. The |<br /> | | | user can clear the check box by selecting |<br /> | | | the choice again, thereby deselecting the |<br /> | | | choice. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | check mark | check mark | A character (&check.) that indicates that |<br /> | | | a choice is active. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | choice | choice | Graphics or text that a user can select to |<br /> | | | modify or manipulate an object. Choices |<br /> | | | appear in menus, on push buttons, and in |<br /> | | | fields as in, for example, a field of |<br /> | | | radio buttons. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | chord | chord | To press more than one button on a |<br /> | | | pointing device while the pointer is |<br /> | | | within the limits that the user has |<br /> | | | specified for the operating environment. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Clear</b> | <b>Clear</b> | A choice that removes a selected object |<br /> | | | and leaves the visible space that it |<br /> | | | occupied. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | click | click | To press and release a button on a |<br /> | | | pointing device without moving the pointer |<br /> | | | off of the object or choice. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | clipboard | clipboard | An area of storage provided by the system |<br /> | | | to hold data temporarily. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Close</b> | <b>Close</b> | A choice that removes a window and all of |<br /> | | | the windows associated with it from the |<br /> | | | workplace. For example, if a user is |<br /> | | | performing a task in a window and a |<br /> | | | message appears, or the user asks for |<br /> | | | help, both the message and the help |<br /> | | | windows disappear when the user closes the |<br /> | | | original window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | combination| | <i>Refer</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> <i>list</i> <i>of</i> <i>objects</i> <i>or</i> <i>choices</i> |<br /> | box | | <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>access</i> <i>by</i> <i>selecting</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>list</i> <i>button,</i> <i>and</i> <i>the</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> <i>into</i> |<br /> | | | <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>type</i> <i>directly.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | container | container | A visual user-interface component whose |<br /> | | | specific purpose is to hold objects. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | contextual | contextual | Help information about the specific choice |<br /> | help | help | or object that the cursor is on. The help |<br /> | | | is contextual because it provides |<br /> | | | information about the item in its current |<br /> | | | context. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | control | | <i>Name</i> <i>the</i> <i>control</i> <i>if</i> <i>it</i> <i>is</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>term;</i> |<br /> | | | <i>otherwise</i> <i>describe</i> <i>it,</i> <i>its</i> <i>various</i> <i>parts,</i> |<br /> | | | <i>or</i> <i>tell</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>how</i> <i>to</i> <i>interact</i> <i>with</i> <i>it.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Copy</b> | <b>Copy</b> | A choice that places a copy of a selected |<br /> | | | object onto the clipboard. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Create</b> | <b>Create</b> | An action choice that produces a new |<br /> | | | object, similar to a selected object, and |<br /> | | | places it on the clipboard. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | current-set|ing | <i>A</i> <i>mark,</i> <i>such</i> <i>as</i> <i>a</i> <i>checkmark,</i> <i>an</i> <i>"</i><i>X</i><i>"</i> <i>in</i> <i>a</i> |<br /> | indicator | | <i>check</i> <i>box,</i> <i>or</i> <i>a</i> <i>filled</i> <i>circle</i> <i>in</i> <i>a</i> <i>radio</i> |<br /> | | | <i>button,</i> <i>that</i> <i>indicates</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>choice</i> <i>is</i> |<br /> | | | <i>currently</i> <i>selected.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | current | | <i>The</i> <i>state</i> <i>of</i> <i>an</i> <i>object</i> <i>or</i> <i>choice,</i> <i>active</i> |<br /> | state | | <i>or</i> <i>inactive,</i> <i>that</i> <i>allows</i> <i>it</i> <i>to</i> <i>be</i> <i>selected</i> |<br /> | | | <i>or</i> <i>directly</i> <i>manipulated.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | cursor | cursor | A visible indication of the position where |<br /> | | | user interaction with the keyboard will |<br /> | | | appear. The keyboard cursors are the |<br /> | | | selection cursor and the text cursor. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Cut</b> | <b>Cut</b> | A choice that moves a selected object and |<br /> | | | places it onto the clipboard. The space |<br /> | | | it occupied is usually filled by the |<br /> | | | remaining object or objects in the window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | data | | <i>The</i> <i>movement</i> <i>of</i> <i>data</i> <i>from</i> <i>one</i> <i>object</i> <i>to</i> |<br /> | transfer | | <i>another</i> <i>by</i> <i>way</i> <i>of</i> <i>the</i> <i>clipboard</i> <i>or</i> <i>by</i> |<br /> | | | <i>direct</i> <i>manipulation</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Delete</b> | <b>Delete</b> | A choice that removes a selected object. |<br /> | | | The space it occupied is usually filled by |<br /> | | | the remaining object or objects in the |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | delete | delete | A folder that holds objects and that will |<br /> | folder | folder | remove the objects it holds from a user's |<br /> | | | system. A delete folder could delete |<br /> | | | objects immediately, or it could allow the |<br /> | | | user to specify when the objects are to be |<br /> | | | deleted. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Deselect</b> | <b>Deselect</b> <b>all</b> | A choice that cancels the selection of all |<br /> | <b>all</b> | | of the objects that have been selected in |<br /> | | | that window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | default | | <i>Explain</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>that</i> <i>when</i> <i>some</i> <i>action</i> |<br /> | action | | <i>is</i> <i>taken,</i> <i>such</i> <i>as</i> <i>pressing</i> <i>the</i> <i>Enter</i> <i>key,</i> |<br /> | | | <i>the</i> <i>default</i> <i>action</i> <i>(describe</i> <i>the</i> <i>emphasis</i> |<br /> | | | <i>that</i> <i>identifies</i> <i>it)</i> <i>will</i> <i>be</i> <i>performed.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | descriptive| | <i>Text</i> <i>used</i> <i>in</i> <i>addition</i> <i>to</i> <i>a</i> <i>field</i> <i>prompt</i> <i>to</i> |<br /> | text | | <i>give</i> <i>more</i> <i>information</i> <i>about</i> <i>a</i> <i>field.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | detent | | <i>A</i> <i>point</i> <i>on</i> <i>a</i> <i>slider</i> <i>that</i> <i>represents</i> <i>an</i> |<br /> | | | <i>exact</i> <i>value</i> <i>to</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>move</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>slider</i> <i>arm.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | dialog | dialog | The interaction between a user and a |<br /> | | | computer. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | dimmed | | <i>Reduced</i> <i>contrast</i> <i>that</i> <i>indicates</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> |<br /> | | | <i>choice</i> <i>or</i> <i>object</i> <i>cannot</i> <i>be</i> <i>selected</i> <i>or</i> |<br /> | | | <i>directly</i> <i>manipulated.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | direct | direct | Techniques that a user employs to work |<br /> | manipulatio| manipulation | with objects directly, through a pointing |<br /> | | | device, or through the objects' context |<br /> | | | menus. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | directory | directory | A container of files and other |<br /> | | | directories. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | double-clic| double-click | To press and release a button on a |<br /> | | | pointing device twice while a pointer is |<br /> | | | within the limits that the user has |<br /> | | | specified for the operating environment. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | drag | drag | To use a pointing device to move an |<br /> | | | object. For example, a user can drag a |<br /> | | | window border to make it larger. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | drag and | drag and | To directly manipulate an object by moving |<br /> | drop | drop | it and placing it somewhere else using a |<br /> | | | pointing device. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | drop-down | | <i>Tell</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>how</i> <i>to</i> <i>interact</i> <i>with</i> <i>it;</i> |<br /> | combination| | <i>refer</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> <i>and</i> <i>the</i> <i>list</i> |<br /> | box | | <i>button.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | drop-down | | <i>Tell</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>how</i> <i>to</i> <i>interact</i> <i>with</i> <i>it;</i> |<br /> | list | | <i>refer</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> <i>list</i> <i>of</i> <i>items</i> <i>that</i> <i>are</i> <i>shown</i> |<br /> | | | <i>when</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> <i>clicks</i> <i>on</i> <i>the</i> <i>list</i> <i>button.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Edit</b> | <b>Edit</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices that enable a user |<br /> | | | to modify data. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | emphasis | emphasis | Highlighting, color change, or other |<br /> | | | visible indication of the condition of an |<br /> | | | object or choice and the effect of that |<br /> | | | condition on a user's ability to interact |<br /> | | | with that object or choice. Emphasis can |<br /> | | | also give a user additional information |<br /> | | | about the state of an object or choice. |<br /> | | | |<br /> | | | <b>Note:</b> Describe to the user what the |<br /> | | | emphasis indicates. For example, that |<br /> | | | selected-state emphasis shows that a |<br /> | | | choice or object is selected. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | entry | entry field | An area into which a user types or places |<br /> | field | | text. Its boundaries are usually |<br /> | | | indicated. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | extended | | <i>A</i> <i>type</i> <i>of</i> <i>selection</i> <i>usually</i> <i>used</i> <i>for</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>selection</i> <i>of</i> <i>a</i> <i>single</i> <i>object.</i> <i>A</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> |<br /> | | | <i>extend</i> <i>selection</i> <i>to</i> <i>more</i> <i>than</i> <i>one</i> <i>object,</i> |<br /> | | | <i>if</i> <i>required.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | field | field | An identifiable area in a window. |<br /> | | | Examples of fields are: an entry field, |<br /> | | | into which a user can type or place text, |<br /> | | | and a field of radio button choices, from |<br /> | | | which a user can select one choice. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | field | field prompt | Text that identifies a field, such as an |<br /> | prompt | | entry field or a field of check boxes. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>File</b> | <b>File</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices that enable a user |<br /> | | | to work with the object in the window as a |<br /> | | | whole. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Find</b> | <b>Find</b> | A choice or push button that initiates a |<br /> | | | search for an object or within an object |<br /> | | | displayed in that window. A user can |<br /> | | | specify the criteria to be used for the |<br /> | | | search. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | first-lette| | <i>A</i> <i>navigation</i> <i>and</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> |<br /> | navigation | | <i>which</i> <i>users</i> <i>select</i> <i>a</i> <i>choice</i> <i>in</i> <i>a</i> <i>list</i> <i>by</i> |<br /> | | | <i>typing</i> <i>the</i> <i>first</i> <i>character</i> <i>of</i> <i>the</i> <i>choice</i> |<br /> | | | <i>they</i> <i>want</i> <i>to</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | folder | folder | A container used to organize objects. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> | <b>Full</b> <b>menus</b> | A choice that a user selects to see all of |<br /> | | | the choices available in menus. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>General</b> | <b>General</b> <b>help</b> | A choice that gives a user a brief |<br /> | <b>help</b> | | overview of each action or task, or both, |<br /> | | | that a user can perform within a window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | group | group | A heading that identifies a set of related |<br /> | heading | heading | fields. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> | <b>Help</b> | A choice that gives a user access to |<br /> | | | helpful information about objects, |<br /> | | | choices, tasks, and products. A <b>Help</b> |<br /> | | | choice can appear on a menu bar or as a |<br /> | | | push button. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | <b>Help</b> <b>index</b> | A choice on the <b>Help</b> menu that presents an |<br /> | | | alphabetic listing of help topics for an |<br /> | | | object or a product. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Hide</b> | <b>Hide</b> | A choice that removes a window and all |<br /> | | | associated windows from the workplace. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | I-beam | I-beam | A pointer that indicates that the pointer |<br /> | pointer | pointer | is over an area that can be edited, for |<br /> | | | example, an entry field. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | icon | icon | A graphical representation of an object, |<br /> | | | consisting of an image, image background, |<br /> | | | and a label. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | inactive | inactive | A window that is not receiving keyboard |<br /> | window | window | input. It can be distinguished from an |<br /> | | | active window by the difference in its |<br /> | | | title bar and border colors. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Include</b> | <b>Include</b> | A choice that presents a window in which a |<br /> | | | user can specify a reduced or expanded set |<br /> | | | of objects, so that only the objects |<br /> | | | included in the reduced or expanded set |<br /> | | | are displayed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | information| information | A specific part of a window in which |<br /> | area | area | information about the object or choice |<br /> | | | that the cursor is on is displayed. The |<br /> | | | information area can also contain a |<br /> | | | message about the completion of a process. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | information| | See <i>message</i>. |<br /> | message | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | initial | | <i>Information</i> <i>that</i> <i>appears</i> <i>in</i> <i>an</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> |<br /> | value | | <i>when</i> <i>that</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> <i>is</i> <i>first</i> <i>displayed</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | input | | <i>The</i> <i>position,</i> <i>indicated</i> <i>on</i> <i>the</i> <i>screen,</i> |<br /> | focus | | <i>where</i> <i>a</i> <i>user's</i> <i>interaction</i> <i>with</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>keyboard</i> <i>will</i> <i>appear.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | in-use | | See <i>emphasis</i>. |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> | <b>Keys</b> <b>help</b> | A choice that presents a listing of all |<br /> | | | the key assignments for an object or a |<br /> | | | product. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | list box | | <i>A</i> <i>control</i> <i>that</i> <i>contains</i> <i>a</i> <i>list</i> <i>of</i> <i>objects</i> |<br /> | | | <i>or</i> <i>settings</i> <i>choices</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> | | | <i>from.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | list | list button | A button labeled with an underlined |<br /> | button | | down-arrow that presents a list of valid |<br /> | | | objects or choices that can be selected |<br /> | | | for that field. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | manipulatio| manipulation | The button on a pointing device a user |<br /> | button | button | presses to directly manipulate an object, |<br /> | | | for example mouse button 2 is the default |<br /> | | | manipulation button on a two-button mouse. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | marquee | | <i>The</i> <i>rectangle</i> <i>that</i> <i>appears</i> <i>during</i> <i>a</i> |<br /> | box | | <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | | | <i>selects</i> <i>objects</i> <i>by</i> <i>drawing</i> <i>a</i> <i>box</i> <i>around</i> |<br /> | | | <i>them</i> <i>with</i> <i>a</i> <i>pointing</i> <i>device.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | marquee | | <i>A</i> <i>technique</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>employs</i> <i>to</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>objects</i> <i>by</i> <i>using</i> <i>a</i> <i>pointing</i> <i>device</i> <i>to</i> <i>draw</i> |<br /> | | | <i>a</i> <i>box</i> <i>around</i> <i>them.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Maximize</b> | <b>Maximize</b> | A choice that enlarges a window to its |<br /> | | | largest possible size. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | maximize | maximize | A button in the rightmost part of a title |<br /> | button | button | bar that a user clicks on to enlarge the |<br /> | | | window to its largest possible size. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu | menu | A list of choices that can be applied to |<br /> | | | an object. A menu can contain choices |<br /> | | | that are not available for selection in |<br /> | | | certain contexts. Those choices are |<br /> | | | indicated by reduced contrast. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu bar | menu bar | The area near the top of a window, below |<br /> | | | the title bar and above the rest of the |<br /> | | | window, that contains choices that provide |<br /> | | | access to other menus. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu-bar | menu-bar | A graphical or textual item on a menu bar, |<br /> | choice | choice | which provides access to menus that |<br /> | | | contain choices that can be applied to an |<br /> | | | object. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu | menu button | The button on a pointing device that a |<br /> | button | | user presses to view a pop-up menu |<br /> | | | associated with an object, for example |<br /> | | | mouse button 3 is the default menu button |<br /> | | | on a three-button mouse. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | menu | menu choice | A graphical or textual item on a menu. A |<br /> | choice | | user selects a menu choice to work with an |<br /> | | | object in some way. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | message | message | Information not requested by a user but |<br /> | | | displayed by a product in response to an |<br /> | | | unexpected event or when something |<br /> | | | undesirable could occur. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Minimize</b> | <b>Minimize</b> | A choice that reduces a window to its |<br /> | | | smallest possible size and removes all of |<br /> | | | the windows associated with that window |<br /> | | | from the screen. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | minimize | minimize | A button, located next to the rightmost |<br /> | button | button | button in a title bar, that reduces the |<br /> | | | window to its smallest possible size and |<br /> | | | removes all the windows associated with |<br /> | | | that window from the screen. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | mnemonic | | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique;</i> <i>refer</i> <i>to</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>"</i><i>underlined</i> <i>character</i><i>"</i> <i>or</i> <i>the</i> <i>"</i><i>character</i> |<br /> | | | <i>in</i> <i>parentheses</i><i>"</i> <i>that</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>can</i> <i>type</i> <i>to</i> |<br /> | | | <i>move</i> <i>the</i> <i>cursor</i> <i>to</i> <i>a</i> <i>choice</i> <i>or</i> <i>to</i> <i>select</i> |<br /> | | | <i>the</i> <i>choice</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> <i>cursor</i> <i>is</i> <i>on.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | mouse | mouse | A commonly used pointing device, |<br /> | | | containing one or more buttons, with which |<br /> | | | a user can interact with a product or the |<br /> | | | operating environment. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | mouse | mouse button | A mechanism on a mouse pointing device |<br /> | button | | used to select objects or choices, |<br /> | | | initiate actions, or directly manipulate |<br /> | | | objects. that a user presses to interact |<br /> | | | with a computer system. The button makes |<br /> | | | a "clicking" sound when pressed and |<br /> | | | released. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Move</b> | <b>Move</b> | A choice that moves a window to a |<br /> | | | different location on the work area. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | multiple-li|eentry field | See <i>entry</i> <i>field.</i> |<br /> | entry | | |<br /> | field | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>New</b> | <b>New</b> | A choice that creates another object from |<br /> | | | an existing object. The new object will |<br /> | | | appear in the existing window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | notebook | notebook | A graphical representation that resembles |<br /> | | | a spiral-bound notebook that contains |<br /> | | | pages separated into sections by tabbed |<br /> | | | divider-pages. A user can turn the pages |<br /> | | | of a notebook to move from one section to |<br /> | | | another. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | object | object | An item that a user can manipulate as a |<br /> | | | single unit to perform a task. An object |<br /> | | | can appear as text, an icon, or both. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Off</b> | <b>Off</b> | A choice that appears in the cascaded menu |<br /> | | | from the <b>Refresh</b> choice. It sets the |<br /> | | | refresh function to off. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>OK</b> | <b>OK</b> | A push button that accepts the information |<br /> | | | in a window and closes it. If the window |<br /> | | | contains changed information, those |<br /> | | | changes are applied before the window is |<br /> | | | closed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>On</b> | <b>On</b> | A choice that appears in a cascaded menu |<br /> | | | from the <b>Refresh</b> choice. It immediately |<br /> | | | refreshes the view in a window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Open</b> | <b>Open</b> | A choice that leads to a window in which |<br /> | | | users can select the object they want to |<br /> | | | open. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | <b>Open</b> <b>as</b> | A cascading choice that leads to a |<br /> | | | cascaded menu which contains choices that |<br /> | | | a user can select to determine how an |<br /> | | | object is presented. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Options</b> | <b>Options</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices that enable a user |<br /> | | | to customize a product or application. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | palette | palette | A set of mutually exclusive, typically |<br /> | | | graphical, choices. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pane | pane | One of the separate areas in a split |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Paste</b> | <b>Paste</b> | A choice that places the contents of the |<br /> | | | clipboard at the current cursor position. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pointer | pointer | A symbol, usually in the shape of an |<br /> | | | arrow, that a user can move with a |<br /> | | | pointing device. Users place the pointer |<br /> | | | over objects they want to work with. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pointing | pointing | A device, such as a mouse, trackball, or |<br /> | device | device | joystick, used to move a pointer on the |<br /> | | | screen. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | point | point | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | selection | selection | <i>selects</i> <i>or</i> <i>deselects</i> <i>an</i> <i>item</i> <i>by</i> <i>clicking</i> |<br /> | | | <i>the</i> <i>selection</i> <i>button</i> <i>on</i> <i>a</i> <i>mouse</i> <i>while</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>pointer</i> <i>is</i> <i>positioned</i> <i>over</i> <i>an</i> <i>object</i> <i>or</i> |<br /> | | | <i>choice.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pop-up | pop-up menu | A menu that, when requested, appears next |<br /> | menu | | to the object it is associated with. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | primary | | See <i>window</i>. |<br /> | window | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Print</b> | <b>Print</b> | A choice that prepares and schedules an |<br /> | | | object to be printed on a designated |<br /> | | | printer. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Product</b> | <b>Product</b> | A choice that displays a window that |<br /> | <b>information</b>| <b>information</b> | contains information about an application |<br /> | | | or product, such as its copyright notice, |<br /> | | | a logo, or both. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | progress | progress | Visual user-interface components that |<br /> | indicator | indicator | inform a user about the status of a |<br /> | | | computer process. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | pull-down | | See <i>menu</i>. |<br /> | menu | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | push | push button | A button, labeled with text, graphics, or |<br /> | button | | both, that represents an action that will |<br /> | | | be initiated when a user selects it. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | radio | radio button | A circle with text beside it. Radio |<br /> | button | | buttons are combined to show a user a |<br /> | | | fixed set of choices from which the user |<br /> | | | can select one. The circle becomes |<br /> | | | partially filled when a choice is |<br /> | | | selected. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | random-poin| | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>presses</i> <i>a</i> <i>mouse</i> <i>button</i> <i>and</i> <i>holds</i> <i>it</i> <i>down</i> |<br /> | | | <i>while</i> <i>moving</i> <i>the</i> <i>pointer</i> <i>so</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>pointer</i> <i>travels</i> <i>to</i> <i>a</i> <i>different</i> <i>location</i> <i>on</i> |<br /> | | | <i>the</i> <i>screen.</i> <i>Everything</i> <i>the</i> <i>pointer</i> |<br /> | | | <i>touches</i> <i>while</i> <i>the</i> <i>button</i> <i>is</i> <i>held</i> <i>down</i> <i>is</i> |<br /> | | | <i>selected.</i> <i>Random-point</i> <i>selection</i> <i>ends</i> |<br /> | | | <i>when</i> <i>the</i> <i>mouse</i> <i>button</i> <i>is</i> <i>released.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | range | | <i>A</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> <i>selects</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>multiple</i> <i>objects</i> <i>in</i> <i>a</i> <i>range</i> <i>by</i> <i>identifying</i> |<br /> | | | <i>a</i> <i>beginning</i> <i>and</i> <i>end</i> <i>corner.</i> <i>When</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>second</i> <i>corner</i> <i>is</i> <i>identified,</i> <i>all</i> <i>objects</i> |<br /> | | | <i>within</i> <i>the</i> <i>specified</i> <i>range</i> <i>are</i> <i>selected.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | range-swipe| | <i>A</i> <i>selection</i> <i>technique</i> <i>in</i> <i>which</i> <i>a</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | selection | | <i>moves</i> <i>a</i> <i>pointer</i> <i>across</i> <i>a</i> <i>range</i> <i>of</i> <i>objects.</i> |<br /> | | | <i>Each</i> <i>object</i> <i>becomes</i> <i>selected</i> <i>as</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>pointer</i> <i>touches</i> <i>it.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Redo</b> | <b>Redo</b> | A choice that reverses the effect of the |<br /> | | | most recently performed undo operation on |<br /> | | | an object, returning the object to the |<br /> | | | state it was in before the undo operation |<br /> | | | was performed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | reflection | | <i>An</i> <i>object</i> <i>that</i> <i>is</i> <i>represented</i> <i>by</i> <i>more</i> <i>than</i> |<br /> | | | <i>one</i> <i>icon.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Refresh</b> | <b>Refresh</b> | A cascading choice that gives a user |<br /> | | | access to other choices (<b>On</b> and <b>Off</b>) that |<br /> | | | control whether changes made to underlying |<br /> | | | data in a window are displayed |<br /> | | | immediately, not displayed at all, or |<br /> | | | displayed at a later time. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Refresh</b> | <b>Refresh</b> <b>now</b> | A choice that shows changes made to |<br /> | <b>now</b> | | underlying data in a window immediately. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Reset</b> | <b>Reset</b> | A push button that returns an object to |<br /> | | | the condition it was in when it was last |<br /> | | | opened, or to the condition it was in |<br /> | | | before the most recent changes were |<br /> | | | applied to it. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Restore</b> | <b>Restore</b> | A choice that returns a window to the size |<br /> | | | it was and the position it was in before |<br /> | | | the user minimized or maximized the |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | restore | restore | A button that appears in the rightmost |<br /> | button | button | corner of the title bar after a window has |<br /> | | | been maximized. When the restore button |<br /> | | | is selected, the window returns to the |<br /> | | | size it was before it was maximized. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Retry</b> | <b>Retry</b> | A push button that, when selected, |<br /> | | | attempts to complete an interrupted |<br /> | | | process. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Save</b> | <b>Save</b> | A choice that stores an object onto a |<br /> | | | storage device, such as a disk or |<br /> | | | diskette. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> | <b>Save</b> <b>as</b> | A choice that creates a new object from an |<br /> | | | existing object and leaves the existing |<br /> | | | object as it was. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | screen | screen | The physical surface of a display device |<br /> | | | upon which information is shown to users. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | scrollable | | <i>An</i> <i>entry</i> <i>field</i> <i>that</i> <i>can</i> <i>be</i> <i>scrolled.</i> |<br /> | entry | | |<br /> | field | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | scroll bar | scroll bar | A window component that shows a user that |<br /> | | | more information is available in a |<br /> | | | particular direction and can be scrolled |<br /> | | | into view. Scroll bars can be either |<br /> | | | horizontal or vertical. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | scroll box | scroll box | The part of a scroll bar that indicates |<br /> | | | the position of the visible information |<br /> | | | relative to the total amount of |<br /> | | | information available in a window. A user |<br /> | | | clicks on a scroll box with a pointing |<br /> | | | device and manipulates it to see |<br /> | | | information that is not currently visible. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | scrolling | | <i>A</i> <i>fixed</i> <i>amount</i> <i>of</i> <i>information</i> <i>that</i> <i>can</i> <i>be</i> |<br /> | increment | | <i>scrolled</i> <i>with</i> <i>a</i> <i>single</i> <i>scrolling</i> <i>action.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | secondary | | See <i>window</i>. |<br /> | window | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | select | select | To explicitly identify one or more objects |<br /> | | | to which a subsequent choice will apply. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | <b>Select</b> <b>all</b> | A choice that causes all of the objects in |<br /> | | | a window to be selected. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Selected</b> | <b>Selected</b> | A choice in the menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to choices that apply to the |<br /> | | | selected objects in the current view. |<br /> | | | Products can change the name of the choice |<br /> | | | to match the types of objects that appear |<br /> | | | in the current view, for example if a view |<br /> | | | contains only document objects, a product |<br /> | | | might name this choice <b>Documents.</b> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | selected-st|te | See <i>emphasis</i>. |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | selection | selection | The process of explicitly identifying one |<br /> | | | or more objects to which a subsequent |<br /> | | | choice will apply. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | selection | selection | The button on a pointing device that a |<br /> | button | button | user presses to select an object, for |<br /> | | | example mouse button 1 is the select |<br /> | | | button on a two-button mouse. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | selection | selection | A keyboard cursor, in the shape of a |<br /> | cursor | cursor | dotted outline box, that moves as users |<br /> | | | indicate the choice they want to interact |<br /> | | | with. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Settings</b> | <b>Settings</b> | A choice that sets characteristics of |<br /> | | | objects or displays identifying |<br /> | | | characteristics of objects. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | shortcut | shortcut key | A key or combination of keys assigned to a |<br /> | key | | menu choice that initiates that choice, |<br /> | | | even if the associated menu is not |<br /> | | | currently displayed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Short</b> | <b>Short</b> <b>menus</b> | A choice that reduces the number of |<br /> | <b>menus</b> | | choices that appear in menus. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | single-line| | See <i>entry</i> <i>field</i>. |<br /> | entry | | |<br /> | field | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Size</b> | <b>Size</b> | An action choice that allows a user to |<br /> | | | change the size of a window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | slider | slider | A visual component of a user interface |<br /> | | | that represents a quantity and its |<br /> | | | relationship to the range of possible |<br /> | | | values for that quantity. A user can also |<br /> | | | change the value of the quantity. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | slider arm | slider arm | The visual indicator in the slider that a |<br /> | | | user can move to change the numerical |<br /> | | | value. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | slider | slider | A button on a slider that a user clicks on |<br /> | button | button | to move the slider arm one increment in a |<br /> | | | particular direction, as indicated by the |<br /> | | | directional arrow on the button. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | slider | | <i>The</i> <i>part</i> <i>of</i> <i>the</i> <i>slider</i> <i>on</i> <i>which</i> <i>the</i> <i>slider</i> |<br /> | shaft | | <i>arm</i> <i>moves.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Sort</b> | <b>Sort</b> | A choice that arranges the objects in a |<br /> | | | view into a specified order. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | source | | See <i>emphasis</i>. |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | spin | spin button | A component used to display, in sequence, |<br /> | button | | a ring of related but mutually exclusive |<br /> | | | choices. A user can accept the value |<br /> | | | displayed in the entry field or can type a |<br /> | | | valid choice into the entry field. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | split box | split box | A box in the scroll bar of a window that a |<br /> | | | user can interact with to split a window |<br /> | | | into separate panes. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Split</b> | <b>Split</b> | A choice that divides a window into more |<br /> | | | than one pane. Also, a choice used to |<br /> | | | change the size of each pane. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | status | status area | A part of a window where information |<br /> | area | | appears that shows the state of an object |<br /> | | | or the state of a particular view of an |<br /> | | | object. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | system | system menu | A menu that appears from the system menu |<br /> | menu | | symbol in the leftmost part of a title |<br /> | | | bar. It contains choices that affect the |<br /> | | | window or the view it contains. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | system-menu| system-menu | A symbol (shaped like a Spacebar) in the |<br /> | symbol | symbol | leftmost corner of a title bar that gives |<br /> | | | a user access to choices that affect the |<br /> | | | window or the view it contains. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | tabbed | tabbed | A graphical representation of a tabbed |<br /> | divider-pag| divider-page | page in a notebook. Tabbed divider-pages |<br /> | | | separate sections of the notebook. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | table | table | An object, such as a spreadsheet, that is |<br /> | | | organized in a grid of rows and columns. |<br /> | | | Each intersection is called a cell and can |<br /> | | | contain objects, such as text or graphics, |<br /> | | | or both. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | target | | See <i>emphasis.</i> |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | text | text cursor | A symbol displayed in text that shows a |<br /> | cursor | | user where typed input will appear. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | title bar | title bar | The area at the top of each window that |<br /> | | | contains the system menu symbol, a small |<br /> | | | icon, a window title, and the maximize, |<br /> | | | minimize, and restore buttons. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | tool | tool palette | A palette whose choices represent tools. |<br /> | palette | | When a user selects a choice from the tool |<br /> | | | palette and moves the pointer into the |<br /> | | | window, the pointer changes to the shape |<br /> | | | of the selected choice and the pointing |<br /> | | | device performs the operation indicated by |<br /> | | | the pointer. For example, a user might |<br /> | | | select a "pencil" choice from the tool |<br /> | | | palette to make a drawing in the window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Tutorial</b> | <b>Tutorial</b> | A choice that gives a user access to |<br /> | | | online educational information. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | unavailable|state | See <i>emphasis</i>. |<br /> | emphasis | | |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Undo</b> | <b>Undo</b> | A choice that reverses the effect of the |<br /> | | | most recently performed operation on an |<br /> | | | object, returning the object to the state |<br /> | | | it was in before the operation was |<br /> | | | performed. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | <b>Using</b> <b>help</b> | A choice on the <b>Help</b> menu that gives a |<br /> | | | user information about how the help |<br /> | | | function works. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | value set | | <i>A</i> <i>set</i> <i>of</i> <i>mutually</i> <i>exclusive,</i> <i>graphical</i> <i>or</i> |<br /> | | | <i>textual</i> <i>choices.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>View</b> | <b>View</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices that enable a user |<br /> | | | to choose how an object is presented, how |<br /> | | | much information is presented, what order |<br /> | | | it is presented in, and other choices |<br /> | | | related to the way an object is presented. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | visible | | <i>Describe</i> <i>the</i> <i>visual</i> <i>cue</i> <i>and</i> <i>tell</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | cue | | <i>what</i> <i>it</i> <i>indicates.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | wait | | <i>A</i> <i>pointer</i> <i>that</i> <i>indicates</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> <i>computer</i> |<br /> | pointer | | <i>is</i> <i>performing</i> <i>a</i> <i>process</i> <i>and</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> <i>user</i> |<br /> | | | <i>cannot</i> <i>interact</i> <i>with</i> <i>the</i> <i>part</i> <i>of</i> <i>the</i> |<br /> | | | <i>underlying</i> <i>window</i> <i>that</i> <i>the</i> <i>wait</i> <i>pointer</i> <i>is</i> |<br /> | | | <i>positioned</i> <i>over.</i> |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | window | window | An area with visible boundaries that |<br /> | | | presents a view of an object or with which |<br /> | | | a user conducts a dialog with a computer |<br /> | | | system. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Windows</b> | <b>Windows</b> | A choice on a menu bar that provides |<br /> | | | access to other choices with which users |<br /> | | | can manage all of the open windows on |<br /> | | | their system that are associated with the |<br /> | | | product. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | <b>Window</b> | <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> | A choice that presents a list of all of |<br /> | <b>list</b> | | the open windows associated with the |<br /> | | | window from which the <b>Window</b> <b>list</b> choice |<br /> | | | was selected. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | window | window title | The area on a title bar that contains a |<br /> | title | | short description of the contents of the |<br /> | | | window. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | work area | work area | A container used to group windows and |<br /> | | | objects to perform a task. Users can |<br /> | | | modify sample work areas to suit their own |<br /> | | | needs. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /> | workplace | workplace | A container that fills the entire screen |<br /> | | | and holds all of the objects that make up |<br /> | | | the user interface. |<br /> |____________|______________|____________________________________________|<br /></pre> 15385 15386 15387 15388 15389 15390 15391 15392 15393 15394 <pre></pre> 15395 15396 15397 15398 15399 15400 15401 15402 15403 15404 <hr /> 15405 15406 15407 15408 15409 <h1><a id="HDRGLOSS" name="HDRGLOSS">BACK_1 15410 Glossary</a></h1> 15411 15412 15413 15414 15415 15416 15417 15418 15419 15420 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This glossary is intended to be used by the reader of this book as a<br />reference to the terminology contained herein. For CUA terms and<br />definitions that can be used in product glossaries, refer to the <cite>CUA</cite><br /><cite>Reference.</cite> 15421 <br /><br /><a name="GLS action choice"> <b>action</b> <b>choice</b>. A choice that immediately begins to process a request made</a><br />by a user or immediately applies settings to an object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS application"> <b>application</b>. A collection of related components with which a user</a><br />performs a task.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS audible cue"> <b>audible</b> <b>cue</b>. A sound generated by the computer to draw a user's attention</a><br />to, or provide feedback about, an event or state of the computer. Audible<br />cues enhance and reinforce visible cues.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS automatic selection"> <b>automatic</b> <b>selection</b>. A selection technique in which moving the keyboard</a><br />cursor automatically changes the current selection. Automatic selection<br />is provided as a convenience so that a user does not have to select an<br />object explicitly.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS border"> <b>border</b>. A visual indication of the boundaries of a window.</a> 15422 <br /><br /><a name="GLS button"> <b>button</b>. (1) A mechanism on a pointing device, such as a mouse, used to</a><br />request or initiate an action or a process. (2) A graphical device that<br />identifies a choice. (3) A graphical mechanism that, when selected,<br />performs a visible action. For example, when a user clicks on a list<br />button, a list of choices appears.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS cascaded menu"> <b>cascaded</b> <b>menu</b>. A menu that appears from, and contains choices related to,</a><br />a cascading choice in another menu. Cascaded menus are used to reduce the<br />length of a pull-down menu or a pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS cascading choice"> <b>cascading</b> <b>choice</b>. A choice on a menu that leads to a cascaded menu</a><br />containing related choices. A cascading choice is indicated by a<br />rightward-pointing arrow (ÿ) to the right of the choice.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS check box"> <b>check</b> <b>box</b>. A square box with associated text that represents a choice.</a><br />When a user selects the choice, an "X" appears in the check box to<br />indicate that the choice is selected. The user can clear the check box by<br />selecting the choice again, thereby canceling the selection.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS check mark"> <b>check</b> <b>mark</b>. A character (&check.) that indicates that a settings choice</a><br />is active.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS choice"> <b>choice</b>. Text or graphics that a user can select. Examples of choices</a><br />are: push buttons, radio buttons, and menu items. There are three kinds<br />of choices: action, routing, and settings. Choices appear in menus, on<br />push buttons, and in fields, for example a field of radio buttons.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS chord"> <b>chord</b>. To press more than one button on a pointing device while the</a><br />pointer is within the limits that the user has specified for the operating<br />environment.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS class"> <b>class</b>. See <i>object</i> <i>class.</i></a> 15423 <br /><br /><a name="GLS class hierarchy"> <b>class</b> <b>hierarchy</b>. A collection of object classes organized to indicate the</a><br />other classes from which they have inherited various attributes.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS click"> <b>click</b>. To press and release a button on a pointing device without moving</a><br />the pointer off of the object or choice.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS clipboard"> <b>clipboard</b>. An area of storage provided by the system to hold data</a><br />temporarily.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS combination box"> <b>combination</b> <b>box</b>. A control that combines the functions of an entry field</a><br />and a list box. A combination box contains a list of objects that a user<br />can scroll through and select from to complete the entry field.<br />Alternatively, a user can type text directly into the entry field.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS composite object"> <b>composite</b> <b>object</b>. An object that contains other objects, usually of a</a><br />different type. For example, a document object that contains not only<br />text, but graphics or image objects that may each be separate objects.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS composed view"> <b>composed</b> <b>view</b>. A view of an object in which relationships of the parts</a><br />contribute to the overall meaning. Composed views are provided primarily<br />for data objects.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS container object"> <b>container</b> <b>object</b>. An object whose specific purpose is to hold other</a><br />objects. A folder is an example of a container object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS containment"> <b>containment</b>. The principle that objects hold other objects and can be</a><br />held by other objects.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS contents view"> <b>contents</b> <b>view</b>. A view of an object that shows the contents of the object</a><br />in list form. Contents views are provided for container objects and for<br />any object that has container behavior, for example, a device object such<br />as a printer. The two types of contents views are the icons view and the<br />details view.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS controls"> <b>controls</b>. Visual user-interface components that allow a user to interact</a><br />with data. Controls are usually identified by text, for example,<br />headings, labels in push buttons, field prompts, and titles in windows.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS current-setting indicator"> <b>current-setting</b> <b>indicator</b>. A visible indication that a choice is active</a><br />or inactive, for example the "X" that appears in a check box when it is<br />selected.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS cursor"> <b>cursor</b>. A visible indication of the position where user interaction with</a><br />the keyboard will appear. The keyboard cursor can be either the selection<br />cursor or the text cursor.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS data object"> <b>data</b> <b>object</b>. An object whose primary purpose is to convey information,</a><br />such as text, graphics, audio, or video. A newsletter is an example of a<br />data object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS deselection"> <b>deselection</b>. The process of removing selection from a previously selected</a><br />object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS details view"> <b>details</b> <b>view</b>. A standard contents view in which a small icon is combined</a><br />with text to provide descriptive information about an object. The text is<br />arranged in rows and columns so that there is one row for each object and<br />one column for each type of descriptive information displayed.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS device object"> <b>device</b> <b>object</b>. An object that provides a means for communication between</a><br />a computer and another piece of equipment. A printer and an electronic<br />mail out-basket are examples of device objects.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS dialog"> <b>dialog</b>. The interaction between a user and a computer.</a> 15424 <br /><br /><a name="GLS direct manipulation"> <b>direct</b> <b>manipulation</b>. A set of techniques that allow a user to work with</a><br />an object by dragging it with a pointing device or interacting with its<br />pop-up menu.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS double-click"> <b>double-click</b>. To press and release a button on a pointing device twice</a><br />while a pointer is within the limits that the user has specified for the<br />operating environment.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS drag"> <b>drag</b>. To use a pointing device to move or copy an object. For example, a</a><br />user can drag a window border to make it larger. To drag something, a<br />user presses and holds a button on the pointing device while moving the<br />pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS drag and drop"> <b>drag</b> <b>and</b> <b>drop</b>. To directly manipulate an object by moving it and placing</a><br />it somewhere else using a pointing device.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS drop-down combination box"> <b>drop-down</b> <b>combination</b> <b>box</b>. A combination box in which the list is hidden</a><br />until a user takes an action to make it visible.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS drop-down list"> <b>drop-down</b> <b>list</b>. A control that is a variation of a list box. A drop-down</a><br />list only displays one item until the user takes an action to display the<br />other objects or choices.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS emphasis"> <b>emphasis</b>. Highlighting, color change, or other visible indication of the</a><br />condition of an object or choice and the effect of that condition on a<br />user's ability to interact with that object or choice. Emphasis can also<br />give a user additional information about the state of an object or choice.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS entry field"> <b>entry</b> <b>field</b>. A control into which a user places text. Its boundaries</a><br />are usually indicated. Entry fields can scroll if more information is<br />available than is currently visible.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS exception"> <b>exception</b>. An event or situation that prevents, or could prevent, an</a><br />action requested by a user from being completed in a manner that the user<br />would expect. Exceptions occur when a product is unable to interpret a<br />user's input.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS explicit selection"> <b>explicit</b> <b>selection</b>. A type of selection in which users expressly identify</a><br />the item or items that they want to select.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS extended selection"> <b>extended</b> <b>selection</b>. A type of selection optimized for the selection of a</a><br />single object. A user can extend selection to more than one object, if<br />required.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS field"> <b>field</b>. An identifiable area in a window, for example an entry field into</a><br />which a user can type text, or a field of radio buttons from which a user<br />can select one choice in the field.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS field prompt"> <b>field</b> <b>prompt</b>. Text that identifies a field, such as an entry field or a</a><br />field of check boxes.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS folder"> <b>folder</b>. A container used to organize objects.</a> 15425 <br /><br /><a name="GLS graphical user interface"> <b>graphical</b> <b>user</b> <b>interface</b>. A type of user interface that takes advantage</a><br />of high-resolution graphics. In common usage, a graphical user interface<br />includes a combination of graphics, the object-action paradigm, the use of<br />pointing devices, menu bars and other menus, overlapping windows, and<br />icons.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS group heading"> <b>group</b> <b>heading</b>. A heading that identifies a set of related fields.</a> 15426 <br /><br /><a name="GLS help view"> <b>help</b> <b>view</b>. A view of an object that provides information to assist users</a><br />in working with that object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS hide button"> <b>hide</b> <b>button</b>. A button on a title bar that a user clicks on to remove a</a><br />window from the workplace without closing the window. When the window is<br />hidden, the state of window, as represented in the window list, changes.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS I-beam pointer"> <b>I-beam</b> <b>pointer</b>. A pointer, shaped like a steel girder, that indicates</a><br />that the pointer is over an area where text can be typed.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS icon"> <b>icon</b>. A graphical representation of an object, consisting of an image,</a><br />image background, and a label.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS icons view"> <b>icons</b> <b>view</b>. A standard contents view in which each object contained in a</a><br />container object is displayed as an icon.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS implicit selection"> <b>implicit</b> <b>selection</b>. A type of selection in which a user does not</a><br />expressly select the item on which an action will be taken, but still has<br />access to the actions available for the item.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS inactive window"> <b>inactive</b> <b>window</b>. A window that cannot receive keyboard input at a given</a><br />moment.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS information area"> <b>information</b> <b>area</b>. A specific part of a window in which information about</a><br />the object or choice that the cursor is on is displayed. The information<br />area can also contain a message about the completion of a process.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS inheritance"> <b>inheritance</b>. The principle that objects acquire attributes from other</a><br />classes of objects.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS keys help"> <b>keys</b> <b>help</b>. A type of help information that lists all the key assignments</a><br />for an object or a product.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS list box"> <b>list</b> <b>box</b>. A control that contains a list of objects or settings choices</a><br />that a user can select.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS manipulation button"> <b>manipulation</b> <b>button</b>. The button on a pointing device a user presses to</a><br />directly manipulate an object. For example mouse button 2 is the default<br />manipulation button on a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS maximize button"> <b>maximize</b> <b>button</b>. A button on the rightmost part of a title bar that a</a><br />user clicks on to enlarge the window to its largest possible size.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS menu"> <b>menu</b>. A list of choices that can be applied to an object. A menu can</a><br />contain choices that are not available for selection in certain contexts.<br />Those choices are indicated by reduced contrast.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS menu bar"> <b>menu</b> <b>bar</b>. The area near the top of a window, below the title bar and</a><br />above the rest of the window, that contains routing choices that provide<br />access to pull-down menus.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS menu-bar choice"> <b>menu-bar</b> <b>choice</b>. A graphical or textual item on a menu bar that provides</a><br />access to pull-down menus which contain choices that can be applied to an<br />object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS menu choice"> <b>menu</b> <b>choice</b>. A graphical or textual item on a menu. A user selects a</a><br />menu choice to work with an object in some way.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS message"> <b>message</b>. Information not requested by a user but displayed by a product</a><br />or application in response to an unexpected event, or when something<br />undesirable could occur.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS metaphor"> <b>metaphor</b>. A word, phrase, or visual representation that denotes or</a><br />depicts one object or idea but suggests a likeness or analogy with another<br />object or idea.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS minimize button"> <b>minimize</b> <b>button</b>. A button, located next to the rightmost button in a</a><br />title bar, that reduces the window to its smallest possible size and<br />removes all the windows associated with that window from the screen.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS mode"> <b>mode</b>. A method of operation in which the actions that are available to a</a><br />user are determined by the state of the system.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS model"> <b>model</b>. The conceptual and operational understanding that a person has</a><br />about something.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS mouse"> <b>mouse</b>. A commonly used pointing device that has one or more buttons that</a><br />a user presses to interact with a computer system.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS mouse button"> <b>mouse</b> <b>button</b>. A mechanism on a mouse pointing device used to select</a><br />choices, initiate actions, or manipulate objects with the pointer. The<br />button makes a "clicking" sound when pressed and released.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS multiple selection"> <b>multiple</b> <b>selection</b>. A selection technique in which a user can select any</a><br />number of objects, or not select any.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS notebook"> <b>notebook</b>. A graphical representation that resembles a bound notebook that</a><br />contains pages separated into sections by tabbed divider pages. A user<br />can turn the pages of a notebook to move from one section to another.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object"> <b>object</b>. A visual component of a user interface that a user can work with</a><br />to perform a task. An object can appear as text or an icon.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object-action paradigm"> <b>object-action</b> <b>paradigm</b>. A pattern for interaction in which a user selects</a><br />an object and then selects an action to apply to that object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object class"> <b>object</b> <b>class</b>. A categorization or grouping of objects that share similar</a><br />behaviors and characteristics.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object decomposition"> <b>object</b> <b>decomposition</b>. The process of breaking an object into its</a><br />component parts.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object hierarchy"> <b>object</b> <b>hierarchy</b>. A way of illustrating relationships among objects.</a><br />Each object that appears in a level below another object is an example of<br />the upper object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object inheritance"> <b>object</b> <b>inheritance</b>. <i>See</i> inheritance.</a> 15427 <br /><br /><a name="GLS object orientation"> <b>object</b> <b>orientation</b>. An orientation in a user interface in which a user's</a><br />attention is directed toward the objects the user works with to perform a<br />task.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object-oriented programming"> <b>object-oriented</b> <b>programming</b>. A type of programming in which code is</a><br />divided into modules called "objects" that communicate with each other by<br />passing messages.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object-oriented user interface"> <b>object-oriented</b> <b>user</b> <b>interface</b>. A type of user interface that implements</a><br />the object-action paradigm.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object subclass"> <b>object</b> <b>subclass</b>. An object created from another object and from which the</a><br />properties of the original object are inherited.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS object superclass"> <b>object</b> <b>superclass</b>. The object from which subclass objects are created.</a><br />The properties of the superclass object are inherited by the subclass<br />object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS one-based selection"> <b>one-based</b> <b>selection</b>. A scope of selection in which one item within the</a><br />scope must always be selected.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS pane"> <b>pane</b>. One of the separate areas in a split window.</a> 5825 15428 <br /><br /><a name="GLS paradigm"> <b>paradigm</b>. An example, pattern, or model.</a> 5826 <br /><br /><a name="GLS pointer"> <b>pointer</b>. A visible cue, usually in the shape of an arrow, that a user can</a><br />move with a pointing device. Users place the pointer over objects they<br />want to work with.<br /><br /><br /><a 5827 name="GLS pointing device"> <b>pointing</b> <b>device</b>. A device, such as a mouse, trackball, or joystick, used</a><br />to move a pointer on the screen.<br /><br /><br /><a 5828 name="GLS pop-up menu"> <b>pop-up</b> <b>menu</b>. A menu that, when requested, is displayed next to the object</a><br />it is associated with. It contains choices appropriate for a given object<br />or set of objects in their current context.<br /><br /><br /><a 5829 name="GLS primary window"> <b>primary</b> <b>window</b>. A window in which the main interaction between a user and</a><br />an object takes place.<br /><br /><br /><a 5830 name="GLS progress indicator"> <b>progress</b> <b>indicator</b>. One or more controls used to inform a user about the</a><br />progress of a process.<br /><br /><br /><a 5831 name="GLS properties"> <b>properties</b>. The particular characteristics and attributes of an object.</a> 5832 <br /><br /><a name="GLS pull-down menu"> <b>pull-down</b> <b>menu</b>. A menu that extends from a selected choice on a menu bar</a><br />or from the system-menu symbol. The choices in a pull-down menu are<br />related to one another in some manner.<br /><br /><br /><a 5833 name="GLS push button"> <b>push</b> <b>button</b>. A button, labeled with text, graphics, or both, that</a><br />represents an action that will be initiated when a user selects it.<br /><br /><br /><a 5834 name="GLS radio button"> <b>radio</b> <b>button</b>. A circle with text beside it. Radio buttons are combined</a><br />to show a user a fixed set of choices from which the user can select one.<br />The circle becomes partially filled when a choice is selected.<br /><br /><br /><a 5835 name="GLS read-only field"> <b>read-only</b> <b>field</b>. A variation of an entry field into which a user cannot</a><br />type or otherwise place text to replace the existing information. The<br />information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be<br />automatically calculated by the product containing the read-only field.<br /><br /><br /><a 5836 name="GLS reflection"> <b>reflection</b>. An object that is represented by more than one icon. If a</a><br />user changes an object that is a reflection, all other reflections of the<br />object are changed. If a user deletes a reflection, other reflections of<br />the object are not necessarily deleted.<br /><br /><br /><a 5837 name="GLS routing choice"> <b>routing</b> <b>choice</b>. A choice that displays a pull-down menu, a cascaded menu,</a><br />or a window containing additional choices.<br /><br /><br /><a 5838 name="GLS scope of selection"> <b>scope</b> <b>of</b> <b>selection</b>. Any area in which the selection of one item can</a><br />affect the selection of another item.<br /><br /><br /><a 5839 name="GLS screen"> <b>screen</b>. The physical surface of a display device upon which information</a><br />is shown to users.<br /><br /><br /><a 5840 name="GLS scroll bar"> <b>scroll</b> <b>bar</b>. A window component that shows a user that more information is</a><br />available in a particular direction and can be scrolled into view. Scroll<br />bars can be either horizontal or vertical.<br /><br /><br /><a 5841 name="GLS scroll box"> <b>scroll</b> <b>box</b>. The part of a scroll bar that indicates the position of the</a><br />visible information relative to the total amount of information available<br />in a window. A user clicks on a scroll box with a pointing device and<br />manipulates it to see information that is not currently visible.<br /><br /><br /><a 5842 name="GLS secondary window"> <b>secondary</b> <b>window</b>. A window that contains information that is dependent on</a><br />information in a primary window and is used to supplement the interaction<br />in the primary window.<br /><br /><br /><a 5843 name="GLS selection"> <b>selection</b>. The act of explicitly identifying one or more objects to which</a><br />a subsequent choice will apply.<br /><br /><br /><a 5844 name="GLS selection button"> <b>selection</b> <b>button</b>. The button on a pointing device that a user presses to</a><br />select an object. For example, mouse button 1 is the default selection<br />button on a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><a 5845 name="GLS selection cursor"> <b>selection</b> <b>cursor</b>. A keyboard cursor, in the shape of a dotted outline</a><br />box, that moves as users indicate the choice they want to interact with.<br /><br /><br /><a 5846 name="GLS selection technique"> <b>selection</b> <b>technique</b>. The method by which users indicate items on the</a><br />interface that they want to work with.<br /><br /><br /><a 5847 name="GLS settings choice"> <b>settings</b> <b>choice</b>. A type of choice that sets characteristics of objects or</a><br />displays identifying characteristics of objects.<br /><br /><br /><a 5848 name="GLS settings view"> <b>settings</b> <b>view</b>. A view of an object that provides a way to display the</a><br />parameters and options associated with the object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5849 name="GLS single selection"> <b>single</b> <b>selection</b>. A selection technique in which a user selects one, and</a><br />only one, item at a time.<br /><br /><br /><a 5850 name="GLS shortcut key"> <b>shortcut</b> <b>key</b>. A key or combination of keys assigned to a menu choice that</a><br />initiates that choice, even if the associated menu is not currently<br />displayed.<br /><br /><br /><a 5851 name="GLS slider"> <b>slider</b>. A visual component of a user interface that represents a quantity</a><br />and its relationship to the range of possible values for that quantity. A<br />user can also change the value of the quantity.<br /><br /><br /><a 5852 name="GLS slider arm"> <b>slider</b> <b>arm</b>. The visual indicator in the slider that a user can move to</a><br />change the numerical value.<br /><br /><br /><a 5853 name="GLS slider button"> <b>slider</b> <b>button</b>. A button on a slider that a user clicks on to move the</a><br />slider arm one increment in a particular direction, as indicated by the<br />directional arrow on the button.<br /><br /><br /><a 5854 name="GLS Sort"> <b>Sort</b>. A choice that arranges the objects in a view into a specified</a><br />order.<br /><br /><br /><a 5855 name="GLS source object"> <b>source</b> <b>object</b>. An object that is the source of a direct-manipulation</a><br />operation; for example, if a user drags a document to a printer to print<br />it, the document is the source object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5856 name="GLS spin button"> <b>spin</b> <b>button</b>. A control used to display, in sequence, a ring of related</a><br />but mutually exclusive choices. It contains a field that can accept user<br />input, which allows a user to make a selection by typing a valid choice,<br />or a field that can display a value that the user can merely accept. The<br />user can change the value by spinning through the ring of choices.<br /><br /><br /><a 5857 name="GLS split box"> <b>split</b> <b>box</b>. A box in the scroll bar of a window that a user can interact</a><br />with to split a window into separate panes.<br /><br /><br /><a 5858 name="GLS status area"> <b>status</b> <b>area</b>. A part of a window where information appears that shows the</a><br />state of an object or the state of a particular view of an object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5859 name="GLS system menu"> <b>system</b> <b>menu</b>. A menu that appears from the system-menu symbol in the</a><br />leftmost part of a title bar. It contains choices that affect the window.<br /><br /><br /><a 5860 name="GLS system-menu symbol"> <b>system-menu</b> <b>symbol</b>. A symbol (shaped like a Spacebar) in the leftmost</a><br />corner of a title bar that gives a user access to choices that affect the<br />window or the view it contains.<br /><br /><br /><a 5861 name="GLS tabbed divider page"> <b>tabbed</b> <b>divider</b> <b>page</b>. A graphical representation of a tabbed page in a</a><br />notebook. Tabbed divider pages separate sections of the notebook.<br /><br /><br /><a 5862 name="GLS target object"> <b>target</b> <b>object</b>. The object that is the target of a direct-manipulation</a><br />operation; for example, if a user drags a document to a printer to print<br />it, the printer is the target object.<br /><br /><br /><a 5863 name="GLS text cursor"> <b>text</b> <b>cursor</b>. A keyboard cursor used in text that shows a user where typed</a><br />input will appear.<br /><br /><br /><a 5864 name="GLS title bar"> <b>title</b> <b>bar</b>. The area at the top of each window that contains the system</a><br />menu symbol from which the system menu appears, a small icon, a window<br />title, and the window sizing buttons.<br /><br /><br /><a 5865 name="GLS tool palette"> <b>tool</b> <b>palette</b>. A palette containing choices that represent tools. When a</a><br />user selects a choice from the tool palette and moves the pointer into the<br />window, the pointer changes to the shape of the selected choice and the<br />pointing device performs the operation indicated by the pointer. For<br />example, a user might select a "pencil" choice from the tool palette to<br />draw a line in the window.<br /><br /><br /><a 5866 name="GLS touch input"> <b>touch</b> <b>input</b>. An input technique in which the pointing device is a user's</a><br />finger.<br /><br /><br /><a 5867 name="GLS touch pointer"> <b>touch</b> <b>pointer</b>. A kind of pointer that can be provided for touch-input</a><br />environments. A touch pointer indicates to a user which items will be<br />affected by the user's input.<br /><br /><br /><a 5868 name="GLS user interface"> <b>user</b> <b>interface</b>. The area at which a user and an object come together to</a><br />interact. As applied to computers, the ensemble of hardware and software<br />that allows a user to interact with a computer.<br /><br /><br /><a 5869 name="GLS user's conceptual model"> <b>user's</b> <b>conceptual</b> <b>model</b>. The concepts and expectations a person develops</a><br />through experience.<br /><br /><br /><a 5870 name="GLS value set"> <b>value</b> <b>set</b>. A control that allows a user to select one choice from a group</a><br />of mutually exclusive choices. A value set is used primarily for<br />graphical choices.<br /><br /><br /><a 5871 name="GLS view"> <b>view</b>. The form in which an object is presented. There are four basic</a><br />types of views: composed, contents, settings, and help.<br /><br /><br /><a 5872 name="GLS window"> <b>window</b>. An area with visible boundaries that presents a view of an object</a><br />or with which a user conducts a dialog with a computer system.<br /><br /><br /><a 5873 name="GLS window title"> <b>window</b> <b>title</b>. The area on a title bar that contains the name of the</a><br />object or a short description of the contents of the window.<br /><br /><br /><a 5874 name="GLS work area"> <b>work</b> <b>area</b>. A container used to organize objects according to a user's</a><br />tasks. When a user closes a work area, all windows opened from objects<br />contained in the work area are removed from the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><a 5875 name="GLS workplace"> <b>workplace</b>. A container that fills the entire screen and holds all of the</a><br />objects that make up the user interface.<br /><br /><br /><a 5876 name="GLS zero-based selection"> <b>zero-based</b> <b>selection</b>. A selection technique that does not require that</a><br />any items within the scope of selection be selected.<br /></pre> 5877 <hr /> 5878 <h1><a name="HDRBIBLIOG" id="HDRBIBLIOG">BACK_2 15429 <br /><br /><a name="GLS pointer"> <b>pointer</b>. A visible cue, usually in the shape of an arrow, that a user can</a><br />move with a pointing device. Users place the pointer over objects they<br />want to work with.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS pointing device"> <b>pointing</b> <b>device</b>. A device, such as a mouse, trackball, or joystick, used</a><br />to move a pointer on the screen.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS pop-up menu"> <b>pop-up</b> <b>menu</b>. A menu that, when requested, is displayed next to the object</a><br />it is associated with. It contains choices appropriate for a given object<br />or set of objects in their current context.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS primary window"> <b>primary</b> <b>window</b>. A window in which the main interaction between a user and</a><br />an object takes place.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS progress indicator"> <b>progress</b> <b>indicator</b>. One or more controls used to inform a user about the</a><br />progress of a process.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS properties"> <b>properties</b>. The particular characteristics and attributes of an object.</a> 15430 <br /><br /><a name="GLS pull-down menu"> <b>pull-down</b> <b>menu</b>. A menu that extends from a selected choice on a menu bar</a><br />or from the system-menu symbol. The choices in a pull-down menu are<br />related to one another in some manner.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS push button"> <b>push</b> <b>button</b>. A button, labeled with text, graphics, or both, that</a><br />represents an action that will be initiated when a user selects it.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS radio button"> <b>radio</b> <b>button</b>. A circle with text beside it. Radio buttons are combined</a><br />to show a user a fixed set of choices from which the user can select one.<br />The circle becomes partially filled when a choice is selected.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS read-only field"> <b>read-only</b> <b>field</b>. A variation of an entry field into which a user cannot</a><br />type or otherwise place text to replace the existing information. The<br />information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be<br />automatically calculated by the product containing the read-only field.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS reflection"> <b>reflection</b>. An object that is represented by more than one icon. If a</a><br />user changes an object that is a reflection, all other reflections of the<br />object are changed. If a user deletes a reflection, other reflections of<br />the object are not necessarily deleted.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS routing choice"> <b>routing</b> <b>choice</b>. A choice that displays a pull-down menu, a cascaded menu,</a><br />or a window containing additional choices.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS scope of selection"> <b>scope</b> <b>of</b> <b>selection</b>. Any area in which the selection of one item can</a><br />affect the selection of another item.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS screen"> <b>screen</b>. The physical surface of a display device upon which information</a><br />is shown to users.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS scroll bar"> <b>scroll</b> <b>bar</b>. A window component that shows a user that more information is</a><br />available in a particular direction and can be scrolled into view. Scroll<br />bars can be either horizontal or vertical.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS scroll box"> <b>scroll</b> <b>box</b>. The part of a scroll bar that indicates the position of the</a><br />visible information relative to the total amount of information available<br />in a window. A user clicks on a scroll box with a pointing device and<br />manipulates it to see information that is not currently visible.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS secondary window"> <b>secondary</b> <b>window</b>. A window that contains information that is dependent on</a><br />information in a primary window and is used to supplement the interaction<br />in the primary window.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS selection"> <b>selection</b>. The act of explicitly identifying one or more objects to which</a><br />a subsequent choice will apply.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS selection button"> <b>selection</b> <b>button</b>. The button on a pointing device that a user presses to</a><br />select an object. For example, mouse button 1 is the default selection<br />button on a two-button mouse.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS selection cursor"> <b>selection</b> <b>cursor</b>. A keyboard cursor, in the shape of a dotted outline</a><br />box, that moves as users indicate the choice they want to interact with.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS selection technique"> <b>selection</b> <b>technique</b>. The method by which users indicate items on the</a><br />interface that they want to work with.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS settings choice"> <b>settings</b> <b>choice</b>. A type of choice that sets characteristics of objects or</a><br />displays identifying characteristics of objects.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS settings view"> <b>settings</b> <b>view</b>. A view of an object that provides a way to display the</a><br />parameters and options associated with the object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS single selection"> <b>single</b> <b>selection</b>. A selection technique in which a user selects one, and</a><br />only one, item at a time.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS shortcut key"> <b>shortcut</b> <b>key</b>. A key or combination of keys assigned to a menu choice that</a><br />initiates that choice, even if the associated menu is not currently<br />displayed.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS slider"> <b>slider</b>. A visual component of a user interface that represents a quantity</a><br />and its relationship to the range of possible values for that quantity. A<br />user can also change the value of the quantity.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS slider arm"> <b>slider</b> <b>arm</b>. The visual indicator in the slider that a user can move to</a><br />change the numerical value.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS slider button"> <b>slider</b> <b>button</b>. A button on a slider that a user clicks on to move the</a><br />slider arm one increment in a particular direction, as indicated by the<br />directional arrow on the button.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS Sort"> <b>Sort</b>. A choice that arranges the objects in a view into a specified</a><br />order.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS source object"> <b>source</b> <b>object</b>. An object that is the source of a direct-manipulation</a><br />operation; for example, if a user drags a document to a printer to print<br />it, the document is the source object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS spin button"> <b>spin</b> <b>button</b>. A control used to display, in sequence, a ring of related</a><br />but mutually exclusive choices. It contains a field that can accept user<br />input, which allows a user to make a selection by typing a valid choice,<br />or a field that can display a value that the user can merely accept. The<br />user can change the value by spinning through the ring of choices.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS split box"> <b>split</b> <b>box</b>. A box in the scroll bar of a window that a user can interact</a><br />with to split a window into separate panes.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS status area"> <b>status</b> <b>area</b>. A part of a window where information appears that shows the</a><br />state of an object or the state of a particular view of an object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS system menu"> <b>system</b> <b>menu</b>. A menu that appears from the system-menu symbol in the</a><br />leftmost part of a title bar. It contains choices that affect the window.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS system-menu symbol"> <b>system-menu</b> <b>symbol</b>. A symbol (shaped like a Spacebar) in the leftmost</a><br />corner of a title bar that gives a user access to choices that affect the<br />window or the view it contains.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS tabbed divider page"> <b>tabbed</b> <b>divider</b> <b>page</b>. A graphical representation of a tabbed page in a</a><br />notebook. Tabbed divider pages separate sections of the notebook.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS target object"> <b>target</b> <b>object</b>. The object that is the target of a direct-manipulation</a><br />operation; for example, if a user drags a document to a printer to print<br />it, the printer is the target object.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS text cursor"> <b>text</b> <b>cursor</b>. A keyboard cursor used in text that shows a user where typed</a><br />input will appear.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS title bar"> <b>title</b> <b>bar</b>. The area at the top of each window that contains the system</a><br />menu symbol from which the system menu appears, a small icon, a window<br />title, and the window sizing buttons.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS tool palette"> <b>tool</b> <b>palette</b>. A palette containing choices that represent tools. When a</a><br />user selects a choice from the tool palette and moves the pointer into the<br />window, the pointer changes to the shape of the selected choice and the<br />pointing device performs the operation indicated by the pointer. For<br />example, a user might select a "pencil" choice from the tool palette to<br />draw a line in the window.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS touch input"> <b>touch</b> <b>input</b>. An input technique in which the pointing device is a user's</a><br />finger.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS touch pointer"> <b>touch</b> <b>pointer</b>. A kind of pointer that can be provided for touch-input</a><br />environments. A touch pointer indicates to a user which items will be<br />affected by the user's input.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS user interface"> <b>user</b> <b>interface</b>. The area at which a user and an object come together to</a><br />interact. As applied to computers, the ensemble of hardware and software<br />that allows a user to interact with a computer.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS user's conceptual model"> <b>user's</b> <b>conceptual</b> <b>model</b>. The concepts and expectations a person develops</a><br />through experience.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS value set"> <b>value</b> <b>set</b>. A control that allows a user to select one choice from a group</a><br />of mutually exclusive choices. A value set is used primarily for<br />graphical choices.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS view"> <b>view</b>. The form in which an object is presented. There are four basic</a><br />types of views: composed, contents, settings, and help.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS window"> <b>window</b>. An area with visible boundaries that presents a view of an object</a><br />or with which a user conducts a dialog with a computer system.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS window title"> <b>window</b> <b>title</b>. The area on a title bar that contains the name of the</a><br />object or a short description of the contents of the window.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS work area"> <b>work</b> <b>area</b>. A container used to organize objects according to a user's</a><br />tasks. When a user closes a work area, all windows opened from objects<br />contained in the work area are removed from the workplace.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS workplace"> <b>workplace</b>. A container that fills the entire screen and holds all of the</a><br />objects that make up the user interface.<br /><br /><br /><a name="GLS zero-based selection"> <b>zero-based</b> <b>selection</b>. A selection technique that does not require that</a><br />any items within the scope of selection be selected.<br /></pre> 15431 15432 15433 15434 15435 15436 15437 15438 15439 15440 <hr /> 15441 15442 15443 15444 15445 <h1><a id="HDRBIBLIOG" name="HDRBIBLIOG">BACK_2 5879 15446 Recommended 5880 15447 Readings</a></h1> 5881 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This bibliography lists selected publications that provide technical<br />information on key principles, examples of user-centered design, and<br />behaviorally oriented discussions of user interface technology and<br />techniques. The first set of references will help you get started with<br />user interface design. The second set, organized by topics, provides more<br />in-depth technical coverage for specialists or those who want to learn<br />more.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5882 <ul> 5883 <li><a href="BACK_2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">BACK_2.1 15448 15449 15450 15451 15452 15453 15454 15455 15456 15457 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br />This bibliography lists selected publications that provide technical<br />information on key principles, examples of user-centered design, and<br />behaviorally oriented discussions of user interface technology and<br />techniques. The first set of references will help you get started with<br />user interface design. The second set, organized by topics, provides more<br />in-depth technical coverage for specialists or those who want to learn<br />more.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 15458 15459 15460 15461 15462 15463 15464 15465 15466 15467 <ul> 15468 15469 15470 15471 15472 15473 <li><a target="_top" href="BACK_2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">BACK_2.1 5884 15474 Getting Started</a></li> 5885 <li><a href="BACK_2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">BACK_2.2 15475 15476 15477 15478 15479 15480 <li><a target="_top" href="BACK_2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">BACK_2.2 5886 15481 User Interface Technology and 5887 15482 Techniques</a></li> 5888 <li><a href="BACK_2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">BACK_2.3 15483 15484 15485 15486 15487 15488 <li><a target="_top" href="BACK_2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">BACK_2.3 5889 15489 Object-Oriented Programming and 5890 15490 Design</a></li> 5891 <li><a href="BACK_2.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">BACK_2.4 15491 15492 15493 15494 15495 15496 <li><a target="_top" href="BACK_2.4?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">BACK_2.4 5892 15497 National Language Support</a></li> 5893 </ul> 5894 <pre></pre> 5895 <hr /> 5896 <h2>BACK_2.1 Getting Started</h2> 5897 <pre></pre> 5898 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Baecker, R. and Buxton, W. (Eds.) <cite>Readings</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite><br /><cite>interaction:</cite> <cite>A</cite> <cite>multi-disciplinary</cite> <cite>approach.</cite> Los Altos, CA: Morgan<br /> Kaufmann Publishers, Inc., 1987.<br /> (This is a good source for learning how to become a part of the<br /> growing, interdisciplinary community of people interested in<br /> human-computer interaction. The appendixes describe key books,<br /> journals, and conferences. The body of the collection consists of<br /> reprints of key papers covering pre-1980s through 1986, including<br /> papers on input devices and output devices, user-centered design, and<br /> socio-technical perspectives.)<br /><br /><br />Heckel, P. <cite>The</cite> <cite>elements</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>friendly</cite> <cite>software</cite> <cite>design.</cite> New York:<br /> Warner Books, 1984.<br /> (Discussion of general principles and guidelines.)<br /><br /><br />Kelly, George. "Man as scientist--Developing models." <cite>A</cite> <cite>theory</cite> <cite>of</cite><br /><cite>personality.</cite> New York: Wm. Norton & Co., Inc., 1963.<br /><br /><br />Norman, D. <cite>The</cite> <cite>psychology</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>everyday</cite> <cite>things.</cite> Hillsdale, NJ: L.<br /> Erlbaum, 1988.<br /> (Very good, useful discussion of cognitive psychology in the context<br /> of understanding human-artifact interaction at large.)<br /><br /><br />Rubenstein, R. and Hersch, H. <cite>The</cite> <cite>human</cite> <cite>factor:</cite> <cite>Designing</cite> <cite>computer</cite><br /><cite>systems</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>people.</cite> Massachusetts: Digital Press, 1984.<br /> (Highly recommended, very readable discussion of user-centered design<br /> in its full scope: task analysis, prototyping, empirical evaluating,<br /> interface techniques, and guidelines.)<br /><br /><br />Shneiderman, B. <cite>Designing</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>user</cite> <cite>interface.</cite> Massachusetts:<br /> Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1987.<br /><br /><br />Tufte, Edward R. <cite>Envisioning</cite> <cite>information.</cite> Connecticut: Graphics<br /> Press, 1990.<br /><br /><br />Tufte, Edward R. <cite>The</cite> <cite>visual</cite> <cite>display</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>quantitative</cite> <cite>information.</cite><br />Connecticut: Graphics Press, 1983.<br /></pre> 5899 <pre></pre> 5900 <hr /> 5901 <h2>BACK_2.2 User Interface 15498 15499 15500 15501 15502 15503 15504 15505 15506 15507 </ul> 15508 15509 15510 15511 15512 15513 15514 15515 15516 15517 <pre></pre> 15518 15519 15520 15521 15522 15523 15524 15525 15526 15527 <hr /> 15528 15529 15530 15531 15532 <h2>BACK_2.1 Getting Started</h2> 15533 15534 15535 15536 15537 15538 15539 15540 15541 15542 <pre></pre> 15543 15544 15545 15546 15547 15548 15549 15550 15551 15552 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Baecker, R. and Buxton, W. (Eds.) <cite>Readings</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite><br /><cite>interaction:</cite> <cite>A</cite> <cite>multi-disciplinary</cite> <cite>approach.</cite> Los Altos, CA: Morgan<br /> Kaufmann Publishers, Inc., 1987.<br /> (This is a good source for learning how to become a part of the<br /> growing, interdisciplinary community of people interested in<br /> human-computer interaction. The appendixes describe key books,<br /> journals, and conferences. The body of the collection consists of<br /> reprints of key papers covering pre-1980s through 1986, including<br /> papers on input devices and output devices, user-centered design, and<br /> socio-technical perspectives.)<br /><br /><br />Heckel, P. <cite>The</cite> <cite>elements</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>friendly</cite> <cite>software</cite> <cite>design.</cite> New York:<br /> Warner Books, 1984.<br /> (Discussion of general principles and guidelines.)<br /><br /><br />Kelly, George. "Man as scientist--Developing models." <cite>A</cite> <cite>theory</cite> <cite>of</cite><br /><cite>personality.</cite> New York: Wm. Norton & Co., Inc., 1963.<br /><br /><br />Norman, D. <cite>The</cite> <cite>psychology</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>everyday</cite> <cite>things.</cite> Hillsdale, NJ: L.<br /> Erlbaum, 1988.<br /> (Very good, useful discussion of cognitive psychology in the context<br /> of understanding human-artifact interaction at large.)<br /><br /><br />Rubenstein, R. and Hersch, H. <cite>The</cite> <cite>human</cite> <cite>factor:</cite> <cite>Designing</cite> <cite>computer</cite><br /><cite>systems</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>people.</cite> Massachusetts: Digital Press, 1984.<br /> (Highly recommended, very readable discussion of user-centered design<br /> in its full scope: task analysis, prototyping, empirical evaluating,<br /> interface techniques, and guidelines.)<br /><br /><br />Shneiderman, B. <cite>Designing</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>user</cite> <cite>interface.</cite> Massachusetts:<br /> Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1987.<br /><br /><br />Tufte, Edward R. <cite>Envisioning</cite> <cite>information.</cite> Connecticut: Graphics<br /> Press, 1990.<br /><br /><br />Tufte, Edward R. <cite>The</cite> <cite>visual</cite> <cite>display</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>quantitative</cite> <cite>information.</cite><br />Connecticut: Graphics Press, 1983.<br /></pre> 15553 15554 15555 15556 15557 15558 15559 15560 15561 15562 <pre></pre> 15563 15564 15565 15566 15567 15568 15569 15570 15571 15572 <hr /> 15573 15574 15575 15576 15577 <h2>BACK_2.2 User Interface 5902 15578 Technology and Techniques</h2> 5903 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The references cited in the "Getting Started" section survey many user<br />interface technologies and techniques. The references in this section<br />cover key technologies and techniques in more depth.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J., Smith-Kerker, P., Ford, J., and Mazur, S. "The minimal<br />manual." <cite>Human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> 3(2), 1987-1988. 123-154.<br /><br /><br />Doheny-Farina, S. (Ed.) <cite>Effective</cite> <cite>documentation:</cite> <cite>What</cite> <cite>we</cite> <cite>have</cite> <cite>learned</cite><br /><cite>from</cite> <cite>research.</cite> Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press, 1988.<br /><br /><br />Foley, J. D., Wallace, V. L., and Chan, P. "The human factors of<br />computer graphics interaction techniques." <cite>IEEE</cite> <cite>computer</cite> <cite>graphics</cite> <cite>and</cite><br /><cite>applications,</cite> November 1984: 13-48.<br /><br /><br />Helander, M. (Ed.) <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite><br />North-Holland: Elsevier Science Publishers, 1988.<br />(Very comprehensive and useful collection covering nearly all major<br />areas of human-computer interaction, including many chapters on<br />specific user interface technology and techniques, aspects of task<br />analysis, organizational impact of computer technology, software<br />engineering tools, cognitive psychology, user-centered design and<br />evaluation methods. The following list summarizes some chapters<br />dealing with interface techniques:<br /><br /><br />Billingsley, P. "Taking panes: Issues in the design of windowing<br />systems." (Chapter 19)<br />Elkerton, J. "On-line aiding for human-computer interfaces."<br />(Chapter 16)<br />Greenstein, J. and Arnaut, L. "Input devices." (Chapter 22)<br />Ogden, W. "Using natural language interfaces." (Chapter 13)<br />Smith, S. "Standards versus guidelines for designing user<br />interface software." (Chapter 40)<br />Tullis, T. "Screen design." (Chapter 18)<br />Verplank. W. "Graphic challenges in designing object-oriented<br />user interfaces." (Chapter 17)<br />Wright, P. "Issues of content and presentation in document<br />design." (Chapter 28)<br />Ziegler, J. and Fahnrich, K. "Direct manipulation." (Chapter 6))<br /><br /><br />Hutchins, E. L., Hollan, J. D., and Norman, D. A. "Direct<br />manipulation interfaces." In <cite>User-centered</cite> <cite>system</cite> <cite>design:</cite> <cite>New</cite><br /><cite>perspectives</cite> <cite>on</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. D. A. Norman and S. W.<br /> Draper. New York: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1986. 87-124.<br /><br /><br />International Business Machines Corporation. <cite>Icon</cite> <cite>reference</cite> <cite>book.</cite><br />SC34-4348-00.<br /><br /><br />Smith, D., Irby, C., Kimball, R., and Verplank, W. "Designing the<br />Star user interface." <cite>Byte.</cite> 7(4), April 1983. 242-282.<br /><br /><br />Thorell, L. G. and Smith, W. J. <cite>Using</cite> <cite>computer</cite> <cite>color</cite> <cite>effectively:</cite> <cite>An</cite><br /><cite>illustrated</cite> <cite>reference.</cite> Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1990.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 5904 <ul> 5905 <li><a href="BACK_2.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">BACK_2.2.1 15579 15580 15581 15582 15583 15584 15585 15586 15587 15588 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The references cited in the "Getting Started" section survey many user<br />interface technologies and techniques. The references in this section<br />cover key technologies and techniques in more depth.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J., Smith-Kerker, P., Ford, J., and Mazur, S. "The minimal<br />manual." <cite>Human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> 3(2), 1987-1988. 123-154.<br /><br /><br />Doheny-Farina, S. (Ed.) <cite>Effective</cite> <cite>documentation:</cite> <cite>What</cite> <cite>we</cite> <cite>have</cite> <cite>learned</cite><br /><cite>from</cite> <cite>research.</cite> Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press, 1988.<br /><br /><br />Foley, J. D., Wallace, V. L., and Chan, P. "The human factors of<br />computer graphics interaction techniques." <cite>IEEE</cite> <cite>computer</cite> <cite>graphics</cite> <cite>and</cite><br /><cite>applications,</cite> November 1984: 13-48.<br /><br /><br />Helander, M. (Ed.) <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite><br />North-Holland: Elsevier Science Publishers, 1988.<br />(Very comprehensive and useful collection covering nearly all major<br />areas of human-computer interaction, including many chapters on<br />specific user interface technology and techniques, aspects of task<br />analysis, organizational impact of computer technology, software<br />engineering tools, cognitive psychology, user-centered design and<br />evaluation methods. The following list summarizes some chapters<br />dealing with interface techniques:<br /><br /><br />Billingsley, P. "Taking panes: Issues in the design of windowing<br />systems." (Chapter 19)<br />Elkerton, J. "On-line aiding for human-computer interfaces."<br />(Chapter 16)<br />Greenstein, J. and Arnaut, L. "Input devices." (Chapter 22)<br />Ogden, W. "Using natural language interfaces." (Chapter 13)<br />Smith, S. "Standards versus guidelines for designing user<br />interface software." (Chapter 40)<br />Tullis, T. "Screen design." (Chapter 18)<br />Verplank. W. "Graphic challenges in designing object-oriented<br />user interfaces." (Chapter 17)<br />Wright, P. "Issues of content and presentation in document<br />design." (Chapter 28)<br />Ziegler, J. and Fahnrich, K. "Direct manipulation." (Chapter 6))<br /><br /><br />Hutchins, E. L., Hollan, J. D., and Norman, D. A. "Direct<br />manipulation interfaces." In <cite>User-centered</cite> <cite>system</cite> <cite>design:</cite> <cite>New</cite><br /><cite>perspectives</cite> <cite>on</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. D. A. Norman and S. W.<br /> Draper. New York: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1986. 87-124.<br /><br /><br />International Business Machines Corporation. <cite>Icon</cite> <cite>reference</cite> <cite>book.</cite><br />SC34-4348-00.<br /><br /><br />Smith, D., Irby, C., Kimball, R., and Verplank, W. "Designing the<br />Star user interface." <cite>Byte.</cite> 7(4), April 1983. 242-282.<br /><br /><br />Thorell, L. G. and Smith, W. J. <cite>Using</cite> <cite>computer</cite> <cite>color</cite> <cite>effectively:</cite> <cite>An</cite><br /><cite>illustrated</cite> <cite>reference.</cite> Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1990.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br />Subtopics:<br /></pre> 15589 15590 15591 15592 15593 15594 15595 15596 15597 15598 <ul> 15599 15600 15601 15602 15603 15604 <li><a target="_top" href="BACK_2.2.1?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">BACK_2.2.1 5906 15605 User-Centered Design: General 5907 15606 Principles</a></li> 5908 <li><a href="BACK_2.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">BACK_2.2.2 15607 15608 15609 15610 15611 15612 <li><a target="_top" href="BACK_2.2.2?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">BACK_2.2.2 5909 15613 User-Centered Design: Case 5910 15614 Studies</a></li> 5911 <li><a href="BACK_2.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=" target="_top">BACK_2.2.3 15615 15616 15617 15618 15619 15620 <li><a target="_top" href="BACK_2.2.3?SHELF=&DT=19921204095534&CASE=">BACK_2.2.3 5912 15621 Understanding Users and Their 5913 15622 Tasks</a></li> 5914 </ul> 5915 <pre></pre> 5916 <hr /> 5917 <h3><a name="HDRUCDGEN" id="HDRUCDGEN">BACK_2.2.1 15623 15624 15625 15626 15627 15628 15629 15630 15631 15632 </ul> 15633 15634 15635 15636 15637 15638 15639 15640 15641 15642 <pre></pre> 15643 15644 15645 15646 15647 15648 15649 15650 15651 15652 <hr /> 15653 15654 15655 15656 15657 <h3><a id="HDRUCDGEN" name="HDRUCDGEN">BACK_2.2.1 5918 15658 User-Centered 5919 15659 Design: General Principles</a></h3> 5920 <pre></pre> 5921 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following references provide an overview of key principles of<br />user-centered design and usability engineering.<br /><br /><br />Gould, J. and Lewis, C. "Designing for usability: Key principles and<br />what designers think." <cite>Communications</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>ACM.</cite> 28(3), March 1985.<br /> 300-311.<br /><br /><br />Helander, M. (Ed.) <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite><br />North-Holland: Elsevier Science Publishers, 1988.<br />(Cited earlier; in this context see especially:<br /><br /><br />Gould, J. "How to design usable systems." (Chapter 35)<br />Whiteside, J., Bennett, J., and Holtzblatt, K. "Usability<br />engineering: Our experience and evolution." (Chapter 36))<br /><br /><br />Rubenstein, R. and Hersch, H. <cite>The</cite> <cite>human</cite> <cite>factor:</cite> <cite>Designing</cite> <cite>computer</cite><br /><cite>systems</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>people.</cite> Massachusetts: Digital Press, 1984.<br /> (Cited earlier; in this context see especially chapters 2, 3, 4, and<br /> 11)<br /></pre> 5922 <pre></pre> 5923 <hr /> 5924 <h3>BACK_2.2.2 User-Centered 15660 15661 15662 15663 15664 15665 15666 15667 15668 15669 <pre></pre> 15670 15671 15672 15673 15674 15675 15676 15677 15678 15679 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following references provide an overview of key principles of<br />user-centered design and usability engineering.<br /><br /><br />Gould, J. and Lewis, C. "Designing for usability: Key principles and<br />what designers think." <cite>Communications</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>ACM.</cite> 28(3), March 1985.<br /> 300-311.<br /><br /><br />Helander, M. (Ed.) <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite><br />North-Holland: Elsevier Science Publishers, 1988.<br />(Cited earlier; in this context see especially:<br /><br /><br />Gould, J. "How to design usable systems." (Chapter 35)<br />Whiteside, J., Bennett, J., and Holtzblatt, K. "Usability<br />engineering: Our experience and evolution." (Chapter 36))<br /><br /><br />Rubenstein, R. and Hersch, H. <cite>The</cite> <cite>human</cite> <cite>factor:</cite> <cite>Designing</cite> <cite>computer</cite><br /><cite>systems</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>people.</cite> Massachusetts: Digital Press, 1984.<br /> (Cited earlier; in this context see especially chapters 2, 3, 4, and<br /> 11)<br /></pre> 15680 15681 15682 15683 15684 15685 15686 15687 15688 15689 <pre></pre> 15690 15691 15692 15693 15694 15695 15696 15697 15698 15699 <hr /> 15700 15701 15702 15703 15704 <h3>BACK_2.2.2 User-Centered 5925 15705 Design: Case Studies</h3> 5926 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A sampling of case studies in user-centered design, discussed in more<br />depth.<br /><br /><br />Good, M., Whiteside, J., Wixon, D., and Jones, S. "Building a<br />user-derived interface." <cite>Communications</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>ACM.</cite> 27(10), October<br /> 1984. 1032-1043.<br /><br /><br />Gould, J., Boies, S., Levy, S., Richards, J., and Schoonard, J. "The<br />1984 Olympic message system: A test of the behavioral principles of<br />system design." <cite>Communications</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>ACM.</cite> 30(9), September 1987.<br /> 758-769.<br /><br /><br />Percival, L. and Johnson, S. "Network management software usability<br />test design and implementation." <cite>IBM</cite> <cite>systems</cite> <cite>journal.</cite> 25(1), 1986.<br /></pre> 5927 <hr /> 5928 <h3><a name="HDRUNDERST" id="HDRUNDERST">BACK_2.2.3 15706 15707 15708 15709 15710 15711 15712 15713 15714 15715 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />A sampling of case studies in user-centered design, discussed in more<br />depth.<br /><br /><br />Good, M., Whiteside, J., Wixon, D., and Jones, S. "Building a<br />user-derived interface." <cite>Communications</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>ACM.</cite> 27(10), October<br /> 1984. 1032-1043.<br /><br /><br />Gould, J., Boies, S., Levy, S., Richards, J., and Schoonard, J. "The<br />1984 Olympic message system: A test of the behavioral principles of<br />system design." <cite>Communications</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>ACM.</cite> 30(9), September 1987.<br /> 758-769.<br /><br /><br />Percival, L. and Johnson, S. "Network management software usability<br />test design and implementation." <cite>IBM</cite> <cite>systems</cite> <cite>journal.</cite> 25(1), 1986.<br /></pre> 15716 15717 15718 15719 15720 15721 15722 15723 15724 15725 <hr /> 15726 15727 15728 15729 15730 <h3><a id="HDRUNDERST" name="HDRUNDERST">BACK_2.2.3 5929 15731 Understanding 5930 15732 Users and Their Tasks</a></h3> 5931 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following highly selective group of publications discusses users and<br />task analysis at many levels, from computer interaction tasks to broad<br />analyses of organizational change resulting from the introduction of<br />technology. See also the discussions in references cited in<br /><a 5932 href="BACK_2.2.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRUCDGEN">"User-Centered Design: General Principles" in topic BACK_2.2.1</a>, such as<br /> Helander or Rubenstein and Hersh.<br /><br /><br />Blackler, F. and Oborne, D. (Eds.) <cite>Information</cite> <cite>technology</cite> <cite>and</cite> <cite>people:</cite><br /><cite>Designing</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>future.</cite> Leicester, UK: The British Psychological<br /> Society, 1987.<br /> (This collection is wide-ranging, but it can point you to a large<br /> volume of literature outside the USA on task and work analysis.)<br /><br /><br />Brady, L. "User system analysis." In <cite>Human</cite> <cite>factors</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>organizational</cite><br /><cite>design</cite> <cite>and</cite> <cite>management.</cite> Eds. H. Hendrick and O. Brown. North-Holland:<br /> Elsevier Science Publishers, Inc., 1984.<br /> (An example of a paper in a collection of short papers from a<br /> conference on the analysis of work and information technology.)<br /><br /><br />Bullen, C., Bennett, J., and Carlson, E. "A case study of office<br />workstation use." <cite>IBM</cite> <cite>systems</cite> <cite>journal.</cite> 21(3), 1982.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J., Mack, R., and Kellogg, W. "Interface metaphors and user<br />interface design." In <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. M.<br /> Helander. Chapter 3, 67-86.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J. and Reitman Olson, J. "Mental models in human-computer<br />interaction." In <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. M.<br /> Helander. Chapter 2, 45-61.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J. and Rosson, M. B. "Usability specifications as a tool in<br />iterative development." In <cite>Advances</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite><br />Ed. H. Hartson. Norwood, NJ: Ablex Publishing, 1985.<br />(Task analysis from the perspective of setting product objectives that<br />can be tested.)<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J. and Rosson, M. B. "The paradox of the active user." In<br /><cite>Interfacing</cite> <cite>thought:</cite> <cite>Cognitive</cite> <cite>aspects</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite><br />Ed. J. Carroll. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1986.<br /><br /><br />Egan, D. "Individual differences in human-computer interaction." In<br /><cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. M. Helander<br /> North-Holland: Elsevier Science Publishers, 1988. 543-568.<br /><br /><br />Gould, J., Boies, S., Levy, S., Richards, J., and Schoonard, J. "The<br />1984 Olympic message system: A test of the behavioral principles of<br />system design." <cite>Communications</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>ACM.</cite> 30(9), September 1987.<br /> 758-769.<br /> (Cited above; relevant here for discussion of initial field work to<br /> understand users and their requirements.)<br /><br /><br />Lewis, C. and Norman, D. "Designing for error." In <cite>User</cite> <cite>centered</cite><br /><cite>system</cite> <cite>design:</cite> <cite>New</cite> <cite>perspectives</cite> <cite>on</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Eds. D.<br /> Norman and S. Draper. 411-432.<br /><br /><br />Norman, D. "Cognitive engineering." In <cite>User</cite> <cite>centered</cite> <cite>system</cite> <cite>design:</cite><br /><cite>New</cite> <cite>perspectives</cite> <cite>on</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Eds. D. Norman and S.<br /> Draper. Hillsdale, NJ: L. Erlbaum Associates, 1986. 31-61.<br /><br /><br />Percival, L. and Johnson, S. "Network management software usability<br />test design and implementation." <cite>IBM</cite> <cite>systems</cite> <cite>journal.</cite> 25(1), 1986.<br /> (Cited above; relevant here for references to initial field work to<br /> understand users and their requirements.)<br /><br /><br />Potosnak, K. (Panel chair), Hayes, P., Rosson, M. B., Schneider, M.,<br />and Whiteside, J. "Classifying users: A hard look at some<br />controversial issues." <cite>Proceedings</cite> <cite>CHI</cite> <cite>'86</cite> <cite>human</cite> <cite>factors</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>computing</cite><br /><cite>systems.</cite> (Boston, April 13-17, 1986), ACM, New York. 84-88.<br /> (Brief panel discussion of issues; reference section useful.)<br /><br /><br />Regan, E. and O'Conner, B. <cite>Automating</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>office:</cite> <cite>Office</cite> <cite>systems</cite> <cite>and</cite><br /><cite>end-user</cite> <cite>computing.</cite> Chicago, IL: Science Research Associates, Inc.,<br /> 1989.<br /> (Textbook treatment, with focus on office automation; see especially<br /> chapters 17-22 on developing requirements, evaluating technology in<br /> the field.)<br /><br /><br />Reitman Olson, J. "Cognitive analysis of people's use of software."<br />In <cite>Interfacing</cite> <cite>thought:</cite> <cite>Cognitive</cite> <cite>aspects</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite><br /><cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. J. Carroll. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1986.<br /> (Theoretical discussion of similarities and differences between<br /> analysis schemes for low-level computer-implemented tasks, and schemes<br /> for broader analysis of tasks in the workplace. References to<br /> academic literature on task and work analysis.)<br /><br /><br />Rockart, J. and Bullen, C. (Eds.) <cite>The</cite> <cite>rise</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>managerial</cite> <cite>computing:</cite><br /><cite>The</cite> <cite>best</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>Center</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>Information</cite> <cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Research.</cite> Homewood, IL:<br /> Dow Jones-Irwin, 1986.<br /> (Wide-ranging collection of papers on decision support tasks, users<br /> and requirements, including executive support. Lots of pointers into<br /> academic literature.)<br /><br /><br />The following publications provide comprehensive, technical overviews of<br />psychological principles of human-computer and human-machine interaction,<br />from traditional human performance perspectives to more cognitive<br />interpretations.<br /><br /><br />Bailey, R. W. <cite>Human</cite> <cite>performance</cite> <cite>engineering:</cite> <cite>A</cite> <cite>guide</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>system</cite><br /><cite>designers.</cite> New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1982.<br /><br /><br />Boff, K., Kaufman, L., and Thomas, J. <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>perception</cite> <cite>and</cite><br /><cite>human-performance.</cite> <cite>Vol.</cite> <cite>1,</cite> <cite>2</cite> New York: Wiley Publications, 1986.<br /><br /><br />Card, S. K., Moran, T. P., and Newell, A. <cite>The</cite> <cite>psychology</cite> <cite>of</cite><br /><cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> New York: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates,<br /> 1983.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J. (Ed.) <cite>Interfacing</cite> <cite>thought:</cite> <cite>Cognitive</cite> <cite>aspects</cite> <cite>of</cite><br /><cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1986.<br /><br /><br />Kantowitz, B. H. and Sorkin, R. D. <cite>Human</cite> <cite>factors:</cite> <cite>Understanding</cite><br /><cite>people-system</cite> <cite>relationships.</cite> New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1983.<br /><br /><br />Nickerson, R.S. <cite>Using</cite> <cite>computers:</cite> <cite>Human</cite> <cite>factors</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>information</cite><br /><cite>systems.</cite> Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1986.<br /><br /><br />Norman, D. and Draper, S. (Eds.) <cite>User</cite> <cite>centered</cite> <cite>system</cite> <cite>design:</cite> <cite>New</cite><br /><cite>perspectives</cite> <cite>on</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Hillsdale, NJ: L. Erlbaum<br /> Associates, 1986.<br /></pre> 5933 <hr /> 5934 <h2>BACK_2.3 Object-Oriented 15733 15734 15735 15736 15737 15738 15739 15740 15741 15742 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />The following highly selective group of publications discusses users and<br />task analysis at many levels, from computer interaction tasks to broad<br />analyses of organizational change resulting from the introduction of<br />technology. See also the discussions in references cited in<br /><a href="BACK_2.2.1?DT=19921204095534#HDRUCDGEN">"User-Centered Design: General Principles" in topic BACK_2.2.1</a>, such as<br /> Helander or Rubenstein and Hersh.<br /><br /><br />Blackler, F. and Oborne, D. (Eds.) <cite>Information</cite> <cite>technology</cite> <cite>and</cite> <cite>people:</cite><br /><cite>Designing</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>future.</cite> Leicester, UK: The British Psychological<br /> Society, 1987.<br /> (This collection is wide-ranging, but it can point you to a large<br /> volume of literature outside the USA on task and work analysis.)<br /><br /><br />Brady, L. "User system analysis." In <cite>Human</cite> <cite>factors</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>organizational</cite><br /><cite>design</cite> <cite>and</cite> <cite>management.</cite> Eds. H. Hendrick and O. Brown. North-Holland:<br /> Elsevier Science Publishers, Inc., 1984.<br /> (An example of a paper in a collection of short papers from a<br /> conference on the analysis of work and information technology.)<br /><br /><br />Bullen, C., Bennett, J., and Carlson, E. "A case study of office<br />workstation use." <cite>IBM</cite> <cite>systems</cite> <cite>journal.</cite> 21(3), 1982.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J., Mack, R., and Kellogg, W. "Interface metaphors and user<br />interface design." In <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. M.<br /> Helander. Chapter 3, 67-86.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J. and Reitman Olson, J. "Mental models in human-computer<br />interaction." In <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. M.<br /> Helander. Chapter 2, 45-61.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J. and Rosson, M. B. "Usability specifications as a tool in<br />iterative development." In <cite>Advances</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite><br />Ed. H. Hartson. Norwood, NJ: Ablex Publishing, 1985.<br />(Task analysis from the perspective of setting product objectives that<br />can be tested.)<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J. and Rosson, M. B. "The paradox of the active user." In<br /><cite>Interfacing</cite> <cite>thought:</cite> <cite>Cognitive</cite> <cite>aspects</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite><br />Ed. J. Carroll. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1986.<br /><br /><br />Egan, D. "Individual differences in human-computer interaction." In<br /><cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. M. Helander<br /> North-Holland: Elsevier Science Publishers, 1988. 543-568.<br /><br /><br />Gould, J., Boies, S., Levy, S., Richards, J., and Schoonard, J. "The<br />1984 Olympic message system: A test of the behavioral principles of<br />system design." <cite>Communications</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>ACM.</cite> 30(9), September 1987.<br /> 758-769.<br /> (Cited above; relevant here for discussion of initial field work to<br /> understand users and their requirements.)<br /><br /><br />Lewis, C. and Norman, D. "Designing for error." In <cite>User</cite> <cite>centered</cite><br /><cite>system</cite> <cite>design:</cite> <cite>New</cite> <cite>perspectives</cite> <cite>on</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Eds. D.<br /> Norman and S. Draper. 411-432.<br /><br /><br />Norman, D. "Cognitive engineering." In <cite>User</cite> <cite>centered</cite> <cite>system</cite> <cite>design:</cite><br /><cite>New</cite> <cite>perspectives</cite> <cite>on</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Eds. D. Norman and S.<br /> Draper. Hillsdale, NJ: L. Erlbaum Associates, 1986. 31-61.<br /><br /><br />Percival, L. and Johnson, S. "Network management software usability<br />test design and implementation." <cite>IBM</cite> <cite>systems</cite> <cite>journal.</cite> 25(1), 1986.<br /> (Cited above; relevant here for references to initial field work to<br /> understand users and their requirements.)<br /><br /><br />Potosnak, K. (Panel chair), Hayes, P., Rosson, M. B., Schneider, M.,<br />and Whiteside, J. "Classifying users: A hard look at some<br />controversial issues." <cite>Proceedings</cite> <cite>CHI</cite> <cite>'86</cite> <cite>human</cite> <cite>factors</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>computing</cite><br /><cite>systems.</cite> (Boston, April 13-17, 1986), ACM, New York. 84-88.<br /> (Brief panel discussion of issues; reference section useful.)<br /><br /><br />Regan, E. and O'Conner, B. <cite>Automating</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>office:</cite> <cite>Office</cite> <cite>systems</cite> <cite>and</cite><br /><cite>end-user</cite> <cite>computing.</cite> Chicago, IL: Science Research Associates, Inc.,<br /> 1989.<br /> (Textbook treatment, with focus on office automation; see especially<br /> chapters 17-22 on developing requirements, evaluating technology in<br /> the field.)<br /><br /><br />Reitman Olson, J. "Cognitive analysis of people's use of software."<br />In <cite>Interfacing</cite> <cite>thought:</cite> <cite>Cognitive</cite> <cite>aspects</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite><br /><cite>interaction.</cite> Ed. J. Carroll. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1986.<br /> (Theoretical discussion of similarities and differences between<br /> analysis schemes for low-level computer-implemented tasks, and schemes<br /> for broader analysis of tasks in the workplace. References to<br /> academic literature on task and work analysis.)<br /><br /><br />Rockart, J. and Bullen, C. (Eds.) <cite>The</cite> <cite>rise</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>managerial</cite> <cite>computing:</cite><br /><cite>The</cite> <cite>best</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>the</cite> <cite>Center</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>Information</cite> <cite>Systems</cite> <cite>Research.</cite> Homewood, IL:<br /> Dow Jones-Irwin, 1986.<br /> (Wide-ranging collection of papers on decision support tasks, users<br /> and requirements, including executive support. Lots of pointers into<br /> academic literature.)<br /><br /><br />The following publications provide comprehensive, technical overviews of<br />psychological principles of human-computer and human-machine interaction,<br />from traditional human performance perspectives to more cognitive<br />interpretations.<br /><br /><br />Bailey, R. W. <cite>Human</cite> <cite>performance</cite> <cite>engineering:</cite> <cite>A</cite> <cite>guide</cite> <cite>for</cite> <cite>system</cite><br /><cite>designers.</cite> New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1982.<br /><br /><br />Boff, K., Kaufman, L., and Thomas, J. <cite>Handbook</cite> <cite>of</cite> <cite>perception</cite> <cite>and</cite><br /><cite>human-performance.</cite> <cite>Vol.</cite> <cite>1,</cite> <cite>2</cite> New York: Wiley Publications, 1986.<br /><br /><br />Card, S. K., Moran, T. P., and Newell, A. <cite>The</cite> <cite>psychology</cite> <cite>of</cite><br /><cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> New York: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates,<br /> 1983.<br /><br /><br />Carroll, J. (Ed.) <cite>Interfacing</cite> <cite>thought:</cite> <cite>Cognitive</cite> <cite>aspects</cite> <cite>of</cite><br /><cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1986.<br /><br /><br />Kantowitz, B. H. and Sorkin, R. D. <cite>Human</cite> <cite>factors:</cite> <cite>Understanding</cite><br /><cite>people-system</cite> <cite>relationships.</cite> New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1983.<br /><br /><br />Nickerson, R.S. <cite>Using</cite> <cite>computers:</cite> <cite>Human</cite> <cite>factors</cite> <cite>in</cite> <cite>information</cite><br /><cite>systems.</cite> Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1986.<br /><br /><br />Norman, D. and Draper, S. (Eds.) <cite>User</cite> <cite>centered</cite> <cite>system</cite> <cite>design:</cite> <cite>New</cite><br /><cite>perspectives</cite> <cite>on</cite> <cite>human-computer</cite> <cite>interaction.</cite> Hillsdale, NJ: L. Erlbaum<br /> Associates, 1986.<br /></pre> 15743 15744 15745 15746 15747 15748 15749 15750 15751 15752 <hr /> 15753 15754 15755 15756 15757 <h2>BACK_2.3 Object-Oriented 5935 15758 Programming and Design</h2> 5936 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Coad, Peter and Yourdan, Edward. <cite>Object-oriented</cite> <cite>analysis.</cite> West<br /> Nyack, NY: Prentice Hall, 1991.<br /><br /><br />Coad, Peter and Yourdan, Edward. <cite>Object-oriented</cite> <cite>design.</cite> West Nyack,<br /> NY: Prentice Hall, 1991.<br /><br /><br />Cox, Brad J. <cite>Object-oriented</cite> <cite>programming:</cite> <cite>An</cite> <cite>evolutionary</cite> <cite>approach.</cite><br />Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1987.<br /></pre> 5937 <hr /> 5938 <h2>BACK_2.4 National Language 15759 15760 15761 15762 15763 15764 15765 15766 15767 15768 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />Coad, Peter and Yourdan, Edward. <cite>Object-oriented</cite> <cite>analysis.</cite> West<br /> Nyack, NY: Prentice Hall, 1991.<br /><br /><br />Coad, Peter and Yourdan, Edward. <cite>Object-oriented</cite> <cite>design.</cite> West Nyack,<br /> NY: Prentice Hall, 1991.<br /><br /><br />Cox, Brad J. <cite>Object-oriented</cite> <cite>programming:</cite> <cite>An</cite> <cite>evolutionary</cite> <cite>approach.</cite><br />Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1987.<br /></pre> 15769 15770 15771 15772 15773 15774 15775 15776 15777 15778 <hr /> 15779 15780 15781 15782 15783 <h2>BACK_2.4 National Language 5939 15784 Support</h2> 5940 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />You can find the IBM rules and guidelines for supporting translation in<br />the following books:<br /><br /><br /><cite>Designing</cite> <cite>enabled</cite> <cite>products,</cite> <cite>rules</cite> <cite>and</cite> <cite>guidelines,</cite> SE09-8001<br /><br /><br /><cite>National</cite> <cite>language</cite> <cite>support</cite> <cite>reference</cite> <cite>manual</cite>, SE09-8002.<br /></pre> 5941 <hr /> 5942 <pre width="80"><!-- index --><br /></pre> 5943 <h1>INDEX Index</h1> 5944 <pre></pre> 5945 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /></pre> 5946 <pre></pre> 5947 <hr /> 5948 <pre><!-- printpreviewhdr --><br /></pre> 5949 <center><b>IBM 15785 15786 15787 15788 15789 15790 15791 15792 15793 15794 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /><br /><br />You can find the IBM rules and guidelines for supporting translation in<br />the following books:<br /><br /><br /><cite>Designing</cite> <cite>enabled</cite> <cite>products,</cite> <cite>rules</cite> <cite>and</cite> <cite>guidelines,</cite> SE09-8001<br /><br /><br /><cite>National</cite> <cite>language</cite> <cite>support</cite> <cite>reference</cite> <cite>manual</cite>, SE09-8002.<br /></pre> 15795 15796 15797 15798 15799 15800 15801 15802 15803 15804 <hr /> 15805 15806 15807 15808 15809 <pre width="80"><!-- index --><br /></pre> 15810 15811 15812 15813 15814 15815 15816 15817 15818 15819 <h1>INDEX Index</h1> 15820 15821 15822 15823 15824 15825 15826 15827 15828 15829 <pre></pre> 15830 15831 15832 15833 15834 15835 15836 15837 15838 15839 <pre width="80"><!-- * --><br /></pre> 15840 15841 15842 15843 15844 15845 15846 15847 15848 15849 <pre></pre> 15850 15851 15852 15853 15854 15855 15856 15857 15858 15859 <hr /> 15860 15861 15862 15863 15864 <pre><!-- printpreviewhdr --><br /></pre> 15865 15866 15867 15868 15869 15870 15871 15872 15873 15874 <center><b>IBM 5950 15875 Library Server Print Preview</b><br /> 15876 15877 15878 15879 15880 5951 15881 DOCNUM = SC34-4399-00 DATETIME = 12/04/92 09:55:34 BLDVERS = 1.2 5952 15882 TITLE = Object-Oriented Interface Design AUTHOR = COPYR = © 5953 15883 Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1992 PATH = 5954 15884 /home/webapps/epubs/htdocs/book</center> 5955 <hr size="6" /> 15885 15886 15887 15888 15889 15890 15891 15892 15893 15894 <hr size="6" /> 5956 15895 <!-- BEGIN FOOTER --><br /> 5957 <hr noshade="noshade" size="1" /> 5958 <br /> 5959 <br /> 5960 <b>Return to library:</b> 5961 [ <a target="_top" 5962 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/">z/OS</a> 15896 15897 15898 15899 15900 15901 15902 15903 15904 15905 <hr noshade="noshade" size="1" /> 15906 <br /> 15907 15908 15909 15910 15911 15912 <br /> 15913 15914 15915 15916 15917 15918 <b>Return to library:</b> 15919 [ <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/" target="_top">z/OS</a> 5963 15920 | 5964 <a target="_top" 5965 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zose/bkserv/">z/OS.e</a> 5966 | <a target="_top" href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/">OS/390</a> 15921 <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zose/bkserv/" target="_top">z/OS.e</a> 15922 | <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/" target="_top">OS/390</a> 5967 15923 | 5968 <a target="_top" 5969 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/tpf.html">TPF</a> 15924 <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/tpf.html" target="_top">TPF</a> 5970 15925 | 5971 <a target="_top" 5972 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/vse.html">VSE</a> 15926 <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/vse.html" target="_top">VSE</a> 5973 15927 | 5974 <a target="_top" 5975 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/zvm.html">z/VM</a> 5976 | <a target="_top" 5977 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/hw.html">IBM 5978 Hardware</a> | <a target="_top" 5979 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/redbooks.html">S/390 15928 <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/zvm.html" target="_top">z/VM</a> 15929 | <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/hw.html" target="_top">IBM 15930 Hardware</a> | <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/redbooks.html" target="_top">S/390 5980 15931 Redbooks</a> ]<br /> 5981 <b>Glossary:</b> 5982 [ <a target="_top" href="http://www.ibm.com/networking/nsg/nsgmain.htm">IBM 15932 15933 15934 15935 15936 15937 <b>Glossary:</b> 15938 [ <a href="http://www.ibm.com/networking/nsg/nsgmain.htm" target="_top">IBM 5983 15939 terminology</a> 5984 15940 ]<br /> 5985 <b>Publications:</b> 5986 [ <a target="_top" 5987 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/order_books.html">How 5988 to order publications</a> | <a target="_top" 5989 href="http://service5.boulder.ibm.com/pnsrege.nsf/WebMessages/welcomeENUS"> 15941 15942 15943 15944 15945 15946 <b>Publications:</b> 15947 [ <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/bkserv/order_books.html" target="_top">How 15948 to order publications</a> | <a href="http://service5.boulder.ibm.com/pnsrege.nsf/WebMessages/welcomeENUS" target="_top"> 5990 15949 Subscribe to publication updates</a> 5991 15950 ]<br /> 5992 <b>Readers:</b> 5993 [ <a target="_top" 5994 href="http://www.ibm.com/software/office/bkmgr/ilr.html">Download 15951 15952 15953 15954 15955 15956 <b>Readers:</b> 15957 [ <a href="http://www.ibm.com/software/office/bkmgr/ilr.html" target="_top">Download 5995 15958 IBM 5996 Library Reader</a> | <a target="_top" 5997 href="http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html">Download 15959 Library Reader</a> | <a href="http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html" target="_top">Download 5998 15960 Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®</a> 5999 15961 ]<br /> 6000 <b>Contacts:</b> 6001 [ <a target="_top" 6002 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/webqs.html">Contact 6003 z/OS</a> | <a target="_top" 6004 href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/webqs.html">Contact 15962 15963 15964 15965 15966 15967 <b>Contacts:</b> 15968 [ <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/webqs.html" target="_top">Contact 15969 z/OS</a> | <a href="http://www.ibm.com/servers/s390/os390/webqs.html" target="_top">Contact 6005 15970 OS/390</a> ]<br /> 6006 <br /> 6007 <hr noshade="noshade" size="1" /> 6008 <p style="font-family: ARIAL,HELV,HELVETICA; font-size: 8pt;">Adobe, 15971 15972 15973 15974 15975 15976 <br /> 15977 15978 15979 15980 15981 15982 15983 15984 15985 15986 <hr noshade="noshade" size="1" /> 15987 15988 15989 15990 15991 <p style="font-family: ARIAL,HELV,HELVETICA; font-size: 8pt;">Adobe, 6009 15992 the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, and Acrobat 6010 15993 Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated.</p> 15994 15995 15996 15997 15998 6011 15999 <!-- END FOOTER --> 6012 <script language="JavaScript" type="text/javascript"> 16000 16001 16002 16003 16004 <script type="text/javascript" language="JavaScript"> 6013 16005 //<![CDATA[ 6014 <!--6015 function scrollToPoint(){6016 }6017 //-->6018 16006 //]]> 6019 </script> 16007 </script> 16008 </ul> 16009 16010 16011 16012 16013 </div> 16014 16015 16016 16017 6020 16018 </body> 16019 16020 16021 16022 16023 6021 16024 </html>
Note:
See TracChangeset
for help on using the changeset viewer.
